[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025127741A1 - Method for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal using same - Google Patents

Method for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal using same Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025127741A1
WO2025127741A1 PCT/KR2024/020369 KR2024020369W WO2025127741A1 WO 2025127741 A1 WO2025127741 A1 WO 2025127741A1 KR 2024020369 W KR2024020369 W KR 2024020369W WO 2025127741 A1 WO2025127741 A1 WO 2025127741A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
channel
primary
ppdu
link
mld
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/KR2024/020369
Other languages
French (fr)
Korean (ko)
Inventor
김상현
손주형
고건중
곽진삼
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Wilus Institute of Standards and Technology Inc
Original Assignee
Wilus Institute of Standards and Technology Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Wilus Institute of Standards and Technology Inc filed Critical Wilus Institute of Standards and Technology Inc
Publication of WO2025127741A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025127741A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04LTRANSMISSION OF DIGITAL INFORMATION, e.g. TELEGRAPHIC COMMUNICATION
    • H04L5/00Arrangements affording multiple use of the transmission path
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W72/00Local resource management
    • H04W72/04Wireless resource allocation
    • H04W72/044Wireless resource allocation based on the type of the allocated resource
    • H04W72/0453Resources in frequency domain, e.g. a carrier in FDMA
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/04Scheduled access
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • H04W74/0808Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA using carrier sensing, e.g. carrier sense multiple access [CSMA]
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W74/00Wireless channel access
    • H04W74/08Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA
    • H04W74/0808Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA using carrier sensing, e.g. carrier sense multiple access [CSMA]
    • H04W74/0816Non-scheduled access, e.g. ALOHA using carrier sensing, e.g. carrier sense multiple access [CSMA] with collision avoidance
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W76/00Connection management
    • H04W76/10Connection setup
    • H04W76/15Setup of multiple wireless link connections
    • HELECTRICITY
    • H04ELECTRIC COMMUNICATION TECHNIQUE
    • H04WWIRELESS COMMUNICATION NETWORKS
    • H04W84/00Network topologies
    • H04W84/02Hierarchically pre-organised networks, e.g. paging networks, cellular networks, WLAN [Wireless Local Area Network] or WLL [Wireless Local Loop]
    • H04W84/10Small scale networks; Flat hierarchical networks
    • H04W84/12WLAN [Wireless Local Area Networks]

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a channel access procedure in overlapping operating channels.
  • Wireless LAN technology is a technology that allows mobile devices such as smart phones, smart pads, laptop computers, portable multimedia players, and embedded devices to wirelessly connect to the Internet at home, in businesses, or in specific service areas based on short-range wireless communication technology.
  • IEEE 802.11 Since supporting the initial wireless LAN technology using the 2.4 GHz frequency, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11 has commercialized or is developing various technology standards.
  • IEEE 802.11b supports a communication speed of up to 11 Mbps while using the 2.4 GHz band frequency.
  • IEEE 802.11a which was commercialized after IEEE 802.11b, reduces the impact of interference compared to the considerably crowded 2.4 GHz band frequency by using the 5 GHz band frequency instead of the 2.4 GHz band, and improves the communication speed up to 54 Mbps by using OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) technology.
  • IEEE 802.11a has a shorter communication distance than IEEE 802.11b.
  • IEEE 802.11g like IEEE 802.11b, uses the 2.4GHz band to achieve a communication speed of up to 54Mbps and satisfies backward compatibility, which has attracted considerable attention. It is also superior to IEEE 802.11a in terms of communication distance.
  • IEEE 802.11n aims to increase the speed and reliability of networks and to extend the operating range of wireless networks. More specifically, IEEE 802.11n supports high throughput (HT) with a data processing speed of up to 540 Mbps, and is based on MIMO (Multiple Inputs and Multiple Outputs) technology that uses multiple antennas at both the transmitter and receiver to minimize transmission errors and optimize data rates. In addition, this standard can use a coding method that transmits multiple redundant copies to increase data reliability.
  • HT High throughput
  • MIMO Multiple Inputs and Multiple Outputs
  • IEEE 802.11ac supports a wide bandwidth (80MHz to 160MHz) at the 5GHz frequency.
  • IEEE 802.11ac standard is defined only for the 5GHz band, early 11ac chipsets will also support operation in the 2.4GHz band to maintain backward compatibility with existing 2.4GHz band products.
  • the wireless LAN speed of multiple stations will be at least 1Gbps, and the maximum single link speed will be at least 500Mbps.
  • IEEE 802.11ad which transmits data using the 60 GHz band instead of the existing 2.4 GHz/5 GHz.
  • IEEE 802.11ad is a transmission standard that provides a speed of up to 7 Gbps using beamforming technology, and is suitable for high bitrate video streaming such as large-capacity data or uncompressed HD video.
  • the 60 GHz frequency band has a disadvantage in that it has difficulty passing through obstacles, so it can only be used between devices in short distances.
  • the IEEE 802.11ax (High Efficiency WLAN, HEW) standard which is a wireless LAN standard following 802.11ac and 802.11ad, is nearing the development stage to provide high-efficiency and high-performance wireless LAN communication technology in high-density environments where APs and terminals are densely packed.
  • HEW High Efficiency WLAN
  • 802.11ax-based wireless LAN environment high-frequency-efficient communication must be provided indoors and outdoors in the presence of high-density stations and APs (Access Points), and various technologies have been developed to implement this.
  • IEEE 802.11be Extremely High Throughput, EHT
  • EHT Extremely High Throughput
  • ultra-high reliability (UHR) wireless LAN communication technology to overcome reliability issues that have been pointed out as limitations of wireless LAN as a wireless LAN standard after 802.11be.
  • the ultra-high reliability wireless LAN standard is currently being developed with the goal of supporting low latency and low jitter in wireless LAN traffic with a high probability (e.g., 99.9999% or more).
  • the present invention aims to provide a method for improving channel accessibility for overlapping channels.
  • the present invention has a purpose of providing a method for performing a channel access procedure through a non-primary channel rather than a primary channel when the state of the primary channel (or primary channel) is busy.
  • a processor includes a transceiver; and a processor, wherein the processor receives a preamble of an inter-BSS PPDU (Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit) from an OBSS (Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP (Access Point) that is not associated with the wireless communication terminal on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates, the preamble of the inter-BSS PPDU including a TXOP field related to a transmission opportunity (TXOP) duration set by the OBSS AP, and when a specific condition is satisfied, switches the channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to a non-primary channel, wherein the specific condition is whether a length of a remaining OBSS TXOP calculated based on the TXOP field or the duration field is greater than a minimum duration threshold value.
  • inter-BSS PPDU Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit
  • OBSS Overlapping Basic Service Set
  • TXOP transmission opportunity
  • the state of the primary channel is busy by the OBSS AP.
  • the minimum duration threshold is a minimum value for the wireless communication terminal to switch a channel to the non-primary channel.
  • the processor receives a management frame from an AP associated with the wireless communication terminal, wherein the management frame includes list information of adjacent APs.
  • the list information includes BSS color information and/or MAC address of each of the APs.
  • the channel switch to the non-primary channel is performed when the primary channel is occupied by one of the APs.
  • the processor compares the BSS color information or MAC address of the inter-BSS PPDU with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the list information.
  • the processor transmits a primitive from the MAC layer to the PHY layer to perform the channel switch to the non-primary channel.
  • the present invention provides a method including the steps of receiving a PPDU (Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit) from an OBSS (Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP (Access Point) that is not associated with the wireless communication terminal on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates, wherein a preamble of the PPDU includes a TXOP field and a Duration field related to a transmission opportunity (TXOP) duration set by the OBSS AP; and performing channel access by switching a channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to a non-primary channel when a specific condition is satisfied, wherein the specific condition is whether a specific value obtained based on a value indicated by the TXOP field or the Duration field is greater than a minimum duration threshold value.
  • PPDU Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit
  • OBSS Overlapping Basic Service Set
  • AP Access Point
  • One embodiment of the present invention has the effect of efficiently performing channel access in an environment where operating channels overlap.
  • MLD performs channel access through a plurality of BSSs operating in overlapping operation channels, even if the primary channel of a specific BSS among the plurality of BSSs is occupied by another device, channel access rights can be obtained through the primary channel of another BSS.
  • a channel access procedure can be performed through a non-primary channel.
  • Figure 1 illustrates a wireless LAN system according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 2 illustrates a wireless LAN system according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 3 shows the configuration of a station according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 4 shows the configuration of an access point according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 5 schematically illustrates the process by which a station establishes a link with an access point.
  • Figure 6 shows an example of the CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access)/CA (Collision Avoidance) method used in wireless LAN communications.
  • CSMA Carrier Sense Multiple Access
  • CA collision Avoidance
  • FIG. 7 shows various standard generation-specific physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) formats according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • PPDU physical layer protocol data unit
  • Figure 8 shows an EHT/UHR PPDU format according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 9 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 10 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an MU-RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 11 shows a mapping table of user priority and access category.
  • Figure 12 shows an example of a channel access procedure through a secondary channel when the state of the primary channel is busy.
  • Figure 13 illustrates an example of a transmission length limitation of a PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through a subchannel.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates an embodiment of a method for limiting the length of a TXOP obtained through channel access via a sub-channel.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a method for an AP to manage a primary operating channel by obtaining TXOPs through primary and secondary channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 16 illustrates an example of a method for configuring an AP MLD including a primary AP and an auxiliary AP having overlapping operating channels and setting an operating channel according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a procedure for an AP MLD to obtain a TXOP using a primary BSS and a secondary BSS according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a format of an RNR element transmitted by an AP MLD to indicate an auxiliary AP according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a method in which a channel switch of an auxiliary BSS is instructed/performed together when a channel switch for a primary BSS is performed according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a configuration of an AP MLD including a primary AP and a secondary AP having continuous operation channels and a method for setting operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a channel access method of an MLD that operates an STA on two links having continuous operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for performing resource unit allocation to each STA using a resource unit allocation subfield and a resource unit allocation subfield indicated through a preamble of a PPDU and a method for indicating a content channel.
  • Figure 23 illustrates the ambiguity problem of allocation RU interpretation of an STA that receives a preamble on a subchannel.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a method in which an AP performing channel access through a subchannel indicates BW and RU allocation information of a PPDU according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a transmission/TXOP protection method using MU-RTS frame and CTS frame.
  • Figure 26 illustrates the format of a trigger frame.
  • Figure 27 illustrates an example of the format of the common information field of a trigger frame.
  • Figure 28 illustrates an example of the format of the user information field of a trigger frame.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates an example of channel access in a non-primary channel when the primary channel is occupied according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an example of operation of STAs in a non-primary channel based on information related to OBSS transmitted from an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an example of a method for determining whether to perform an operation on a non-primary channel considering the TBTT of a BSS according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates an example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 33 illustrates another example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 34 illustrates an example of a method for transmitting a CTS-to-self frame based on reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates an example of information acquired by a STA and a method for setting NAV based on reception of an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates an example of a method for setting up NAV and a method for using a subchannel when an STA receives an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 37 illustrates an example of a primitive exchange procedure for channel access in a non-primary channel of an STA according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a channel access procedure performed by a terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • fields and subfields may be used interchangeably.
  • Figure 1 illustrates a wireless LAN system according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • a wireless LAN system includes one or more Basic Service Sets (BSS), which represent a set of devices that are successfully synchronized and can communicate with each other.
  • BSS can be divided into infrastructure BSS and independent BSS (IBSS), and Fig. 1 shows an infrastructure BSS among them.
  • IBSS independent BSS
  • an infrastructure BSS (BSS1, BSS2) includes one or more stations (STA1, STA2, STA3, STA4, STA5), an access point (AP-1, AP-2) which is a station providing a distribution service, and a distribution system (DS) that connects multiple access points (AP-1, AP-2).
  • BSS1, BSS2 includes one or more stations (STA1, STA2, STA3, STA4, STA5), an access point (AP-1, AP-2) which is a station providing a distribution service, and a distribution system (DS) that connects multiple access points (AP-1, AP-2).
  • a station is any device that includes a medium access control (MAC) and a physical layer interface for a wireless medium that complies with the provisions of the IEEE 802.11 standard, and broadly includes both non-AP stations and access points (APs).
  • MAC medium access control
  • AP access points
  • a station for wireless communication includes a processor and a communication unit, and may further include a user interface unit and a display unit, etc., depending on the embodiment.
  • the processor may generate a frame to be transmitted through a wireless network or process a frame received through the wireless network, and may perform various processes for controlling the station.
  • the communication unit is functionally connected to the processor and transmits and receives frames through the wireless network for the station.
  • a terminal may be used as a term including a user equipment (UE).
  • UE user equipment
  • An Access Point is an entity that provides access to a distribution system (DS) via a wireless medium for stations associated with it.
  • DS distribution system
  • an AP is used as a concept including a PCP (Personal BSS Coordination Point), and in a broad sense, it can include concepts such as a centralized controller, a base station (BS), a node-B, a base transceiver system (BTS), or a site controller.
  • PCP Personal BSS Coordination Point
  • an AP may also be referred to as a base wireless communication terminal, and in a broad sense, a base wireless communication terminal can be used as a term including an AP, a base station, an eNodeB (eNB), and a transmission point (TP).
  • the base wireless communication terminal may include various types of wireless communication terminals that allocate communication medium resources and perform scheduling in communications with multiple wireless communication terminals.
  • DS distribution system
  • ESS extended service set
  • Fig. 2 illustrates an independent BSS, which is a wireless LAN system according to another embodiment of the present invention.
  • parts that are the same or corresponding to those in the embodiment of Fig. 1 will be omitted for redundant description.
  • BSS3 illustrated in Fig. 2 is an independent BSS and does not include an AP, all stations (STA6, STA7) are not connected to an AP.
  • An independent BSS is not allowed to connect to a distribution system and forms a self-contained network.
  • each station (STA6, STA7) can be directly connected to each other.
  • FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a station (100) according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the station (100) according to the embodiment of the present invention may include a processor (110), a communication unit (120), a user interface unit (140), a display unit (150), and a memory (160).
  • the communication unit (120) transmits and receives wireless signals such as wireless LAN packets, and may be built into or externally installed in the station (100).
  • the communication unit (120) may include at least one communication module using different frequency bands.
  • the communication unit (120) may include communication modules of different frequency bands such as 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, and 60 GHz.
  • the station (100) may include a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or higher and a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or lower.
  • Each communication module may perform wireless communication with an AP or an external station according to the wireless LAN standard of the frequency band supported by the corresponding communication module.
  • the communication unit (120) may operate only one communication module at a time or may operate multiple communication modules simultaneously.
  • each communication module may be provided in an independent form, or multiple modules may be integrated into one chip.
  • the communication unit (120) may represent an RF communication module that processes RF (Radio Frequency) signals.
  • the user interface unit (140) includes various types of input/output means provided in the station (100). That is, the user interface unit (140) can receive user input using various input means, and the processor (110) can control the station (100) based on the received user input. In addition, the user interface unit (140) can perform output based on a command of the processor (110) using various output means.
  • the display unit (150) outputs an image on the display screen.
  • the display unit (150) can output various display objects such as content executed by the processor (110) or a user interface based on a control command of the processor (110).
  • the memory (160) stores a control program used in the station (100) and various data according to the control program.
  • the control program may include a connection program required for the station (100) to perform a connection with an AP or an external station.
  • the processor (110) of the present invention can execute various commands or programs and process data within the station (100).
  • the processor (110) can control each unit of the above-described station (100) and control data transmission and reception between the units.
  • the processor (110) can execute a program for connection with an AP stored in the memory (160) and receive a communication setup message transmitted by the AP.
  • the processor (110) can read information on the priority conditions of the station (100) included in the communication setup message and request connection to the AP based on the information on the priority conditions of the station (100).
  • the processor (110) of the present invention may refer to the main control unit of the station (100), and according to an embodiment, may refer to a control unit for individually controlling some components of the station (100), such as the communication unit (120). That is, the processor (110) may be a modem or a modulator and/or demodulator that modulates and/or demodulates a wireless signal transmitted and received from the communication unit (120).
  • the processor (110) controls various operations of transmitting and receiving wireless signals of the station (100) according to an embodiment of the present invention. A specific embodiment thereof will be described later.
  • the station (100) illustrated in FIG. 3 is a block diagram according to one embodiment of the present invention, and the blocks shown separately are logically distinguished to illustrate elements of the device. Accordingly, the elements of the device described above may be mounted as one chip or as multiple chips depending on the design of the device. For example, the processor (110) and the communication unit (120) may be implemented as one chip or as separate chips. In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, some components of the station (100), such as the user interface unit (140) and the display unit (150), may be selectively provided in the station (100).
  • FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an AP (200) according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the AP (200) may include a processor (210), a communication unit (220), and a memory (260).
  • a redundant description of parts of the configuration of the AP (200) that are identical or corresponding to the configuration of the station (100) of FIG. 3 will be omitted.
  • the AP (200) has a communication unit (220) for operating a BSS in at least one frequency band.
  • the communication unit (220) of the AP (200) may also include a plurality of communication modules using different frequency bands. That is, the AP (200) according to the embodiment of the present invention may have two or more communication modules of different frequency bands, for example, 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, and 60 GHz.
  • the AP (200) may have a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or higher and a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or lower.
  • Each communication module may perform wireless communication with a station according to the wireless LAN standard of the frequency band supported by the corresponding communication module.
  • the communication unit (220) may operate only one communication module at a time or may operate a plurality of communication modules simultaneously, depending on the performance and requirements of the AP (200).
  • the communication unit (220) may represent an RF communication module that processes RF (Radio Frequency) signals.
  • the memory (260) stores a control program used in the AP (200) and various data according to the control program.
  • the control program may include a connection program that manages the connection of the station.
  • the processor (210) controls each unit of the AP (200) and may control data transmission and reception between the units.
  • the processor (210) may execute a program for connection with a station stored in the memory (260) and transmit a communication setup message to one or more stations.
  • the communication setup message may include information on the connection priority conditions of each station.
  • the processor (210) performs connection setup according to a connection request of the station.
  • the processor (210) may be a modem or a modulator and/or demodulator that modulates a wireless signal transmitted and received from the communication unit (220).
  • the processor (210) controls various operations of wireless signal transmission and reception of the AP (200) according to an embodiment of the present invention. Specific examples of this will be described later.
  • Figure 5 schematically illustrates the process by which a station establishes a link with an access point.
  • the scanning stage is a stage in which STA (100) acquires access information of BSS operated by AP (200).
  • STA (100) acquires access information of BSS operated by AP (200).
  • a method for performing scanning there is a passive scanning method in which information is acquired only by utilizing a beacon message (S101) periodically transmitted by AP (200), and an active scanning method in which STA (100) acquires access information by transmitting a probe request to AP (S103) and receiving a probe response from AP (S105).
  • the STA (100) that successfully receives wireless access information transmits an authentication request (S107a) and receives an authentication response from the AP (200) (S107b) to perform the authentication step.
  • the STA (100) transmits an association request (S109a) and receives an association response from the AP (200) (S109b) to perform the association step.
  • association basically means wireless association, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and association in a broad sense may include both wireless association and wired association.
  • the authentication server (300) is a server that processes STA (100) and 802.1X-based authentication, and may be physically connected to the AP (200) or may exist as a separate server.
  • Figure 6 shows an example of the CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access)/CA (Collision Avoidance) method used in wireless LAN communications.
  • CSMA Carrier Sense Multiple Access
  • CA collision Avoidance
  • a terminal performing wireless LAN communication performs carrier sensing before transmitting data to check whether the channel is busy. If a wireless signal of a certain strength or higher is detected, the channel is determined to be busy, and the terminal delays access to the channel. This process is called clear channel assessment (CCA), and the level that determines whether or not the signal is detected is called the CCA threshold. If a wireless signal of a CCA threshold or higher received by the terminal is directed to the terminal as a receiver, the terminal processes the received wireless signal. On the other hand, if no wireless signal is detected in the channel or a wireless signal of a strength lower than the CCA threshold is detected, the channel is determined to be idle.
  • CCA clear channel assessment
  • each terminal having data to transmit performs a backoff procedure after an IFS (Inter Frame Space), such as AIFS (Arbitration IFS), PIFS (PCF IFS), etc., according to the situation of each terminal.
  • IFS Inter Frame Space
  • the AIFS may be used as a configuration replacing the existing DIFS (DCF IFS).
  • DCF IFS DIFS
  • Each terminal waits while decreasing the slot time by a random number determined for the terminal during the interval of the idle state of the channel, and a terminal that has exhausted all of the slot times attempts to access the channel.
  • the period during which each terminal performs the backoff procedure is called a contention window period.
  • the random number may be referred to as a backoff counter.
  • the initial value of the backoff counter is set by an integer, which is a random number obtained by the terminal.
  • the terminal may decrease the backoff counter by 1. Additionally, if the backoff counter reaches 0, the terminal may be allowed to perform channel access on the channel. Accordingly, the terminal's transmission may be allowed if the channel is idle during the AIFS time and the slot time of the backoff counter.
  • the terminal can transmit data through the channel. However, if the terminal attempting access collides with another terminal, the collided terminals are each assigned a new random number and perform a backoff procedure again.
  • the random number newly assigned to each terminal can be determined within a range twice (2*CW) of the random number range (contention window, CW) previously assigned to the terminal. Meanwhile, each terminal performs the backoff procedure again in the next contention window period to attempt access, and at this time, each terminal performs the backoff procedure from the slot time remaining in the previous contention window period. In this way, each terminal performing wireless LAN communication can avoid collisions with each other for a specific channel.
  • FIG. 7 shows various standard generation-specific physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) formats according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • PPDU physical layer protocol data unit
  • FIG. 7(a) illustrates an embodiment of a legacy PPDU format based on 802.11a/g
  • FIG. 7(b) illustrates an embodiment of a HE PPDU format based on 802.11ax
  • FIG. 7(c) illustrates an embodiment of a non-legacy PPDU (i.e., EHT PPDU) format based on 802.11be
  • FIG. 7(d) illustrates a detailed field configuration of L-SIG and RL-SIG commonly used in the above PPDU formats.
  • the preamble of the legacy PPDU includes a Legacy Short Training field (L-STF), a Legacy Long Training field (L-LTF), and a Legacy Signal field (L-SIG).
  • L-STF Legacy Short Training field
  • L-LTF Legacy Long Training field
  • L-SIG Legacy Signal field
  • the L-STF, L-LTF, and L-SIG may be referred to as a legacy preamble.
  • the preamble of the HE PPDU additionally includes an RL-SIG (Repeated Legacy Short Training field), a HE-SIG-A (High Efficiency Signal A field), a HE-SIG-B (High Efficiency Signal B field), a HE-STF (High Efficiency Short Training field), and a HE-LTF (High Efficiency Long Training field) in addition to the legacy preamble.
  • the RL-SIG, HE-SIG-A, HE-SIG-B, HE-STF, and HE-LTF may be referred to as a HE preamble.
  • the specific configuration of the HE preamble may be modified according to the HE PPDU format. For example, HE-SIG-B may be used only in the HE MU PPDU format.
  • the preamble of the EHT PPDU additionally includes an RL-SIG (Repeated Legacy Short Training field), a U-SIG (Universal Signal field), an EHT/UHR-SIG-A (Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal A field), an EHT/UHR-SIG-A (Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal B field), an EHT-STF (Extremely High Throughput Short Training field), and an EHT-LTF (Extremely High Throughput Long Training field) in addition to the legacy preamble.
  • RL-SIG Repeated Legacy Short Training field
  • U-SIG Universal Signal field
  • EHT/UHR-SIG-A Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal A field
  • an EHT/UHR-SIG-A Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal B field
  • EHT-STF Extremely High Throughput Short Training field
  • the RL-SIG, EHT-SIG-A, EHT-SIG-B, EHT-STF, and EHT-LTF may be referred to as an EHT preamble.
  • the specific configuration of the non-legacy preamble may be modified according to the EHT PPDU format.
  • EHT-SIG-A and EHT-SIG-B can only be used in some of the EHT PPDU formats.
  • the PPDU used in the UHR standard may have a format similar to the PPDU format used in the EHT standard.
  • the EHT PPDU format defined in 802.11be includes a U-SIG field that multiple wireless LAN generations have agreed to use in common.
  • the value of the PHY Version Identifier field of the U-SIG field included in the EHT PPDU may be 0, and the value of the PHY Version identifier field of the U-SIG field included in the UHR PPDU may have a non-zero value, such as 1.
  • the EHT PPDU includes an EHT-STF (Extremely High Throughput Short Training field) field in the STF field, and an EHT-LTF (Extremely High Throughput Long Training field) field in the LTF field.
  • the UHR PPDU includes a UHR-STF field (Ultra High Reliability Short Training field) in the STF field, and a UHR-LTF (Ultra High Reliability Long Training field) field in the LTF field.
  • L-SIG includes an L_RATE field and an L_LENGTH field.
  • the L_RATE field consists of 4 bits and represents an MCS used for data transmission. Specifically, the L_RATE field represents one of the transmission speeds of 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54 Mbps, which combine modulation methods such as BPSK/QPSK/16-QAM/64-QAM and inefficiencies such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4. Combining the information in the L_RATE field and the L_LENGTH field can represent the total length of the corresponding PPDU. In the non-legacy PPDU format, the L_RATE field is set to the minimum speed of 6 Mbps.
  • the unit of the L_LENGTH field is byte, and a total of 12 bits are allocated, allowing signaling up to 4095. In combination with the L_RATE field, it can indicate the length of the corresponding PPDU. At this time, legacy terminals and non-legacy terminals can interpret the L_LENGTH field in different ways.
  • the method for a legacy terminal or a non-legacy terminal to interpret the length of the PPDU using the L_LENGTH field is as follows. If the value of the L_RATE field is set to indicate 6Mbps, 3 bytes (i.e., 24 bits) can be transmitted during 4us, which is the duration of one symbol of 64FFT. Therefore, if 3 bytes corresponding to the SVC field and the Tail field are added to the L_LENGTH field value and divided by 3 bytes, which is the transmission amount of one symbol, the number of symbols based on 64FFT after L-SIG is obtained.
  • the length of the PPDU i.e., the reception time (RXTIME) is obtained. If this is expressed as a formula, it is as shown in Mathematical Expression 1 below.
  • the length of the PPDU can be set to a maximum of 5.484 ms.
  • a non-legacy terminal transmitting the PPDU must set the L_LENGTH field as in the mathematical expression 2 below.
  • TXTIME is the total transmission time that constitutes the corresponding PPDU, as shown in the mathematical expression 3 below.
  • TX represents the transmission time of X.
  • the U-SIG Universal SIG
  • the U-SIG field continues to exist in EHT/UHR PPDU and subsequent generation wireless LAN PPDUs, and plays a role in distinguishing which generation of PPDU it is, including EHT/UHR.
  • the U-SIG field can play a role in facilitating spatial reuse of EHT/UHR and subsequent generation wireless LANs.
  • U-SIG is an OFDM 2 symbol based on 64FFT and can convey a total of 52 bits of information. Of these, 43 bits, excluding 9 bits of CRC/Tail, are largely divided into a VI (Version Independent) field and a VD (Version Dependent) field.
  • the VI bit maintains the current bit configuration in the future so that even when a subsequent generation PPDU is defined, the current EHT/UHR terminals can obtain information about the corresponding PPDU through the VI fields of the corresponding PPDU.
  • the VI field consists of PHY version, UL/DL, BSS Color, TXOP, and Reserved fields.
  • the PHY version ID field is 3 bits and sequentially distinguishes the EHT/UHR and subsequent generation wireless LAN standards by version.
  • the PHY version ID field of the EHT (11be) PPDU has a value of 000b
  • the PHY version ID field of the UHR PPDU has a value other than 000b.
  • the UL/DL field distinguishes whether the corresponding PPDU is an uplink/downlink PPDU.
  • BSS Color means an identifier for each BSS defined in 11ax and has a value of 6 bits or more.
  • TXOP stands for Transmit Opportunity Duration transmitted in the MAC header. By adding it to the PHY header, the length of the TXOP containing the corresponding PPDU can be inferred without having to decode the MPDU, and has a value of 7 bits or more.
  • the VD field of EHT is signaling information useful only for PPDU of 11be version, and can be composed of fields commonly used in any PPDU format, such as PPDU format and BW, and fields defined differently for each PPDU format.
  • PPDU format is a delimiter that distinguishes EHT SU (Single User), EHT MU (Multiple User), EHT TB (Trigger-based), and EHT ER (Extended Range) PPDU.
  • the BW field largely signals five basic PPDU BW options of 20, 40, 80, 160 (80+80), and 320 (160+160) MHz (a BW that can be expressed in the form of an exponential of 20*2 can be called a basic BW) and various remaining PPDU BWs configured through Preamble Puncturing.
  • some 80 MHz can be signaled in a punctured form after being signaled at 320 MHz.
  • the punctured and modified channel form can be signaled directly in the BW field, or can be signaled using the BW field and a field appearing after the BW field (for example, a field in the EHT-SIG field).
  • the BW field has 3 bits, a total of 8 BW signaling is possible, and therefore only a maximum of 3 puncturing modes can be signaled. If the BW field is 4 bits, a total of 16 BW signalings are possible, so the puncturing mode can signal up to 11.
  • the VD field of UHR is a field that indicates signaling information that is useful only for UHR PPDU.
  • the information indicated by each field included in the VD field of UHR PPDU may be the same as or more extended than the information indicated by the field that plays the same role as the VD field of EHT (11be).
  • the field indicating the puncturing pattern included in the VD field of UHR PPDU may indicate various types of patterns than the field indicating the puncturing pattern included in the VD field of EHT PPDU.
  • the field indicating the puncturing pattern included in the VD field of UHR PPDU may be interpreted in combination with the BW field. Through this, more various types of puncturing patterns may be indicated.
  • Figure 8 shows an EHT/UHR PPDU format according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the EHT/UHR PPDU format can be indicated by the PPDU Format field of the U-SIG field of the PPDU.
  • Fig. 8 (a) shows an EHT/UHR SU PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the EHT/UHR SU PPDU is a PPDU used for single-user transmission between an AP and a single station, and may include an EHT-SIG-A field for additional signaling after the U-SIG.
  • Fig. 8(b) shows an EHT/UHR Trigger-based PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • An EHT/UHR Trigger-based PPDU is an uplink PPDU used for transmission in response to a trigger frame, and may not have a separate EHT/UHR-SIG-A field after U-SIG.
  • FIG. 8(c) shows an EHT/UHR MU PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • An EHT/UHR MU PPDU is a PPDU used for transmission to one or more terminals.
  • the EHT/UHR MU PPDU format may include a HE-SIG-B after the U-SIG field.
  • Fig. 8(d) shows an EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU is used for single-user transmission to stations in an extended range.
  • the EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU format allows U-SIG to be repeated on the time axis.
  • the EHT/UHR MU PPDU described through (c) of FIG. 8 can be used by an AP to perform downlink transmission to multiple stations.
  • the EHT/UHR MU PPDU can include scheduling information for multiple stations to simultaneously receive the PPDU.
  • the EHT/UHR MU PPDU can convey AID information of a receiver or transmitter of the corresponding PPDU through a user specific field of EHT/UHR-SIG-B.
  • a station receiving the EHT/UHR MU PPDU can perform a spatial reuse operation based on the AID information acquired from the preamble of the PPDU.
  • the resource unit allocation (RA) field of EHT/UHR-SIG-B can include information on a resource unit (RU) partitioning form in a specific bandwidth (e.g., 20 MHz) in the frequency domain. Additionally, information about the station assigned to each partitioned resource unit may be conveyed via a user-specific field of EHT/UHR-SIG-B.
  • the user-specific field may include one or more user fields corresponding to each partitioned resource unit.
  • a receiver's or sender's AID may be inserted into a user field corresponding to a resource unit in which data transmission is performed among the multiple divided resource units.
  • a pre-specified null STA ID may be inserted into a user field corresponding to the remaining resource units in which data transmission is not performed.
  • Two or more PPDUs described through Fig. 8 may be indicated by the same PPDU format.
  • the value of the U-SIG PPDU format subfield indicating EHT/UHR SU PPDU and the value of the U-SIG PPDU format subfield indicating EHT/UHR MU PPDU may be the same.
  • compression mode Some of the fields or some information of the fields included in the format of the PPDU described above may be omitted. This may be referred to as compression mode or compressed mode.
  • Wi-Fi terminals APs, non-AP STAs, etc.
  • Wi-Fi terminals perform communications using unlicensed bands, they check whether the channel on which they want to perform transmission is being used by another device before transmitting a frame.
  • CSMA Carrier Sense Multiple Access
  • a terminal that wants to transmit a packet performs carrier sense to check whether the channel is being used by another device, and performs transmission only if the channel is determined to be not being used by another device (Idle). Since a terminal using CSMA can perform an action of not attempting transmission at least when it is confirmed that another device is using the medium (channel) (when determined to be busy), transmission that has been started first can be protected from other devices.
  • multiple terminals that recognize that the medium is occupied by another device experience a transmission collision by simultaneously attempting to transmit packets when it is confirmed that the medium occupation from the other device has ended (the medium has changed to Idle). That is, as multiple other terminals attempt to transmit packets at the same time that a specific terminal attempts to transmit packets, a terminal that should receive the packet transmitted by the specific terminal cannot properly receive and decode the packet that it should receive due to interference caused by the transmissions performed by the multiple other terminals.
  • CSMA/CA CSMA with collision avoidance
  • Terminals accessing the medium (channel) using CSMA/CA attempt to transmit after waiting for a random amount of time when the state of the medium observed by the terminals changes to Idle.
  • the random amount of time may be an aslottime (typically 9 us) as long as a random number (random backoff counter) generated by each terminal attempting to transmit.
  • terminals accessing the medium using CSMA/CA attempt to transmit after waiting for different random amounts of time, so they attempt to transmit at different times, unlike when only CSMA is used.
  • the specific terminal may perform an operation of decreasing the backoff counter maintained by it by 1 every aslottime while the medium is maintained as Idle, and may attempt transmission when the backoff counter becomes 0, or when aslottime has elapsed after the backoff counter becomes 0.
  • the specific terminal that performed the transmission may generate a new random number (new backoff counter) after the transmission is terminated, and may attempt transmission when the new random number becomes 0 again, or after it becomes 0.
  • the DCF and EDCAF utilized by the MAC of the Wi-Fi terminal evaluate the channel status by considering not only the channel status (idle/busy) confirmed by each terminal directly performing a physical CS (Carrier Sense) but also the result of a virtual CS. In more detail, even if the result of the physical CS performed on the channel is idle, the Wi-Fi terminal considers the channel status to be busy if the result of the virtual CS is busy.
  • the Virtual CS is a channel evaluation method that determines the channel to be busy if the NAV (Network allocation vector) is not 0.
  • the NAV may be a value maintained for future traffic that is predicted to occupy the medium.
  • the MAC of Wi-Fi when it receives an RTS/CTS frame, it can set the NAV (NAV count) based on the duration information of the received frame, for example, the value of the duration field, and maintain the NAV as a non-zero value for the expected time that the medium will be occupied after the RTS/CTS frame exchange. In other words, the value maintained as the NAV decreases over time. If the NAV value of a specific MAC is 0, it can be interpreted that the future traffic recognized by the specific MAC no longer occupies the medium. If the NAV is 0, the MAC can determine the virtual CS result as Idle. In this case, the MAC of Wi-Fi can also set the NAV based on the duration value obtained from not only the RTS/CTS frame but also other received MAC frames.
  • NAV NAV count
  • the channel estimation method determine the state of the medium
  • the channel estimation method that considers the results of both the physical CS and virtual CS briefly described above is also one of the well-known Wi-Fi MAC functions, so a detailed description is omitted.
  • EDCA provides a mechanism to manage traffic by differentiating it into four types of ACs (access categories) according to the characteristics of the traffic.
  • the four types of ACs are AC_VO (AC Voice), AC_VI (AC Video), AC_BE (AC Best effort), and AC_BK (AC Background), and each AC can have different CW (contention window), TXOP (transmit opportunity), and AIFSN parameters.
  • EDCA is a mechanism that differentiates the CW, TXOP, and AIFSN parameters for the four types of ACs and controls the transmission priority of the traffic transmitted using each AC.
  • EDCA can map the traffic (MSDU) that the MAC must service to one of the four ACs according to the TC (traffic category) or TS (traffic stream).
  • MSDU traffic
  • TC traffic category
  • TS traffic stream
  • the traffic mapped to one of the four ACs by EDCA is divided and managed into four queues for each AC.
  • the four queues may be logically separated rather than physically separated.
  • AC_VO is an AC that can be used for traffic that is vulnerable to transmission delay, although the absolute amount of traffic, such as voice traffic, is not large, and has relatively small CW and AIFSN parameter values to increase the probability of being serviced preferentially over traffic from other ACs.
  • the TXOP parameter of AC_VO is limited to a relatively smaller value than the TXOP parameters of other ACs, so that only a shorter transmission time is guaranteed than that of other ACs.
  • AC_VI is an AC that is more tolerant to transmission delay than voice traffic, but can still be used for traffic such as video that requires low-latency transmission and a large amount of traffic.
  • AC_VI has larger CW and AIFSN parameter values than AC_VO but smaller than other ACs, and instead, TXOP is about twice as long as AC_VI.
  • AC_BE is an AC that can be utilized for traffic that is robust to transmission delay, and most general traffic except voice data and streaming video data can be classified as AC_BE.
  • AC_BE uses CW and AIFSN parameters with values greater than AC_VO and AC_VI.
  • AC_BE does not have a separate TXOP. Therefore, traffic corresponding to AC_BE cannot be utilized in the TXOP transmission sequence that transmits a PPDU, receives an ACK in response, and then transmits a PPDU again after SIFS.
  • AC_BK is a traffic that is robust to transmission delay similar to AC_BE, but can be utilized for traffic with a lower priority than BE traffic.
  • AC_BK utilizes the same CW parameter values as AC_BE, and the AIFSN parameter values are larger than AC_BE.
  • traffic corresponding to AC_BK does not have a separate TXOP like AC_BE, so it cannot be utilized in the TXOP transmission sequence.
  • the four types of EDCA AC described above are mapped to the UP (user-priority) of 802.1D, and the EDCA AC is determined according to the UP value of the traffic received through the wire or the TID of the MSDU indicated from the upper layer. At this time, if the TID of the MSDU indicates a value of 0 to 7, the value indicated by the TID can correspond 1:1 with the UP.
  • EDCA AC has default CW (CWmin, CWmax), AIFSN, and TXOP parameters defined in the standard, and the parameter values of each AC can be changed by the AP and different values can be used for each BSS.
  • Wi-Fi traffic is stored in one of four queues corresponding to four ACs, and can be transmitted to a destination device only when the AC containing the traffic wins the channel access contention with other ACs.
  • each AC performs the contention using the access parameters (CW[AC], AIFSN[AC]) assigned to it, and the channel access contention operation performed by each AC is the same as DCF.
  • the specific AC may not participate in the contention.
  • the EDCA mechanism stipulates internal competition rules such as when an (internal) collision occurs between ACs, the AC with the highest priority wins and increases the CW of the other AC that caused the collision, and rules for composing a PPDU including traffic from an AC other than the AC that won the competition (primary AC), but a detailed description is omitted because it is not closely related to the proposal of the present invention.
  • EDCA provides the EDCA TXOP (EDCA Transmission Opportunity) function along with the function of operating differentiated AC according to the type of traffic (frame, packet, etc.) to enhance QoS.
  • EDCA TXOP refers to the time during which the EDCAF (EDCA Function) of a specific AC can control the medium without being disturbed by other devices during the TXOP period (duration) when it obtains a channel access opportunity, that is, becomes a TXOP holder.
  • the EDCA TXOP can be restricted by the TXOP limit advertised by the AP.
  • the TXOP holder must ensure that its transmission and the transmission of the response frame responded to by its transmission can be terminated within the TXOP limit.
  • a TXOP holder can transmit multiple frames (multiple PPDUs) during an EDCA TXOP interval. If transmission of each frame is performed within the acquired TXOP interval, the TXOP holder can transmit multiple frames consecutively without performing a separate channel access procedure, for example, a backoff procedure, between transmissions of each frame.
  • the multiple frames are MPDUs or A-MPDUs (Aggregated MAC protocol data units) that do not request immediate ack
  • transmission of the multiple frames can be performed at a short interframe space (SIFS) or reduced interframe space (RIFS) interval.
  • SIFS short interframe space
  • RIFS reduced interframe space
  • traffic (packets, frames, etc.) of other ACs other than the specific AC that is the TXOP holder may also be transmitted together within the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder (specific AC) when specific conditions are satisfied.
  • the transmission of traffic of other ACs other than the TXOP holder within the TXOP may be an operation due to TXOP sharing between ACs, and detailed information regarding the specific conditions is omitted because it is not related to the present invention.
  • the TXOP holder can perform continuous frame transmission without performing a separate channel access procedure within the TXOP. This may be an operation that can be achieved when other terminals understand and protect the TXOP section acquired by the TXOP holder. That is, in order for the TXOP holder to acquire medium control authority for the EDCA TXOP section, a procedure may be required to notify other terminals so that they can recognize the acquired TXOP section.
  • a terminal (AC) that becomes a TXOP holder or initiates transmission after completing a channel access procedure may attempt to allow other terminals to recognize the TXOP section by transmitting an RTS frame.
  • Another terminal that receives an RTS frame from a TXOP holder may set an NAV based on information related to a duration included in the RTS frame, for example, the value of the Duration field.
  • the set NAV may be maintained as a non-zero value for a time corresponding to the TXOP of the TXOP holder.
  • the terminal indicated as the destination device of the RTS frame must respond with a CTS frame instead of setting the NAV based on the information of the RTS frame.
  • the destination device of the RTS frame transmitted to start TXOP is a TXOP responder and must transmit a CTS frame in response to the RTS (after SIFS when the RTS frame is received).
  • the Duration field of the responding CTS frame is set to a value calculated as the value indicated in the Duration field of the received RTS frame - the CTS frame transmission time - SIFS.
  • the terminals receiving the CTS frame can set the NAV based on the information related to the duration included in the CTS frame (for example, the value of the Duration field).
  • the NAV of the terminal that received the RTS frame from the TXOP holder and the terminal that received the CTS frame from the TXOP responder are set to 0 after the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder is terminated.
  • the Wi-Fi MAC mechanism can protect the TXOP holder and the TXOP responder so that they can exchange multiple frames without interruption during the TXOP.
  • the TXOP holder may use only the bandwidth of the primary 40 MHz or less than the primary 40 MHz, for example, the primary 20 MHz, for frame exchange during the acquired TXOP.
  • the CH_BANDWIDTH (a type of TXVECTOR parameter) of the PPDU transmitted by the TXOP holder shall be set to a value equal to or smaller than the CH_BANDWIDTH_IN-NON_HT (a type of RXVECTOR parameter) of the received CTS frame.
  • the RTS frame may be an RTS frame that allows the CTS frame to be responded to with a BW smaller than the BW in which the RTS frame was transmitted.
  • An RTS frame may be an RTS frame transmitted with DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT (a type of TXVECTOR parameter) set to Dynamic. If DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT is set to Static and the RTS frame is transmitted from the TXOP holder, the TXOP responder may have to respond with a CTS frame with the same BW as the BW in which the RTS frame was received.
  • FIG. 9 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the first station (STA1) Before transmitting a PPDU, the first station (STA1) transmits an RTS frame to the second station (STA2), which is the destination of the PPDU, and the second station (STA2) recognizes that the received RTS frame is an RTS frame destined for itself and responds with a CTS frame after SIFS.
  • STA2 Before transmitting a PPDU, the first station (STA1) transmits an RTS frame to the second station (STA2), which is the destination of the PPDU, and the second station (STA2) recognizes that the received RTS frame is an RTS frame destined for itself and responds with a CTS frame after SIFS.
  • STA1_Neighbor a neighbor station of the first station (STA1), sets its NAV based on the value indicated by the Duration field of the RTS frame after receiving the RTS frame transmitted by the first station (STA1).
  • STA2_Neighbor a neighbor station of the second station (STA2), sets its NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by the second station (STA2).
  • STA1_Neighbor and STA2_Neighbor determine that the virtual CS is busy while the set NAV (counter) is maintained as a non-zero value after receiving the RTS/CTS frame, and perform operations such as not decreasing the backoff counter.
  • the neighboring terminals that have received the RTS/CTS frame do not attempt transmission during the period in which the NAV is maintained as a non-zero value. Therefore, the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2) can be exchanged without being disturbed by surrounding terminals while exchanging PPDU and Ack frames.
  • STA2_Neighbor can perform an operation that takes into account that the channel (channel, WM, Wireless medium) is in use while the first station (STA1) transmits a PPDU.
  • a Wi-Fi terminal can transmit a UL PPDU to the AP without directly acquiring a TXOP or performing channel access through DCF and EDCAF. More specifically, a non-AP STA can transmit a UL PPDU using an RU allocated to it after receiving a trigger frame transmitted by the AP. At this time, the UL PPDU is a TB (trigger-based) PPDU.
  • An STA that responds with a UL PPDU after receiving a trigger frame can obtain more transmission opportunities than an STA that does not transmit a UL PPDU based on the trigger frame because it can perform transmission without obtaining direct channel access opportunities through DCF and EDCAF. Therefore, an STA that transmits a UL PPDU through the trigger frame may cause a fairness issue in terms of channel access.
  • 11ax defines a constraint to perform EDCAF using the MU (Multi-user)-EDCA parameter when a HE non-AP STA successfully transmits at least one MPDU through the UL PPDU transmitted after receiving the trigger frame.
  • MU-EDCA parameters include parameters related to the size of contention windows for each of AC_VO, AC_VI, AC_BE, and AC_BK and the MU EDCA timer, and the contention window included in MU-EDCA can be set to be larger than the parameters of EDCA.
  • An STA that transmits a TB PPDU through a trigger frame and succeeds in transmitting at least one MPDU performs channel access within the time interval corresponding to the MU EDCA timer by performing channel access using the MU EDCA parameters instead of the EDCA parameters, thereby succeeding in channel access with a lower probability than an STA that uses the EDCA parameters.
  • the fairness problem in channel accessibility between an STA that transmits a UL PPDU without performing direct channel access and an STA that does not transmit a UL PPDU based on the trigger frame can be resolved/mitigated.
  • the MU-RTS Trigger/CTS frame exchange procedure is defined, and a function to enable the AP to start TXOP and protect the TXOP frame exchange procedure using the MU-RTS trigger frame (hereinafter referred to as MU-RTS, MU-RTS frame) is added.
  • the MU-RTS frame is a type of trigger frame.
  • the AP When the AP protects TXOP using the MU-RTS frame, since multiple stations respond with CTS frames, the TXOP can be protected from peripheral devices of each of the multiple stations, which are the destination devices of the DL MU PPDU (Down link multi user PPDU).
  • the MU-RTS frame can be used to protect the UL MU PPDU.
  • the AP before requesting TB (Trigger based) PPDU to multiple stations through a trigger frame, the AP can transmit an MU-RTS frame to cause multiple stations to respond with CTS frames to the TB PPDU.
  • the CTS frames responded to by the multiple stations cause the surrounding stations of each station to set NAVs to protect the TB PPDU and the Ack frame (Ack, Block Ack, etc.) to be transmitted after the TB PPDU, and through this, legacy stations STAs that cannot recognize (interpret, decode) the trigger frame and TB PPDU may not perform channel access during the packet exchange sequence section (or TXOP) initiated through the trigger frame.
  • FIG. 10 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an MU-RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the AP before transmitting an MU PPDU, transmits an MU-RTS frame to the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2), which are the destination devices of the MU PPDU, and the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2) receive the MU-RTS frame and, after SIFS, each respond to the MU-RTS frame with a CTS frame.
  • STA1_Neighbor a neighboring station of the first station (STA1), sets its NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by the first station (STA1).
  • STA2_Neighbor a neighboring station of the second station (STA2), sets its NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by the second station (STA2).
  • STA1_Neighbor and STA2_Neighbor perform operations such as not decreasing the back-off counter, determining that the Virtual CS (Virtual Carrier Sense) is busy while the NAV (counter) set after receiving the CTS frame is maintained as a non-zero value.
  • neighboring terminals that have received the CTS frame do not attempt to transmit during the period in which the NAV is maintained as a non-zero value. This allows the AP to transmit MU PPDUs and avoid interference from surrounding terminals while the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2) transmit Ack frames.
  • the trigger frame described above is a frame type defined in 11ax, in which the Type (fourth bit (B3) and third bit (B2)) and Subtype (eighth bit (B7), seventh bit (B6), sixth bit (B5), and fifth bit (B4)) subfields of the Frame Control field are set to 01b and 0010b, respectively.
  • the trigger frame is a frame of the Control Type in which the Type subfield of the Frame Control field is 01b, and the Subtype value 0010 indicates that it is a Trigger frame type.
  • the trigger frame is defined so that an AP can request a response frame from multiple stations at once, and the MU-RTS frame is used so that an AP can request a CTS frame from multiple stations (non-AP STAs).
  • Trigger Types other than the MU-RTS frame include the Basic Tigger frame requesting UL MU PPDU, the BRP trigger frame requesting Beamforming Report (Beamforming Report Poll Tigger frame), the MU-BAR Tigger frame (BlockAck request), the BSRP trigger frame requesting Buffer Status Report (Buffer Status Report Poll Tigger frame), the GCR MU-BAR trigger frame, the BQRP (Bandwidth Query Report Poll) trigger frame, and the NDP Feedback Report Poll trigger frame.
  • Trigger Types other than the MU-RTS frame are not related to the content of the present invention, so a detailed description is omitted.
  • MLD is defined in EHT (Extremely High Throughput) of Wi-Fi 7.
  • MLD means a Logical entity that includes one or more STAs.
  • One or more APs (AP STAs) can be affiliated to an AP MLD, and one or more non-AP STAs can be affiliated to a non-AP (STA) MLD.
  • AP STAs AP STAs
  • STA non-AP
  • Each AP belonging to an AP MLD can operate an independent BSS (Basic Service set), and the operating bandwidth (Operating BW) and operating channel (Operating channel) of the BSSs operated by the APs can be different from each other.
  • BSS Basic Service set
  • the operating bandwidth (Operating BW) and operating channel (Operating channel) of the BSSs operated by the APs can be different from each other.
  • setup can be performed between multiple APs belonging to a single AP MLD and multiple non-AP STAs belonging to a single non-AP MLD.
  • the non-AP MLD associated with each of the multiple APs belonging to the single AP MLD is considered to have performed a Multi-Link setup.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD defined in Wi-Fi 7 can perform a Multi-Link setup connected in multiple Links.
  • Each MLD can have up to 15 STAs (AP STAs, non-AP STAs). That is, 15 APs can belong to the AP MLD, and the 15 APs each operate an independent BSS. At this time, each AP belonging to the AP MLD provides a service equivalent to a conventional Wi-Fi AP. That is, each AP belonging to the AP MLD can function as an independent AP and can also perform a service for non-AP STAs (e.g., legacy non-AP STAs) that do not belong to the MLD.
  • non-AP STAs e.g., legacy non-AP STAs
  • each AP belonging to the AP MLD is operated in an independent Link, and the meaning of the Link only means the operating channel on which each AP is operated, and does not mean a Link that distinguishes between 2.4/5/6 GHz. That is, the first AP belonging to the AP MLD can be operated in the first Link, and the second AP can be operated in the second Link. At this time, it is possible for both the first link, where the first AP operates, and the second link, where the second AP operates, to be located in the 6 GHz band.
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD can complete setup in multiple Links through the Multi-Link setup procedure performed in a specific Link.
  • the Multi-Link setup procedure means Multi-Link Probe Request/Response, Multi-Link Association Request/Response frame exchange, etc. performed to establish a connection for one or more Links.
  • the procedure for performing Multi-Link setup between AP MLD and non-AP MLD is not important, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.
  • the two MLDs can operate the Traffic to be transmitted/received through each Link separately. This can be achieved by TID-to-Link mapping negotiation performed between the two MLDs or by applying the TID-to-Link mapping status indicated by the AP MLD.
  • the TID-to-Link mapping status that the AP MLD indicates to the non-AP MLDs is indicated by the Management frame (e.g. Beacon, Probe Response frame) transmitted by the AP MLD, and the non-AP MLDs associated with the AP MLD through at least one Link must operate each Link according to the TID-to-Link mapping indicated by the AP MLD.
  • the Management frame e.g. Beacon, Probe Response frame
  • the Traffic (MPDU) of each TID can be transmitted/received through different Links according to the method determined by the new TID-to-Link mapping negotiation. For example, if an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD are connected through two Links, and TIDs 0 to 3 are mapped to Link 1 and TIDs 4 to 7 are mapped to Link 2, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD should transmit/receive only MPDUs with TIDs 0 to 3 through Link 1, and transmit/receive MPDUs with TIDs 4 to 7 through Link 2.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD have the Default TID-to-Link mapping state.
  • Wi-Fi 8 (UHR, Ultra High Reliability) is expected to be developed based on Wi-Fi 7
  • the MLD concept, connection procedures between MLDs, and link operation methods through TID-to-Link mapping will still be inherited in Wi-Fi 8.
  • an AP belonging to an AP MLD to be a UHR STA
  • a non-AP STA belonging to a non-AP MLD to be a UHR STA.
  • Figure 11 shows a mapping table of user priority and access category.
  • Each STA belonging to MLD performs channel access in the same way as a conventional Wi-Fi terminal. More specifically, each STA performs channel access using EDCA (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access).
  • EDCA Enhanced Distributed Channel Access
  • Channel access mechanism using EDCA is a commonly used method for channel access in unlicensed bands.
  • EDCA provides a mechanism to manage traffic by differentiating it into four types of ACs (access categories) according to its characteristics.
  • the four types of ACs are AC_VO (AC Voice), AC_VI (AC Video), AC_BE (AC Best effort), and AC_BK (AC Background), and each AC can have different CW (contention window), TXOP (transmit opportunity), and AIFSN parameters.
  • EDCA is a mechanism to control the transmission priority of traffic transmitted using each AC by differentiating the CW, TXOP, and AIFSN parameters for the four types of ACs.
  • EDCA can map traffic (MSDU) that a MAC must service to one of the four ACs according to the TC (traffic category) or TS (traffic stream).
  • traffic mapped to one of the four ACs by EDCA is divided into four queues for each AC and managed.
  • the above four queues may not be physically separated but may be logically separated queues.
  • packets mapped to each AC and stored in the Transmission queue are transmitted when each AC completes the backoff procedure and acquires channel access rights.
  • the method by which the AC performs the backoff procedure and acquires channel access rights is described through Fig. 6, so a detailed description is omitted.
  • AC_VO is an AC that can be used for traffic that is vulnerable to transmission delay, although the absolute amount of traffic, such as voice traffic, is not large, and has relatively small CW and AIFSN parameter values to increase the probability of being serviced preferentially over traffic from other ACs.
  • the TXOP parameter of AC_VO is limited to a relatively smaller value than the TXOP parameters of other ACs, so only a shorter transmission time is guaranteed than that of other ACs.
  • AC_VI is an AC that is more tolerant to transmission delay than voice traffic, but can still be used for traffic such as video that requires low-latency transmission and a large amount of traffic.
  • AC_VI has larger CW and AIFSN parameter values than AC_VO but smaller than other ACs, and instead, TXOP is about twice as long as AC_VI.
  • AC_BE is an AC that can be utilized for traffic that is robust to transmission delay, and most general traffic except voice data and streaming video data can be classified as AC_BE.
  • AC_BE uses CW and AIFSN parameters with values larger than AC_VO and AC_VI.
  • AC_BE does not have a separate TXOP, and therefore cannot utilize the TXOP transmission sequence that transmits a PPDU, receives an ACK in response, and then transmits a PPDU again after SIFS.
  • AC_BK is a type of AC that is robust to transmission delays, similar to AC_BE, but can be used for lower priority traffic than BE traffic.
  • AC_BK uses the same CW parameter values as AC_BE, and uses larger AIFSN parameter values than AC_BE.
  • AC_BK does not have a separate TXOP like AC_BE, so it cannot use the TXOP transmission sequence.
  • the four types of EDCA AC described above are mapped to the UP (user-priority) of 802.1D, and the EDCA AC is determined according to the UP value of the traffic received through the wire or the TID of the MSDU indicated from the upper layer. At this time, if the TID of the MSDU indicates a value of 0 to 7, the value indicated by the TID can correspond 1:1 with the UP.
  • mapping 802.1D UP and EDCA AC are described in the UP-to-AC mappings table shown in Figure 43.
  • EDCA AC has default CW (CWmin, CWmax), AIFSN, and TXOP parameters defined in the standard, and the parameter values of each AC can be changed by the AP and different values can be used for each BSS.
  • Wi-Fi traffic is stored in one of four queues corresponding to four ACs, and can be transmitted to a destination device only when the AC it is included in wins the channel access competition with other ACs.
  • each AC performs the competition using the access parameters (CW[AC], AIFSN[AC]) assigned to it, and the channel access competition operation performed by each AC is the same as DCF.
  • the specific AC may not participate in the competition.
  • the EDCA mechanism stipulates internal competition rules such as when an (internal) collision occurs between ACs, the AC with a higher priority (see Fig. 11) wins and increases the CW of the other AC that caused the collision, and rules for composing a PPDU including traffic from an AC other than the AC that won the competition (primary AC), but a detailed description is omitted because it is not closely related to the proposal of the present invention.
  • each STA belonging to the MLD performs channel access in the same manner as a conventional Wi-Fi terminal. That is, when each STA belonging to the MLD is observed in each Link, each STA belonging to the MLD performs channel access in the same manner as a non-MLD STA (QoS STA) that does not belong to the MLD performs channel access.
  • QoS STA non-MLD STA
  • NSTR Nonsimultaneous transmit and receive
  • An NSTR Link pair refers to a Link pair that causes strong interference to the remaining Links when the MLD performs transmission on a specific Link among the Link pairs on which the STAs of the MLD operate. For example, if Link1 and Link2 are an NSTR link pair of a non-AP MLD, when non-AP STA1 of the non-AP MLD operating on Link1 performs transmission, non-AP STA2 of the non-AP MLD operating on Link2 experiences strong interference. Accordingly, the non-AP STA2 cannot determine whether Link2 is IDLE/BUSY or normally receive the received PPDU while the non-AP STA1 is performing transmission.
  • the non-AP MLD has a problem that normal operation of the other Link is impossible when transmission is performed on one Link even though it operates STAs on two Links.
  • Wi-Fi 7 introduces a mechanism by which the non-AP MLD can initiate simultaneous transmission on the NSTR link pair.
  • the mechanism that can initiate simultaneous transmission is a mechanism that enables simultaneous transmission to be initiated on the first and second links by postponing transmission until the backoff procedure performed on the second link is completed, even if the non-AP MLD has completed the backoff procedure on the first link.
  • an exception rule is defined that allows a response frame (e.g., CTS frame) not to be responded to even if a frame requesting a response (e.g., RTS frame) is received on the other link of the NSTR link pair while a PPDU is being received on one link of the NSTR link pair.
  • an NSTR link pair is characterized in that interference caused by transmission performed by an STA operating on a specific Link makes it impossible for an STA operating on another Link to operate normally (unable to receive CCA and/or PPDU)
  • the same Link pair may be an NSTR link pair for a specific MLD and an STR link pair (Simultaneous transmit and receive) for another MLD.
  • an STR link pair means a Link pair in which transmission performed by each STA operating on each Link of the STR link pair does not affect STAs operating on other Links, and therefore, PPDU reception is possible on another Link while PPDU transmission is performed on a specific Link.
  • each link pair can be an STR link pair to a specific MLD or an NSTR link pair to another MLD depending on the interference shielding capability of each MLD.
  • the Operating channels of a specific Link pair overlap, the specific Link pair cannot help but become an NSTR link pair regardless of the characteristics/performance of the MLD.
  • Wi-Fi 7 when an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD perform a Multi-Link setup connected through multiple Links, the Operating Channels of the BSSs operated in the Links where the setup is performed are regulated so as not to overlap with each other. In other words, the Operating Channels of the Links where the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD perform the Multi-Link setup do not overlap with each other.
  • MLD has a problem due to the power consumption required when performing channel access on multiple links.
  • the method of using multiple links can be considered a limited solution, and a method for increasing the success probability (frequency) of the channel access procedure performed on each link is needed.
  • the channel access procedure can be performed through one or more links, but a certain number of links can be used in consideration of power consumption. For example, if a channel access procedure cannot be performed on a primary channel, the channel access procedure can be performed by selecting one of the idle non-primary channels (such as a non-primary channel or a secondary channel) without waiting until the primary channel changes to an idle state.
  • Wi-Fi 7 which is recently nearing standardization, supports throughput exceeding 30 Gbps.
  • One of the reasons why the Wi-Fi 7 standard can support extremely high throughput compared to legacy Wi-Fi standards is the wide operating BW of Wi-Fi 7. While conventional Wi-Fi terminals use a 20 MHz band as their operating BW, Wi-Fi 7 operates with an operating BW of up to 320 MHz. This means that the maximum throughput increase effect achieved by simply expanding the maximum operating BW supported by the Wi-Fi standard is up to 16 times. However, the maximum throughput of the Wi-Fi standard increased as the operating BW is expanded is only a nominal value, and it is difficult for it to actually lead to improved performance of Wi-Fi terminals.
  • the maximum supportable Operating BW is continuously expanding through the development of Wi-Fi terminals/standards, the impact on the actual performance of Wi-Fi terminals is relatively small. This is because, when a Wi-Fi terminal performs channel access, the probability that the entire wide band included in the maximum Operating BW will be identified as Idle is low, and the method by which a Wi-Fi terminal performs channel access has an excessively high Primary 20 MHz channel dependency. Among these, the problem that the probability that the entire wide band included in the Operating BW will be identified as Idle may be an inherent problem because the frequency band in which the Wi-Fi terminal operates is an unlicensed band.
  • the Wi-Fi standard was designed to perform channel access to a 40 MHz channel by extending the channel access technique used when the operating BW is 20 MHz.
  • the method of accessing the 40 MHz channel performs access to the 40 MHz band (the 40 MHz band including the Primary 20 MHz and Secondary 20 MHz bands) if the Secondary 20 MHz channel is confirmed to be IDLE for the last PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime (9 us)) when the backoff procedure is completed in the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • the 40 MHz band the 40 MHz band including the Primary 20 MHz and Secondary 20 MHz bands
  • PIFS Primary Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime (9 us)
  • a method for accessing an 80 MHz channel is to perform access to the 80 MHz band (80 MHz band including the Primary 20 MHz, Secondary 20 MHz, and Secondary 40 MHz bands) if the Secondary 20 MHz channel and the Secondary 40 MHz channel have been identified as IDLE for the last PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime (9 us)) when the backoff procedure is completed in the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • the Wi-Fi Wide Band Operation method for accessing subchannels identified as IDLE during the PIFS when the backoff procedure is completed in the Primary 20 MHz channel is applied in the same manner when accessing 320 MHz BW defined in Wi-Fi 7.
  • This method has been repeatedly used is because it enables wide bandwidth access in a more energy-efficient and less hardware-implementation manner by performing backoff on only one Channel (primary channel) and determining whether other subchannels are accessible within a minimum time interval.
  • this method of channel access using the primary channel has a major drawback in that when the Primary 20 MHz channel on which the Wi-Fi terminal performs the backoff procedure is determined to be busy, even if all sub-channels except the Primary 20 MHz channel are available (not occupied by other devices), the backoff procedure of the Wi-Fi terminal cannot be completed, and thus channel access to wide Idle sub-channels is also impossible.
  • the problem of channel access of a Wi-Fi terminal supporting wideband operation being limited depending on the CCA result of the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is not a new problem in UHR.
  • UHR which succeeds Wi-Fi 7 supporting an ultra-wideband operation up to 320 MHz
  • the loss to be suffered may be greater than that of the existing WiFi standards due to the dependency on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel described above.
  • the next-generation standards after UHR may also experience performance degradation issues due to the dependency on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel described above, and therefore it is clear that there is a need to solve the channel access problem related to the Primary 20 MHz subchannel described above.
  • the present invention provides a method and procedure for a terminal supporting wideband operation to perform communication using a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel determined to be BUSY when the CCA result for the primary 20 MHz subchannel is BUSY.
  • a channel access procedure may be performed by selecting one of the non-primary 20 MHz subchannels other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • the other subchannel on which the channel access procedure is performed may be included in an operating channel that is the same as or different from the primary 20 MHz.
  • a method of performing channel access using (through) a sub-channel (a non-primary channel (or sub-channel)) other than the P20 channel may be considered.
  • performing channel access using (through) a non-primary channel means performing a backoff procedure based on whether the non-primary channel is idle/busy.
  • the terminal can perform the backoff procedure through the P20 channel or multiple non-primary channels (e.g., the first non-primary channel or the second non-primary channel, etc.).
  • the channels on which the terminal can perform the backoff procedure i.e., the P20, the first non-primary channel, the second non-primary channel, the third non-primary channel, etc.
  • the first non-primary channel may be located in an 80 MHz subblock other than the 80 MHz subblock including the P20 channel.
  • the terminal when the terminal selects a backoff channel (non-primary channel) other than P20, the terminal must select another backoff channel (non-primary channel) from among the 20 MHz subchannels of the 80 MHz subblock (i.e., the subblock excluding the primary 80 MHz subblock) that does not include the P20 subchannel.
  • each of the different backoff channels selected by the terminal may be located in a different 80 MHz subblock. That is, the first non-primary channel may be a subchannel located in a different 80 MHz subblock from the second non-primary channel.
  • the selection restriction of the non-primary channel with respect to the aforementioned 80 MHz subblock may be applied only when the operating channel of the BSS is included in the 5 GHz or 6 GHz band.
  • channel access using a non-primary channel may be performed only during a time period in which the P20 channel is determined to be BUSY. That is, channel access using a non-primary channel (hereinafter, referred to as non-primary channel access) may be performed only when the P20 channel is determined to be Busy as a result of Physical CCA (ED, Energy detection) and PD, Virtual CCA.
  • non-primary channel access may be permitted only to STAs (AP STAs, non-AP STAs) in which the P20 channel is BUSY and the frame identified on the P20 channel is not a frame destined for itself.
  • the non-primary channel access procedure may be permitted only when the preamble of a PPDU received on the P20 channel is successfully detected or the MPDU is successfully decoded. Accordingly, the non-primary channel access procedure may be permitted only when the STA successfully receives the frame received on the P20 channel.
  • one STA among the STAs (AP or non-AP) constituting the MLD can perform a channel access procedure on the P20 channel.
  • the STA can receive a preamble of a PPDU on the P20 channel and perform a CCA based on the preamble. If the P20 channel is determined to be busy as a result of the CCA and the PPDU received on the P20 channel is transmitted from an overlapping BSS (OBSS), the STA can select one non-primary channel among one or more non-primary channels and perform a channel access procedure through the selected non-primary channel.
  • the state of the non-primary channel on which the channel access procedure is performed may be an idle state.
  • backoff performance and channel access procedures using subchannels other than the P20 channel may be restricted to cases where the PPDU identified in the P20 channel is a PPDU of the OBSS. Accordingly, backoff performance and channel access procedures using other subchannels may be restricted to cases where the PPDU identified in the P20 channel is a PPDU whose destination device is not the device that received the PPDU.
  • the backoff performing and channel access proceeding procedure using a subchannel other than the P20 channel can be initiated after confirming whether the PPDU identified on the P20 channel is the destination device or OBSS by decoding the preamble of the PPDU to confirm the BSS Color of the HE-SIG and/or U-SIG, confirming the STA-ID of the EHT-SIG and/or UHR-SIG, or decoding the first MAC frame of the PPDU to confirm the destination device.
  • the STA can confirm the BSS Color included in the SIG field (e.g., HE-SIG (HE-SIG-A or HE-SIG-B), or U-SIG) included in the preamble of the PPDU, or confirm the station identifier (STA-ID) included in the SIG field (e.g., HE-SIG-B, EHT-SIG, or UHR-SIG)) to determine whether the received PPDU was transmitted from the OBSS.
  • the STA can identify the destination device by decoding the first MAC frame of the PPDU.
  • the specific PPDU can be distinguished as a PPDU (Intra-BSS PPDU) rather than an OBSS PPDU.
  • a backoff procedure using a subchannel other than the P20 channel may need to be initiated after confirming whether the other subchannel is IDLE during DIFS.
  • the confirmed BSS Color is not its own BSS Color, STA-ID and MAC frame decoding performed to specify the target device may be omitted.
  • a method of confirming whether the other subchannel is IDLE may be to confirm by performing PHY CCA (Energy detection and/or Packet detection) performed for a preset time period.
  • the preset time may be PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space) or DIFS (Distributed Inter Frame Space) or MediumSync time.
  • MediumSync time can be a time interval with a different name, and means the time that a device that intends to perform a backoff procedure on a non-primary channel (or a sub-channel) must perform CCA to determine whether the medium is IDLE/BUSY.
  • MediumSync time can be several ms long and is shorter than MaxPPDU length (5.484 ms).
  • a terminal that performs CCA by applying MediumSync time can set NAV using information included in PPDU (frame) received while performing CCA.
  • the NAV set by the terminal based on the PPDU (frame) received on the S20 channel can be a NAV other than the two NAVs (Basic NAV, Intra-BSS NAV) used in conventional Wi-Fi.
  • the other NAV is a timer set by a frame (PPDU) received through S20, and is a NAV used for Virtual CCA of the S20 channel when performing channel access through the S20 channel.
  • the other NAV is set by a frame (PPDU) received on the S20 channel, and even if the value of the other NAV is not 0, the terminal can determine the result of the CCA performed on the P20 channel as IDLE. That is, the other NAV is a NAV for the S20 channel, not the P20 channel. At this time, the other NAV can be called a secondary NAV.
  • PPDU frame
  • the other NAV can be called a secondary NAV.
  • the AP may need to manage both the basic NAV, which is set based on the received frame (PPDU) while occupying the primary 20 MHz subchannel, and the secondary NAV, which is set based on the received frame (PPDU) (i.e., received via the S20 channel) without occupying the primary 20 MHz subchannel. That is, the AP must perform a backoff procedure considering the basic NAV when performing channel access via the P20 channel, and must perform a backoff procedure considering the secondary NAV when performing channel access via the S20 channel.
  • PPDU received frame
  • PPDU received frame
  • the secondary NAV may be a timer that is initialized to the Mediumsync time value when the terminal performing channel access via the P20 channel decides to perform channel access via the S20 channel. That is, when the AP decides to perform channel access via the S20 channel, it may need to initialize the secondary NAV to the Mediumsync time value at the same time as starting CCA for the S20 channel.
  • an STA that performs frame exchange after performing channel access through a subchannel other than the Primary 20 MHz subchannel may need to perform a procedure to check whether the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is occupied by another BSS and another device when initiating a channel access procedure on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel after the frame exchange performed through the other subchannel is terminated.
  • a method for the STA to check whether the P20 channel is occupied by another BSS and another device may be to perform CCA for the P20 channel during the MediumSync time.
  • the STA may set the NAV for the P20 channel based on the information acquired through the received PPDU (frame). In this case, the STA may resume the channel access procedure performed on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel when the set NAV is released (when the NAV timer becomes 0).
  • the backoff procedure using another subchannel can be compensated for the delayed time for decoding the preamble of the PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel or for decoding the MAC frame.
  • 3-slot time e.g., 27 us
  • an operation of decreasing the backoff counter used for channel access using a subchannel other than the P20 channel by 3 at once can be permitted.
  • the operation of decreasing the backoff counter all at once can be prohibited, and the backoff counter can be sequentially decremented by 1 after confirming the destination device of the PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • compensation for the delayed backoff procedure may not be performed separately in the process of confirming the destination device of the PPDU confirmed on the P20.
  • the process of identifying the destination device of a PPDU received on the above-described P20 channel may be omitted for convenience of explanation. Accordingly, even if not described separately, it should be understood that the channel access procedure performed using a subchannel other than the P20 channel includes the process of identifying the destination device of a PPDU received on the above-described P20 channel.
  • Figure 12 shows an example of a channel access procedure through a non-primary channel when the state of the primary channel is busy.
  • the terminal can perform channel access using a non-primary 20 MHz subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • an STA (AP STA, non-AP STA) configuring an MLD may perform channel access using a channel other than the P20 channel when the P20 channel is determined to be BUSY (for example, when the P20 channel is determined to be busy based on a CCA result based on a preamble of a received PPDU).
  • the operation of performing the channel access may be performing a backoff according to the CCA result of the other channel.
  • the backoff operation may be an operation of decreasing a backoff counter by 1 when the result of CCA performed in each slot on the other channel is IDLE.
  • the backoff operation may be an operation of maintaining the backoff counter without decreasing it when the result of CCA performed in each slot on the other channel is BUSY.
  • the S20 channel that can be utilized for channel access using a 20 MHz sub-channel other than the above-described P20 channel is not limited to a specific S20 channel, but multiple S20 channels can be utilized.
  • channel access may be possible not only through the S20_1 channel included in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock as illustrated in FIG. 12, but also through S20_2 and S20_3 included in the Secondary 160 MHz subblock.
  • the number of S20 channels utilized for channel access by each STA may be determined according to the capability of each STA, or may be limited to one or two specific S20 channels.
  • each non-primary subchannel on which the STA performs backoff is a subchannel determined by the AP, and is therefore indicated through a management frame transmitted by the AP. That is, the AP can indicate information on another subchannel (S20) on which backoff can be performed when the primary channel (P20) is busy through a management frame transmitted by the AP (e.g., Beacon, Probe Response, Association Response frame, etc.), and the other subchannel is one of the subchannels included in an 80 MHz subblock other than the Primary 80 MHz subblock.
  • a management frame transmitted by the AP e.g., Beacon, Probe Response, Association Response frame, etc.
  • a backoff counter utilized when performing channel access on a P20 channel and a backoff counter utilized when performing channel access on an S20 channel may exist and be managed separately.
  • the backoff counter utilized by each channel may be changed to a new value of the backoff counter only when transmission is performed as a result of the channel access performed on each channel (when backoff is completed).
  • changing to the new value means changing to a new backoff counter extracted using CW_min if transmission is successful, or changing to a new backoff counter extracted using CW x 2 if transmission fails. In other words, it does not mean an operation of reducing the backoff counter as a CCA result.
  • each of the multiple S20 channels may have its own backoff counter.
  • the backoff counter for each S20 channel may exist by Access Category. That is, the terminal may need to separately manage a backoff counter for each AC for each S20 channel on which it can perform backoff. That is, a terminal performing a backoff procedure through an S20 channel can perform a channel access procedure internally using four ACs.
  • all S20 channels performing channel access can utilize a common backoff counter.
  • the backoff counter is decreased from 5 to 3, and then the P20 channel is changed to BUSY.
  • the S20 channel can perform the channel access procedure, and as shown in Fig. 13 (b), the backoff counter, which P20 reduced to 3, can continue to be decreased according to the CCA result performed on S20_1.
  • the backoff counter can be maintained as is until the channel access using S20_2 is started, or until P20 to S20_1 are determined to be IDLE. At this time, if the channel connection using the above S20_2 is continued, it can be understood as an embodiment in which there are two or more S20 channels used for the channel connection, and if the backoff counter is maintained until the above P20 to S20_1 are determined to be IDLE, it can be understood as an embodiment in which there is only one S20 channel used for the channel connection.
  • an STA that constitutes an MLD (non-AP MLD or AP MLD) operating on one primary channel and one or more non-primary channels can attempt a channel access procedure on the primary channel.
  • the STA performs CCA to perform the channel access procedure on the primary channel and the primary channel is in an idle state
  • the STA can perform the channel access procedure on the primary channel.
  • the primary channel is determined to be busy as a result of the CCA performed based on the preamble of the PPDU received on the primary channel, the STA cannot perform the channel access procedure until the primary channel changes to idle. Therefore, in this case, the STA can select one non-primary channel in an idle state among one or more non-primary channels and perform the channel access procedure without waiting until the primary channel changes to idle.
  • an STA that performs a channel access procedure using a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than a primary channel may be restricted in the length of a PPDU it transmits.
  • the above-mentioned PPDU transmission length restriction may be necessary for two reasons. In this case, the length of a PPDU transmitted after performing a backoff procedure on the S20 channel may be restricted so that it ends earlier than the end time of a PPDU recognized by a PPDU (and/or frame) confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • the length of the PPDU transmitted on the non-primary channel may be restricted to the length of a PPDU (first PPDU) received for CCA on the primary channel.
  • the length of the second PPDU may be equal to or shorter than the length of the first PPDU.
  • the length of the first PPDU to limit the length of the second PPDU can be confirmed by the length field included in the preamble of the first PPDU.
  • One aspect that requires the above restriction may be to prevent a problem that may occur when the transmission of an OBSS device that occupied the P20 channel is terminated while the transmission started using the S20 channel continues. More specifically, the transmission that is performed after performing channel access through the S20 channel will be performed through sub-channel(s) excluding the P20 channel, and there is a problem that the AP cannot provide any service such as transmission/reception, scanning, etc. for the P20 channel while performing the transmission. Therefore, if the transmission of S20 is terminated later than the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel, the AP cannot confirm and receive other STA UL PPDU or OBSS PPDU that can be confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • the NAV setting by the OBSS PPDU cannot be performed either, which may cause a problem in the overall operation of the BBS.
  • Another aspect that requires the above PPDU transmission length restriction may be to alleviate the fairness problem. If a length limit is not applied to transmissions made after performing channel access through the S20 channel, it may cause fairness problems with conventional WiFi STAs that perform channel access only through the P20 channel. Therefore, in addition to limiting the number of S20 channels that can perform channel access through the aforementioned S20 channel, it is necessary to alleviate the fairness problems with conventional WiFi STAs by limiting the length of PPDUs transmitted through channel access through the S20 channel.
  • a device that performs channel access using a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than a primary channel (P20 channel) may be restricted in the length of a TXOP acquired after performing a backoff procedure on a sub-channel (S20) other than the primary 20 MHz channel.
  • the length of the TXOP acquired after performing the backoff procedure on the S20 channel may be restricted so as to end earlier than the TXOP end time of the OBSS recognized by the PPDU (and/or frame) received on the P20 channel.
  • an STA that performs channel access on a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than the primary channel (P20 channel) may be restricted in the length of a TXOP acquired through the channel access procedure.
  • the length of a TXOP (second TXOP) acquired by an STA through a channel access procedure of a non-primary channel may be equal to or shorter than the length of a TXOP (first TXOP) based on a PPDU (first PPDU) of a primary channel.
  • the length of the first TXOP may be acquired based on a TXOP field included in a preamble of the first PPDU.
  • the above TXOP length limitation may be necessary for two aspects.
  • One aspect of the limitation may be to prevent a problem that may occur when the TXOP of an OBSS device occupying the P20 channel is terminated while the TXOP acquired using the S20 channel (a sub-channel other than the primary 20 MHz channel) continues. More specifically, the TXOP acquired through the S20 channel is applied to a frequency section occupying the sub-channel(s) excluding the P20 channel, and while frame exchange is performed using the TXOP, the terminals may not be able to perform transmission/reception, CCA, etc. for the P20 channel.
  • the terminals cannot confirm and receive other OBSS PPDUs that can be confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • the terminals since the UL PPDU of the STA cannot be received, and NAV setting by OBSS PPDU cannot be performed, a problem may occur in the overall operation of the BBS.
  • Another aspect that requires the above PPDU transmission length limitation may be to alleviate the fairness problem. If the length limitation of the TXOP obtained after performing channel access through the S20 channel is not applied, it may cause a fairness problem with the conventional Wi-Fi terminal that performs channel access through only the P20 channel.
  • Figure 13 illustrates an example of a transmission length limitation of a PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through a non-primary channel.
  • the length of a PPDU transmitted by an STA through a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than the primary channel (P20 channel) described above may be limited to be the same as or shorter than the length of a PPDU transmitted on the primary channel (e.g., a PPDU received by the STA through the primary channel for CCA).
  • a situation is illustrated in which a terminal, which has determined that a P20 channel is BUSY, completes a backoff procedure through an S20_1 channel and transmits a PPDU.
  • the backoff counter of the backoff procedure performed in the S20_1 channel may be a backoff counter commonly used with the backoff counter used in the P20 channel, or may be a separate backoff counter utilized for channel access through the S20_1 channel.
  • the S20 channels are illustrated as being in the same 80 MHz subblock as the P20 channel, but the S20 channels that perform a backoff when the P20 channel is BUSY may be located in a different 80 MHz subblock from the 80 MHz subblock that includes the P20 channel.
  • STA Before starting channel access through S20_1 channel, STA can detect preamble of OBSS PPDU during channel access attempt through P20 channel and confirm that P20 channel is occupied by OBSS (BUSY). In this situation, STA can perform decoding on preamble of OBSS PPDU and confirm how long OBSS PPDU will last. At this time, operation of STA performed after confirming how long OBSS PPDU will last may be setting NAV. At this time, STA can confirm L-SIG and Length fields of detected preamble or confirm duration of OBSS PPDU based on value indicated through TXOP field included in U-SIG field and/or HE-SIG field of OBSS PPDU. Alternatively, STA can confirm duration of OBSS PPDU based on Duration/ID field of MAC frame included in PPDU.
  • the STA can determine the length of the PPDU to be transmitted after performing channel access through the S20 channel based on the end time of the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • the length of the PPDU to be transmitted after performing channel access through the S20 channel can be limited/adjusted to end the same as or earlier than the predicted end time of the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • a method of limiting the length of the PPDU may be such that the end time of a Response frame expected to be responded to the PPDU is adjusted to end the same as or earlier than the end time of the OBSS PPDU.
  • the Response frame means a PPDU including an ACK frame or a Block ACK frame, a TB (trigger-Based) PPDU, etc.
  • the end time of the PPDU responded to by the PPDU can be limited to be earlier than or equal to the predicted end time of the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel.
  • FIG. 14 illustrates an embodiment of a method for limiting the length of a TXOP obtained through channel access via a non-primary channel.
  • the length of a TXOP based on a PPDU transmitted through a non-primary channel (S20 channel) by an STA that performs a channel access procedure rather than the primary channel (P20 channel) described above may be limited to be equal to or shorter than the length of a TXOP based on a PPDU transmitted on the primary channel (e.g., a PPDU received by the STA through the primary channel for CCA).
  • a terminal which has determined that the P20 channel is BUSY, completes a backoff procedure through a subchannel (S20 channel) included in a secondary 80 MHz subblock and acquires a TXOP.
  • a backoff counter of the backoff procedure performed through the S20 channel may be a backoff counter commonly used with the backoff counter used in the P20 channel, or may be a separate backoff counter used when performing a backoff operation in a subchannel included in the secondary 80 MHz subblock.
  • the terminal When a terminal wants to perform a backoff procedure through S20 because the P20 channel is confirmed to be BUSY, the terminal performs CCA on the S20 channel during a time period corresponding to MediumSync time in order to protect the communication of the OBSS that may be transmitting/receiving using the S20 channel.
  • the state of S20 observed by the terminal during the time period corresponding to MediumSync time is IDLE, and therefore the terminal starts a backoff procedure on the S20 channel.
  • the TXOP acquired by the terminal is set to end at the same time as the TXOP (OBSS TXOP) including the frame (RTS/CTS frame of FIG. 14) transmitted by occupying the P20 channel.
  • the TXOP acquired after performing the backoff through the subchannel included in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock may be set to end earlier than the OBSS TXOP.
  • a terminal acquiring TXOP can utilize Duration/ID field of (MU-)RTS and/or CTS and/or BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll)/BSR (Buffer Status Report) frame received on Primary 20 MHz subchannel when checking the TXOP length of OBSS occupying P20 channel. That is, when a frame transmitted by STA of OBSS is received through Primary 20 MHz subchannel, the terminal checks the TXOP length of OBSS based on information indicated through Duration/ID field of the received frame.
  • Duration/ID field of (MU-)RTS and/or CTS and/or BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll)/BSR (Buffer Status Report) frame received on Primary 20 MHz subchannel when checking the TXOP length of OBSS occupying P20 channel. That is, when a frame transmitted by STA of OBSS is received through Primary 20 MHz subchannel, the terminal checks the TXOP length of OBSS based on information indicated through Duration/ID field of the received frame.
  • the terminal sets a NAV corresponding to the Primary 20 MHz subchannel based on the confirmed length, completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) through the subchannel included in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock, and then, when acquiring a TXOP, adjusts its TXOP length so that the TXOP it has acquired ends at the same time as or before the TXOP of the confirmed OBSS.
  • the terminal After the TXOP acquired through the S20 channel is terminated, the terminal performs CCA for the P20 channel during the MediumSync time to resume channel access through the P20. If a valid frame (PPDU) is received before the time corresponding to the MediumSync time elapses, the terminal sets NAV based on the information acquired through the field related to the length of the received frame (PPDU), and can resume the channel access procedure through the P20 channel when the NAV is released. In the example of Fig. 14, P20 was observed in the IDLE state until the time corresponding to the MediumSync time elapsed, and therefore, the terminal resumed the channel access procedure after the time corresponding to the MediumSync time expired.
  • PPDU valid frame
  • the terminal sets NAV based on the information acquired through the field related to the length of the received frame (PPDU), and can resume the channel access procedure through the P20 channel when the NAV is released.
  • P20 was observed in the IDLE state until the time corresponding to the MediumSync time elapsed, and therefore, the terminal resume
  • a series of channel access procedures performed through the above-described S20 channel may be channel access procedures allowed only to AP STAs.
  • a channel access procedure through the S20 channel, not the P20 channel may be a channel access procedure that cannot be performed by non-AP STAs.
  • the reason why the channel access procedure via the S20 channel is allowed only to AP STAs is because, even among STAs belonging to a single BSS, the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each STA may be different from each other. Assuming that a first non-AP STA and a second non-AP STA are associated with a BSS operated by an AP, the first non-AP STA may recognize that the P20 channel is BUSY after receiving a PPDU transmitted from an OBSS, but the AP and the second non-AP STA may recognize that the P20 channel is IDLE because the PPDU was not received. In addition, there may also be a case where the first non-AP STA does not receive the PPDU received by the second non-AP STA.
  • the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each non-AP STA belonging to the same BSS may be different from each other, and the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each STA and the status of the P20 channel confirmed by the AP may also be different.
  • the AP may determine that the P20 is idle and still proceed with the channel access procedure on the P20 channel.
  • the PPDU transmitted by the non-AP STA after performing channel access on S20 cannot be normally received by the AP if the P20 channel confirmed by the AP is idle.
  • the AP may transmit a PPDU to the non-AP STA after completing the channel access on the P20 channel.
  • the non-AP STA encounters a problem that it cannot normally perform a PPDU received on the P20 channel due to the PPDU transmission performed on the S20 channel.
  • each non-AP STA may be restricted from performing a channel access procedure on the S20 channel even if it determines that the P20 channel it has confirmed is in a BUSY state.
  • the non-AP STA may have to wait for reception of a PPDU that may be transmitted on the S20 channel when it determines that the P20 channel is in a BUSY state.
  • a frame of a preset format may need to be transmitted as the first frame transmitted after performing channel access on the S20 channel.
  • the preset format may be RTS (Request To Send), MU-RTS (Multi-User RTS), BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll), or another type of trigger frame.
  • the AP may need to transmit a frame of the preset format included in the first PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the S20 channel.
  • an AP that performs a channel access procedure on an S20 channel, not a P20 channel may transmit a frame in a format that is a preset format first after the channel access procedure.
  • an AP that performs a channel access procedure on an S20 channel may transmit a frame that does not include data first after the channel access procedure. That is, after the channel access procedure, the AP may transmit a frame in a specific format that does not include data first after the channel access procedure, since the channel of an STA associated with the AP may not have been changed yet.
  • the frame of the preset format transmitted by the AP is a frame that requests a response of an immediate response frame from one or more STAs, and therefore, when the AP transmits a frame of the preset format, a response frame is sent in response from the STAs that receive it.
  • the AP When response frames are received in response to a frame of a preset format that the AP transmitted, the AP can recognize that the STAs that transmitted the response frames are STAs that can support reception of the PPDU transmitted via S20. Accordingly, after transmitting the frame of the preset format, the AP can transmit frames targeting the STAs that responded with a response frame to the frame via the next PPDU.
  • the AP can request a response frame from the first STA and the second STA through a frame in a preset format that is transmitted. At this time, if the response frame is responded to from the first STA and the response frame is not responded to from the second STA, the AP can include an MPDU whose destination device is the first STA in the PPDU that is transmitted next, and may not include an MPDU whose destination device is the second STA.
  • the AP if the AP does not receive a response frame for the frame in the preset format transmitted through S20 from a specific STA, the AP must not include an MPDU whose destination device is (individually addressed) the specific STA in the PPDUs that are transmitted through the channel access.
  • ETSI European Telecommunications Standards Institute
  • BRAN Broadband Radio Access Networks
  • the EDCA mechanism which is a channel access method used in conventional Wi-Fi, is defined as one of the normative channel access methods by ETSI BRAN, and therefore conventional Wi-Fi terminals perform channel access through the normative operation defined by ETSI BRAN.
  • the specific regulation is that a terminal performing channel access via EDCA must not change the primary operating channel more than once per second. In other words, a terminal performing channel access via EDCA must perform channel access using the channel for at least 1 second when the channel performing the backoff procedure (primary operating channel) is changed.
  • the time for performing channel access using a specific subchannel may be calculated based on the start time of transmission of the first PPDU transmitted among the PPDUs after performing channel access using the specific subchannel.
  • the terminal may change the primary operating channel to a subchannel other than S20 (primary 20 MHz subchannel or another subchannel) from a time point 1 second after T1.
  • the channel access operation via the S20 channel provided in the present invention may be limitedly usable when the channel access operation via the P20 channel is maintained for 1 second or more than 1 second.
  • a terminal that has performed the channel access operation via the S20 channel must attempt the channel access operation via the S20 channel for 1 second or more than 1 second, and it is possible to switch to performing the channel access via the P20 channel while maintaining the channel access operation via the S20 channel for 1 second or more than 1 second.
  • the 1 second is for example, and it is also possible for the same operation/restriction to be performed by applying another previously agreed time length.
  • the terminal in order to perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the terminal must attempt the channel access procedure on the primary channel for a certain period of time (e.g., 1 s), and thereafter, when performing the channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the terminal must attempt the channel access procedure on the non-primary channel for a certain period of time (e.g., 1 s). For example, when performing a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the terminal must perform an operation (e.g., the channel access procedure) on the non-primary channel for a certain period of time (e.g., 1 s).
  • an operation e.g., the channel access procedure
  • non-AP STAs that recognize that the AP has performed channel access through the S20 channel may have to perform operations considering the S20 channel as the default channel until the AP can perform channel access through the P20 channel. That is, non-AP STAs that recognize that the AP has performed channel access through the S20 channel must perform channel access on the S20 channel or wait for reception of PPDUs transmitted from the AP until the AP switches to a state in which it can perform channel access on the P20 channel.
  • the AP can instruct the non-AP STAs with information related to the point in time when it performed channel access through the S20 channel or the point in time when it can switch to channel access operation through the P20 channel using the Management frame (e.g., Beacon frame) that it transmits. That is, the AP can instruct the non-AP STAs with information related to the point in time when it switches to channel access operation through the P20 channel during the time period in which it must perform channel access through the S20 channel, through the Management frame that it transmits.
  • the Management frame e.g., Beacon frame
  • Non-AP STAs When Non-AP STAs receive a Management frame transmitted by an AP, if the Management frame includes information related to the point in time when the AP switches to channel access operation via a P20 channel, the Non-AP STAs can recognize whether the channel access execution channel of the AP is a P20 channel or an S20 channel based on the indicated information.
  • FIG. 15 illustrates a method for an AP to manage a primary operating channel by obtaining a TXOP through a primary channel and a non-primary channel according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the AP performs channel access through a channel not occupied by the OBSS by changing the primary operating channel.
  • the description below explains the channel access operation of the AP in chronological order (from left to right based on the drawing).
  • the AP When the AP acquires TXOP1, it acquires channel access rights by completing the channel access procedure performed through P20. Since the TXOP of OBSS2 is in progress in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock at the time when the AP acquires TXOP, the AP acquires channel access rights only for the Primary 80 MHz, and therefore TXOP1 is applied only for the Primary 80 MHz subblock. After that, the AP completes the channel access procedure again in P20 and acquires TXOP2, which is a TXOP for the 160 MHz band.
  • the TXOP of OBSS1 is acquired in the form of occupying P20, which is the AP's primary operating channel, and therefore the AP's backoff procedure is stopped.
  • the AP recognizes that S20 is also occupied by the TXOP of OBSS2 and maintains the primary operating channel without changing it.
  • the TXOP of OBSS1 started again, and the AP decides to change the primary operating channel to S20.
  • the AP is able to change the primary operating channel to S20 because the time it maintained P20 as the primary operating channel was 1 second or longer than 1 second.
  • the AP performs channel access through S20 during the second TXOP of OBSS1 and acquires TXOP3.
  • the AP completes the channel access procedure performed in S20 and acquires TXOP4, which is a TXOP for the 160 MHz band.
  • the channel access procedure performed by the AP in S20 is interrupted as the TXOP of OBSS2 starts.
  • the AP confirms that P20 is IDLE and decides to change the primary operating channel to P20.
  • the AP can change the primary operating channel to P20 because the time it maintained S20 as the primary operating channel was 1 second or longer than 1 second.
  • the primary operating channel is allowed to be changed only once per second according to the normative operation defined by the ETSI BRAN committee, it is difficult to say that the dependency problem on the primary channel, which is the basic idea of the present invention, is completely resolved. This is because, after a specific terminal changes the primary operating channel, whether or not the channel access is possible is determined based on whether the changed primary operating channel is IDLE/BUSY for at least one second. In other words, the dependency problem on the primary channel that the Wi-Fi terminal has can be alleviated only once per second at most, and the same dependency problem occurs on the changed primary operating channel for the remaining time interval.
  • the problem to be solved by the present invention is not the dependency problem on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Wi-Fi terminal, but the dependency problem on the primary operating channel of the Wi-Fi terminal (the channel used for channel access, the reference channel for performing the backoff procedure). Therefore, the method of changing the primary operating channel from the P20 channel to the S20 channel, and then again from the S20 channel to the P20 channel or another S20 channel, only provides the effect of changing the channel designated as the primary operating channel, but does not resolve the limitation that channel access for the entire Operating BW is restricted when a specific 20 MHz sub-channel (primary operating channel) is determined to be BUSY.
  • a method of lowering the importance of the designated primary operating channel can be considered.
  • designating multiple primary operating channels for a single operating channel can be considered.
  • the channel access dependency problem of a Wi-Fi terminal for each primary operating channel can be alleviated in proportion to the number of designated primary operating channels.
  • the Operating BW supported by the Wi-Fi standard has been continuously increasing, and the Wi-Fi7 standard supports an Operating BW of up to 320 MHz BW. Even when accessing an Operating channel with such a wide BW (e.g., 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz channels), a Wi-Fi terminal can perform channel access only when it has completed the backoff procedure on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel (main operating channel). At this time, since the backoff procedure can be completed only when the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is determined to be IDLE, the Wi-Fi terminal cannot obtain access to a wide channel up to the 320 MHz band when the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is determined to be BUSY. This is due to the dependency problem of the Wi-Fi terminal on the primary operating channel mentioned above, and the reason why the existing Wi-Fi standard has maintained a channel access procedure with such a dependency problem is to minimize the increase in complexity of the Wi-Fi terminal.
  • a wide BW e.g. 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz channels
  • the ETSI regulation defines two different normative channel access methods for wide-bandwidths (BW exceeding 20 MHz).
  • the first normative channel access method is to obtain channel access rights by using EDCA (or a channel access mechanism operating under rules similar to EDCA) for each 20 MHz sub-channel included in the wide-bandwidth to be accessed, and to perform access to one or more 20 MHz channels for which channel access rights have been obtained simultaneously. That is, a terminal performing channel access for a band exceeding 20 MHz can perform a channel access procedure for each 20 MHz sub-channel separately, and access the 20 MHz channels for which channel access rights have been obtained by completing the channel access procedure.
  • EDCA or a channel access mechanism operating under rules similar to EDCA
  • the second normative channel access method for wide-bandwidth defined in the ETSI regulation is to simultaneously access other 20 MHz channels that have been determined to be idle in measurements performed for more than 25 us when the channel access procedure on one primary operating channel (one 20 MHz channel) has been completed.
  • the method by which conventional Wi-Fi terminals access the 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, and 320 MHz bands utilizes the second normative channel access method defined in the ETSI regulation.
  • a Wi-Fi terminal uses the first normative channel access method defined in the above-mentioned ETSI regulation, the Wi-Fi terminal can more flexibly access each subchannel determined as IDLE within the Operating BW without a dependency issue on a specific subchannel.
  • performing a separate channel access procedure for each 20 MHz channel included in the Operating BW increases the hardware/operational complexity of the Wi-Fi terminal and causes excessive energy consumption for the channel access procedure, which incurs significant costs in other aspects.
  • the overlapping operating channel configuration method of MLD which is explained through the embodiments of the present invention described below, is a method of lowering the dependency on the main operating channel while maintaining the channel access method of conventional Wi-Fi in which each terminal attempts channel access to a wide bandwidth using the main operating channel.
  • MLD Multi-link Device
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD can be in an ML-setup (Multi-link setup) state where setup is performed through multiple links.
  • the Operating channels of each link where the AP MLD and non-AP MLD perform setup must be setup so as not to overlap each other.
  • the BSS of the AP (AP belonging to the AP MLD) operated in each of the multiple links must be a BSS operated through a non-overlapping frequency range.
  • the Operating BWs of each AP belonging to the AP MLD are allowed to overlap with each other.
  • the rules in terms of the operating channel of the multi-link setup performed by the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD can be explained with a simpler example as follows.
  • the AP MLD can operate the first AP, the second AP, and the third AP in link 1, link 2, and link 3, respectively.
  • the Operating channels of the two BSSs operated by the first and second APs overlap (partially or fully overlapped), and the Operating channel of the BSS operated by the third AP does not overlap with the Operating channels of the BSSs operated by the first and second APs.
  • the AP MLD performs ML setup with the non-AP MLD, but allows ML setup states such as [link 1, link 3] and [link 2, link 3], and does not allow ML setup states such as [link 1, link 2] and [link 1, link 2, link 3]. This is because, among the links on which the non-AP MLD performed setup, link 1 and link 2 have overlapping Operating channels.
  • the BSS Operating channels of each AP operated by the AP MLD can overlap with each other, but the BSS Operating channels of multiple links on which the non-AP MLD performed ML setup are not permitted to overlap with each other.
  • AP MLD may set operating channels (channels through which APs operate BSS) of two or more APs to overlap for the purpose of strengthening channel access for non-primary channels.
  • one of the APs whose operating channels overlap may be set as a primary AP, and the remaining APs may be set as secondary APs.
  • a method of performing channel access using a primary AP and a secondary AP is described through ⁇ Channel Access Using Overlapping AP> described below.
  • the links on which the Primary AP and the Auxiliary AP operate are respectively named Primary link and Auxiliary link
  • the BSS on which the Primary AP operates is named Primary BSS
  • the BSS on which the Auxiliary AP operates is named Auxiliary BSS. Since the operating channels of the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS overlap each other, in the description of the present invention described below, the two APs are expressed as having an overlapping AP relationship.
  • a secondary AP operated by an AP MLD has a paired Primary AP, and the operating channels of the paired secondary AP and the Primary AP overlap.
  • the Primary AP and the secondary AP support different levels of operations.
  • the Primary AP may periodically transmit a Beacon frame (including a Beacon frame and/or other types of Management frames, and a Group addressed frame), but the secondary AP may not transmit a Beacon frame (including a Beacon frame and/or other types of Management frames, and a Group addressed frame).
  • the Primary AP may support services for legacy STAs (i.e., STAs that follow standards previous to Wi-Fi 8, such as Wi-Fi 7 and Wi-Fi 6), but the secondary AP may be restricted from performing services for legacy STAs.
  • the BSS operated by the secondary AP may be a BSS in which only STAs of a non-AP MLD to which STAs that are members of the BSS (Primary BSS) operated by the Primary AP that is paired with the secondary AP belong may become members.
  • a non-AP MLD in order for a non-AP MLD to be setup on a secondary link, it must be setup together with the primary link that is paired with the secondary link. That is, when a non-AP MLD requests setup of a secondary link to the AP MLD, it must also request setup for the primary link that is paired with the secondary link. In other words, a non-AP MLD must not transmit a frame (e.g., Association Request frame) that requests setup only for the secondary link among a pair of primary and secondary links. However, when a non-AP MLD and an AP MLD have already performed setup through the primary link, the non-AP MLD can perform an additional setup request for the secondary link to the AP MLD. In this case, the frame that the non-AP MLD transmits to request addition of the secondary link may be a Link Reconfiguration Request frame.
  • a frame that the non-AP MLD transmits to request addition of the secondary link may be a Link Reconfiguration Request frame.
  • the AP MLD when the AP MLD receives a request for a multi-link setup from a non-AP MLD, if the non-AP MLD requests only the setup for the secondary link and does not request the setup for the Primary link that is paired with the secondary link, the AP MLD should not accept the setup for the secondary link. However, the non-AP MLD can request the AP MLD to perform setup for only the Primary link among the pair of Primary and Secondary links. In this case, if the non-AP MLD requests the setup for both the Primary link and the third link (requests ML setup), the ML setup connected through the AP MLD, the Primary link, and the third link can be performed.
  • AP MLD operates two (primary AP and auxiliary AP) or more than two APs (primary AP and first auxiliary AP, second auxiliary AP, etc.) with overlapping operating channels is to perform channel access through the primary 20 MHz channels of the BSS operated by each AP and to support services for non-AP MLDs through the AP that has completed channel access.
  • the primary AP and the auxiliary AP may be APs that use independent radios or APs that are operated using a single radio.
  • AP MLD performs channel access through overlapping APs, and performs channel access through only one AP at a specific time. At this time, performing channel access means performing a series of procedures for channel access, such as reducing the backoff counter according to the EDCA rules.
  • the Primary AP and the Secondary AP are configured using independent Radios.
  • the Primary AP can perform PPDU transmission through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel, while the Secondary AP can receive other PPDUs received through the Secondary channel (the Primary channel of the Secondary BSS), or perform CCA, PD (Packet detection), etc.
  • the Secondary AP with independent Radios can have the Capability to function as a general AP when it is not designated as a Secondary AP by the AP.
  • the Primary AP and the Secondary AP share a single Radio may be possible.
  • the Secondary AP when the Primary AP transmits a PPDU through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel, the Secondary AP cannot perform transmission/reception, CCA, PD, etc. for its primary channel (secondary channel). This is because if the Radio commonly used by the two APs is used for the operation of the Primary AP, there is no Radio that can be used by the Secondary AP.
  • the Primary AP and the Secondary AP are APs that exist logically separately, and can be APs that are physically operated using a single device (Radio, RF chain, antenna, etc.).
  • AP MLD can operate multiple APs (Primary AP and Secondary APs) using a single Radio. That is, AP MLD may not support channel access/PPDU transmission/reception for auxiliary APs when the channel access procedure is performed by the Primary AP or when PPDU transmission/reception is performed. In addition, when the channel access procedure is performed or PPDU transmission/reception is performed through a specific auxiliary AP, multiple APs share one radio and operate in a way that support for the Primary AP and other auxiliary APs is not required. That is, AP MLD can perform Single-Radio Multi-Link operation for the Primary link and the auxiliary link.
  • an AP MLD operating on multiple links using one Radio may lose MediumSync for the remaining links while performing channel access or PPDU transmission/reception on a specific link among the multiple links.
  • the loss of MediumSync means that the management of the NAV timer, which should have been managed by receiving other PPDUs (frames) transmitted/received on each link, was not performed. Therefore, the AP MLD that lost MediumSync for the remaining links due to an operation performed on a specific link may need to recover MediumSync before performing channel access on the other links.
  • the AP MLD may need to perform CCA on the link that lost MediumSync for a time corresponding to the MediumSync time in order to recover MediumSync for the link that lost MediumSync.
  • the AP MLD may instruct a specific non-AP MLD to transmit a specific frame (e.g., MediumSync Recovery frame) on the link that lost MediumSync in order to recover MediumSync for the link that lost MediumSync.
  • a specific frame e.g., MediumSync Recovery frame
  • the non-AP MLD which has been instructed to transmit the specific frame from the AP MLD, must transmit the specific frame to the AP MLD through the link when the link to which the AP MLD instructed to transmit the specific frame is determined to be idle (idle as a result of PHY CCA and Virtual CCA). If the instructed link is maintained in a busy state until the instructed time or a preset time has elapsed from the time when the transmission of the specific frame is instructed, the non-AP MLD may not transmit the specific frame to the AP MLD.
  • a specific frame e.g., MediumSync Recovery frame
  • FIG. 16 illustrates an example of a method for configuring an AP MLD including a primary AP and an auxiliary AP having overlapping operating channels and setting an operating channel according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • AP1 functions as the Primary AP
  • AP2 functions as the Auxiliary AP paired with the Primary AP
  • AP3 is a general AP.
  • the Primary AP and the Auxiliary AP operate on exactly the same Operating channel (specifically 320 MHz). However, the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary AP is located at the lowest 20 MHz subchannel within the Operating channel, and the Primary 20 MHz subchannel (Auxiliary channel) of the Auxiliary AP is located at the highest 20 MHz subchannel within the Operating channel.
  • the operating channel of the auxiliary AP is included in the operating channel of the primary AP.
  • the primary 20 MHz subchannel of the primary AP and the primary subchannel (auxiliary channel) of the auxiliary AP are set to different 20 MHz.
  • the Operating channel of the secondary AP and the Operating channel of the primary AP partially overlap with each other.
  • the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the primary AP and the Primary subchannel (auxiliary channel) of the secondary AP are located in the band where the Operating channels of the two APs overlap.
  • Fig. 16 (b-1) The embodiments of the present invention described below were written assuming a situation where the operating channels of the Primary AP (BSS) and the Secondary AP (BSS) completely overlap each other, as in Fig. 16 (b-1).
  • operating channel configurations such as Fig. 16 (b-2) and (b-3) are also Primary/Secondary BSS operating channel configuration methods that can be used to improve accessibility to specific operating channel(s) using the method provided by the present invention.
  • the AP MLD channel access procedure performed using the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS with an operating channel that overlaps with the Primary BSS is as follows.
  • the primary BSS and the secondary BSS operate using the same operating channel (for example, both BSSs operate on the same 320 MHz channel).
  • the primary BSS and the secondary BSS set different 20 MHz subchannels as the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • the operating channel of the secondary BSS can be a subset of the operating channel of the primary BSS.
  • the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS may be located in an 80 MHz subblock other than the 80 MHz subblock in which the primary channel of the Primary BSS is located. That is, a 20 MHz subchannel included in the Primary 80 MHz subblock of the Primary BSS cannot be set as the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS.
  • auxiliary APs form an AP pair with the Primary AP
  • the multiple auxiliary APs must each have their primary channel (auxiliary channel) set to a different 80 MHz subblock.
  • auxiliary channel primary channel
  • the three auxiliary BSSs must each have their primary channel (auxiliary channel1, auxiliary channel2, auxiliary channel3) set to the 80 MHz subblock corresponding to the lower frequency among the Secondary 80 MHz subblock and the Secondary 160 MHz subblock of the Primary BSS, and the 80 MHz subblock corresponding to the higher frequency among the Secondary 160 MHz.
  • the AP MLD performs channel access through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary BSS and then transmits the PPDU through the Primary AP. That is, the frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the Primary AP have the MAC address (TA) of the transmitting device set to the MAC address (or BSSID) of the Primary AP.
  • the Address 3 field of a frame transmitted from the Primary BSS (transmitted by the Primary AP or transmitted by an STA that is a member of the Primary BSS) may be set to the BSSID of the Primary AP depending on the values of the To DS and From DS subfields.
  • the Address 1 field (RA field) of a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that is a member of the Primary BSS is set to the BSSID of the Primary BSS when the To DS and From DS subfields are 1 and 0, respectively.
  • frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the Primary AP have the MAC address (RA) of the destination device set to the MAC address of the non-AP STA operating on the Primary link among the non-AP STAs of the non-AP MLD.
  • the PPDU is transmitted as a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU
  • the BSS Color indicated through the preamble of the PPDU is set based on the ID of the BSS operated by the Primary AP.
  • the secondary BSS is maintained in an inactive state during the section in which channel access is performed through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary BSS.
  • the secondary BSS remaining inactive means that no PPDU transmission/reception is performed through the secondary AP.
  • the secondary AP During the period in which the secondary BSS remains inactive, the secondary AP must not perform channel access through its primary channel (secondary channel). In this case, not performing channel access means that the backoff counter managed for performing channel access cannot be decreased during the inactive time period.
  • a secondary AP with an independent radio may be able to perform PHY CCA or Packet Detection even during periods when it is inactive.
  • the secondary AP can set the NAV for its primary channel (secondary channel) based on the information obtained through the received PPDU (frame).
  • the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, and the backoff counter can be reduced only when the secondary AP is active. In other words, even if the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, the backoff counter of the secondary AP (more precisely, the backoff counter for each of the four Access Categories of the secondary AP) is not reduced when the secondary AP is inactive.
  • the secondary AP may not be able to perform PHY CCA and PD, etc. when it is inactive. This may be because there is no RF (radio frequency front end) that the secondary AP can use when it is inactive. This situation may occur when the secondary AP is a logically different AP from the primary AP, but is configured to physically share one radio. In this case, the secondary AP may need to set NAV for the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time when starting a channel connection. That is, even if no PPDU (frame) is received after starting a channel connection, the channel connection should be performed by considering the medium as BUSY (busy as a result of Virtual CCA) during the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time.
  • BUSY busy as a result of Virtual CCA
  • the AP MLD switches the Primary AP (BSS) to the inactive state and the secondary AP to the active state during the TXOP period of the other BSS confirmed through the received PPDU.
  • BSS Primary AP
  • the specific secondary AP may be maintained in the inactive state.
  • the Primary AP may not be switched to the inactive state and may be maintained in the active state.
  • the operation of the Primary AP switched to the inactive state may be the same as/similar to the operation performed when the above-mentioned secondary AP is in the inactive state.
  • the time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be until the TXOP of the other BSS ends.
  • the time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be until the end time of the PPDU of the other BSS.
  • the time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be until a PPDU from another BSS is received through the Secondary BSS.
  • the time period during which the above Primary BSS remains inactive may be until after the PPDU transmitted through the channel access performed through the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS occupies the primary channel of the Primary AP.
  • the time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be limited to before the next TBTT (Target Beacon Transmission Time) of the Primary BSS. That is, when the next TBTT of the Primary BSS arrives, the Primary BSS is in an active state and the secondary BSSs are in an inactive state.
  • TBTT Target Beacon Transmission Time
  • the time period during which the Primary BSS is maintained in an inactive state may be limited to before the start time of the R-TWT (Restricted Target Wake Time) SP (Service period) operated by the Primary BSS. That is, when the start time of the R-TWT SP of the Primary BSS arrives, the Primary BSS is in an active state and the secondary BSSs are in an inactive state.
  • R-TWT Remote Target Wake Time
  • SP Service period
  • the AP MLD While the secondary AP (BSS) remains active, the AP MLD performs channel access through the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS. When the channel access procedure performed through the secondary channel is completed, the AP MLD transmits a PPDU through the secondary AP. That is, the frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the secondary AP have the MAC address (TA) of the transmitting device set to the MAC address of the secondary AP.
  • the Address 3 field of a frame transmitted from the secondary BSS (transmitted by the secondary AP or transmitted by an STA that is a member of the secondary BSS) may be set to the BSSID of the secondary AP depending on the values of the To DS and From DS subfields.
  • the Address 1 field (RA field) of a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that is a member of the secondary BSS is set to the BSSID of the secondary BSS when the To DS and From DS subfields are 1 and 0, respectively.
  • frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the secondary AP have the MAC address (RA) of the destination device set to the MAC address of the non-AP STA operating in the secondary link among the non-AP STAs of the non-AP MLD.
  • the PPDU is transmitted as a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU
  • the BSS Color indicated through the preamble of the PPDU is set based on the color of the BSS operated by the secondary AP.
  • the color of the BSS operated by the secondary AP may be the same as the BSS color of the Primary AP.
  • the Primary AP (BSS) is maintained in an inactive state during the section in which channel access is performed through the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary AP (BSS).
  • the Primary BSS remains inactive, meaning that no PPDU transmission/reception is performed through the Primary AP.
  • the Primary AP During the period in which the Primary BSS remains inactive, the Primary AP must not perform channel access through its primary channel. In this case, not performing channel access means that the backoff counter managed for performing channel access cannot be decreased during the inactive time period.
  • a Primary AP in a configuration with an independent Radio may be able to perform PHY CCA or Packet Detection even during periods when it remains inactive.
  • the Primary AP can set the NAV for its primary channel based on the information obtained through the received PPDU (frame).
  • the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, and the backoff counter can be reduced only when the Primary AP is active. In other words, even if the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, the backoff counter of the Primary AP (more precisely, the backoff counter for each of the four Access Categories of the Primary AP) is not reduced when the Primary AP is inactive.
  • the Primary AP may not be able to perform PHY CCA and PD, etc. when it is inactive. This may be because there is no RF (radio frequency front end) that the Primary AP can use when the Primary AP is inactive. This situation may occur when the Primary AP is a logically different AP from the Secondary AP, but physically shares a single radio. In this case, the Primary AP may need to set NAV for the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time when starting a channel connection. That is, even if no PPDU (frame) is received after starting a channel connection, the channel connection should be performed by considering the medium as BUSY (busy as a result of Virtual CCA) during the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time.
  • BUSY busy as a result of Virtual CCA
  • the TXOP acquired by the secondary AP may be terminated earlier than the TBTT of the primary BSS. This is a restriction to ensure that the Primary AP can transmit the Beacon frame according to the TBTT of the primary BSS. Therefore, the secondary AP must manage its TXOP so that its TXOP is terminated earlier than the next TBTT of the primary BSS. At this time, the TXOP of the secondary AP may be terminated at least T earlier than the TBTT of the primary BSS.
  • T is a time interval including the time (delay) required when the primary AP (BSS) in the inactive state transitions to the active state.
  • T may be a time interval including the time required to recover MediumSync after the primary AP transitions to the active state (for example, MediumSync time).
  • the TXOP acquired by the secondary AP may be terminated earlier than the start time of the R-TWT SP of the primary BSS.
  • This is a restriction to ensure that the primary AP can perform channel access according to the R-TWT SP of the primary BSS. Therefore, the secondary AP must manage its TXOP so that its TXOP is terminated earlier than the start time of the R-TWT SP operated in the primary BSS.
  • the TXOP of the secondary AP may be terminated at least T earlier than the start time of the R-TWT SP of the primary BSS.
  • T is a time interval including the time (delay) required when the primary AP (BSS) in the inactive state transitions to the active state.
  • T may be a time interval including the time required to recover MediumSync after the primary AP transitions to the active state (for example, MediumSync time).
  • the operation of performing channel access by the Primary AP and the Secondary AP according to the methods 1. to 4. described above is a normative channel access operation in which each AP performs channel access through its own primary channel and does not change the channel through which the channel access is performed (primary operating channel).
  • AP MLD can secure multiple access paths for a single Operating channel by setting the Operating channels of multiple APs in an overlapped form (overlapping and identically) and differentiating the primary operating channels of each AP. Accordingly, AP MLD can have a lower primary operating channel dependency than conventional Wi-Fi when accessing a specific Operating channel that operates multiple APs.
  • APs belonging to a link pair consisting of a primary AP and secondary AP(s) have the characteristic that at a certain point in time, only one AP is maintained in an active state, and the remaining APs are maintained in an inactive state.
  • TBTT means the time that AP is promised to transmit Beacon frame.
  • AP periodically transmits Beacon frame through the primary channel of BSS that it operates, and the Beacon frame transmission cycle is Beacon Interval. Therefore, each TBTT has Beacon Interval interval.
  • R-TWT SP is a type of Broadcast TWT, and is a service section for low latency traffic introduced in the Wi-Fi7 standard.
  • low latency traffic is processed with priority.
  • the ID of the traffic considered as low latency traffic is indicated by the AP. That is, when R-TWT SP is operated in a specific BSS, the traffic corresponding to the TID (Traffic ID) indicated by the AP during the R-TWT SP section is serviced with priority within the BSS.
  • TID Traffic ID
  • FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a procedure for an AP MLD to obtain a TXOP using a primary BSS and a secondary BSS according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the AP MLD performs channel access through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel (P20) of the Primary BSS. That is, the Primary BSS is active and the Secondary BSS is inactive.
  • P20 Primary 20 MHz subchannel
  • AP MLD which acquired TXOP1 through Primary BSS, performs transmission/reception with non-AP MLD through Primary link. After TXOP1 is terminated, AP MLD confirms that P20 channel of Primary AP is occupied by OBSS, switches Primary AP to inactive state and switches secondary AP to active state.
  • AP MLD performs channel access through the primary channel (A20) of the secondary AP and acquires TXOP2. During TXOP2, AP MLD performs transmission/reception with non-AP MLD through the secondary link. At this time, TXOP2 is terminated earlier than the TXOP of the OBSS confirmed by the primary AP.
  • AP MLD switches the Primary AP to the active state and switches the secondary AP to the inactive state to perform channel access through the Primary AP.
  • AP MLD performs channel access through P20 of Primary AP and acquires TXOP3 when channel access is completed.
  • TXOP3 AP MLD performs transmission/reception with non-AP MLD through Primary link, which is an active link.
  • the AP MLD can set the operating channels of a plurality of APs as overlapping operating channels, and operate one AP among the plurality of APs as a Primary AP and the remaining APs as Secondary APs.
  • an AP in an inactive state may be an AP that is in a state in which not only PPDU transmission/reception but also CCA (Virtual CCA and/or Physical CCA) is impossible.
  • the non-AP MLD if there is an inactive link (a link of an inactive AP), the non-AP MLD must not transmit a UL PPDU through the inactive link. This is because, even if the non-AP MLD transmits a UL PPDU through the inactive link, the AP that should receive the UL PPDU does not support reception of the PPDU. In other words, the UL PPDU transmission of the non-AP MLD performed on the inactive link is a transmission that is sure to fail, and can be understood as an unnecessary operation.
  • the non-AP MLD may need to determine whether to perform transmission and/or channel access in a different manner from the link on which a regular AP is operated when performing channel access through the primary link or the secondary link.
  • a non-AP MLD should not perform UL PPDU transmission via EDCA on the secondary link of an AP MLD.
  • a frame that the non-AP MLD can transmit on the secondary link may be limited to a response frame to a frame received from the secondary AP.
  • the type of the response frame transmitted by the non-AP MLD on the secondary link includes at least one of a CTS frame transmitted after receiving a RTS/MU-RTS frame, a BSR frame transmitted after receiving a BSRP trigger frame, and frames included in a TB PPDU transmitted after receiving a trigger frame.
  • the reason why the non-AP MLD is restricted from performing transmission via EDCA on the secondary link may be that it is difficult for the non-AP MLD to accurately determine whether the secondary AP is active or inactive. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can be restricted to perform UL PPDU transmission only when a frame requesting a response frame from the secondary AP is received, instead of attempting UL PPDU transmission, which is likely to fail.
  • a non-AP MLD that obtains information from an AP MLD to determine whether a specific secondary link is active may perform channel access (channel access using an EDCA mechanism, i.e., channel access performed independently, not trigger-based channel access) through a non-AP STA operating on the specific secondary link and then attempt to transmit a UL PPDU.
  • the information that allows the determination whether the specific secondary link is active may be information indicated through a frame transmitted through another AP belonging to the AP MLD.
  • the information indicated through the other AP belonging to the AP MLD may be information indicating which AP (which link) among the Primary AP and the secondary APs is active.
  • a non-AP MLD that performs channel access via a secondary link may need to transmit an RTS frame as the first frame transmitted on the secondary link.
  • a non-AP MLD may need to transmit an RTS frame as the first frame transmitted on the secondary link. If a CTS frame in response to the RTS frame transmitted as the first frame is not received from the AP, the non-AP MLD may not perform additional channel access on the secondary link.
  • non-AP MLD can use independent radios for the non-AP STA (Primary non-AP STA) operating in the Primary and the non-AP STA (Secondary non-AP STA) operating in the Secondary, or can operate the non-AP STAs of both links using a single radio.
  • the primary non-AP STA and the secondary non-AT STA are configured using independent radios.
  • the primary non-AP STA can transmit/receive PPDUs through the primary 20 MHz subchannel while the secondary non-AP STA can receive other PPDUs received through the secondary channel (primary channel of the secondary BSS) or perform CCA, PD (Packet detection), etc.
  • the secondary non-AP STA having the independent radio can have the capability to function as a general non-AP STA when associated with an AP that is not the secondary AP (for example, a Regular AP that is not the primary/secondary AP).
  • an implementation may be possible in which the primary non-AP STA and the secondary non-AP STA share a single radio.
  • the primary non-AP STA transmits/receives a PPDU through the primary 20 MHz subchannel
  • the secondary non-AP STA cannot perform transmission/reception, CCA, PD, etc. for its primary channel (secondary channel). This is because if the radio commonly used by two non-AP STAs is used for the operation of the primary non-AP STA, there is no radio that can be used by the secondary non-AP STA.
  • the primary non-AP STA and the secondary non-AP STA are non-AP STAs that exist only logically separately, and may be non-AP STAs that are physically operated using a single device (radio, RF chain, antenna, etc.).
  • the reason why the non-AP MLD can operate multiple non-AP STAs (primary non-AP STA and auxiliary non-AP STAs) using one radio is because the radio is utilized for only one non-AP STA among the multiple non-AP STAs at a specific point in time. That is, the non-AP MLD may not support channel access/PPDU transmission/reception, etc.
  • auxiliary non-AP STAs when the channel access procedure is performed by the primary non-AP STA or PPDU transmission/reception is performed.
  • PPDU transmission/reception is performed through a specific auxiliary non-AP STA
  • multiple non-AP STAs share one radio and operate in a way that support for the primary non-AP STA and other auxiliary non-AP STAs is not required. That is, the non-AP MLD can perform Single-Radio Multi-link operation for the primary link and the auxiliary link.
  • a non-AP MLD may be subject to a restriction that it can only be setup for one auxiliary link among a pair of auxiliary links for each Primary link.
  • a specific non-AP MLD may have an ML setup state including the first Primary link and the first auxiliary link, or may have an ML setup state including the first Primary link and the second auxiliary link, and may not have an ML setup state including both the first auxiliary link and the second auxiliary link. That is, a non-AP MLD may have to be setup only through one auxiliary link among the multiple auxiliary links corresponding to a specific Primary link.
  • a non-AP STA operating on a secondary link may terminate its TXOP before the next TBTT of the primary link (the TBTT of the primary BSS) when it has acquired a TXOP via EDCA. This is the same/similar behavior as the secondary AP terminating its TXOP before the TBTT of the primary BSS, so a detailed description is omitted.
  • the AP MLD since the auxiliary link (auxiliary AP, auxiliary BSS) has different characteristics from the general AP and primary link, the AP MLD must indicate which of its affiliated APs is the AP operating in the auxiliary link through the management frames it transmits.
  • the non-AP MLD that wants to perform ML setup with the AP MLD must, after receiving the management frame transmitted by the AP MLD, determine whether each AP operated by the AP MLD is a general AP, a primary AP, or a secondary AP based on the information included in the management frame.
  • a non-AP MLD that recognizes that a specific AP of the specific AP MLD is a secondary AP by receiving a Beacon frame transmitted by a specific AP MLD must not perform Multi-link setup through the specific AP (auxiliary AP). In other words, the non-AP MLD must not transmit a (ML) Probe Request frame and/or a (ML) Association Request frame to the secondary AP.
  • One way for the AP MLD to indicate what type of AP each AP is through the management frames it transmits could be by using the RNR element (Reduced Neighbor Report).
  • the AP MLD can indicate that an AP corresponding to a Neighbor AP Information field configured/set in a different manner from the Neighbor AP Information fields corresponding to other APs (third AP (normal AP) and Primary AP) among the Neighbor AP Information fields included in the RNR element that it transmits is a secondary AP.
  • a specific method by which the AP MLD indicates a secondary AP using the RNR element is described in more detail with reference to an embodiment of FIG. xx.
  • FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a format of an RNR element transmitted by an AP MLD to indicate an auxiliary AP according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 18 (a) illustrates the Reduced Neighbor Report element format.
  • the Reduced Neighbor Report element may include multiple Neighbor AP Information Fields, and the length of the element is indicated through the Length field.
  • Neighbor AP Information Fields include a Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to each AP belonging to the AP MLD transmitting the corresponding element. At this time, the Neighbor AP Information field for the AP transmitting the RNR element is not included.
  • Fig. 18(b) illustrates a method for setting a Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to an auxiliary AP belonging to an AP MLD.
  • the Neighbor AP Information Field is the same regardless of the characteristics of the corresponding AP, but the setting of the TBTT Information Header and the size of the TBTT Information Set field may be different between a general AP and an auxiliary AP. More specifically, as illustrated in Fig. 18(b), in the Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to the auxiliary AP, the TBTT Information field Type of the TBTT Information Header field may be indicated as a non-zero value (e.g., 1 or 2).
  • the TBTT Information Length indicated in the TBTT Information Header field is set to 3. That is, the TBTT information Set field is indicated as having a size of 3-octet.
  • the TBTT Information Set field includes an MLD Parameters subfield.
  • Fig. 18 (c) illustrates the MLD Parameters subfield format corresponding to the auxiliary AP.
  • the MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the auxiliary AP may be set to a value whose link ID is larger than that of the normal AP. That is, if there are multiple APs (primary AP and normal APs) and one auxiliary AP in the AP MLD, it is recommended that the link ID of the auxiliary AP be set to a value larger than that of the other APs.
  • the MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the secondary AP includes a Link ID of Primary link subfield.
  • the Link ID of Primary link subfield is a subfield indicating a link (primary link) ID of the Primary AP paired with the secondary AP.
  • the Secondary Link Indication subfield is a subfield indicating whether the AP corresponding to the corresponding MLD Parameters subfield is a secondary AP, and is indicated as 1 when included in the MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the secondary AP.
  • the Separated Radio subfield is a subfield indicating whether the secondary AP corresponding to the corresponding MLD Parameters subfield has a configuration having a radio independent from the Primary AP. That is, a secondary AP with the Separated Radio subfield set to a specific value (for example, 1) can avoid losing medium sync for the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS even when transmission/reception is performed through the Primary AP.
  • non-AP MLDs can recognize that the Neighbor AP Information field corresponds to a secondary AP by checking the Neighbor AP Information field in which the TBTT Information field Type included in the RNR element is not 0 when receiving the RNR element transmitted by the AP MLD.
  • non-AP MLDs can recognize whether the AP corresponding to the MLD Parameters subfield is a secondary AP based on a specific bit included in the MLD Parameters subfield (the secondary link Indication of FIG. 18 (c)).
  • the AP MLD can indicate that the AP corresponding to the Per-STA Profile subelement configured/configured in a different way from the Per-STA Profile subelements corresponding to other APs (third AP (normal AP) and primary AP) among the Per-STA Profile subelements included in the Multi-link element that it transmits is a secondary AP by configuring/configuring them differently.
  • the Per-STA Profile subelement configured/configured in a different way may have a subfield (bit) indicated as a specific value (for example, 0 or 1) in the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the normal AP set to a different value (for example, 1 or 0) for the secondary AP, thereby distinguishing the secondary AP from the normal AP.
  • bit a subfield indicated as a specific value (for example, 0 or 1) in the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the normal AP set to a different value (for example, 1 or 0) for the secondary AP, thereby distinguishing the secondary AP from the normal AP.
  • a non-AP MLD that recognizes that a secondary AP is in operation must not transmit a Probe Request frame to the AP MLD through the secondary link.
  • the method by which the non-AP MLD recognizes that the secondary link is in operation may be based on information indicated through the Management frame transmitted by the AP MLD.
  • AP MLD can change the AP that functions as the Primary AP among the Overlapping APs (Primary AP and Auxiliary APs).
  • the AP that initially functions as the Primary AP can be changed to the Auxiliary AP
  • the AP that functions as the Auxiliary AP can be changed to the Primary AP.
  • There can be various reasons for changing the AP that functions as the Primary AP among the Overlapping APs and one of the reasons can be that AP MLD wants to change the channel that transmits the Beacon frame.
  • the AP MLD When the AP MLD wants to change an AP (link, BSS) that will function as a Primary AP (link, BSS) among the Overlapping APs (links, BSS), it must instruct the non-AP MLDs to do so. At this time, the AP MLD can instruct, through the Management frame (e.g., Beacon frame) that it transmits, information about a new Primary AP (an AP that is a secondary AP at the time of transmitting the Management frame) and/or information related to the time point at which the Primary AP is changed.
  • the Management frame e.g., Beacon frame
  • the information that the AP MLD instructs through the Management frame can include the ID of the link on which the secondary AP to be changed to the Primary AP is operated (i.e., the link ID of the secondary link).
  • the AP MLD can instruct the number of TBTTs remaining until the time point at which the Primary AP is changed in order to instruct the time point at which the Primary AP is changed. That is, if there are 5 TBTTs of the current Primary AP until the point in time when the AP MLD wants to change the Primary AP, the AP MLD can set the value of the field related to the point in time when the Primary AP is changed to a setting (for example, 5 or 4(5-1)) based on the number of remaining TBTTs.
  • the AP MLD sets the value of the field related to the point in time when the Primary AP is changed to 1 or 0 and transmits it, and the next Beacon frame will be transmitted through the new Primary AP.
  • An AP MLD that wishes to change its Primary AP can transmit a BSS Transition Management Request frame via the existing Primary AP (the AP that will become the secondary AP after the Primary AP is changed).
  • the BSS Transition Management Request frame may be a frame that instructs non-AP STAs and non-AP MLDs that are connected (set up) only via the existing Primary AP that the service of the BSS operated by the Primary AP will be terminated.
  • the BSS Transition Management Request frame transmitted by the AP MLD may be a BSS Transition Management Request frame in which the link Removal Imminent subfield is set to 0 and the Primary link Change field is set to 1.
  • the Primary link Change field is a field that is set to 1 when a link designated as the Primary link among a pair of Primary links (APs) and secondary links (APs) having overlapping operating channels is changed (and/or is scheduled to be changed).
  • a non-AP MLD that receives a BSS Transition Management frame Request with the Primary link Channel field set to 1 may interpret the BSS Transition Management Request frame not as an end of service for the Primary BSS, but as an indication that the Primary link (AP) and the Secondary link (AP) will be changed.
  • the AP MLD must update the Neighbor AP Information field for the Secondary link and the Neighbor AP Information field for the Primary link of the RNR element transmitted after the Primary link and the Secondary link are changed, taking into consideration the changed Primary link.
  • the AP MLD may perform a Channel Switch to change the primary channel of a BSS operated by an AP functioning as a Primary AP (link) among multiple APs (links) having overlapping operating channels.
  • the AP MLD may transmit an (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element to change the primary channel of the BSS operated by the Primary AP, and a new primary channel is indicated through a New Channel Number field included in the element.
  • the new primary channel is one of the subchannels included in the existing operating channel (BW).
  • the Channel Switch Announcement element when used to change the subchannel used by the Primary BSS as the primary channel without changing the operating channel, it is possible for the new primary channel to be designated as a subchannel used by the secondary BSS, which is a pair of the Primary BSS, as the primary channel (secondary channel). If the primary channel of a new Primary BSS (indicated by the New Channel Number field) is a subchannel that the secondary BSS previously used as a primary channel (secondary channel), the AP MLD must transmit together the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for changing the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS.
  • the AP MLD that wants to change the primary channel of the Primary BSS to the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS may need to change the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS together to manage that the primary BSS and the secondary BSS do not use the same subchannel as a primary channel.
  • a non-AP MLD that receives together the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for instructing the change of the primary channel of the Primary BSS and the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for instructing the change of the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS from the AP MLD can recognize that the primary channels of the two BSSs will be switched. At this time, the two Channel Switch Announcement elements received together indicate the same value through the Channel Switch Count field.
  • the Channel Switch Mode subfield of the Channel Switch Announcement element transmitted by the AP MLD to change only the primary channel without changing the Operating channel of the Primary BSS may be set to a value (for example, 2) different from the value indicated when a general Channel Switch is performed (when the Operating channel is changed).
  • the AP MLD can transmit only the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for the Primary AP. That is, the Channel Switch Announcement element for the Primary AP (link, BSS) may be a Channel Switch Announcement element that is commonly applied to multiple APs (primary AP and paired secondary APs) having overlapping operating channels.
  • the Operating channel of the Primary BSS is changed from the first 320 MHz channel to the second 320 MHz channel through the Channel Switch Announcement element
  • the Operating channel of the secondary BSS that is paired with the Primary BSS also changes from the first 320 MHz channel to the second 320 MHz channel. That is, when an operating channel change is instructed for a specific AP (e.g., primary AP) in overlapping operating channels (overlapping AP(link, BSS) pair), an operating channel change can be implicitly instructed for another AP (e.g., secondary AP).
  • a specific AP e.g., primary AP
  • overlapping operating channels overlapping AP(link, BSS) pair
  • another AP e.g., secondary AP
  • the non-AP MLD when the non-AP MLD is instructed to change the operating channel of the Primary AP from the AP MLD, the non-AP MLD can recognize that the operating channels of the secondary AP(s) paired with the Primary AP are also changed to the same as that of the Primary AP. At this time, the new primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary AP(s) that has moved to the changed operating channel can be instructed through the RNR element included in the management frame (frame transmitted by the AP MLD) transmitted after the completion of the Channel Switch of the Primary BSS.
  • FIG. 19 illustrates a method in which a channel switch of an auxiliary BSS is instructed/performed together when a channel switch for a primary BSS is performed according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS operate on an Operating channel whose initial Center Frequency is 'X'.
  • AP MLD is transmitted by including the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element in the Beacon frame transmitted by the Primary AP to change the overlapping operating channel.
  • (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element contains information about when the Primary BSS's Channel Switch starts and the new Operating channel.
  • the Primary AP Since the Channel Switch Count value of the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element included in Beacon#1 is 2 and the Channel Switch Count value included in Beacon#2 is 1, the Primary AP starts Channel Switch after transmitting Beacon#2.
  • the Channel Switch Announcement element for the secondary AP BSS
  • the same information as the Channel Switch information indicated for the Primary AP BSS
  • the secondary AP is an AP that is paired with the Primary AP that will perform the Channel Switch.
  • the Channel Switch of the Primary BSS starts, the Channel Switch of the Secondary BSS also starts, and the changed center frequency of the Primary BSS is the same as the changed center frequency of the Secondary BSS.
  • the Operating Channels of the two BSSs remain overlapping even after the Channel Switch is completed.
  • the Primary AP transmits a Beacon#3 frame on a new operating channel
  • Beacon#3 includes an RNR element indicating information about a new primary channel (auxiliary channel, A20 in FIG. 19) of the auxiliary AP. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can check information about the new primary channel (auxiliary channel) of the auxiliary BSS by receiving the Beacon frame transmitted by the AP MLD after completing the Channel Switch of the Primary BSS.
  • the AP MLD can operate multiple APs with overlapping operating channels in order to improve accessibility to a specific operating channel.
  • One AP among the multiple APs functions as a primary AP, and the remaining APs except for the primary AP function as secondary APs.
  • the primary AP transmits a Beacon frame every Beacon interval, and supports (ML) setup procedures with non-AP STAs and non-AP MLDs, thereby supporting functions more similar to those of a general AP.
  • the secondary AP is an AP that has many restrictions, such as not transmitting a Beacon frame and not being able to be setup with a non-AP MLD that is not associated with the paired primary AP. This is because the reason why the AP MLD operates multiple APs with overlapping operating channels is to improve accessibility to the overlapping operating channels, and not to operate the secondary APs as general APs.
  • the secondary AP (link, BSS) is an AP that performs only limited operations and has a dependency on the Primary AP (link, BSS)
  • the AP MLD must utilize the information indicated through the Primary AP and the parameters used by the Primary AP in operating the secondary AP.
  • the Beacon frame of Wi-F is a frame transmitted for various purposes, such as indicating various information that non-AP STAs associated with the AP transmitting the Beacon frame should recognize, allowing non-AP STAs that are not associated to recognize (discover) the existence of the AP, and even allowing them to recognize some information about other APs (Neighbor APs) adjacent to the AP.
  • 11be by transmitting a multi-link element through the Beacon frame, it is expanded to include additional various information that non-AP MLDs should obtain, such as indicating information that the AP that transmitted the Beacon frame belongs to the AP MLD and information about other APs (links) belonging to the AP MLD.
  • the Timestamp field is a field that indicates a value related to the timing synchronization function (TSF) timer of the AP. It is a field that supports the non-AP STA to adjust its own TSF timer according to the TSF timer value of the AP to synchronize timing between the AP and the non-AP STA. All timing-based operations of the BSS are synchronized based on the TSF timer of the AP, that is, the AP functions as a timing master. Therefore, each non-AP STA must synchronize timing with the AP using the Timestamp field included in the Beacon frame transmitted by the AP.
  • TSF timing synchronization function
  • the secondary AP does not transmit a Beacon frame for its own BSS, and therefore, there is a problem that the non-AP STAs included in the BSS of the secondary AP (secondary BSS) cannot synchronize time with the secondary AP.
  • the Secondary BSS Primary BSS
  • AP, link secondary BSS
  • the secondary APs that are paired with the primary AP may have a common TSF timer.
  • the TSF timers of the primary AP and the secondary APs may be the same.
  • the value of the commonly used TSF timer is indicated to non-AP STAs (non-AP STAs and non-AP MLDs) through the Beacon frame transmitted by the primary AP. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can maintain time synchronization with the secondary APs by receiving the Beacon frame transmitted by the primary AP.
  • MLD is defined in Wi-Fi 7, and TID-to-link mapping agreement can be performed between MLDs where ML setup is performed.
  • TID-to-link mapping a non-AP MLD setup with an AP MLD over two links can perform an agreement with the AP MLD to map TID0 to TID3 to the first link and TID4 to TID7 to the second link.
  • the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD transmit only MPDU/MSDUs with TIDs 0 to 3 over the first link, and transmit MPDU/MSDUs with TIDs 4 to 7 over the second link.
  • TID-to-link mappings it is possible to apply different TID-to-link mappings to the direction in which the AP MLD transmits (DL, Down link) and the direction in which the non-AP MLD transmits (UL, Up link).
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD where TID-to-link mapping is not performed have a Default TID-to-link mapping agreement state.
  • the Default TID-to-link mapping state means that all TIDs are mapped to all setup links, that is, all types of TIDs can be transmitted without restriction through all setup links.
  • the Default TID-to-link mapping mode is applied to both DL and UL directions.
  • the TID-to-link mapping agreement between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD can be freely set through the agreement between the two MLDs, except for the constraint that all TIDs must be mapped to at least one link. In other words, there is no constraint that only certain TIDs must be mapped to certain links, or that certain TIDs must not be mapped to certain links. However, this is reasonable when it is assumed that all setup links are links on which general APs operate, and if there are auxiliary links among the setup links, additional constraints may be applied.
  • TIDs mapped to a pair of Primary links can be mapped to a secondary link.
  • TIDs mapped to a pair of Primary links can be identically mapped to a secondary link. That is, a TID that is not mapped to a pair of Primary links cannot be mapped to a secondary link. That is, a TID-to-link mapping state of a secondary link is identical to a TID-to-link mapping state of a pair of Primary links.
  • the reason why a separate TID-to-link mapping constraint exists for a secondary link may be because a secondary link is a link that cannot be kept active at the same time as a primary link.
  • the secondary link can be active only when the primary link is inactive, so the primary link remains inactive while transmission is performed on the secondary link. If a specific TID is mapped only to the primary link and not to the secondary link, the TID that is not mapped to the secondary link becomes a TID that cannot be transmitted during the time period when the primary link is inactive. This means that the TIDs that each MLD can transmit are restricted depending on whether the active link is the primary link or the secondary link, which is a very inappropriate restriction for maintaining traffic flow. Therefore, by restricting the secondary link to always have the same TID mapped to the primary link, it is possible to maintain a state where all TIDs can be transmitted through at least one setup link regardless of whether the primary link or the secondary link is active.
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD perform TID-to-link mapping, they must perform a TID-to-link mapping request in the form of always mapping the TID mapped to the primary link to the secondary link. At this time, the constraints on the mapping are applied to both directions (DL/UL).
  • the TID mapping indicated for the primary link is applied equally to the secondary link without separately indicating TID mapping information for the secondary link. That is, AP MLD and non-AP MLD may not perform separate TID-to-link mapping negotiation for the secondary link.
  • the TID mapping state for the non-negotiated secondary link may be applied equally to the TID mapping state negotiated for the primary link that is paired with the secondary link. That is, the TID mapping for the secondary link is not directly indicated/negotiated, and the TID mapping for the primary link may be applied equally. This may be interpreted that the TID-to-link mapping negotiation for the secondary link is implicitly performed/completed by the TID-to-link mapping negotiation performed for the paired primary link.
  • TID-to-link mapping negotiation can be performed between two MLDs associated through multiple links. If TID-to-link mapping negotiation is performed between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD, the AP MLD may need to indicate Traffic indication considering the TID-to-link mapping negotiated with the non-AP MLD. Similarly, the non-AP MLD may also need to perform an operation for MSDU reception considering the TID-to-link mapping when receiving a Traffic indication from the AP MLD. The reason why the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD need to perform Traffic indication indication and MSDU reception considering the TID-to-link mapping is because of the traffic transmission restriction related to the TID-to-link mapping.
  • an MLD that has performed TID-to-link mapping negotiation with a counterpart MLD must perform transmission only through the link to which the TID of the traffic to be transmitted is mapped when performing transmission to the counterpart MLD. Therefore, if the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD perform TID-to-link mapping of the non-default mode for the DL direction, the AP MLD should transmit the MSDU to the non-AP MLD only through the link on which the TID of the MSDU being queued is mapped for the DL direction in order to transmit the MSDU.
  • the non-AP MLD should transmit the PS-Poll frame only through the link on which the MSDU it is to receive can be transmitted, and if the non-AP MLD transmits the PS-Poll frame on the link on which the TID of the MSDU queued on the AP MLD side is not mapped for the DL direction, the MSDU cannot be received from the AP MLD. In this case, the non-AP MLD switches the link on which MSDU reception is impossible to the Awake, which reduces the PS efficiency and also causes a delay in MSDU transmission, making it difficult to effectively perform the operation/support of the PS mode.
  • the AP MLD in order to prevent the problem of Queuing MSDU (BU) transmission impossibility due to TID-to-link mapping, the AP MLD must indicate to each non-AP MLD through the TIM element whether there is a Queuing MSDU to be transmitted, and additionally indicate information regarding whether the MSDU should be transmitted on a link.
  • TID-to-link mapping negotiation in which all TIDs are mapped in the DL (Down link, the direction in which the AP transmits to the non-AP) direction for at least one link, no additional indication other than the presence or absence of a Queuing MSDU may be performed.
  • a non-AP MLD with a default TID-to-link mapping state or a link in which all TIDs are mapped in the DL direction can receive the Queuing MSDU without the problem of transmission impossibility due to the TID by transmitting a PS-Poll frame through the link to which all TIDs are mapped in order to receive the Queuing MSDU.
  • the method in which an AP MLD indicates to a non-AP MLD information related to whether a corresponding MSDU (BU, Queuing frame, etc.) should be transmitted in a link may be to transmit an element indicating a TID or a link ID together with a TIM element.
  • the element transmitted to indicate a TID or a link ID to the non-AP MLD may be named a Multi-link TIM element (or Multi-link Traffic Indication element).
  • the Multi-link TIM element indicates information related to whether each non-AP MLD, which is indicated by the TIM element to have a Queuing MSDU, can receive the MSDU in a link.
  • a separate link-related information indication is not required to the non-AP MLD (if it is in the default TID-to-link mapping state or if TID-to-link mapping negotiation is performed in which there is a link in which all TIDs are mapped in the DL direction), separate link-related information may not be indicated in the Multi-link TIM element.
  • a non-AP MLD that is not instructed with separate link-related information through a multi-link TIM element must transmit a PS-Poll frame on a link to which all TIDs are mapped for the DL direction to receive BUs (queuing MSDUs).
  • BUs queuing MSDUs
  • the traffic (MSDU/MPDU) of the TID that can be transmitted on the primary link according to the TID-to-link mapping status means that it is traffic that can also be transmitted on the secondary link.
  • the non-AP MLD that is set up through the secondary link is always set up through the primary link as well, and there is no non-AP STA that is associated only through the secondary link.
  • the AP MLD indicates through the Multi-link Traffic Indication element that an MSDU queued on the AP MLD side can be received through the primary link, it is self-evident that the MSDU can also be received through the secondary link. In addition, it is self-evident that an MSDU that the AP MLD can transmit through the secondary link can also be transmitted through the primary link.
  • the link ID bitmap Per-link Traffic Indication Bitmap subfield
  • each bit of the Per-link Traffic Indication Bitmap included in the Multi-link Traffic Indication element transmitted by the AP MLD corresponds to the link ID of the general AP and/or the Primary AP, and may not correspond to the link ID of the secondary AP. That is, the Traffic Indication for the secondary AP is not indicated by the AP MLD.
  • a non-AP MLD which has been instructed by the AP MLD through the TIM (traffic indication map) element, Multi-link Traffic Indication element, that there is an MSDU to be received on a specific primary link, can attempt to receive a buffered BU from the AP MLD by transmitting a PS-Poll frame through the specific primary link or a secondary link paired with the specific primary link.
  • TIM traffic indication map
  • Multi-link Traffic Indication element that there is an MSDU to be received on a specific primary link
  • the secondary BSS may need to use the same BSS color as that of the primary BSS. That is, the AP MLD sets the BSS Color field (included in HE-SIG-A of HE PPDU, in U-SIG of EHT/UHR PPDU) of the PPDU transmitted through the primary AP and the HE/EHT/UHR PPDU transmitted through the secondary AP to the same value. In addition, the non-AP MLD shall also set the BSS Color field of the PPDU transmitted through the primary BSS and the PPDU transmitted through the secondary BSS to the same value.
  • the Primary AP sets the BSS color of the Primary BSS to a new value by transmitting the BSS Color Channel Announcement element, the BSS color of the Secondary BSS is changed to the new value.
  • the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS must be set to have different BSSIDs.
  • setting the BSSIDs of the two BSSs to different values means that the BSSID of the Primary BSS and the BSSID of the Auxiliary BSS are randomly determined.
  • the secondary AP cannot transmit Beacon frames (and Probe response frames), and therefore cannot announce changes in the parameters of the secondary BSS to the member STAs of the secondary BSS.
  • parameter update of the secondary BSS can be performed via management frames transmitted by the Primary AP paired with the secondary AP, or by other APs belonging to the AP MLD. More specifically, when the parameters of the secondary BSS are updated, the AP MLD can indicate that the parameter update of the secondary BSS is in progress by using the update indication field corresponding to the secondary BSS (e.g., BSS Parameter Change Count subfield (included in the MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the secondary AP)) included in the RNR element of the management frame transmitted by the AP MLD. In this case, the non-AP MLD can recognize that the parameters of the secondary BSS have been changed via the received RNR element. Thereafter, the non-AP MLD can receive and update the parameters of the secondary BSS via the Per-STA Profile subelement of the secondary AP included in the Multi-link element transmitted by the AP MLD.
  • the update indication field corresponding to the secondary BSS e.g., BSS Parameter Change Count subfield (included
  • some present bits included in the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP must always be set to 0.
  • the Beacon Interval Present subfield of the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP is set to 0.
  • the TSF Offset Present subfield of the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP is set to 0.
  • the DTIM Info Present subfield of the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP is set to 0.
  • the reason why the above three subfields are set to 0 is because the secondary AP does not transmit a Beacon frame and uses the TSF with the same value as the Primary AP. That is, since the information indicated when the Present subfields are indicated as 1 is information that is not defined or does not need to be indicated for the secondary AP (BSS, link), the above three Present subfields are always set to 0 for the secondary AP.
  • Certain operating parameters of the secondary BSS may be dependent on the operating parameters of the primary BSS.
  • the operating BW of the secondary BSS may be changed to be the same as the operating BW of the primary BSS when the operating BW of the primary BSS is changed.
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD may have an ML setup state that includes multiple links operating on overlapping operating channels, for the purpose of improving accessibility to specific Operating channels.
  • a method can be utilized to set up multiple links with operating channels (bandwidths) located sequentially.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may attempt to enhance channel accessibility for a consecutive operating channel by establishing an ML setup connected through multiple links having consecutive operating channels within a specific channel bandwidth.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may attempt to enhance accessibility for a specific 160 MHz channel by performing the ML setup through two links that use each of two 80 MHz channels included in the specific 160 MHz channel as an Operating channel.
  • the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may attempt to enhance accessibility for a specific 320 MHz channel by performing the ML setup through two links that use each of two 160 MHz channels included in the specific 320 MHz channel as an Operating channel.
  • an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD may wish to enhance accessibility to a particular 320 MHz channel by performing ML setup over four links, each using one of the four 80 MHz channels included in that particular 320 MHz channel as its Operating channel.
  • the AP MLD and/or the non-AP MLD may perform an operation synchronized with the transmission of the second STA operating in the continuous Operating channel when performing transmission through the first STA (AP STA and/or non-AP STA) operating in the continuous Operating channel.
  • the AP MLD transmits a PPDU through the first AP operating in the first 80 MHz included in the specific 160 MHz
  • the AP MLD may perform a transmission synchronized with the second AP operating in the second 80 MHz included in the specific 160 MHz.
  • the 80 MHz PPDUs transmitted by the first AP and the second AP, respectively may be understood as the first segment and the second segment of the 160 MHz PPDU.
  • the first segment means a PPDU transmitted in the first 80 MHz segment included in the specific 160 MHz
  • the second segment means a PPDU transmitted in the second 80 MHz segment included in the specific 160 MHz.
  • the meaning that the AP MLD synchronizes the transmission of the first AP and the transmission of the second AP means that the transmission start time and the PPDU length of the PPDU transmitted through the first AP and the PPDU transmitted through the second AP are managed to be the same.
  • the first AP and the second AP transmit synchronized PPDUs, it is possible for the TXOPs acquired by the first AP and the second AP to also be synchronized.
  • the two transmitted 80 MHz PPDUs to have the same form as a single 160 MHz PPDU. That is, when the AP MLD transmits synchronized PPDUs through the first AP and the second AP, the start time and length of the TXOP acquired by the first AP and the TXOP acquired by the second AP are set to be the same.
  • a non-AP MLD when a non-AP MLD performs transmission through a first STA (AP STA and/or non-AP STA) operating on a continuous Operating channel, it can perform an operation synchronized with the transmission of a second STA operating on a continuous Operating channel.
  • AP STA and/or non-AP STA AP STA and/or non-AP STA
  • a specific description of the synchronized transmission performed by the non-AP MLD is omitted because it is the same as in the case of the AP MLD described above.
  • one link is set as a Primary link, and the remaining links(s) are set as Secondary links.
  • An AP operating on the Primary link periodically transmits Beacon frames, while an AP operating on the Secondary link does not transmit Beacon frames.
  • an operating method identical/similar to that of the Primary link and Secondary link operating on the aforementioned overlapping operating channels may be applied to the Primary link and Secondary link operating on the continuous Operating channel.
  • the same TID is mapped to the Primary link and Secondary link operating on the continuous Operating channel, and the APs and STAs operating on the Secondary link commonly use the TSF timers of the APs and STAs operating on the Primary link.
  • FIG. 20 illustrates a configuration of an AP MLD including a primary AP and a secondary AP having continuous operation channels and a method for setting operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • AP1 functions as the Primary AP
  • AP2 functions as the Auxiliary AP paired with the Primary AP
  • AP3 is a general AP.
  • the Primary AP and the Secondary AP operate on consecutive Operating channels (two 160 MHz channels located on a specific 320 MHz channel).
  • AP MLD and non-AP MLD connected through multiple links with continuous operating channels can communicate in the following manner.
  • STAs (AP STA and non-AP STA) operating on each link (primary link and secondary link(s)) perform a backoff procedure through the primary channel of each link. STAs operating on the secondary link maintain the backoff counter at 0 when the backoff procedure is completed.
  • the MLD including the STA initiates transmission through the primary link and the secondary link for which the backoff procedure has already been completed (including links completed simultaneously with the primary link). At this time, the MLD performs the transmissions performed on the primary link and the secondary link as synchronized transmissions.
  • the MLD including the STA performs transmission through the secondary link when the backoff procedure of the STA operating on the secondary link is completed. If, at the time when the backoff procedure of the STA operating on the primary link is interrupted, the backoff procedure of the STA operating on the secondary link has already been completed and the backoff counter was maintained at 0, the MLD must newly generate a backoff counter of the STA operating on the secondary link and then perform the backoff procedure. At this time, the Retry counter and CW (Contention Window) of the STA operating on the secondary link are not changed.
  • the interruption of the backoff procedure means a case where the decrease of the backoff counter is interrupted, such as a situation where the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS.
  • the MLD can occupy consecutive operating channels simultaneously by initiating synchronized transmission through the primary link and the secondary links for which the backoff procedure has already been completed.
  • the MLD can initiate transmission through the secondary link as described in 2-2 above.
  • the MLD that initiates transmission through the secondary link terminates the TXOP acquired through the secondary link before the time at which the backoff procedure on the primary link is expected to be able to continue (for example, the time at which the NAV of the STA operating on the primary link is expected to become 0).
  • FIG. 21 illustrates a channel access method of an MLD that operates an STA on two links having continuous operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the primary link and the secondary link are operated within a specific 160 MHz channel.
  • the procedure for obtaining the first TXOP by MLD is as follows.
  • MLD first completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) on A20 (Primary 20 MHz channel of BSS operated on the secondary link) of the secondary link, but does not initiate transmission on the secondary link, and performs an operation of maintaining the backoff counter of the secondary link to 0 in order to perform transmission synchronized with the primary link.
  • MLD completes the channel access procedure on P20 (Primary 20 MHz channel of BSS operated on the primary link) of the primary link, it initiates transmission not only through the primary link but also through the secondary link whose backoff counter is already 0.
  • MLD performs synchronized transmission through STAs of the primary link and the secondary link.
  • the two 80 MHz PPDUs transmitted by MLD through the two links are indicated as having a BW field of 160 MHz, so that external terminals can recognize them as one 160 MHz PPDU.
  • MLD When MLD completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) on A20 of the secondary link (the primary 20 MHz channel of the BSS operating on the secondary link), it initiates transmission on the secondary link, considering that the primary link is occupied by the OBSS. At this time, the TXOP (or PPDU) initiated on the secondary link is terminated before the time when the TXOP of the OBSS occupying the primary link is expected to end.
  • MLD When MLD completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) on P20 of the primary link, it initiates TXOP on the primary link. After MLD initiates transmission on the primary link, it loses the CCA capability for the secondary link, and therefore the backoff counter of the secondary link may not decrease below 3. However, MLD capable of performing CCA on the secondary link may also continuously decrease the backoff counter of the secondary link.
  • a channel access method using a non-primary channel can be considered as a method for improving the channel accessibility of a Wi-Fi STA, and in the case of MLD, a method for enhancing channel accessibility using the characteristics of MLD (such as the above-described Overlapping BSS) can be utilized.
  • MLD Mobile Broadband Low-Bidelity
  • the common feature of the various channel access methods provided in the present invention is that a transmitting device does not perform channel access only through one primary channel, but performs channel access using another channel (such as a non-primary channel or a primary channel of an auxiliary link) when the primary channel is occupied by another device.
  • a transmitting device can initiate transmission on a channel other than the primary channel
  • a receiving device must also wait for PPDU reception on a subchannel other than the primary channel (such as a non-primary channel or the primary channel of an auxiliary link) when the state of the primary channel it observes is BUSY.
  • a PPDU transmitted by an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) that has performed channel access through a non-primary channel is not transmitted by occupying the primary channel, but a PPDU transmitted by an STA that has performed channel access through the primary channel can be transmitted by occupying the non-primary channel. This is because the state of the primary channel determined by an STA that has performed channel access through a non-primary channel is always BUSY, and an STA that has performed channel access through the primary channel performs channel access through the primary channel regardless of the state of the non-primary channel.
  • the transmitting device can transmit a PPDU occupying both the primary channel and the non-primary channel
  • the receiving device which determines that the primary channel is BUSY, can receive the PPDU via the non-primary channel. That is, the device receiving the PPDU via the non-primary channel can receive both the PPDU transmitted by the transmitting device after performing channel access via the primary channel and the PPDU transmitted by the transmitting device after performing channel access via the non-primary channel, and can have difficulty in interpreting which index of its RU (or MRU (Multiple-RU)) is indicated by the RU Allocation subfield of the received PPDU.
  • MRU Multiple-RU
  • the transmitting device and the receiving device can have different judgments regarding the state (IDLE or BUSY) of the primary channel, and accordingly, the channel through which the transmitting device performed channel access and the channel through which the receiving device starts receiving the PPDU can be different from each other.
  • the procedure by which a conventional Wi-Fi STA instructs and acquires RU Allocation information is briefly described through an embodiment of FIG. 22.
  • RU may be interpreted to collectively mean not only conventional RUs such as 26, 52, 106, 242, 484, 996, 996 x N (N is a natural number greater than 2)-tone size RUs, but also MRUs (e.g., 52+26, 106+26, 484+242, 996+484-tone size RUs, etc.).
  • the transmitting device can determine the primary channel and the non-primary channel as idle, but the receiving device can determine the primary channel as busy and the non-primary channel as idle.
  • the transmitting device can transmit a PPDU that occupies both the primary channel and the non-primary channel.
  • the receiving device cannot receive the PPDU on the primary channel because the primary channel is busy, and can receive the PPDU through the non-primary channel. Since the receiving device received the PPDU through the non-primary channel, it can interpret the fields included in the PPDU (e.g., RU allocation subfield, etc.) based on the non-primary channel. However, the transmitting device can generate the fields based on the primary channel and include them in the PPDU.
  • the receiving device interprets the fields included in the received PPDU based on the non-primary channel, it can interpret the fields included in the PPDU differently from the transmitting device. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to enable the receiving device to interpret the fields included in the PPDU based on the primary channel.
  • the receiving device can interpret the fields included in the PPDU based on the primary channel even if the receiving device receives the PPDU on the non-primary channel.
  • instruction information indicating that a non-primary channel should interpret fields included in a PPDU based on a primary channel may be included and transmitted in the PPDU.
  • FIG. 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for performing resource unit allocation to each STA using a resource unit allocation subfield and a resource unit allocation subfield indicated through a preamble of a PPDU and a method for indicating a content channel.
  • Fig. 22 (a) represents a situation in which two 484-tone RUs and one 996-tone RU in the 160 MHz band are allocated to STAs A, B, C, and D.
  • STA A and STA B are allocated RU#1 (484-tone size RU) located in the lowest frequency region
  • STA C is allocated RU#2 (484-tone size RU)
  • STA D is allocated RU#3 (996-tone size RU).
  • a transmitting device transmitting a PPDU that allocates RUs indicates the RU configuration and information of an STA to which each RU is allocated through a Signaling field (e.g., HE/EHT/UHR SIG field) included in a DL PPDU.
  • a Signaling field e.g., HE/EHT/UHR SIG field
  • the Signaling fields transmitted through each 20 MHz subchannel may include the same or different Content channels.
  • Fig. 22 (b) illustrates the configuration of Content channels.
  • Each Content channel includes an RU Allocation subfield and a User field.
  • the RU Allocation subfields included in Content channel#1 correspond to the odd-numbered 20 MHz subchannels (see Fig. 22 (a))
  • the RU Allocation subfields included in Content channel#2 correspond to the even-numbered 20 MHz subchannels (see Fig. 22 (a)).
  • Each RU Allocation subfield included in a content channel indicates RU information for each corresponding 20 MHz subchannel. More specifically, the first and second RU Allocation subfields included in content channel#1 indicate RU information corresponding to 20 MHz #1 and 20 MHz #3 subchannels, respectively, and the first and second RU Allocation subfields included in content channel#2 indicate RU information corresponding to 20 MHz #2 and 20 MHz #4, respectively.
  • the 20 MHz #1 subchannel corresponds to RU#1, and therefore, the first RU Allocation subfield included in Content channel#1 indicates information about RU#1.
  • the RU Allocation subfield also indicates the number information of the User to be allocated the corresponding RU, and among the User fields indicated after the RU Allocation subfields, a User field of a designated number is interpreted as having been allocated the RU indicated through the corresponding RU Allocation subfield.
  • the first RU Allocation subfield included in Content channel#1 indicates 1 User, and therefore RU#1 is allocated to STA A corresponding to the first User field included in Content channel#1. Since the second RU Allocation subfield included in Content channel#1 indicates RU#2 corresponding to 20 MHz#3 and indicates 1 User, RU#2 is allocated to STA C corresponding to the second User field included in Content channel#1.
  • Content channels#1 and #2 appear alternately every 20 MHz band, and the specific indicated positions can be confirmed through (c) of Fig. 22. Therefore, an STA that wishes to confirm the position of the RU allocated to it receives two types of Content channels received through a specific 40 MHz band (e.g., a specific 40 MHz band included in the Primary 40 MHz, Secondary 40 MHz, or Secondary 80/160 MHz band), confirms whether its corresponding User field is included in the Content channel, and then confirms the information of the RU indicated by the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field, thereby obtaining the RU information allocated to it.
  • a specific 40 MHz band e.g., a specific 40 MHz band included in the Primary 40 MHz, Secondary 40 MHz, or Secondary 80/160 MHz band
  • confirms whether its corresponding User field is included in the Content channel and then confirms the information of the RU indicated by the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field, thereby obtaining the RU information allocated to it.
  • Figure 23 illustrates the ambiguity problem of allocation RU interpretation of an STA that receives a preamble on a non-primary channel.
  • Case 1 and Case 2 of Figure 23 illustrate the cases of a DL MU PPDU transmitted by an AP performing channel access on a primary 20 MHz channel and a DL MU PPDU transmitted by an AP performing channel access on a secondary 20 MHz channel, respectively.
  • Case 1 occurs when the AP determines that the primary channel (primary 20 MHz subchannel) is IDLE and the STA determines that the primary channel is Busy.
  • Case 2 occurs when both the AP and STA determine that the primary channel is Busy.
  • the STA waits for the reception of PPDU through S20, receives the preamble, and by receiving the Content channel included in the preamble, confirms that the RU allocated to it is a 242-tone size RU located in the lowest frequency band.
  • the STA has a problem in that it cannot determine whether the RU allocated to it is the RU corresponding to Case 1 or the RU corresponding to Case 2.
  • the following two methods can be used to resolve the ambiguity in the interpretation of allocation RUs of such receiving devices.
  • the receiving device interprets the RU Allocation subfield in different ways by considering whether the device that transmitted the received PPDU transmitted it after performing channel access through the primary channel or after performing channel access through the non-primary channel.
  • the different ways of interpreting the RU Allocation subfield mean that the frequencies used as a reference when interpreting the positions of the RUs indicated by the RU Allocation subfield are different.
  • the subchannel to which a specific order of RU Allocation subfields indicated by the UHR-SIG (or EHT-SIG, HE-SIG) field corresponds may be different depending on whether the device transmitting the PPDU including the corresponding SIG field performed channel access on the primary channel or on the non-primary channel.
  • the transmitting device can apply a setting to the signaling fields (e.g., Bandwidth, RU Allocation subfield, Puncturing information, etc.) of the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access on the non-primary channel, indicating that the band including the primary channel is punctured in the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the primary channel. That is, the transmitting device can set the signaling fields of the non-primary channel PPDU in the same manner as the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the primary channel, but can indicate that the band including the primary channel (e.g., Primary 80 MHz segment) is punctured. In this case, the receiving device can obtain the RU information allocated to it by interpreting the received PPDU as if it were transmitted by the device performing channel access on the primary channel, regardless of which channel the device transmitting the received PPDU used to perform channel access.
  • the signaling fields e.g., Bandwidth, RU Allocation subfield, Puncturing information, etc.
  • the receiving device must determine whether the received PPDU is transmitted by the transmitting device that completed channel access through the primary channel or by the transmitting device that completed channel access through the non-primary channel, and interpret the RU Allocation subfield in different ways.
  • the RU Allocation subfield means the RU Allocation subfield included in the Signaling field (e.g., included in the HE-SIG, EHT-SIG, UHR-SIG fields, etc.) located in the Preamble of the MU PPDU and/or the RU Allocation subfield located in the User field included in the trigger frame.
  • the method by which a receiving device determines on which channel a transmitting device has transmitted a PPDU after performing a channel connection may utilize direct information or indirect information indicated by the transmitting device.
  • an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) that transmits a first PPDU after performing channel access through a non-primary channel may set a specific field of the first PPDU in a different manner from a specific field of a second PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the primary channel.
  • the specific subfield may be a field included in a U-SIG (Universal SIG field).
  • U-SIG Universal SIG field
  • an STA that transmits a PPDU after performing channel access through the primary channel may set a specific field of the U-SIG to 0, and an STA that transmits a PPDU after performing channel access through a non-primary channel may set the specific field of the PPDU to a non-zero value.
  • a device that has received a PPDU may determine, based on the specific field, whether the device that transmitted the PPDU performed channel access through the primary channel and transmitted the PPDU or performed channel access through the non-primary channel and transmitted the PPDU.
  • the receiving device may determine a channel access method of the transmitting device on its own. For example, a receiving device that receives an 80 MHz PPDU occupying a secondary 80 MHz segment from an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) of a BSS having an operating BW of 160 MHz can recognize that the STA transmitted the 80 MHz PPDU after performing channel access through a non-primary channel located in the secondary 80 MHz segment. That is, the receiving device can obtain information on the channel on which the transmitting device performed channel access based on BW information of the received PPDU.
  • STA AP STA and non-AP STA
  • a receiving device of a PPDU interprets the RU Allocation subfield included in the received PPDU in the following manner based on whether the received PPDU was received from a device performing Channel Access over a primary channel or from a device performing Channel Access over a non-primary channel.
  • the receiving device interprets the RU Allocation subfield received on a non-primary channel in the same way as the RU Allocation subfield received on the primary channel.
  • the receiving device interprets the RU Allocation subfield received on the non-primary channel as if it was transmitted by a device using the non-primary channel as a primary channel. That is, the receiving device interpreting the RU Allocation subfield received on the non-primary channel must interpret the received RU Allocation subfield considering that the receiving device is a primary channel and that an 80 MHz segment including the non-primary channel is a primary 80 MHz segment.
  • the receiving device when the receiving device interprets the position of the RU indicated through the RU Allocation subfield received on the non-primary channel, the receiving device can confirm the position of the RU allocated to it by interpreting that the position of the RU indicated through the RU Allocation subfield has been changed by a frequency offset between its primary channel and the non-primary channel.
  • the transmitting device when transmitting a PPDU after performing channel access over a non-primary channel, the transmitting device sets the signaling fields of the PPDU in the same manner as when transmitting a PPDU after performing channel access over the primary channel.
  • the transmitting device since the transmitting device performs secondary channel access during a time period in which the primary channel is determined to be busy, the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access over the non-primary channel is always transmitted without occupying the primary channel. That is, when transmitting a PPDU after performing channel access on a non-primary channel, the transmitting device must transmit the PPDU in a form of puncturing the primary channel (in a form that does not occupy the primary channel).
  • a transmitting device that performs channel access through a non-primary channel located in a secondary 80 MHz segment band because the primary channel is determined to be busy must set the BW field of the PPDU to 160 MHz when transmitting a PPDU through the secondary 80 MHz segment band and indicate that Preamble Puncturing is applied to the subchannel where the primary 20 MHz channel is located.
  • a method of applying Preamble Puncturing to the subchannel located in the primary 20 MHz channel may be to puncture the primary 20 MHz subchannel or to puncture the entire band including the primary 20 MHz subchannel (e.g., the primary 40 MHz band or the primary 80 MHz segment, etc.).
  • the limitation of conventional Wi-Fi that Preamble Puncturing should not be applied to the Primary 20 MHz subchannel may not be applied to PPDUs transmitted after performing channel access on a non-primary channel.
  • the receiving device can determine whether the transmitting device performed channel access through the primary channel or the non-primary channel based on the RU Allocation subfield included in the PPDU. More specifically, the receiving device can recognize that the device transmitting the PPDU performed channel access through the non-primary channel when the RU Allocation subfield of the received PPDU indicates that the RU located on the primary channel has been punctured.
  • the RU Allocation subfield indicating that the RU has been punctured means the RU Allocation subfield interpreted as 'Punctured 242-tone RU'.
  • the 20 MHz subchannel indicated as the Punctured 242-tone RU is a subchannel that is not occupied because puncturing is applied to the PPDU.
  • the receiving device can interpret the RU Allocation subfield in the same way regardless of whether the channel used by the device transmitting the PPDU for channel access is a primary channel or a non-primary channel.
  • FIG. 24 illustrates a method for an AP performing channel access through a non-primary channel to indicate BW and RU allocation information of a PPDU according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the AP performs channel access through a non-primary channel and then transmits an 80 MHz PPDU occupying a secondary 80 MHz segment.
  • the AP indicates through the U-SIG of the PPDU that the BW of the PPDU is 160 MHz.
  • the indicated PPDU BW can be determined as a BW that includes the frequency band actually occupied by the PPDU and the primary channel.
  • the AP since the PPDU that the AP actually transmits does not occupy the Primary 80 MHz segment band, the AP does not allocate RUs through the RU Allocation subfields corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment band among the RU Allocation subfields included in the PPDU. At this time, the AP indicates that the corresponding subchannel is punctured through the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment.
  • An STA receiving a PPDU from an AP recognizes that the received PPDU is a PPDU of 160 MHz BW, and checks the RU Allocation subfields to confirm the RU allocated to it.
  • the STA confirms that the subchannel corresponding to the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field is the 20MHz #5 subchannel included in the Secondary 80 MHz Segment. Therefore, the STA can recognize that the RU allocated to it is the RU located at 20MHz #5. At this time, the STA can confirm that the RU allocated to it does not exist in the Primary 80 MHz segment by receiving the RU Allocation subfields corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment among the received RU Allocation subfields.
  • the STA can clearly recognize that the band corresponding to the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field is 20 MHz #5.
  • a trigger frame is a Wi-Fi Control frame that causes a response from a receiving device in the manner instructed/requested by the transmitting device.
  • an AP can instruct a STA to respond with a TB PPDU by transmitting a Basic trigger frame to the STA.
  • the basic trigger frame includes a Common Info field and a User Info field, and a brief description of the Common Info field and the User Info field is as follows.
  • the Common Info field is a field that includes information that is commonly indicated to multiple STAs that will respond to the TB PPDU, such as the length of the TB PPDU, whether an additional trigger frame is transmitted, whether the Carrier sensing result should be considered when responding to the TB PPDU, and UL BW information that should be recorded in the BW field of the TB PPDU.
  • the User Info field indicates information about the RU to which each STA must respond to the TB PPDU, the FEC Coding method, MCS information to be applied to the TB PPDU, DCM (dual carrier modulation), target Rx power information, etc., and each STA responds to the TB PPDU based on the information obtained through the User Info field corresponding to itself.
  • the MU-RTS trigger frame that can be utilized for protection is also a type of trigger frame, and an AP that wants to transmit a DL MU PPDU can perform protection with multiple STAs at once by transmitting an MU-RTS frame requesting a CTS frame response from one or more STAs.
  • a detailed description of the MU-RTS trigger frame is as follows.
  • MU-RTS is a type of trigger frame.
  • STAs whose AID12 (LSB 12 bits of Association ID) is indicated by the User field included in the MU-RTS frame must simultaneously respond with a CTS frame.
  • the AP performs TXOP protection using the MU-RTS frame, since multiple STAs respond with the CTS frame, there is an advantage in that the TXOP can be protected from the adjacent devices of each of the multiple STAs, which are the destination devices of the DL MU PPDU (Down link multi user PPDU).
  • the MU-RTS frame can also be used for the purpose of protecting the UL MU PPDU.
  • the AP can transmit an MU-RTS frame to cause the multiple STAs, which are to respond with the TB PPDU, to respond with the CTS frame.
  • the CTS frame to which the above multiple STAs responded serves to induce the neighbor STAs of each STA to set NAVs that protect the TB PPDU and the Ack frame (Ack, Block Ack, etc.) to be transmitted after the TB PPDU, and through this, even the legacy STAs that cannot recognize (interpret, decode) the trigger frame and TB PPDU may not perform channel access during the packet exchange sequence section (or TXOP) that starts through the trigger frame.
  • the legacy STAs that cannot recognize (interpret, decode) the trigger frame and TB PPDU may not perform channel access during the packet exchange sequence section (or TXOP) that starts through the trigger frame.
  • Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a transmission/TXOP protection method using MU-RTS frame and CTS frame.
  • the AP before transmitting an MU PPDU, transmits an MU-RTS frame to STA1 and STA2, which are the destination devices of the MU PPDU, and STA1 and STA2 receive the MU-RTS frame and respond with a CTS frame each after SIFS.
  • STA1_Neighbor a neighbor STA of STA1, sets its NAV based on the information indicated in the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by STA1.
  • STA2_Neighbor a neighbor STA of STA2, sets its NAV based on the information indicated in the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by STA2.
  • STA1_Neighbor and STA2_Neighbor perform operations such as not decreasing the backoff counter, considering that the Virtual CS (Virtual Carrier Sense) is busy while the NAV (counter) set after receiving the CTS frame is maintained as a non-zero value.
  • Virtual CS Virtual Carrier Sense
  • the AP may not be interrupted by the neighbor terminals while transmitting the MU PPDU and STA1 and STA2 respond with an Ack frame.
  • the trigger frame described above is a frame type defined in 11ax, and is a frame type in which the Type (B3 B2) and Subtype (B7 B6 B5 B4) subfields of the Frame Control field are set to 01 and 0010, respectively. That is, the trigger frame is a frame of the Control Type in which the Type subfield of the Frame Control field is 01, and the Subtype value 0010 is used to indicate that it is a trigger frame type.
  • a trigger frame is defined so that an AP can request response frames from multiple STAs at a time
  • the MU-RTS frame described above (a type of trigger frame) is used so that an AP can request CTS frames from multiple STAs (non-AP STAs).
  • Trigger Types other than MU-RTS include Basic Tigger frame (UL MU PPDU request), Beamforming Report Poll Tigger frame (Beamforming Report request), MU-BAR Tigger frame (BlockAck request), Buffer Status Report Poll Tigger frame (Buffer Status Report request), GCR MU-BAR Tigger frame, Bandwidth Query Report Poll Tigger frame, and NDP Feedback Report Poll Tigger frame.
  • Figure 26 illustrates the format of a trigger frame.
  • a trigger frame consists of a MAC Header including a Frame Control field, a Common Info field, a User Info List field, a Padding field, and an FCS field.
  • the Frame Control field includes Type and Subtype subfields, and in the trigger frame, the two subfields are set to 01 and 0010, respectively.
  • the Common Info field includes a Trigger Type subfield for indicating the Type of the trigger frame, a UL Length subfield for indicating the length of a UL transmission to be responded to, and the details are described in detail through an embodiment of FIG. 27.
  • the User Info List field includes 0 or 1 or more User Info fields including information for indicating a target device of a trigger frame.
  • the User Info field includes, in addition to the information for indicating the target device, parameter information (UL DCM, UL MCS, etc.) that the target device must utilize when transmitting a response frame after receiving the trigger frame, depending on the Type of the trigger frame.
  • parameter information UL DCM, UL MCS, etc.
  • the padding field is added to ensure that destination devices of the trigger frame have time to prepare a response frame (e.g., UL TB PPDU, CTS frame, etc.) after receiving the trigger frame, and the AP transmitting the trigger frame can adjust the length of the padding field considering the performance of the destination devices.
  • a response frame e.g., UL TB PPDU, CTS frame, etc.
  • the AP transmitting the trigger frame can adjust the length of the padding field considering the performance of the destination devices.
  • 11be Wi-Fi 7, EHT
  • the end time of a PPDU including a trigger frame may be added/adjusted to align it with another PPDU, but since it is not related to the content that the present invention intends to provide, a detailed description is omitted.
  • the FCS (Frame Check Sequence) field contains a 32-bit CRC (Cyclic redundancy code), and is a calculated value including the MAC Header and Frame Body fields.
  • the function and setting method of the FCS field of the trigger frame are the same as the function and setting method of the FCS field included in the conventional MAC frame, so a separate explanation is omitted.
  • Figure 27 illustrates an example of the format of the common information field of a trigger frame.
  • the trigger Type subfield (4 bits) is used to indicate the type (type, variant) of the trigger frame. If the trigger Type subfield is set to 0, it indicates Basic, 1 indicates BFRP (Beamforming Report Poll), 2 indicates MU-BAR, 3 indicates MU-RTS, 4 indicates BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll), 5 indicates GCR MU-BAR, 6 indicates BQRP (Bandwidth Query Report Poll), and 7 indicates NFRP (NDP Feedback Report Poll).
  • the UL Length subfield indicates the value that should be set in the L-SIG LENGTH field of the TB PPDU responded to via the trigger frame.
  • the More TF subfield is used to indicate whether there are more trigger frames to be transmitted after the corresponding trigger frame.
  • the CS Required subfield indicates whether the destination device of the trigger frame must perform CS (Physical & Virtual CS, ED & NAV) when transmitting a response frame.
  • CS Physical & Virtual CS, ED & NAV
  • the UL BW subfield indicates the BW value that STAs responding with a TB PPDU after receiving a trigger frame must indicate in the Preamble (e.g. HE-SIG-A or U-SIG).
  • the GI And HE/EHT-LTF Type/Triggered TXOP Sharing Mode subfield indicates the GI (Guard interval) and HE (EHT)-LTF values of the TB PPDU to be responded to, or the Sharing mode when the MU-RTS trigger frame is utilized for TXOP sharing using the MU-RTS TXS (TXOP Sharing) trigger frame.
  • the MU-MIMO HE(EHT)-LTF Mode subfield indicates information regarding the HE(EHT)-LTF mode that should be applied to the TB PPDU to be responded to.
  • the Number Of HE/EHT-LTF Symbols subfield indicates the number of HE(EHT)-LTF symbols that should be applied to the TB PPDU when the Doppler subfield is indicated as 0, and indicates the number of HE(EHT)-LTF symbols and information related to the periodicity of midamble when the Doppler subfield is indicated as 1.
  • the LDPC Extra Symbol Segment subfield indicates whether an LDPC extra symbol segment should appear in the responding TB PPDU. If the LDPC Extra Symbol Segment subfield is set to 1, an LDPC extra symbol segment must appear in the TB PPDU.
  • the AP Tx Power subfield indicates a value related to the transmit power of the AP used when transmitting the trigger frame.
  • the STA can perform Power Control when responding with a response frame based on the value indicated in the AP Tx Power subfield.
  • the Pre-FEC Padding Factor and PE Disambiguity subfields indicate whether the Pre-FEC Padding Factor is 1, 2, 3, or 4, and information to clarify the length of the PE (Packet Extension).
  • the UL Spatial Reuse subfield consists of four Spatial Reuse subfields and indicates the values to be set in the Spatial Reuse fields (HE-SIG-A) of the HE TB PPDU to be responded to.
  • HE-SIG-A Spatial Reuse fields
  • the Doppler subfield indicates whether the TB PPDU to be responded to includes a midamble.
  • the trigger frame that responds with an EHT TB PPDU may have the Doppler subfield reserved.
  • the subfield being reserved may mean that an STA that responds with an EHT TB PPDU after receiving a trigger frame operates without considering the existence and setting value of the subfield.
  • the HE/EHT P160 subfield indicates whether the responded TB PPDU is responded as a HE TB PPDU or an EHT TB PPDU on the channel corresponding to P160 MHz.
  • the Special User Info Field Present subfield indicates whether the User Info field with the AID12 subfield set to 2007 appears among the User Info fields.
  • the Trigger Dependent Common Info subfield is a field that appears only when the type of trigger frame indicated by the Trigger Type field is a Basic trigger frame or an NFRP trigger frame.
  • Figure 28 illustrates an example of the format of the user information field of a trigger frame.
  • the AID12 subfield indicates information related to which STA the User Info field is for. That is, an STA for which a value identical to its own AID is indicated in the AID12 subfield of a specific User Info field can recognize that the trigger frame includes itself as a target device. At this time, the AID12 subfield can be set to 1 to 2006 (1 to 2007 in case of an HE trigger) when indicating one associated STA.
  • the AID12 subfield can be set to 0 when one or more RA-RU (Random Access RU) is to be allocated to associated STAs. That is, STAs associated with an AP can attempt TB PPDU transmission using RA-RU if there is no User Info field of AID12 in which its AID is indicated in the received trigger frame and there is a User Info field in which AID12 is indicated as 0.
  • RA-RU Random Access RU
  • the AID12 subfield can be set to 2045 or 2044 when one or more RA-RUs are to be allocated to unassociated STAs. That is, STAs that are not associated with an AP can attempt to transmit a TB PPDU using RA-RU if a User Info field in which AID12 is indicated as 2045 and 2044 exists in the received trigger frame. At this time, an STA responding to a TB PPDU through RA-RU must respond with a HE TB PPDU if AID12 is indicated as 2045, and must respond with an EHT TB PPDU if AID12 is indicated as 2044.
  • the AID12 subfield can be set to a preset value such as 4095 or 4094, and if the AID12 subfield is indicated as a preset value, it means that the padding field starts from the corresponding AID12 subfield. That is, if the AID12 subfield of the trigger frame is indicated as a value (preset) indicating the start of the padding field, the STA can recognize that the padding field has started and may not attempt to parse the remaining part of the MAC frame.
  • a preset value such as 4095 or 4094
  • the User Info field in which the AID12 subfield is indicated as 2046 may include information about an unallocated RU. More specifically, if the AID12 subfield of a specific User Info field is indicated as 2046, the RU indicated by the RU Allocation subfield included in the specific User Info field may be an unallocated RU.
  • the RU Allocation subfield of other trigger frames indicates the size and location information of the RU (Resource Unit)/MRU (Multiple Resource Unit) allocated to the destination device (STA indicated via the AID12 subfield) of the corresponding User Info field.
  • the RU Allocation subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame is utilized to indicate the channel on which the destination device of the corresponding User Info field should respond to the CTS frame.
  • the RU Allocation subfield of the MU-RTS frame indicates whether the destination STA should respond to the CTS frame only on the Primary 20 MHz channel or on the Primary 40 MHz / Primary 80 MHz / Primary 160 MHz / 80 + 80 MHz / (Primary) 320 MHz (in case of transmission by EHT/UHR AP) channel.
  • the AP may indicate one of values 61 to 64 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield in the User Info field of a specific STA to indicate that the specific STA will respond to the CTS frame through Primary 20 MHz, may indicate 65 or 66 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield to indicate that the specific STA will respond to the CTS frame through Primary 40 MHz, may indicate 67 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield to indicate that the CTS frame will be responded to through Primary 80 MHz, and may indicate 68 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield to indicate that the CTS frame will be responded to through Primary 160 MHz.
  • the indication to respond to the CTS frame through Primary 320 MHz channel is performed by indicating 69 through B7-B1.
  • the PS160 subfield of the User Info field which instructs to respond to the CTS frame through Primary 20/40/80/160 MHz, is set to 0
  • the PS160 subfield of the User Info field which instructs to respond to the CTS frame through (Primary) 320 MHz, is set to 1.
  • the UL FEC Coding Type subfield indicates the code type of the TB PPDU to be responded to. If the UL FEC Coding Type subfield is 0, it indicates BCC (binary convolution coding), and if it is 1, it indicates LDPC (low density parity check).
  • the UL EHT-MCS subfield indicates the EHT-MCS to which the responding TB PPDU should be applied.
  • the SS Allocation/RA-RU Information subfield can be used as the RA-RU Information subfield when the AID12 subfield is not a value indicating that RA-RU is allocated, that is, when it is indicated as 0, 2044, or 2045, and can be used as the SS Allocation subfield when the AID12 subfield is indicated as a value other than 0, 2044, or 2045.
  • the 6 bits corresponding to the SS Allocation subfield can be used as the Starting Spatial Stream subfield 4 bits and the Number Of Spatial Streams subfield 2 bits.
  • the UL Target Receive Power subfield indicates the predicted signal power value at which the TB PPDU to be responded to will be received at the antenna side of the AP. Therefore, when the STA responds with a TB PPDU, it may need to adjust the transmission power of the TB PPDU according to the value of the UL Target Receive Power subfield so that its TB PPDU can be received with the power predicted by the AP.
  • the PS160 subfield is used together with the RU Allocation subfield, and indicates information related to the location and size of the RU/MRU (Multiple-RU) allocated through the User Info field.
  • RU/MRU Multiple-RU
  • UL EHT-MCS UL FEC Coding Type
  • UL DCM UL DCM
  • SS Allocation/RA-RU Information UL Target Receive Power fields
  • UL Target Receive Power fields are not used in the MU-RTS trigger frame. That is, they are reserved subfields.
  • the AP transmits an MU-RTS frame, and indicates the STAs that should respond to the CTS frame through the User Info field, while also indicating the bands on which each STA should respond to the CTS frame, including the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • the AP may perform channel access through the non-primary channel and then transmit an MU-RTS frame through channels other than the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • an STA that responds with a CTS frame after receiving the MU-RTS frame must also respond with the CTS frame in a form that does not occupy the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • an AP that transmits an MU-RTS frame after performing channel access on a non-primary channel must respond with a CTS frame through the User Info field.
  • an AP transmitting an MU-RTS frame and instructing an STA on a channel to respond to the CTS frame has a limitation in that it can only instruct a channel type occupying the Primary 20 MHz channel, such as Primary 20/40/80/160/320 MHz. Therefore, in order to allow an AP transmitting an MU-RTS frame after performing channel access through a non-primary channel to instruct a response to a CTS frame occupying only the non-primary channel, more information than the existing MU-RTS trigger frame may need to be utilized between the AP/STA performing the non-primary channel operation. In this case, the more information may mean information on the channel used by the AP for channel access and/or more diverse instruction methods for instructing a channel on which the STA will respond to the CTS frame.
  • an AP transmitting a trigger frame may indicate whether it has performed channel access through a primary channel or a non-primary channel. More specifically, the trigger frame may include a subfield that is indicated with a different value when transmitted by an AP that has performed channel access through a primary 20 MHz channel and when transmitted by an AP that has performed channel access through a non-primary channel (a 20 MHz subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz channel).
  • the AP can indicate to STAs receiving the trigger frame that it has transmitted the trigger frame after performing channel access through the primary channel.
  • the AP can indicate that it has not performed channel access through the primary channel by setting the specific subfield to a different value.
  • the specific subfield can be indicated as 0 to indicate that the AP has performed channel access on the primary channel, and can be set to 1 to indicate that the AP has performed channel access on a channel other than the primary channel.
  • the specific subfield may be indicated as 0 to indicate that the AP performed channel access on the primary channel, set to 1 to indicate that the AP performed channel access through the first non-primary channel, set to 2 to indicate that the AP performed channel access through the second non-primary channel, and set to 3 to indicate that the AP performed channel access through the third non-primary channel.
  • the first, second, and third non-primary channels may be subchannels located in different 80 MHz segments.
  • the STA When the AP indicates information related to the channel on which it performed Channel Access through the Common Info field of the trigger frame, the STA must interpret the RU Allocation subfield included in its User Info field based on the information on the channel on which the AP performed Channel Access when interpreting the RU Allocation subfield included in its User Info field. In other words, the STA that has received the MU-RTS frame must utilize both the channel information used for channel access indicated by the AP through the Common Info field and the information indicated through the RU Allocation subfield of its User Info field to confirm the frequency band to which it will respond with the CTS frame.
  • the STA may obtain a bandwidth on which it should respond with the CTS frame through the RU Allocation subfield, and confirm the location of the subchannel on which the CTS frame should be responded based on the information indicated in the Common Info field.
  • the STA when the RU Allocation subfield included in the User Info field of an STA is indicated as a value meaning Primary 80 MHz, if the channel on which the AP performed Channel Access is indicated as a Primary 20 MHz channel, the STA responds with a CTS frame through the Primary 80 MHz channel, and if the channel on which the AP performed Channel Access is indicated as a non-primary channel, the STA responds with a CTS frame on an 80 MHz channel located in the 80 MHz segment that includes the non-primary channel.
  • the AP can indicate both the frequency band and location information to which each STA will respond to the CTS frame, through the User Info field of each STA. That is, the AP can indicate an RU that does not include the Primary 20 MHz channel by setting the RU Allocation subfield included in the User Info field to a value other than 61 to 69. For example, the AP can indicate that the CTS frame will be responded to on one of the four 20 MHz subchannels located in the Secondary 80 MHz segment by setting the RU Allocation subfield to 71 to 74, can indicate one of the two 40 MHz channels located in the Secondary 80 MHz segment by setting the RU Allocation subfield to 75 and 76, or can indicate the Secondary 80 MHz channel by setting it to 77. That is, the RU Allocation subfield included in the User Info field of the MU-RTS trigger frame can have the function of indicating a frequency range excluding the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • the RU Allocation subfield may be configured using the conventional setting method, but may be interpreted in combination with other subfields indicated in the User Info field, so that the AP can instruct the STA to respond to the CTS frame in a band other than the Primary 20 MHz channel.
  • the AP may indicate a value corresponding to 20 MHz (e.g., 61 to 64) through the RU Allocation subfield and indicate a first 80 MHz segment through the specific subfield, so as to instruct the STA to respond to the CTS frame through a specific 20 MHz subchannel located in the first 80 MHz segment. That is, the STA may determine the subchannels on which it should respond to the CTS frame by combining the indicated segment information and the indicated CTS frame response BW information.
  • NPCA Non-Primary Channel Access
  • the two channel access methods described in the present invention are different channel access methods that can be used to achieve the same purpose.
  • the difference between these two channel access methods exists in whether an STA performing a channel access changes the channel on which the channel access procedure is performed (e.g., EDCA) or whether the channel on which the channel access procedure is performed is changed by changing an active link.
  • both channel access methods are essentially the same in that they perform channel access by performing channel switching to a sub-channel (non-primary channel) other than the primary channel when the primary channel is occupied, thereby having the same effect. Therefore, the methods for efficiently utilizing the two channel access methods are also the same.
  • the efficient operation method of non-primary channel access proposed in the present invention can be applied to both the non-primary channel access method in which a single STA changes the channel on which it performs channel access from the primary channel to another sub-channel (e.g., non-primary channel or sub-channel) instead of changing the channel from the primary channel to the primary channel, and the channel access method using overlapping BSS (the method using the primary link and auxiliary link described above).
  • the efficient operation method of non-primary channel access described below will be mainly explained in terms of the method in which a single STA (AP and/or non-AP STA) performs channel access by using another sub-channel by channel switching to a sub-channel other than the primary channel. That is, the conditions for performing the non-primary channel access method described below can be applied identically to the conditions for switching the primary link to the inactive state and switching the secondary link to the active state. That is, the operation/judgment method of the STA performing the non-primary channel access described below can be applied identically to the operation/judgment method of the MLD using the overlapping BSS.
  • An STA performing non-primary channel access can improve its channel access capability by performing a channel access procedure through a subchannel other than the primary channel even when the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS.
  • a procedure for protecting transmissions of other STAs that may be in progress on the subchannel first must be performed (for example, applying Mediumsync time), and after completing the channel access procedure, the acquired TXOP must be terminated at a time that is the same as or earlier than the TXOP of the OBSS that occupied its primary channel.
  • the STA when the primary channel is occupied by an AP or a non-AP STA of another OBSS and is in a busy state, the STA can improve the channel access capability by switching the channel to another sub-channel (sub-channel or non-primary channel) within the same bandwidth and performing a channel access procedure on the channel.
  • the channel since the problem that other sub-channels of the bandwidth are not used due to the occupied state of the primary channel can be resolved, the channel can be used efficiently.
  • the STA in order to protect the operations of other STAs in the switched sub-channel, the STA must perform the channel access procedure in the switched channel within the TXOP set in the primary channel.
  • the STA can determine the remaining length of the set TXOP based on a frame transmitted from an AP or a non-AP STA of another OBSS in the primary channel before channel switching in order to determine whether the channel access procedure can be performed in the switched sub-channel.
  • the STA may determine whether the received frame is a frame transmitted from an AP associated with it or an AP not associated with it. At this time, the STA may determine the remaining duration of TXOP set for the primary channel based on the value of the TXOP field or duration field included in the received frame.
  • an STA performing non-primary channel access needs to perform more additional operations (e.g., applying Mediumsync time, changing the operating frequency from the primary channel to another subchannel, etc.) than when performing channel access on the primary channel, whereas the TXOP length that can be obtained through the non-primary channel access may be further limited. That is, considering the cost consumed to perform non-primary channel access, a situation may occur where the length of the TXOP that can be obtained through the non-primary channel access is too short, and in this case, it may be more advantageous for the STA not to perform the non-primary channel access. Accordingly, even an STA with the Capability to perform non-primary channel access may not always perform the non-primary channel access when the primary channel is occupied by the OBSS.
  • additional operations e.g., applying Mediumsync time, changing the operating frequency from the primary channel to another subchannel, etc.
  • the STA can perform channel switching to another subchannel (non-primary channel) of the bandwidth.
  • the STA can determine whether the frame (or PPDU) it received is a frame transmitted by the OBSS AP (i.e., whether it is an inter-BSS frame or an intra-BSS frame). For example, it can determine whether the received frame is a frame transmitted from the OBSS AP through BSS color information of the received frame, or the MAC address, etc.
  • the STA can perform a channel access procedure by switching the channel to a non-primary channel within the bandwidth described above.
  • the STA can determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access based on the TXOP length of the OBSS that occupies the primary channel. More specifically, the STA can perform a non-primary channel access only when the TXOP length of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel is longer than (or equal to or longer than) a specific value (threshold).
  • the length of the OBSS TXOP that the STA considers may mean the length from the time when it recognizes the OBSS TXOP to the time when the OBSS TXOP ends.
  • the STA's determination is made based on the remaining time length of the OBSS TXOP remaining at the time of determining whether to perform a non-primary channel access, not the total length of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the method by which the STA obtains the remaining time length of the OBSS TXOP may be based on the NAV (network allocation vector) set based on the frame transmitted by the OBSS STAs, or on the time indicated by the TXOP field included in the preamble of the OBSS PPDU.
  • the STA can determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access based on the PPDU length of the OBSS that occupies the primary channel. More specifically, the STA can perform a non-primary channel access only when the PPDU length of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel is longer than (or equal to or longer than) a specific value (Threshold).
  • the length of the OBSS PPDU that the STA considers may mean the total length of the OBSS PPDU or the length of time remaining from the time when the STA recognizes the OBSS PPDU to the time when the OBSS PPDU ends.
  • the STA can decide to perform a non-primary channel access when the total length of the OBSS PPDU that the STA has confirmed is longer than a specific value (Threshold), or to perform a non-primary channel access when the length of the remaining OBSS PPDU from the time when the STA recognizes the OBSS PPDU is longer than a specific value (Threshold).
  • the STA can obtain information on the total length of the OBSS PPDU or the remaining time length until the end point of the OBSS PPDU from the RXVECTOR parameter generated by the OBSS PPDU.
  • the specific process of obtaining information related to the length of the OBSS PPDU from the RXVECTOR parameter is described through the embodiments of the present invention described later, so a detailed description is omitted.
  • the STA can recognize whether the received PPDU is a PPDU transmitted from a BSS to which the STA belongs (intra-BSS PPDU) or a PPDU transmitted from a BSS to which the STA does not belong (inter-BSS PPDU) based on information included in the received PPDU (e.g., BSS color, BSSID, or MAC address). If the received PPDU is an inter-BSS PPDU, the STA can confirm that the primary channel of the bandwidth in which it operates is occupied through a CCA operation, and in this case, the STA cannot perform frame exchange (or channel access procedure) on the primary channel.
  • the STA can perform frame exchange or channel access by switching the channel to a channel other than the primary channel of the bandwidth in which it operates (e.g., a non-primary channel, etc.).
  • the TXOP set by the received PPDU TXOP set by another OBSS
  • the STA can compare a specific value related to the received PPDU with a minimum duration threshold. If the specific value is greater than (or greater than or equal to) the minimum duration threshold, the STA can perform a frame exchange or channel access procedure by switching the channel to another channel.
  • the specific value related to the received PPDU may be either the length of the received PPDU or the duration of the remaining TXOP.
  • the length of the received PPDU may be the total length of the PPDU transmitted from the OBSS or the length of the remaining PPDU from the time the STA recognizes the PPDU, and the length of the remaining PPDU may be obtained based on the length field and the rate field included in the PPDU.
  • the duration of the remaining TXOP may mean the length of the remaining TXOP from the time the STA recognizes the PPDU transmitted from the OBSS, and may be obtained by adding the length of the remaining PPDU to the value of the TXOP field included in the PPDU.
  • the STA can recognize the total length of the PPDU or the length of the remaining PPDU by the RXVECTOR parameter generated at the PHY layer by the received PPDU and transmitted to the MAC layer.
  • the following embodiments describe a specific value based on the remaining TXOP duration, but may be performed based on not only the remaining TXOP duration but also the total length of the PPDU or the length of the remaining PPDU.
  • the specific value may be a value indicated by the AP via a Management frame transmitted by the AP (e.g., a Beacon frame and/or a Probe Response frame and/or an Association Response frame and/or a Management frame (a type of Operating Mode Notification frame) indicating whether to utilize a non-primary channel connection).
  • a Management frame transmitted by the AP e.g., a Beacon frame and/or a Probe Response frame and/or an Association Response frame and/or a Management frame (a type of Operating Mode Notification frame) indicating whether to utilize a non-primary channel connection.
  • the specific value may be a preset value (e.g., 1 ms or 2 ms, etc.).
  • the method for the STA to check the TXOP length of the OBSS that occupies the primary channel may be to use the value indicated through the TXOP field included in the Preamble (e.g. HE-SIG-A or U-SIG) of the received PPDU or the Duration/ID field of the MAC Header.
  • the Preamble e.g. HE-SIG-A or U-SIG
  • the STA can recognize the duration of the remaining TXOP after reception of the frame based on the duration field or TXOP field included in the received frame. That is, the STA can recognize the remaining duration from the end time of the received frame to the end time of the TXOP set by the OBSS based on the value indicated by the duration field or TXOP field included in the frame. Accordingly, the STA can determine whether it can perform a channel access procedure by channel switching to a non-primary channel within the set TXOP based on the remaining duration, and if it is determined that channel switching and the channel access procedure (or frame exchange) can be performed within the remaining duration, the STA can perform the channel access procedure (or frame exchange) by channel switching to the non-primary channel.
  • the STA compares the remaining duration (or, the total length of the PPDU, the length of the remaining PPDU, etc.) with a threshold value to determine whether the channel switching and channel access procedures can be performed within the remaining duration. If the remaining duration is greater than (or equal to or greater than) the threshold value, it can be determined that the channel switching and channel access procedures can be performed. For example, if the value obtained by adding the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field to the duration of the frame (e.g., the received PPDU) is greater than the threshold value, the STA can determine that the channel access procedure on the non-primary channel is possible. At this time, the length of the frame (or the duration of the PPDU) can be obtained based on the length field and the rate field included in the frame. At this time, the threshold value can mean the minimum duration for the STA to perform channel switching and channel access.
  • the method for determining whether an STA performs channel access on a non-primary channel may be performed based on the length of a TXOP that it determines it can obtain through channel access on the non-primary channel, rather than based on the TXOP length of the OBSS occupying the primary channel. That is, the STA may determine to perform channel access on the non-primary channel only when the length of a TXOP that it can obtain through channel access on the non-primary channel is longer than (or equal to or longer than) a specific value (threshold).
  • the STA may switch back to the primary channel and perform the channel access procedure. That is, if an STA fails to complete the channel access procedure of a non-primary channel within a certain time period from the end time of the TXOP of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel, the STA may give up access to the non-primary channel and switch back to the channel access procedure using the primary channel.
  • the method based on the length of the OBSS TXOP described above and the method based on the length of the TXOP that can be obtained are different methods for determining whether the TXOP that can be obtained through the non-primary channel access is sufficient (whether it is sufficiently efficient).
  • An STA that determines whether to attempt the non-primary channel access can use one of the two methods or both methods together to make a final decision on whether to perform the non-primary channel access.
  • the STA may consider a switching delay or transition delay for switching to the non-primary channel operation to determine whether to switch to the non-primary channel operation.
  • the STA may not switch to the non-primary channel operation mode. That is, the STA may determine whether to switch to the non-primary channel operation mode based on whether the remaining 'time length of OBSS TXOP - Transition delay' is longer than (or equal to) the threshold value.
  • the STA may additionally consider a switching delay or a transition delay. That is, the STA compares a value obtained based on a value indicated by a duration field or a TXOP field included in a received frame (or PPDU) (e.g., a value obtained by adding the duration of the PPDU to the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field value) with a threshold value, and the threshold value may be set to a value obtained by adding the switching delay or a transition delay to a minimum value for performing channel switching and channel access procedures.
  • a switching delay or a transition delay may be set to a value obtained based on a value indicated by a duration field or a TXOP field included in a received frame (or PPDU) (e.g., a value obtained by adding the duration of the PPDU to the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field value) with a threshold value, and the threshold value may be set to a value obtained by adding the switching delay or a transition delay to a minimum value
  • FIG. 29 illustrates an example of channel access in a non-primary channel when the primary channel is occupied according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • an STA can perform a channel access procedure by switching the channel to a non-primary channel (secondary channel) when the primary channel is in a busy state due to a TXOP set by an OBSS.
  • FIG. 29 illustrates a channel state and a channel access procedure confirmed from the perspective of an STA capable of performing non-primary channel access.
  • the STA Before the STA completes the backoff procedure on the primary channel (P20), the STA receives an RTS/CTS frame that the OBSS STA exchanges to initiate OBSS TXOP1. Based on the information included in the received frame, the STA can determine that the remaining time length of the OBSS TXOP1 is longer than a threshold value. Since the length of the OBSS TXOP1 is sufficiently long, the STA performs a channel access procedure through a channel other than the primary channel (S20_1 of FIG. 29), acquires the TXOP, and then performs a frame exchange.
  • An STA that terminates its TXOP before OBSS TXOP1 terminates performs a channel access procedure through the primary channel (P20 of FIG. 29) again, and OBSS TXOP2 starts before the backoff procedure is completed.
  • the STA confirms that the length of the OBSS TXOP2 it has confirmed is shorter than the threshold value, and instead of performing a channel access procedure on a channel other than the primary channel, it waits for OBSS TXOP2 to terminate on the primary channel. Thereafter, when OBSS TXOP2 terminates, the channel access procedure continues on the primary channel.
  • the STA can decide whether to perform the non-primary channel connection based on the determination result.
  • Another type of inefficiency that can occur due to non-primary channel access occurs when the primary channel statuses recognized by the AP and the non-AP STA are different from each other.
  • the neighboring STAs of the AP and the non-AP STA may be different from each other, and there may be cases where the signal of the OBSS occupying the primary channel of the AP is not received by a specific non-AP STA. In addition, there may also be cases where the signal of the OBSS occupying the primary channel of a specific non-AP STA is not received by the AP.
  • the channels through which the AP and the non-AP STA perform channel access may be different from each other.
  • the AP determines that the primary channel is IDLE and transmits a PPDU after completing channel access on the primary channel
  • the non-AP STA determines that the primary channel is BUSY due to the OBSS and may be performing a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary channel or waiting to receive a PPDU from the AP.
  • the non-AP STA determines that the primary channel is IDLE and transmits a PPDU after completing channel access on the primary channel, but the AP determines that the primary channel is BUSY due to the OBSS and may be performing a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary channel or waiting to receive a UL PPDU.
  • PPDU transmission fails due to channel mismatch issues between the transmitting and receiving devices.
  • a specific STA determines a point in time when another STA has the same view as itself. For a simple example, if a specific STA has instructed another STA in advance that a signal transmitted by STA1 has been received by itself, the other STA can anticipate that the signal of STA1 will also be received by the specific STA while the signal of STA1 is being received by itself. That is, based on information provided by the specific STA, the other STA can determine that it and the specific STA have the same view at a specific point in time.
  • an AP may instruct a non-AP STA about information related to an adjacent BSS (Overlapping), and the non-AP STA may determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access (move to a subchannel other than the primary channel for performing a channel access procedure and/or waiting for reception (e.g., performing CCA and PD (Preamble/Packet detection)) based on the information instructed to the AP. That is, the AP may transmit information on an adjacent OBSS to associated non-AP STAs by including it in a management frame.
  • a non-primary channel access move to a subchannel other than the primary channel for performing a channel access procedure and/or waiting for reception
  • CCA and PD Preamble/Packet detection
  • the AP may transmit a management frame including list information on OBSS APs, and when the non-AP STA performs a non-primary channel access operation, if an AP that has transmitted the frame is included in the list information of the management frame based on information related to an AP included in a received frame (or PPDU), the non-AP STA may perform the non-primary channel access procedure described above. That is, when a PPDU is transmitted from an OBSS AP, a non-AP STA can compare the AP-related information (BSS color information or MAC address) included in the PPDU with the list information included in the management frame. When the list information includes information related to the AP, a non-AP STA can perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel as described above.
  • BSS color information or MAC address AP-related information
  • the AP can notify non-AP STAs of information (a type of list) related to OBSSs (i.e., OBSSs that change the primary channel status of the AP to busy) that can occupy its primary channel.
  • the information related to the OBSS that the AP notifies to the non-AP STAs may be BSS color information of the OBSSs and/or MAC addresses of Neighbor APs operating the OBSS.
  • the number of Neighbor APs that the AP indicates in relation to non-primary channel access may be smaller than the number of APs that the AP indicates through the RNR element (Reduced Neighbor Report) of the beacon frame. This is because the Neighbor APs that the AP indicates in relation to non-primary channel access are limited to APs that operate a BSS that can occupy the primary channel of the AP.
  • a non-AP STA that has received information related to OBSS from an AP can determine whether to switch to non-primary channel operation (performing a channel access procedure using a subchannel other than the primary channel and/or waiting to receive on a subchannel other than the primary channel) by checking whether the OBSS occupying its primary channel is included in the OBSS list indicated by the AP when its primary channel is switched to BUSY.
  • a non-AP STA may decide to perform non-primary channel operation when its primary channel is occupied by an OBSS and the color of the OBSS is included in the OBSS color list indicated by the AP. That is, the non-AP STA can know that the OBSS that changed the state of its primary channel to BUSY is the OBSS that also changed the primary channel state of the AP to BUSY, and it is expected that the AP will also switch to non-primary channel operation when the non-AP STA switches to non-primary channel operation.
  • the prior information about the OBSS transmitted by the AP through the management frame can be used by the non-AP STA to determine whether the OBSS occupying its primary channel causes the AP to start the non-primary channel operation. If the OBSS occupying its primary channel is an OBSS not included in the list information transmitted by the AP, the non-AP STA must not switch to the non-primary channel operation. In this case, the AP also must not switch to the non-primary channel operation if the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS not included in the list information of the OBSS transmitted by the AP.
  • the AP When a PPDU transmitted while occupying its primary channel is received, the AP records information of the OBSS that transmitted the PPDU. At this time, the OBSS information recorded by the AP may be BSS color information of the OBSS or the MAC address of the AP operating the OBSS. i) For BSS color information, the AP can obtain it through the BSS color field (included in the SIG field (e.g., HE-SIG-A or U-SIG, etc.)) of the received PPDU (e.g., HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU).
  • the SIG field e.g., HE-SIG-A or U-SIG, etc.
  • MAC information can be obtained through the TA or RA field (included in the MAC header) of the MAC frame included in the received PPDU (e.g., HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU).
  • PPDU e.g., HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU.
  • the AP can announce the list information, which is information of the OBSS that switches the state of its primary channel to busy, through the frame that it transmits.
  • the OBSS information may be BSS color information of each OBSS and/or the MAC address of the AP operating the OBSS.
  • the AP can indicate BSS information through the beacon frame and/or notification frame (e.g., Operating Mode Notification frame) that it transmits.
  • the Notification frame may be a frame that indicates whether the AP is going to perform non-primary channel access.
  • a non-AP STA may perform a non-primary channel access operation based on list information (e.g., color information or MAC address) of OBSSs transmitted from an AP through a management frame. For example, i) a non-AP STA may perform a non-primary channel access operation if the BSS color of an OBSS that occupies its primary channel or the MAC address of an OBSS AP matches the BSS color or MAC address included in the list information acquired from the AP.
  • list information e.g., color information or MAC address
  • a non-AP STA may not perform the non-primary channel access operation if the BSS color of an OBSS that occupies its primary channel or the MAC address of an OBSS AP does not match the BSS color or MAC address included in the list information acquired from the AP.
  • the AP manages the information of the OBSS that switches the primary channel to the busy state (i.e., the OBSS that occupies the primary channel) by applying a timeout. That is, if the PPDU of a specific OBSS is not received within a certain time (timeout), the AP deletes the information related to the specific OBSS from the list information of the OBSS. That is, the list information of the OBSS newly transmitted by the AP does not include the information of the specific OBSS.
  • a non-AP STA may determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access operation based on the list information of the OBSS most recently transmitted from the AP.
  • non-AP STAs whose primary channel is occupied by an OBSS other than the notified OBSS can be prevented from malfunctioning (non-AP STAs performing non-primary channel operation alone in a situation where the AP performs primary channel operation).
  • FIG. 30 illustrates an example of operation of STAs in a non-primary channel based on information related to OBSS transmitted from an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • a non-AP STA can perform a non-primary channel access operation based on a frame transmitted from an OBSS included in the list information of the OBSS included in a management frame transmitted from the AP.
  • the AP announces information (Neighbor BSS list of Fig. 30) of the OBSS that it occupies the primary channel.
  • the AP can transmit the Neighbor BSS list, which is information of the OBSS, by including it in a management frame.
  • the BSS colors of the announced BSS list are x and y.
  • the primary channels confirmed by the AP, STA1, and STA2 are all switched to BUSY.
  • STA1 and STA2 which confirmed that the BSS color of the OBSS that occupied their primary channel is x, confirm that the BSS color announced by the AP includes x and perform non-primary channel operation during the OBSS TBOP1.
  • STA2 does not perform non-primary channel operation because the BSS color of the OBSS that occupied its primary channel is not included in the BSS colors announced by the AP. In other words, STA2 does not switch to non-primary channel operation because the BSS that occupied its primary channel is not included in the OBSS list announced in advance by the AP, even though its primary channel is occupied by OBSS TXOP2.
  • the primary channels of AP and STA2 are switched to the BUSY state, and STA2 can recognize that the AP has also switched its primary channel to BUSY based on the information previously acquired from the AP. Therefore, STA2 switches to the non-primary channel operation to perform transmission/reception with the AP.
  • STA1 since STA1 is operating in a location where the signal of the OBSS with BSS Color y does not reach, it determines that the primary channel is IDLE and continues the primary channel operation.
  • the non-AP STA can determine whether to switch to the non-primary channel operation mode.
  • the above-described conditions for switching between the primary channel operation mode and the non-primary channel operation mode can be equally applied as conditions for switching the primary link and the secondary link to the Active state. That is, based on the OBSS information announced by the AP of the primary link, the non-AP STA MLD can determine whether to maintain the primary link in the Active state or switch the secondary link to the Active state (switch the primary link to Inactive). Since it is easy to understand that the same rule can be applied to two different non-primary channel access methods, a repeated explanation of the non-primary channel access method using the Overlapping BSS is omitted.
  • a non-AP STA can indicate information about its adjacent OBSS to the AP.
  • the AP can determine whether to include each non-AP STA in the destination device of a PPDU to be transmitted on a non-primary channel based on the OBSS information indicated from the non-AP STAs. That is, the non-AP STA can transmit BSS color information of its adjacent OBSS and/or the MAC address of the OBSS AP to the AP, and the AP can determine whether to include each non-AP STA in the destination device of a PPDU to be transmitted on a non-primary channel based on the OBSS information transmitted from the non-AP STAs.
  • non-AP STA 1 since non-AP STA 1 has no adjacent OBSS, it can transmit none information to the AP, and since non-AP STA 2 has an adjacent OBSS, it can transmit BSS color information of the OBSS and/or the MAC address of the OBSS AP to the AP.
  • non-AP STA 1 can perform a channel access procedure on the primary channel because there is no adjacent OBSS.
  • non-AP STA 2 cannot perform a channel access procedure on the primary channel if the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS because there is an adjacent OBSS. Therefore, the AP can add non-AP STA 2 to the destination device of the PPDU transmitted on the non-primary channel so that non-AP STA 2 can perform a channel access procedure on the non-primary channel.
  • the AP may transmit a PPDU destined for the non-AP STA1 and not transmit a PPDU destined for the non-AP STA2.
  • the MAC address of the RA field included in the PPDU indicates the MAC address of the specific non-AP STA, or that the specific non-AP STA is indicated by the user field of the trigger frame included in the PPDU.
  • the AP can distinguish non-AP STAs that have also transitioned to non-primary channel operation mode when it transitions to non-primary channel operation mode.
  • a non-AP STA can indicate OBSS information by specifying an OBSS that occupies its primary channel among the OBSS list announced by the AP, rather than indicating to the AP information about all OBSSs that have switched its primary channel to busy.
  • the OBSS information announced from the AP includes BSS 1, BSS 2, and BSS 3
  • the OBSSs that occupy the non-AP STA's primary channel are BSS 2, BSS 4, and BSS 5
  • the non-AP STA can indicate only information about BSS 2 to the AP when indicating its OBSS information.
  • BSS 4 and BSS 5 are BSSs that are not OBSSs of AP, and even if information about BSS 4 and BSS 5 (e.g. BSS color) is instructed to AP, AP cannot utilize the information in scheduling process. Therefore, unnecessary information about BSS 4 and BSS 5 can be omitted to reduce overhead.
  • information about BSS 4 and BSS 5 e.g. BSS color
  • the TXOP of an OBSS that has occupied the primary channel may be terminated earlier than the expected end time identified by the PPDU and frames exchanged when the OBSS TXOP starts.
  • a specific STA may determine that the OBSS TXOP will continue for another 5 ms based on information indicated in the TXOP field of the received OBSS PPDU and initiate a non-primary channel operation.
  • the specific STA may complete the non-primary channel operation before the expected end time of the OBSS TXOP and switch back to the primary channel operation, but a situation may occur in which the OBSS TXOP is truncated after lasting for a shorter time than the initially confirmed 5 ms.
  • the specific STA that has switched to the primary channel operation encounters a situation in which the TXOP of the OBSS that initially occupied the primary channel has already been terminated and the TXOP of another OBSS is in progress.
  • the specific STA loses the channel access opportunity on the primary channel while performing an operation using a subchannel other than the primary channel during a busy time period of its primary channel.
  • the non-primary channel operation is more complex and the available BW is narrower than the primary channel operation, the specific STA may suffer a loss while performing the non-primary channel operation.
  • the specific STA is an AP STA and the time point at which the transmission opportunity is lost is a time interval adjacent to the Target Beacon Transmission Time (TBTT)
  • TBTT Target Beacon Transmission Time
  • STAs performing the Power Save operation transition to Awake at the time point when a Beacon frame is expected to be received from the AP, but because the time point at which the AP transmits the Beacon frame is far from the TBTT, they experience an energy waste problem of maintaining the Awake state for a longer period of time and waiting for TIM frame reception.
  • an STA may need to decide not to perform a non-primary channel operation during the TXOP period of an OBSS that occupies its primary channel, if the next TBTT of the BSS to which it belongs (is operating or is a member STA) is scheduled within the TXOP period of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel.
  • This may be a limitation on the utilization of the non-primary channel operation mode that is introduced to transmit/receive a Beacon frame as quickly as possible after the TXOP of the OBSS is terminated, i.e., after the primary channel is switched to IDLE.
  • the TBTT considered when the STA determines whether to utilize the non-primary channel operation mode may be a TBTT corresponding to the DTIM Beacon frame.
  • the TBTT considered when the STA determines whether to utilize the non-primary channel operation mode may be all TBTTs.
  • TWT Target Wake Time
  • R-TWT Restricted TWT
  • the STA must not perform non-primary channel operations (performing channel access on a subchannel other than the primary channel (e.g., backoff procedure) or waiting for reception of a PPDU transmitted by a peer STA (e.g., Preamble/Packet detection)) during the TXOP interval of the OBSS.
  • R-TWT means a TWT that only allows MSDU transmission of a specified TID.
  • FIG. 31 illustrates an example of a method for determining whether to perform an operation on a non-primary channel considering the TBTT of a BSS according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 31 illustrates the process by which an AP performing a channel access procedure determines whether to switch to a non-primary channel operation mode after confirming an OBSS TXOP occupying the primary channel.
  • the AP while operating in the primary channel operation mode performing a backoff procedure through the P20 channel, recognizes the start of an OBSS TXOP occupying the P20 channel.
  • the STA can recognize the time that the TXOP of the OBSS is expected to last, and can confirm that the TXOP of the OBSS includes the next TBTT time point of the BSS to which it belongs (is operating). Since the OBSS TXOP occupying its primary channel includes the TBTT, the STA does not switch to the non-primary channel operation mode during the time period when the primary channel is occupied by the OBSS TXOP, but maintains the primary channel operation mode.
  • the AP When the OBSS TXOP ends, the AP performs a channel access procedure through the primary channel and then transmits a beacon frame. At this time, all STAs of the BSS maintain the primary channel operation mode even during the time that the OBSS TXOP is in progress because the OBSS TXOP includes the TBTT, just like the AP, and receive the beacon frame transmitted by the AP after the OBSS TXOP ends.
  • a series of procedures for performing channel access and frame exchange using a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel (non-primary channel) during the time period when the primary 20 MHz subchannel is occupied by the OBSS may be named Non-Primary Channel Access (NPCA) or Secondary Channel Access (SCA).
  • NPCA Non-Primary Channel Access
  • SCA Secondary Channel Access
  • the subchannel for NPCA is indicated by the AP, and may be indicated as one of the subchannels located in a segment other than the P80 segment containing the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • the AP does not indicate a subchannel that is included in the Operating BW of the BSS but is not used by the BSS (i.e., a Disabled subchannel) as a subchannel for NPCA.
  • each STA may have different views (e.g., different CCA results) of the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • the AP may partially prevent the AP and non-AP STAs from performing different operations by notifying the non-AP STAs of information about the adjacent BSS affecting it and/or the AP operating the adjacent BSS.
  • a situation may occur in which the AP confirms a PPDU transmitted by a non-AP STA that has completed the channel access procedure through the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • a situation may occur in which a non-AP STA that has completed the channel access procedure through the primary 20 MHz subchannel transmits a PPDU to a band including the secondary 80 MHz band.
  • the AP receives the PPDU transmitted by the non-AP STA on the subchannel located in the secondary 80 MHz band, and if the received PPDU requests a response to the response frame, the AP must determine whether or not to transmit the response frame.
  • a non-AP STA that has transmitted a PPDU to an AP after completing a channel access procedure on the primary 20 MHz channel must adjust its subsequent frame exchange sequence depending on whether a response frame is received from the AP, and must take into account the possibility that the AP may have received the PPDU over a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz channel.
  • an AP that receives a frame requesting a response frame through a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel can transmit the response frame through a frequency band excluding the primary 20 MHz subchannel.
  • the method by which the AP transmits the response frame is described in more detail through the embodiments of the present invention described below.
  • the frame can be appropriately replaced with a PPDU and interpreted.
  • a non-AP STA that performs channel access through a primary 20 MHz subchannel and then transmits a frame to an AP can determine a transmission frequency band of the frame it transmits based on a frequency band occupied by a response frame transmitted by the AP.
  • the determination of the transmission frequency band includes a determination of a width (BW) and/or a location (a band including or not including the primary 20 MHz subchannel) of the frequency band.
  • the AP can decide whether to transmit a response frame for the received frame through the following processes (1) and (2).
  • the frame received on the AP side means a frame in which the destination device of the frame is set to the AP.
  • the fact that the frame was received through A20 means that the PPDU including the corresponding frame was detected through A20.
  • the AP transmits a response frame to the received frame.
  • a frame transmitted via NPCA refers to a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that performed channel access via A20.
  • a frame transmitted via NPCA can be distinguished based on information about a frequency range occupied by a PPDU including the frame. For example, if a frame is transmitted via a PPDU that does not occupy P20, the AP can determine that the frame is transmitted via NPCA. As another example, if a frame is transmitted via a PPDU that occupies only a frequency range accessible via A20, the AP can determine that the frame is transmitted via NPCA.
  • the AP determines whether to transmit a response frame to the received frame.
  • the AP does not transmit a response frame for the received frame.
  • the AP can transmit a response frame for the received frame. At this time, the AP responds with a CTS frame if 1 the received frame is an RTS frame, 2 it is received as included in a non-HT or non-HT duplicated PPDU, and 3 it has bandwidth signaling TA and the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the PPDU is Dynamic.
  • the duration field of the CTS frame can be set based on the duration/ID field of the received RTS frame or based on the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP. If the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is before the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS frame is set based on the Duration field of the RTS frame (e.g., the value of the Duration field of the RTS frame - CTS time (time required to transmit the CTS frame) - SIFS).
  • the CTS frame is set to a time before the end of the OBSS TXOP or a value indicating the end time of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame must end the frame exchange sequence before the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP.
  • the AP may not transmit a response frame if the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is later than the end time of the OBSS TXOP. In this case, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame cannot continue the frame exchange sequence.
  • the Duration field of the CTS frame can be set based on the Duration/ID field of the received RTS frame or based on the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the CTS frame is set based on the Duration field of the RTS frame (e.g., the Duration field value of the RTS frame - CTS time (time required to transmit the CTS frame) - SIFS).
  • the CTS frame is set to a time before the end of the OBSS TXOP or a value indicating the end time of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame must terminate the frame exchange sequence before the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP.
  • the AP may not transmit a response frame if the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is later than the end time of the OBSS TXOP. In this case, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame cannot continue the frame exchange sequence.
  • the AP responds with a CTS-to-self frame instead of a CTS frame when the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the PPDU is Static.
  • the CTS-to-self frame may not be considered as a response to the received RTS frame.
  • the CTS-to-self frame has the characteristic that it is transmitted after SIFS (Short Inter Frame space) after the end of reception of the RTS frame (i.e., transmitted at the same timing as when the CTS frame is responded to).
  • the TXOP of the AP is acquired for the bandwidth occupied by the transmitted CTS-to-self frame.
  • the TXOP acquired by the AP can be interpreted as the concept that the TXOP of the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame has been granted to the AP.
  • the duration field of the CTS-to-self frame can be set based on the duration/ID field of the received RTS frame or the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the CTS-to-self frame is set based on the duration field of the RTS frame (e.g., the value of the duration field of the RTS frame - CTStime (time required to transmit the CTS-to-self frame) - SIFS). If the time indicated by the duration field of the received RTS frame is after the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS-to-self frame is set to a time before the end of the OBSS TXOP or a value indicating the end time of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the AP can also determine whether to respond to the CTS frame based on whether the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame supports reception of the CTS frame responded to on A20.
  • the non-AP STA instructs the AP with Capability information related to whether it can receive the CTS frame responded to on A20 after transmitting the RTS frame on P20.
  • the AP considers whether the non-AP STA supports NPCA and whether it supports processing of the CTS frame responded to on A20 to determine whether to perform a CTS frame response to the RTS frame received from the non-AP STA (transmitted on P20).
  • the AP responds with a CTS frame on A20.
  • the AP does not perform a CTS frame response.
  • An AP that decides to transmit a response frame for a frame received via A20 determines a frequency range in which to transmit the response frame.
  • determining a frequency range in which to transmit the response frame means determining the bandwidth and transmission frequency (channel) of the PPDU including the response frame.
  • the AP can transmit a response frame (PPDU) over a frequency band that is not occupied by the OBSS TXOP among the frequency bands occupied by the PPDU containing the frame received via A20. That is, the AP does not transmit a response frame over the band occupied by the TXOP of the identified OBSS.
  • PPDU response frame
  • the AP when the AP transmits a response frame for a frame received via A20, the AP can transmit the response frame (PPDU) via a frequency band that is allowed to be accessed via A20.
  • the frequency range accessible via A20 is Secondary 80 MHz (if A20 is a subchannel included in Secondary 80 MHz)
  • the AP responds with a response frame for the received frame within the Secondary 80 MHz band.
  • the frequency range accessible via A20 is Secondary 160 MHz (if A20 is a subchannel included in Secondary 160 MHz)
  • the AP responds with a response frame for the received frame within the Secondary 160 MHz band.
  • the AP does not transmit a response frame in a subchannel for which the CCA result is BUSY.
  • the frequency bands that are allowed to be accessed through A20 are limited to some of the frequency bands (Operating BW) that are accessible through P20.
  • the characteristic of the frequency bands that are accessible through A20 is that the remaining frequency bands, excluding the preset bandwidth including P20, are frequency bands that are accessible through A20.
  • the AP for the purpose of reducing the complexity of AP operation, it is possible to allow the AP not to transmit a response frame for a frame received via A20. That is, when a frame is received while performing channel access via A20, the AP can decide not to transmit a response frame for the received frame. At this time, the condition under which the AP can decide not to transmit a response frame for the received frame can be limited to when the received frame is not a frame transmitted via NPCA, i.e., a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that performed channel access via P20.
  • a non-AP STA supporting NPCA must perform operations considering that the AP may be operating in A20 when initiating a TXOP for transmitting a UL PPDU. To this end, the non-AP STA may need to check whether a response frame (e.g., a CTS frame) from the AP is responded to through A20 when transmitting an initial Control frame (e.g., an RTS frame) after completing channel access through P20 and the initial Control frame is transmitted by occupying a band including A20.
  • a response frame e.g., a CTS frame
  • an initial Control frame e.g., an RTS frame
  • a non-AP STA for which all APs included in the OBSS AP list indicated by the AP are confirmed can be certain that it does not have an operation state different from that of the AP (i.e., a P20 operation state or an A20 operation state), and therefore, the rules for non-AP STA operations provided through embodiments of the present invention described below may not be applied.
  • a non-AP STA transmits an initial Control frame through a non-HT duplicated PPDU after completing channel access through P20
  • the TA field of the initial Control frame must be set to bandwidth signaling TA and DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT (TXVECTOR parameter) must be set to Dynamic.
  • DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT TXVECTOR parameter
  • a non-AP STA that does not intend to receive a response frame of an AP responding through A20 or does not want to acquire a TXOP in a form that does not occupy P20 can set DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT to Static.
  • the non-AP STA can recognize that the AP is operating through A20 (Non-P channel operation state of FIG. 30). In this case, even if the response frame of the AP is not received through P20, the non-AP STA can continue the frame exchange sequence by utilizing the frequency band through which the AP transmitted the response frame.
  • a Non-AP STA that transmits an initial Control frame can use at least one of the following methods to determine a frequency band that it can utilize when performing a frame exchange sequence based on the response frame of the AP that responded via A20: (A) and (B).
  • the initial Control frame is described as an RTS frame
  • the response frame is described as a CTS frame.
  • a similar/identical method may be utilized for other frames/response frames.
  • a non-AP STA can determine the frequency band of a PPDU to be transmitted based on the RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the CTS frame transmitted by the AP and the location information of A20.
  • a specific method is to determine a channel with a BW equal to or smaller than a channel with a BW indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT among the channels including A20 as the transmission band of the PPDU.
  • the non-AP STA can transmit the next PPDU through A20 or a 40 MHz Channel including A20 or an 80 MHz Channel including A20.
  • the RXVECTOR parameter generated by a frame received through A20 may be generated separately from the RXVECTOR parameter generated by a frame received through P20.
  • RXVECTOR parameters different from the RXVECTOR parameters of conventional Wi-Fi can be defined/utilized, and it is also possible for a new RXVECTOR parameter generated in relation to the BW of the corresponding frame to be utilized for the purpose of the present invention described above.
  • a non-AP STA can expect that a CTS frame of the AP will be received after SIFS after transmitting its RTS frame, and thus can estimate the frequency band occupied by the CTS frame using the changed CCA result at the time when the CTS frame transmitted by the AP is expected to be received. In this case, the non-AP STA can transmit its next PPDU using all or part of the band occupied by the CTS frame to which the AP responded.
  • a non-AP STA that has transmitted an RTS frame to the AP can estimate that the AP transmitted the CTS frame through the 80 MHz channel including A20 based on the fact that the CCA result of the 80 MHz band including A20 changed to BUSY at the time when the CTS frame is expected to be received from the AP.
  • the non-AP STA can transmit its next PPDU through A20, the 40 MHz channel including A20, or the 80 MHz channel including A20.
  • a non-AP STA that recognizes that the AP is operating in A20 (non-primary channel access operation in FIG. 30) can adjust its frame exchange sequence length so that the AP can switch to P20 at a scheduled time.
  • the non-AP STA must adjust its TXOP length so that its TXOP ends earlier than the TXOP of the OBSS that occupies the P20 of the AP, thereby allowing the AP to switch to the P20 operation state (primary channel access operation in FIG. 30) before the TXOP of the OBSS ends.
  • a non-AP STA that has completed the channel access procedure through P20 cannot confirm the transmission of the OBSS that has occupied the AP's P20, and therefore cannot confirm when the OBSS's TXOP will end.
  • the AP can use the duration field of the response frame transmitted to the non-AP STA to instruct information related to the time during which the non-AP STA can operate the TXOP, and the non-AP STA can adjust its TXOP length (frame exchange sequence) based on the instructed information.
  • an AP that receives an RTS frame from a non-AP STA sets the duration field of the CTS frame to indicate the maximum time point at which the non-AP STA can operate TXOP.
  • the non-AP STA adjusts its TXOP length based on the time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP.
  • the TXOP length adjustment method may be such that the TXOP is terminated at the same time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame, or may be adjusted such that the TXOP is terminated earlier than the time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame.
  • a non-AP STA that transmits an RTS frame over P20 and then receives a CTS frame responded to over A20 must adjust its TXOP length based on the time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame responded to by the AP, not the time point indicated by the duration field of the RTS frame that it transmitted.
  • the duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP may not be set based on the duration field of the RTS frame, but may be set based on the OBSS TXOP end time confirmed by the AP.
  • a non-AP STA that transmits an RTS frame may need to check whether the response frame of the AP received through A20 is a CTS frame or a CTS-to-self frame.
  • the non-AP STA may check the RA field of the received frame to check whether the frame transmitted by the AP is a CTS-to-self frame or a CTS frame.
  • a non-AP STA that confirms that the RA field of the response frame received from the AP is set to be identical to the TA field of the RTS frame transmitted by the non-AP STA can confirm that the received frame is a CTS frame
  • a non-AP STA that confirms that the RA field of the received response frame is set based on the MAC address of the AP can confirm that the received frame is a CTS-to-self frame.
  • the non-AP STA should not transmit its own UL PPDU after receiving the CTS-to-self frame, but should wait for reception of the next PPDU of the AP to be received in A20. That is, if it is confirmed that the response frame transmitted by the AP is a CTS-to-self frame, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame should switch to the operation using A20 (Non-P channel operation of FIG. 30). At this time, the non-AP STA maintains the operation state using A20 until the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS-to-self frame and then switches to the P20 operation state (P-channel operation of FIG. 30), or switches to the P20 operation state when an explicit instruction is received from the AP.
  • the AP can perform an explicit instruction to induce non-AP STAs maintaining the A20 operation state to switch to the P20 operation state.
  • the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a CF-END frame.
  • the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a CTS-to-self frame with the Duration field set to 0.
  • the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a frame with the More Data field set to 0.
  • the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a UHR PPDU with a specific subfield of the Preamble set to a specific value.
  • the non-AP STAs that have confirmed the explicit instruction during the A20 operation must start switching to the P20 operation mode.
  • FIG. 32 illustrates an example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • Figure 32 illustrates the medium state observed on the AP side.
  • the AP checks the RTS/CTS frame transmitted by the STAs of the OBSS while performing the channel access procedure through P20. After checking the TXOP initiation of the OBSS, the AP moves to A20 located in the secondary 80 MHz band and continues the channel access procedure. At this time, the channel access procedure performed in A20 can be performed using a different contention window size and backoff counter from the channel access procedure performed in P20.
  • the AP receives the RTS frame transmitted to it while performing the channel access procedure in A20.
  • the AP confirms that the received RTS frame was transmitted by an STA that does not support the NPCA operation and does not perform a CTS frame response.
  • the AP can use the Capability information (which can be indicated through the UHR Capabilities element) transmitted by the STA to confirm whether the STA that transmitted the RTS frame supports the NPCA operation. If the RTS frame
  • the AP makes a decision to set (i.e., reset) the MediumSyncDelay timer to 0 by the received RTS frame.
  • the RTS frame transmitted by the STA that performed the channel access at P20 may be restricted from being utilized to reset the MediumSyncDelay timer. That is, the STAs that applied MediumSyncDelay at A20 may be restricted from resetting their MediumSyncDelay when they receive the RTS frame transmitted through P20.
  • This restriction is not limited to the embodiment described through FIG. 32 and may be a generally applicable restriction. In this case, the STAs that applied MediumSyncDelay at A20 may not utilize the RTS frame to reset the MediumSyncDelay timer, regardless of whether the received RTS frame was transmitted through P20.
  • the AP does not perform a CTS frame response to the received RTS frame and continues the channel access procedure at A20. After completing the channel access procedure at A20, the AP obtains a TXOP for the band including A20.
  • Fig. 33 illustrates another example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the description of the embodiment of Fig. 33 may omit the contents described through the previous embodiment.
  • the AP After receiving the RTS frame from A20, the AP verifies that the STA that transmitted the RTS frame is an STA that supports NPCA and that the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT generated by the RTS frame is Dynamic.
  • the AP decides to perform a CTS frame response to the RTS frame and responds with a CTS frame through A20 and the subchannels accessible through A20 (subchannels of the Secondary 80 MHz band in FIG. 33).
  • the Secondary 40 MHz band is not occupied by the OBSS TXOP and is a subchannel confirmed as IDLE as a result of the CCA, but access through A20 is not permitted, so the CTS frame response is not performed.
  • a non-AP STA that transmitted an RTS frame recognizes that the AP responded with a CTS frame through A20, and performs a frame exchange sequence with the AP using the subchannel to which the CTS frame was responded. However, the non-AP STA adjusts its TXOP length based on the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP, not the time indicated by the Duration field of the RTS frame.
  • TXOP the frame exchange sequence between the non-AP STA that performed the channel access procedure through P20 and the AP operating in A20 is performed (TXOP is acquired).
  • Fig. 34 illustrates an example of a method for transmitting a CTS-to-self frame based on reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the description of the embodiment of Fig. 34 may omit the contents described through the previous embodiment.
  • the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the RTS frame received from A20 is set to Static, and transmits a CTS-to-self frame SIFS after the end of the RTS frame. That is, it initiates transmission of a CTS-to-self frame, not a CTS frame, at the same time as transmitting a CTS frame in response to an RTS frame.
  • the AP determines the frequency band to transmit the CTS-to-self frame, it decides to transmit the CTS-to-self frame only for the subchannels identified as IDLE among the frequency bands accessible through A20.
  • the Duration field of the CTS-to-self frame is set to a value indicating the end time or before the end time of the OBSS TXOP that occupies the AP's P20.
  • a non-AP STA that has transmitted an RTS frame to the AP checks whether the AP transmits a CTS frame or a CTS-to-self frame via A20.
  • the non-AP STA can recognize that the AP will control the subsequent frame exchange sequence, and therefore waits for reception of the frame that the AP transmits after the CTS-to-self frame instead of transmitting a UL PPDU.
  • an AP that receives an RTS frame in A20 can determine whether to respond with a CTS frame by checking whether the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame is a non-AP STA that supports NPCA, or can make a decision such as transmitting a CTS-to-self frame based on the RXVECTOR of the RTS frame.
  • the AP must complete the above-described decision procedures within the inter-frame space (i.e., SIFS) between the received RTS frame and the next frame it transmits (CTS/CTS-to-self frame), which may result in somewhat increased operational difficulty for the AP.
  • SIFS inter-frame space
  • the AP may be allowed to always transmit the same response frame (CTS-to-self frame) for a received RTS frame (or other Control frames, e.g., TXOP Sharing (Request) frame), regardless of whether the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame supports NPCA or the RXVECTOR parameter of the RTS frame.
  • CTS-to-self frame or other Control frames, e.g., TXOP Sharing (Request) frame
  • an AP performing a channel access procedure in A20 can transmit a CTS-to-self frame in response to an initial control frame (e.g., an RTS frame or another initial control frame) transmitted to itself.
  • an initial Control frame transmitted from a non-AP STA that has completed a channel access procedure through A20 has a function of inducing transmission of a CTS-to-self frame by the AP, and acquisition of a TXOP by the non-AP STA may be considered as not occurring or as being transferred to the AP at the same time as acquisition. That is, a non-AP STA that has completed a channel access procedure in A20 transmits an initial Control frame to grant a TXOP to the AP.
  • TXOPs acquired from A20 are always managed by the AP, and each TXOP can be acquired by the AP itself (after completing backoff and accessing the channel) or acquired (shared) by the initial Control frame transmitted by a non-AP STA.
  • the AP can initiate a frame exchange sequence (operate TXOP) after transmitting a CTS-to-self frame through A20 and a frequency band to which access via A20 is permitted among the frequency bands occupied by the received initial Control frame, without being restricted by conditions such as the type of non-AP STA that transmitted the initial Control frame and the frequency band occupied by the initial Control frame.
  • a frame exchange sequence operte TXOP
  • APs operating in A20 may be subject to restrictions that are not applicable when operating in P20. These restrictions are related to the behavior of unassociated STAs that are identified when operating in A20.
  • An AP operating in A20 can receive a Probe Request frame transmitted from A20.
  • the AP must not respond with a Probe Response frame even if the Probe Request frame includes a wildcard SSID. This is because the AP that the non-AP STA that transmitted the Probe Request frame intends to scan is an AP that uses the subchannel corresponding to A20 as its primary 20 MHz subchannel, and the AP that received the Probe Request frame through A20 is not a scanning target.
  • the AP may be in a state of switching to P20 operation, and the Association attempt of the non-AP STA is likely to fail.
  • an AP operating in A20 may be restricted from allocating RA-RUs for Unassociated STAs via Trigger frames transmitted over A20.
  • RA-RUs for Unassociated STAs mean RA-RUs allocated via the User Info field with AID set to 2045.
  • an STA performing an NPCA operation can determine a method of performing the NPCA operation based on the remaining TXOP length of an OBSS occupying its primary 20 MHz subchannel. That is, the STA can decide to switch to an operation using the A20 subchannel when the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS exceeds (is equal to or greater than, or is greater than) a threshold value indicated by the AP, and to maintain an operation state using the primary 20 MHz subchannel when the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is shorter than the threshold value indicated by the AP.
  • the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS can be the sum of PPDU length information (a value calculated based on the length and rate fields) confirmed by the STA from the L-SIG field of the OBSS PPDU and the TXOP duration indicated by the TXOP field of the OBSS PPDU.
  • the STA must compare the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP and the threshold value for NPCA at the time when it decides/judges whether to switch to A20 operation, taking into account the time already spent to check the length information of the PPDU (e.g., RL-SIG (4 us), U-SIG (or HE-SIG-A) (8 us), EHT/UHR-SIG (or HE-SIG-B), etc.).
  • RL-SIG (4 us
  • U-SIG or HE-SIG-A
  • EHT/UHR-SIG or HE-SIG-B
  • the STA can decide to switch to A20 operation when "[the length of the OBSS PPDU indicated by the L-SIG field (the length of the OBSS PPDU calculated using the L-SIG field is the remaining OBSS PPDU length after the L-SIG field, and the actual OBSS PPDU length is 20 us longer than the value calculated using the length field and the rate field of the L-SIG field.)] + [TXOP duration indicated by the TXOP field of the OBSS PPDU] - [the time that has already elapsed until the point at which it performs comparison using the threshold for NPCA operation (since the end of the L-SIG field)]" is greater than the threshold for NPCA operation.
  • the above [time that has already elapsed until the point in time when it performs comparison using the threshold value for NPCA operation (from the end of the L-SIG field)] may be the same as the time interval from the point in time when the L-SIG field of the OBSS PPDU ends to the point in time when the STA's MAC receives the RXVECTOR parameter (i.e., the point in time when the PHY issues the PHY-RXEND.indication).
  • a non-AP STA can compare a value obtained by adding the duration of the PPDU to a value indicated by the TXOP field (or duration field) of the PPDU transmitted from the OBSS AP and the minimum duration threshold value in order to perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel.
  • the duration of the PPDU can be obtained by the length field and the rate field of the PPDU
  • the minimum duration threshold value can mean a minimum duration for a non-AP STA to perform a channel access procedure by switching channels from a primary channel to a non-primary channel.
  • a non-AP STA can receive list information of OBSSs capable of performing a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel (e.g., BSS color information of an OBSS and/or MAC address information of an OBSS AP, etc.) through a management frame from an AP associated with the non-AP STA (this operation can be performed selectively).
  • the non-AP STA receives a PPDU from an OBSS AP
  • the non-AP STA determines whether the received PPDU is a PPDU transmitted from an AP associated with the non-AP STA (intra-BSS PPDU) or a PPDU transmitted from an OBSS AP (inter-BSS PPDU).
  • the non-AP STA can determine whether to perform a channel access procedure by channel switching to a non-primary channel. First, if a non-AP STA receives list information of OBSSs from an associated AP, the non-AP STA can compare the list information with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the received PPDU. If the list information includes the BSS color information or the MAC address of the AP that transmitted the PPDU, the non-AP STA can perform the NPCA procedure.
  • the non-AP STA cannot perform the NPCA procedure.
  • This process can be optionally performed when the non-AP STA receives list information of OBSSs from the AP, and is not an essential operation. Therefore, the non-AP STA may not perform the operation of checking the OBSS information.
  • the non-AP STA can compare the value of the TXOP field (or duration field) included in the PPDU plus the duration of the PPDU with the minimum duration threshold value to check whether sufficient TXOPs remain for performing the NPCA operation.
  • the duration of the PPDU can be obtained by the length field and the rate field of the PPDU.
  • the non-AP STA may switch channels from the primary channel to the non-primary channel and perform a channel access procedure on the switched non-primary channel. However, if the value of the TXOP field (or Duration field) plus the duration of the PPDU is less than or equal to (or less than) the minimum duration threshold, the non-AP STA may not perform the NPCA operation.
  • the remaining remaining PPDU length from the time when the length of the PPDU was recognized may be utilized for Early NAV setting. That is, the Early NAV setting/update value may be the length of the remaining OBSS PPDU from the time when the length of the OBSS PPDU was recognized and the remaining OBSS TXOP length after the OBSS PPDU indicated by the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU.
  • the method of performing NPCA operation based on whether the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is sufficient is intended to prevent (mitigate) inefficiency problems that may occur during the process of switching to A20 operation and then returning to P20 operation when the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is short.
  • the method for the STA to check the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is to utilize information of the TXOP field included in the Preamble of the OBSS PPDU (if the PPDU is a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU) or to utilize information of the Duration field of the MAC frame included in the OBSS PPDU (included in the MAC Header).
  • the information indicated through the above-described fields indicates the length of the remaining TXOP from the time point at which the corresponding OBSS PPDU ends, and therefore, the time point at which the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP can be checked based on the information indicated through the fields is delayed to the time point at which the OBSS PPDU including the corresponding field ends. For example, if an OBSS TXOP having a length of 5 ms is initiated and the transmitted OBSS PPDU has a length of 3 ms, the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU indicates a time corresponding to 2 ms.
  • an STA that receives an OBSS PPDU and checks the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU must wait until the end of the OBSS PPDU to check the time point at which the information confirmed in the TXOP field, 2 ms, is applied, and when the end of the OBSS PPDU is confirmed, the STA can decide to switch to the A20 operation state after setting the Basic NAV value it maintains to a value corresponding to 2 ms.
  • the STA can perform the A20 operation for only a part (2 ms in the example described above) of the total time (5 ms in the example described above) during which its primary 20 MHz subchannel is occupied by the OBSS TXOP, resulting in a problem that the expected benefit obtained through the NPCA operation is limited. In this case, the problem becomes more serious as the length of the OBSS PPDU itself including the TXOP field is longer.
  • the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU will indicate a value equal to 0, and the STA will not be able to transition to an operating state via A20 and will remain in the P20 operating state until the OBSS TXOP terminates.
  • the problem of NPCA operation inefficiency that occurs when the length of the OBSS PPDU itself is long is caused by the NAV setting method used by the conventional Wi-Fi MAC.
  • the conventional Wi-Fi standard defined that after including a duration field in the header of the MAC frame, a device transmitting the frame is to indicate the length of the remaining TXOP remaining after the PPDU including the corresponding frame ends.
  • the duration field setting method defined in Wi-Fi includes single protection (a setting method for protecting a response frame) and multiple protection (a setting method for protecting TXOP), but since what the present invention is intended to deal with is the multiple protection method, the explanation will assume a duration field to which the multiple protection method is applied.
  • An STA that is a TXOP holder indicates its remaining TXOP length after the PPDU including the corresponding frame is terminated through the duration field of the frame it transmits, and STAs that have received the frame, other than the destination device of the frame, set their NAVs using the values indicated through the duration field of the corresponding frame.
  • the NAV of each STA set in this way is maintained as a non-zero value until the TXOP of the STA that is the TXOP holder is terminated, and this has the effect of blocking channel access of other STAs (i.e., the Virtual CS results of other STAs are maintained as BUSY) while the TXOP of the STA that is the TXOP holder is in progress. This is the TXOP introduced in Wi-Fi MAC and the MAC protection mechanism to protect it.
  • the reason why the value indicated by the Duration field of the MAC frame is set to indicate the remaining TXOP length after the PPDU including the frame is terminated The details are as follows.
  • the frames transmitted by the TXOP holder are transmitted included in the PPDU, and STAs receiving the PPDU cannot decode the frames included in the PPDU until the reception of the PPDU is complete.
  • STAs receiving the PPDU can confirm whether they are the destination of the frame included in the PPDU only after the reception of the PPDU is complete and the frame included in the PPDU is decoded.
  • An STA that confirms that it is not the destination of the decoded frame sets the NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the frame, but the time at which the information in the Duration field is acquired is when the reception of the PPDU is already complete (the PPDU transmission of the TXOP holder is terminated).
  • the Wi-Fi standard considers that the point in time when STAs can obtain information (the point in time when they obtain the duration field information of the frame) that can set the NAV is after the transmission of the PPDU is completed (after the reception of the PPDU including the corresponding frame is completed). Therefore, it defines that the TXOP holder is to set the value indicated through the duration field of the frame to the remaining TXOP length after the end of the PPDU including the corresponding frame. Through this, STAs that have received the frame can use the value indicated through the duration field to set (update) the NAV without any additional calculation (without considering the length of the PPDU that they have received).
  • the 11ax standard introduced PHY Preamble enhancement to solve the problem that STAs can check the destination device information of the frame included in the PPDU only after completing the reception of the PPDU. If STAs can check the destination device information of the frame after completing the reception of the PPDU, the STAs would have to continuously decode frames for which they are not the destination device, which would be inefficient. Therefore, if STAs can confirm that they are not the destination device of the frame before decoding the frame, the energy required for PPDU reception and frame decoding can be saved.
  • the 11ax standard added the BSS Color and TXOP fields to the PHY Preamble of the HE PPDU, and configured the User Info field (included in the HE SIG field) that can check the destination device information of the DL PPDU to enable an STA that has checked the PHY Preamble of the HE PPDU to determine whether the corresponding PPDU includes a frame transmitted to it.
  • the TXOP field included in the PHY Preamble of the HE PPDU is included to support STAs that have not decoded the frame included in the HE PPDU to set the NAV.
  • the STA MAC When the STA MAC receives the PHY-RXEND.indication (a primitive that the STA's PHY indicates to the MAC at the end of the PPDU) related to the end of the HE PPDU, the STA sets the NAV based on the value indicated by the TXOP field of the corresponding PPDU. At this time, the information of the TXOP field included in the PHY preamble of the PPDU is indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION that the STA's PHY indicates to the MAC.
  • the STA's MAC updates the NAV based on the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION information indicated by the PHY when the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive is received from the PHY.
  • the reason why the point in time when STA (STA's MAC) updates NAV is defined as when the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive is received from STA's PHY is to support performing Spatial Reuse operation before the completion of the HE PPDU transmitted by OBSS when it is confirmed, and to allow operation in a similar manner to the existing method of updating NAV through the duration field.
  • the STA which is the TXOP holder, can set the duration field of the frame it transmits and the TXOP field of the HE PPDU including the frame (more precisely, included in the PHY preamble (HE-SIG-A field)) to have the same/similar time values, which has the effect of reducing the operational complexity of the STA, which is the TXOP holder.
  • the operations of the STA that sets the NAV based on the information indicated through the duration field of the frame included in the PPDU and the STA that sets the NAV based on the information indicated through the TXOP field included in the PHY preamble are managed to be consistent in terms of the timing of updating the NAV (after the reception of the PPDU is completed) and the NAV value to be updated.
  • the TXOP field which began to be included in the PHY preamble of the HE PPDU, has been greatly recognized for its advantage of supporting the STA to set the NAV without decoding the frame included in the PPDU, and is included in the PPDU of the generation after EHT.
  • the NPCA operation inefficiency problem that occurs when the length of the aforementioned OBSS PPDU is long can be briefly summarized as follows.
  • the values indicated through the TXOP field (PHY Preamble) and Duration field (of the MAC frame included in the PPDU) included in the OBSS PPDU are information on the length of the remaining TXOP remaining from the point in time when the OBSS PPDU ends, and when the length of the OBSS PPDU itself is long, the time indicated through the TXOP field and Duration field of the corresponding PPDU may differ from the actual duration of the OBSS TXOP.
  • STAs performing the NPCA operation perform the operation in A20 only until the time when the OBSS TXOP ends (i.e., the time when the NAV set by the OBSS expires) and then return to the P20 operation, they can switch to the A20 operation after setting the NAV, that is, after completing the reception of the OBSS PPDU (after decoding the frame included in the PPDU or receiving the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive from the PHY) and setting the NAV.
  • the time when the STA performing the NPCA operation sets the NAV is delayed, and as a result, the time available for performing the A20 operation becomes shorter compared to the length of the OBSS TXOP.
  • the STA obtaining information about the remaining length of the OBSS TXOP means setting the NAV corresponding to the TXOP of the OBSS.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates an example of information acquired by a STA and a method for setting NAV based on reception of an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 35 illustrates information that the MAC of a STA acquires and how to set the NAV when an OBSS TXOP initiated with a long OBSS PPDU is received at the PHY of the STA.
  • the PHY of the STA detects a Long OBSS PPDU and then issues a PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive based on information acquired from the Preamble of the PPDU.
  • the primitive has a configuration including an RXVECTOR, and among the RXVECTOR parameters, TXOP_DURATION indicates a value set based on the value of the TXOP field included in HE-SIG-A or U-SIG.
  • the STA MAC decides not to switch to the A20 operation because the remaining time (remaining TXOP) checked through the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION is less than the NPCA Threshold (short in time). As a result, the expected gain obtained by the STA by performing the NPCA operation is lost even though the OBSS TXOP is longer than the NPCA Threshold.
  • an STA receiving an OBSS PPDU can set a NAV before the OBSS PPDU ends.
  • the meaning of the STA receiving the OBSS PPDU does not mean decoding a frame included in the OBSS PPDU, but may mean acquiring information from the PHY preamble of the OBSS PPDU.
  • the MAC of the STA confirms that PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) has been received from the PHY, and sets (updates) Basic NAV at the expected end of the corresponding PPDU. At this time, the STA updates Basic NAV using the time length indicated by the RXVECTOR Parameter TXOP_DURATION of the corresponding PPDU.
  • the STA when an OBSS PPDU is received, the STA does not process the OBSS PPDU to the end (such as decoding the frame), but waits until the expected time when the OBSS PPDU ends and then performs MAC protection by updating the Basic NAV only at the expected end time.
  • the STA performing the NPCA operation needs to evaluate the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP as soon as possible and then decide whether to switch to the A20 operation, it is inappropriate to use the conventional Basic NAV update method by OBSS PPDU as it is.
  • the MAC of an STA that has received an OBSS PPDU can update Basic NAV when PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) for the OBSS PPDU is received from the PHY (at the time of reception).
  • the value of the Basic NAV that the STA updates can be (remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU + duration indicated by TXOP_DURATION (RXVECTOR parameter of PPDU)).
  • the 'remaining time until the expected end of PPDU' means a time interval from the time when PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) is received from the PHY to the expected end of the PPDU.
  • an STA it is possible for an STA to update/set a basic NAV before the expected end time of an OBSS PPDU, which means that the basic NAV is updated/set at an earlier time compared to a conventional Wi-Fi STA that updates/sets the NAV at the time when an OBSS PPDU ends (or is expected to end).
  • a Basic NAV set at an earlier time according to one embodiment of the present invention will be referred to as an Early NAV.
  • the operation of an STA that updates its Basic NAV (Early NAV) after receiving an OBSS PPDU and before the end of the OBSS PPDU is briefly summarized as follows.
  • the STA updates its Early NAV to "remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU + duration indicated by TXOP_DURATION (RXVECTOR parameter of PPDU)" when all of the conditions listed below are satisfied.
  • the operation of STA updating/setting basic NAV (Early NAV) before OBSS PPDU ends may be limited to when STA performs NPCA operation.
  • the meaning of STA performing NPCA operation may mean that the NPCA operation mode of BSS including STA is activated and the NPCA operation mode of STA is also activated. In other words, it means that both AP and STA have performed indication meaning NPCA enable.
  • Another additional condition to be satisfied for Early NAV update/setting may be that the value indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter BSS_COLOR of the OBSS PPDU must be one of the values included in the OBSS color List indicated in advance by the AP. That is, the STA may be able to perform Early NAV setting only when a PPDU of an OBSS identified by the OBSS color List indicated in advance by the AP is received. This may be because a PPDU of an OBSS not identified by the OBSS color List indicated in advance by the AP is not an OBSS PPDU that causes a transition to A20 operation.
  • the STA can perform Early NAV update/setting and then perform NPCA operation (transition to A20 operation) only when it is confirmed that the OBSS PPDU received by the STA is a PPDU of an OBSS that is a target of NPCA operation indicated in advance by the AP.
  • an STA that has updated/set an Early NAV before the OBSS PPDU ends can determine whether to transition to the A20 operation based on whether the value of the Early NAV (Basic NAV) is greater than (or greater than or equal to) the NPCA Threshold (the minimum Basic NAV time length that allows transition to the A20 operation) indicated by the AP.
  • the value of the Early NAV being greater than the Threshold means that the time taken until the expiration of the Early NAV is longer than the time length indicated by the Threshold.
  • STAs performing the A20 operation can update/set the Basic NAV (Early NAV) they utilize when performing the P20 operation based on the information instructed from the AP.
  • the STAs can update/set the Basic NAV (Basic (Early) NAV set after receiving the OBSS PPDU in the above-described example) they utilize when performing the P20 operation after receiving the frame transmitted by their AP in A20.
  • This is an operation related to the AP instructing the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP it has confirmed and the non-AP STAs performing the A20 operation based on this in the above-described example of the present invention.
  • the non-AP STAs can adjust their A20 operation state maintenance interval to match the time interval during which the AP maintains the A20 operation state by setting/updating their Basic NAV based on the information instructed by the AP.
  • non-AP STAs may not update/set/modify their own Basic NAV values if the value of their own Basic NAV is greater than the value of Basic NAV to be updated based on the information indicated from the AP.
  • non-AP STAs may need to update their own Basic NAV only when the information indicated from the AP increases the value of their own Basic NAV.
  • the PHY of the UHR STA can include information in the RXVECTOR parameter to help the MAC calculate the expected end time of the OBSS PPDU, or can indicate the calculated expected end time of the OBSS PPDU with the RXVECTOR parameter.
  • the indicated information can be information obtained through the L-SIG field of the PPDU (e.g., information of the Length field or the Rate field) or information on the length of the PPDU calculated based on the information included in the L-SIG field (e.g., the RXVECTOR parameter L_LENGTH of the conventional Wi-Fi standard or a new PPDU length-related RXVECTOR parameter).
  • the indicated information can be indicated together with the RXVECTOR parameter of PHY-RXSTART.indication, or can be the RXVECTOR parameter indicated together when PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) is indicated.
  • the method for PHY to calculate the expected end time of the PPDU based on the information included in the L-SIG field may be 'the length indicated by the Length field included in the L-SIG of the PPDU - (RL-SIG (4 us)) - (U-SIG (8 us) or HE-SIG-A (8 us or 16 us)) - (EHT/UHR-SIG length (variable us) or HE-SIG-B length)).
  • the MAC of the UHR STA can recognize the expected end time of the OBSS PPDU based on the information indicated from the PHY, and can set Early NAV by using the information together with the indicated TXOP_DURATION value.
  • the STA may need to utilize the remaining PPDU length from the time at which it recognized the length of the PPDU for Early NAV setting, considering the PPDU length information (a value calculated based on the Length and Rate fields) determined from the L-SIG field of the OBSS PPDU and the time already taken by the STA to determine the length information of the PPDU (e.g., RL-SIG (4 us), U-SIG (or HE-SIG-A) (8 us), EHT/UHR-SIG (or HE-SIG-B) etc.).
  • the PPDU length information a value calculated based on the Length and Rate fields
  • the Early NAV setting/update value may be the remaining OBSS PPDU length from the time at which it recognized the length of the OBSS PPDU and the OBSS TXOP length remaining after the OBSS PPDU indicated by the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU.
  • a UHR STA transmitting a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU may set the TXOP field included in the Preamble of the PPDU it transmits to a value indicating the end time of its TXOP, for the purpose of helping other STAs performing NPCA operation to set accurate Early NAV. That is, the UHR STA may set the TXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION to a value indicating the end time of its TXOP. In addition, the UHR STA may be restricted from setting the TXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION to UNSPECIFIED.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates an example of a method for setting up NAV and a method for using a subchannel when an STA receives an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 36 illustrates an operation in which an STA sets an Early NAV before an OBSS PPDU ends and then switches to an operation using an A20 subchannel according to one embodiment of the present invention.
  • the PHY of the STA detects a Long OBSS PPDU and then issues a PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive based on information acquired from the Preamble of the PPDU. At this time, the PHY of the STA verifies that the BSS Color included in the Preamble of the OBSS PPDU does not match the Color of the BSS that the STA is included in, and issues a PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) primitive following the PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive.
  • the MAC of the STA can confirm that the PHY has detected/received the OBSS PPDU by verifying that the RXVECTOR parameter BSS_COLOR included in the PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive does not match the BSS color of the BSS to which it belongs.
  • the MAC of the STA receives PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) from the PHY, it updates/sets the Early NAV (Basic NAV).
  • the STA sets Early NAV to the sum of the time indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION and the time indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter REMAINING_PPDU_DURATION.
  • the RXVECTOR parameter REMAINING_PPDU_DURATION is the expected time (or basic information required to calculate the expected time) until the expected end time of the PPDU that the PHY is detecting/receiving, and can be included in one of the two primitives above and indicated/transmitted from the PHY to the MAC.
  • the MAC of the STA compares the value of the set Early NAV with the NPCA Threshold and then decides to switch to the operation using the A20 subchannel.
  • An STA performing an NPCA operation switches from an operation state using a primary 20 MHz subchannel (P20) to an operation state using an A20 (NPCA primary channel) subchannel, terminates the operation state using the A20 subchannel, and returns to the operation state using the P20.
  • the decision to switch from the P20 operation to the A20 operation and the decision to switch from the A20 operation to the P20 operation are both performed according to the judgment of the STA's MAC, and when the STA's MAC decides to switch, the change of the operation channel must be performed by instructing the STA's PHY to do so.
  • the MAC of the STA that has decided to switch to the operating state using the A20 channel can issue a PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive to the PHY.
  • the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request issued from the MAC to the PHY can include parameters (e.g., NPCA_PRIMARY_CHANNEL, NPCA_CHANNEL_WIDTH, NPCA_CENTER_FREQUENCY) that indicate information on the channel to be used for the A20 operation (operating channel and A20 operation primary channel information).
  • the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) issued by the MAC of the STA can include information that can identify the primary channel (A20 subchannel, NPCA primary channel) used when performing the A20 operation and information that can identify the operating channel (Operating channel) used when performing the A20 operation.
  • the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive may be the same primitive as the PHY-CONFIG.request primitive used in conventional Wi-Fi. That is, the MAC of the STA that changes the operating channel (from P20 to A20 or from A20 to P20) in relation to the NPCA operation can initiate the change of the operating channel of the PHY by issuing the PHY-CONFIG.request primitive.
  • the PHY of the STA Upon receiving the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive, the PHY of the STA initiates a series of procedures to switch the basic operating channel from P20 (primary 20 MHz subchannel) to A20 subchannel.
  • the method by which the PHY performs the above procedures may vary depending on the implementation of the device, and therefore a detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the switching procedure performed by the PHY must be completed within the NPCA switching delay that the STA instructed to the AP.
  • the STA PHY Upon receiving the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive from the STA MAC, the STA PHY performs a switch to the A20 subchannel based on the information in the PHYCONFIG_VECTOR parameter of the primitive, and issues a PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive when the switch operation is completed.
  • the STA MAC Upon receiving the PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive from the PHY, the STA MAC can recognize that the operating channel of the STA PHY has been switched to an operation based on the A20 subchannel.
  • the MAC of the STA that has decided to transition to the operation state using the A20 channel can issue a PHY-CCARESET.request primitive to the PHY.
  • the PHY of the STA can evaluate the channel state of A20 as IDLE until PHY-CCA.indication(BUSY) occurs after transitioning to the A20 operation state.
  • the time point at which the STA MAC issues the PHY-CCARESET.request primitive can be (immediately before or immediately after) when it issues the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive or after the PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive is received from the PHY.
  • the STA MAC issues the PHY-CCARESET.request primitive only when the AP indicates that channel access using EDCA on A20 is allowed (when untriggered UL transmission is allowed).
  • the MAC of the STA performs a decision to terminate the A20 operation and switch to the P20 operation, and the decision is performed before the Basic (Early) NAV set in the P20 expires.
  • a specific timing for performing the decision may be when the time corresponding to the Basic (Early) NAV value set in the P20 is longer than or equal to its NPCA Switching back delay (delay required to switch from the A20 operation to the P20 operation).
  • the STA must perform the P20 transition so that the transition to the P20 is completed before the Basic (Early) NAV set in the P20 expires.
  • the MAC of the STA may have to make a decision to terminate A20 operation and transition to P20 operation when an explicit instruction is received from the AP. That is, a non-AP STA that has been instructed by the AP to transition to P20 operation may have to decide to transition to P20 operation regardless of its Basic NAV value.
  • the MAC of the STA that decides to end the operation state using the A20 channel and switch back to the operation state using the P20 channel can issue the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive to the PHY.
  • the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request issued from the MAC to the PHY can include parameters indicating the operating channel and the primary channel.
  • the NPCASWITCHBACK.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive can have the same configuration as the NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive described above. That is, the STA can issue the same primitive when it decides to switch from P20 to A20 and when it decides to switch from A20 to P20.
  • the STA's MAC can have a configuration that does not include the primary PHYCONFIG_VECTOR parameter to instruct the PHY to switch to P20 operation.
  • the P20 operation is the basic operation of the STA, and therefore, various parameters for the P20 operation are already recognized (stored) in the STA's PHY.
  • the STA's MAC when the STA's MAC decides to switch to P20 operation, it can issue a PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive that does not include a separate parameter, and the PHY that receives it can switch to P20 operation by utilizing various parameters that it already recognizes.
  • the PHY of the STA that receives the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive initiates a series of procedures to switch the default operating channel from A20 to P20.
  • the method by which the PHY performs the above procedures may vary depending on the implementation of the device, so a detailed description is omitted. However, the switching procedure performed by the PHY must be completed within the NPCA switching back delay that the STA instructed to the AP.
  • the PHY of an STA that has completed switching to the P20 subchannel issues a PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive when the switching operation is complete.
  • the STA MAC can recognize that the operating channel of the STA PHY has been switched (restored) to operation based on the P20 subchannel.
  • the STA's MAC which confirms that the transition to an operational state using the P20 channel is complete by receiving a PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive from the PHY, issues a PHY-CCARESET.request primitive when its Basic NAV expires (reaches 0).
  • FIG. 37 illustrates an example of a primitive exchange procedure for channel access in a non-primary channel of an STA according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • the PHY of the STA detects the Preamble of the OBSS and then issues the PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive.
  • the example of FIG. 37 assumes that the PPDU detected by the PHY is an OBSS PPDU in HE/EHT/UHR PPDU format, and thus the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive is generated together.
  • the MAC that receives the PHY-RXSTART.indication and PHY-RXEND.indication primitives from the PHY sets the Basic NAV (Early NAV) based on the indicated RXVECTOR parameter and decides to switch to the A20 operation.
  • the MAC that decides to switch to the A20 operation issues the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive.
  • the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive has a configuration including channel information for A20 operation (such as the location of the A20 subchannel and operating channel information to be used when performing the A20 operation).
  • the PHY that receives the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive from the MAC performs a transition from the P20 operation to the A20 operation, and issues a PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive when the transition to the A20 operation is completed.
  • the MAC that receives the PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive can recognize that the PHY has completed the transition for the A20 operation. At this time, the MAC can attempt to perform EDCA on the A20 subchannel by issuing a PHY-CCARESET.request primitive.
  • the MAC of the STA issues the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive before the Basic NAV expires, and the PHY receiving it initiates the transition (return) from the A20 operation to the P20 operation.
  • the transition (return) to the P20 operation performed by the PHY is completed before the expiration of the Basic NAV managed by the MAC. For this, the timing when the MAC issues the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive is managed.
  • the PHY that has completed the transition to the P20 operation issues the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive, and the MAC receiving it recognizes that the PHY has completed the transition (return) to the P20 operation.
  • the MAC initiates the CCA procedure (for the EDCA operation) on the primary 20 MHz subchannel by issuing the PHY-CCARESET.request primitive when the Basic NAV it was managing expires.
  • FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a channel access procedure performed by a terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIG. 38 shows that when an STA receives a PPDU transmitted from an OBSS AP on a primary channel, it can switch the channel from the primary channel to a non-primary channel based on whether a specific condition is satisfied, and perform a channel access procedure on the switched non-primary channel.
  • a Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit can be received from an Overlapping Basic Service Set (OBSS) Access Point (AP) that is not associated with a wireless communication terminal (non-AP STA) on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates (S38010).
  • OBSS Basic Service Set
  • AP Access Point
  • a preamble of the received PPDU can include a transmission opportunity (TXOP) field and a duration field related to a duration period set by the OBSS AP.
  • TXOP transmission opportunity
  • the non-AP STA may perform channel access by switching the channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to the non-primary channel if a specific condition is satisfied (S38020).
  • the specific condition is whether a specific value obtained based on the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field is greater than the minimum duration threshold value.
  • the state of the primary channel is busy because it is occupied by the OBSS AP by the PPDU transmitted by the OBSS AP, and the minimum duration threshold is the minimum value for the wireless communication terminal to perform the channel access by switching the channel to the non-primary channel.
  • a wireless communication terminal can receive a management frame from an associated AP, and the management frame includes list information of APs that can occupy the primary channel.
  • the list information can include BSS color information and/or MAC address of each of the APs.
  • the above channel access on the non-primary channel can be performed when the primary channel is occupied by one of the APs.
  • a wireless communication terminal can compare the BSS color information or MAC address of the OBSS AP with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the above list information.
  • a specific value can be obtained based on a value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field plus a switching delay for switching a channel from a primary channel to the non-primary channel.

Landscapes

  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Signal Processing (AREA)
  • Computer Networks & Wireless Communication (AREA)
  • Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention provides a method and a device for operating a wireless communication terminal. Specifically, a wireless communication terminal according to the present invention may receive a physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) from an overlapping basic service set (OBSS) access point (AP), which is not associated with the wireless communication terminal, in a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates. The preamble of the PPDU includes a transmission opportunity (TXOP) field and a duration field related to a TXOP duration configured by the OBSS AP. Thereafter, when a specific condition is satisfied, the wireless communication terminal may perform channel access by switching a channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to a non-primary channel.

Description

무선 통신 시스템에서의 데이터 송수신 방법 및 이를 사용하는 무선 통신 단말Method for transmitting and receiving data in a wireless communication system and a wireless communication terminal using the same

본 발명은 중첩된 동작 채널(overlapping operating channel)에서 채널 접속 절차에 관한 것이다.The present invention relates to a channel access procedure in overlapping operating channels.

최근 모바일 기기의 보급이 확대됨에 따라 이들에게 빠른 무선 인터넷 서비스를 제공할 수 있는 무선랜(Wireless LAN) 기술이 많은 각광을 받고 있다. 무선랜 기술은 근거리에서 무선 통신 기술을 바탕으로 스마트 폰, 스마트 패드, 랩탑 컴퓨터, 휴대형 멀티미디어 플레이어, 임베디드 기기 등과 같은 모바일 기기들을 가정이나 기업 또는 특정 서비스 제공지역에서 무선으로 인터넷에 접속할 수 있도록 하는 기술이다.Recently, as the spread of mobile devices has expanded, wireless LAN technology that can provide fast wireless Internet services to them has been receiving a lot of attention. Wireless LAN technology is a technology that allows mobile devices such as smart phones, smart pads, laptop computers, portable multimedia players, and embedded devices to wirelessly connect to the Internet at home, in businesses, or in specific service areas based on short-range wireless communication technology.

IEEE(Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11은 2.4GHz 주파수를 이용한 초기의 무선랜 기술을 지원한 이래, 다양한 기술의 표준을 실용화 또는 개발 중에 있다. 먼저, IEEE 802.11b는 2.4GHz 밴드의 주파수를 사용하면서 최고 11Mbps의 통신 속도를 지원한다. IEEE 802.11b 이후에 상용화된 IEEE 802.11a는 2.4GHz 밴드가 아닌 5GHz 밴드의 주파수를 사용함으로써 상당히 혼잡한 2.4GHz 밴드의 주파수에 비해 간섭에 대한 영향을 줄였으며, OFDM(orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) 기술을 사용하여 통신 속도를 최대 54Mbps까지 향상시켰다. 그러나 IEEE 802.11a는 IEEE 802.11b에 비해 통신 거리가 짧은 단점이 있다. 그리고 IEEE 802.11g는 IEEE 802.11b와 마찬가지로 2.4GHz 밴드의 주파수를 사용하여 최대 54Mbps의 통신속도를 구현하며, 하위 호환성(backward compatibility)을 만족하고 있어 상당한 주목을 받았는데, 통신 거리에 있어서도 IEEE 802.11a보다 우위에 있다.Since supporting the initial wireless LAN technology using the 2.4 GHz frequency, IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 802.11 has commercialized or is developing various technology standards. First, IEEE 802.11b supports a communication speed of up to 11 Mbps while using the 2.4 GHz band frequency. IEEE 802.11a, which was commercialized after IEEE 802.11b, reduces the impact of interference compared to the considerably crowded 2.4 GHz band frequency by using the 5 GHz band frequency instead of the 2.4 GHz band, and improves the communication speed up to 54 Mbps by using OFDM (orthogonal frequency division multiplexing) technology. However, IEEE 802.11a has a shorter communication distance than IEEE 802.11b. And IEEE 802.11g, like IEEE 802.11b, uses the 2.4GHz band to achieve a communication speed of up to 54Mbps and satisfies backward compatibility, which has attracted considerable attention. It is also superior to IEEE 802.11a in terms of communication distance.

그리고 무선랜에서 취약점으로 지적되어온 통신 속도에 대한 한계를 극복하기 위하여 제정된 기술 규격으로서 IEEE 802.11n이 있다. IEEE 802.11n은 네트워크의 속도와 신뢰성을 증가시키고, 무선 네트워크의 운영 거리를 확장하는데 목적을 두고 있다. 보다 구체적으로, IEEE 802.11n에서는 데이터 처리 속도가 최대 540Mbps 이상인 고처리율(High Throughput, HT)을 지원하며, 또한 전송 에러를 최소화하고 데이터 속도를 최적화하기 위해 송신부와 수신부 양단 모두에 다중 안테나를 사용하는 MIMO(Multiple Inputs and Multiple Outputs) 기술에 기반을 두고 있다. 또한, 이 규격은 데이터 신뢰성을 높이기 위해 중복되는 사본을 여러 개 전송하는 코딩 방식을 사용할 수 있다.And in order to overcome the limitations of communication speed, which has been pointed out as a vulnerability in wireless LAN, there is IEEE 802.11n, a technical standard. IEEE 802.11n aims to increase the speed and reliability of networks and to extend the operating range of wireless networks. More specifically, IEEE 802.11n supports high throughput (HT) with a data processing speed of up to 540 Mbps, and is based on MIMO (Multiple Inputs and Multiple Outputs) technology that uses multiple antennas at both the transmitter and receiver to minimize transmission errors and optimize data rates. In addition, this standard can use a coding method that transmits multiple redundant copies to increase data reliability.

무선랜의 보급이 활성화되고 또한 이를 이용한 어플리케이션이 다양화됨에 따라, IEEE 802.11n이 지원하는 데이터 처리 속도보다 더 높은 처리율(Very High Throughput, VHT)을 지원하기 위한 새로운 무선랜 시스템에 대한 필요성이 대두되었다. 이 중 IEEE 802.11ac는 5GHz 주파수에서 넓은 대역폭(80MHz~160MHz)을 지원한다. IEEE 802.11ac 표준은 5GHz 대역에서만 정의되어 있으나 기존 2.4GHz 대역 제품들과의 하위 호환성을 위해 초기 11ac 칩셋들은 2.4GHz 대역에서의 동작도 지원할 것이다. 이론적으로, 이 규격에 따르면 다중 스테이션의 무선랜 속도는 최소 1Gbps, 최대 싱글 링크 속도는 최소 500Mbps까지 가능하게 된다. 이는 더 넓은 무선 주파수 대역폭(최대 160MHz), 더 많은 MIMO 공간적 스트림(최대 8개), 다중 사용자 MIMO, 그리고 높은 밀도의 변조(최대 256 QAM) 등 802.11n에서 받아들인 무선 인터페이스 개념을 확장하여 이루어진다. 또한, 기존 2.4GHz/5GHz 대신 60GHz 밴드를 사용해 데이터를 전송하는 방식으로 IEEE 802.11ad가 있다. IEEE 802.11ad는 빔포밍 기술을 이용하여 최대 7Gbps의 속도를 제공하는 전송규격으로서, 대용량의 데이터나 무압축 HD 비디오 등 높은 비트레이트 동영상 스트리밍에 적합하다. 하지만 60GHz 주파수 밴드는 장애물 통과가 어려워 근거리 공간에서의 디바이스들 간에만 이용이 가능한 단점이 있다.As wireless LAN becomes more widespread and its applications diversify, there is a growing need for a new wireless LAN system that supports a higher throughput (Very High Throughput, VHT) than that supported by IEEE 802.11n. Among these, IEEE 802.11ac supports a wide bandwidth (80MHz to 160MHz) at the 5GHz frequency. Although the IEEE 802.11ac standard is defined only for the 5GHz band, early 11ac chipsets will also support operation in the 2.4GHz band to maintain backward compatibility with existing 2.4GHz band products. In theory, according to this standard, the wireless LAN speed of multiple stations will be at least 1Gbps, and the maximum single link speed will be at least 500Mbps. This is achieved by extending the radio interface concepts accepted in 802.11n, such as wider radio frequency bandwidth (up to 160 MHz), more MIMO spatial streams (up to 8), multi-user MIMO, and high-density modulation (up to 256 QAM). In addition, there is IEEE 802.11ad, which transmits data using the 60 GHz band instead of the existing 2.4 GHz/5 GHz. IEEE 802.11ad is a transmission standard that provides a speed of up to 7 Gbps using beamforming technology, and is suitable for high bitrate video streaming such as large-capacity data or uncompressed HD video. However, the 60 GHz frequency band has a disadvantage in that it has difficulty passing through obstacles, so it can only be used between devices in short distances.

한편, 802.11ac 및 802.11ad 이후의 무선랜 표준으로서, AP와 단말들이 밀집한 고밀도 환경에서의 고효율 및 고성능의 무선랜 통신 기술을 제공하기 위한 IEEE 802.11ax(High Efficiency WLAN, HEW) 표준이 개발 완료단계에 있다. 802.11ax 기반 무선랜 환경에서는 고밀도의 스테이션들과 AP(Access Point)들의 존재 하에 실내/외에서 높은 주파수 효율의 통신이 제공되어야 하며, 이를 구현하기 위한 다양한 기술들이 개발되었다.Meanwhile, the IEEE 802.11ax (High Efficiency WLAN, HEW) standard, which is a wireless LAN standard following 802.11ac and 802.11ad, is nearing the development stage to provide high-efficiency and high-performance wireless LAN communication technology in high-density environments where APs and terminals are densely packed. In an 802.11ax-based wireless LAN environment, high-frequency-efficient communication must be provided indoors and outdoors in the presence of high-density stations and APs (Access Points), and various technologies have been developed to implement this.

또한 고화질 비디오, 실시간 게임 등과 같은 새로운 멀티미디어 응용을 지원하기 위하여 최대 전송 속도를 높이기 위한 새로운 무선랜 표준 개발이 시작되었다. 7세대 무선랜 표준인 IEEE 802.11be(Extremely High Throughput, EHT)에서는 2.4/5/6 GHz의 대역에서 더 넓은 대역폭과 늘어난 공간 스트림 및 다중 AP 협력 등을 통해 최대 30Gbps의 전송율을 지원하는 것을 목표로 표준 개발을 진행 중이다.In addition, new wireless LAN standards have been developed to increase the maximum transmission speed to support new multimedia applications such as high-definition video and real-time games. The 7th generation wireless LAN standard, IEEE 802.11be (Extremely High Throughput, EHT), is currently under development with the goal of supporting transmission rates of up to 30 Gbps in the 2.4/5/6 GHz bands through wider bandwidth, increased spatial streams, and multi-AP cooperation.

최근에는 802.11be 이후의 무선랜 표준으로서, 무선랜의 한계로 지적되어 온 신뢰성 문제를 극복하기 위한 초고신뢰성(UHR, Ultra High Reliability) 무선랜 통신 기술의 논의가 시작되었다. 초고신뢰성 무선랜 표준은 무선랜 트래픽에의 낮은 지연(Low-Latency), 낮은 지터(Jitter)를 높은 확률(예:99.9999% 이상 등)로 지원하는 것을 목표로 표준 개발을 진행 중이다.Recently, discussions have begun on ultra-high reliability (UHR) wireless LAN communication technology to overcome reliability issues that have been pointed out as limitations of wireless LAN as a wireless LAN standard after 802.11be. The ultra-high reliability wireless LAN standard is currently being developed with the goal of supporting low latency and low jitter in wireless LAN traffic with a high probability (e.g., 99.9999% or more).

본 발명은 중첩된 채널에 대한 채널 접근성을 향상시키기 위한 방법을 제공하기 위한 목적을 가지고 있다.The present invention aims to provide a method for improving channel accessibility for overlapping channels.

또한, 본 발명은 주 채널(또는, 프라이머리 채널(primary channel))의 상태가 비지인 경우, 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하기 위한 방법을 제공하기 위한 목적을 가지고 있다.In addition, the present invention has a purpose of providing a method for performing a channel access procedure through a non-primary channel rather than a primary channel when the state of the primary channel (or primary channel) is busy.

본 명세서에서 이루고자 하는 기술적 과제들은 이상에서 언급한 기술적 과제들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 기술적 과제들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The technical problems to be achieved in this specification are not limited to the technical problems mentioned above, and other technical problems not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art to which the present invention belongs from the description below.

본 발명에 의한 복수 개의 스테이션들을 포함하는 non-AP(Access Point) 멀티 링크 장치(Multi-link Device: MLD)에서, 프로세서는, 송수신부; 및 프로세서를 포함하고, 상기 프로세서는, 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관(association)되어 있지 않은 OBSS(Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP(Access Point)로부터 상기 무선 통신 단말이 동작하는 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)에서 inter-BSS PPDU(Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit)의 프리앰블을 수신하고, 상기 inter-BSS PPDU의 프리앰블은 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 설정된 전송 기회(transmission opportunity: TXOP) 구간(duration)과 관련된 TXOP 필드를 포함하고, 특정 조건을 만족하는 경우, 상기 대역폭의 상기 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널(non-primary channel)로 채널을 스위치하되, 상기 특정 조건은 상기 TXOP 필드 또는 상기 듀레이션 필드에 기초하여 계산된 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 길이가 최소 듀레이션 임계 값(minimum duration threshold value)보다 큰지 여부이다.In a non-AP (Access Point) multi-link device (MLD) including a plurality of stations according to the present invention, a processor includes a transceiver; and a processor, wherein the processor receives a preamble of an inter-BSS PPDU (Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit) from an OBSS (Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP (Access Point) that is not associated with the wireless communication terminal on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates, the preamble of the inter-BSS PPDU including a TXOP field related to a transmission opportunity (TXOP) duration set by the OBSS AP, and when a specific condition is satisfied, switches the channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to a non-primary channel, wherein the specific condition is whether a length of a remaining OBSS TXOP calculated based on the TXOP field or the duration field is greater than a minimum duration threshold value.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 프라이머리 채널의 상태는 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 비지(Busy)이다.Additionally, in the present invention, the state of the primary channel is busy by the OBSS AP.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 최소 듀레이션 임계 값은 상기 무선 통신 단말이 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위치하기 위한 최소 값이다.Additionally, in the present invention, the minimum duration threshold is a minimum value for the wireless communication terminal to switch a channel to the non-primary channel.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 프로세서는, 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관되어 있는 AP로부터 관리 프레임(management frame)을 수신하되, 상기 관리 프레임은 인접 AP들의 리스트 정보를 포함한다.Additionally, in the present invention, the processor receives a management frame from an AP associated with the wireless communication terminal, wherein the management frame includes list information of adjacent APs.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 리스트 정보는 상기 AP들 각각의 BSS color 정보 및/또는 MAC 주소를 포함한다.Additionally, in the present invention, the list information includes BSS color information and/or MAC address of each of the APs.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 채널 스위치는 상기 AP들 중 하나의 AP에 의해서 상기 프라이머리 채널이 점유된 경우 수행된다.Additionally, in the present invention, the channel switch to the non-primary channel is performed when the primary channel is occupied by one of the APs.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 프로세서는, 상기 inter-BSS PPDU의 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소와 상기 리스트 정보에 포함된 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소를 비교한다.Additionally, in the present invention, the processor compares the BSS color information or MAC address of the inter-BSS PPDU with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the list information.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 특정 조건은 상기 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 상기 길이에 상기 무선 통신 단말의 채널 스위치 딜레이가 추가적으로 고려되어 만족하는지 여부가 결정된다.Additionally, in the present invention, it is determined whether the specific condition is satisfied by additionally considering the channel switch delay of the wireless communication terminal in addition to the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP.

또한, 본 발명에서, 상기 프로세서는, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 상기 채널 스위치를 수행하기 위해 MAC layer에서 PHY layer로 프리미티브(primitive)를 전달한다.Additionally, in the present invention, the processor transmits a primitive from the MAC layer to the PHY layer to perform the channel switch to the non-primary channel.

또한, 본 발명은, 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관(association)되어 있지 않은 OBSS(Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP(Access Point)로부터 상기 무선 통신 단말이 동작하는 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)에서 PPDU(Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit)을 수신하는 단계, 상기 PPDU의 프리앰블은 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 설정된 전송 기회(transmission opportunity: TXOP) 구간(duration)과 관련된 TXOP 필드 및 듀레이션 필드(Duration field)를 포함하고; 및 특정 조건을 만족하는 경우, 상기 대역폭의 상기 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널(non-primary channel)로 채널을 스위칭하여 채널 접속을 수행하는 단계를 포함하되, 상기 특정 조건은 상기 TXOP 필드 또는 상기 듀레이션 필드에 의해서 지시된 값에 기초하여 획득된 특정 값이 최소 듀레이션 임계 값(minimum duration threshold value)보다 큰지 여부인 방법을 제공한다.In addition, the present invention provides a method including the steps of receiving a PPDU (Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit) from an OBSS (Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP (Access Point) that is not associated with the wireless communication terminal on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates, wherein a preamble of the PPDU includes a TXOP field and a Duration field related to a transmission opportunity (TXOP) duration set by the OBSS AP; and performing channel access by switching a channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to a non-primary channel when a specific condition is satisfied, wherein the specific condition is whether a specific value obtained based on a value indicated by the TXOP field or the Duration field is greater than a minimum duration threshold value.

본 발명의 일 실시 예는 동작 채널이 중첩된 환경에서 효율적으로 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있는 효과가 있다.One embodiment of the present invention has the effect of efficiently performing channel access in an environment where operating channels overlap.

또한, 본 발명에 의하면 MLD가 중첩된 동작 채널에서 동작하는 복수의 BSS를 통해 채널 액세스를 수행함으로써, 상기 복수의 BSS 중 특정 BSS의 프라이머리 채널이 다른 장치에 의해 점유되더라도 다른 BSS의 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접근 권한을 획득할 수 있다.In addition, according to the present invention, since MLD performs channel access through a plurality of BSSs operating in overlapping operation channels, even if the primary channel of a specific BSS among the plurality of BSSs is occupied by another device, channel access rights can be obtained through the primary channel of another BSS.

또한, 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따르면, 프라이머리 채널의 상태가 비지인 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다.Additionally, according to one embodiment of the present invention, when the state of the primary channel is busy, a channel access procedure can be performed through a non-primary channel.

본 발명에서 얻을 수 있는 효과는 이상에서 언급한 효과들로 제한되지 않으며, 언급하지 않은 또 다른 효과들은 아래의 기재로부터 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야에서 통상의 지식을 가진 자에게 명확하게 이해될 수 있을 것이다.The effects obtainable from the present invention are not limited to the effects mentioned above, and other effects not mentioned will be clearly understood by those skilled in the art to which the present invention belongs from the description below.

도 1은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 무선랜 시스템을 나타낸다.Figure 1 illustrates a wireless LAN system according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 2는 본 발명의 또 다른 일 실시예에 따른 무선랜 시스템을 나타낸다.Figure 2 illustrates a wireless LAN system according to another embodiment of the present invention.

도 3은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 스테이션의 구성을 나타낸다.Figure 3 shows the configuration of a station according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 4는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 액세스 포인트의 구성을 나타낸다.Figure 4 shows the configuration of an access point according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 5는 스테이션이 액세스 포인트와 링크를 설정하는 과정을 개략적으로 나타낸다.Figure 5 schematically illustrates the process by which a station establishes a link with an access point.

도 6은 무선랜 통신에서 사용되는 CSMA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access)/CA(Collision Avoidance) 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.Figure 6 shows an example of the CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access)/CA (Collision Avoidance) method used in wireless LAN communications.

도 7은 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 다양한 표준 세대별 PPDU(physical layer protocol data unit) 포맷을 보여준다.FIG. 7 shows various standard generation-specific physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) formats according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 8은 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 EHT/UHR PPDU 포맷을 보여준다. Figure 8 shows an EHT/UHR PPDU format according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 9는 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 RTS 프레임과 CTS 프레임을 이용한 전송/TXOP 보호방법을 보여준다.FIG. 9 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 10은 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 MU-RTS 프레임과 CTS 프레임을 이용한 전송/TXOP 보호방법을 보여준다.FIG. 10 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an MU-RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 11은 사용자 우선순위(User priority)와 접속 카테고리(Access Category)의 매핑 테이블(mapping table)을 나타낸다.Figure 11 shows a mapping table of user priority and access category.

도 12는 주 채널의 상태가 비지인 경우, 부 채널을 통한 채널 접속 절차의 일 예를 나타낸다.Figure 12 shows an example of a channel access procedure through a secondary channel when the state of the primary channel is busy.

도 13은 부 채널을 통해 채널 액세스를 수행한 뒤 전송되는 PPDU의 전송 길이 제한의 일 실시예를 도시한다.Figure 13 illustrates an example of a transmission length limitation of a PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through a subchannel.

도 14는 부 채널을 통한 채널 액세스를 통해 획득된 TXOP의 길이 제한 방법의 일 실시예를 도시한다.FIG. 14 illustrates an embodiment of a method for limiting the length of a TXOP obtained through channel access via a sub-channel.

도 15는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 주 채널 및 부 채널을 통해 TXOP을 획득하는 AP가 주 동작 채널을 관리하는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 15 illustrates a method for an AP to manage a primary operating channel by obtaining TXOPs through primary and secondary channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 16은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 주 AP(Primary AP)와 보조 AP(Auxiliary AP)가 포함된 AP MLD의 구성 및 동작 채널(Operating channel)의 설정 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 16 illustrates an example of a method for configuring an AP MLD including a primary AP and an auxiliary AP having overlapping operating channels and setting an operating channel according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 17은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, AP MLD가 주 BSS와 보조 BSS를 이용해 TXOP을 획득하는 절차의 일 예를 도시한다.FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a procedure for an AP MLD to obtain a TXOP using a primary BSS and a secondary BSS according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 18 은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, AP MLD가 보조 AP를 지시하기 위해 전송하는 RNR 엘리먼트의 포맷의 일 예를 도시한다.FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a format of an RNR element transmitted by an AP MLD to indicate an auxiliary AP according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 19는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 주 BSS에 대한 채널 스위치(Channel Switch)가 수행될 때 보조 BSS의 채널 스위치가 함께 지시/수행되는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 19 illustrates a method in which a channel switch of an auxiliary BSS is instructed/performed together when a channel switch for a primary BSS is performed according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 20은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 연속적인 동작 채널을 갖는 주 AP와 보조 AP가 포함된 AP MLD의 구성 및 동작 채널의 설정 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 20 illustrates a configuration of an AP MLD including a primary AP and a secondary AP having continuous operation channels and a method for setting operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 21는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 연속된 동작 채널을 갖는 두 링크에서 STA를 운용하는 MLD의 채널 접속 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 21 illustrates a channel access method of an MLD that operates an STA on two links having continuous operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 22는 PPDU의 프리앰블을 통해 지시되는 자원 유닛 할당 서브 필드 및 자원 유닛 할당 서브 필드를 이용해 각 STA에게 자원 유닛 할당이 수행되는 방법 및 컨텐츠 채널의 지시 방법 일 실시예를 도시한다. FIG. 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for performing resource unit allocation to each STA using a resource unit allocation subfield and a resource unit allocation subfield indicated through a preamble of a PPDU and a method for indicating a content channel.

도 23은 부 채널에서 프리앰블을 수신한 STA의 할당 RU 해석 모호성 문제를 도시한다.Figure 23 illustrates the ambiguity problem of allocation RU interpretation of an STA that receives a preamble on a subchannel.

도 24는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 부 채널을 통해 채널 액세스를 수행한 AP가 PPDU의 BW 및 RU 할당정보를 지시하는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 24 illustrates a method in which an AP performing channel access through a subchannel indicates BW and RU allocation information of a PPDU according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 25는 MU-RTS frame과 CTS frame을 이용한 전송/TXOP 보호방법 일 실시예를 도시한다.Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a transmission/TXOP protection method using MU-RTS frame and CTS frame.

도 26은 트리거 프레임의 포맷을 도시한다.Figure 26 illustrates the format of a trigger frame.

도 27은 트리거 프레임의 공통 정보 필드의 포맷의 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 27 illustrates an example of the format of the common information field of a trigger frame.

도 28은 트리거 프레임의 사용자 정보 필드의 포맷의 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 28 illustrates an example of the format of the user information field of a trigger frame.

도 29는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 프라이머리 채널이 점유 상태인 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 29 illustrates an example of channel access in a non-primary channel when the primary channel is occupied according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 30은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP로부터 전송된 OBSS와 관련된 정보에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 STA들의 동작의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 30 illustrates an example of operation of STAs in a non-primary channel based on information related to OBSS transmitted from an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 31은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 BSS의 TBTT를 고려한 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 동작 수행 여부를 결정하기 위한 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 31 illustrates an example of a method for determining whether to perform an operation on a non-primary channel considering the TBTT of a BSS according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 32는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP의 RTS 프레임의 수신에 따른 채널 접속 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 32 illustrates an example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 33은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP의 RTS 프레임의 수신에 따른 채널 접속 방법의 또 다른 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 33 illustrates another example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 34는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP의 RTS 프레임의 수신에 기초한 CTS-to-self 프레임의 전송 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 34 illustrates an example of a method for transmitting a CTS-to-self frame based on reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 35는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 OBSS PPDU의 수신에 기초하여 STA이 획득하는 정보 및 NAV 설정 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 35 illustrates an example of information acquired by a STA and a method for setting NAV based on reception of an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 36은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 STA이 OBSS PPDU를 수신한 경우 NAV 설정 방법 및 서브 채널을 이용하는 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 36 illustrates an example of a method for setting up NAV and a method for using a subchannel when an STA receives an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 37은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 STA의 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속을 위한 primitive 교환 절차의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 37 illustrates an example of a primitive exchange procedure for channel access in a non-primary channel of an STA according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 38은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 단말에 의해서 수행되는 채널 접속 절차의 일 예를 나타내는 순서도이다.FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a channel access procedure performed by a terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.

본 명세서에서 사용되는 용어는 본 발명에서의 기능을 고려하면서 가능한 현재 널리 사용되는 일반적인 용어를 선택하였으나, 이는 당 분야에 종사하는 기술자의 의도, 관례 또는 새로운 기술의 출현 등에 따라 달라질 수 있다. 또한 특정 경우는 출원인이 임의로 선정한 용어도 있으며, 이 경우 해당되는 발명의 설명 부분에서 그 의미를 기재할 것이다. 따라서 본 명세서에서 사용되는 용어는, 단순한 용어의 명칭이 아닌 그 용어가 가진 실질적인 의미와 본 명세서의 전반에 걸친 내용을 토대로 해석되어야 함을 밝혀두고자 한다.The terms used in this specification are selected from the most widely used and general terms possible while considering the functions of the present invention, but they may vary depending on the intentions of engineers in the field, customs, or the emergence of new technologies. In addition, in certain cases, there are terms arbitrarily selected by the applicant, and in such cases, their meanings will be described in the description of the relevant invention. Therefore, it should be noted that the terms used in this specification should be interpreted based on the actual meaning of the terms and the overall contents of this specification, not simply the names of the terms.

명세서 전체에서, 어떤 구성이 다른 구성과 "연결"되어 있다고 할 때, 이는 "직접적으로 연결"되어 있는 경우뿐 아니라, 그 중간에 다른 구성요소를 사이에 두고 "전기적으로 연결"되어 있는 경우도 포함한다. 또한 어떤 구성이 특정 구성요소를 "포함"한다고 할 때, 이는 특별히 반대되는 기재가 없는 한 다른 구성요소를 제외하는 것이 아니라 다른 구성요소를 더 포함할 수 있는 것을 의미한다. 이에 더하여, 특정 문턱 값을 기준으로 "이상" 또는 "이하"라는 한정 사항은 실시예에 따라 각각 "초과" 또는 "미만"으로 적절하게 대체될 수 있다.Throughout the specification, when a component is said to be "connected" to another component, this includes not only the case where it is "directly connected" but also the case where it is "electrically connected" with another component in between. Also, when a component is said to "include" a particular component, this does not mean that it excludes other components, but rather that it may include other components, unless specifically stated otherwise. In addition, the limitation of "more than" or "less than" with respect to a particular threshold value may be appropriately replaced with "more than" or "less than", respectively, depending on the embodiment.

이하, 본 발명에서 필드와 서브 필드는 혼용되어 사용될 수 있다.Hereinafter, in the present invention, fields and subfields may be used interchangeably.

도 1은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 무선랜 시스템을 나타낸다.Figure 1 illustrates a wireless LAN system according to one embodiment of the present invention.

무선랜 시스템은 하나 또는 그 이상의 베이직 서비스 세트(Basic Service Set, BSS)를 포함하는데, BSS는 성공적으로 동기화를 이루어서 서로 통신할 수 있는 기기들의 집합을 나타낸다. 일반적으로 BSS는 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS(infrastructure BSS)와 독립 BSS(Independent BSS, IBSS)로 구분될 수 있으며, 도 1은 이 중 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS를 나타내고 있다.A wireless LAN system includes one or more Basic Service Sets (BSS), which represent a set of devices that are successfully synchronized and can communicate with each other. In general, BSS can be divided into infrastructure BSS and independent BSS (IBSS), and Fig. 1 shows an infrastructure BSS among them.

도 1에 도시된 바와 같이 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS(BSS1, BSS2)는 하나 또는 그 이상의 스테이션(STA1, STA2, STA3, STA4, STA5), 분배 서비스(Distribution Service)를 제공하는 스테이션인 액세스 포인트(AP-1, AP-2), 및 다수의 액세스 포인트(AP-1, AP-2)를 연결시키는 분배 시스템(Distribution System, DS)을 포함한다.As illustrated in FIG. 1, an infrastructure BSS (BSS1, BSS2) includes one or more stations (STA1, STA2, STA3, STA4, STA5), an access point (AP-1, AP-2) which is a station providing a distribution service, and a distribution system (DS) that connects multiple access points (AP-1, AP-2).

스테이션(Station, STA)은 IEEE 802.11 표준의 규정을 따르는 매체 접속 제어(Medium Access Control, MAC)와 무선 매체에 대한 물리층(Physical Layer) 인터페이스를 포함하는 임의의 디바이스로서, 광의로는 비 액세스 포인트(non-AP) 스테이션뿐만 아니라 액세스 포인트(AP)를 모두 포함한다. 또한, 본 명세서에서 '단말'은 non-AP STA 또는 AP를 가리키거나, 양 자를 모두 가리키는 용어로 사용될 수 있다. 무선 통신을 위한 스테이션은 프로세서와 통신부를 포함하고, 실시예에 따라 유저 인터페이스부와 디스플레이 유닛 등을 더 포함할 수 있다. 프로세서는 무선 네트워크를 통해 전송할 프레임을 생성하거나 또는 상기 무선 네트워크를 통해 수신된 프레임을 처리하며, 그 밖에 스테이션을 제어하기 위한 다양한 처리를 수행할 수 있다. 그리고, 통신부는 상기 프로세서와 기능적으로 연결되어 있으며 스테이션을 위하여 무선 네트워크를 통해 프레임을 송수신한다. 본 발명에서 단말은 사용자 단말기(user equipment, UE)를 포함하는 용어로 사용될 수 있다.A station (STA) is any device that includes a medium access control (MAC) and a physical layer interface for a wireless medium that complies with the provisions of the IEEE 802.11 standard, and broadly includes both non-AP stations and access points (APs). In addition, the term 'terminal' in this specification may be used as a term referring to a non-AP STA or an AP, or both. A station for wireless communication includes a processor and a communication unit, and may further include a user interface unit and a display unit, etc., depending on the embodiment. The processor may generate a frame to be transmitted through a wireless network or process a frame received through the wireless network, and may perform various processes for controlling the station. In addition, the communication unit is functionally connected to the processor and transmits and receives frames through the wireless network for the station. In the present invention, a terminal may be used as a term including a user equipment (UE).

액세스 포인트(Access Point, AP)는 자신에게 결합된(associated) 스테이션을 위하여 무선 매체를 경유하여 분배시스템(DS)에 대한 접속을 제공하는 개체이다. 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS에서 비 AP 스테이션들 사이의 통신은 AP를 경유하여 이루어지는 것이 원칙이지만, 다이렉트 링크가 설정된 경우에는 비AP 스테이션들 사이에서도 직접 통신이 가능하다. 한편, 본 발명에서 AP는 PCP(Personal BSS Coordination Point)를 포함하는 개념으로 사용되며, 광의적으로는 집중 제어기, 기지국(Base Station, BS), 노드-B, BTS(Base Transceiver System), 또는 사이트 제어기 등의 개념을 모두 포함할 수 있다. 본 발명에서 AP는 베이스 무선 통신 단말로도 지칭될 수 있으며, 베이스 무선 통신 단말은 광의의 의미로는 AP, 베이스 스테이션(base station), eNB(eNodeB) 및 트랜스미션 포인트(TP)를 모두 포함하는 용어로 사용될 수 있다. 뿐만 아니라, 베이스 무선 통신 단말은 복수의 무선 통신 단말과의 통신에서 통신 매개체(medium) 자원을 할당하고, 스케줄링(scheduling)을 수행하는 다양한 형태의 무선 통신 단말을 포함할 수 있다.An Access Point (AP) is an entity that provides access to a distribution system (DS) via a wireless medium for stations associated with it. In an infrastructure BSS, communication between non-AP stations is in principle performed via an AP, but direct communication is also possible between non-AP stations when a direct link is established. Meanwhile, in the present invention, an AP is used as a concept including a PCP (Personal BSS Coordination Point), and in a broad sense, it can include concepts such as a centralized controller, a base station (BS), a node-B, a base transceiver system (BTS), or a site controller. In the present invention, an AP may also be referred to as a base wireless communication terminal, and in a broad sense, a base wireless communication terminal can be used as a term including an AP, a base station, an eNodeB (eNB), and a transmission point (TP). In addition, the base wireless communication terminal may include various types of wireless communication terminals that allocate communication medium resources and perform scheduling in communications with multiple wireless communication terminals.

복수의 인프라스트럭쳐 BSS는 분배 시스템(DS)을 통해 상호 연결될 수 있다. 이때, 분배 시스템을 통하여 연결된 복수의 BSS를 확장 서비스 세트(Extended Service Set, ESS)라 한다.Multiple infrastructure BSSs can be interconnected via a distribution system (DS). In this case, multiple BSSs connected via the distribution system are called an extended service set (ESS).

도 2는 본 발명의 다른 실시예에 따른 무선랜 시스템인 독립 BSS를 도시하고 있다. 도 2의 실시예에서 도 1의 실시예와 동일하거나 상응하는 부분은 중복적인 설명을 생략하도록 한다.Fig. 2 illustrates an independent BSS, which is a wireless LAN system according to another embodiment of the present invention. In the embodiment of Fig. 2, parts that are the same or corresponding to those in the embodiment of Fig. 1 will be omitted for redundant description.

도 2에 도시된 BSS3는 독립 BSS이며 AP를 포함하지 않기 때문에, 모든 스테이션(STA6, STA7)이 AP와 접속되지 않은 상태이다. 독립 BSS는 분배 시스템으로의 접속이 허용되지 않으며, 자기 완비적 네트워크(self-contained network)를 이룬다. 독립 BSS에서 각각의 스테이션들(STA6, STA7)은 다이렉트로 서로 연결될 수 있다.Since BSS3 illustrated in Fig. 2 is an independent BSS and does not include an AP, all stations (STA6, STA7) are not connected to an AP. An independent BSS is not allowed to connect to a distribution system and forms a self-contained network. In an independent BSS, each station (STA6, STA7) can be directly connected to each other.

도 3은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 스테이션(100)의 구성을 나타낸 블록도이다. 도시된 바와 같이, 본 발명의 실시예에 따른 스테이션(100)은 프로세서(110), 통신부(120), 유저 인터페이스부(140), 디스플레이 유닛(150) 및 메모리(160)를 포함할 수 있다.FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing the configuration of a station (100) according to one embodiment of the present invention. As illustrated, the station (100) according to the embodiment of the present invention may include a processor (110), a communication unit (120), a user interface unit (140), a display unit (150), and a memory (160).

먼저, 통신부(120)는 무선랜 패킷 등의 무선 신호를 송수신 하며, 스테이션(100)에 내장되거나 외장으로 구비될 수 있다. 실시예에 따르면, 통신부(120)는 서로 다른 주파수 밴드를 이용하는 적어도 하나의 통신 모듈을 포함할 수 있다. 이를 테면, 상기 통신부(120)는 2.4GHz, 5GHz, 6GHz 및 60GHz 등의 서로 다른 주파수 밴드의 통신 모듈을 포함할 수 있다. 일 실시예에 따르면, 스테이션(100)은 7.125GHz 이상의 주파수 밴드를 이용하는 통신 모듈과, 7.125GHz 이하의 주파수 밴드를 이용하는 통신 모듈을 구비할 수 있다. 각각의 통신 모듈은 해당 통신 모듈이 지원하는 주파수 밴드의 무선랜 규격에 따라 AP 또는 외부 스테이션과 무선 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 통신부(120)는 스테이션(100)의 성능 및 요구 사항에 따라 한 번에 하나의 통신 모듈만을 동작시키거나 동시에 다수의 통신 모듈을 함께 동작시킬 수 있다. 스테이션(100)이 복수의 통신 모듈을 포함할 경우, 각 통신 모듈은 각각 독립된 형태로 구비될 수도 있으며, 복수의 모듈이 하나의 칩으로 통합되어 구비될 수도 있다. 본 발명의 실시예에서 통신부(120)는 RF(Radio Frequency) 신호를 처리하는 RF 통신 모듈을 나타낼 수 있다.First, the communication unit (120) transmits and receives wireless signals such as wireless LAN packets, and may be built into or externally installed in the station (100). According to an embodiment, the communication unit (120) may include at least one communication module using different frequency bands. For example, the communication unit (120) may include communication modules of different frequency bands such as 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, and 60 GHz. According to one embodiment, the station (100) may include a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or higher and a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or lower. Each communication module may perform wireless communication with an AP or an external station according to the wireless LAN standard of the frequency band supported by the corresponding communication module. Depending on the performance and requirements of the station (100), the communication unit (120) may operate only one communication module at a time or may operate multiple communication modules simultaneously. When the station (100) includes multiple communication modules, each communication module may be provided in an independent form, or multiple modules may be integrated into one chip. In the embodiment of the present invention, the communication unit (120) may represent an RF communication module that processes RF (Radio Frequency) signals.

다음으로, 유저 인터페이스부(140)는 스테이션(100)에 구비된 다양한 형태의 입/출력 수단을 포함한다. 즉, 유저 인터페이스부(140)는 다양한 입력 수단을 이용하여 유저의 입력을 수신할 수 있으며, 프로세서(110)는 수신된 유저 입력에 기초하여 스테이션(100)을 제어할 수 있다. 또한, 유저 인터페이스부(140)는 다양한 출력 수단을 이용하여 프로세서(110)의 명령에 기초한 출력을 수행할 수 있다.Next, the user interface unit (140) includes various types of input/output means provided in the station (100). That is, the user interface unit (140) can receive user input using various input means, and the processor (110) can control the station (100) based on the received user input. In addition, the user interface unit (140) can perform output based on a command of the processor (110) using various output means.

다음으로, 디스플레이 유닛(150)은 디스플레이 화면에 이미지를 출력한다. 상기 디스플레이 유닛(150)은 프로세서(110)에 의해 실행되는 컨텐츠 또는 프로세서(110)의 제어 명령에 기초한 유저 인터페이스 등의 다양한 디스플레이 오브젝트를 출력할 수 있다. 또한, 메모리(160)는 스테이션(100)에서 사용되는 제어 프로그램 및 그에 따른 각종 데이터를 저장한다. 이러한 제어 프로그램에는 스테이션(100)이 AP 또는 외부 스테이션과 접속을 수행하는데 필요한 접속 프로그램이 포함될 수 있다.Next, the display unit (150) outputs an image on the display screen. The display unit (150) can output various display objects such as content executed by the processor (110) or a user interface based on a control command of the processor (110). In addition, the memory (160) stores a control program used in the station (100) and various data according to the control program. The control program may include a connection program required for the station (100) to perform a connection with an AP or an external station.

본 발명의 프로세서(110)는 다양한 명령 또는 프로그램을 실행하고, 스테이션(100) 내부의 데이터를 프로세싱 할 수 있다. 또한, 상기 프로세서(110)는 상술한 스테이션(100)의 각 유닛들을 제어하며, 유닛들 간의 데이터 송수신을 제어할 수 있다. 본 발명의 실시예에 따르면, 프로세서(110)는 메모리(160)에 저장된 AP와의 접속을 위한 프로그램을 실행하고, AP가 전송한 통신 설정 메시지를 수신할 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(110)는 통신 설정 메시지에 포함된 스테이션(100)의 우선 조건에 대한 정보를 판독하고, 스테이션(100)의 우선 조건에 대한 정보에 기초하여 AP에 대한 접속을 요청할 수 있다. 본 발명의 프로세서(110)는 스테이션(100)의 메인 컨트롤 유닛을 가리킬 수도 있으며, 실시예에 따라 스테이션(100)의 일부 구성 이를 테면, 통신부(120) 등을 개별적으로 제어하기 위한 컨트롤 유닛을 가리킬 수도 있다. 즉, 프로세서(110)는 통신부(120)로부터 송수신되는 무선 신호를 변복조하는 모뎀 또는 변복조부(modulator and/or demodulator)일 수 있다. 프로세서(110)는 본 발명의 실시예에 따른 스테이션(100)의 무선 신호 송수신의 각종 동작을 제어한다. 이에 대한 구체적인 실시예는 추후 기술하기로 한다.The processor (110) of the present invention can execute various commands or programs and process data within the station (100). In addition, the processor (110) can control each unit of the above-described station (100) and control data transmission and reception between the units. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the processor (110) can execute a program for connection with an AP stored in the memory (160) and receive a communication setup message transmitted by the AP. In addition, the processor (110) can read information on the priority conditions of the station (100) included in the communication setup message and request connection to the AP based on the information on the priority conditions of the station (100). The processor (110) of the present invention may refer to the main control unit of the station (100), and according to an embodiment, may refer to a control unit for individually controlling some components of the station (100), such as the communication unit (120). That is, the processor (110) may be a modem or a modulator and/or demodulator that modulates and/or demodulates a wireless signal transmitted and received from the communication unit (120). The processor (110) controls various operations of transmitting and receiving wireless signals of the station (100) according to an embodiment of the present invention. A specific embodiment thereof will be described later.

도 3에 도시된 스테이션(100)은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 블록도로서, 분리하여 표시한 블록들은 디바이스의 엘리먼트들을 논리적으로 구별하여 도시한 것이다. 따라서 상술한 디바이스의 엘리먼트들은 디바이스의 설계에 따라 하나의 칩으로 또는 복수의 칩으로 장착될 수 있다. 이를테면, 상기 프로세서(110) 및 통신부(120)는 하나의 칩으로 통합되어 구현될 수도 있으며 별도의 칩으로 구현될 수도 있다. 또한, 본 발명의 실시예에서 상기 스테이션(100)의 일부 구성들, 이를 테면 유저 인터페이스부(140) 및 디스플레이 유닛(150) 등은 스테이션(100)에 선택적으로 구비될 수 있다.The station (100) illustrated in FIG. 3 is a block diagram according to one embodiment of the present invention, and the blocks shown separately are logically distinguished to illustrate elements of the device. Accordingly, the elements of the device described above may be mounted as one chip or as multiple chips depending on the design of the device. For example, the processor (110) and the communication unit (120) may be implemented as one chip or as separate chips. In addition, in the embodiment of the present invention, some components of the station (100), such as the user interface unit (140) and the display unit (150), may be selectively provided in the station (100).

도 4는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따른 AP(200)의 구성을 나타낸 블록도이다. 도시된 바와 같이, 본 발명의 실시예에 따른 AP(200)는 프로세서(210), 통신부(220) 및 메모리(260)를 포함할 수 있다. 도 4에서 AP(200)의 구성 중 도 3의 스테이션(100)의 구성과 동일하거나 상응하는 부분에 대해서는 중복적인 설명을 생략하도록 한다.FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing the configuration of an AP (200) according to one embodiment of the present invention. As shown, the AP (200) according to the embodiment of the present invention may include a processor (210), a communication unit (220), and a memory (260). In FIG. 4, a redundant description of parts of the configuration of the AP (200) that are identical or corresponding to the configuration of the station (100) of FIG. 3 will be omitted.

도 4를 참조하면, 본 발명에 따른 AP(200)는 적어도 하나의 주파수 밴드에서 BSS를 운영하기 위한 통신부(220)를 구비한다. 도 3의 실시예에서 전술한 바와 같이, 상기 AP(200)의 통신부(220) 또한 서로 다른 주파수 밴드를 이용하는 복수의 통신 모듈을 포함할 수 있다. 즉, 본 발명의 실시예에 따른 AP(200)는 서로 다른 주파수 밴드, 이를 테면 2.4GHz, 5GHz, 6GHz 및 60GHz 중 두 개 이상의 통신 모듈을 함께 구비할 수 있다. 바람직하게는, AP(200)는 7.125GHz 이상의 주파수 밴드를 이용하는 통신 모듈과, 7.125GHz 이하의 주파수 밴드를 이용하는 통신 모듈을 구비할 수 있다. 각각의 통신 모듈은 해당 통신 모듈이 지원하는 주파수 밴드의 무선랜 규격에 따라 스테이션과 무선 통신을 수행할 수 있다. 상기 통신부(220)는 AP(200)의 성능 및 요구 사항에 따라 한 번에 하나의 통신 모듈만을 동작시키거나 동시에 다수의 통신 모듈을 함께 동작시킬 수 있다. 본 발명의 실시예에서 통신부(220)는 RF(Radio Frequency) 신호를 처리하는 RF 통신 모듈을 나타낼 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 4, the AP (200) according to the present invention has a communication unit (220) for operating a BSS in at least one frequency band. As described above in the embodiment of FIG. 3, the communication unit (220) of the AP (200) may also include a plurality of communication modules using different frequency bands. That is, the AP (200) according to the embodiment of the present invention may have two or more communication modules of different frequency bands, for example, 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, and 60 GHz. Preferably, the AP (200) may have a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or higher and a communication module using a frequency band of 7.125 GHz or lower. Each communication module may perform wireless communication with a station according to the wireless LAN standard of the frequency band supported by the corresponding communication module. The communication unit (220) may operate only one communication module at a time or may operate a plurality of communication modules simultaneously, depending on the performance and requirements of the AP (200). In an embodiment of the present invention, the communication unit (220) may represent an RF communication module that processes RF (Radio Frequency) signals.

다음으로, 메모리(260)는 AP(200)에서 사용되는 제어 프로그램 및 그에 따른 각종 데이터를 저장한다. 이러한 제어 프로그램에는 스테이션의 접속을 관리하는 접속 프로그램이 포함될 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(210)는 AP(200)의 각 유닛들을 제어하며, 유닛들 간의 데이터 송수신을 제어할 수 있다. 본 발명의 실시예에 따르면, 프로세서(210)는 메모리(260)에 저장된 스테이션과의 접속을 위한 프로그램을 실행하고, 하나 이상의 스테이션에 대한 통신 설정 메시지를 전송할 수 있다. 이때, 통신 설정 메시지에는 각 스테이션의 접속 우선 조건에 대한 정보가 포함될 수 있다. 또한, 프로세서(210)는 스테이션의 접속 요청에 따라 접속 설정을 수행한다. 일 실시예에 따르면, 프로세서(210)는 통신부(220)로부터 송수신되는 무선 신호를 변복조하는 모뎀 또는 변복조부(modulator and/or demodulator)일 수 있다. 프로세서(210)는 본 발명의 실시예에 따른 AP(200)의 무선 신호 송수신의 각종 동작을 제어한다. 이에 대한 구체적인 실시예는 추후 기술하기로 한다.Next, the memory (260) stores a control program used in the AP (200) and various data according to the control program. The control program may include a connection program that manages the connection of the station. In addition, the processor (210) controls each unit of the AP (200) and may control data transmission and reception between the units. According to an embodiment of the present invention, the processor (210) may execute a program for connection with a station stored in the memory (260) and transmit a communication setup message to one or more stations. At this time, the communication setup message may include information on the connection priority conditions of each station. In addition, the processor (210) performs connection setup according to a connection request of the station. According to one embodiment, the processor (210) may be a modem or a modulator and/or demodulator that modulates a wireless signal transmitted and received from the communication unit (220). The processor (210) controls various operations of wireless signal transmission and reception of the AP (200) according to an embodiment of the present invention. Specific examples of this will be described later.

도 5는 스테이션이 액세스 포인트와 링크를 설정하는 과정을 개략적으로 나타낸다.Figure 5 schematically illustrates the process by which a station establishes a link with an access point.

도 5를 참조하면, STA(100)와 AP(200) 간의 링크는 크게 스캐닝(scanning), 인증(authentication) 및 결합(association)의 3단계를 통해 설정된다. 먼저, 스캐닝 단계는 AP(200)가 운영하는 BSS의 접속 정보를 STA(100)가 획득하는 단계이다. 스캐닝을 수행하기 위한 방법으로는 AP(200)가 주기적으로 전송하는 비콘(beacon) 메시지(S101)만을 활용하여 정보를 획득하는 패시브 스캐닝(passive scanning) 방법과, STA(100)가 AP에 프로브 요청(probe request)을 전송하고(S103), AP로부터 프로브 응답(probe response)을 수신하여(S105) 접속 정보를 획득하는 액티브 스캐닝(active scanning) 방법이 있다.Referring to FIG. 5, the link between STA (100) and AP (200) is established largely through three stages: scanning, authentication, and association. First, the scanning stage is a stage in which STA (100) acquires access information of BSS operated by AP (200). As a method for performing scanning, there is a passive scanning method in which information is acquired only by utilizing a beacon message (S101) periodically transmitted by AP (200), and an active scanning method in which STA (100) acquires access information by transmitting a probe request to AP (S103) and receiving a probe response from AP (S105).

스캐닝 단계에서 성공적으로 무선 접속 정보를 수신한 STA(100)는 인증 요청(authentication request)을 전송하고(S107a), AP(200)로부터 인증 응답(authentication response)을 수신하여(S107b) 인증 단계를 수행한다. 인증 단계가 수행된 후, STA(100)는 결합 요청(association request)를 전송하고(S109a), AP(200)로부터 결합 응답(association response)을 수신하여(S109b) 결합 단계를 수행한다. 본 명세서에서 결합(association)은 기본적으로 무선 결합을 의미하나, 본 발명은 이에 한정되지 않으며 광의의 의미로의 결합은 무선 결합 및 유선 결합을 모두 포함할 수 있다.In the scanning step, the STA (100) that successfully receives wireless access information transmits an authentication request (S107a) and receives an authentication response from the AP (200) (S107b) to perform the authentication step. After the authentication step is performed, the STA (100) transmits an association request (S109a) and receives an association response from the AP (200) (S109b) to perform the association step. In this specification, association basically means wireless association, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and association in a broad sense may include both wireless association and wired association.

한편, 추가적으로 802.1X 기반의 인증 단계(S111) 및 DHCP를 통한 IP 주소 획득 단계(S113)가 수행될 수 있다. 도 5에서 인증 서버(300)는 STA(100)와 802.1X 기반의 인증을 처리하는 서버로서, AP(200)에 물리적으로 결합되어 존재하거나 별도의 서버로서 존재할 수 있다.Meanwhile, an additional 802.1X-based authentication step (S111) and an IP address acquisition step (S113) via DHCP may be performed. In Fig. 5, the authentication server (300) is a server that processes STA (100) and 802.1X-based authentication, and may be physically connected to the AP (200) or may exist as a separate server.

도 6은 무선랜 통신에서 사용되는 CSMA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access)/CA(Collision Avoidance) 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.Figure 6 shows an example of the CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access)/CA (Collision Avoidance) method used in wireless LAN communications.

무선랜 통신을 수행하는 단말은 데이터를 전송하기 전에 캐리어 센싱(Carrier Sensing)을 수행하여 채널이 점유 상태(busy)인지 여부를 체크한다. 만약, 일정한 세기 이상의 무선 신호가 감지되는 경우 해당 채널이 점유 상태(busy)인 것으로 판별되고, 상기 단말은 해당 채널에 대한 액세스를 지연한다. 이러한 과정을 클리어 채널 할당(clear channel assessment, CCA) 이라고 하며, 해당 신호 감지 유무를 결정하는 레벨을 CCA 문턱값(CCA threshold)이라 한다. 만약 단말에 수신된 CCA 문턱값 이상의 무선 신호가 해당 단말을 수신자로 하는 경우, 단말은 수신된 무선 신호를 처리하게 된다. 한편, 해당 채널에서 무선 신호가 감지되지 않거나 CCA 문턱값보다 작은 세기의 무선 신호가 감지될 경우 상기 채널은 유휴 상태(idle)인 것으로 판별된다.A terminal performing wireless LAN communication performs carrier sensing before transmitting data to check whether the channel is busy. If a wireless signal of a certain strength or higher is detected, the channel is determined to be busy, and the terminal delays access to the channel. This process is called clear channel assessment (CCA), and the level that determines whether or not the signal is detected is called the CCA threshold. If a wireless signal of a CCA threshold or higher received by the terminal is directed to the terminal as a receiver, the terminal processes the received wireless signal. On the other hand, if no wireless signal is detected in the channel or a wireless signal of a strength lower than the CCA threshold is detected, the channel is determined to be idle.

채널이 유휴 상태인 것으로 판별되면, 전송할 데이터가 있는 각 단말은 각 단말의 상황에 따른 IFS(Inter Frame Space) 이를테면, AIFS(Arbitration IFS), PIFS(PCF IFS) 등의 시간 뒤에 백오프 절차를 수행한다. 실시예에 따라, 상기 AIFS는 기존의 DIFS(DCF IFS)를 대체하는 구성으로 사용될 수 있다. 각 단말은 해당 단말에 결정된 난수(random number) 만큼의 슬롯 타임을 상기 채널의 유휴 상태의 간격(interval) 동안 감소시켜가며 대기하고, 슬롯 타임을 모두 소진한 단말이 해당 채널에 대한 액세스를 시도하게 된다. 이와 같이 각 단말들이 백오프 절차를 수행하는 구간을 경쟁 윈도우 구간이라고 한다. 이때, 난수를 백오프 카운터라 지칭할 수 있다. 즉, 단말이 획득한 난수인 정수에 의해 백오프 카운터의 초기값이 설정된다. 단말이 슬롯 타임동안 채널이 유휴한 것으로 감지한 경우, 단말은 백오프 카운터를 1만큼 감소시킬 수 있다. 또한, 백오프 카운터가 0에 도달한 경우, 단말은 해당 채널에서 채널 액세스를 수행하는 것이 허용될 수 있다. 따라서 AIFS 시간 및 백오프 카운터의 슬롯 시간 동안 채널이 유휴한 경우에 단말의 전송이 허용될 수 있다.When the channel is determined to be idle, each terminal having data to transmit performs a backoff procedure after an IFS (Inter Frame Space), such as AIFS (Arbitration IFS), PIFS (PCF IFS), etc., according to the situation of each terminal. Depending on the embodiment, the AIFS may be used as a configuration replacing the existing DIFS (DCF IFS). Each terminal waits while decreasing the slot time by a random number determined for the terminal during the interval of the idle state of the channel, and a terminal that has exhausted all of the slot times attempts to access the channel. The period during which each terminal performs the backoff procedure is called a contention window period. At this time, the random number may be referred to as a backoff counter. That is, the initial value of the backoff counter is set by an integer, which is a random number obtained by the terminal. When the terminal detects that the channel is idle during the slot time, the terminal may decrease the backoff counter by 1. Additionally, if the backoff counter reaches 0, the terminal may be allowed to perform channel access on the channel. Accordingly, the terminal's transmission may be allowed if the channel is idle during the AIFS time and the slot time of the backoff counter.

만약, 특정 단말이 상기 채널에 성공적으로 액세스하게 되면, 해당 단말은 상기 채널을 통해 데이터를 전송할 수 있다. 그러나, 액세스를 시도한 단말이 다른 단말과 충돌하게 되면, 충돌된 단말들은 각각 새로운 난수를 할당 받아 다시 백오프 절차를 수행한다. 일 실시예에 따르면, 각 단말에 새로 할당되는 난수는 해당 단말이 이전에 할당 받은 난수 범위(경쟁 윈도우, CW)의 2배의 범위(2*CW) 내에서 결정될 수 있다. 한편, 각 단말은 다음 경쟁 윈도우 구간에서 다시 백오프 절차를 수행하여 액세스를 시도하며, 이때 각 단말은 이전 경쟁 윈도우 구간에서 남게 된 슬롯 타임부터 백오프 절차를 수행한다. 이와 같은 방법으로 무선랜 통신을 수행하는 각 단말들은 특정 채널에 대한 서로간의 충돌을 회피할 수 있다.If a specific terminal successfully accesses the channel, the terminal can transmit data through the channel. However, if the terminal attempting access collides with another terminal, the collided terminals are each assigned a new random number and perform a backoff procedure again. According to one embodiment, the random number newly assigned to each terminal can be determined within a range twice (2*CW) of the random number range (contention window, CW) previously assigned to the terminal. Meanwhile, each terminal performs the backoff procedure again in the next contention window period to attempt access, and at this time, each terminal performs the backoff procedure from the slot time remaining in the previous contention window period. In this way, each terminal performing wireless LAN communication can avoid collisions with each other for a specific channel.

<다양한 PPDU 포맷 실시예><Various PPDU format examples>

도 7은 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 다양한 표준 세대별 PPDU(physical layer protocol data unit) 포맷을 보여준다.FIG. 7 shows various standard generation-specific physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU) formats according to an embodiment of the present invention.

더욱 구체적으로, 도 7(a)는 802.11a/g에 기초한 레거시 PPDU 포맷의 일 실시예, 도 7(b)는 802.11ax에 기초한 HE PPDU 포맷의 일 실시예를 도시하며, 도 7(c)는 802.11be에 기초한 논-레거시 PPDU(즉, EHT PPDU) 포맷의 일 실시예를 도시한다. 또한, 도 7(d)는 상기 PPDU 포맷들에서 공통적으로 사용되는 L-SIG 및 RL-SIG의 세부 필드 구성을 나타낸다.More specifically, FIG. 7(a) illustrates an embodiment of a legacy PPDU format based on 802.11a/g, FIG. 7(b) illustrates an embodiment of a HE PPDU format based on 802.11ax, and FIG. 7(c) illustrates an embodiment of a non-legacy PPDU (i.e., EHT PPDU) format based on 802.11be. In addition, FIG. 7(d) illustrates a detailed field configuration of L-SIG and RL-SIG commonly used in the above PPDU formats.

도 7(a)를 참조하면 레거시 PPDU의 프리앰블은 L-STF(Legacy Short Training field), L-LTF(Legacy Long Training field) 및 L-SIG(Legacy Signal field)를 포함한다. 본 발명의 실시예에서, 상기 L-STF, L-LTF 및 L-SIG는 레거시 프리앰블로 지칭될 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 7(a), the preamble of the legacy PPDU includes a Legacy Short Training field (L-STF), a Legacy Long Training field (L-LTF), and a Legacy Signal field (L-SIG). In an embodiment of the present invention, the L-STF, L-LTF, and L-SIG may be referred to as a legacy preamble.

도 7(b)를 참조하면 HE PPDU의 프리앰블은 상기 레거시 프리앰블에 RL-SIG(Repeated Legacy Short Training field), HE-SIG-A(High Efficiency Signal A field), HE-SIG-B(High Efficiency Signal B field), HE-STF(High Efficiency Short Training field), HE-LTF(High Efficiency Long Training field)를 추가적으로 포함한다. 본 발명의 실시예에서, 상기 RL-SIG, HE-SIG-A, HE-SIG-B, HE-STF 및 HE-LTF는 HE 프리앰블로 지칭될 수 있다. HE 프리앰블의 구체적인 구성은 HE PPDU 포맷에 따라 변형될 수 있다. 예를 들어, HE-SIG-B는 HE MU PPDU 포맷에서만 사용될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 7(b), the preamble of the HE PPDU additionally includes an RL-SIG (Repeated Legacy Short Training field), a HE-SIG-A (High Efficiency Signal A field), a HE-SIG-B (High Efficiency Signal B field), a HE-STF (High Efficiency Short Training field), and a HE-LTF (High Efficiency Long Training field) in addition to the legacy preamble. In an embodiment of the present invention, the RL-SIG, HE-SIG-A, HE-SIG-B, HE-STF, and HE-LTF may be referred to as a HE preamble. The specific configuration of the HE preamble may be modified according to the HE PPDU format. For example, HE-SIG-B may be used only in the HE MU PPDU format.

도 7(c)를 참조하면 EHT PPDU의 프리앰블은 상기 레거시 프리앰블에 RL-SIG(Repeated Legacy Short Training field), U-SIG(Universal Signal field), EHT/UHR-SIG-A(Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal A field), EHT/UHR-SIG-A(Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal B field), EHT-STF(Extremely High Throughput Short Training field), EHT-LTF(Extremely High Throughput Long Training field)를 추가적으로 포함한다. 본 발명의 실시예에서, 상기 RL-SIG, EHT-SIG-A, EHT-SIG-B, EHT-STF 및 EHT-LTF는 EHT 프리앰블로 지칭될 수 있다. 논-레거시 프리앰블의 구체적인 구성은 EHT PPDU 포맷에 따라 변형될 수 있다. 예를 들어, EHT-SIG-A와 EHT-SIG-B는 EHT PPDU 포맷들 중 일부 포맷에서만 사용될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 7(c), the preamble of the EHT PPDU additionally includes an RL-SIG (Repeated Legacy Short Training field), a U-SIG (Universal Signal field), an EHT/UHR-SIG-A (Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal A field), an EHT/UHR-SIG-A (Extremely High Throughput/Ultra High Reliability Signal B field), an EHT-STF (Extremely High Throughput Short Training field), and an EHT-LTF (Extremely High Throughput Long Training field) in addition to the legacy preamble. In an embodiment of the present invention, the RL-SIG, EHT-SIG-A, EHT-SIG-B, EHT-STF, and EHT-LTF may be referred to as an EHT preamble. The specific configuration of the non-legacy preamble may be modified according to the EHT PPDU format. For example, EHT-SIG-A and EHT-SIG-B can only be used in some of the EHT PPDU formats.

이처럼 UHR 표준에서 사용되는 PPDU는 EHT 표준에서 사용되는 PPDU의 포맷과 유사한 포맷을 갖을 수 있다. 802.11be에서 정의한 EHT PPDU 포맷이 복수의 무선랜 세대가 공통적으로 사용하기로 약속된 U-SIG 필드를 포함하기 때문이다. 이 때, EHT PPDU에 포함된 U-SIG 필드의 PHY Version Identifier 필드의 값은 0이고, UHR PPDU에 포함된 U-SIG 필드의 PHY Version identifier 필드의 값은 0이 아닌 값, 컨대 1을 가질 수 있다. EHT PPDU는 STF 필드에 EHT-STF(Extremely High Throughput Short Training field) 필드를 포함하고, LTF 필드에 EHT-LTF 필드(Extremely High Throughput Long Training field)를 포함한다. UHR PPDU는 STF 필드에 UHR-STF 필드(Ultra High Reliability Short Training field)를 포함하고, LTF 필드에 UHR-LTF(Ultra High Reliability Long Training field) 필드를 포함한다.In this way, the PPDU used in the UHR standard may have a format similar to the PPDU format used in the EHT standard. This is because the EHT PPDU format defined in 802.11be includes a U-SIG field that multiple wireless LAN generations have agreed to use in common. At this time, the value of the PHY Version Identifier field of the U-SIG field included in the EHT PPDU may be 0, and the value of the PHY Version identifier field of the U-SIG field included in the UHR PPDU may have a non-zero value, such as 1. The EHT PPDU includes an EHT-STF (Extremely High Throughput Short Training field) field in the STF field, and an EHT-LTF (Extremely High Throughput Long Training field) field in the LTF field. The UHR PPDU includes a UHR-STF field (Ultra High Reliability Short Training field) in the STF field, and a UHR-LTF (Ultra High Reliability Long Training field) field in the LTF field.

PPDU의 프리앰블에 포함된 L-SIG 필드는 64FFT OFDM이 적용되며, 총 64개의 서브캐리어로 구성된다. 이 중 가드 서브캐리어, DC 서브캐리어 및 파일럿 서브캐리어를 제외한 48개의 서브캐리어들이 L-SIG의 데이터 전송용으로 사용된다. L-SIG에는 BPSK, Rate=1/2의 MCS(Modulation and Coding Scheme)가 적용되므로, 총 24비트의 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 도 7(d)는 L-SIG의 24비트 정보 구성을 나타낸다.The L-SIG field included in the preamble of the PPDU applies 64FFT OFDM and consists of a total of 64 subcarriers. Of these, 48 subcarriers, excluding the guard subcarrier, DC subcarrier, and pilot subcarrier, are used for data transmission of L-SIG. Since BPSK, Rate=1/2 MCS (Modulation and Coding Scheme) is applied to L-SIG, it can include a total of 24 bits of information. Fig. 7(d) shows the 24-bit information configuration of L-SIG.

도 7(d)를 참조하면 L-SIG는 L_RATE 필드와 L_LENGTH 필드를 포함한다. L_RATE 필드는 4비트로 구성되며, 데이터 전송에 사용된 MCS를 나타낸다. 구체적으로, L_RATE 필드는 BPSK/QPSK/16-QAM/64-QAM 등의 변조방식과 1/2, 2/3, 3/4 등의 부효율을 조합한 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54Mbps의 전송 속도들 중 하나의 값을 나타낸다. L_RATE 필드와 L_LENGTH 필드의 정보를 조합하면 해당 PPDU의 총 길이를 나타낼 수 있다. 논-레거시 PPDU 포맷에서는 L_RATE 필드를 최소 속도인 6Mbps로 설정한다.Referring to Fig. 7(d), L-SIG includes an L_RATE field and an L_LENGTH field. The L_RATE field consists of 4 bits and represents an MCS used for data transmission. Specifically, the L_RATE field represents one of the transmission speeds of 6/9/12/18/24/36/48/54 Mbps, which combine modulation methods such as BPSK/QPSK/16-QAM/64-QAM and inefficiencies such as 1/2, 2/3, and 3/4. Combining the information in the L_RATE field and the L_LENGTH field can represent the total length of the corresponding PPDU. In the non-legacy PPDU format, the L_RATE field is set to the minimum speed of 6 Mbps.

L_LENGTH 필드의 단위는 바이트로 총 12비트가 할당되어 최대 4095까지 시그널링할 수 있으며, L_RATE 필드와의 조합으로 해당 PPDU의 길이를 나타낼 수 있다. 이때, 레거시 단말과 논-레거시 단말은 L_LENGTH 필드를 서로 다른 방법으로 해석할 수 있다.The unit of the L_LENGTH field is byte, and a total of 12 bits are allocated, allowing signaling up to 4095. In combination with the L_RATE field, it can indicate the length of the corresponding PPDU. At this time, legacy terminals and non-legacy terminals can interpret the L_LENGTH field in different ways.

먼저, 레거시 단말 또는 논-레거시 단말이 L_LENGTH 필드를 이용하여 해당 PPDU의 길이를 해석하는 방법은 다음과 같다. L_RATE 필드의 값이 6Mbps를 지시하도록 설정된 경우, 64FFT의 한 개의 심볼 듀레이션인 4us동안 3 바이트(즉, 24비트)가 전송될 수 있다. 따라서, L_LENGTH 필드 값에 SVC 필드 및 Tail 필드에 해당하는 3바이트를 더하고, 이를 한 개의 심볼의 전송량인 3바이트로 나누면 L-SIG 이후의 64FFT 기준 심볼 개수가 획득된다. 획득된 심볼 개수에 한 개의 심볼 듀레이션인 4us를 곱한 후 L-STF, L-LTF 및 L-SIG의 전송에 소요되는 20us를 더하면 해당 PPDU의 길이 즉, 수신 시간(RXTIME)이 획득된다. 이를 수식으로 표현하면 아래 수학식 1과 같다.First, the method for a legacy terminal or a non-legacy terminal to interpret the length of the PPDU using the L_LENGTH field is as follows. If the value of the L_RATE field is set to indicate 6Mbps, 3 bytes (i.e., 24 bits) can be transmitted during 4us, which is the duration of one symbol of 64FFT. Therefore, if 3 bytes corresponding to the SVC field and the Tail field are added to the L_LENGTH field value and divided by 3 bytes, which is the transmission amount of one symbol, the number of symbols based on 64FFT after L-SIG is obtained. If the obtained number of symbols is multiplied by 4us, which is the duration of one symbol, and then 20us required for transmission of L-STF, L-LTF, and L-SIG is added, the length of the PPDU, i.e., the reception time (RXTIME) is obtained. If this is expressed as a formula, it is as shown in Mathematical Expression 1 below.

Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000001
Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000001

이때,

Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000002
는 x보다 크거나 같은 최소의 자연수를 나타낸다. L_LENGTH 필드의 최대값은 4095이므로 PPDU의 길이는 최대 5.484ms까지로 설정될 수 있다. 해당 PPDU를 전송하는 논-레거시 단말은 L_LENGTH 필드를 아래 수학식 2와 같이 설정해야 한다.At this time,
Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000002
represents the smallest natural number greater than or equal to x. Since the maximum value of the L_LENGTH field is 4095, the length of the PPDU can be set to a maximum of 5.484 ms. A non-legacy terminal transmitting the PPDU must set the L_LENGTH field as in the mathematical expression 2 below.

Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000003
Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000003

여기서 TXTIME은 해당 PPDU를 구성하는 전체 전송 시간으로서, 아래 수학식 3과 같다. 이때, TX는 X의 전송 시간을 나타낸다.Here, TXTIME is the total transmission time that constitutes the corresponding PPDU, as shown in the mathematical expression 3 below. In this case, TX represents the transmission time of X.

Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000004
Figure PCTKR2024020369-appb-img-000004

상기 수식들을 참고하면, PPDU의 길이는 L_LENGTH/3의 올림 값에 기초하여 계산된다. 따라서, 임의의 k 값에 대하여 L_LENGTH={3k+1, 3k+2, 3(k+1)}의 3가지 서로 다른 값들이 동일한 PPDU 길이를 지시하게 된다. Referring to the above formulas, the length of the PPDU is calculated based on the rounded up value of L_LENGTH/3. Therefore, for any value of k, three different values of L_LENGTH={3k+1, 3k+2, 3(k+1)} indicate the same PPDU length.

도 7(e)를 참조하면 U-SIG(Universal SIG) 필드는 EHT/UHR PPDU 및 후속 세대의 무선랜 PPDU에서 계속 존재하며, EHT/UHR을 포함하여 어떤 세대의 PPDU인지를 구분하는 역할을 수행한다. 또한, U-SIG 필드는 EHT/UHR 및 후속 세대의 무선랜의 spatial reuse를 용이하게 하는 역할을 수행할 수 있다. U-SIG는 64FFT 기반의 OFDM 2 심볼로서 총 52비트의 정보를 전달할 수 있다. 이 중 CRC/Tail 9비트를 제외한 43비트는 크게 VI(Version Independent) 필드와 VD(Version Dependent) 필드로 구분된다. Referring to Fig. 7(e), the U-SIG (Universal SIG) field continues to exist in EHT/UHR PPDU and subsequent generation wireless LAN PPDUs, and plays a role in distinguishing which generation of PPDU it is, including EHT/UHR. In addition, the U-SIG field can play a role in facilitating spatial reuse of EHT/UHR and subsequent generation wireless LANs. U-SIG is an OFDM 2 symbol based on 64FFT and can convey a total of 52 bits of information. Of these, 43 bits, excluding 9 bits of CRC/Tail, are largely divided into a VI (Version Independent) field and a VD (Version Dependent) field.

VI 비트는 현재의 비트 구성을 향후에도 계속 유지하여 후속 세대의 PPDU가 정의되더라도 현재의 EHT/UHR 단말들이 해당 PPDU의 VI 필드들을 통해서 해당 PPDU에 대한 정보를 얻을 수 있다. 이를 위해 VI 필드는 PHY version, UL/DL, BSS Color, TXOP, Reserved 필드들로 구성된다. PHY version ID 필드는 3비트로 EHT/UHR 및 후속 세대 무선랜 표준들을 순차적으로 버전으로 구분하는 역할을 한다. EHT(11be) PPDU의 PHY version ID 필드는 000b의 값을 갖고, UHR PPDU의 PHY version ID 필드는 000b가 아닌 값을 갖는다.. UL/DL 필드는 해당 PPDU가 업링크/다운링크 PPDU인지를 구분한다. BSS Color는 11ax에서 정의된 BSS별 식별자를 의미하며, 6비트 이상의 값을 갖는다. TXOP은 MAC 헤더에서 전달되던 전송 기회 듀레이션(Transmit Opportunity Duration)을 의미하는데, PHY 헤더에 추가함으로써 MPDU를 디코딩 할 필요 없이 해당 PPDU가 포함된 TXOP의 길이를 유추할 수 있으며 7비트 이상의 값을 갖는다.The VI bit maintains the current bit configuration in the future so that even when a subsequent generation PPDU is defined, the current EHT/UHR terminals can obtain information about the corresponding PPDU through the VI fields of the corresponding PPDU. For this purpose, the VI field consists of PHY version, UL/DL, BSS Color, TXOP, and Reserved fields. The PHY version ID field is 3 bits and sequentially distinguishes the EHT/UHR and subsequent generation wireless LAN standards by version. The PHY version ID field of the EHT (11be) PPDU has a value of 000b, and the PHY version ID field of the UHR PPDU has a value other than 000b. The UL/DL field distinguishes whether the corresponding PPDU is an uplink/downlink PPDU. BSS Color means an identifier for each BSS defined in 11ax and has a value of 6 bits or more. TXOP stands for Transmit Opportunity Duration transmitted in the MAC header. By adding it to the PHY header, the length of the TXOP containing the corresponding PPDU can be inferred without having to decode the MPDU, and has a value of 7 bits or more.

EHT의 VD 필드는 11be 버전의 PPDU에만 유용한 시그널링 정보들로 PPDU 포맷, BW와 같이 어떤 PPDU 포맷에도 공통적으로 사용되는 필드와, PPDU 포맷별로 다르게 정의되는 필드로 구성될 수 있다. PPDU format은 EHT SU(Single User), EHT MU(Multiple User), EHT TB(Trigger-based), EHT ER(Extended Range) PPDU등을 구분하는 구분자이다. The VD field of EHT is signaling information useful only for PPDU of 11be version, and can be composed of fields commonly used in any PPDU format, such as PPDU format and BW, and fields defined differently for each PPDU format. PPDU format is a delimiter that distinguishes EHT SU (Single User), EHT MU (Multiple User), EHT TB (Trigger-based), and EHT ER (Extended Range) PPDU.

BW 필드는 크게 20, 40, 80, 160(80+80), 320(160+160) MHz의 5개의 기본 PPDU BW 옵션(20*2의 지수승 형태로 표현 가능한 BW를 기본 BW로 호칭할 수 있다.)들과, Preamble Puncturing을 통해 구성되는 다양한 나머지 PPDU BW들을 시그널링 한다. 또한, 320 MHz로 시그널링 된 후 일부 80 MHz가 펑처링된 형태로 시그널링 될 수 있다. 또한 펑처링되어 변형된 채널 형태는 BW 필드에서 직접 시그널링 되거나, BW 필드와 BW 필드 이후에 나타나는 필드(예를 들어 EHT-SIG 필드 내의 필드)를 함께 이용하여 시그널링 될 수 있다. 만약 BW 필드를 3비트로 하는 경우 총 8개의 BW 시그널링이 가능하므로, 펑처링 모드는 최대 3개만을 시그널링 할 수 있다. 만약 BW 필드를 4비트로 하는 경우 총 16개의 BW 시그널링이 가능하므로, 펑처링 모드는 최대 11개를 시그널링 할 수 있다.The BW field largely signals five basic PPDU BW options of 20, 40, 80, 160 (80+80), and 320 (160+160) MHz (a BW that can be expressed in the form of an exponential of 20*2 can be called a basic BW) and various remaining PPDU BWs configured through Preamble Puncturing. In addition, some 80 MHz can be signaled in a punctured form after being signaled at 320 MHz. In addition, the punctured and modified channel form can be signaled directly in the BW field, or can be signaled using the BW field and a field appearing after the BW field (for example, a field in the EHT-SIG field). If the BW field has 3 bits, a total of 8 BW signaling is possible, and therefore only a maximum of 3 puncturing modes can be signaled. If the BW field is 4 bits, a total of 16 BW signalings are possible, so the puncturing mode can signal up to 11.

UHR의 VD 필드는 UHR PPDU에만 유용한 시그널링 정보들을 지시하는 필드이다. 다만 UHR PPDU의 VD 필드에 포함되는 각 필드가 지시하는 정보는 EHT(11be)의 VD 필드와 동일한 역할을 하는 필드가 지시한 정보와 동일하거나 더욱 확장된 형태일 수 있다. 예를 들어 UHR PPDU의 VD 필드에 포함된 펑쳐링 패턴(Puncturing pattern)을 지시하는 필드는 EHT PPDU의 VD 필드에 포함된 펑쳐링 패턴을 지시하는 필드보다 다양한 형태의 패턴을 지시할 수 있다. 혹은, UHR PPDU의 VD 필드에 포함된 펑쳐링 패턴(Puncturing pattern)을 지시하는 필드는 BW 필드와 결합되어 해석될 수 있다. 이를 통해 더욱 다양한 형태의 펑츄어링 패턴을 지시할 수 있다.The VD field of UHR is a field that indicates signaling information that is useful only for UHR PPDU. However, the information indicated by each field included in the VD field of UHR PPDU may be the same as or more extended than the information indicated by the field that plays the same role as the VD field of EHT (11be). For example, the field indicating the puncturing pattern included in the VD field of UHR PPDU may indicate various types of patterns than the field indicating the puncturing pattern included in the VD field of EHT PPDU. Alternatively, the field indicating the puncturing pattern included in the VD field of UHR PPDU may be interpreted in combination with the BW field. Through this, more various types of puncturing patterns may be indicated.

도 8은 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 EHT/UHR PPDU 포맷을 보여준다. Figure 8 shows an EHT/UHR PPDU format according to an embodiment of the present invention.

EHT/UHR PPDU 포맷은 PPDU의 U-SIG 필드의 PPDU Format 필드에 의해 지시될 수 있다. 도 8의 (a)는 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 EHT/UHR SU PPDU를 보여준다. EHT/UHR SU PPDU는 AP와 단일 스테이션 사이의 단일 사용자(Single-User) 전송을 위해 사용되는 PPDU이며, U-SIG 이후에 추가적인 시그널링을 위한 EHT-SIG-A 필드를 포함할 수 있다.The EHT/UHR PPDU format can be indicated by the PPDU Format field of the U-SIG field of the PPDU. Fig. 8 (a) shows an EHT/UHR SU PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention. The EHT/UHR SU PPDU is a PPDU used for single-user transmission between an AP and a single station, and may include an EHT-SIG-A field for additional signaling after the U-SIG.

도 8의 (b)는 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 EHT/UHR Trigger-based PPDU를 보여준다. EHT/UHR Trigger-based PPDU는 트리거 프레임에 대한 응답인 전송을 위해 사용되는 상향 PPDU이며, U-SIG 이후에 별도의 EHT/UHR-SIG-A 필드를 갖지 않을 수 있다.Fig. 8(b) shows an EHT/UHR Trigger-based PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention. An EHT/UHR Trigger-based PPDU is an uplink PPDU used for transmission in response to a trigger frame, and may not have a separate EHT/UHR-SIG-A field after U-SIG.

도 8의 (c)는 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 EHT/UHR MU PPDU를 보여준다. EHT/UHR MU PPDU는 하나 이상의 단말로의 전송을 위해 사용되는 PPDU이다. EHT/UHR MU PPDU 포맷은 U-SIG 필드 후에 HE-SIG-B를 포함할 수 있다.Fig. 8(c) shows an EHT/UHR MU PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention. An EHT/UHR MU PPDU is a PPDU used for transmission to one or more terminals. The EHT/UHR MU PPDU format may include a HE-SIG-B after the U-SIG field.

도 8의 (d)는 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU를 보여준다. EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU는 확장된 범위에 있는 스테이션에 대한 단일 사용자 전송을 위해 사용된다. EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU 포맷은 U-SIG가 시간 축에서 반복될 수 있다. Fig. 8(d) shows an EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention. The EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU is used for single-user transmission to stations in an extended range. The EHT/UHR ER SU PPDU format allows U-SIG to be repeated on the time axis.

도 8의 (c)를 통해 설명한 EHT/UHR MU PPDU는 AP가 복수의 스테이션에게 하향 전송을 수행하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. 이때, EHT/UHR MU PPDU는 복수의 스테이션이 PPDU를 동시에 수신하기 위한 스케쥴링 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 이때, EHT/UHR MU PPDU는 EHT/UHR-SIG-B의 사용자 특정(user specific) 필드를 통해 해당 PPDU의 수신자 또는 송신자의 AID 정보를 전달할 수 있다. EHT/UHR MU PPDU를 수신한 스테이션은 PPDU의 프리앰블에서 획득한 AID 정보에 기초하여 공간적 재사용(spatial reuse) 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 더욱 구체적으로, EHT/UHR-SIG-B의 리소스 유닛 할당(resource unit allocation, RA) 필드는 주파수 도메인에서 특정 대역폭(예를 들어, 20MHz)에서의 리소스 유닛(resource unit, RU) 분할 형태에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 또한, 분할된 각 리소스 유닛에 지정된 스테이션의 정보는 EHT/UHR-SIG-B의 사용자 특정 필드를 통해 전달될 수 있다. 사용자 특정 필드는 분할된 각 리소스 유닛에 대응하는 하나 이상의 사용자 필드를 포함할 수 있다.The EHT/UHR MU PPDU described through (c) of FIG. 8 can be used by an AP to perform downlink transmission to multiple stations. At this time, the EHT/UHR MU PPDU can include scheduling information for multiple stations to simultaneously receive the PPDU. At this time, the EHT/UHR MU PPDU can convey AID information of a receiver or transmitter of the corresponding PPDU through a user specific field of EHT/UHR-SIG-B. A station receiving the EHT/UHR MU PPDU can perform a spatial reuse operation based on the AID information acquired from the preamble of the PPDU. More specifically, the resource unit allocation (RA) field of EHT/UHR-SIG-B can include information on a resource unit (RU) partitioning form in a specific bandwidth (e.g., 20 MHz) in the frequency domain. Additionally, information about the station assigned to each partitioned resource unit may be conveyed via a user-specific field of EHT/UHR-SIG-B. The user-specific field may include one or more user fields corresponding to each partitioned resource unit.

분할된 복수의 리소스 유닛 중에서 데이터 전송이 수행되는 리소스 유닛에 대응하는 사용자 필드에 수신자 또는 송신자의 AID가 삽입될 수 있다. 데이터 전송이 수행되지 않는 나머지 리소스 유닛에 대응하는 사용자 필드에는 미리 지정된 널(Null) STA ID가 삽입될 수 있다. A receiver's or sender's AID may be inserted into a user field corresponding to a resource unit in which data transmission is performed among the multiple divided resource units. A pre-specified null STA ID may be inserted into a user field corresponding to the remaining resource units in which data transmission is not performed.

도 8을 통해 설명되는 두 개 이상의 PPDU가 같은 PPDU 포맷으로 지시될 수 있다. 예를 들어 EHT/UHR SU PPDU를 지시하는 U-SIG PPDU format 서브필드의 값과와 EHT/UHR MU PPDU를 지시하는 U-SIG PPDU format 서브필드의 값은 동일할 수 있다.Two or more PPDUs described through Fig. 8 may be indicated by the same PPDU format. For example, the value of the U-SIG PPDU format subfield indicating EHT/UHR SU PPDU and the value of the U-SIG PPDU format subfield indicating EHT/UHR MU PPDU may be the same.

앞서 설명한 PPDU의 포맷이 포함하는 필드 중 일부 필드 또는 필드의 일부 정보는 생략될 수 있다. 이를 compression mode 또는 compressed mode로 지칭될 수 있다.Some of the fields or some information of the fields included in the format of the PPDU described above may be omitted. This may be referred to as compression mode or compressed mode.

<Wi-Fi 단말의 채널 액세스 방법><Wi-Fi terminal channel access method>

Wi-Fi 단말(AP, non-AP STA 등)들은 비면허 대역을 이용해 통신을 수행하기 때문에, 프레임의 전송을 수행하기 전, 자신이 전송을 수행하고자 하는 채널이 다른 장치에 의해 사용중인지 여부를 확인한다. CSMA(Carrier Sense Multiple Access)는 패킷을 전송하고자 하는 단말이, 채널이 다른 장치에 의해 사용중인지 여부를 확인하기 위해 반송파 검출(Carrier Sense)을 수행하고, 채널이 다른 장치에 의해 사용되는 중이 아닌 것으로 판단(Idle)되는 경우에만 전송을 수행토록 하는 채널 접근 방법이다. CSMA를 사용하는 단말은, 적어도 다른 장치가 매체(채널)를 사용중인 것이 확인될 때(busy로 판단될 때)에는 전송을 시도하지 않는 동작을 수행할 수 있기 때문에, 먼저 시작된 전송은 다른 장치로부터 보호될 수 있다.Since Wi-Fi terminals (APs, non-AP STAs, etc.) perform communications using unlicensed bands, they check whether the channel on which they want to perform transmission is being used by another device before transmitting a frame. CSMA (Carrier Sense Multiple Access) is a channel access method in which a terminal that wants to transmit a packet performs carrier sense to check whether the channel is being used by another device, and performs transmission only if the channel is determined to be not being used by another device (Idle). Since a terminal using CSMA can perform an action of not attempting transmission at least when it is confirmed that another device is using the medium (channel) (when determined to be busy), transmission that has been started first can be protected from other devices.

하지만, 다른 장치로부터 매체가 점유되었다는 사실을 인지한 다수의 단말들은, 상기 다른 장치로부터의 매체 점유가 종료된 것이 확인(매체가 Idle로 변경)되었을 때 동시에 패킷 전송을 시도함으로써 전송 충돌을 경험하게 된다. 즉, 특정 단말이 패킷 전송을 시도함과 동시에 다른 다수의 단말이 패킷 전송을 함께 시도함으로써, 상기 특정 단말이 전송한 패킷을 수신해야 하는 단말은 상기 다른 다수의 단말이 수행한 전송에서 비롯된 간섭으로 인해 수신해야 하는 패킷을 제대로 수신 및 디코딩할 수 없게 된다.However, multiple terminals that recognize that the medium is occupied by another device experience a transmission collision by simultaneously attempting to transmit packets when it is confirmed that the medium occupation from the other device has ended (the medium has changed to Idle). That is, as multiple other terminals attempt to transmit packets at the same time that a specific terminal attempts to transmit packets, a terminal that should receive the packet transmitted by the specific terminal cannot properly receive and decode the packet that it should receive due to interference caused by the transmissions performed by the multiple other terminals.

CSMA/CA(CSMA with collision avoidance)는 상술한 바와 같이, 매체가 Idle로 변경된 것을 감지한 다수의 단말이 동시에 패킷 전송을 시도하는 것을 방지하는 채널 액세스 메커니즘이다. CSMA/CA를 이용해 매체(채널)에 접근하는 단말들은 자신이 관찰한 매체의 상태가 Idle로 변경되면, 무작위한 시간만큼 대기한 후 전송을 시도한다. 상기 무작위한 시간은, 전송을 시도하고자 하는 각 단말이 생성한 무작위 숫자(랜덤 백오프 카운터)만큼의 aslottime(일반적으로 9 us일 수 있음)일 수 있다. 즉, CSMA/CA를 사용하여 매체에 접근하는 단말들은, 서로 다른 무작위 시간동안 대기한 후 전송을 시도하기 때문에, CSMA만 사용한 경우와 달리 서로 다른 시간에 전송을 시도하게 된다. 이 때, 매체가 Idle로 변경된 후 가장 짧은 무작위 시간을 대기한 특정 단말이 첫번째로 전송을 시도하면, 다른 단말들은 상기 특정 단말로 인해 매체가 점유(busy로 변경)되었음을 인지한 후 채널 접근 절차를 중지할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 특정 단말은 매체가 Idle로 유지되는 동안 매 aslottime마다 자신이 유지하고 있는 백오프 카운터를 1씩 줄이는 동작을 수행하다가, 백오프 카운터가 0이 되거나, 혹은 백오프 카운터가 0이 된 후 aslottime이 지났을 때 전송을 시도한 것일 수 있다. 이 때, 전송을 수행한 상기 특정 단말은 전송이 종료된 후 새로운 무작위 숫자(새로운 백오프 카운터)를 생성하고, 새로운 무작위 숫자가 다시 0이 되거나, 0이 된 후 전송을 시도할 수 있다. As described above, CSMA/CA (CSMA with collision avoidance) is a channel access mechanism that prevents multiple terminals that detect that the medium has changed to Idle from simultaneously attempting packet transmission. Terminals accessing the medium (channel) using CSMA/CA attempt to transmit after waiting for a random amount of time when the state of the medium observed by the terminals changes to Idle. The random amount of time may be an aslottime (typically 9 us) as long as a random number (random backoff counter) generated by each terminal attempting to transmit. In other words, terminals accessing the medium using CSMA/CA attempt to transmit after waiting for different random amounts of time, so they attempt to transmit at different times, unlike when only CSMA is used. At this time, when a specific terminal that waited for the shortest random amount of time after the medium changed to Idle attempts to transmit first, other terminals can recognize that the medium is occupied (changed to busy) by the specific terminal and stop the channel access procedure. At this time, the specific terminal may perform an operation of decreasing the backoff counter maintained by it by 1 every aslottime while the medium is maintained as Idle, and may attempt transmission when the backoff counter becomes 0, or when aslottime has elapsed after the backoff counter becomes 0. At this time, the specific terminal that performed the transmission may generate a new random number (new backoff counter) after the transmission is terminated, and may attempt transmission when the new random number becomes 0 again, or after it becomes 0.

위에서 간단히 설명한 CSMA/CA와 랜덤 백오프 절차는 Wi-Fi 단말들이 채널 액세스를 시도할 때 사용하는 기본 function인 DCF (Distributed coordination function)와 EDCAF (Enhanced distributed channel access)에 공히 적용되며, 익히 잘 알려지고 널리 활용되는 비면허대역 채널 액세스 방법이기 때문에 더욱 자세한 설명은 생략하도록 한다.The CSMA/CA and random backoff procedures briefly explained above are applied to DCF (Distributed coordination function) and EDCAF (Enhanced distributed channel access), which are basic functions used by Wi-Fi terminals when attempting to access a channel. Since these are well-known and widely used unlicensed band channel access methods, a detailed explanation will be omitted.

Wi-Fi 단말의 MAC이 활용하는 DCF 및 EDCAF는, 각 단말 자신이 직접 피지컬(Physical) CS(Carrier Sense)를 수행하여 확인한 채널 상태(idle/busy 여부)뿐만 아니라, 가상의 CS(Virtual CS) 결과를 함께 고려하여 채널 상황을 평가한다. 보다 자세히 설명하면, 채널에 대해 수행한 피지컬(Physical) CS를 수행한 결과가 아이들(idle)일 지라도, 가상(Virtual) CS 결과가 비지(busy)라면 Wi-Fi 단말은 채널 상태를 비지인 것으로 고려한다. 이 때, 상기 Virtual CS는 NAV(Network allocation vector)가 0이 아닌 경우 채널을 비지로 판단하는 채널 평가 방법이다. NAV는 매체를 점유할 것으로 예측되는 미래의 트래픽에 대해 유지되는 값일 수 있다. 보다 자세히 설명하면, Wi-Fi의 MAC은 RTS/CTS 프레임을 수신하였을 때, 수신한 프레임의 듀레이션(duration) 정보, 예컨대 duration 필드의 값을 기반으로 NAV(NAV count)를 설정하여 RTS/CTS 프레임 교환 후 매체가 점유될 예상 시간동안 NAV가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지할 수 있다. 즉, NAV로 유지되는 값은 시간이 지남에 따라 감소된다. 특정 MAC이 갖는 NAV 값이 0인 경우, 상기 특정 MAC이 인지했던 미래의 트래픽이 더 이상 매체를 점유하지 않는 상태인 것으로 해석될 수 있다. NAV가 0이라면 MAC은 virtual CS 결과를 아이들(Idle)로 판단할 수 있다. 이 때, Wi-Fi의 MAC은 RTS/CTS 프레임뿐만 아니라, 수신된 다른 MAC 프레임에서 획득된 듀레이션(duration) 값을 기반으로 NAV를 설정할 수도 있다.The DCF and EDCAF utilized by the MAC of the Wi-Fi terminal evaluate the channel status by considering not only the channel status (idle/busy) confirmed by each terminal directly performing a physical CS (Carrier Sense) but also the result of a virtual CS. In more detail, even if the result of the physical CS performed on the channel is idle, the Wi-Fi terminal considers the channel status to be busy if the result of the virtual CS is busy. At this time, the Virtual CS is a channel evaluation method that determines the channel to be busy if the NAV (Network allocation vector) is not 0. The NAV may be a value maintained for future traffic that is predicted to occupy the medium. To explain in more detail, when the MAC of Wi-Fi receives an RTS/CTS frame, it can set the NAV (NAV count) based on the duration information of the received frame, for example, the value of the duration field, and maintain the NAV as a non-zero value for the expected time that the medium will be occupied after the RTS/CTS frame exchange. In other words, the value maintained as the NAV decreases over time. If the NAV value of a specific MAC is 0, it can be interpreted that the future traffic recognized by the specific MAC no longer occupies the medium. If the NAV is 0, the MAC can determine the virtual CS result as Idle. In this case, the MAC of Wi-Fi can also set the NAV based on the duration value obtained from not only the RTS/CTS frame but also other received MAC frames.

위에서 간단히 설명한 피지컬 CS와 가상 CS의 결과를 함께 고려하는 채널 평가 방법(determine the state of the medium) 역시 잘 알려진 Wi-Fi MAC 기능 중 하나이기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.The channel estimation method (determine the state of the medium) that considers the results of both the physical CS and virtual CS briefly described above is also one of the well-known Wi-Fi MAC functions, so a detailed description is omitted.

<EDCA와 TXOP><EDCA and TXOP>

EDCA는 트래픽을 트래픽의 특성에 따라 4 종류의 AC(access category)로 차별화하여 관리하는 메커니즘을 제공한다. 이때, 4 종류의 AC는 AC_VO(AC Voice), AC_VI(AC Video), AC_BE(AC Best effort), AC_BK(AC Background) 이며, 각 AC는 상이한 CW(contention window), TXOP (transmit opportunity) 및 AIFSN 파라미터를 갖을 수 있다. 간단히 말해서, EDCA는 4 종류의 AC에 대한 CW, TXOP, AIFSN 파라미터를 차별화여, 각 AC를 활용하여 전송되는 트래픽의 전송 우선순위를 조절하는 메커니즘이다. 이를 위해, EDCA는 MAC이 서비스해야 하는 트래픽(MSDU)을 TC(traffic category)혹은 TS(traffic stream)에 따라 4개의 AC 중 하나의 AC에 매핑할 수 있다. 이때, EDCA에 의해 4개의 AC 중 하나에 매핑 된 트래픽은 각 AC를 위한 4개의 큐(queue)에 나뉘어 관리된다. 이때, 4개의큐는 물리적으로 분리되지 않고 논리적(logically)으로 분리된 큐일 수 있다.EDCA provides a mechanism to manage traffic by differentiating it into four types of ACs (access categories) according to the characteristics of the traffic. At this time, the four types of ACs are AC_VO (AC Voice), AC_VI (AC Video), AC_BE (AC Best effort), and AC_BK (AC Background), and each AC can have different CW (contention window), TXOP (transmit opportunity), and AIFSN parameters. Simply put, EDCA is a mechanism that differentiates the CW, TXOP, and AIFSN parameters for the four types of ACs and controls the transmission priority of the traffic transmitted using each AC. To this end, EDCA can map the traffic (MSDU) that the MAC must service to one of the four ACs according to the TC (traffic category) or TS (traffic stream). At this time, the traffic mapped to one of the four ACs by EDCA is divided and managed into four queues for each AC. At this time, the four queues may be logically separated rather than physically separated.

AC_VO는 보이스(Voice) 트래픽과 같이 트래픽의 절대적인 양이 많지는 않지만, 전송 지연에 취약한 트래픽들에 활용될 수 있는 AC이며, 타 AC의 트래픽보다 우선적으로 서비스될 확률을 높이기 위해 상대적으로 작은 CW 및 AIFSN 파라미터 값을 갖는다. AC_VO의 TXOP 파라미터는 타 AC의 TXOP 파라미터보다 상대적으로 작은 값으로 제한되어, 타 AC보다 짧은 전송시간만이 보장된다.AC_VO is an AC that can be used for traffic that is vulnerable to transmission delay, although the absolute amount of traffic, such as voice traffic, is not large, and has relatively small CW and AIFSN parameter values to increase the probability of being serviced preferentially over traffic from other ACs. The TXOP parameter of AC_VO is limited to a relatively smaller value than the TXOP parameters of other ACs, so that only a shorter transmission time is guaranteed than that of other ACs.

AC_VI는 보이스(Voice) 트래픽보다는 전송 지연에 강인하지만, 여전히 저 지연 전송을 요하고 많은 량의 트래픽을 처리해야 하는 비디오(Video)와 같은 트래픽에 활용될 수 있는 AC이다. AC_VI는 AC_VO보다는 크지만 타 AC보다 작은 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터 값을 갖으며, 대신 TXOP는 AC_VI보다 2배가량 길다. AC_VI is an AC that is more tolerant to transmission delay than voice traffic, but can still be used for traffic such as video that requires low-latency transmission and a large amount of traffic. AC_VI has larger CW and AIFSN parameter values than AC_VO but smaller than other ACs, and instead, TXOP is about twice as long as AC_VI.

AC_BE는 전송 지연에 강인한 트래픽에 활용될 수 있는 AC이며, 음성 데이터 및 스트리밍 비디오 데이터를 제외한 대부분의 일반적인 트래픽이 AC_BE로 분류될 수 있다. AC_BE는 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터를 AC_VO, AC_VI 보다 큰 값을 사용한다. 또한, AC_BE는 TXOP를 따로 갖고 있지 않다. 따라서 AC_BE에 해당하는 트래픽은 PPDU를 전송한 후 ACK을 응답 받고, SIFS 후 다시 PPDU를 전송하는 TXOP 전송 시퀀스에 활용될 수 없다. AC_BE is an AC that can be utilized for traffic that is robust to transmission delay, and most general traffic except voice data and streaming video data can be classified as AC_BE. AC_BE uses CW and AIFSN parameters with values greater than AC_VO and AC_VI. In addition, AC_BE does not have a separate TXOP. Therefore, traffic corresponding to AC_BE cannot be utilized in the TXOP transmission sequence that transmits a PPDU, receives an ACK in response, and then transmits a PPDU again after SIFS.

AC_BK는 AC_BE와 유사하게 전송 지연에 강인한 트래픽이지만, 우선 순위가 BE 트래픽 보다는 낮은 트래픽에 활용될 수 있는 AC이다. AC_BK는 AC_BE와 동일한 CW 파라미터 값을 활용하고, AIFSN 파라미터 값은 AC_BE보다도 큰 값을 활용한다. 또한, AC_BK에 해당하는 트래픽은 AC_BE와 동일하게 TXOP를 따로 갖고 있지 않아 TXOP 전송 시퀀스에 활용될 수 없다.AC_BK is a traffic that is robust to transmission delay similar to AC_BE, but can be utilized for traffic with a lower priority than BE traffic. AC_BK utilizes the same CW parameter values as AC_BE, and the AIFSN parameter values are larger than AC_BE. In addition, traffic corresponding to AC_BK does not have a separate TXOP like AC_BE, so it cannot be utilized in the TXOP transmission sequence.

상술한 4 종류의 EDCA AC는 802.1D의 UP(user-priority)와 매핑 되며, 유선으로 수신한 트래픽이 갖고 있는 UP값 혹은 상위 레이어로부터 지시된 MSDU의 TID에 따라 EDCA AC를 결정하게 된다. 이 때, 상기 MSDU의 TID가 0 내지 7의 값을 지시하는 경우, 상기 TID가 지시하는 값은 UP와 1대1로 대응될 수 있다. The four types of EDCA AC described above are mapped to the UP (user-priority) of 802.1D, and the EDCA AC is determined according to the UP value of the traffic received through the wire or the TID of the MSDU indicated from the upper layer. At this time, if the TID of the MSDU indicates a value of 0 to 7, the value indicated by the TID can correspond 1:1 with the UP.

또한, 상술한 4 종류의 EDCA AC는 각각의 디폴트(default) CW(CWmin, CWmax), AIFSN, TXOP 파라미터가 표준에서 정의되어 있고, 각 AC의 파라미터 값은 AP에 의해 변경되어 BSS마다 상이한 값을 활용할 수도 있다.In addition, the four types of EDCA AC described above have default CW (CWmin, CWmax), AIFSN, and TXOP parameters defined in the standard, and the parameter values of each AC can be changed by the AP and different values can be used for each BSS.

EDCA 메커니즘을 활용하면, Wi-Fi 트래픽은 4개의 AC와 대응하는 4개의 큐 중 하나에 보관되며, 트래픽이 포함된 AC가 타 AC와의 채널 액세스 경쟁에서 승리한 경우에 한해서만 목적 장치로 전송될 수 있다. 이때, AC 사이의 채널 액세스 경쟁에서 각 AC는 자신에게 할당된 액세스 파라미터 (CW[AC], AIFSN[AC])를 활용해 경쟁을 수행하며, 각 AC가 수행하는 채널 액세스 경쟁 동작은 DCF와 동일하다. 이때, 특정 AC가 queue에 전송할 트래픽을 하나도 갖고 있지 않다면, 상기 특정 AC는 경쟁에 참여하지 않을 수 있다.With the EDCA mechanism, Wi-Fi traffic is stored in one of four queues corresponding to four ACs, and can be transmitted to a destination device only when the AC containing the traffic wins the channel access contention with other ACs. At this time, in the channel access contention between ACs, each AC performs the contention using the access parameters (CW[AC], AIFSN[AC]) assigned to it, and the channel access contention operation performed by each AC is the same as DCF. At this time, if a specific AC does not have any traffic to transmit in the queue, the specific AC may not participate in the contention.

다만 상술한 바와 같이 각 AC가 활용하는 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터 값이 상이하기 때문에, 가장 작은 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터를 갖는 AC_VO가 다른 AC와의 채널 액세스 경쟁에서 승리할 확률이 높고, 따라서 AC_VO의 트래픽이 타 AC의 트래픽보다 우선적으로 서비스될 가능성이 높다. However, as described above, since the CW and AIFSN parameter values utilized by each AC are different, the AC_VO with the smallest CW and AIFSN parameters is more likely to win the channel access competition with other ACs, and thus the traffic of AC_VO is more likely to be serviced with priority over the traffic of other ACs.

또한, EDCA 메커니즘은 각 AC간에 (internal) 충돌(collision)이 발생했을 때, 우선 순위가 높은 AC가 승리하고, 충돌을 유발한 다른 AC의 CW를 증가시키는 등의 내부 경쟁 규칙과, 경쟁에서 승리한 AC(primary AC)가 아닌 다른 AC의 트래픽을 포함하여 PPDU를 구성하는 규칙 등을 규정하고 있지만, 본 발명의 제안과 관련이 크지 않은 내용이기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.In addition, the EDCA mechanism stipulates internal competition rules such as when an (internal) collision occurs between ACs, the AC with the highest priority wins and increases the CW of the other AC that caused the collision, and rules for composing a PPDU including traffic from an AC other than the AC that won the competition (primary AC), but a detailed description is omitted because it is not closely related to the proposal of the present invention.

EDCA는 상술한 것과 같이 QoS 강화를 위해 트래픽(프레임, 패킷 등)의 종류에 따라 차별화된 AC를 운용하는 기능과 함께, EDCA TXOP (EDCA Transmission Opportunity) 기능을 제공한다. EDCA TXOP는 특정 AC의 EDCAF(EDCA Function)가 채널 접근 기회를 획득하였을 때, 즉, TXOP holder가 되었을 때, TXOP 구간(duration)동안 다른 장치에 의해 방해받지 않고 매체(medium)를 제어(control)할 수 있는 시간을 의미한다. 이때, EDCA TXOP는 AP에 의해 알려진(advertised) TXOP 리밋(limit)에 의해 제한될 수 있다. TXOP holder는 TXOP 리밋 내에 자신의 전송 및 자신의 전송으로 인해 응답되는 응답 프레임의 전송이 종료될 수 있도록 해야 한다. As described above, EDCA provides the EDCA TXOP (EDCA Transmission Opportunity) function along with the function of operating differentiated AC according to the type of traffic (frame, packet, etc.) to enhance QoS. EDCA TXOP refers to the time during which the EDCAF (EDCA Function) of a specific AC can control the medium without being disturbed by other devices during the TXOP period (duration) when it obtains a channel access opportunity, that is, becomes a TXOP holder. At this time, the EDCA TXOP can be restricted by the TXOP limit advertised by the AP. The TXOP holder must ensure that its transmission and the transmission of the response frame responded to by its transmission can be terminated within the TXOP limit.

TXOP 홀더(holder)는 EDCA TXOP 구간 동안 복수의 프레임(복수의 PPDU)을 전송할 수 있다. 각 프레임의 전송이 획득된 TXOP 구간 내에 수행되는 것이라면, TXOP 홀더는 각 프레임의 전송 사이에 별도의 채널 액세스 절차, 예를 들어 백오프 절차를 수행하지 않고 연속적으로 복수의 프레임을 전송할 수 있다. 이때, 복수의 프레임이 즉각적인(immediate) ack을 요청하지 않는 MPDU 또는 A-MPDU(Aggregated MAC protocol data unit)인 경우, 복수의 프레임 전송은 SIFS(short interframe space) 혹은 RIFS(reduced interframe space) 간격으로 수행될 수 있다. 이때, 복수의 프레임 중 즉각적인 ack을 요청하는 MPDU 또는 A-MPDU가 존재하는 경우, TXOP 홀더는 즉각적인 ack을 요청하는 프레임을 전송한 후 ack을 수신하고, SIFS 후 다음 프레임을 전송할 수 있다. A TXOP holder can transmit multiple frames (multiple PPDUs) during an EDCA TXOP interval. If transmission of each frame is performed within the acquired TXOP interval, the TXOP holder can transmit multiple frames consecutively without performing a separate channel access procedure, for example, a backoff procedure, between transmissions of each frame. In this case, if the multiple frames are MPDUs or A-MPDUs (Aggregated MAC protocol data units) that do not request immediate ack, transmission of the multiple frames can be performed at a short interframe space (SIFS) or reduced interframe space (RIFS) interval. In this case, if there is an MPDU or A-MPDU requesting immediate ack among the multiple frames, the TXOP holder can transmit a frame requesting immediate ack, receive the ack, and transmit the next frame after SIFS.

이때, TXOP 홀더인 특정 AC가 아닌 다른 AC의 트래픽(패킷, 프레임 등)도 특정 조건을 만족할 때, TXOP 홀더(특정 AC)가 획득한 TXOP 내에서 함께 전송될 수 있다. TXOP 홀더가 아닌 다른 AC의 트래픽이 TXOP 내에서 전송되는 것은 AC간 TXOP 공유(sharing)에 의한 동작일 수 있고, 상기 특정 조건과 관련한 자세한 내용은 본 발명과 관련이 없기 때문에 생략한다.At this time, traffic (packets, frames, etc.) of other ACs other than the specific AC that is the TXOP holder may also be transmitted together within the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder (specific AC) when specific conditions are satisfied. The transmission of traffic of other ACs other than the TXOP holder within the TXOP may be an operation due to TXOP sharing between ACs, and detailed information regarding the specific conditions is omitted because it is not related to the present invention.

상술한 바와 같이 TXOP 홀더는 TXOP 내에서 별도의 채널 액세스 절차를 수행하지 않고 연속적인 프레임 전송을 수행할 수 있다. 이는, 상기 TXOP 홀더가 획득한 TXOP 구간을 다른 단말들이 이해하고 보호해줄 때 달성될 수 있는 동작일 수 있다. 즉, TXOP 홀더가 EDCA TXOP 구간에 대한 매체 제어(medium control) 권한을 획득하기 위해, 획득된 TXOP 구간에 대해 다른 단말들이 인지할 수 있도록 알리는 절차가 필요할 수 있다.As described above, the TXOP holder can perform continuous frame transmission without performing a separate channel access procedure within the TXOP. This may be an operation that can be achieved when other terminals understand and protect the TXOP section acquired by the TXOP holder. That is, in order for the TXOP holder to acquire medium control authority for the EDCA TXOP section, a procedure may be required to notify other terminals so that they can recognize the acquired TXOP section.

이를 위해, TXOP 홀더가 된, 또는 채널 액세스 절차를 완료한 후 전송을 개시하는 단말(AC)은, RTS 프레임을 전송함으로써 다른 단말들이 TXOP 구간을 인지할 수 있도록 시도할 수 있다. 이때, RTS 프레임은 MAC 프레임 헤더의 Frame Control 필드의 Type 서브필드(Frame Control 필드의 네 번째 비트(B3), 세 번째 비트(B2))가 01b로 설정되고(Type = Control frame), 상기 Frame Control 필드의 Subtype 서브필드(Frame Control 필드의 여덟 번째 비트(B7), 일곱 번째 비트(B6), 여섯 번째 비트(B5), 다섯 번째 비트(B4))가 1011b로 설정된 프레임을 의미한다. TXOP 홀더로부터 RTS 프레임을 수신한 다른 단말은, RTS 프레임에 포함된 듀레이션과 관련한 정보, 예를 들어 Duration 필드의 값에 기초하여 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 설정된 NAV는 TXOP 홀더의 TXOP에 해당하는 시간 동안 0이 아닌 값으로 유지될 수 있다. 다만, RTS 프레임의 목적 장치로 지시된 단말은 RTS 프레임의 정보에 기반하여 NAV를 설정하는 대신, CTS 프레임을 응답해야 한다. 이때, TXOP를 시작하기 위해 전송된 RTS 프레임의 목적장치는 TXOP 응답자(responder)이며, RTS에 대한 응답으로 (RTS frame이 수신되고 SIFS 후) CTS 프레임을 전송해야 한다. 이때, 응답하는 CTS 프레임의 Duration field는 수신된 RTS 프레임의 Duration field에서 지시된 값 - CTS 프레임 전송 시간 - SIFS 로 계산된 값으로 설정된다. CTS 프레임을 수신한 단말들은 CTS 프레임에 포함된 duration과 관련한 정보(예를 들어 Duration field의 값)에 기초하여 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. To this end, a terminal (AC) that becomes a TXOP holder or initiates transmission after completing a channel access procedure may attempt to allow other terminals to recognize the TXOP section by transmitting an RTS frame. At this time, the RTS frame means a frame in which the Type subfield (the fourth bit (B3), the third bit (B2) of the Frame Control field) of the Frame Control field of the MAC frame header is set to 01b (Type = Control frame) and the Subtype subfield (the eighth bit (B7), the seventh bit (B6), the sixth bit (B5), the fifth bit (B4) of the Frame Control field) of the Frame Control field is set to 1011b. Another terminal that receives an RTS frame from a TXOP holder may set an NAV based on information related to a duration included in the RTS frame, for example, the value of the Duration field. The set NAV may be maintained as a non-zero value for a time corresponding to the TXOP of the TXOP holder. However, the terminal indicated as the destination device of the RTS frame must respond with a CTS frame instead of setting the NAV based on the information of the RTS frame. At this time, the destination device of the RTS frame transmitted to start TXOP is a TXOP responder and must transmit a CTS frame in response to the RTS (after SIFS when the RTS frame is received). At this time, the Duration field of the responding CTS frame is set to a value calculated as the value indicated in the Duration field of the received RTS frame - the CTS frame transmission time - SIFS. The terminals receiving the CTS frame can set the NAV based on the information related to the duration included in the CTS frame (for example, the value of the Duration field).

따라서, TXOP 홀더로부터 RTS 프레임을 수신한 단말과, TXOP 응답자로부터 CTS 프레임을 수신한 단말의 NAV는 TXOP 홀더가 획득한 TXOP가 종료된 후에 0이 되도록 설정된다. 이를 통해 Wi-Fi MAC 메커니즘은 TXOP 홀더와 TXOP 응답자가 TXOP 동안 다수의 프레임을 방해받지 않고 교환할 수 있도록 보호할 수 있다.Therefore, the NAV of the terminal that received the RTS frame from the TXOP holder and the terminal that received the CTS frame from the TXOP responder are set to 0 after the TXOP acquired by the TXOP holder is terminated. Through this, the Wi-Fi MAC mechanism can protect the TXOP holder and the TXOP responder so that they can exchange multiple frames without interruption during the TXOP.

다만, TXOP 홀더가 RTS 프레임을 non-HT duplicate PPDU로 프라이머리 80 MHz 대역에 걸쳐 전송했지만, TXOP 응답자로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임(non-HT duplicate PPDU)이 프라이머리 40MHz 대역에서만 응답된 경우, TXOP 홀더는 획득된 TXOP 동안 프라이머리 40MHz 또는 프라이머리 40MHz 미만, 예컨대, 프라이머리 20 MHz의 대역폭만을 프레임 교환에 사용할 수 있다. TXOP 홀더가 전송하는 PPDU의 CH_BANDWIDTH(TXVECTOR parameter의 일종)를, 수신된 CTS frame의 CH_BANDWIDTH_IN-NON_HT(RXVECTOR parameter의 일종)과 같거나 더 작은 값으로 설정해야 한다. 이때, RTS 프레임은 RTS 프레임이 전송된 BW보다 작은 BW로 CTS 프레임이 응답되는 것을 허용하는 RTS 프레임일 수 있다. RTS 프레임은 DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT(TXVECTOR parameter의 일종)가 동적(Dynamic)으로 설정되어 전송된 RTS 프레임일 수 있다. 만약, DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT가 정적(Static)으로 설정되어 RTS 프레임이 TXOP 홀더로부터 전송 경우, TXOP 응답자는 CTS 프레임을 RTS 프레임이 수신된 BW와 동일한 BW로 응답해야 할 수 있다.However, if the TXOP holder transmits an RTS frame as a non-HT duplicate PPDU over the primary 80 MHz band, but a CTS frame (non-HT duplicate PPDU) responded to from the TXOP responder is responded to only in the primary 40 MHz band, the TXOP holder may use only the bandwidth of the primary 40 MHz or less than the primary 40 MHz, for example, the primary 20 MHz, for frame exchange during the acquired TXOP. The CH_BANDWIDTH (a type of TXVECTOR parameter) of the PPDU transmitted by the TXOP holder shall be set to a value equal to or smaller than the CH_BANDWIDTH_IN-NON_HT (a type of RXVECTOR parameter) of the received CTS frame. In this case, the RTS frame may be an RTS frame that allows the CTS frame to be responded to with a BW smaller than the BW in which the RTS frame was transmitted. An RTS frame may be an RTS frame transmitted with DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT (a type of TXVECTOR parameter) set to Dynamic. If DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT is set to Static and the RTS frame is transmitted from the TXOP holder, the TXOP responder may have to respond with a CTS frame with the same BW as the BW in which the RTS frame was received.

도 9는 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 RTS 프레임과 CTS 프레임을 이용한 전송/TXOP 보호방법을 보여준다.FIG. 9 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.

제1 스테이션(STA1)은 PPDU를 전송하기에 앞서, PPDU의 목적 장치인 제2 스테이션(STA2)에게 RTS 프레임을 전송하고, 제2 스테이션(STA2)은 수신된 RTS 프레임이 자신을 목적 장치로 하는 RTS 프레임을 인지한 후 SIFS 후에 CTS 프레임을 응답한다.Before transmitting a PPDU, the first station (STA1) transmits an RTS frame to the second station (STA2), which is the destination of the PPDU, and the second station (STA2) recognizes that the received RTS frame is an RTS frame destined for itself and responds with a CTS frame after SIFS.

제1 스테이션(STA1)의 주변 스테이션(Neighbor STA)인 STA1_Neighbor는 제1 스테이션(STA1)이 전송한 RTS 프레임을 수신한 후, RTS 프레임의 Duration 필드가 지시하는 값을 기초로 NAV를 설정한다. 제2 스테이션(STA2)의 주변 스테이션인 STA2_Neighbor는 제2 스테이션(STA2)이 전송한 CTS 프레임을 수신한 후, CTS 프레임의 Duration 필드가 지시하는 정보를 기초로 NAV를 설정한다. STA1_Neighbor와 STA2_Neighbor는, RTS/CTS 프레임을 수신한 후, 설정한 NAV (counter)가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되는 동안 가상 CS가 비지인 것으로 판단하고, 백오프 카운터를 줄이지 않는 등의 동작을 수행한다. 결과적으로, RTS/CTS 프레임을 수신한 주변 단말은 NAV가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되는 구간동안 전송을 시도하지 않는다. 따라서 제1 스테이션(STA1)과 제2 스테이션(STA2)은 PPDU 및 Ack 프레임을 교환하는 동안 주변 단말에 의해 방해받지 않을 수 있다.STA1_Neighbor, a neighbor station of the first station (STA1), sets its NAV based on the value indicated by the Duration field of the RTS frame after receiving the RTS frame transmitted by the first station (STA1). STA2_Neighbor, a neighbor station of the second station (STA2), sets its NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by the second station (STA2). STA1_Neighbor and STA2_Neighbor determine that the virtual CS is busy while the set NAV (counter) is maintained as a non-zero value after receiving the RTS/CTS frame, and perform operations such as not decreasing the backoff counter. As a result, the neighboring terminals that have received the RTS/CTS frame do not attempt transmission during the period in which the NAV is maintained as a non-zero value. Therefore, the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2) can be exchanged without being disturbed by surrounding terminals while exchanging PPDU and Ack frames.

제1 스테이션(STA1)과 STA2_Neighbor가 서로의 전송으로 인한 신호가 검출되지 않는 관계(hidden)라 할지라도, STA2_Neighbor는 제1 스테이션(STA1)이 PPDU를 전송하는 동안 채널(channel, WM, Wireless medium)이 사용중임을 고려한 동작을 수행할 수 있다.Even if the first station (STA1) and STA2_Neighbor are in a relationship where signals due to each other's transmissions are not detected (hidden), STA2_Neighbor can perform an operation that takes into account that the channel (channel, WM, Wireless medium) is in use while the first station (STA1) transmits a PPDU.

한편, Wi-Fi 단말(non-AP STA)은 DCF 및 EDCAF를 통해 직접 TXOP를 획득하거나 채널 액세스를 수행하지 않고도 AP에게 UL PPDU를 전송할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로는, non-AP STA는 AP가 전송한 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 자신에게 할당된 RU를 이용하여 UL PPDU를 전송할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 UL PPDU는 TB(트리거-based) PPDU이다. Meanwhile, a Wi-Fi terminal (non-AP STA) can transmit a UL PPDU to the AP without directly acquiring a TXOP or performing channel access through DCF and EDCAF. More specifically, a non-AP STA can transmit a UL PPDU using an RU allocated to it after receiving a trigger frame transmitted by the AP. At this time, the UL PPDU is a TB (trigger-based) PPDU.

트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 UL PPDU를 응답하는 STA는, DCF 및 EDCAF를 통해 직접 채널 액세스 기회를 획득하지 않고도 전송을 수행할 수 있었기 때문에 트리거 프레임에 기반한 UL PPDU를 전송하지 않는 STA에 비해 많은 전송 기회를 얻을 수 있으며, 따라서 트리거 프레임을 통해 UL PPDU를 전송한 STA는 채널 액세스 측면에서의 공정성 문제(fairness issue)를 야기할 수 있다. 이러한 공정성 문제를 해결하기 위해, 11ax에서는 HE non-AP STA가 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 전송한 UL PPDU를 통해 적어도 하나의 MPDU를 성공적으로 전송했을 때, MU(Multi-user)-EDCA 파라미터를 이용해 EDCAF를 수행하도록 하는 제약을 정의하였고 이에 따라 트리거 프레임을 통해 UL PPDU를 전송한 STA는 EDCA 파라미터가 아닌 MU-EDCA 파라미터를 이용해 채널 액세스를 수행해야 한다. MU-EDCA 파라미터는 AC_VO, AC_VI, AC_BE, AC_BK 각각에 대한 경쟁 윈도우(Contention window)의 크기 및 MU EDCA timer와 관련한 파라미터를 포함하고 있으며, MU-EDCA에 포함된 경쟁 윈도우는 EDCA의 parameter보다 크게 설정될 수 있다. 트리거 프레임을 통해 TB PPDU를 전송하였고 적어도 하나의 MPDU에 대한 전송을 성공한 STA는 MU EDCA timer에 해당하는 시간 구간 내에서 채널 액세스를 수행할 때, EDCA 파라미터가 아닌 MU EDCA 파라미터를 활용해서 채널 액세스를 수행함으로써 EDCA 파라미터를 사용하는 STA보다 낮은 확률로 채널 액세스에 성공하게 된다. 이처럼 트리거 프레임에 기초하여 UL PPDU(TB PPDU)를 전송한 STA의 채널 접근성을 저하시킴으로써, 직접 채널 액세스를 수행하지 않고 UL PPDU를 전송한 STA와 트리거 프레임에 기초하여 UL PPDU를 전송하지 않는 STA간의 채널 접근성에의 형평성 문제가 해결/완화될 수 있다.An STA that responds with a UL PPDU after receiving a trigger frame can obtain more transmission opportunities than an STA that does not transmit a UL PPDU based on the trigger frame because it can perform transmission without obtaining direct channel access opportunities through DCF and EDCAF. Therefore, an STA that transmits a UL PPDU through the trigger frame may cause a fairness issue in terms of channel access. To address this fairness issue, 11ax defines a constraint to perform EDCAF using the MU (Multi-user)-EDCA parameter when a HE non-AP STA successfully transmits at least one MPDU through the UL PPDU transmitted after receiving the trigger frame. Accordingly, an STA that transmits a UL PPDU through the trigger frame must perform channel access using the MU-EDCA parameter, not the EDCA parameter. MU-EDCA parameters include parameters related to the size of contention windows for each of AC_VO, AC_VI, AC_BE, and AC_BK and the MU EDCA timer, and the contention window included in MU-EDCA can be set to be larger than the parameters of EDCA. An STA that transmits a TB PPDU through a trigger frame and succeeds in transmitting at least one MPDU performs channel access within the time interval corresponding to the MU EDCA timer by performing channel access using the MU EDCA parameters instead of the EDCA parameters, thereby succeeding in channel access with a lower probability than an STA that uses the EDCA parameters. In this way, by lowering the channel accessibility of an STA that transmits a UL PPDU (TB PPDU) based on the trigger frame, the fairness problem in channel accessibility between an STA that transmits a UL PPDU without performing direct channel access and an STA that does not transmit a UL PPDU based on the trigger frame can be resolved/mitigated.

<MU-RTS 트리거 프레임을 이용한 TXOP 보호><TXOP Protection Using MU-RTS Trigger Frame>

11ax(6세대 Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi6, HEW, High Efficiency WLAN)에서는 MU-RTS Trigger/CTS 프레임 교환 절차를 정의하여, MU-RTS 트리거 프레임(이하 MU-RTS, MU-RTS 프레임)을 이용해 AP가 TXOP를 시작하고 TXOP 프레임 교환 절차를 보호할 수 있도록 하는 기능을 추가하였다. MU-RTS 프레임은 트리거 프레임의 일종으로, MU-RTS 프레임을 수신하고, MU-RTS 프레임에 포함된 User 필드로부터 자신의 AID12(Association ID의 LSB 12비트)가 지시된 스테이션은 동시에 CTS 프레임을 응답한다. AP가 MU-RTS 프레임을 이용해 TXOP을 보호나는 경우, 복수의 스테이션이 CTS 프레임을 응답하기 때문에, DL MU PPDU(Down link multi user PPDU)의 목적 장치인 복수의 스테이션 각각의 주변 장치들로부터 TXOP를 보호할 수 있다. 또한, MU-RTS 프레임은 UL MU PPDU를 보호하기 위해 사용될 수 있다. 보다 자세히, 트리거 프레임을 통해 복수의 스테이션에게 TB(Trigger based) PPDU를 요청하기 이전에, AP는 MU-RTS 프레임을 전송하여 TB PPDU를 응답할 복수의 스테이션이 CTS 프레임을 응답하게 할 수 있다. 이때, 복수의 스테이션이 응답한 CTS 프레임은, 각 스테이션의 주변 스테이션이 TB PPDU 및 TB PPDU 이후 전송될 Ack 프레임(Ack, Block Ack 등)을 보호하는 NAV를 설정하도록 유도하고, 이를 통해 트리거 프레임 및 TB PPDU를 인지(해석, 디코딩)할 수 없는 레거시(legacy) 스테이션STA들도 트리거 프레임을 통해 시작되는 패킷 교환 시퀀스 구간(혹은 TXOP)동안 채널 액세스를 수행하지 않을 수 있다.In 11ax (6th generation Wi-Fi, Wi-Fi6, HEW, High Efficiency WLAN), the MU-RTS Trigger/CTS frame exchange procedure is defined, and a function to enable the AP to start TXOP and protect the TXOP frame exchange procedure using the MU-RTS trigger frame (hereinafter referred to as MU-RTS, MU-RTS frame) is added. The MU-RTS frame is a type of trigger frame. When the MU-RTS frame is received, a station whose AID12 (LSB 12 bits of Association ID) is indicated from the User field included in the MU-RTS frame simultaneously responds with a CTS frame. When the AP protects TXOP using the MU-RTS frame, since multiple stations respond with CTS frames, the TXOP can be protected from peripheral devices of each of the multiple stations, which are the destination devices of the DL MU PPDU (Down link multi user PPDU). In addition, the MU-RTS frame can be used to protect the UL MU PPDU. In more detail, before requesting TB (Trigger based) PPDU to multiple stations through a trigger frame, the AP can transmit an MU-RTS frame to cause multiple stations to respond with CTS frames to the TB PPDU. At this time, the CTS frames responded to by the multiple stations cause the surrounding stations of each station to set NAVs to protect the TB PPDU and the Ack frame (Ack, Block Ack, etc.) to be transmitted after the TB PPDU, and through this, legacy stations STAs that cannot recognize (interpret, decode) the trigger frame and TB PPDU may not perform channel access during the packet exchange sequence section (or TXOP) initiated through the trigger frame.

도 10은 본 발명의 실시 예에 따른 MU-RTS 프레임과 CTS 프레임을 이용한 전송/TXOP 보호방법을 보여준다.FIG. 10 shows a transmission/TXOP protection method using an MU-RTS frame and a CTS frame according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 10의 실시 예에서, AP는 MU PPDU를 전송하기에 앞서, MU PPDU의 목적 장치인 제1 스테이션(STA1)과 제2 스테이션(STA2)에게 MU-RTS 프레임을 전송하고, 제1 스테이션(STA1)과 제2 스테이션(STA2)은 MU-RTS 프레임을 수신하고, SIFS 후 각각 CTS 프레임으로 MU-RTS 프레임에 응답한다. In the embodiment of FIG. 10, before transmitting an MU PPDU, the AP transmits an MU-RTS frame to the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2), which are the destination devices of the MU PPDU, and the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2) receive the MU-RTS frame and, after SIFS, each respond to the MU-RTS frame with a CTS frame.

제1 스테이션(STA1)의 주변 스테이션 STA1_Neighbor는 제1 스테이션(STA1)이 전송한 CTS 프레임을 수신한 후, CTS 프레임의 Duration 필드가 지시하는 정보를 토대로 NAV를 설정한다. 제2 스테이션(STA2)의 주변 스테이션인 STA2_Neighbor는 제2 스테이션(STA2)이 전송한 CTS 프레임을 수신한 후, CTS 프레임의 Duration 필드가 지시하는 정보를 기초로 NAV를 설정한다. STA1_Neighbor와 STA2_Neighbor는, CTS 프레임을 수신한 후 설정한 NAV (counter)가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되는 동안 Virtual CS(Virtual Carrier Sense)가 비지로 판단하여, 백 오프 카운터를 줄이지 않는 등의 동작을 수행한다. 따라서 CTS 프레임을 수신한 주변 단말이 NAV가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되는 구간동안 전송을 시도하지 않는다. 이를 통해 AP가 MU PPDU를 전송하고 제1 스테이션(STA1)과 제2 스테이션(STA2)이 Ack 프레임을 전송하는 동안 주변 단말에 의해 방해받지 않을 수 있다. STA1_Neighbor, a neighboring station of the first station (STA1), sets its NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by the first station (STA1). STA2_Neighbor, a neighboring station of the second station (STA2), sets its NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by the second station (STA2). STA1_Neighbor and STA2_Neighbor perform operations such as not decreasing the back-off counter, determining that the Virtual CS (Virtual Carrier Sense) is busy while the NAV (counter) set after receiving the CTS frame is maintained as a non-zero value. Therefore, neighboring terminals that have received the CTS frame do not attempt to transmit during the period in which the NAV is maintained as a non-zero value. This allows the AP to transmit MU PPDUs and avoid interference from surrounding terminals while the first station (STA1) and the second station (STA2) transmit Ack frames.

앞서 설명한 트리거 프레임은 11ax에서 정의된 프레임 타입(type)으로, Frame Control 필드의 Type(네 번째 비트(B3) 및 세 번째 비트(B2)) 및 Subtype(여덟 번째 비트(B7), 일곱 번째 비트(B6), 여섯 번째 비트(B5), 다섯 번째 비트(B4)) 서브필드가 각각 01b과 0010b로 설정된 프레임 타입이다. 트리거 프레임은 Frame Control 필드의 Type 서브필드가 01b인 Control Type의 프레임이며, Subtype 값 0010이 Trigger frame 타입임을 지시한다. 11ax에서는, AP가 한 번에 복수의 스테이션에 대해 응답 프레임을 요청하도록 트리거 프레임을 정의하고, MU-RTS 프레임은 AP가 복수의 스테이션(non-AP STA)에게 CTS 프레임을 요청하기 위해 사용된다. MU-RTS 프레임을 제외한 다른 Trigger Type은 UL MU PPDU를 요청하는 기본 트리거 프레임(Basic Tigger frame), Beamforming Report를 요청하는 BRP 트리거 프레임(Beamforming Report Poll Tigger frame), MU-BAR Tigger frame (BlockAck 요청), Buffer Status Report를 요청하는 BSRP 트리거 프레임(Buffer Status Report Poll Tigger frame), GCR MU-BAR 트리거 프레임, BQRP(Bandwidth Query Report Poll) 트리거 프레임, NDP 피드백 리포트 폴(Poll) 트리거 프레임이있다. MU-RTS 프레임을 제외한 다른 Trigger Type은 본 발명의 내용과 관련이 없기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.The trigger frame described above is a frame type defined in 11ax, in which the Type (fourth bit (B3) and third bit (B2)) and Subtype (eighth bit (B7), seventh bit (B6), sixth bit (B5), and fifth bit (B4)) subfields of the Frame Control field are set to 01b and 0010b, respectively. The trigger frame is a frame of the Control Type in which the Type subfield of the Frame Control field is 01b, and the Subtype value 0010 indicates that it is a Trigger frame type. In 11ax, the trigger frame is defined so that an AP can request a response frame from multiple stations at once, and the MU-RTS frame is used so that an AP can request a CTS frame from multiple stations (non-AP STAs). Trigger Types other than the MU-RTS frame include the Basic Tigger frame requesting UL MU PPDU, the BRP trigger frame requesting Beamforming Report (Beamforming Report Poll Tigger frame), the MU-BAR Tigger frame (BlockAck request), the BSRP trigger frame requesting Buffer Status Report (Buffer Status Report Poll Tigger frame), the GCR MU-BAR trigger frame, the BQRP (Bandwidth Query Report Poll) trigger frame, and the NDP Feedback Report Poll trigger frame. Trigger Types other than the MU-RTS frame are not related to the content of the present invention, so a detailed description is omitted.

<다중 링크 장치(Multi-link Device(MLD))><Multi-link Device (MLD)>

Wi-Fi 7의 EHT(Extremely High Throughput)에서는 MLD가 정의되었다. MLD는 1개 혹은 1개 이상의 STA가 포함된 Logical entity를 의미하며, AP MLD에는 한 개 이상의 AP (AP STA)가 소속(affiliated)될 수 있고, non-AP (STA) MLD에는 한 개 이상의 non-AP STA가 소속될 수 있다.MLD is defined in EHT (Extremely High Throughput) of Wi-Fi 7. MLD means a Logical entity that includes one or more STAs. One or more APs (AP STAs) can be affiliated to an AP MLD, and one or more non-AP STAs can be affiliated to a non-AP (STA) MLD.

AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP는 서로 독립적인 BSS(Basic Service set)을 운용할 수 있으며, AP들이 운용하는 BSS들의 동작 대역폭(Operating BW) 및 동작 채널(Operating channel)은 서로 다를 수 있다. AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 Association하는 경우, 단일 AP MLD에 소속된 복수의 AP와, 단일 non-AP MLD에 소속된 복수의 non-AP STA들 간의 setup이 수행될 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP들은 각자의 Link(Operating channel)에서 BSS를 운용하기 때문에, 단일 AP MLD에 소속된 복수의 AP들 각각과 Association된 non-AP MLD는 Multi-Link setup을 수행한 것으로 고려된다. 다시 말해서, Wi-Fi 7에서 정의된 AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 복수의 Link에서 연결된 Multi-Link setup을 수행할 수 있다. Each AP belonging to an AP MLD can operate an independent BSS (Basic Service set), and the operating bandwidth (Operating BW) and operating channel (Operating channel) of the BSSs operated by the APs can be different from each other. When an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD are associated, setup can be performed between multiple APs belonging to a single AP MLD and multiple non-AP STAs belonging to a single non-AP MLD. At this time, since each AP belonging to the AP MLD operates a BSS in its own Link (Operating channel), the non-AP MLD associated with each of the multiple APs belonging to the single AP MLD is considered to have performed a Multi-Link setup. In other words, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD defined in Wi-Fi 7 can perform a Multi-Link setup connected in multiple Links.

각 MLD에는 최대 15개의 STA(AP STA, non-AP STA)가 소속될 수 있다. 즉, AP MLD에는 15개의 AP가 소속될 수 있고, 상기 15개의 AP는 각각 독립적인 BSS를 운용한다. 이 때, AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP는, 종래 Wi-Fi AP와 동일한(equivalent) 수준의 서비스를 제공한다. 즉, AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP는 독립적인 AP로 기능하여 MLD에 소속되지 않은 non-AP STA들(예를 들어 Legacy non-AP STA들)에 대한 서비스를 수행할 수도 있다. 이 때, AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP는 서로 독립적인 Link에서 운용되며, 상기 Link의 의미는 각 AP가 운용되는 동작 채널을 의미할 뿐 2.4/5/6 GHz를 구분하는 의미의 Link는 아니다. 즉, AP MLD에 소속된 제1 AP는 제1 Link에서 운용되며, 제2 AP는 제2 Link에서 운용될 수 있다. 이 때, 제1 AP가 운용되는 제1 Link 및 제2 AP가 운용되는 제2 Link는 모두 6 GHz 대역에 위치하는 것이 가능하다. Each MLD can have up to 15 STAs (AP STAs, non-AP STAs). That is, 15 APs can belong to the AP MLD, and the 15 APs each operate an independent BSS. At this time, each AP belonging to the AP MLD provides a service equivalent to a conventional Wi-Fi AP. That is, each AP belonging to the AP MLD can function as an independent AP and can also perform a service for non-AP STAs (e.g., legacy non-AP STAs) that do not belong to the MLD. At this time, each AP belonging to the AP MLD is operated in an independent Link, and the meaning of the Link only means the operating channel on which each AP is operated, and does not mean a Link that distinguishes between 2.4/5/6 GHz. That is, the first AP belonging to the AP MLD can be operated in the first Link, and the second AP can be operated in the second Link. At this time, it is possible for both the first link, where the first AP operates, and the second link, where the second AP operates, to be located in the 6 GHz band.

또한, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 특정 Link에서 수행하는 Multi-Link setup 절차를 통해 복수의 Link에서의 setup을 완료할 수 있다. 이 때, Multi-Link setup 절차는 하나 혹은 하나 이상의 Link에 대해 연결을 수립하기 위해 수행하는 Multi-Link Probe Request/Response, Multi-Link Association Request/Response frame 교환 등을 의미한다. 본 발명에서, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD간의 Multi-Link setup이 수행되는 절차는 중요하지 않으므로, 상세한 설명은 생략하도록 한다.In addition, AP MLD and non-AP MLD can complete setup in multiple Links through the Multi-Link setup procedure performed in a specific Link. At this time, the Multi-Link setup procedure means Multi-Link Probe Request/Response, Multi-Link Association Request/Response frame exchange, etc. performed to establish a connection for one or more Links. In the present invention, the procedure for performing Multi-Link setup between AP MLD and non-AP MLD is not important, so a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

두 MLD간의 복수의 Link를 통해 연결된 경우, 두 MLD는 각 Link를 통해 송/수신할 Traffic을 분리하여 운용하는 것이 가능하다. 이는 두 MLD 간에 수행된 TID-to-Link mapping 협상(negotiation) 혹은 AP MLD에 의해서 지시된 TID-to-Link mapping 상태가 적용됨으로써 달성되는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD가 non-AP MLD들에게 지시하는 TID-to-Link mapping 상태는 AP MLD가 전송하는 Management frame(예를 들어 Beacon, Probe Response frame)에 의해서 지시되며, AP MLD와 적어도 하나의 Link를 통해 Association된 non-AP MLD들은 AP MLD가 지시한 TID-to-Link mapping을 따라 각 Link를 운용해야 한다. 다만, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD 사이에 새로운 TID-to-Link mapping negotiation이 수행되는 경우, 새로운 TID-to-Link mapping negotiation에 의해 결정된 방법을 따라 각 TID의 Traffic(MPDU)을 서로 다른 Link를 통해 송/수신할 수 있다. 일 예로, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 2개의 Link를 통해 연결된 상태이고, Link1에 TID 0 내지 3, Link2에 TID 4 내지 7을 매핑하였다면, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 Link 1을 통해서는 TID가 0 내지 3인 MPDU들 만을 송/수신하고, TID가 4 내지 7인 MPDU들은 Link 2를 통해서 송/수신해야 한다. When two MLDs are connected through multiple Links, the two MLDs can operate the Traffic to be transmitted/received through each Link separately. This can be achieved by TID-to-Link mapping negotiation performed between the two MLDs or by applying the TID-to-Link mapping status indicated by the AP MLD. At this time, the TID-to-Link mapping status that the AP MLD indicates to the non-AP MLDs is indicated by the Management frame (e.g. Beacon, Probe Response frame) transmitted by the AP MLD, and the non-AP MLDs associated with the AP MLD through at least one Link must operate each Link according to the TID-to-Link mapping indicated by the AP MLD. However, when a new TID-to-Link mapping negotiation is performed between the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD, the Traffic (MPDU) of each TID can be transmitted/received through different Links according to the method determined by the new TID-to-Link mapping negotiation. For example, if an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD are connected through two Links, and TIDs 0 to 3 are mapped to Link 1 and TIDs 4 to 7 are mapped to Link 2, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD should transmit/receive only MPDUs with TIDs 0 to 3 through Link 1, and transmit/receive MPDUs with TIDs 4 to 7 through Link 2.

만약 AP MLD가 별도의 TID-to-Link mapping 상태를 지시하지 않았고, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD간에 수행된 TID-to-Link mapping이 없는 경우, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 Default TID-to-Link mapping 상태를 갖는다. Default TID-to-Link mapping 상태는 각 Link에 모든 TID가 Mapping된 상태를 의미하며, 이 경우, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 각 Link에서 모든 TID(TID= 0 내지 7)의 MPDU를 송/수신한다. If the AP MLD does not indicate a separate TID-to-Link mapping state and there is no TID-to-Link mapping performed between the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD have the Default TID-to-Link mapping state. The Default TID-to-Link mapping state means that all TIDs are mapped to each Link, and in this case, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD transmit/receive MPDUs of all TIDs (TID = 0 to 7) on each Link.

Wi-Fi 8 (UHR, Ultra High Reliability)은 Wi-Fi 7을 기초로 개발될 예정이기 때문에, Wi-Fi 8에도 여전히 MLD 개념, MLD 간의 연결 절차, TID-to-Link mapping을 통한 Link의 운용 방법 등이 계승될 것이다. 즉, 따라서 AP MLD에 소속된 AP가 UHR STA인 것이 가능하고, non-AP MLD에 소속된 non-AP STA가 UHR STA인 것 역시 가능하다.Since Wi-Fi 8 (UHR, Ultra High Reliability) is expected to be developed based on Wi-Fi 7, the MLD concept, connection procedures between MLDs, and link operation methods through TID-to-Link mapping will still be inherited in Wi-Fi 8. In other words, it is possible for an AP belonging to an AP MLD to be a UHR STA, and it is also possible for a non-AP STA belonging to a non-AP MLD to be a UHR STA.

<MLD의 채널 접속><MLD Channel Access>

도 11은 사용자 우선순위(User priority)와 접속 카테고리(Access Category)의 매핑 테이블(mapping table)을 나타낸다.Figure 11 shows a mapping table of user priority and access category.

MLD에 소속된 각 STA들은 종래 Wi-Fi 단말과 동일한 방법으로 채널 접속을 수행한다. 보다 구체적으로는, 각 STA들은 EDCA (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access)를 사용하여 채널 접속을 수행한다.Each STA belonging to MLD performs channel access in the same way as a conventional Wi-Fi terminal. More specifically, each STA performs channel access using EDCA (Enhanced Distributed Channel Access).

EDCA를 사용한 채널 접속 매커니즘은 비 면허 대역의 채널 접속을 위해 일반적으로 사용되는 방법이다.Channel access mechanism using EDCA is a commonly used method for channel access in unlicensed bands.

EDCA는 트래픽을 그 특성에 따라 4 종류의 AC(access category)로 차별화하여 관리하는 메커니즘을 제공한다. 이 때 상기 4 종류의 AC는 AC_VO(AC Voice), AC_VI(AC Video), AC_BE(AC Best effort), AC_BK(AC Background) 이며, 각 AC는 상이한 CW(contention window), TXOP (transmit opportunity) 및 AIFSN 파라미터를 갖을 수 있다. 간단히 말해서, EDCA는 4 종류의 AC에 대한 CW, TXOP, AIFSN 파라미터를 차별화함으로써 각 AC를 활용하여 전송되는 트래픽의 전송 우선순위를 조절하는 메커니즘이다. 이를 위해, EDCA는 MAC이 서비스해야 하는 트래픽(MSDU)을 TC(traffic category)혹은 TS(traffic stream)에 따라 4개의 AC 중 하나의 AC에 매핑할 수 있다. 이 때, EDCA에 의해 4개의 AC 중 하나에 매핑 된 트래픽들은 각 AC를 위한 4개의 queue에 나눠서 관리된다. 이 때 상기 4개의 queue는 물리적으로 분리되지 않고 logically 분리된 queue일 수 있다. 이 때, 각 AC에 매핑되어 Transmission queue에 저장되어 있는 패킷들은 각 AC가 백오프 절차를 완료하여 채널 접근 권한을 획득했을 때에 전송된다. 이 때, AC가 백오프 절차를 수행하여 채널 접근 권한을 획득하는 방법은 도 6을 통해 설명되었기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.EDCA provides a mechanism to manage traffic by differentiating it into four types of ACs (access categories) according to its characteristics. The four types of ACs are AC_VO (AC Voice), AC_VI (AC Video), AC_BE (AC Best effort), and AC_BK (AC Background), and each AC can have different CW (contention window), TXOP (transmit opportunity), and AIFSN parameters. Simply put, EDCA is a mechanism to control the transmission priority of traffic transmitted using each AC by differentiating the CW, TXOP, and AIFSN parameters for the four types of ACs. To this end, EDCA can map traffic (MSDU) that a MAC must service to one of the four ACs according to the TC (traffic category) or TS (traffic stream). At this time, traffic mapped to one of the four ACs by EDCA is divided into four queues for each AC and managed. At this time, the above four queues may not be physically separated but may be logically separated queues. At this time, packets mapped to each AC and stored in the Transmission queue are transmitted when each AC completes the backoff procedure and acquires channel access rights. At this time, the method by which the AC performs the backoff procedure and acquires channel access rights is described through Fig. 6, so a detailed description is omitted.

AC_VO는 Voice 트래픽과 같이 트래픽의 절대적인 양이 많지는 않지만, 전송 지연에 취약한 트래픽들에 활용될 수 있는 AC이며, 타 AC의 트래픽보다 우선적으로 서비스될 확률을 높이기 위해 상대적으로 작은 CW 및 AIFSN 파라미터 값을 갖는다. 다만 AC_VO의 TXOP 파라미터는 타 AC의 TXOP 파라미터보다 상대적으로 작은 값으로 제한되어, 타 AC보다 짧은 전송시간만이 보장된다.AC_VO is an AC that can be used for traffic that is vulnerable to transmission delay, although the absolute amount of traffic, such as voice traffic, is not large, and has relatively small CW and AIFSN parameter values to increase the probability of being serviced preferentially over traffic from other ACs. However, the TXOP parameter of AC_VO is limited to a relatively smaller value than the TXOP parameters of other ACs, so only a shorter transmission time is guaranteed than that of other ACs.

AC_VI는 Voice 트래픽보다는 전송 지연에 강인하지만, 여전히 저 지연 전송을 요하고 많은 량의 트래픽을 처리해야 하는 Video와 같은 트래픽에 활용될 수 있는 AC이다. AC_VI는 AC_VO보다는 크지만 타 AC보다 작은 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터 값을 갖으며, 대신 TXOP는 AC_VI보다 2배가량 길다. AC_VI is an AC that is more tolerant to transmission delay than voice traffic, but can still be used for traffic such as video that requires low-latency transmission and a large amount of traffic. AC_VI has larger CW and AIFSN parameter values than AC_VO but smaller than other ACs, and instead, TXOP is about twice as long as AC_VI.

AC_BE는 전송 지연에 강인한 트래픽에 활용될 수 있는 AC이며, 음성 데이터 및 스트리밍 비디오 데이터를 제외한 대부분의 일반적인 트래픽이 AC_BE로 분류될 수 있다. AC_BE는 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터를 AC_VO, AC_VI 보다 큰 값을 사용한다. 또한, AC_BE는 TXOP를 따로 갖고 있지 않고, 따라서 PPDU를 전송한 후 ACK을 응답 받고, SIFS 후 다시 PPDU를 전송하는 TXOP 전송 sequence를 활용할 수 없다. AC_BE is an AC that can be utilized for traffic that is robust to transmission delay, and most general traffic except voice data and streaming video data can be classified as AC_BE. AC_BE uses CW and AIFSN parameters with values larger than AC_VO and AC_VI. In addition, AC_BE does not have a separate TXOP, and therefore cannot utilize the TXOP transmission sequence that transmits a PPDU, receives an ACK in response, and then transmits a PPDU again after SIFS.

AC_BK는 AC_BE와 유사하게 전송 지연에 강인한 트래픽이지만, 우선 순위가 BE 트래픽 보다는 낮은 트래픽에 활용될 수 있는 AC이다. AC_BK는 AC_BE와 동일한 CW 파라미터 값을 활용하고, AIFSN 파라미터 값은 AC_BE보다도 큰 값을 활용한다. 또한, AC_BK는 AC_BE와 동일하게 TXOP를 따로 갖고 있지 않아 TXOP 전송 sequence를 활용할 수 없다.AC_BK is a type of AC that is robust to transmission delays, similar to AC_BE, but can be used for lower priority traffic than BE traffic. AC_BK uses the same CW parameter values as AC_BE, and uses larger AIFSN parameter values than AC_BE. In addition, AC_BK does not have a separate TXOP like AC_BE, so it cannot use the TXOP transmission sequence.

상술한 4 종류의 EDCA AC는 802.1D의 UP(user-priority)와 매핑 되며, 유선으로 수신한 트래픽이 갖고 있는 UP값 혹은 상위 레이어로부터 지시된 MSDU의 TID에 따라 EDCA AC를 결정하게 된다. 이 때, 상기 MSDU의 TID가 0 내지 7의 값을 지시하는 경우, 상기 TID가 지시하는 값은 UP와 1대1로 대응될 수 있다. The four types of EDCA AC described above are mapped to the UP (user-priority) of 802.1D, and the EDCA AC is determined according to the UP value of the traffic received through the wire or the TID of the MSDU indicated from the upper layer. At this time, if the TID of the MSDU indicates a value of 0 to 7, the value indicated by the TID can correspond 1:1 with the UP.

802.1D UP와 EDCA AC를 매핑하는 규칙은 도 43에 도시된 UP-to-AC mappings 표로 설명을 대신한다.The rules for mapping 802.1D UP and EDCA AC are described in the UP-to-AC mappings table shown in Figure 43.

또한, 상술한 4 종류의 EDCA AC는 각각의 디폴트(default) CW(CWmin, CWmax), AIFSN, TXOP 파라미터가 표준에서 정의되어 있고, 각 AC의 파라미터 값은 AP에 의해 변경되어 BSS마다 상이한 값을 활용할 수도 있다.In addition, the four types of EDCA AC described above have default CW (CWmin, CWmax), AIFSN, and TXOP parameters defined in the standard, and the parameter values of each AC can be changed by the AP and different values can be used for each BSS.

EDCA 메커니즘을 활용하면, Wi-Fi 트래픽은 4개의 AC와 대응하는 4개의 queue 중 하나에 보관되며, 자신이 포함된 AC가 타 AC와의 채널 접속 경쟁에서 승리한 경우에 한해서만 목적 장치로 전송될 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 AC간의 채널 접속 경쟁에서 각 AC는 자신에게 할당된 액세스 파라미터 (CW[AC], AIFSN[AC])를 활용해 경쟁을 수행하며, 각 AC가 수행하는 채널 접속 경쟁 동작은 DCF와 동일하다. 이 때, 특정 AC가 queue에 전송할 트래픽을 하나도 갖고 있지 않다면, 상기 특정 AC는 경쟁에 참여하지 않을 수 있다.By utilizing the EDCA mechanism, Wi-Fi traffic is stored in one of four queues corresponding to four ACs, and can be transmitted to a destination device only when the AC it is included in wins the channel access competition with other ACs. At this time, in the channel access competition between the ACs, each AC performs the competition using the access parameters (CW[AC], AIFSN[AC]) assigned to it, and the channel access competition operation performed by each AC is the same as DCF. At this time, if a specific AC does not have any traffic to transmit in the queue, the specific AC may not participate in the competition.

다만 상술한 바와 같이 각 AC가 활용하는 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터 값이 상이하기 때문에, 가장 작은 CW와 AIFSN 파라미터를 갖는 AC_VO가 다른 AC와의 채널 접속 경쟁에서 승리할 확률이 높고, 따라서 AC_VO의 트래픽이 타 AC의 트래픽보다 우선적으로 서비스될 가능성이 높다. However, as described above, since the CW and AIFSN parameter values utilized by each AC are different, the AC_VO with the smallest CW and AIFSN parameters is more likely to win the channel access competition with other ACs, and thus the traffic of AC_VO is more likely to be serviced with priority over the traffic of other ACs.

또한, EDCA 메커니즘은 각 AC간에 (internal) collision이 발생했을 때, 우선 순위가 높은 AC(도 11참조)가 승리하고, collision을 유발한 다른 AC의 CW를 증가시키는 등의 내부 경쟁 규칙과, 경쟁에서 승리한 AC(primary AC)가 아닌 다른 AC의 트래픽을 포함하여 PPDU를 구성하는 규칙 등을 규정하고 있지만, 본 발명의 제안과 관련이 크지 않은 내용이기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.In addition, the EDCA mechanism stipulates internal competition rules such as when an (internal) collision occurs between ACs, the AC with a higher priority (see Fig. 11) wins and increases the CW of the other AC that caused the collision, and rules for composing a PPDU including traffic from an AC other than the AC that won the competition (primary AC), but a detailed description is omitted because it is not closely related to the proposal of the present invention.

상술한 바와 같이 MLD에 소속된 각 STA들은 종래 Wi-Fi 단말과 동일한 방법으로 채널 접속을 수행한다. 즉, MLD에 소속된 각 STA를 각 Link에서 관찰하는 경우, MLD에 소속된 각 STA는 MLD에 소속되지 않은 non-MLD STA(QoS STA)가 채널 접속을 수행하는 것과 동일한 방법으로 채널 접속을 수행한다. 이는 Wi-Fi 7을 개발할 때에, 각 Link에서 동작하고 있던 기존의 non-MLD STA들과의 형평성을 고려하여 정의된 규칙이라 할 수 있다. As described above, each STA belonging to the MLD performs channel access in the same manner as a conventional Wi-Fi terminal. That is, when each STA belonging to the MLD is observed in each Link, each STA belonging to the MLD performs channel access in the same manner as a non-MLD STA (QoS STA) that does not belong to the MLD performs channel access. This can be said to be a rule defined in consideration of fairness with the existing non-MLD STAs that were operating in each Link when developing Wi-Fi 7.

다만, NSTR(Nonsimultaneous transmit and receive) Link pair에서 동작하는 MLD를 위해 정의된 예외가 있다. 보다 구체적으로는, NSTR(Nonsimultaneous transmit and receive) Link pair에서 동작하는 MLD의 STA는 다른 Link에서 수행하는 전송과 전송 개시 시점을 맞추기 위해 백오프 절차가 완료된 상황에서 전송의 개시를 유예할 수 있도록 허용된다. However, there is an exception defined for MLDs operating on Nonsimultaneous transmit and receive (NSTR) Link pairs. More specifically, an STA of an MLD operating on a Nonsimultaneous transmit and receive (NSTR) Link pair is allowed to postpone the initiation of a transmission until the backoff procedure is completed in order to synchronize the transmission initiation timing with the transmission performed on the other Link.

NSTR Link pair는, MLD의 STA가 동작하는 link pair들 중, 특정 Link에서 상기 MLD가 전송을 수행할 때에, 나머지 Link에 강한 간섭을 유발하는 Link pair를 의미한다. 일 예로, Link1과 Link2이 non-AP MLD의 NSTR link pair인 경우, Link1에서 운용되는 non-AP MLD의 non-AP STA1이 전송을 수행할 때, Link2에서 운용되는 상기 non-AP MLD의 non-AP STA2는 강한 간섭을 받는다. 이에 따라, non-AP STA2는 non-AP STA1이 전송을 수행하는 도중, Link2의 IDLE/BUSY 여부를 판단하거나, 수신되는 PPDU를 정상적으로 수신하는 것이 불가능하다. 이 경우, non-AP MLD는 2개의 Link에 STA들을 운용함에도 불구하고, 1개의 Link에서 전송을 수행할 때 다른 Link의 정상적인 운용이 불가능하다는 문제를 갖는다. Wi-Fi 7에서는 이와 같은 문제를 완화하기 위해, non-AP MLD가 NSTR link pair에서 동시 전송을 개시할 수 있는 mechanism을 도입하였다. 동시 전송을 개시할 수 있는 mechanism을 간략히 설명하면, non-AP MLD가 제1 Link에서 백오프 절차를 완료하였더라도, 제2 Link에서 수행하는 백오프 절차가 완료될 때까지 전송을 유예함으로써, 제1 Link와 제2 Link에서 동시에 전송을 개시할 수 있도록 하는 mechanism이다. An NSTR Link pair refers to a Link pair that causes strong interference to the remaining Links when the MLD performs transmission on a specific Link among the Link pairs on which the STAs of the MLD operate. For example, if Link1 and Link2 are an NSTR link pair of a non-AP MLD, when non-AP STA1 of the non-AP MLD operating on Link1 performs transmission, non-AP STA2 of the non-AP MLD operating on Link2 experiences strong interference. Accordingly, the non-AP STA2 cannot determine whether Link2 is IDLE/BUSY or normally receive the received PPDU while the non-AP STA1 is performing transmission. In this case, the non-AP MLD has a problem that normal operation of the other Link is impossible when transmission is performed on one Link even though it operates STAs on two Links. To alleviate this problem, Wi-Fi 7 introduces a mechanism by which the non-AP MLD can initiate simultaneous transmission on the NSTR link pair. Briefly, the mechanism that can initiate simultaneous transmission is a mechanism that enables simultaneous transmission to be initiated on the first and second links by postponing transmission until the backoff procedure performed on the second link is completed, even if the non-AP MLD has completed the backoff procedure on the first link.

또한, NSTR link pair 중 하나의 Link에서 PPDU가 수신되는 도중이라면, NSTR link pair의 다른 Link에서 응답을 요청하는 frame(예를 들어 RTS frame)이 수신되더라도 응답 frame(예를 들어 CTS frame)을 응답하지 않을 수 있도록 하는 예외 규칙이 정의되었다.Additionally, an exception rule is defined that allows a response frame (e.g., CTS frame) not to be responded to even if a frame requesting a response (e.g., RTS frame) is received on the other link of the NSTR link pair while a PPDU is being received on one link of the NSTR link pair.

전술한 바와 같이 NSTR link pair는 특정 Link에서 동작하는 STA가 수행하는 전송으로 인해 발생한 간섭이 다른 Link에서 동작하는 STA가 정상적으로 동작하는 것이 불가능(CCA 및/또는 PPDU 수신 불가)하다는 것을 특징으로 하기 때문에, 동일한 Link 쌍이 특정 MLD에게는 NSTR link pair이고, 다른 MLD에게는 STR link pair(Simultaneous transmit and receive)일 수 있다. 이 때, STR link pair는, STR link pair의 각 Link에서 동작하는 각 STA가 수행하는 전송이 다른 Link에서 동작하는 STA에게 영향을 주지 않고, 따라서 특정 Link에서 PPDU 전송을 수행하는 도중 다른 Link에서 PPDU 수신이 가능한 Link pair를 의미한다.As described above, since an NSTR link pair is characterized in that interference caused by transmission performed by an STA operating on a specific Link makes it impossible for an STA operating on another Link to operate normally (unable to receive CCA and/or PPDU), the same Link pair may be an NSTR link pair for a specific MLD and an STR link pair (Simultaneous transmit and receive) for another MLD. In this case, an STR link pair means a Link pair in which transmission performed by each STA operating on each Link of the STR link pair does not affect STAs operating on other Links, and therefore, PPDU reception is possible on another Link while PPDU transmission is performed on a specific Link.

이와 같이, 각 link pair는 MLD 각각의 간섭 차폐 능력에 따라 특정 MLD에게 STR link pair가 되거나, 다른 MLD에게 NSTR link pair가 되는 것이 가능하다. 다만, 특정 Link pair의 Operating channel이 겹치는(Overlap) 경우, 상기 특정 Link pair는 MLD의 특성/성능에 관계없이 NSTR link pair가 될 수밖에 없다. 이에 따라, Wi-Fi 7에서는 AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 복수의 Link를 통해 연결되는 Multi-Link setup을 수행할 때에, setup이 수행되는 각 Link들에서 운용되는 BSS들의 Operating channel이 서로 겹치지 않도록 조절할 것을 규정하고 있다. 즉, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 Multi-Link setup을 수행한 각 Link들의 Operating channel은 서로 겹치지 않는다.In this way, each link pair can be an STR link pair to a specific MLD or an NSTR link pair to another MLD depending on the interference shielding capability of each MLD. However, if the Operating channels of a specific Link pair overlap, the specific Link pair cannot help but become an NSTR link pair regardless of the characteristics/performance of the MLD. Accordingly, in Wi-Fi 7, when an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD perform a Multi-Link setup connected through multiple Links, the Operating Channels of the BSSs operated in the Links where the setup is performed are regulated so as not to overlap with each other. In other words, the Operating Channels of the Links where the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD perform the Multi-Link setup do not overlap with each other.

<종래 Wi-Fi 채널 접근 절차의 프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)(또는 주 채널) 종속성 문제><Primary channel (or main channel) dependency problem in conventional Wi-Fi channel access procedures>

MLD가 도입된 이유는 1) 복수 개의 링크를 이용하여 Throughput을 증가시키고, 2) 복수 개의 링크를 통해 채널 접속 절차를 수행함으로써 단일 링크를 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 것보다 더욱 빨리 채널 접근 권한을 획득(복수 개의 링크들 중 하나를 통한 채널 접속을 수행함으로써 빠르게 권한 획득)하기 위함이다. 하지만, 복수 개의 링크들에서 동시에 채널 접속 절차를 수행함으로써 채널 접근 기회를 향상시키기 위한 방법은 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 링크의 개수가 증가함에 따라 큰 전력 소모를 유발하는 방법일 수 있다. 즉, MLD는 채널 접근 확률(빈도)을 높이기 위해 복수 개의 링크에서 채널 접속을 수행할 수는 있지만, 복수 개의 링크에서 채널 접속을 수행할 때 소요되는 전력소모로 인한 문제를 갖게 된다. 따라서, 채널 접근 확률(빈도)를 높이기 위한 솔루션으로서, 복수 개의 링크를 사용하는 방법은 제한된 솔루션인 것으로 고려될 수 있고, 각 링크에서 수행하는 채널 접속 절차의 성공 확률(빈도)를 높이기 위한 방법이 필요하다. 예를 들면, 하나의 링크를 통한 채널 접속 절차보다 더 빨리 채널 접근 권한을 획득하기 위해서 하나 이상의 링크를 통해 채널 접속 절차를 수행하되, 전력소모를 고려하여 일정 개수 이하의 링크를 이용할 수 있다. 예를 들면, 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 없는 경우, 프라이머리 채널이 유휴상태로 변경될 때까지 대기하지 않고 유휴 상태의 넌 프라이머리 채널들(non-primary channel 또는 secondary channel(부 채널) 등) 중 하나를 선택하여 채널 접속 절차가 수행될 수 있다.The reason why MLD was introduced is 1) to increase throughput by using multiple links, and 2) to obtain channel access rights faster by performing channel access procedures through multiple links than performing channel access through a single link (quickly obtain rights by performing channel access through one of multiple links). However, the method for improving channel access opportunities by performing channel access procedures simultaneously on multiple links may be a method that causes large power consumption as the number of links performing channel access procedures increases. In other words, MLD can perform channel access on multiple links to increase the channel access probability (frequency), but it has a problem due to the power consumption required when performing channel access on multiple links. Therefore, as a solution for increasing the channel access probability (frequency), the method of using multiple links can be considered a limited solution, and a method for increasing the success probability (frequency) of the channel access procedure performed on each link is needed. For example, in order to obtain channel access rights faster than performing the channel access procedure through a single link, the channel access procedure can be performed through one or more links, but a certain number of links can be used in consideration of power consumption. For example, if a channel access procedure cannot be performed on a primary channel, the channel access procedure can be performed by selecting one of the idle non-primary channels (such as a non-primary channel or a secondary channel) without waiting until the primary channel changes to an idle state.

따라서, Wi-Fi 8의 개발 목표인 '초고신뢰성(UHR, Ultra High Reliability)'을 지원하기 위해서는 MLD의 특성인 복수의 링크에 대한 활용방법을 최적화해야 할 뿐만 아니라, 각 링크에서 동작하는 STA들이 최선의 방법으로 채널 접근 기회를 획득할 수 있도록 지원하는 방법이 필요하다.Therefore, in order to support the development goal of Wi-Fi 8, which is 'Ultra High Reliability (UHR),' it is necessary to optimize the utilization of multiple links, which is a characteristic of MLD, as well as a method to support STAs operating on each link to obtain channel access opportunities in the best possible way.

이와 같은 맥락에서, 각 링크에서 채널 접속을 수행하는 Wi-Fi 단말의 채널 접근성 문제를 분석할 필요가 있다. Wi-Fi 표준은 세대를 거듭하며 큰 Throughput 성능 향상을 이뤄왔고, 최근에 표준화가 완료단계에 있는 Wi-Fi 7 표준은 30 Gbps를 넘는 Throughput을 지원한다. Wi-Fi 7 표준이 Legacy Wi-Fi 표준에 비해서 극단적으로 높은 Throughput을 지원할 수 있는 이유 중 하나는, Wi-Fi 7의 넓은 Operating BW이다. 종래 Wi-Fi 단말이 20 MHz 대역을 Operating BW로 사용하는 반면, Wi-Fi 7은 최대 320 MHz 대역에 달하는 Operating BW를 갖고 동작한다. 이는, Wi-Fi 표준이 지원하는 최대 동작 대역폭(Operating BW) 확장만으로 달성한 최대 Throughput 증대 효과가 16배에 달한다는 것을 의미한다. 하지만, Operating BW가 확장됨에 따라 증대된 Wi-Fi 표준의 최대 Throughput은, 명목상의 수치일 뿐 실제 Wi-Fi 단말의 성능 향상으로 이어지기 어려운 측면이 있다. In this context, it is necessary to analyze the channel accessibility issue of Wi-Fi terminals performing channel access on each link. The Wi-Fi standard has achieved significant throughput performance improvements over generations, and the Wi-Fi 7 standard, which is recently nearing standardization, supports throughput exceeding 30 Gbps. One of the reasons why the Wi-Fi 7 standard can support extremely high throughput compared to legacy Wi-Fi standards is the wide operating BW of Wi-Fi 7. While conventional Wi-Fi terminals use a 20 MHz band as their operating BW, Wi-Fi 7 operates with an operating BW of up to 320 MHz. This means that the maximum throughput increase effect achieved by simply expanding the maximum operating BW supported by the Wi-Fi standard is up to 16 times. However, the maximum throughput of the Wi-Fi standard increased as the operating BW is expanded is only a nominal value, and it is difficult for it to actually lead to improved performance of Wi-Fi terminals.

다시 말해서, Wi-Fi 단말/표준의 발전을 통해 지원가능한 최대 Operating BW가 지속적으로 확장되고 있음에도 불구하고, Wi-Fi 단말의 실제 성능에의 영향은 상대적으로 작다. 이는, Wi-Fi 단말이 채널 접속을 수행하는 시점에, 최대 Operating BW에 포함되는 광대역이 모두 Idle로 확인될 확률이 낮다는 점과, Wi-Fi 단말이 채널 접속을 수행하는 방법이 지나치게 높은 Primary 20 MHz channel 종속성을 갖는다는 것에 있다. 이 중, Operating BW에 포함되는 넓은 대역이 모두 Idle로 확인되는 상태일 확률이 낮다는 문제는, Wi-Fi 단말이 동작하는 주파수 대역이 비면허대역이기 때문에 갖는 태생적인 문제일 수 있다. 즉, 비면허 대역에서 작동하는 다른 기기에 의해 medium이 점유되는 것은 자연스러운 것이고, 해당 문제를 개선함으로써 Wi-Fi 단말의 채널 접속 확률을 높이는 것은 불가능하다. 하지만, 지나치게 높은 Primary 20 MHz channel 종속성 문제는, 이종 기기와의 조화로운 동작을 위해 유지되던 Wi-Fi의 특징이 아니라, 종래 Wi-Fi에서부터 전통적으로 사용하던 채널 접속 기법을 유지하는 과정에서 계승되어온 특징이라 할 수 있다. 보다 자세히 설명하면, Wi-Fi 표준은 Operating BW가 20 MHz 일 때에 사용하던 채널 접속 기법을 확장하여, 40 MHz channel에 대한 채널 접근을 수행하도록 설계되었다. 보다 구체적으로, Wi-Fi 표준에서 정의된 방법에 따라 40 MHz channel에 접근하는 방법은, Primary 20 MHz channel에서 백오프 절차를 완료한 시점에, Secondary 20 MHz channel이 지난 PIFS(Priority Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime(9 us))동안 IDLE로 확인되었다면 40 MHz 대역(Primary 20 MHz와 Secondary 20 MHz 대역을 포함한 40 MHz 대역)에 대한 접근을 수행한다. 이와 유사하게, Wi-Fi 표준에서 정의된 방법에 따라 80 MHz channel에 접근하는 방법은, Primary 20 MHz channel에서 백오프 절차를 완료한 시점에, Secondary 20 MHz channel 및 Secondary 40 MHz channel이 지난 PIFS(Priority Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime(9 us))동안 IDLE로 확인되었다면 80 MHz 대역(Primary 20 MHz와 Secondary 20 MHz와 Secondary 40 MHz 대역을 포함한 80 MHz 대역)에 대한 접근을 수행한다. 이처럼, Primary 20 MHz channel에서 백오프 절차를 완료했을 때, PIFS 동안 IDLE로 확인된 subchannel들에 대해 접근하는 Wi-Fi의 Wide Band Operation 방법은 Wi-Fi 7에서 정의된 320 MHz BW에 접근할 때에도 동일한 방식으로 적용된다. 이와 같은 방법이 반복적으로 사용되어온 이유는, 1개의 Channel(프라이머리 채널)에서만 백오프를 수행하고, 다른 subchannel들에 대한 접근 가능 여부를 최소한의 시간 구간 동안에 판단함으로써, 보다 에너지 효율적이고 Hardware 구현 부담이 적은 방법으로 Wide bandwidth access가 가능했기 때문이다. In other words, although the maximum supportable Operating BW is continuously expanding through the development of Wi-Fi terminals/standards, the impact on the actual performance of Wi-Fi terminals is relatively small. This is because, when a Wi-Fi terminal performs channel access, the probability that the entire wide band included in the maximum Operating BW will be identified as Idle is low, and the method by which a Wi-Fi terminal performs channel access has an excessively high Primary 20 MHz channel dependency. Among these, the problem that the probability that the entire wide band included in the Operating BW will be identified as Idle may be an inherent problem because the frequency band in which the Wi-Fi terminal operates is an unlicensed band. In other words, it is natural for the medium to be occupied by other devices operating in the unlicensed band, and it is impossible to increase the channel access probability of the Wi-Fi terminal by improving this problem. However, the problem of excessively high Primary 20 MHz channel dependency is not a feature of Wi-Fi that has been maintained for harmonious operation with heterogeneous devices, but a feature that has been inherited in the process of maintaining the channel access technique traditionally used from existing Wi-Fi. To explain in more detail, the Wi-Fi standard was designed to perform channel access to a 40 MHz channel by extending the channel access technique used when the operating BW is 20 MHz. More specifically, the method of accessing the 40 MHz channel according to the method defined in the Wi-Fi standard performs access to the 40 MHz band (the 40 MHz band including the Primary 20 MHz and Secondary 20 MHz bands) if the Secondary 20 MHz channel is confirmed to be IDLE for the last PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime (9 us)) when the backoff procedure is completed in the Primary 20 MHz channel. Similarly, a method for accessing an 80 MHz channel according to a method defined in the Wi-Fi standard is to perform access to the 80 MHz band (80 MHz band including the Primary 20 MHz, Secondary 20 MHz, and Secondary 40 MHz bands) if the Secondary 20 MHz channel and the Secondary 40 MHz channel have been identified as IDLE for the last PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space, aSIFSTime (16 us) + aSlotTime (9 us)) when the backoff procedure is completed in the Primary 20 MHz channel. In this way, the Wi-Fi Wide Band Operation method for accessing subchannels identified as IDLE during the PIFS when the backoff procedure is completed in the Primary 20 MHz channel is applied in the same manner when accessing 320 MHz BW defined in Wi-Fi 7. The reason why this method has been repeatedly used is because it enables wide bandwidth access in a more energy-efficient and less hardware-implementation manner by performing backoff on only one Channel (primary channel) and determining whether other subchannels are accessible within a minimum time interval.

다만, 이와 같은 프라이머리 채널을 이용한 채널 접속 방법은, Wi-Fi 단말이 백오프 절차를 수행하는 Primary 20 MHz channel이 비지로 확인될 때, Primary 20 MHz channel을 제외한 모든 서브 채널이 가용한 상태(다른 장치에 의해 점유되지 않은 상태)라 할지라도 상기 Wi-Fi 단말의 백오프 절차를 완료될 수 없고, 이에 따라 넓은 Idle 서브 채널들에 대한 채널 접속 역시 불가능하다는 큰 단점을 갖는다.However, this method of channel access using the primary channel has a major drawback in that when the Primary 20 MHz channel on which the Wi-Fi terminal performs the backoff procedure is determined to be busy, even if all sub-channels except the Primary 20 MHz channel are available (not occupied by other devices), the backoff procedure of the Wi-Fi terminal cannot be completed, and thus channel access to wide Idle sub-channels is also impossible.

상술한 바와 같이, 광대역 동작을 지원하는 Wi-Fi 단말의 채널 접속이 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널의 CCA 결과에 따라 제한되는 문제는, UHR에서 새로 발생한 문제는 아니다. 하지만, 320 MHz에 달하는 초광대역 동작을 지원하는 Wi-Fi 7을 계승하는 UHR의 경우, 종래의 WiFi 표준들에 비해 상술한 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에 대한 종속성 문제로 인해 받게 될 손실이 더욱 클 수 있다. 더욱이, UHR 이후의 차세대 표준들도 상술한 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에 대한 종속성으로 인해 성능 저하 문제를 겪을 수 있으며, 따라서 상술한 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널과 관련한 채널 접속 문제를 해결할 필요는 분명하다 하겠다.As described above, the problem of channel access of a Wi-Fi terminal supporting wideband operation being limited depending on the CCA result of the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is not a new problem in UHR. However, in the case of UHR, which succeeds Wi-Fi 7 supporting an ultra-wideband operation up to 320 MHz, the loss to be suffered may be greater than that of the existing WiFi standards due to the dependency on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel described above. Furthermore, the next-generation standards after UHR may also experience performance degradation issues due to the dependency on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel described above, and therefore it is clear that there is a need to solve the channel access problem related to the Primary 20 MHz subchannel described above.

이러한 이유로, 본 발명은 광대역 동작을 지원하는 단말이, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에 대한 CCA 결과가 BUSY일 때, 상기 BUSY로 판별된 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널을 이용해 통신을 수행하는 방법과 절차를 제공한다.For this reason, the present invention provides a method and procedure for a terminal supporting wideband operation to perform communication using a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel determined to be BUSY when the CCA result for the primary 20 MHz subchannel is BUSY.

예를 들면, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해서 PPDU의 프리앰블이 수신되고, 수신된 프리앰블에 기초하여 CCA를 수행한 결과, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 비지라고 판단된 경우, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널(non-Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널)들 중 하나를 선택하여 채널 접속 절차가 수행될 수 있다. Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널 외에 채널 접속 절차가 수행되는 다른 서브 채널은 Primary 20 MHz와 동일하거나 다른 동작 채널에 포함될 수 있다.For example, if a preamble of a PPDU is received through a primary 20 MHz subchannel and the primary 20 MHz subchannel is determined to be busy as a result of performing CCA based on the received preamble, a channel access procedure may be performed by selecting one of the non-primary 20 MHz subchannels other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel. In addition to the primary 20 MHz subchannel, the other subchannel on which the channel access procedure is performed may be included in an operating channel that is the same as or different from the primary 20 MHz.

<프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)을 활용하지 않는 채널 접속><Access to channels that do not utilize the primary channel>

전술한 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널(이하 P20 채널)에 대한 종속성 문제를 해결하는 가장 간단한 방법으로, 상기 P20 채널을 제외한 다른 서브 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널(또는 부 채널))을 이용해(통해) 채널 접속을 수행하는 방법이 고려될 수 있다. 이때, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 이용해(통해) 채널 접속을 수행한다는 의미는 넌 프라이머리 채널의 Idle/busy 여부를 기준으로 백오프 절차를 수행한다는 것을 의미한다. 이때, 단말이 백오프 절차를 수행할 수 있는 넌 프라이머리 채널은 하나 혹은 하나 이상 존재할 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 P20 채널 혹은 복수 개의 넌 프라이머리 채널(예를 들면, 제1 non-primary 채널 혹은 제2 non-primary 채널 등)들을 통해 백오프 절차를 수행하는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, 단말이 백오프 절차를 수행할 수 있는 채널들(즉 P20, 제1 넌 프라이머리 채널, 제2 넌 프라이머리 채널, 제3 넌 프라이머리 채널 등)은 각각 서로 다른 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 20 MHz 서브 채널들 일 수 있다. 즉, 제1 넌 프라이머리 채널은 P20 채널이 포함된 80 MHz subblock이 아닌 다른 80 MHz subblock에 위치해야 하는 것일 수 있다. 즉, 단말은, P20을 제외한 다른 백오프 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널)을 선택할 때, P20 서브 채널이 포함되지 않은 80 MHz subblock(즉 Primary 80 MHz subblock을 제외한 subblock)의 20 MHz 서브 채널 중에서 다른 백오프 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널)을 선택해야 한다. 이 때, 단말이 선택한 각 다른 백오프 채널들은 서로 다른 80MHz subblock에 위치한 것이어야 할 수 있다. 즉, 제1 넌 프라이머리 채널은 제2 넌 프라이머리 채널과 다른 80 MHz subblock에 위치한 서브 채널이어야 할 수 있다. 이 때 전술한 80 MHz subblock과 관련한 넌 프라이머리 채널의 선택 제한은, BSS의 동작 채널이 5 GHz 혹은 6 GHz band에 포함될 때에만 적용되는 것일 수 있다.As the simplest method for resolving the dependency problem on the aforementioned Primary 20 MHz sub-channel (hereinafter referred to as the P20 channel), a method of performing channel access using (through) a sub-channel (a non-primary channel (or sub-channel)) other than the P20 channel may be considered. At this time, performing channel access using (through) a non-primary channel means performing a backoff procedure based on whether the non-primary channel is idle/busy. At this time, there may be one or more non-primary channels on which the terminal can perform the backoff procedure. That is, the terminal can perform the backoff procedure through the P20 channel or multiple non-primary channels (e.g., the first non-primary channel or the second non-primary channel, etc.). At this time, the channels on which the terminal can perform the backoff procedure (i.e., the P20, the first non-primary channel, the second non-primary channel, the third non-primary channel, etc.) may be 20 MHz sub-channels included in different 80 MHz subblocks, respectively. That is, the first non-primary channel may be located in an 80 MHz subblock other than the 80 MHz subblock including the P20 channel. That is, when the terminal selects a backoff channel (non-primary channel) other than P20, the terminal must select another backoff channel (non-primary channel) from among the 20 MHz subchannels of the 80 MHz subblock (i.e., the subblock excluding the primary 80 MHz subblock) that does not include the P20 subchannel. At this time, each of the different backoff channels selected by the terminal may be located in a different 80 MHz subblock. That is, the first non-primary channel may be a subchannel located in a different 80 MHz subblock from the second non-primary channel. At this time, the selection restriction of the non-primary channel with respect to the aforementioned 80 MHz subblock may be applied only when the operating channel of the BSS is included in the 5 GHz or 6 GHz band.

이 때, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 이용한 채널 접속은 P20 채널이 BUSY로 판별되는 시간구간에만 한정적으로 수행되는 것일 수 있다. 즉, P20 채널이 Physical CCA(ED, Energy detection) 및 PD, Virtual CCA 결과 Busy로 판단되는 경우에 한해서 넌 프라이머리 채널을 이용한 채널 접속(이하 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속)가 수행될 수 있다. 또한, 넌 프라이머리 채널 access는, P20 채널이 BUSY이고 P20 채널에서 확인된 프레임이 자신을 목적장치로 하는 프레임이 아닌 STA(AP STA, non-AP STA)에게만 한정적으로 허용되는 것일 수 있다. 따라서, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 절차는, P20 채널에서 수신된 PPDU의 프리앰블을 성공적으로 디텍션하거나 MPDU를 성공적으로 디코딩했을 때에만 제한적으로 허용되는 것일 수 있다. 따라서, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 절차는, P20 채널에서 수신된 프레임을 성공적으로 수신한 STA에 대해서 제한적으로 허용되는 것일 수 있다. At this time, channel access using a non-primary channel may be performed only during a time period in which the P20 channel is determined to be BUSY. That is, channel access using a non-primary channel (hereinafter, referred to as non-primary channel access) may be performed only when the P20 channel is determined to be Busy as a result of Physical CCA (ED, Energy detection) and PD, Virtual CCA. In addition, non-primary channel access may be permitted only to STAs (AP STAs, non-AP STAs) in which the P20 channel is BUSY and the frame identified on the P20 channel is not a frame destined for itself. Accordingly, the non-primary channel access procedure may be permitted only when the preamble of a PPDU received on the P20 channel is successfully detected or the MPDU is successfully decoded. Accordingly, the non-primary channel access procedure may be permitted only when the STA successfully receives the frame received on the P20 channel.

즉, MLD(AP MLD 또는 non-AP MLD)가 하나의 P20과 하나 이상의 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 동작하는 경우, MLD를 구성하는 STA(AP 또는 non-AP)들 중 하나의 STA은 P20 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 이 경우, STA은 P20 채널에서 PPDU의 프리앰블을 수신할 수 있으며, 프리앰블에 기초하여 CCA를 수행할 수 있다. CCA 결과 P20 채널이 비지라고 판단되고, P20 채널에서 수신된 PPDU가 중첩된 BSS(overlapping BSS, OBSS)로부터 전송된 경우, 해당 STA은 하나 이상의 넌 프라이머리 채널 중 하나의 넌 프라이머리 채널을 선택하여 선택된 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 채널 접속 절차가 수행되는 넌 프라이머리 채널의 상태는 유휴 상태일 수 있다.That is, when an MLD (AP MLD or non-AP MLD) operates on one P20 and one or more non-primary channels, one STA among the STAs (AP or non-AP) constituting the MLD can perform a channel access procedure on the P20 channel. In this case, the STA can receive a preamble of a PPDU on the P20 channel and perform a CCA based on the preamble. If the P20 channel is determined to be busy as a result of the CCA and the PPDU received on the P20 channel is transmitted from an overlapping BSS (OBSS), the STA can select one non-primary channel among one or more non-primary channels and perform a channel access procedure through the selected non-primary channel. The state of the non-primary channel on which the channel access procedure is performed may be an idle state.

즉, P20 채널을 제외한 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 백오프 수행 및 채널 접속 절차는 P20 채널에서 확인되는 PPDU가 OBSS의 PPDU일 때로 제한될 수 있다. 따라서, 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 백오프 수행 및 채널 접속 절차는 P20 채널에서 확인된 PPDU가 PPDU를 수신한 장치를 목적 장치로 하지 않는 PPDU일 때에만 제한적으로 허용될 수 있다.That is, backoff performance and channel access procedures using subchannels other than the P20 channel may be restricted to cases where the PPDU identified in the P20 channel is a PPDU of the OBSS. Accordingly, backoff performance and channel access procedures using other subchannels may be restricted to cases where the PPDU identified in the P20 channel is a PPDU whose destination device is not the device that received the PPDU.

이를 위해, P20 채널을 제외한 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 백오프 수행 및 채널 접속 진행 절차는 P20 채널에서 확인된 PPDU의 목적 장치 혹은 OBSS 여부를 확인하기 위해, 상기 PPDU의 프리앰블을 디코딩하여 HE-SIG 및/또는 U-SIG의 BSS Color를 확인하거나, EHT-SIG 및/또는 UHR-SIG의 STA-ID를 확인하거나, 상기 PPDU의 첫번째 MAC frame을 디코딩하여 목적장치를 확인한 후 개시될 수 있다. 즉, STA은 수신된 PPDU가 OBSS로부터 전송되었는지 여부를 판단하기 위해서 PPDU의 프리앰블에 포함된 SIG 필드(예를 들면, HE-SIG(HE-SIG-A 또는 HE-SIG-B), 또는 U-SIG)에 포함된 BSS Color를 확인하거나, SIG 필드(예를 들면, HE-SIG-B, EHT-SIG 또는 UHR-SIG)에 포함된 스테이션 식별자(STA-ID)를 확인할 수 있다. 또는, STA은 PPDU의 첫 번째 MAC frame을 디코딩하여 목적 장치를 확인할 수 있다.To this end, the backoff performing and channel access proceeding procedure using a subchannel other than the P20 channel can be initiated after confirming whether the PPDU identified on the P20 channel is the destination device or OBSS by decoding the preamble of the PPDU to confirm the BSS Color of the HE-SIG and/or U-SIG, confirming the STA-ID of the EHT-SIG and/or UHR-SIG, or decoding the first MAC frame of the PPDU to confirm the destination device. That is, the STA can confirm the BSS Color included in the SIG field (e.g., HE-SIG (HE-SIG-A or HE-SIG-B), or U-SIG) included in the preamble of the PPDU, or confirm the station identifier (STA-ID) included in the SIG field (e.g., HE-SIG-B, EHT-SIG, or UHR-SIG)) to determine whether the received PPDU was transmitted from the OBSS. Alternatively, the STA can identify the destination device by decoding the first MAC frame of the PPDU.

이 때, 특정 PPDU의 송/수신자 및 PPDU에 포함된 프레임의 송/수신자 MAC 주소가 자신이 Association한 AP인 경우 상기 특정 PPDU는 OBSS PPDU가 아닌 PPDU(Intra-BSS PPDU)로 구분될 수 있다. 이 때, P20 채널을 제외한 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 백오프 절차는 DIFS 동안 상기 다른 서브 채널이 IDLE 한지 여부를 확인한 후 개시되어야 할 수도 있다. 이 때, 확인된 BSS Color가 자신의 BSS Color가 아닌 경우, 목적 장치를 특정하기 위해 수행되는 STA-ID 및 MAC frame 디코딩이 생략될 수 있다. 이 때, 다른 서브 채널이 IDLE한지 여부를 확인하는 방법은, 기 설정된 시간동안 수행한 PHY CCA(Energy detection 및/또는 Packet detection)를 수행함으로써 확인하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, 기 설정된 시간은, PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space) 혹은 DIFS (Distributed Inter Frame Space) 혹은 MediumSync time일 수 있다. 이 때 MediumSync time은 다른 이름을 갖는 시간 간격일 수 있으며, 넌 프라이머리 채널(또는 부 채널)에서 백오프 절차를 수행할 목적을 갖는 장치가 medium의 IDLE/BUSY 여부를 판단하기 위해 CCA를 수행해야 하는 시간을 의미한다. MediumSync time은 수 ms의 길이를 갖을 수 있고, MaxPPDU length(5.484 ms)보다는 짧다. MediumSync time을 적용하여 CCA를 수행하는 단말은 CCA를 수행하는 도중 수신된 PPDU(frame)에 포함된 정보를 이용해 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. 이 때, 단말이 S20 채널(Primary 20 MHz channel이 아닌 다른 서브 채널)에서 수신한 PPDU(frame)을 기초로 설정하는 NAV는 종래 Wi-Fi에서 사용되던 두 개의 NAV(Basic NAV, Intra-BSS NAV)가 아닌 다른 NAV일 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 다른 NAV는 S20을 통해 수신된 frame(PPDU)에 의해서 설정되는 timer이며, S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속을 수행할 때 S20 채널의 Virtual CCA를 위해 사용되는 NAV이다. 즉, S20 채널에서 수신된 frame(PPDU)에 의해 상기 다른 NAV가 설정되었고, 상기 다른 NAV의 값이 0이 아니라 할지라도 단말은 P20 채널에서 수행하는 CCA의 결과를 IDLE로 판단할 수 있다. 즉, 상기 다른 NAV는 P20 채널이 아닌 S20 채널에 대한 NAV이다. 이때, 상기 다른 NAV는 secondary NAV로 불리는 것이 가능하다. At this time, if the MAC addresses of the sender/receiver of a specific PPDU and the sender/receiver of the frame included in the PPDU are the APs with which it is associated, the specific PPDU can be distinguished as a PPDU (Intra-BSS PPDU) rather than an OBSS PPDU. At this time, a backoff procedure using a subchannel other than the P20 channel may need to be initiated after confirming whether the other subchannel is IDLE during DIFS. At this time, if the confirmed BSS Color is not its own BSS Color, STA-ID and MAC frame decoding performed to specify the target device may be omitted. At this time, a method of confirming whether the other subchannel is IDLE may be to confirm by performing PHY CCA (Energy detection and/or Packet detection) performed for a preset time period. At this time, the preset time may be PIFS (Priority Inter Frame Space) or DIFS (Distributed Inter Frame Space) or MediumSync time. At this time, MediumSync time can be a time interval with a different name, and means the time that a device that intends to perform a backoff procedure on a non-primary channel (or a sub-channel) must perform CCA to determine whether the medium is IDLE/BUSY. MediumSync time can be several ms long and is shorter than MaxPPDU length (5.484 ms). A terminal that performs CCA by applying MediumSync time can set NAV using information included in PPDU (frame) received while performing CCA. At this time, the NAV set by the terminal based on the PPDU (frame) received on the S20 channel (a sub-channel other than the primary 20 MHz channel) can be a NAV other than the two NAVs (Basic NAV, Intra-BSS NAV) used in conventional Wi-Fi. At this time, the other NAV is a timer set by a frame (PPDU) received through S20, and is a NAV used for Virtual CCA of the S20 channel when performing channel access through the S20 channel. That is, the other NAV is set by a frame (PPDU) received on the S20 channel, and even if the value of the other NAV is not 0, the terminal can determine the result of the CCA performed on the P20 channel as IDLE. That is, the other NAV is a NAV for the S20 channel, not the P20 channel. At this time, the other NAV can be called a secondary NAV.

따라서, S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 단말이 AP STA인 경우, AP는 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 점유하며 수신된 frame(PPDU)를 기초로 설정하는 basic NAV와, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 점유하지 않고 수신된 (즉, S20 채널을 통해 수신된) frame(PPDU)를 기초로 설정하는 secondary NAV 모두를 관리해야 할 수 있다. 즉, AP는 P20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행할 때에는 basic NAV를 고려하여 백오프 절차를 수행하고, S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행할 때에는 secondary NAV를 고려하여 백오프 절차를 수행해야 한다. 이 때, 상기 secondary NAV는, P20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하던 단말이 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하기로 결정했을 때, Mediumsync time 값으로 초기화 되는 timer일 수 있다. 즉, AP는 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하기로 결정했을 때, S20 채널에 대한 CCA를 시작함과 동시에 secondary NAV를 Mediumsync time 값으로 초기화해야 할 수 있다.Accordingly, if the terminal performing channel access via the S20 channel is an AP STA, the AP may need to manage both the basic NAV, which is set based on the received frame (PPDU) while occupying the primary 20 MHz subchannel, and the secondary NAV, which is set based on the received frame (PPDU) (i.e., received via the S20 channel) without occupying the primary 20 MHz subchannel. That is, the AP must perform a backoff procedure considering the basic NAV when performing channel access via the P20 channel, and must perform a backoff procedure considering the secondary NAV when performing channel access via the S20 channel. At this time, the secondary NAV may be a timer that is initialized to the Mediumsync time value when the terminal performing channel access via the P20 channel decides to perform channel access via the S20 channel. That is, when the AP decides to perform channel access via the S20 channel, it may need to initialize the secondary NAV to the Mediumsync time value at the same time as starting CCA for the S20 channel.

또한, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 frame exchange를 수행한 STA는, 다른 서브 채널을 통해 수행한 frame exchange가 종료된 후 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 개시할 때에, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 다른 BSS 및 다른 장치에 의해서 점유된 상태인지 여부를 확인하기 위한 절차를 수행해야 할 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 P20 채널이 다른 BSS 및 다른 장치에 이해 점유된 상태인지 여부를 확인하는 방법은 MediumSync time 동안 P20 채널에 대한 CCA를 수행하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 MediumSync timer 동안 CCA를 수행하는 도중에 유효한 PPDU(frame)을 수신하였다면, 상기 STA는 P20 채널에 대한 NAV를 상기 수신된 PPDU(frame)을 통해 획득된 정보를 기초로 설정할 수 있다. 이 경우, STA는 설정된 NAV가 해제되었을 때(NAV timer가 0이 되었을 때) Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에서 수행하는 채널 접속 절차를 재개할 수 있다. In addition, an STA that performs frame exchange after performing channel access through a subchannel other than the Primary 20 MHz subchannel may need to perform a procedure to check whether the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is occupied by another BSS and another device when initiating a channel access procedure on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel after the frame exchange performed through the other subchannel is terminated. At this time, a method for the STA to check whether the P20 channel is occupied by another BSS and another device may be to perform CCA for the P20 channel during the MediumSync time. At this time, if the STA receives a valid PPDU (frame) while performing the CCA during the MediumSync timer, the STA may set the NAV for the P20 channel based on the information acquired through the received PPDU (frame). In this case, the STA may resume the channel access procedure performed on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel when the set NAV is released (when the NAV timer becomes 0).

이 때, 상기 P20 채널에서 확인된 PPDU의 프리앰블을 디코딩하거나 MAC frame을 디코딩하기 위해 지연된 시간만큼, 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 백오프 수행 절차를 보상할 수 있다. 일 실시예로, P20 채널에서 확인된 PPDU의 목적 장치(혹은 BSS Color)를 확인하기 위해 3-slot time 만큼 (예: 27 us)가 소모된 경우, P20 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 채널 접속에 활용하는 백오프 카운터를 3만큼 한꺼번에 줄이는 동작이 허용될 수 있다. 혹은, P20 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널을 이용한 채널 접속은 종래 장치들이 활용하지 않는 추가 기능이기 때문에, 상기 백오프 카운터를 한꺼번에 줄이는 동작을 허용하지 않고, 상기 P20 채널에서 확인된 PPDU의 목적장치를 확인한 후 순차적으로 1씩 차감하도록 할 수 있다. 즉, P20에서 확인된 PPDU의 목적장치를 확인하는 과정에서 지연된 백오프 절차에 대한 보상이 별도로 수행되지 않을 수 있다.At this time, the backoff procedure using another subchannel can be compensated for the delayed time for decoding the preamble of the PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel or for decoding the MAC frame. In one embodiment, if 3-slot time (e.g., 27 us) is consumed to confirm the destination device (or BSS Color) of the PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel, an operation of decreasing the backoff counter used for channel access using a subchannel other than the P20 channel by 3 at once can be permitted. Alternatively, since channel access using a subchannel other than the P20 channel is an additional function that is not utilized by conventional devices, the operation of decreasing the backoff counter all at once can be prohibited, and the backoff counter can be sequentially decremented by 1 after confirming the destination device of the PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel. In other words, compensation for the delayed backoff procedure may not be performed separately in the process of confirming the destination device of the PPDU confirmed on the P20.

후술하는 본 발명의 일 실시예들은 상술한 P20 채널에서 수신되는 PPDU의 목적 장치를 확인하는 과정이 설명의 편의를 위해 생략되었을 수 있다. 따라서, 따로 설명되지 않더라도 P20 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널을 이용해 수행하는 채널 접속 절차가, 상술한 P20 채널에서 수신되는 PPDU의 목적 장치를 확인하는 과정을 포함하는 것으로 이해되어야 할 수 있다.In the embodiments of the present invention described below, the process of identifying the destination device of a PPDU received on the above-described P20 channel may be omitted for convenience of explanation. Accordingly, even if not described separately, it should be understood that the channel access procedure performed using a subchannel other than the P20 channel includes the process of identifying the destination device of a PPDU received on the above-described P20 channel.

도 12는 프라이머리 채널의 상태가 비지인 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통한 채널 접속 절차의 일 예를 나타낸다.Figure 12 shows an example of a channel access procedure through a non-primary channel when the state of the primary channel is busy.

도 12를 참조하면, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널의 CCA결과 비지로 판단되면, 단말은 Primary 20MHz 서브 채널이 아닌 다른 non-Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 이용하여 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 12, if the CCA result of the primary 20 MHz subchannel is determined to be busy, the terminal can perform channel access using a non-primary 20 MHz subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel.

구체적으로, MLD를 구성하는 STA(AP STA, non-AP STA)은 P20 채널이 BUSY로 판별될 때(예를 들면, 수신된 PPDU의 프리앰블에 기초한 CCA 결과 P20 채널이 비지로 판단된 경우), P20 채널이 아닌 다른 채널을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, 채널 접속을 수행하는 동작은 상기 다른 채널의 CCA 결과에 따라 백오프를 수행하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 백오프 동작은, 상기 다른 채널에서 매 slot에 수행한 CCA의 결과가 IDLE일 때 백오프 카운터를 1씩 줄이는 동작일 수 있다. 또한, 상기 백오프 동작은, 상기 다른 채널에서 매 slot에 수행한 CCA 결과가 BUSY일 때에는 백오프 카운터를 줄이지 않고 유지하는 동작일 수 있다. Specifically, an STA (AP STA, non-AP STA) configuring an MLD may perform channel access using a channel other than the P20 channel when the P20 channel is determined to be BUSY (for example, when the P20 channel is determined to be busy based on a CCA result based on a preamble of a received PPDU). At this time, the operation of performing the channel access may be performing a backoff according to the CCA result of the other channel. At this time, the backoff operation may be an operation of decreasing a backoff counter by 1 when the result of CCA performed in each slot on the other channel is IDLE. In addition, the backoff operation may be an operation of maintaining the backoff counter without decreasing it when the result of CCA performed in each slot on the other channel is BUSY.

상술한 P20 채널이 아닌 다른 20 MHz 서브 채널을 이용한 채널 접속에 활용될 수 있는 S20 채널은 특정 S20 채널로 특정되지 않고 여러 개가 활용될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 도 12의 일 실시예와 같이, STA가 320 MHz 동작을 수행하는 것을 가정한다면, 도 12에서 도시된 것과 같이 Secondary 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 S20_1 채널을 이용한 채널 접속뿐만 아니라, Secondary 160 MHz subblock에 포함된 S20_2, S20_3을 통한 채널 접속 역시 가능할 수 있다. 이 때, 각 STA가 채널 접속이 활용하는 S20 채널의 개수는 각 STA의 capability에 따라 결정되거나, 특정 S20 채널 1개 혹은 2개 등으로 제한될 수 있다. 다만, STA는 각 80 MHz subblock당 1개의 non-primary 서브 채널에서만 백오프를 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 백오프를 수행하는 각 non-primary 서브 채널은, AP에 의해 결정된 서브 채널이고, 따라서 AP가 전송하는 관리 프레임(Management frame)을 통해 지시된다. 즉, AP는 자신이 전송하는 관리 프레임(예를 들어 Beacon, Probe Response, Association Response frame 등)을 통해 프라이머리 채널(P20)이 Busy일 때 백오프가 수행될 수 있는 다른 서브 채널(S20)의 정보를 지시할 수 있고, 상기 다른 서브 채널은 Primary 80 MHz subblock이 아닌 다른 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 서브 채널 들 중 하나이다.The S20 channel that can be utilized for channel access using a 20 MHz sub-channel other than the above-described P20 channel is not limited to a specific S20 channel, but multiple S20 channels can be utilized. For example, assuming that an STA performs a 320 MHz operation as in one embodiment of FIG. 12, channel access may be possible not only through the S20_1 channel included in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock as illustrated in FIG. 12, but also through S20_2 and S20_3 included in the Secondary 160 MHz subblock. In this case, the number of S20 channels utilized for channel access by each STA may be determined according to the capability of each STA, or may be limited to one or two specific S20 channels. However, the STA may perform backoff on only one non-primary sub-channel per each 80 MHz subblock. At this time, each non-primary subchannel on which the STA performs backoff is a subchannel determined by the AP, and is therefore indicated through a management frame transmitted by the AP. That is, the AP can indicate information on another subchannel (S20) on which backoff can be performed when the primary channel (P20) is busy through a management frame transmitted by the AP (e.g., Beacon, Probe Response, Association Response frame, etc.), and the other subchannel is one of the subchannels included in an 80 MHz subblock other than the Primary 80 MHz subblock.

도 12 (a)를 참조하면, P20 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행할 때 활용하는 백오프 카운터와 S20 채널에서 채널 엑세스를 수행할 때 활용하는 백오프 카운터는 별개로 존재 및 관리될 수 있다. 이 경우, 각 채널이 활용하는 백오프 카운터는, 각 채널에서 수행한 채널 접속의 결과로 전송을 수행한 경우(백오프를 완료한 경우)에 한해 새로운 값으로 백오프 카운터로 변경될 수 있다. 이 때 상기 새로운 값으로 변경된다는 것은, 전송이 성공한 경우 CW_min을 이용해 뽑은 새로운 백오프 카운터로 변경하거나, 전송이 실패한 경우 CW x 2를 이용해 뽑은 새로운 백오프 카운터로 변경하는 것을 의미한다. 즉, CCA 결과로 백오프 카운터를 줄이는 동작을 의미하지 않는다. 이 때, 상술한 바와 같이, 채널 접속을 수행하는 S20 채널이 다수인 경우, 상기 다수의 S20 채널은 각각의 백오프 카운터를 갖을 수 있다. 이 때, 각 S20 채널에 대한 백오프 카운터는 Access Category 별로 존재하는 것일 수 있다. 즉, 단말은 백오프를 수행할 수 있는 각 S20 채널에 대해 AC 별로 백오프 카운터를 따로 관리해야 할 수 있다. 즉, S20 채널을 통해 백오프 절차를 수행하는 단말은, 내부적으로 4개의 AC를 이용해 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. Referring to Fig. 12 (a), a backoff counter utilized when performing channel access on a P20 channel and a backoff counter utilized when performing channel access on an S20 channel may exist and be managed separately. In this case, the backoff counter utilized by each channel may be changed to a new value of the backoff counter only when transmission is performed as a result of the channel access performed on each channel (when backoff is completed). At this time, changing to the new value means changing to a new backoff counter extracted using CW_min if transmission is successful, or changing to a new backoff counter extracted using CW x 2 if transmission fails. In other words, it does not mean an operation of reducing the backoff counter as a CCA result. At this time, as described above, if there are multiple S20 channels performing channel access, each of the multiple S20 channels may have its own backoff counter. At this time, the backoff counter for each S20 channel may exist by Access Category. That is, the terminal may need to separately manage a backoff counter for each AC for each S20 channel on which it can perform backoff. That is, a terminal performing a backoff procedure through an S20 channel can perform a channel access procedure internally using four ACs.

도 12 (b)를 참조하면, P20을 비롯해 채널 접속을 수행하는 모든 S20 채널은 공통의 백오프 카운터를 활용할 수 있다. 도 12 (b)에 도시된 바와 같이, P20 채널에서 수행된 채널 접속 동장의 결과로, 백오프 카운터가 5부터 3까지 감소되었고, 이후 P20 채널에 BUSY로 변경되었다. 본 발명에서 제안하는 일 실시예에 따르면 상기 P20 채널이 BUSY한 경우, S20 채널이 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있고, 도 13(b)와 같이 S20_1에서 수행한 CCA 결과에 따라 P20이 3까지 줄였던 백오프 카운터를 이어서 줄여 나갈 수 있다. 만약 채널 접속을 위해 백오프 카운터를 줄여 나가는 도중에 S20_1 또한 BUSY로 판별된다면, S20_2를 이용한 채널 접속이 시작되거나, 혹은 P20 내지 S20_1이 IDLE 로 판별될 때까지 상기 백오프 카운터를 그대로 유지할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 S20_2를 이용한 채널 접속이 속행되는 경우는 채널 접속에 활용한 S20 채널이 2개 이상인 일 실시예로 이해되고, 상기 P20 내지 S20_1이 IDLE로 판별될 때까지 백오프 카운터를 유지하는 경우는 채널 접속에 활용한 S20 채널이 1개인 일 실시예로 이해될 수 있다.Referring to Fig. 12 (b), all S20 channels performing channel access, including P20, can utilize a common backoff counter. As illustrated in Fig. 12 (b), as a result of the channel access operation performed on the P20 channel, the backoff counter is decreased from 5 to 3, and then the P20 channel is changed to BUSY. According to an embodiment proposed in the present invention, if the P20 channel is BUSY, the S20 channel can perform the channel access procedure, and as shown in Fig. 13 (b), the backoff counter, which P20 reduced to 3, can continue to be decreased according to the CCA result performed on S20_1. If S20_1 is also determined to be BUSY while decreasing the backoff counter for channel access, the backoff counter can be maintained as is until the channel access using S20_2 is started, or until P20 to S20_1 are determined to be IDLE. At this time, if the channel connection using the above S20_2 is continued, it can be understood as an embodiment in which there are two or more S20 channels used for the channel connection, and if the backoff counter is maintained until the above P20 to S20_1 are determined to be IDLE, it can be understood as an embodiment in which there is only one S20 channel used for the channel connection.

<넌 프라이머리 채널을 통한 전송의 제한><Restrictions on transmission through primary channels>

앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 하나의 프라이머리 채널과 하나 이상의 넌 프라이머리 채널들에서 동작하는 MLD(non-AP MLD 또는 AP MLD)를 구성하는 STA(non-AP STA 또는 AP)는 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 시도할 수 있다. 이때, STA이 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차의 수행을 위해서 CCA를 수행하는 결과, 프라이머리 채널이 유휴 상태면 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 하지만, 프라이머리 채널에서 수신된 PPDU의 프리앰블에 기초하여 수행된 CCA 결과, 프라이머리 채널이 비지로 판단된 경우, STA은 프라이머리 채널이 유휴로 변경되기 전까지 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 없다. 따라서, 이 경우, STA은 프라이머리 채널이 유휴로 변경될때까지 대기하지 않고, 하나 이상의 넌 프라이머리 채널 중 유휴 상태의 넌 프라이머리 채널 하나를 선택하여 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다.As described above, an STA (non-AP STA or AP) that constitutes an MLD (non-AP MLD or AP MLD) operating on one primary channel and one or more non-primary channels can attempt a channel access procedure on the primary channel. At this time, if the STA performs CCA to perform the channel access procedure on the primary channel and the primary channel is in an idle state, the STA can perform the channel access procedure on the primary channel. However, if the primary channel is determined to be busy as a result of the CCA performed based on the preamble of the PPDU received on the primary channel, the STA cannot perform the channel access procedure until the primary channel changes to idle. Therefore, in this case, the STA can select one non-primary channel in an idle state among one or more non-primary channels and perform the channel access procedure without waiting until the primary channel changes to idle.

이와 같이 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 넌 프라이머리 채널(S20 채널)을 이용하여 채널 접속 절차를 수행한 STA은 전송하는 PPDU의 길이에 제한을 받을 수 있다. 상기 PPDU 전송 길이 제한은 두 가지 측면에서 필요한 것일 수 있다. 이 때, S20 채널에서 백오프 절차를 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU의 길이는, P20 채널에서 확인된 PPDU(및/또는 frame)에 의해 인지된 PPDU의 종료시점보다 먼저 종료되도록 길이가 제한될 수 있다. 즉, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 STA은 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 PPDU(제2 PPDU)를 전송하는 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 전송되는 PPDU의 길이는 프라이머리 채널에서 CCA를 위해 수신된 PPDU(제1 PPDU)의 길이에 제한될 수 있다. 예를 들면, 제2 PPDU의 길이는 제1 PPDU의 길이와 동일하거나 더 짧을 수 있다. 이때, 제2 PPDU의 길이를 제한하기 위한 제1 PPDU의 길이는 제1 PPDU의 프리앰블에 포함된 길이 필드에 의해서 확인될 수 있다.In this way, an STA that performs a channel access procedure using a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than a primary channel may be restricted in the length of a PPDU it transmits. The above-mentioned PPDU transmission length restriction may be necessary for two reasons. In this case, the length of a PPDU transmitted after performing a backoff procedure on the S20 channel may be restricted so that it ends earlier than the end time of a PPDU recognized by a PPDU (and/or frame) confirmed on the P20 channel. That is, when an STA that performs channel access on a non-primary channel transmits a PPDU (second PPDU) on the non-primary channel, the length of the PPDU transmitted on the non-primary channel may be restricted to the length of a PPDU (first PPDU) received for CCA on the primary channel. For example, the length of the second PPDU may be equal to or shorter than the length of the first PPDU. At this time, the length of the first PPDU to limit the length of the second PPDU can be confirmed by the length field included in the preamble of the first PPDU.

상기 제한이 필요한 일 측면은, S20 채널을 이용해 시작된 전송이 지속되는 동안 P20 채널을 점유하던 OBSS 장치의 전송이 종료되었을 때 발생할 수 있는 문제를 방지하기 위한 것일 수 있다. 보다 자세하게는, S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 이뤄지는 전송은 P20 채널을 제외한 서브 채널(들)을 통해 이뤄질 것이고, 상기 전송을 수행하는 동안 AP는 P20 채널에 대해 송/수신, 스캐닝 등 어떠한 서비스도 제공할 수 없는 문제가 있다. 따라서, S20의 전송이 P20 채널에서 확인된 OBSS PPDU보다 늦게 종료될 경우, AP는 P20 채널에서 확인될 수 있는 다른 STA UL PPDU 혹은 OBSS PPDU를 확인 및 수신할 수 없다. 이 경우, STA의 UL PPDU를 수신할 수 없다는 문제와 함께, OBSS PPDU에 의한 NAV 설정도 수행할 수 없기 때문에, 전반적인 BBS의 동작에 문제가 발생할 수 있다. 상기 PPDU 전송 길이 제한이 필요한 다른 일 측면은, 공정성 문제를 완화하기 위한 것일 수 있다. S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 이뤄지는 전송에 길이 제한을 적용하지 않을 경우, P20 채널만을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 종래의 WiFi STA와의 공정성 문제를 야기할 수 있다. 따라서, 전술한 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있는 S20 채널의 개수에 제한을 두는 것과 함께, S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속으로 전송되는 PPDU의 길이에 제한을 둠으로써, 종래 WiFi STA와의 형평성 문제를 완화시켜야 할 수 있다.One aspect that requires the above restriction may be to prevent a problem that may occur when the transmission of an OBSS device that occupied the P20 channel is terminated while the transmission started using the S20 channel continues. More specifically, the transmission that is performed after performing channel access through the S20 channel will be performed through sub-channel(s) excluding the P20 channel, and there is a problem that the AP cannot provide any service such as transmission/reception, scanning, etc. for the P20 channel while performing the transmission. Therefore, if the transmission of S20 is terminated later than the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel, the AP cannot confirm and receive other STA UL PPDU or OBSS PPDU that can be confirmed on the P20 channel. In this case, in addition to the problem that the UL PPDU of the STA cannot be received, the NAV setting by the OBSS PPDU cannot be performed either, which may cause a problem in the overall operation of the BBS. Another aspect that requires the above PPDU transmission length restriction may be to alleviate the fairness problem. If a length limit is not applied to transmissions made after performing channel access through the S20 channel, it may cause fairness problems with conventional WiFi STAs that perform channel access only through the P20 channel. Therefore, in addition to limiting the number of S20 channels that can perform channel access through the aforementioned S20 channel, it is necessary to alleviate the fairness problems with conventional WiFi STAs by limiting the length of PPDUs transmitted through channel access through the S20 channel.

또한, 프라이머리 채널(P20 채널)이 아닌 넌 프라이머리 채널(S20 채널)을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행한 장치는, Primary 20 MHz channel이 아닌 다른 서브 채널(S20)에서 백오프 절차를 수행한 후 획득한 TXOP의 길이에 제한을 받을 수 있다. 이 때, S20 채널에서 백오프 절차를 수행한 후 획득한 TXOP의 길이는, P20 채널에서 수신한 PPDU(및/또는 frame)에 의해 인지된 OBSS의 TXOP 종료 시점보다 일찍 종료되도록 제한될 수 있다. 즉, 프라이머리 채널(P20 채널)이 아닌 넌 프라이머리 채널(S20 채널)에서 채널 접속을 수행한 STA은 채널 접속 절차를 통해서 획득한 TXOP의 길이가 제한될 수 있다. 예를 들면, 프라이머리 채널의 PPDU(제1 PPDU)에 기초한 TXOP(제1 TXOP)의 길이보다 넌 프라이머리 채널의 채널 접속 절차를 통해서 STA이 획득한 TXOP(제2 TXOP)의 길이는 동일하거나 더 짧을 수 있다. 이때, 제1 TXOP의 길이는 제1 PPDU의 프리앰블에 포함된 TXOP 필드에 기초하여 획득될 수 있다.In addition, a device that performs channel access using a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than a primary channel (P20 channel) may be restricted in the length of a TXOP acquired after performing a backoff procedure on a sub-channel (S20) other than the primary 20 MHz channel. In this case, the length of the TXOP acquired after performing the backoff procedure on the S20 channel may be restricted so as to end earlier than the TXOP end time of the OBSS recognized by the PPDU (and/or frame) received on the P20 channel. In other words, an STA that performs channel access on a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than the primary channel (P20 channel) may be restricted in the length of a TXOP acquired through the channel access procedure. For example, the length of a TXOP (second TXOP) acquired by an STA through a channel access procedure of a non-primary channel may be equal to or shorter than the length of a TXOP (first TXOP) based on a PPDU (first PPDU) of a primary channel. In this case, the length of the first TXOP may be acquired based on a TXOP field included in a preamble of the first PPDU.

상기 TXOP 길이 제한은 두 가지 측면에서 필요한 것일 수 있다. 상기 제한이 필요한 일 측면은, S20 채널(Primary 20 MHz channel이 아닌 다른 서브 채널)을 이용해 획득된 TXOP이 지속되는 동안, P20 채널을 점유하던 OBSS 장치의 TXOP 종료되었을 때 발생할 수 있는 문제를 방지하기 위한 것일 수 있다. 보다 자세하게는, S20 채널을 통해 획득된 TXOP은 P20 채널을 제외한 서브 채널(들)을 점유하는 주파수 구간에 대해 적용되는 것이고, 상기 TXOP을 이용해 frame exchange가 수행하는 동안 단말들은 P20 채널에 대해 송/수신, CCA 등을 수행할 수 없는 상태가 될 수 있다. 따라서, S20 채널의 전송이 P20 채널에서 확인된 OBSS의 TXOP보다 늦게 종료될 경우, 단말들은 P20 채널에서 확인될 수 있는 다른 OBSS PPDU를 확인 및 수신할 수 없다. 이 경우, STA의 UL PPDU를 수신할 수 없다는 문제와 함께, OBSS PPDU에 의한 NAV 설정도 수행할 수 없기 때문에, 전반적인 BBS의 동작에 문제가 발생할 수 있다. 상기 PPDU 전송 길이 제한이 필요한 다른 일 측면은, 공정성 문제를 완화하기 위한 것일 수 있다. S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 획득되는 TXOP의 길이 제한을 적용하지 않을 경우, P20 채널만을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 종래의 Wi-Fi 단말과의 형평성 문제를 야기할 수 있다. 따라서, 전술한 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있는 S20 채널의 개수에 제한을 두는 것과 함께, S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속으로 획득되는 TXOP의 길이에 제한을 둠으로써, 종래 WiFi STA와의 형평성 문제를 완화시켜야 할 수 있다.The above TXOP length limitation may be necessary for two aspects. One aspect of the limitation may be to prevent a problem that may occur when the TXOP of an OBSS device occupying the P20 channel is terminated while the TXOP acquired using the S20 channel (a sub-channel other than the primary 20 MHz channel) continues. More specifically, the TXOP acquired through the S20 channel is applied to a frequency section occupying the sub-channel(s) excluding the P20 channel, and while frame exchange is performed using the TXOP, the terminals may not be able to perform transmission/reception, CCA, etc. for the P20 channel. Accordingly, if the transmission of the S20 channel is terminated later than the TXOP of the OBSS confirmed on the P20 channel, the terminals cannot confirm and receive other OBSS PPDUs that can be confirmed on the P20 channel. In this case, since the UL PPDU of the STA cannot be received, and NAV setting by OBSS PPDU cannot be performed, a problem may occur in the overall operation of the BBS. Another aspect that requires the above PPDU transmission length limitation may be to alleviate the fairness problem. If the length limitation of the TXOP obtained after performing channel access through the S20 channel is not applied, it may cause a fairness problem with the conventional Wi-Fi terminal that performs channel access through only the P20 channel. Therefore, in addition to limiting the number of S20 channels that can perform channel access through the aforementioned S20 channel, it may be necessary to alleviate the fairness problem with the conventional WiFi STA by limiting the length of the TXOP obtained by channel access through the S20 channel.

도 13은 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 액세스를 수행한 뒤 전송되는 PPDU의 전송 길이 제한의 일 실시예를 도시한다.Figure 13 illustrates an example of a transmission length limitation of a PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through a non-primary channel.

도 13을 참조하면, 위에서 설명한 프라이머리 채널(P20 채널)이 아닌 넌 프라이머리 채널(S20 채널)을 통해서 채널 접속 절차를 수행한 STA이 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 전송하는 PPDU의 길이는 프라이머리 채널에서 전송되는 PPDU의 길이(예를 들면, STA이 CCA를 위해 프라이머리 채널을 통해 수신된 PPDU)와 동일하거나 더 짧도록 제한될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 13, the length of a PPDU transmitted by an STA through a non-primary channel (S20 channel) rather than the primary channel (P20 channel) described above may be limited to be the same as or shorter than the length of a PPDU transmitted on the primary channel (e.g., a PPDU received by the STA through the primary channel for CCA).

구체적으로, P20 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 확인한 단말이 S20_1 채널을 통해 백오프 절차를 완료하고 PPDU를 전송하는 상황이 도시되어 있다. 이때, 상기 S20_1 채널에서 수행한 백오프 절차의 백오프 카운터는 P20 채널에서 사용하는 백오프 카운터와 공용으로 사용하는 백오프 카운터 일 수 있고, 혹은 S20_1 채널을 통한 채널 접속 용으로 활용되는 별개의 백오프 카운터 일 수 있다. 도 13에서는 S20 채널들이 P20 채널과 같은 80 MHz subblock에 있는 것으로 도시되었지만, P20 채널이 BUSY일 때 백오프를 수행하는 S20 채널들은 P20 채널이 포함된 80 MHz subblock과는 다른 80 MHz subblock에 위치할 수 있다. Specifically, a situation is illustrated in which a terminal, which has determined that a P20 channel is BUSY, completes a backoff procedure through an S20_1 channel and transmits a PPDU. At this time, the backoff counter of the backoff procedure performed in the S20_1 channel may be a backoff counter commonly used with the backoff counter used in the P20 channel, or may be a separate backoff counter utilized for channel access through the S20_1 channel. In Fig. 13, the S20 channels are illustrated as being in the same 80 MHz subblock as the P20 channel, but the S20 channels that perform a backoff when the P20 channel is BUSY may be located in a different 80 MHz subblock from the 80 MHz subblock that includes the P20 channel.

S20_1 채널을 통한 채널 접속을 시작하기 전, STA는 P20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 시도하는 과정에서 OBSS PPDU의 프리앰블을 검출하고, P20 채널이 OBSS에 의해 점유된 상태(BUSY)가 되었음을 확인할 수 있다. 이 상황에서, 상기 STA는 OBSS PPDU의 프리앰블에 대한 디코딩을 수행하여, 상기 OBSS PPDU가 얼마간의 시간동안 지속될 것인지를 확인할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 OBSS PPDU가 얼마간의 시간동안 지속될 것인지를 확인한 후 수행하는 STA의 동작은 NAV를 설정하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 STA는 검출된 프리앰블의 L-SIG 및 Length 필드를 확인하거나 상기 OBSS PPDU의 U-SIG field 및 또는 HE-SIG field에 포함된 TXOP field를 통해 지시된 값을 기초로 상기 OBSS PPDU의 지속시간을 확인할 수 있다. 혹은, 상기 STA는 PPDU에 포함된 MAC frame의 Duration/ID field를 기초로 OBSS PPDU의 지속시간을 확인할 수 있다. Before starting channel access through S20_1 channel, STA can detect preamble of OBSS PPDU during channel access attempt through P20 channel and confirm that P20 channel is occupied by OBSS (BUSY). In this situation, STA can perform decoding on preamble of OBSS PPDU and confirm how long OBSS PPDU will last. At this time, operation of STA performed after confirming how long OBSS PPDU will last may be setting NAV. At this time, STA can confirm L-SIG and Length fields of detected preamble or confirm duration of OBSS PPDU based on value indicated through TXOP field included in U-SIG field and/or HE-SIG field of OBSS PPDU. Alternatively, STA can confirm duration of OBSS PPDU based on Duration/ID field of MAC frame included in PPDU.

이 후, STA는 P20 채널에서 확인된 OBSS PPDU의 종료시간에 기초하여, S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU의 길이를 결정할 수 있다. 이 때, S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송되는 PPDU의 길이는, P20 채널에서 확인된 OBSS PPDU의 예측 종료시간과 같거나 더 일찍 종료되도록 제한/조절될 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 PPDU의 길이를 제한하는 방법은 상기 PPDU에 대해 응답될 것으로 예상되는 Response frame의 종료시점이 OBSS PPDU의 종료시점과 같거나 더 일찍 종료되도록 조절되는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 Response frame은 ACK frame 혹은 Block ACK frame을 포함하는 PPDU 및 TB(트리거-Based) PPDU 등을 의미한다. 다시 말해서, 상기 PPDU에 의해 응답되는 PPDU의 종료 시점이, P20 채널에서 확인된 OBSS PPDU의 예측 종료시점보다 이전이거나 같도록 제한될 수 있다. Thereafter, the STA can determine the length of the PPDU to be transmitted after performing channel access through the S20 channel based on the end time of the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel. At this time, the length of the PPDU to be transmitted after performing channel access through the S20 channel can be limited/adjusted to end the same as or earlier than the predicted end time of the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel. At this time, a method of limiting the length of the PPDU may be such that the end time of a Response frame expected to be responded to the PPDU is adjusted to end the same as or earlier than the end time of the OBSS PPDU. At this time, the Response frame means a PPDU including an ACK frame or a Block ACK frame, a TB (trigger-Based) PPDU, etc. In other words, the end time of the PPDU responded to by the PPDU can be limited to be earlier than or equal to the predicted end time of the OBSS PPDU confirmed on the P20 channel.

도 14는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통한 채널 액세스를 통해 획득된 TXOP의 길이 제한 방법의 일 실시예를 도시한다.FIG. 14 illustrates an embodiment of a method for limiting the length of a TXOP obtained through channel access via a non-primary channel.

도 14를 참조하면, 위에서 설명한 프라이머리 채널(P20 채널)이 아닌 넌 프라이머리 채널(S20 채널)을 통해서 채널 접속 절차를 수행한 STA이 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 전송하는 PPDU에 기초한 TXOP의 길이는 프라이머리 채널에서 전송되는 PPDU(예를 들면, STA이 CCA를 위해 프라이머리 채널을 통해 수신된 PPDU)에 기초한 TXOP의 길이와 동일하거나 더 짧도록 제한될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 14, the length of a TXOP based on a PPDU transmitted through a non-primary channel (S20 channel) by an STA that performs a channel access procedure rather than the primary channel (P20 channel) described above may be limited to be equal to or shorter than the length of a TXOP based on a PPDU transmitted on the primary channel (e.g., a PPDU received by the STA through the primary channel for CCA).

구체적으로, P20 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 확인한 단말이 Secondary 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 서브 채널(S20 채널)을 통해 백오프 절차를 완료하고 TXOP를 획득하는 상황이 도시되어 있다. 이때, S20 채널을 통해 수행한 백오프 절차의 백오프 카운터는 P20 채널에서 사용하는 백오프 카운터와 공용으로 사용하는 백오프 카운터 일 수 있고, 혹은 Secondary 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 서브 채널에서 백오프 동작을 수행할 때 사용하는 별개의 백오프 카운터 일 수 있다. Specifically, a situation is illustrated in which a terminal, which has determined that the P20 channel is BUSY, completes a backoff procedure through a subchannel (S20 channel) included in a secondary 80 MHz subblock and acquires a TXOP. At this time, a backoff counter of the backoff procedure performed through the S20 channel may be a backoff counter commonly used with the backoff counter used in the P20 channel, or may be a separate backoff counter used when performing a backoff operation in a subchannel included in the secondary 80 MHz subblock.

P20 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 확인되어 S20을 통해 백오프 절차를 수행하고자 하는 단말은, S20 채널을 이용해 송/수신이 진행중일 수 있는 OBSS의 통신을 보호하기 위해 MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간구간 동안 S20 채널에 CCA를 수행한다. 도 14에서는, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간동안 단말에 의해 관찰된 S20의 상태가 IDLE이고, 따라서 단말은 S20 채널에서의 백오프 절차를 시작한다.When a terminal wants to perform a backoff procedure through S20 because the P20 channel is confirmed to be BUSY, the terminal performs CCA on the S20 channel during a time period corresponding to MediumSync time in order to protect the communication of the OBSS that may be transmitting/receiving using the S20 channel. In Fig. 14, the state of S20 observed by the terminal during the time period corresponding to MediumSync time is IDLE, and therefore the terminal starts a backoff procedure on the S20 channel.

단말이 S20 채널을 통해 수행한 백오프 절차를 완료하였을 때, 단말이 획득하는 TXOP은 P20 채널을 점유하여 전송된 frame(도 14의 RTS/CTS frame)이 포함된 TXOP (OBSS TXOP)과 동일한 시점에 종료되도록 설정된다. 이 때, 도 14의 실시예에서는 두 TXOP이 동일한 시점에 종료되는 것으로 도시되었지만, Secondary 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 서브 채널을 통해 백오프를 수행한 후 획득한 TXOP은 OBSS TXOP보다 일찍 종료되도록 설정될 수도 있다.When the terminal completes the backoff procedure performed through the S20 channel, the TXOP acquired by the terminal is set to end at the same time as the TXOP (OBSS TXOP) including the frame (RTS/CTS frame of FIG. 14) transmitted by occupying the P20 channel. At this time, although the two TXOPs are illustrated as ending at the same time in the embodiment of FIG. 14, the TXOP acquired after performing the backoff through the subchannel included in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock may be set to end earlier than the OBSS TXOP.

S20 채널을 통해 백오프를 수행한 후 TXOP을 획득하는 단말은 P20 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP 길이를 확인할 때, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에서 수신된 (MU-)RTS 및/또는 CTS 및/또는 BSRP(Buffer Status Report Poll)/BSR(Buffer Status Report) frame의 Duration/ID field를 활용할 수 있다. 즉, OBSS의 STA가 전송한 frame이 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 수신되면, 단말은 수신된 frame의 Duration/ID field를 통해 지시되는 정보를 기초로 OBSS의 TXOP 길이를 확인한다. 이 경우 단말은 상기 확인된 길이를 기초로 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에 대응하는 NAV를 설정하고, Secondary 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 서브 채널을 통해 채널 접속 절차(백오프 절차)를 완료한 후 TXOP을 획득할 때에, 자신이 획득한 TXOP이 상기 확인된 OBSS의 TXOP와 동시에 혹은 먼저 종료되도록 자신의 TXOP 길이를 조절해야 한다.After performing backoff through S20 channel, a terminal acquiring TXOP can utilize Duration/ID field of (MU-)RTS and/or CTS and/or BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll)/BSR (Buffer Status Report) frame received on Primary 20 MHz subchannel when checking the TXOP length of OBSS occupying P20 channel. That is, when a frame transmitted by STA of OBSS is received through Primary 20 MHz subchannel, the terminal checks the TXOP length of OBSS based on information indicated through Duration/ID field of the received frame. In this case, the terminal sets a NAV corresponding to the Primary 20 MHz subchannel based on the confirmed length, completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) through the subchannel included in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock, and then, when acquiring a TXOP, adjusts its TXOP length so that the TXOP it has acquired ends at the same time as or before the TXOP of the confirmed OBSS.

S20 채널을 통해 획득한 TXOP이 종료된 후, 단말은 P20을 통한 채널 접속을 재개하기 위해 P20 채널에 대한 CCA를 MediumSync time에 해당하는 구간동안 수행한다. 만약 MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간이 경과하기 전에 유효한 frame(PPDU)가 수신된다면, 단말은 수신된 frame(PPDU)의 길이와 관련한 field를 통해 획득된 정보를 기초로 NAV를 설정하고, NAV가 해제되었을 때 P20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 절차를 재개할 수 있다. 도 14의 예에서는, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간이 모두 경과할때까지 P20이 IDLE 상태로 관찰되었고, 따라서 단말은 MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간이 만료된 후 채널 접속 절차를 재개하였다.After the TXOP acquired through the S20 channel is terminated, the terminal performs CCA for the P20 channel during the MediumSync time to resume channel access through the P20. If a valid frame (PPDU) is received before the time corresponding to the MediumSync time elapses, the terminal sets NAV based on the information acquired through the field related to the length of the received frame (PPDU), and can resume the channel access procedure through the P20 channel when the NAV is released. In the example of Fig. 14, P20 was observed in the IDLE state until the time corresponding to the MediumSync time elapsed, and therefore, the terminal resumed the channel access procedure after the time corresponding to the MediumSync time expired.

<S20 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널)을 통한 채널 접속 절차의 제한><Restrictions on channel access procedures through S20 channel (non-primary channel)>

상술한 S20 채널을 통해 수행되는 일련의 채널 접속 절차는 AP STA에게만 허용된 채널 접속 절차일 수 있다. 다시 말해서, P20 채널이 아닌 S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 절차는 non-AP STA가 수행할 수 없는 채널 접속 절차일 수 있다. A series of channel access procedures performed through the above-described S20 channel may be channel access procedures allowed only to AP STAs. In other words, a channel access procedure through the S20 channel, not the P20 channel, may be a channel access procedure that cannot be performed by non-AP STAs.

AP STA에게만 S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 절차가 허용되는 이유는 단일 BSS에 속한 STA들이라 할지라도, 각 STA가 확인한 P20 채널의 상태가 서로 다를 수 있기 때문에 이다. AP가 운용하는 BSS에 제1 non-AP STA 및 제2 non-AP STA가 Association 한 상황을 가정했을 때, 제1 non-AP STA는 OBSS에서 전송된 PPDU를 수신한 후 P20 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 인지하였지만, AP 및 제2 non-AP STA는 상기 PPDU가 수신되지 않아 P20 채널이 IDLE인 것으로 인지할 가능성이 있다. 또한, 제2 non-AP STA가 수신한 PPDU를 제1 non-AP STA가 수신하지 못하는 경우도 발생할 수 있다. 이처럼, 동일한 BSS에 소속된 각 non-AP STA들이 확인한 P20 채널의 상태는 서로 다를 수 있고, 각 STA가 확인한 P20 채널의 상태와 AP가 확인한 P20 채널의 상태도 역시 다른 것이 가능하다. 이 경우, P20 채널이 busy인 것으로 판단한 non-AP STA가 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하여 UL PPDU를 전송하더라도, AP는 P20이 idle한 것으로 판단하고 여전히 P20 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차를 진행중인 것이 가능하다. 즉, non-AP STA가 S20에서 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송한 PPDU는 AP가 확인한 P20 채널이 idle일 경우 AP 측에서 정상적으로 수신되는 것이 불가능하다. 더 나아가, P20 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 판단한 non-AP STA가 S20 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행하고 UL PPDU를 전송하는 도중, AP가 P20 채널에서의 채널 접속을 완료한 후 상기 non-AP STA에게 PPDU를 전송하는 경우가 발생할 수 있다. 이 경우 상기 non-AP STA는 S20 채널에서 수행하는 PPDU 전송으로 인해 P20에서 수신되는 PPDU를 정상적으로 수행할 수 없는 문제가 발생한다. 이처럼, BSS에 소속된 각 STA(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)들이 확인한 P20 채널의 상태가 서로 다를 수 있기 때문에, 각 non-AP STA는 자신이 확인한 P20 채널이 BUSY 상태인 것으로 판단된다 하더라도 S20 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차를 수행하지 않도록 제한될 수 있다. 다만, non-AP STA는 P20 채널이 BUSY 상태인 것으로 판단될 때, S20 채널에서 전송될지도 모를 PPDU의 수신을 대기해야 할 수 있다. The reason why the channel access procedure via the S20 channel is allowed only to AP STAs is because, even among STAs belonging to a single BSS, the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each STA may be different from each other. Assuming that a first non-AP STA and a second non-AP STA are associated with a BSS operated by an AP, the first non-AP STA may recognize that the P20 channel is BUSY after receiving a PPDU transmitted from an OBSS, but the AP and the second non-AP STA may recognize that the P20 channel is IDLE because the PPDU was not received. In addition, there may also be a case where the first non-AP STA does not receive the PPDU received by the second non-AP STA. In this way, the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each non-AP STA belonging to the same BSS may be different from each other, and the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each STA and the status of the P20 channel confirmed by the AP may also be different. In this case, even if a non-AP STA, which determines that the P20 channel is busy, performs channel access through the S20 channel and transmits a UL PPDU, the AP may determine that the P20 is idle and still proceed with the channel access procedure on the P20 channel. In other words, the PPDU transmitted by the non-AP STA after performing channel access on S20 cannot be normally received by the AP if the P20 channel confirmed by the AP is idle. Furthermore, while a non-AP STA, which determines that the P20 channel is BUSY, performs channel access on the S20 channel and transmits a UL PPDU, the AP may transmit a PPDU to the non-AP STA after completing the channel access on the P20 channel. In this case, the non-AP STA encounters a problem that it cannot normally perform a PPDU received on the P20 channel due to the PPDU transmission performed on the S20 channel. In this way, since the status of the P20 channel confirmed by each STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) belonging to the BSS may be different from each other, each non-AP STA may be restricted from performing a channel access procedure on the S20 channel even if it determines that the P20 channel it has confirmed is in a BUSY state. However, the non-AP STA may have to wait for reception of a PPDU that may be transmitted on the S20 channel when it determines that the P20 channel is in a BUSY state.

AP의 경우 S20 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 후 자신이 전송할 예정인 프레임들의 수신 대상 장치가 S20 채널에서 수신이 가능한 상태인지 여부를 확인하기 위해, S20 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 첫 프레임으로 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임을 전송해야 할 수 있다. 이때, 상기 기 설정된 포맷은 RTS(Request To Send), MU-RTS(Multi-User RTS), BSRP(Buffer Status Report Poll) 혹은 다른 종류의 트리거 프레임인 것이 가능하다. 즉, AP는 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 첫 PPDU에 상기 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임을 포함하여 전송해야 할 수 있다.In the case of an AP, after performing channel access on the S20 channel, in order to check whether a target device to receive frames to be transmitted by the AP is capable of receiving on the S20 channel, a frame of a preset format may need to be transmitted as the first frame transmitted after performing channel access on the S20 channel. At this time, the preset format may be RTS (Request To Send), MU-RTS (Multi-User RTS), BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll), or another type of trigger frame. In other words, the AP may need to transmit a frame of the preset format included in the first PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the S20 channel.

즉, P20 채널이 아닌 S20 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행한 AP는 채널 접속 절차 이후 첫 번째로 전송하는 프레임의 포맷은 기 설정된 포맷일 수 있다. 예를 들면, S20 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행한 AP은 채널 접속 절차 이후 가장 첫 번째 전송하는 프레임은 데이터가 포함되지 않은 프레임일 수 있다. 즉, 채널 접속 절차 이후에 AP는 AP와 연관된 STA의 채널이 아직 변경되지 않을 수 있는 바, 데이터가 포함되지 않는 특정 포맷의 프레임을 채널 접속 절차 이후에 가장 처음 전송할 수 있다.That is, an AP that performs a channel access procedure on an S20 channel, not a P20 channel, may transmit a frame in a format that is a preset format first after the channel access procedure. For example, an AP that performs a channel access procedure on an S20 channel may transmit a frame that does not include data first after the channel access procedure. That is, after the channel access procedure, the AP may transmit a frame in a specific format that does not include data first after the channel access procedure, since the channel of an STA associated with the AP may not have been changed yet.

이 때, AP가 전송한 상기 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임은 하나 혹은 복수의 STA들에게 immediate 응답 프레임의 응답을 요청하는 프레임이며, 따라서 AP가 상기 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임을 전송하면 이를 수신한 STA들로부터 응답 프레임이 응답된다. At this time, the frame of the preset format transmitted by the AP is a frame that requests a response of an immediate response frame from one or more STAs, and therefore, when the AP transmits a frame of the preset format, a response frame is sent in response from the STAs that receive it.

AP는 자신이 전송한 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임에 대한 응답으로 응답 프레임들이 수신되었을 때, 상기 응답 프레임을 전송한 STA들이 S20을 통해 전송되는 PPDU의 수신을 지원할 수 있는 STA들임을 인지할 수 있다. 따라서, AP는 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임을 전송한 후, 상기 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 응답한 STA들을 목적 장치로 하는 프레임들을 다음 PPDU를 통해 전송할 수 있다. When response frames are received in response to a frame of a preset format that the AP transmitted, the AP can recognize that the STAs that transmitted the response frames are STAs that can support reception of the PPDU transmitted via S20. Accordingly, after transmitting the frame of the preset format, the AP can transmit frames targeting the STAs that responded with a response frame to the frame via the next PPDU.

보다 구체적인 예로, AP는 S20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임을 통해 제1 STA와 제2 STA에게 응답 프레임의 응답을 요청할 수 있다. 이 때, 제1 STA로부터 응답 프레임이 응답되었고 제2 STA로부터는 응답 프레임이 응답되지 않았다면, AP는 다음에 전송하는 PPDU에 목적 장치가 제1 STA인 MPDU를 포함시킬 수 있고, 제2 STA를 목적 장치로 하는 MPDU를 포함시키지 않을 수 있다. 즉, AP는 S20을 통해 전송한 상기 기 설정된 포맷의 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 특정 STA에게서 받지 못한 경우, 상기 채널 접속을 통해 전송하는 PPDU들에 상기 특정 STA를 목적장치로 하는 (individually addressed) MPDU를 포함시켜서는 안 된다.As a more specific example, after performing channel access through S20, the AP can request a response frame from the first STA and the second STA through a frame in a preset format that is transmitted. At this time, if the response frame is responded to from the first STA and the response frame is not responded to from the second STA, the AP can include an MPDU whose destination device is the first STA in the PPDU that is transmitted next, and may not include an MPDU whose destination device is the second STA. That is, if the AP does not receive a response frame for the frame in the preset format transmitted through S20 from a specific STA, the AP must not include an MPDU whose destination device is (individually addressed) the specific STA in the PPDUs that are transmitted through the channel access.

<S20을 통한 채널 접속의 규범적 동작 제한><Normative behavioral restrictions for channel access via S20>

비면허 대역을 사용해 통신을 수행하는 모든 단말들은 각 단말들이 조화롭고 공평한 방법으로 매체에 접근할 수 있도록 보장하기 위해 규범적인 채널 접속 동작을 수행해야 한다. ETSI(유럽전기통신표준협회, European Telecommunications Standards Institute) BRAN(Broadband Radio Access Networks) committee에서는 비면허 대역을 활용하는 단말들의 채널 접속 방식과 관련한 표준 규범(Harmonized standard)을 정의하였고, Wi-Fi 단말 역시 비면허 대역을 이용한 동작을 수행하기 때문에 ETSI BRAN에서 정의한 규범을 따라야 한다. 종래 Wi-Fi에서 사용하는 채널 접속 방식인 EDCA 메커니즘은 ETSI BRAN을 통해 규범적인 채널 접속 방식 중 하나로 정의되어 있으며, 따라서 종래 Wi-Fi 단말들은 ETSI BRAN에서 정의하는 규범적 동작을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한다. All terminals performing communications using unlicensed bands must perform normative channel access operations to ensure that each terminal can access the medium in a harmonized and fair manner. The ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute) BRAN (Broadband Radio Access Networks) committee has defined a harmonized standard related to the channel access method of terminals utilizing unlicensed bands, and Wi-Fi terminals must also follow the standards defined by ETSI BRAN because they perform operations using unlicensed bands. The EDCA mechanism, which is a channel access method used in conventional Wi-Fi, is defined as one of the normative channel access methods by ETSI BRAN, and therefore conventional Wi-Fi terminals perform channel access through the normative operation defined by ETSI BRAN.

EDCA 메커니즘과 관련하여 정의되어 있는 규범 중, EDCA 메커니즘을 통해 백오프 동작을 수행하는 채널(주 동작 채널)의 변경과 관련한 규정이 정의되어 있다. 구체적인 규정은, EDCA를 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 단말이 주 동작 채널을 매초 1회 이상 변경해서는 안 된다는 것이다. 즉, EDCA를 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 단말은, 백오프 절차를 수행하는 채널(주 동작 채널)이 변경되었을 때 최소 1초 이상 해당 채널을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행해야 한다는 것이다. 이 때, 특정 서브 채널을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행한 시간은 상기 특정 서브 채널을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송한 PPDU 중 최초로 전송된 PPDU의 전송의 시작 시점을 기준으로 계산되는 것일 수 있다. 즉, 단말이 주 동작 채널을 S20으로 변경한 후 전송한 첫 PPDU의 시작시점이 T1이라면, 상기 단말은 T1으로부터 1초가 경과한 시점부터 주 동작 채널을 S20이 아닌 다른 서브 채널(Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널 혹은 다른 서브 채널)로 변경할 수 있다.Among the standards defined in relation to the EDCA mechanism, there is a regulation regarding the change of the channel (primary operating channel) performing the backoff operation via the EDCA mechanism. The specific regulation is that a terminal performing channel access via EDCA must not change the primary operating channel more than once per second. In other words, a terminal performing channel access via EDCA must perform channel access using the channel for at least 1 second when the channel performing the backoff procedure (primary operating channel) is changed. In this case, the time for performing channel access using a specific subchannel may be calculated based on the start time of transmission of the first PPDU transmitted among the PPDUs after performing channel access using the specific subchannel. In other words, if the start time of the first PPDU transmitted after the terminal changes the primary operating channel to S20 is T1, the terminal may change the primary operating channel to a subchannel other than S20 (primary 20 MHz subchannel or another subchannel) from a time point 1 second after T1.

따라서, 본 발명에서 제공하는 S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작은 P20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작을 1초 혹은 1초 이상 유지하였을 때에 한정적으로 활용 가능한 것일 수 있다. 또한, S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작을 수행한 단말은, 1초 혹은 1초 이상 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속 동작을 시도해야하고, S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작을 1초 혹은 1초 이상 유지한 상태에서 P20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하기 위해 전환하는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, 상기 1초는 예시를 위한 것이며, 기 약속된 다른 시간 길이가 적용되어 같은 동작/제한이 수행되는 것도 가능하다.Accordingly, the channel access operation via the S20 channel provided in the present invention may be limitedly usable when the channel access operation via the P20 channel is maintained for 1 second or more than 1 second. In addition, a terminal that has performed the channel access operation via the S20 channel must attempt the channel access operation via the S20 channel for 1 second or more than 1 second, and it is possible to switch to performing the channel access via the P20 channel while maintaining the channel access operation via the S20 channel for 1 second or more than 1 second. In this case, the 1 second is for example, and it is also possible for the same operation/restriction to be performed by applying another previously agreed time length.

즉, 단말은 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하기 위해서는 프라이머리 채널에서 일정 시간(예를 들면, 1s)동안 채널 접속 절차를 시도해야 되고, 이후, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 일정 시간(예를 들면, 1s)동안 채널 접속 절차를 시도해야 한다. 예를 들면, 단말은 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 경우, 일정 시간(예를 들면, 1s)동안은 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 동작(예를 들면, 채널 접속 절차)을 수행하여야 한다.That is, in order to perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the terminal must attempt the channel access procedure on the primary channel for a certain period of time (e.g., 1 s), and thereafter, when performing the channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the terminal must attempt the channel access procedure on the non-primary channel for a certain period of time (e.g., 1 s). For example, when performing a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the terminal must perform an operation (e.g., the channel access procedure) on the non-primary channel for a certain period of time (e.g., 1 s).

즉, AP가 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했음을 것을 인지한 non-AP STA들은, AP가 P20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있을 때까지 S20 채널을 기본 채널인 것과 동일하게 고려한 동작을 수행해야 할 수 있다. 즉, AP가 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 것을 인지한 non-AP STA는 AP가 P20 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있는 상태로 전환되기 이전까지는 S20 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행하거나, AP로부터 전송되는 PPDU의 수신을 대기해야 한다. 이 때, AP는 자신이 S20 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 시점 혹은 P20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작으로 전환될 수 있는 시점과 관련한 정보를 자신이 전송하는 Management frame(예를 들어 Beacon frame)을 이용해 non-AP STA들에게 지시할 수 있다. 즉, AP는 S20 채널을 통한 채널 접속을 수행해야 하는 시간 구간 중, P20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작으로 전환하는 시점과 관련한 정보를 자신이 전송하는 Management frame을 통해 지시할 수 있다. Non-AP STA들은 AP가 전송한 Management frame을 수신하였을 때, AP가 P20 채널을 통한 채널 접속 동작으로 전환하는 시점과 관련한 정보가 상기 Management frame에 포함되어 있는 경우 상기 지시된 정보를 기초로 AP의 채널 접속 수행 채널이 P20 채널인지 S20 채널인지 여부를 인지할 수 있다.That is, non-AP STAs that recognize that the AP has performed channel access through the S20 channel may have to perform operations considering the S20 channel as the default channel until the AP can perform channel access through the P20 channel. That is, non-AP STAs that recognize that the AP has performed channel access through the S20 channel must perform channel access on the S20 channel or wait for reception of PPDUs transmitted from the AP until the AP switches to a state in which it can perform channel access on the P20 channel. At this time, the AP can instruct the non-AP STAs with information related to the point in time when it performed channel access through the S20 channel or the point in time when it can switch to channel access operation through the P20 channel using the Management frame (e.g., Beacon frame) that it transmits. That is, the AP can instruct the non-AP STAs with information related to the point in time when it switches to channel access operation through the P20 channel during the time period in which it must perform channel access through the S20 channel, through the Management frame that it transmits. When Non-AP STAs receive a Management frame transmitted by an AP, if the Management frame includes information related to the point in time when the AP switches to channel access operation via a P20 channel, the Non-AP STAs can recognize whether the channel access execution channel of the AP is a P20 channel or an S20 channel based on the indicated information.

도 15는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 프라이머리 채널 및 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 TXOP을 획득하는 AP가 주 동작 채널을 관리하는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 15 illustrates a method for an AP to manage a primary operating channel by obtaining a TXOP through a primary channel and a non-primary channel according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 15를 참조하면, Primary 80 MHz subblock과 Secondary 80 MHz subblock에 각각 OBSS1 및 OBSS2가 존재하는 상황에서, AP가 주 동작 채널을 변경함으로써 OBSS가 점유하지 않은 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고 있다. 아래의 설명은 AP의 채널 접속 동작이 시간 순(도면 기준 좌에서 우 방향)으로 설명된다.Referring to Figure 15, in a situation where OBSS1 and OBSS2 exist in the Primary 80 MHz subblock and the Secondary 80 MHz subblock, respectively, the AP performs channel access through a channel not occupied by the OBSS by changing the primary operating channel. The description below explains the channel access operation of the AP in chronological order (from left to right based on the drawing).

AP는 TXOP1을 획득할 때에, P20을 통해 수행한 채널 접속 절차를 완료함으로써 채널 접근 권한을 획득한다. AP가 TXOP을 획득하는 시점에 Secondary 80 MHz subblock에서 OBSS2의 TXOP이 진행중이므로, AP는 Primary 80 MHz에 대해서만 채널 접근 권한을 획득하였고, 따라서 TXOP1은 Primary 80 MHz subblock에 대해서만 적용된다. 이후, AP는 P20에서 또 다시 채널 접속 절차를 완료하고 160 MHz 대역에 대한 TXOP인 TXOP2를 획득한다. TXOP2가 종료된 이후, AP가 TXOP3을 획득하기 위한 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 도중 OBSS1의 TXOP이 AP의 주 동작 채널인 P20을 점유하는 형태로 획득되었고, 따라서 AP의 백오프 절차는 중단되었다. 이때, AP는 S20 역시 OBSS2의 TXOP에 의해 점유된 상태임을 인지하고 주 동작 채널을 변경하지 않고 유지한다. 하지만, OBSS1의 첫 번째 TXOP이 종료된 후 재개한 AP의 채널 접속 절차가 완료되기 이전에 다시 OBSS1의 TXOP이 시작되었고, AP는 주 동작 채널을 S20으로 변경하는 결정을 내린다. 이때, AP는 자신이 P20을 주 동작 채널로 유지한 시간이 1초 혹은 1초보다 길었기 때문에 주 동작 채널을 S20으로 변경하는 것이 가능하다. When the AP acquires TXOP1, it acquires channel access rights by completing the channel access procedure performed through P20. Since the TXOP of OBSS2 is in progress in the Secondary 80 MHz subblock at the time when the AP acquires TXOP, the AP acquires channel access rights only for the Primary 80 MHz, and therefore TXOP1 is applied only for the Primary 80 MHz subblock. After that, the AP completes the channel access procedure again in P20 and acquires TXOP2, which is a TXOP for the 160 MHz band. After TXOP2 is terminated, while the AP is performing the channel access procedure to acquire TXOP3, the TXOP of OBSS1 is acquired in the form of occupying P20, which is the AP's primary operating channel, and therefore the AP's backoff procedure is stopped. At this time, the AP recognizes that S20 is also occupied by the TXOP of OBSS2 and maintains the primary operating channel without changing it. However, before the channel association procedure of the AP that resumed after the first TXOP of OBSS1 ended is completed, the TXOP of OBSS1 started again, and the AP decides to change the primary operating channel to S20. At this time, the AP is able to change the primary operating channel to S20 because the time it maintained P20 as the primary operating channel was 1 second or longer than 1 second.

이에 따라, AP는 OBSS1의 두 번째 TXOP이 진행되는 도중 S20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고 TXOP3을 획득한다. AP는 OBSS2의 TXOP이 종료된 후, S20에서 수행한 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 후 160 MHz 대역에 대한 TXOP인 TXOP4를 획득한다. 이후, AP가 S20에서 수행하는 채널 접속 절차는 OBSS2의 TXOP이 시작됨에 따라 중단되었다. 이 때, AP는 P20이 IDLE한 것을 확인하고 주 동작 채널을 P20으로 변경할 것을 결정한다. 이 때, AP는 자신이 S20을 주 동작 채널로 유지한 시간이 1초 혹은 1초보다 길었기 때문에 주 동작 채널을 P20으로 변경하는 것이 가능하다.Accordingly, the AP performs channel access through S20 during the second TXOP of OBSS1 and acquires TXOP3. After the TXOP of OBSS2 is terminated, the AP completes the channel access procedure performed in S20 and acquires TXOP4, which is a TXOP for the 160 MHz band. After this, the channel access procedure performed by the AP in S20 is interrupted as the TXOP of OBSS2 starts. At this time, the AP confirms that P20 is IDLE and decides to change the primary operating channel to P20. At this time, the AP can change the primary operating channel to P20 because the time it maintained S20 as the primary operating channel was 1 second or longer than 1 second.

<다중 링크(multi-link)를 이용한 다중-서브 채널 접속><Multi-subchannel access using multi-link>

전술한 바와 같이 ETSI BRAN committee에서 정의한 규범적 동작에 따라 1초에 1번만 주 동작 채널의 변경이 허용되는 경우, 본 발명의 기본 사상인 프라이머리 채널에 대한 종속성 문제가 온전히 해결되었다고 보기 어렵다. 이는, 특정 단말이 주 동작 채널을 변경한 후, 적어도 1초 동안은 상기 변경된 주 동작 채널의 IDLE/BUSY 여부에 따라 채널 접속 가능 여부가 결정되기 때문이다. 즉, Wi-Fi 단말이 갖는 프라이머리 채널에 대한 종속성 문제는 1초에 최대 1번만 완화 가능하며, 나머지 시간 구간에 대해서는 변경된 주 동작 채널에 대해 동일한 종속성을 문제를 갖게 된다. 즉, 본 발명을 통해 해결해야 하는 문제는 Wi-Fi 단말의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에 대한 종속성 문제가 아니라, Wi-Fi 단말의 주 동작 채널(채널 접속에 활용하는 채널, 백오프 절차를 수행하는 기준 채널)에 대한 종속성 문제인 것이다. 따라서, 주 동작 채널을 P20 채널에서 S20 채널으로 변경하고, 다시 S20 채널에서 P20 채널 혹은 다른 S20 채널으로 변경하는 방법은, 주 동작 채널로 지정된 채널이 변경되는 효과만 제공할 뿐 특정 20 MHz 서브 채널(주 동작 채널)이 BUSY로 판단될 때 전체 Operating BW에 대한 채널 접속이 제한된다는 한계는 해결하지 못한다.As mentioned above, if the primary operating channel is allowed to be changed only once per second according to the normative operation defined by the ETSI BRAN committee, it is difficult to say that the dependency problem on the primary channel, which is the basic idea of the present invention, is completely resolved. This is because, after a specific terminal changes the primary operating channel, whether or not the channel access is possible is determined based on whether the changed primary operating channel is IDLE/BUSY for at least one second. In other words, the dependency problem on the primary channel that the Wi-Fi terminal has can be alleviated only once per second at most, and the same dependency problem occurs on the changed primary operating channel for the remaining time interval. In other words, the problem to be solved by the present invention is not the dependency problem on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Wi-Fi terminal, but the dependency problem on the primary operating channel of the Wi-Fi terminal (the channel used for channel access, the reference channel for performing the backoff procedure). Therefore, the method of changing the primary operating channel from the P20 channel to the S20 channel, and then again from the S20 channel to the P20 channel or another S20 channel, only provides the effect of changing the channel designated as the primary operating channel, but does not resolve the limitation that channel access for the entire Operating BW is restricted when a specific 20 MHz sub-channel (primary operating channel) is determined to be BUSY.

상술한 바와 같은 지정된 주 동작 채널(채널 접속, 즉 EDCA 백오프 절차를 수행하는 채널)에 대한 종속성 문제를 해결하기 위한 방법으로, 지정된 주 동작 채널이 갖는 중요성을 낮추는 방법을 고려할 수 있다. 지정된 주 동작 채널의 중요성을 낮추는 가장 간단한 방법으로, 단일 operating channel에 대해 복수의 주 동작 채널을 지정하는 것이 고려될 수 있다. 복수의 주 동작 채널이 단일 operating channel에 대해 지정되는 경우, 각 주 동작 채널에 대한 Wi-Fi 단말의 채널 접속 종속성 문제는 지정된 주 동작 채널의 개수에 비례하여 완화될 수 있다. As a method for solving the dependency problem on the designated primary operating channel (i.e., the channel that performs the channel access, i.e., the EDCA backoff procedure) as described above, a method of lowering the importance of the designated primary operating channel can be considered. As the simplest method for lowering the importance of the designated primary operating channel, designating multiple primary operating channels for a single operating channel can be considered. When multiple primary operating channels are designated for a single operating channel, the channel access dependency problem of a Wi-Fi terminal for each primary operating channel can be alleviated in proportion to the number of designated primary operating channels.

<단일 동작 채널에 복수의 주 동작 채널을 지정하는 방법><How to specify multiple primary action channels for a single action channel>

Wi-Fi 표준에서 지원하는 Operating BW는 지속적으로 증가되어 왔고, Wi-Fi7 표준은 최대 320 MHz BW에 달하는 Operating BW를 지원한다. 이와 같이 넓은 BW를 갖는 Operating channel(예를 들어 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz 채널)에 접근할 때에도, Wi-Fi 단말은 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널(주 동작 채널)에서 백오프 절차를 완료한 경우에만 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, 백오프 절차는 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 IDLE로 판단될 때에만 완료될 수 있기 때문에, Wi-Fi 단말은 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 BUSY로 판단될 때 320 MHz 대역에 이르는 넓은 채널에 대한 접근 권한을 획득할 수 없다. 이는, 전술한 Wi-Fi 단말의 주 동작 채널에 대한 종속성 문제에 의한 것이며, 종래 Wi-Fi 표준이 이와 같은 종속성 문제를 갖는 형태의 채널 접속 절차를 유지해 온 이유는 Wi-Fi 단말의 복잡도 증대를 최소화하기 위해서이다.The Operating BW supported by the Wi-Fi standard has been continuously increasing, and the Wi-Fi7 standard supports an Operating BW of up to 320 MHz BW. Even when accessing an Operating channel with such a wide BW (e.g., 40, 80, 160, 320 MHz channels), a Wi-Fi terminal can perform channel access only when it has completed the backoff procedure on the Primary 20 MHz subchannel (main operating channel). At this time, since the backoff procedure can be completed only when the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is determined to be IDLE, the Wi-Fi terminal cannot obtain access to a wide channel up to the 320 MHz band when the Primary 20 MHz subchannel is determined to be BUSY. This is due to the dependency problem of the Wi-Fi terminal on the primary operating channel mentioned above, and the reason why the existing Wi-Fi standard has maintained a channel access procedure with such a dependency problem is to minimize the increase in complexity of the Wi-Fi terminal.

전술한 ETSI regulation에 대해서 보다 자세히 설명하면, ETSI regulation은 Wide-bandwidth(20 MHz를 초과하는 BW)에 대한 2가지 서로 다른 규범적 채널 접근 방법을 정의하였다. 첫 번째 규범적 채널 접근방법은, 접근하고자 하는 Wide-bandwidth에 포함된 모든 20 MHz 서브 채널 각각에서 EDCA(혹은 EDCA와 유사한 규칙으로 작동하는 channel access mechanism)를 이용하여 채널 접근 권한을 획득하고, 채널 접근 권한이 획득된 하나 혹은 하나 이상의 20 MHz 채널들에 대한 접근을 동시에 수행하는 것이다. 즉, 20 MHz를 초과하는 대역에 대해 채널 접속을 수행하는 단말은, 각 20 MHz에서 채널 접속 절차를 각각 수행하고, 채널 접속 절차를 완료하여 채널 접근 권한이 획득된 20 MHz 채널들에 대해 접근할 수 있다. ETSI regulation에 정의된 Wide-bandwidth에 대한 두 번째 규범적 채널 접근방법은, 1개의 주 동작 채널 (1개의 20 MHz channel)에서 채널 접속 절차를 완료하였을 때, 25 us 이상 수행한 측정의 결과가 idle로 확인된 다른 20 MHz channel들에 대해 함께 접근하는 것이다. 종래 Wi-Fi 단말이 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, 320 MHz 대역에 대해 접근하는 방법은 ETSI regulation에 정의된 상기 두 번째 규범적 채널 접근 방법을 이용한 것이다.More specifically, the ETSI regulation defines two different normative channel access methods for wide-bandwidths (BW exceeding 20 MHz). The first normative channel access method is to obtain channel access rights by using EDCA (or a channel access mechanism operating under rules similar to EDCA) for each 20 MHz sub-channel included in the wide-bandwidth to be accessed, and to perform access to one or more 20 MHz channels for which channel access rights have been obtained simultaneously. That is, a terminal performing channel access for a band exceeding 20 MHz can perform a channel access procedure for each 20 MHz sub-channel separately, and access the 20 MHz channels for which channel access rights have been obtained by completing the channel access procedure. The second normative channel access method for wide-bandwidth defined in the ETSI regulation is to simultaneously access other 20 MHz channels that have been determined to be idle in measurements performed for more than 25 us when the channel access procedure on one primary operating channel (one 20 MHz channel) has been completed. The method by which conventional Wi-Fi terminals access the 40 MHz, 80 MHz, 160 MHz, and 320 MHz bands utilizes the second normative channel access method defined in the ETSI regulation.

만약 Wi-Fi 단말이 상술한 ETSI regulation에서 정의한 첫 번째 규범적 채널 접근 방법을 사용한다면, Wi-Fi 단말은 특정 서브 채널에 대한 종속성 문제없이, Operating BW 내에서 IDLE로 판단되는 각 서브 채널들에 보다 유연하게 접근하는 것이 가능하다. 다만, Operating BW 내에 포함된 각 20 MHz channel들에 대해서 별도의 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 것은, Wi-Fi 단말의 하드웨어/동작 복잡도를 향상시키고 채널 접근 절차에 소요되는 에너지 소모를 과도하게 만드는 등 다른 측면에서 큰 비용을 초래하는 것이다. If a Wi-Fi terminal uses the first normative channel access method defined in the above-mentioned ETSI regulation, the Wi-Fi terminal can more flexibly access each subchannel determined as IDLE within the Operating BW without a dependency issue on a specific subchannel. However, performing a separate channel access procedure for each 20 MHz channel included in the Operating BW increases the hardware/operational complexity of the Wi-Fi terminal and causes excessive energy consumption for the channel access procedure, which incurs significant costs in other aspects.

이와 같은 이유로, 최신 Wi-Fi 표준인 Wi-Fi7에서도 각 20 MHz 서브 채널에 접근하기 위해 각 20 MHz 서브 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행하는 방법을 도입하지 않고, 주 동작 채널인 Primary 20 MHz channel에서 채널 접속을 수행하고, Primary 20 MHz channel에서 채널 접속 절차가 완료되었을 때 IDLE한 것으로 판단된 다른 서브 채널들에 대한 채널 접속을 수행하는 종래 Wi-Fi의 채널 접속 방법을 계승하였다.For this reason, even in Wi-Fi7, the latest Wi-Fi standard, a method of performing channel access on each 20 MHz subchannel to access each 20 MHz subchannel was not introduced, but rather the channel access method of the conventional Wi-Fi was inherited, in which channel access was performed on the Primary 20 MHz channel, which is the main operating channel, and then channel access was performed for other subchannels that were determined to be IDLE when the channel access procedure on the Primary 20 MHz channel was completed.

후술하는 본 발명의 실시예들을 통해서 설명되는 MLD의 중첩된 동작 채널(overlapping operating channel) 구성 방법은, 각 단말이 주 동작 채널을 이용해 Wide bandwidth에 대한 채널 접속을 시도하는 종래 Wi-Fi의 채널 접속 방법을 유지하며 주 동작 채널의 종속성을 낮추는 방법이다.The overlapping operating channel configuration method of MLD, which is explained through the embodiments of the present invention described below, is a method of lowering the dependency on the main operating channel while maintaining the channel access method of conventional Wi-Fi in which each terminal attempts channel access to a wide bandwidth using the main operating channel.

<보조(Auxiliary) AP/링크/BSS><Auxiliary AP/Link/BSS>

앞서 설명한 것과 같이, Wi-Fi7에서는 MLD(Multi-링크 Device)가 정의되었고, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 복수의 링크를 통해 setup이 수행된 상태인 ML-setup(Multi-링크 setup) 상태가 될 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 setup을 수행한 각 링크의 Operating channel은 서로 중첩(overlapping)되지 않은 상태로 setup되어야 한다. 이 때, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 복수의 링크를 통해 setup이 되었을 때, 상기 복수의 링크 각각에서 운용되는 AP(AP MLD에 소속된 AP)의 BSS는 서로 겹치지 않은 주파수 영역을 통해 운용되는 BSS이어야 한다. As explained above, MLD (Multi-link Device) is defined in Wi-Fi7, and AP MLD and non-AP MLD can be in an ML-setup (Multi-link setup) state where setup is performed through multiple links. At this time, the Operating channels of each link where the AP MLD and non-AP MLD perform setup must be setup so as not to overlap each other. At this time, when the AP MLD and non-AP MLD are setup through multiple links, the BSS of the AP (AP belonging to the AP MLD) operated in each of the multiple links must be a BSS operated through a non-overlapping frequency range.

다만, AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP들의 Operating BW는 서로 겹치는 것이 허용된다. AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 수행하는 Multi-링크 setup의 operating channel 측면에서의 규칙을 보다 간단한 예로 설명하면 다음과 같다. AP MLD는 제1 AP, 제2 AP, 제3 AP를 각각 링크1, 링크2, 링크3에서 운용할 수 있다. 이 때, 제1 AP와 제2 AP가 운용하는 두 BSS의 Operating channel은 중첩(Partially or fully overlapped)되고, 제3 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 Operating channel은 제1 AP 및 제2 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 Operating channel과 겹치지 않는다. 상기 AP MLD는 non-AP MLD와 ML setup을 수행하되, [링크1, 링크3], [링크2, 링크3] 과 같은 ML setup 상태를 허용하고, [링크1, 링크2], [링크1, 링크2, 링크3]과 같은 ML setup 상태를 허용하지 않는다. 이는, non-AP MLD가 setup을 수행한 링크들 중 링크1과 링크2가 서로 겹치는 Operating channel을 갖기 때문이다. 정리하면, AP MLD가 운용하는 각 AP의 BSS Operating channel은 서로 겹치는 것이 가능하지만, 각 non-AP MLD가 ML setup을 수행한 복수의 링크의 BSS Operating channel은 서로 겹치는 것이 허용되지 않는다. 이는, non-AP MLD가 ML setup을 수행한 특정 링크의 BSS Operating channel이 ML setup을 수행한 다른 링크의 BSS Operating channel과 겹치는 경우, 상기 특정 링크와 상기 다른 링크의 BSS는 서로 OBSS(Overlapping BSS)로 작용하여 동시에 서비스가 불가능한 상태의 BSS들이기 때문이다. However, the Operating BWs of each AP belonging to the AP MLD are allowed to overlap with each other. The rules in terms of the operating channel of the multi-link setup performed by the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD can be explained with a simpler example as follows. The AP MLD can operate the first AP, the second AP, and the third AP in link 1, link 2, and link 3, respectively. At this time, the Operating channels of the two BSSs operated by the first and second APs overlap (partially or fully overlapped), and the Operating channel of the BSS operated by the third AP does not overlap with the Operating channels of the BSSs operated by the first and second APs. The AP MLD performs ML setup with the non-AP MLD, but allows ML setup states such as [link 1, link 3] and [link 2, link 3], and does not allow ML setup states such as [link 1, link 2] and [link 1, link 2, link 3]. This is because, among the links on which the non-AP MLD performed setup, link 1 and link 2 have overlapping Operating channels. In summary, the BSS Operating channels of each AP operated by the AP MLD can overlap with each other, but the BSS Operating channels of multiple links on which the non-AP MLD performed ML setup are not permitted to overlap with each other. This is because, if the BSS Operating channel of a specific link on which the non-AP MLD performed ML setup overlaps with the BSS Operating channel of another link on which the ML setup was performed, the BSSs of the specific link and the other link act as OBSS (Overlapping BSS) and are BSSs that cannot provide service at the same time.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, AP MLD는 넌 프라이머리 채널들에 대한 채널 접속을 강화하기 위한 목적으로 둘 혹은 둘 이상의 AP들의 operating channel (AP가 BSS를 운용하는 채널)을 overlap되도록 설정할 수 있다. 이 때, operating channel이 overlap된 상기 AP들 중 1개의 AP는 주 AP (Primary AP)로 설정되고, 나머지 AP는 부 AP (보조 AP)로 설정될 수 있다. Primary AP와 보조 AP를 이용해 채널 접속을 수행하는 방법은 후술하는 <Overlapping AP를 이용한 채널 접속>를 통해 설명된다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, AP MLD may set operating channels (channels through which APs operate BSS) of two or more APs to overlap for the purpose of strengthening channel access for non-primary channels. At this time, one of the APs whose operating channels overlap may be set as a primary AP, and the remaining APs may be set as secondary APs. A method of performing channel access using a primary AP and a secondary AP is described through <Channel Access Using Overlapping AP> described below.

후술하는 본 발명의 설명에서, Primary AP와 보조 AP가 운용되는 링크는 각각 Primary 링크, 보조 링크로 명명되고, Primary AP가 운용하는 BSS는 Primary BSS, 보조 AP가 운용하는 BSS는 보조 BSS로 명명된다. Primary BSS와 보조 BSS의 operating channel은 서로 겹치기 때문에, 후술하는 본 발명의 설명에서, 두 AP는 Overlapping AP 관계인 것으로 표현된다. In the description of the present invention described below, the links on which the Primary AP and the Auxiliary AP operate are respectively named Primary link and Auxiliary link, the BSS on which the Primary AP operates is named Primary BSS, and the BSS on which the Auxiliary AP operates is named Auxiliary BSS. Since the operating channels of the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS overlap each other, in the description of the present invention described below, the two APs are expressed as having an overlapping AP relationship.

AP MLD가 운용하는 보조 AP는 쌍(pair)을 이루는 Primary AP를 갖으며, 쌍이 되는 보조 AP와 Primary AP의 operating channel은 overlap된다. Primary AP와 보조 AP는 서로 다른 수준의 동작을 지원한다. 일 예로, Primary AP는 주기적으로 Beacon frame (Beacon frame 및/또는 다른 종류의 Management frame, Group addressed frame 포함)을 전송하지만 보조 AP는 Beacon frame(Beacon frame 및/또는 다른 종류의 Management frame, Group addressed frame 포함)을 전송하지 않을 수 있다. 다른 예로, Primary AP는 Legacy STA들에 대한 서비스를 지원하지만 (즉 Wi-Fi 7, Wi-Fi 6 등 Wi-Fi 8이 아닌 이전 표준을 따르는 STA들), 보조 AP는 Legacy STA들에 대한 서비스를 수행하는 것이 제한될 수 있다. 또한, 보조 AP가 운용하는 BSS(보조 BSS)는 상기 보조 AP와 쌍이 되는 Primary AP가 운용하는 BSS(Primary BSS)의 member인 STA가 소속된 non-AP MLD의 STA들만이 member가 될 수 있는 BSS일 수 있다. A secondary AP operated by an AP MLD has a paired Primary AP, and the operating channels of the paired secondary AP and the Primary AP overlap. The Primary AP and the secondary AP support different levels of operations. For example, the Primary AP may periodically transmit a Beacon frame (including a Beacon frame and/or other types of Management frames, and a Group addressed frame), but the secondary AP may not transmit a Beacon frame (including a Beacon frame and/or other types of Management frames, and a Group addressed frame). For another example, the Primary AP may support services for legacy STAs (i.e., STAs that follow standards previous to Wi-Fi 8, such as Wi-Fi 7 and Wi-Fi 6), but the secondary AP may be restricted from performing services for legacy STAs. In addition, the BSS operated by the secondary AP (secondary BSS) may be a BSS in which only STAs of a non-AP MLD to which STAs that are members of the BSS (Primary BSS) operated by the Primary AP that is paired with the secondary AP belong may become members.

즉, non-AP MLD는 보조 링크에 setup된 상태가 되기 위해서 반드시 상기 보조 링크와 쌍이 되는 Primary 링크에 함께 setup되어야 한다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 보조 링크의 setup을 AP MLD에게 요청할 때에, 상기 보조 링크와 한 쌍인 Primary 링크에 대한 setup을 함께 요청해야 한다. 다시 말해서, non-AP MLD는 한 쌍의 Primary 링크와 보조 링크 중, 보조 링크에 대해서만 setup을 요청하는 frame(예를 들어 Association Request frame)을 전송해서는 안 된다. 다만, non-AP MLD와 AP MLD가 Primary 링크를 통해 이미 setup이 수행된 상태일 때, non-AP MLD는 보조 링크에 대한 추가 setup 요청을 AP MLD에게 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, non-AP MLD가 보조 링크에 대한 추가를 요청하기 위해 전송하는 frame은 링크 Reconfiguration Request frame일 수 있다.That is, in order for a non-AP MLD to be setup on a secondary link, it must be setup together with the primary link that is paired with the secondary link. That is, when a non-AP MLD requests setup of a secondary link to the AP MLD, it must also request setup for the primary link that is paired with the secondary link. In other words, a non-AP MLD must not transmit a frame (e.g., Association Request frame) that requests setup only for the secondary link among a pair of primary and secondary links. However, when a non-AP MLD and an AP MLD have already performed setup through the primary link, the non-AP MLD can perform an additional setup request for the secondary link to the AP MLD. In this case, the frame that the non-AP MLD transmits to request addition of the secondary link may be a Link Reconfiguration Request frame.

즉, Primary 링크와 setup된 상태인 non-AP MLD만이 상기 Primary 링크와 쌍이 되는 보조 링크에 함께 setup될 수 있다. That is, only a non-AP MLD that is set up with the Primary link can be set up with the secondary link that is paired with the Primary link.

즉, AP MLD는 non-AP MLD로부터 Multi-링크 setup을 요청받았을 때, 상기 non-AP MLD가 보조 링크에 대한 setup만을 요청하고 상기 보조 링크와 쌍이 되는 Primary 링크에 대한 setup을 요청하지 않았다면, 상기 보조 링크에 대한 setup을 승낙해서는 안 된다. 다만, non-AP MLD는 한 쌍인 Primary 링크와 보조 링크 중, Primary 링크에만 setup하는 것을 AP MLD에게 요청할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 non-AP MLD가 상기 Primary 링크와 제3의 링크에 대한 setup을 함께 요청(ML setup을 요청)하였다면, AP MLD와 Primary 링크 및 제3의 링크를 통해 연결된 ML setup을 수행할 수 있다.That is, when the AP MLD receives a request for a multi-link setup from a non-AP MLD, if the non-AP MLD requests only the setup for the secondary link and does not request the setup for the Primary link that is paired with the secondary link, the AP MLD should not accept the setup for the secondary link. However, the non-AP MLD can request the AP MLD to perform setup for only the Primary link among the pair of Primary and Secondary links. In this case, if the non-AP MLD requests the setup for both the Primary link and the third link (requests ML setup), the ML setup connected through the AP MLD, the Primary link, and the third link can be performed.

<Overlapping AP><Overlapping AP>

이처럼 AP MLD가 operating channel이 중첩되는 두 개(Primary AP 및 보조 AP) 혹은 두 개 이상(Primary AP 및 제1 보조 AP, 제2 보조 AP 등)의 AP를 운용하는 이유는 각 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 Primary 20 MHz channel들을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고, 채널 접속을 완료한 AP를 통해 non-AP MLD들에 대한 서비스를 지원하기 위함이다. 이 때, 상기 Primary AP와 보조 AP는 서로 독립적인 Radio를 사용하는 AP이거나, 혹은 1개의 Radio를 이용해 운용되는 AP들일 수 있다. 다만 AP MLD는 Overlapping AP들을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하되, 특정 시점에는 하나의 AP를 통해서만 채널 접속을 수행한다. 이때, 채널 접속을 수행한다는 의미는 EDCA 규칙에 따라 백오프 카운터를 줄이는 등 채널 접근을 위한 일련의 절차를 수행함을 의미한다.The reason why AP MLD operates two (primary AP and auxiliary AP) or more than two APs (primary AP and first auxiliary AP, second auxiliary AP, etc.) with overlapping operating channels is to perform channel access through the primary 20 MHz channels of the BSS operated by each AP and to support services for non-AP MLDs through the AP that has completed channel access. At this time, the primary AP and the auxiliary AP may be APs that use independent radios or APs that are operated using a single radio. However, AP MLD performs channel access through overlapping APs, and performs channel access through only one AP at a specific time. At this time, performing channel access means performing a series of procedures for channel access, such as reducing the backoff counter according to the EDCA rules.

Primary AP와 보조 AP가 독립적인 Radio를 이용해 구성되는 구현이 있을 수 있다. 이 경우, Primary AP가 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 PPDU 전송을 수행하는 동시에, 보조 AP가 보조 channel(보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널)을 통해 수신되는 다른 PPDU를 수신하거나, CCA, PD(Packet detection)등을 수행하는 것이 가능하다. 이처럼 독립적인 Radio를 갖는 보조 AP는, AP에 의해 보조 AP로 지정되지 않은 경우 일반적인 AP로 기능하는 것이 가능한 Capability를 갖을 수 있다. There may be an implementation where the Primary AP and the Secondary AP are configured using independent Radios. In this case, the Primary AP can perform PPDU transmission through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel, while the Secondary AP can receive other PPDUs received through the Secondary channel (the Primary channel of the Secondary BSS), or perform CCA, PD (Packet detection), etc. In this way, the Secondary AP with independent Radios can have the Capability to function as a general AP when it is not designated as a Secondary AP by the AP.

또한, Primary AP와 보조 AP가 하나의 Radio를 공유하는 구성을 갖는 구현도 가능할 수 있다. 이 경우, Primary AP가 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 PPDU를 전송할 때, 보조 AP는 자신의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)에 대한 송/수신, CCA, PD 등을 수행하는 것이 불가능하다. 이는, 두 AP가 공통적으로 사용하는 Radio가 Primary AP의 동작을 위해 사용되면, 보조 AP가 사용할 수 있는 Radio가 존재하지 않게 되기 때문이다. 즉, Primary AP와 보조 AP는 Logical하게만 분리되어 존재하는 AP들이며 물리적으로는 1개의 장치(Radio, RF chain, 안테나 등)를 이용해 운용되는 AP들 일 수 있다. 이와 같이 AP MLD가 1개의 Radio를 이용해 복수의 AP들(Primary AP 및 보조 AP들)을 운용할 수 있는 이유는, 상기 복수의 AP들 중 특정 시점에는 1개의 AP에 대해서만 Radio가 활용되기 때문이다. 즉, AP MLD는 Primary AP에 의해 채널 접속 절차가 진행되거나, PPDU 송/수신이 수행되는 시점에는 보조 AP들에 대한 채널 접속/PPDU 송수신 등을 지원하지 않을 수 있다. 또한, 특정 보조 AP를 통해 채널 접속 절차를 진행하거나 PPDU 송/수신을 수행하는 시점에는 Primary AP 및 다른 보조 AP들에 대한 지원이 필요하지 않는 방식으로 복수의 AP들이 1개의 Radio를 공유하며 동작된다. 즉, AP MLD는 Primary 링크와 보조 링크에 대해 Single-Radio Multi-링크 동작을 수행할 수 있다. Also, an implementation in which the Primary AP and the Secondary AP share a single Radio may be possible. In this case, when the Primary AP transmits a PPDU through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel, the Secondary AP cannot perform transmission/reception, CCA, PD, etc. for its primary channel (secondary channel). This is because if the Radio commonly used by the two APs is used for the operation of the Primary AP, there is no Radio that can be used by the Secondary AP. In other words, the Primary AP and the Secondary AP are APs that exist logically separately, and can be APs that are physically operated using a single device (Radio, RF chain, antenna, etc.). The reason why the AP MLD can operate multiple APs (Primary AP and Secondary APs) using a single Radio is because the Radio is utilized for only one AP among the multiple APs at a specific time. That is, AP MLD may not support channel access/PPDU transmission/reception for auxiliary APs when the channel access procedure is performed by the Primary AP or when PPDU transmission/reception is performed. In addition, when the channel access procedure is performed or PPDU transmission/reception is performed through a specific auxiliary AP, multiple APs share one radio and operate in a way that support for the Primary AP and other auxiliary APs is not required. That is, AP MLD can perform Single-Radio Multi-Link operation for the Primary link and the auxiliary link.

이 때, 1개의 Radio를 이용해 복수의 링크에서 동작하는 AP MLD는, 상기 복수의 링크 중 특정 링크에서 채널 접속을 수행하거나 PPDU 송/수신을 수행하는 동안 나머지 링크들에 대한 MediumSync를 잃어버릴 수 있다. 이 때, MediumSync를 잃어버렸다는 의미는, 각 링크에서 송/수신되는 다른 PPDU(frame)들을 수신함으로써 관리했어야 하는 NAV timer의 관리가 수행되지 못했음을 의미한다. 따라서, 특정 링크를 통해 수행하는 동작으로 인해 나머지 링크들에 대한 MediumSync를 잃어버린 AP MLD는 상기 다른 링크에서 채널 접속을 수행하기에 앞서, MediumSync를 회복해야 할 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD는 MediumSync를 잃어버린 링크의 MediumSync 회복을 위해, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간 동안 상기 MediumSync를 잃어버린 링크에서 CCA를 수행해야 할 수 있다. 다른 방법으로, AP MLD는 MediumSync를 잃어버린 링크의 MediumSync 회복을 위해, 특정 non-AP MLD에게 상기 MediumSync를 잃어버린 링크에서 특정 frame(예를 들어 MediumSync Recovery frame)를 전송하도록 지시할 수 있다. 이 경우, AP MLD로부터 상기 특정 frame의 전송을 지시받은 non-AP MLD는, AP MLD가 상기 특정 frame의 전송을 지시한 링크가 idle(PHY CCA 및 Virtual CCA 결과 idle)인 것으로 판단될 때 AP MLD에게 상기 링크를 통해 상기 특정 frame을 전송해야 한다. 만약, 상기 특정 frame의 전송을 지시받은 시점부터 지시된 시간 혹은 기설정된 시간이 경과할 때까지 상기 지시된 링크가 busy상태로 유지되는 경우, non-AP MLD는 상기 특정 frame을 AP MLD에게 전송하지 않을 수 있다.At this time, an AP MLD operating on multiple links using one Radio may lose MediumSync for the remaining links while performing channel access or PPDU transmission/reception on a specific link among the multiple links. At this time, the loss of MediumSync means that the management of the NAV timer, which should have been managed by receiving other PPDUs (frames) transmitted/received on each link, was not performed. Therefore, the AP MLD that lost MediumSync for the remaining links due to an operation performed on a specific link may need to recover MediumSync before performing channel access on the other links. At this time, the AP MLD may need to perform CCA on the link that lost MediumSync for a time corresponding to the MediumSync time in order to recover MediumSync for the link that lost MediumSync. Alternatively, the AP MLD may instruct a specific non-AP MLD to transmit a specific frame (e.g., MediumSync Recovery frame) on the link that lost MediumSync in order to recover MediumSync for the link that lost MediumSync. In this case, the non-AP MLD, which has been instructed to transmit the specific frame from the AP MLD, must transmit the specific frame to the AP MLD through the link when the link to which the AP MLD instructed to transmit the specific frame is determined to be idle (idle as a result of PHY CCA and Virtual CCA). If the instructed link is maintained in a busy state until the instructed time or a preset time has elapsed from the time when the transmission of the specific frame is instructed, the non-AP MLD may not transmit the specific frame to the AP MLD.

도 16은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 주 AP(Primary AP)와 보조 AP(Auxiliary AP)가 포함된 AP MLD의 구성 및 동작 채널(Operating channel)의 설정 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 16 illustrates an example of a method for configuring an AP MLD including a primary AP and an auxiliary AP having overlapping operating channels and setting an operating channel according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 16(a)를 참조하면 AP MLD에는 3개의 AP MLD가 소속되어 있다. 이 때, AP1은 Primary AP로 기능하고, AP2는 Primary AP와 쌍을 이루는 보조 AP로 기능한다. AP3는 일반 AP이다.Referring to Fig. 16(a), three AP MLDs belong to the AP MLD. At this time, AP1 functions as the Primary AP, AP2 functions as the Auxiliary AP paired with the Primary AP, and AP3 is a general AP.

도 16(b-1)를 참조하면 Primary AP와 보조 AP는 정확히 같은 Operating channel (특정 320 MHz)에서 동작한다. 다만, Primary AP의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널은 Operating channel 내에서 가장 낮은 쪽 20 MHz 서브 채널에 위치하고, 보조 AP의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널 (보조 channel)은 Operating channel 내에서 가장 높은 쪽 20 MHz 서브 채널에 위치한다. Referring to Fig. 16(b-1), the Primary AP and the Auxiliary AP operate on exactly the same Operating channel (specifically 320 MHz). However, the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary AP is located at the lowest 20 MHz subchannel within the Operating channel, and the Primary 20 MHz subchannel (Auxiliary channel) of the Auxiliary AP is located at the highest 20 MHz subchannel within the Operating channel.

도 16(b-2)를 참조하면 보조 AP의 Operating channel은 Primary AP의 Operating channel에 포함된다. 다만, 이 경우에도 Primary AP의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널과 보조 AP의 Primary 서브 채널(보조 channel)은 서로 다른 20 MHz로 설정된다.Referring to Fig. 16(b-2), the operating channel of the auxiliary AP is included in the operating channel of the primary AP. However, even in this case, the primary 20 MHz subchannel of the primary AP and the primary subchannel (auxiliary channel) of the auxiliary AP are set to different 20 MHz.

도 16(b-3)을 참조하면 보조 AP의 Operating channel과 Primary AP의 Operating channel은 서로 일부 겹친다. 다만, Primary AP의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널과 보조 AP의 Primary 서브 채널(보조 channel)은 두 AP의 Operating channel이 겹치는 대역에 위치한다. Referring to Fig. 16(b-3), the Operating channel of the secondary AP and the Operating channel of the primary AP partially overlap with each other. However, the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the primary AP and the Primary subchannel (auxiliary channel) of the secondary AP are located in the band where the Operating channels of the two APs overlap.

후술하는 본 발명의 일 실시예들은 도 16 (b-1)과 같이 Primary AP(BSS)와 보조 AP(BSS)의 operating channel이 서로 완전히 겹치는 상황을 가정하여 작성되었다. 하지만, 도 16의 (b-2) 및 (b-3)와 같은 operating channel 구성도 본 발명에서 제공하는 방법을 사용하여 특정 operating channel(들)에 대한 접근성을 향상시키기 위해 사용될 수 있는 Primary/보조 BSS operating channel 구성 방법으로 이해되어야 한다.The embodiments of the present invention described below were written assuming a situation where the operating channels of the Primary AP (BSS) and the Secondary AP (BSS) completely overlap each other, as in Fig. 16 (b-1). However, it should be understood that operating channel configurations such as Fig. 16 (b-2) and (b-3) are also Primary/Secondary BSS operating channel configuration methods that can be used to improve accessibility to specific operating channel(s) using the method provided by the present invention.

<Overlapping AP를 이용한 채널 접속><Channel Access Using Overlapping AP>

Primary BSS 및 Primary BSS와 overlap된 operating channel를 갖는 보조 BSS를 이용해 수행되는 AP MLD 채널 접속 절차는 다음과 같다.The AP MLD channel access procedure performed using the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS with an operating channel that overlaps with the Primary BSS is as follows.

Primary BSS와 보조 BSS는 동일한 operating channel(예를 들어 두 BSS 모두 동일한 320 MHz channel에서 운용됨)를 이용해 운용된다. 이 때, Primary BSS와 보조 BSS는 서로 다른 20 MHz 서브 채널을 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널로 설정한다. 이 때, 보조 BSS의 operating channel은 Primary BSS의 operating channel의 subset인 것이 가능하다. The primary BSS and the secondary BSS operate using the same operating channel (for example, both BSSs operate on the same 320 MHz channel). At this time, the primary BSS and the secondary BSS set different 20 MHz subchannels as the primary 20 MHz subchannel. At this time, the operating channel of the secondary BSS can be a subset of the operating channel of the primary BSS.

보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널 (보조 channel)은 Primary BSS의 프라이머리 채널이 위치한 80 MHz subblock이 아닌 다른 80 MHz subblock에 위치해야 할 수 있다. 즉, Primary BSS의 Primary 80 MHz subblock에 포함된 20 MHz 서브 채널은 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)로 설정될 수 없다.The primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS may be located in an 80 MHz subblock other than the 80 MHz subblock in which the primary channel of the Primary BSS is located. That is, a 20 MHz subchannel included in the Primary 80 MHz subblock of the Primary BSS cannot be set as the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS.

만약 복수의 보조 AP가 Primary AP와 AP 쌍을 형성한다면, 상기 복수의 보조 AP들은 각각 서로 다른 80 MHz subblock에 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)이 설정되어야 한다. 일 예로, 320 MHz BW의 Primary BSS와 쌍인 3개의 보조 BSS들(보조 AP1, 보조 AP2, 보조 AP3)이 있다면, 상기 3개의 보조 BSS들은 각각 Primary BSS의 Secondary 80 MHz subblock, Secondary 160 MHz 중 낮은 쪽 주파수에 해당하는 80 MHz subblock, Secondary 160 MHz 중 높은 쪽 주파수에 해당하는 80 MHz subblock에 각각 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel1, 보조 channel2, 보조 channel3)을 설정해야 한다.If multiple auxiliary APs form an AP pair with the Primary AP, the multiple auxiliary APs must each have their primary channel (auxiliary channel) set to a different 80 MHz subblock. For example, if there are three auxiliary BSSs (auxiliary AP1, auxiliary AP2, auxiliary AP3) paired with a Primary BSS of 320 MHz BW, the three auxiliary BSSs must each have their primary channel (auxiliary channel1, auxiliary channel2, auxiliary channel3) set to the 80 MHz subblock corresponding to the lower frequency among the Secondary 80 MHz subblock and the Secondary 160 MHz subblock of the Primary BSS, and the 80 MHz subblock corresponding to the higher frequency among the Secondary 160 MHz.

Primary BSS의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널이 IDLE로 판단된다면, AP MLD는 Primary BSS의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 Primary AP를 통해 PPDU를 전송한다. 즉, Primary AP를 통해 전송된 PPDU에 포함되어 있는 frame들은 전송 장치의 MAC address(TA)가 Primary AP의 MAC address(혹은 BSSID)로 설정된다. 또한 Primary BSS에서 전송되는 frame(Primary AP에 의해 전송되거나 Primary BSS의 member인 STA에 의해 전송)의 Address 3 field는 To DS, From DS subfield의 값에 따라 Primary AP의 BSSID로 설정될 수 있다. 또한, Primary BSS의 member인 non-AP STA가 전송하는 frame은 To DS, From DS subfield가 각각 1 과 0일 때, Address 1 field(RA field)가 Primary BSS의 BSSID로 설정된다. 또한, Primary AP를 통해 전송된 PPDU에 포함되어 있는 frame들은 목적 장치의 MAC address(RA)가 non-AP MLD의 non-AP STA들 중, Primary 링크에서 운용되는 non-AP STA의 MAC address로 설정된다. 이 때, 상기 PPDU가 HE/EHT/UHR PPDU로 전송되는 경우, 상기 PPDU의 preamble을 통해 지시되는 BSS Color는 Primary AP가 운용하는 BSS의 ID를 기초로 설정된다. 이 때, Primary BSS의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 채널 접속이 수행되는 구간동안 보조 BSS는 비활성 상태로 유지된다.If the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary BSS is determined to be IDLE, the AP MLD performs channel access through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary BSS and then transmits the PPDU through the Primary AP. That is, the frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the Primary AP have the MAC address (TA) of the transmitting device set to the MAC address (or BSSID) of the Primary AP. In addition, the Address 3 field of a frame transmitted from the Primary BSS (transmitted by the Primary AP or transmitted by an STA that is a member of the Primary BSS) may be set to the BSSID of the Primary AP depending on the values of the To DS and From DS subfields. In addition, the Address 1 field (RA field) of a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that is a member of the Primary BSS is set to the BSSID of the Primary BSS when the To DS and From DS subfields are 1 and 0, respectively. In addition, frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the Primary AP have the MAC address (RA) of the destination device set to the MAC address of the non-AP STA operating on the Primary link among the non-AP STAs of the non-AP MLD. At this time, if the PPDU is transmitted as a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU, the BSS Color indicated through the preamble of the PPDU is set based on the ID of the BSS operated by the Primary AP. At this time, the secondary BSS is maintained in an inactive state during the section in which channel access is performed through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel of the Primary BSS.

보조 BSS가 비활성 상태로 유지된다는 의미는, 보조 AP를 통해 PPDU 송/수신이 수행되지 않음을 의미한다.The secondary BSS remaining inactive means that no PPDU transmission/reception is performed through the secondary AP.

보조 BSS가 비활성 상태로 유지되는 구간동안, 보조 AP는 자신의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)을 통해 채널 접속을 수행해서는 안 된다. 이 때, 채널 접속을 수행하지 않는다는 의미는 채널 접속을 수행하기 위해 관리되는 백오프 카운터가 비활성 시간 구간 동안 줄어들 수 없음을 의미한다. During the period in which the secondary BSS remains inactive, the secondary AP must not perform channel access through its primary channel (secondary channel). In this case, not performing channel access means that the backoff counter managed for performing channel access cannot be decreased during the inactive time period.

독립적인 Radio를 갖는 구성의 보조 AP는 비활성 상태로 유지되는 구간 동안에도 PHY CCA를 수행하거나 Packet Detection을 수행하는 것이 가능할 수 있다. 이 경우, 보조 AP는 수신된 PPDU(frame)을 통해 획득된 정보를 기초로 자신의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)에 대한 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. A secondary AP with an independent radio may be able to perform PHY CCA or Packet Detection even during periods when it is inactive. In this case, the secondary AP can set the NAV for its primary channel (secondary channel) based on the information obtained through the received PPDU (frame).

보조 AP는 보조 channel을 이용해 백오프 절차를 수행할 때, EDCA 규칙에 따라 백오프 카운터를 줄일 수 있는 상황이고, 보조 AP가 활성 상태일 때에만 백오프 카운터를 줄일 수 있다. 즉, EDCA 규칙에 따라 백오프 카운터를 줄일 수 있는 상황이라 할지라도 보조 AP가 비활성 상태일 때에는 보조 AP의 백오프 카운터(보다 정확히는 보조 AP가 갖는 4개의 Access Category 각각에 대한 백오프 카운터)가 줄지 않는다.When the secondary AP performs the backoff procedure using the secondary channel, the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, and the backoff counter can be reduced only when the secondary AP is active. In other words, even if the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, the backoff counter of the secondary AP (more precisely, the backoff counter for each of the four Access Categories of the secondary AP) is not reduced when the secondary AP is inactive.

보조 AP는 비활성 상태일 때 PHY CCA 및 PD 등을 수행할 수 없는 상태일 수 있다. 이는 보조 AP가 비활성 상태일 때 보조 AP가 이용할 수 있는 RF(Radio frequency front end)가 존재하지 않기 때문일 수 있다. 이와 같은 상황은 보조 AP가 Primary AP와 Logical하게는 다른 AP이지만, 물리적으로는 1개의 Radio를 공유하는 구성일 때 발생하는 현상일 수 있다. 이 경우, 보조의 AP는 채널 접속을 시작할 때에, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간 구간에 대해 NAV를 설정해야 할 수 있다. 즉, 채널 접속을 시작한 후, 아무런 PPDU(frame)이 수신되지 않더라도, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간 동안 medium이 BUSY(Virtual CCA 결과 busy)인 것처럼 고려하여 채널 접속을 수행해야 한다.The secondary AP may not be able to perform PHY CCA and PD, etc. when it is inactive. This may be because there is no RF (radio frequency front end) that the secondary AP can use when it is inactive. This situation may occur when the secondary AP is a logically different AP from the primary AP, but is configured to physically share one radio. In this case, the secondary AP may need to set NAV for the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time when starting a channel connection. That is, even if no PPDU (frame) is received after starting a channel connection, the channel connection should be performed by considering the medium as BUSY (busy as a result of Virtual CCA) during the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time.

Primary BSS의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 다른 BSS의 PPDU(frame)가 수신되는 경우, AP MLD는 상기 수신된 PPDU를 통해 확인된 상기 다른 BSS의 TXOP 구간동안 Primary AP(BSS)를 비활성상태로 전환되고, 보조 AP는 활성 상태로 전환된다. 다만, 상기 다른 BSS의 PPDU가 수신되는 상황에서 PHY CCA를 통해 확인(판단)한 특정 보조 AP의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)의 상태가 BUSY인 경우, 상기 특정 보조 AP는 비활성 상태로 유지될 수 있다. 만약 PHY CCA를 통해 확인된 IDLE 보조 channel(Primary AP와 쌍을 이루는 보조 AP들의 프라이머리 채널)이 존재하지 않을 경우, Primary AP는 비활성상태로 전환되지 않고 활성상태로 유지될 수 있다. 이 때, 비활성상태로 전환된 Primary AP의 동작은 전술한 보조 AP가 비활성상태일 때 수행하는 동작과 동일/유사한 것일 수 있다.When a PPDU (frame) of another BSS is received through the Primary 20 MHz sub-channel of the Primary BSS, the AP MLD switches the Primary AP (BSS) to the inactive state and the secondary AP to the active state during the TXOP period of the other BSS confirmed through the received PPDU. However, when the PPDU of the other BSS is received, if the state of the primary channel (secondary channel) of a specific secondary AP confirmed (determined) through PHY CCA is BUSY, the specific secondary AP may be maintained in the inactive state. If the IDLE secondary channel (primary channel of the secondary APs paired with the Primary AP) confirmed through PHY CCA does not exist, the Primary AP may not be switched to the inactive state and may be maintained in the active state. In this case, the operation of the Primary AP switched to the inactive state may be the same as/similar to the operation performed when the above-mentioned secondary AP is in the inactive state.

상기 Primary BSS가 비활성상태로 유지되는 시간 구간은 상기 다른 BSS의 TXOP이 종료될 때까지 일 수 있다. 상기 Primary BSS가 비활성상태로 유지되는 시간 구간은 상기 다른 BSS의 PPDU의 종료 시점까지 일 수 있다.The time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be until the TXOP of the other BSS ends. The time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be until the end time of the PPDU of the other BSS.

상기 Primary BSS가 비활성상태로 유지되는 시간 구간은 보조 BSS를 통해 다른 BSS의 PPDU가 수신될 때까지 일 수 있다. The time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be until a PPDU from another BSS is received through the Secondary BSS.

상기 Primary BSS가 비활성상태로 유지되는 시간 구간은 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)을 통해 수행한 채널 접속으로 전송한 PPDU가 Primary AP의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 이후까지 일 수 있다.The time period during which the above Primary BSS remains inactive may be until after the PPDU transmitted through the channel access performed through the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS occupies the primary channel of the Primary AP.

상기 Primary BSS가 비활성상태로 유지되는 시간 구간은, Primary BSS의 다음 TBTT(Target Beacon Transmission Time) 이전까지로 제한될 수 있다. 즉, Primary BSS의 다음 TBTT가 도래한 시점에서는, Primary BSS가 활성상태를 갖고 보조 BSS들은 비활성상태를 갖는다. The time period during which the Primary BSS remains inactive may be limited to before the next TBTT (Target Beacon Transmission Time) of the Primary BSS. That is, when the next TBTT of the Primary BSS arrives, the Primary BSS is in an active state and the secondary BSSs are in an inactive state.

상기 Primary BSS가 비활성상태로 유지되는 시간 구간은, Primary BSS에서 운용되는 R-TWT(Restricted Target Wake Time) SP(Service period)의 시작시점 이전까지로 제한될 수 있다. 즉, Primary BSS의 R-TWT SP의 시작시점이 도래한 시점에서는, Primary BSS가 활성상태를 갖고 보조 BSS들은 비활성상태를 갖는다. The time period during which the Primary BSS is maintained in an inactive state may be limited to before the start time of the R-TWT (Restricted Target Wake Time) SP (Service period) operated by the Primary BSS. That is, when the start time of the R-TWT SP of the Primary BSS arrives, the Primary BSS is in an active state and the secondary BSSs are in an inactive state.

보조 AP(BSS)가 활성 상태로 유지되는 시간 동안 AP MLD는 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한다. 보조 channel을 통해 수행한 채널 접속 절차가 완료되면, AP MLD는 보조 AP를 통해 PPDU를 전송한다. 즉, 보조 AP를 통해 전송된 PPDU에 포함되어 있는 frame들은 전송 장치의 MAC address(TA)가 보조 AP의 MAC address로 설정된다. 또한 보조 BSS에서 전송되는 frame(보조 AP에 의해 전송되거나 보조 BSS의 member인 STA에 의해 전송)의 Address 3 field는 To DS, From DS subfield의 값에 따라 보조 AP의 BSSID로 설정될 수 있다. 또한, 보조 BSS의 member인 non-AP STA가 전송하는 frame은 To DS, From DS subfield가 각각 1 과 0일 때, Address 1 field(RA field)가 보조 BSS의 BSSID로 설정된다. 또한, 보조 AP를 통해 전송된 PPDU에 포함되어 있는 frame들은 목적 장치의 MAC address(RA)가 non-AP MLD의 non-AP STA들 중, 보조 링크에서 운용되는 non-AP STA의 MAC address로 설정된다. 이 때, 상기 PPDU가 HE/EHT/UHR PPDU로 전송되는 경우, 상기 PPDU의 preamble을 통해 지시되는 BSS Color는 보조 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 color를 기초로 설정된다. 이 때, 보조 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 color는 Primary AP의 BSS color와 동일할 수 있다. 이 때, 보조 AP(BSS)의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)을 통해 채널 접속이 수행되는 구간동안 Primary AP(BSS)는 비활성 상태로 유지된다. While the secondary AP (BSS) remains active, the AP MLD performs channel access through the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS. When the channel access procedure performed through the secondary channel is completed, the AP MLD transmits a PPDU through the secondary AP. That is, the frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the secondary AP have the MAC address (TA) of the transmitting device set to the MAC address of the secondary AP. In addition, the Address 3 field of a frame transmitted from the secondary BSS (transmitted by the secondary AP or transmitted by an STA that is a member of the secondary BSS) may be set to the BSSID of the secondary AP depending on the values of the To DS and From DS subfields. In addition, the Address 1 field (RA field) of a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that is a member of the secondary BSS is set to the BSSID of the secondary BSS when the To DS and From DS subfields are 1 and 0, respectively. In addition, frames included in the PPDU transmitted through the secondary AP have the MAC address (RA) of the destination device set to the MAC address of the non-AP STA operating in the secondary link among the non-AP STAs of the non-AP MLD. At this time, if the PPDU is transmitted as a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU, the BSS Color indicated through the preamble of the PPDU is set based on the color of the BSS operated by the secondary AP. At this time, the color of the BSS operated by the secondary AP may be the same as the BSS color of the Primary AP. At this time, the Primary AP (BSS) is maintained in an inactive state during the section in which channel access is performed through the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary AP (BSS).

Primary BSS가 비활성 상태로 유지된다는 의미는, Primary AP를 통해 PPDU 송/수신이 수행되지 않음을 의미한다.The Primary BSS remains inactive, meaning that no PPDU transmission/reception is performed through the Primary AP.

Primary BSS가 비활성 상태로 유지되는 구간동안, Primary AP는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행해서는 안 된다. 이 때, 채널 접속을 수행하지 않는다는 의미는 채널 접속을 수행하기 위해 관리되는 백오프 카운터가 비활성 시간 구간 동안 줄어들 수 없음을 의미한다. During the period in which the Primary BSS remains inactive, the Primary AP must not perform channel access through its primary channel. In this case, not performing channel access means that the backoff counter managed for performing channel access cannot be decreased during the inactive time period.

독립적인 Radio를 갖는 구성의 Primary AP는 비활성 상태로 유지되는 구간 동안에도 PHY CCA를 수행하거나 Packet Detection을 수행하는 것이 가능할 수 있다. 이 경우, Primary AP는 수신된 PPDU(frame)을 통해 획득된 정보를 기초로 자신의 프라이머리 채널에 대한 NAV를 설정할 수 있다. A Primary AP in a configuration with an independent Radio may be able to perform PHY CCA or Packet Detection even during periods when it remains inactive. In this case, the Primary AP can set the NAV for its primary channel based on the information obtained through the received PPDU (frame).

Primary AP는 프라이머리 채널을 이용해 백오프 절차를 수행할 때, EDCA 규칙에 따라 백오프 카운터를 줄일 수 있는 상황이고, Primary AP가 활성 상태일 때에만 백오프 카운터를 줄일 수 있다. 즉, EDCA 규칙에 따라 백오프 카운터를 줄일 수 있는 상황이라 할지라도 Primary AP가 비활성 상태일 때에는 Primary AP의 백오프 카운터(보다 정확히는 Primary AP가 갖는 4개의 Access Category 각각에 대한 백오프 카운터)가 줄지 않는다.When the Primary AP performs the backoff procedure using the primary channel, the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, and the backoff counter can be reduced only when the Primary AP is active. In other words, even if the backoff counter can be reduced according to the EDCA rules, the backoff counter of the Primary AP (more precisely, the backoff counter for each of the four Access Categories of the Primary AP) is not reduced when the Primary AP is inactive.

Primary AP는 비활성 상태일 때 PHY CCA 및 PD 등을 수행할 수 없는 상태일 수 있다. 이는 Primary AP가 비활성 상태일 때 Primary AP가 이용할 수 있는 RF(Radio frequency front end)가 존재하지 않기 때문일 수 있다. 이와 같은 상황은 Primary AP가 보조 AP와 Logical하게는 다른 AP이지만, 물리적으로는 1개의 Radio를 공유하는 구성일 때 발생하는 현상일 수 있다. 이 경우, Primary AP는 채널 접속을 시작할 때에, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간 구간에 대해 NAV를 설정해야 할 수 있다. 즉, 채널 접속을 시작한 후, 아무런 PPDU(frame)이 수신되지 않더라도, MediumSync time에 해당하는 시간 동안 medium이 BUSY(Virtual CCA 결과 busy)인 것처럼 고려하여 채널 접속을 수행해야 한다.The Primary AP may not be able to perform PHY CCA and PD, etc. when it is inactive. This may be because there is no RF (radio frequency front end) that the Primary AP can use when the Primary AP is inactive. This situation may occur when the Primary AP is a logically different AP from the Secondary AP, but physically shares a single radio. In this case, the Primary AP may need to set NAV for the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time when starting a channel connection. That is, even if no PPDU (frame) is received after starting a channel connection, the channel connection should be performed by considering the medium as BUSY (busy as a result of Virtual CCA) during the time period corresponding to the MediumSync time.

보조 AP가 획득한 TXOP은 Primary BSS의 TBTT보다 일찍 종료되어야 할 수 있다. 이는, Primary BSS의 TBTT에 맞춰 Primary AP가 Beacon frame을 전송할 수 있도록 보장하기 위한 제한이다. 따라서, 보조 AP은, Primary BSS의 다음 TBTT보다 일찍 자신의 TXOP이 종료되도록 TXOP을 관리해야 한다. 이 때, 보조 AP의 TXOP은, Primary BSS의 TBTT보다 최소 T 만큼 일찍 종료되어야 할 수 있다. 이 때, T는, 비활성 상태의 Primary AP(BSS)가 활성상태로 전환할 때 필요한 시간(delay)를 포함하는 시간 구간이다. 이 때, T는, Primary AP가 활성상태로 전환된 후 MediumSync를 회복하기 위해 소요되는 시간(예를 들어 MediumSync time)을 포함하는 시간 구간일 수 있다. The TXOP acquired by the secondary AP may be terminated earlier than the TBTT of the primary BSS. This is a restriction to ensure that the Primary AP can transmit the Beacon frame according to the TBTT of the primary BSS. Therefore, the secondary AP must manage its TXOP so that its TXOP is terminated earlier than the next TBTT of the primary BSS. At this time, the TXOP of the secondary AP may be terminated at least T earlier than the TBTT of the primary BSS. At this time, T is a time interval including the time (delay) required when the primary AP (BSS) in the inactive state transitions to the active state. At this time, T may be a time interval including the time required to recover MediumSync after the primary AP transitions to the active state (for example, MediumSync time).

보조 AP가 획득한 TXOP은 Primary BSS의 R-TWT SP 시작 시점보다 일찍 종료되어야 할 수 있다. 이는, Primary BSS의 R-TWT SP에 맞춰 Primary AP가 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있도록 보장하기 위한 제한이다. 따라서, 보조 AP은, Primary BSS에서 운용되는 R-TWT SP의 시작시점보다 일찍 자신의 TXOP이 종료되도록 TXOP을 관리해야 한다. 이 때, 보조 AP의 TXOP은, Primary BSS의 R-TWT SP 시작시점보다 최소 T 만큼 일찍 종료되어야 할 수 있다. 이 때, T는, 비활성 상태의 Primary AP(BSS)가 활성상태로 전환할 때 필요한 시간(delay)를 포함하는 시간 구간이다. 이 때, T는, Primary AP가 활성상태로 전환된 후 MediumSync를 회복하기 위해 소요되는 시간(예를 들어 MediumSync time)을 포함하는 시간 구간일 수 있다. The TXOP acquired by the secondary AP may be terminated earlier than the start time of the R-TWT SP of the primary BSS. This is a restriction to ensure that the primary AP can perform channel access according to the R-TWT SP of the primary BSS. Therefore, the secondary AP must manage its TXOP so that its TXOP is terminated earlier than the start time of the R-TWT SP operated in the primary BSS. At this time, the TXOP of the secondary AP may be terminated at least T earlier than the start time of the R-TWT SP of the primary BSS. At this time, T is a time interval including the time (delay) required when the primary AP (BSS) in the inactive state transitions to the active state. At this time, T may be a time interval including the time required to recover MediumSync after the primary AP transitions to the active state (for example, MediumSync time).

상술한 1. ~ 4.의 방법에 따라 Primary AP 및 보조 AP가 채널 접속을 수행하는 동작은, 각 AP가 각각 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고, 채널 접속을 수행하는 채널 (주 동작 채널(Primary operating channel))을 변경하지 않는 규범적 채널 접근 동작이다. The operation of performing channel access by the Primary AP and the Secondary AP according to the methods 1. to 4. described above is a normative channel access operation in which each AP performs channel access through its own primary channel and does not change the channel through which the channel access is performed (primary operating channel).

다만, AP MLD는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 복수 개의 AP의 Operating channel을 overlap된 형태로(겹쳐서, 동일하게) 설정하고, 각 AP들의 주 동작 채널을 차별화함으로써, 단일 Operating channel에 대해 복수 개의 접근 경로를 확보할 수 있다. 이에 따라, AP MLD는 복수 개의 AP를 운용하는 특정 Operating channel에 접근할 때에, 종래 Wi-Fi보다 낮은 주 동작 채널 종속성을 갖을 수 있다. However, according to one embodiment of the present invention, AP MLD can secure multiple access paths for a single Operating channel by setting the Operating channels of multiple APs in an overlapped form (overlapping and identically) and differentiating the primary operating channels of each AP. Accordingly, AP MLD can have a lower primary operating channel dependency than conventional Wi-Fi when accessing a specific Operating channel that operates multiple APs.

이 때, Primary AP와 보조 AP(들)로 구성된 링크 pair(AP pair)에 소속된 AP들은 특정 시점에 하나의 AP만이 활성상태로 유지되고, 나머지 AP들은 비활성상태로 유지된다는 특징을 갖는다. At this time, APs belonging to a link pair (AP pair) consisting of a primary AP and secondary AP(s) have the characteristic that at a certain point in time, only one AP is maintained in an active state, and the remaining APs are maintained in an inactive state.

이 때, TBTT는 AP가 Beacon frame을 전송하기로 약속되어 있는 시간을 의미한다. AP는 자신이 운용하는 BSS의 프라이머리 채널을 통해 주기적으로 Beacon frame을 전송하고, 상기 Beacon frame 전송 주기는 Beacon Interval이다. 따라서 각 TBTT는 Beacon Interval 간격을 갖는다. At this time, TBTT means the time that AP is promised to transmit Beacon frame. AP periodically transmits Beacon frame through the primary channel of BSS that it operates, and the Beacon frame transmission cycle is Beacon Interval. Therefore, each TBTT has Beacon Interval interval.

이 때, R-TWT SP는 Broadcast TWT의 일종으로, Wi-Fi7 표준에서 도입된 Low latency traffic을 위한 서비스 구간이다. R-TWT SP동안에는 Low latency traffic이 우선적으로 처리된다. 이 때, 각 R-TWT SP에 대해서 Low latency traffic으로 고려되는 Traffic의 ID는 AP에 의해 지시된다. 즉, 특정 BSS에서 R-TWT SP가 운용되면, R-TWT SP 구간동안 AP가 지시한 TID(Traffic ID)에 대응하는 Traffic이 BSS 내에서 우선적으로 서비스된다.At this time, R-TWT SP is a type of Broadcast TWT, and is a service section for low latency traffic introduced in the Wi-Fi7 standard. During R-TWT SP, low latency traffic is processed with priority. At this time, for each R-TWT SP, the ID of the traffic considered as low latency traffic is indicated by the AP. That is, when R-TWT SP is operated in a specific BSS, the traffic corresponding to the TID (Traffic ID) indicated by the AP during the R-TWT SP section is serviced with priority within the BSS.

도 17은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, AP MLD가 주 BSS와 보조 BSS를 이용해 TXOP을 획득하는 절차의 일 예를 도시한다.FIG. 17 illustrates an example of a procedure for an AP MLD to obtain a TXOP using a primary BSS and a secondary BSS according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 17을 참조하면, AP MLD는 Primary BSS의 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널(P20)을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한다. 즉, Primary BSS는 활성상태이며, 보조 BSS는 비활성 상태이다.Referring to Figure 17, the AP MLD performs channel access through the Primary 20 MHz subchannel (P20) of the Primary BSS. That is, the Primary BSS is active and the Secondary BSS is inactive.

Primary BSS를 통해 TXOP1을 획득한 AP MLD는 non-AP MLD와의 송/수신을 Primary 링크를 통해 수행한다. TXOP1이 종료된 후, AP MLD는 Primay AP의 P20 channel이 OBSS에 의해 점유된 것을 확인하였고, Primary AP를 비활성 상태로 전환하고 보조 AP를 활성상태로 전환한다. AP MLD, which acquired TXOP1 through Primary BSS, performs transmission/reception with non-AP MLD through Primary link. After TXOP1 is terminated, AP MLD confirms that P20 channel of Primary AP is occupied by OBSS, switches Primary AP to inactive state and switches secondary AP to active state.

AP MLD는 보조 AP의 프라이머리 채널(A20)을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고, TXOP2를 획득한다. TXOP2 동안, AP MLD는 보조 링크를 통해 non-AP MLD와의 송/수신을 수행한다. 이 때, TXOP2는 Primary AP가 확인한 OBSS의 TXOP보다 일찍 종료되었다. AP MLD performs channel access through the primary channel (A20) of the secondary AP and acquires TXOP2. During TXOP2, AP MLD performs transmission/reception with non-AP MLD through the secondary link. At this time, TXOP2 is terminated earlier than the TXOP of the OBSS confirmed by the primary AP.

AP MLD는 보조 AP를 통해 획득한 TXOP2가 종료되었을 때, Primary AP를 통해 채널 접속을 수행하기 위해 Primary AP를 활성상태로 전환하고, 보조 AP를 비활성 상태로 전환한다.When the TXOP2 acquired through the secondary AP is terminated, AP MLD switches the Primary AP to the active state and switches the secondary AP to the inactive state to perform channel access through the Primary AP.

이후, AP MLD는 Primary AP의 P20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고, 채널 접속이 완료되었을 때 TXOP3을 획득한다. TXOP3 동안, AP MLD는 활성상태의 링크인 Primary 링크를 통해 non-AP MLD와 송/수신을 수행한다.After that, AP MLD performs channel access through P20 of Primary AP and acquires TXOP3 when channel access is completed. During TXOP3, AP MLD performs transmission/reception with non-AP MLD through Primary link, which is an active link.

<Overlapping AP들과 association한 non-AP MLD 동작><Non-AP MLD operation associated with overlapping APs>

전술한 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, AP MLD는 복수의 AP들 operating channel을 중첩된 동작 채널로 설정하고, 상기 복수의 AP들 중 하나의 AP를 Primary AP, 나머지 AP들을 보조 AP로 운영할 수 있다. 이처럼, 중첩된 동작 채널에서 운용되는 복수의 AP들은 특정 AP가 활성 상태 일 때, 다른 AP들이 비활성상태로 유지되어 PPDU송/수신이 불가능하다. 또한, 비활성상태의 AP는 PPDU의 송/수신뿐만 아니라 CCA(Virtual CCA 및/또는 Physical CCA)도 불가능한 상태의 AP일 수 있다. According to one embodiment of the present invention described above, the AP MLD can set the operating channels of a plurality of APs as overlapping operating channels, and operate one AP among the plurality of APs as a Primary AP and the remaining APs as Secondary APs. In this way, among the plurality of APs operated in the overlapping operating channels, when a specific AP is active, other APs are maintained in an inactive state, making PPDU transmission/reception impossible. In addition, an AP in an inactive state may be an AP that is in a state in which not only PPDU transmission/reception but also CCA (Virtual CCA and/or Physical CCA) is impossible.

Non-AP MLD가 ML setup을 수행한 링크들 중, 비활성상태의 링크(비활성 상태 AP의 링크)가 존재하는 경우 non-AP MLD는 상기 비활성상태의 링크를 통해 UL PPDU를 전송하지 않아야 한다. 이는, non-AP MLD가 비활성상태의 링크를 통해 UL PPDU를 전송한다 하더라도, 해당 UL PPDU를 수신해야 할 주체인 AP가 PPDU의 수신을 지원하지 않는 상태이기 때문이다. 즉, 비활성상태의 링크에서 수행되는 non-AP MLD의 UL PPDU 전송은 실패할 것이 자명한 전송이며, 불필요한 동작인 것으로 이해될 수 있다. Among the links on which the non-AP MLD performed ML setup, if there is an inactive link (a link of an inactive AP), the non-AP MLD must not transmit a UL PPDU through the inactive link. This is because, even if the non-AP MLD transmits a UL PPDU through the inactive link, the AP that should receive the UL PPDU does not support reception of the PPDU. In other words, the UL PPDU transmission of the non-AP MLD performed on the inactive link is a transmission that is sure to fail, and can be understood as an unnecessary operation.

따라서, non-AP MLD는 AP MLD와 ML setup을 수행한 링크들 중, Primary 링크 및 보조 링크가 존재하는 경우 상기 Primary 링크 혹은 보조 링크를 통해 채널 접속을 수행할 때 일반적인 AP (Regular AP)가 운용되는 링크와 다른 방법으로 전송 수행 여부 및/또는 채널 접속 수행 여부를 결정해야 할 수 있다.Therefore, among the links that performed AP MLD and ML setup, if there is a primary link and a secondary link, the non-AP MLD may need to determine whether to perform transmission and/or channel access in a different manner from the link on which a regular AP is operated when performing channel access through the primary link or the secondary link.

일 예로, non-AP MLD는 AP MLD의 보조 링크에서, EDCA를 통한 UL PPDU 전송을 수행해서는 안 된다. Non-AP MLD가 보조 링크에서 전송할 수 있는 frame은 보조 AP에게서 수신한 frame에 대한 응답 frame으로 제한될 수 있다. 이 때, non-AP MLD가 보조 링크에서 전송하는 응답 frame의 종류는, RTS/MU-RTS frame을 수신한 후 전송하는 CTS frame, BSRP 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 전송하는 BSR frame, 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 전송하는 TB PPDU에 포함된 frame 들 중 적어도 하나를 포함한다.For example, a non-AP MLD should not perform UL PPDU transmission via EDCA on the secondary link of an AP MLD. A frame that the non-AP MLD can transmit on the secondary link may be limited to a response frame to a frame received from the secondary AP. In this case, the type of the response frame transmitted by the non-AP MLD on the secondary link includes at least one of a CTS frame transmitted after receiving a RTS/MU-RTS frame, a BSR frame transmitted after receiving a BSRP trigger frame, and frames included in a TB PPDU transmitted after receiving a trigger frame.

이와 같이 non-AP MLD에게 보조 링크에서 EDCA를 통한 전송을 수행해서는 안된다는 제약이 적용되는 이유는, 보조 AP가 활성상태인지 비활성상태인지 여부를 non-AP MLD가 정확하게 판단하기 어렵기 때문일 수 있다. 따라서, non-AP MLD는 실패할 가능성이 큰 UL PPDU 전송을 시도하는 대신, 보조 AP에게서 응답 frame을 요청하는 frame이 수신되었을 때에만 UL PPDU를 전송을 수행하도록 제한될 수 있다. The reason why the non-AP MLD is restricted from performing transmission via EDCA on the secondary link may be that it is difficult for the non-AP MLD to accurately determine whether the secondary AP is active or inactive. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can be restricted to perform UL PPDU transmission only when a frame requesting a response frame from the secondary AP is received, instead of attempting UL PPDU transmission, which is likely to fail.

다만, non-AP MLD가 보조 링크를 통해 EDCA 채널 접속을 수행한 후 UL PPDU를 전송할 수 있도록 허용된 예외가 존재할 수 있다. 상기 예외의 한가지 예로, AP MLD로부터 특정 보조 링크가 활성상태인지 여부를 판단할 수 있도록 하는 정보를 획득한 non-AP MLD는 상기 특정 보조 링크에서 운용하는 non-AP STA를 통해 채널 접속을 수행(EDCA 메커니즘을 이용한 채널 접속, 즉 트리거-based channel access가 아닌 자체적으로 수행한 channel access)한 후 UL PPDU 전송을 시도할 수 있다. 상기 특정 보조 링크가 활성상태인지 여부를 판단할 수 있도록 하는 정보는, AP MLD에 소속된 다른 AP를 통해서 전송되는 frame을 통해 지시된 정보일 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD에 소속된 다른 AP를 통해서 지시되는 정보는, Primary AP 및 보조 AP들 중 어떤 AP(어떤 링크)가 활성상태인지를 지시하는 정보일 수 있다. 보조 링크를 통해 채널 접속을 수행(EDCA 메커니즘을 이용한 채널 접속, 트리거-based channel access가 아닌 자체적으로 수행한 channel access)한 non-AP MLD는, 보조 링크에서 전송하는 첫 frame을 RTS frame으로 전송해야 할 수 있다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 보조 링크에서 전송하는 첫 frame으로 RTS frame을 전송해야 할 수 있다. 만약 첫 frame으로 전송한 RTS frame에 대한 응답인 CTS frame이 AP로부터 수신되지 않는다면, non-AP MLD는 보조 링크에 추가 채널 접속을 수행하지 않을 수 있다.However, there may be an exception that allows a non-AP MLD to transmit a UL PPDU after performing EDCA channel access through a secondary link. As an example of the exception, a non-AP MLD that obtains information from an AP MLD to determine whether a specific secondary link is active may perform channel access (channel access using an EDCA mechanism, i.e., channel access performed independently, not trigger-based channel access) through a non-AP STA operating on the specific secondary link and then attempt to transmit a UL PPDU. The information that allows the determination whether the specific secondary link is active may be information indicated through a frame transmitted through another AP belonging to the AP MLD. In this case, the information indicated through the other AP belonging to the AP MLD may be information indicating which AP (which link) among the Primary AP and the secondary APs is active. A non-AP MLD that performs channel access via a secondary link (channel access using the EDCA mechanism, channel access performed independently rather than trigger-based channel access) may need to transmit an RTS frame as the first frame transmitted on the secondary link. In other words, a non-AP MLD may need to transmit an RTS frame as the first frame transmitted on the secondary link. If a CTS frame in response to the RTS frame transmitted as the first frame is not received from the AP, the non-AP MLD may not perform additional channel access on the secondary link.

AP MLD와 마찬가지로, non-AP MLD는 상기 Primary에서 운용하는 non-AP STA(Primary non-AP STA)와 보조에서 운용하는 non-AP STA(보조 non-AP STA)에 서로 독립적인 Radio를 사용하거나, 혹은 1개의 Radio를 이용해 두 링크의 non-AP STA들을 운용할 수 있다. Similar to AP MLD, non-AP MLD can use independent radios for the non-AP STA (Primary non-AP STA) operating in the Primary and the non-AP STA (Secondary non-AP STA) operating in the Secondary, or can operate the non-AP STAs of both links using a single radio.

즉, Primary non-AP STA와 보조 non-AT STA가 독립적인 Radio를 이용해 구성되는 구현이 있을 수 있다. 이 경우, Primary non-AP STA가 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 PPDU를 송/수신하는 동시에, 보조 non-AP STA가 보조 channel(보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널)을 통해 수신되는 다른 PPDU를 수신하거나, CCA, PD(Packet detection)등을 수행하는 것이 가능하다. 이처럼 독립적인 Radio를 갖는 보조 non-AP STA는, 보조 AP가 아닌 AP (예를 들어 Primary/보조 AP가 아닌 Regular AP)와 Association된 경우 일반적인 non-AP STA로 기능하는 것이 가능한 Capability를 갖을 수 있다. That is, there can be an implementation in which the primary non-AP STA and the secondary non-AT STA are configured using independent radios. In this case, the primary non-AP STA can transmit/receive PPDUs through the primary 20 MHz subchannel while the secondary non-AP STA can receive other PPDUs received through the secondary channel (primary channel of the secondary BSS) or perform CCA, PD (Packet detection), etc. In this way, the secondary non-AP STA having the independent radio can have the capability to function as a general non-AP STA when associated with an AP that is not the secondary AP (for example, a Regular AP that is not the primary/secondary AP).

또한, Primary non-AP STA와 보조 non-AP STA가 하나의 Radio를 공유하는 구성을 갖는 구현도 가능할 수 있다. 이 경우, Primary non-AP STA가 Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 PPDU를 송/수신할 때, 보조 non-AP STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)에 대한 송/수신, CCA, PD 등을 수행하는 것이 불가능하다. 이는, 두 non-AP STA가 공통적으로 사용하는 Radio가 Primary non-AP STA의 동작을 위해 사용되면, 보조 non-AP STA가 사용할 수 있는 Radio가 존재하지 않게 되기 때문이다. 즉, Primary non-AP STA와 보조 non-AP STA는 Logical하게만 분리되어 존재하는 non-AP STA들이며 물리적으로는 1개의 장치(Radio, RF chain, 안테나 등)를 이용해 운용되는 non-AP STA들 일 수 있다. 이와 같이 non-AP MLD가 1개의 Radio를 이용해 복수의 non-AP STA들(Primary non-AP STA 및 보조 non-AP STA들)을 운용할 수 있는 이유는, 상기 복수의 non-AP STA들 중 특정 시점에는 1개의 non-AP STA에 대해서만 Radio가 활용되기 때문이다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 Primary non-AP STA에 의해 채널 접속 절차가 진행되거나, PPDU 송/수신이 수행되는 시점에는 보조 non-AP STA들에 대한 채널 접속/PPDU 송수신 등을 지원하지 않을 수 있다. 또한, 특정 보조 non-AP STA를 통해 PPDU 송/수신을 수행하는 시점에는 Primary non-AP STA 및 다른 보조 non-AP STA들에 대한 지원이 필요하지 않는 방식으로 복수의 non-AP STA들이 1개의 Radio를 공유하며 동작된다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 Primary 링크와 보조 링크에 대해 Single-Radio Multi-링크 동작을 수행할 수 있다. In addition, an implementation may be possible in which the primary non-AP STA and the secondary non-AP STA share a single radio. In this case, when the primary non-AP STA transmits/receives a PPDU through the primary 20 MHz subchannel, the secondary non-AP STA cannot perform transmission/reception, CCA, PD, etc. for its primary channel (secondary channel). This is because if the radio commonly used by two non-AP STAs is used for the operation of the primary non-AP STA, there is no radio that can be used by the secondary non-AP STA. In other words, the primary non-AP STA and the secondary non-AP STA are non-AP STAs that exist only logically separately, and may be non-AP STAs that are physically operated using a single device (radio, RF chain, antenna, etc.). The reason why the non-AP MLD can operate multiple non-AP STAs (primary non-AP STA and auxiliary non-AP STAs) using one radio is because the radio is utilized for only one non-AP STA among the multiple non-AP STAs at a specific point in time. That is, the non-AP MLD may not support channel access/PPDU transmission/reception, etc. for auxiliary non-AP STAs when the channel access procedure is performed by the primary non-AP STA or PPDU transmission/reception is performed. In addition, when PPDU transmission/reception is performed through a specific auxiliary non-AP STA, multiple non-AP STAs share one radio and operate in a way that support for the primary non-AP STA and other auxiliary non-AP STAs is not required. That is, the non-AP MLD can perform Single-Radio Multi-link operation for the primary link and the auxiliary link.

한편, non-AP MLD에게는 각 Primary 링크에 대한 보조 링크 쌍 중, 1개의 보조 링크에만 setup될 수 있다는 제한이 적용될 수 있다. 일 예로, 제1 Primary 링크 및 상기 제1 Primary 링크의 쌍인 제1 보조 링크, 제2 보조 링크가 존재할 때, 특정 non-AP MLD는 제1 Primary 링크와 제1 보조 링크를 포함하는 ML setup 상태를 갖거나, 제1 Primary 링크와 제2 보조 링크를 포함하는 ML setup 상태를 갖을 수 있고, 제1 보조 링크와 제2 보조 링크 모두를 포함하는 ML setup 상태를 갖을 수 없을 수 있다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 특정 Primary 링크와 대응하는 복수의 보조 링크가 존재할 때, 상기 복수의 보조 링크들 중 1개의 보조 링크를 통해서만 setup해야 할 수 있다.Meanwhile, a non-AP MLD may be subject to a restriction that it can only be setup for one auxiliary link among a pair of auxiliary links for each Primary link. For example, when a first Primary link and a first auxiliary link and a second auxiliary link, which are pairs of the first Primary link, exist, a specific non-AP MLD may have an ML setup state including the first Primary link and the first auxiliary link, or may have an ML setup state including the first Primary link and the second auxiliary link, and may not have an ML setup state including both the first auxiliary link and the second auxiliary link. That is, a non-AP MLD may have to be setup only through one auxiliary link among the multiple auxiliary links corresponding to a specific Primary link.

보조 링크에서 동작하는 non-AP STA는, EDCA를 통해 TXOP을 획득했을 때 Primary 링크의 다음 TBTT (Primary BSS의 TBTT) 이전에 자신의 TXOP을 종료해야 할 수 있다. 이는 보조 AP가 Primary BSS의 TBTT 이전에 TXOP을 종료하는 것과 동일/유사한 동작이므로 자세한 설명은 생략한다.A non-AP STA operating on a secondary link may terminate its TXOP before the next TBTT of the primary link (the TBTT of the primary BSS) when it has acquired a TXOP via EDCA. This is the same/similar behavior as the secondary AP terminating its TXOP before the TBTT of the primary BSS, so a detailed description is omitted.

<보조(Auxiliary) AP Discovery><Auxiliary AP Discovery>

이처럼, 보조 링크(보조 AP, 보조 BSS)가 일반적인 AP 및 Primary 링크와는 다른 특성을 갖는 링크이기 때문에, AP MLD는 자신이 전송하는 관리 프레임들을 통해, 소속 AP들 중 어떤 AP가 보조 링크에서 운용되는 AP인지를 지시해야 한다. 또한, AP MLD와 ML setup을 수행하고자 하는 non-AP MLD는 상기 AP MLD가 전송한 관리 프레임을 수신한 후, 상기 관리 프레임에 포함된 정보를 기초로 AP MLD가 운용하는 각 AP들이 일반 AP인지 Primary AP인지 혹은 보조 AP인지 여부를 판단해야 한다. 예를 들어 특정 AP MLD가 전송한 Beacon frame을 수신하여 상기 특정 AP MLD의 특정 AP가 보조 AP인 것을 인지한 non-AP MLD는 상기 특정 AP(보조 AP)를 통해서는 Multi-링크 setup을 수행하지 않아야 한다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 보조 AP에게 (ML) Probe Request frame 및/또는 (ML) Association Request frame을 전송해서는 안된다.In this way, since the auxiliary link (auxiliary AP, auxiliary BSS) has different characteristics from the general AP and primary link, the AP MLD must indicate which of its affiliated APs is the AP operating in the auxiliary link through the management frames it transmits. In addition, the non-AP MLD that wants to perform ML setup with the AP MLD must, after receiving the management frame transmitted by the AP MLD, determine whether each AP operated by the AP MLD is a general AP, a primary AP, or a secondary AP based on the information included in the management frame. For example, a non-AP MLD that recognizes that a specific AP of the specific AP MLD is a secondary AP by receiving a Beacon frame transmitted by a specific AP MLD must not perform Multi-link setup through the specific AP (auxiliary AP). In other words, the non-AP MLD must not transmit a (ML) Probe Request frame and/or a (ML) Association Request frame to the secondary AP.

AP MLD가 자신이 전송하는 관리 프레임을 통해 각 AP가 어떤 종류의 AP인지 여부를 지시하는 방법은 RNR element(Reduced Neighbor Report)를 이용하는 것일 수 있다. One way for the AP MLD to indicate what type of AP each AP is through the management frames it transmits could be by using the RNR element (Reduced Neighbor Report).

일 예로, AP MLD는 자신이 전송하는 RNR element에 포함된 Neighbor AP Information field들 중, 보조 AP에 대응하는 Neighbor AP Information field를 다른 AP(제3의 AP(일반 AP) 및 Primary AP)에 대응하는 Neighbor AP Information field와 다른 방법으로 구성/설정함으로써, 상기 다른 방법으로 구성/설정된 Neighbor AP Information field와 대응하는 AP가 보조 AP임을 지시할 수 있다. AP MLD가 RNR element를 이용해 보조 AP를 지시하는 구체적인 방법은 도 xx의 일 실시예를 통해 보다 자세히 설명된다.For example, the AP MLD can indicate that an AP corresponding to a Neighbor AP Information field configured/set in a different manner from the Neighbor AP Information fields corresponding to other APs (third AP (normal AP) and Primary AP) among the Neighbor AP Information fields included in the RNR element that it transmits is a secondary AP. A specific method by which the AP MLD indicates a secondary AP using the RNR element is described in more detail with reference to an embodiment of FIG. xx.

도 18 은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, AP MLD가 보조 AP를 지시하기 위해 전송하는 RNR 엘리먼트의 포맷의 일 예를 도시한다.FIG. 18 illustrates an example of a format of an RNR element transmitted by an AP MLD to indicate an auxiliary AP according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 18의 (a)는 Reduced Neighbor Report element format을 도시한다. Reduced Neighbor Report element에는 복수개의 Neighbor AP Information Fields가 포함될 수 있고, Length field를 통해 해당 element의 길이가 지시된다. Figure 18 (a) illustrates the Reduced Neighbor Report element format. The Reduced Neighbor Report element may include multiple Neighbor AP Information Fields, and the length of the element is indicated through the Length field.

Neighbor AP Information Fields에는, 해당 element를 전송하는 AP MLD에 소속된 각 AP에 대응하는 Neighbor AP Information field가 포함된다. 이 때, RNR element를 전송하는 AP에 대한 Neighbor AP Information field는 포함되지 않는다. Neighbor AP Information Fields include a Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to each AP belonging to the AP MLD transmitting the corresponding element. At this time, the Neighbor AP Information field for the AP transmitting the RNR element is not included.

도 18의 (b)는 AP MLD에 소속된 보조 AP에 대응하는 Neighbor AP Information field의 설정 방법을 도시한다. Neighbor AP Information Field는 대응하는 AP의 성격에 관계없이 동일하지만, TBTT Information Header의 설정 및 TBTT Information Set field의 크기는 일반 AP와 보조 AP가 상이할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로, 도 18(b)에 도시된 것과 같이, 보조 AP에 대응하는 Neighbor AP Information field에서는, TBTT Information Header field의 TBTT Information field Type이 0이 아닌 값(예를 들어 1 혹은 2)으로 지시될 수 있다. 이는 일반 AP의 TBTT Information field Type이 0으로 지시되는 것과 차별화되는 설정 방법이다. 또한, 보조 AP에 대응하는 Neighbor AP Information field에서는, TBTT Information Header field에서 지시되는 TBTT Information Length가 3으로 설정된다. 즉, TBTT information Set field는 3-octet의 크기를 갖는 것으로 지시된다. 이 때, 상기 TBTT Information Set field에는 MLD Parameters subfield가 포함된다.Fig. 18(b) illustrates a method for setting a Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to an auxiliary AP belonging to an AP MLD. The Neighbor AP Information Field is the same regardless of the characteristics of the corresponding AP, but the setting of the TBTT Information Header and the size of the TBTT Information Set field may be different between a general AP and an auxiliary AP. More specifically, as illustrated in Fig. 18(b), in the Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to the auxiliary AP, the TBTT Information field Type of the TBTT Information Header field may be indicated as a non-zero value (e.g., 1 or 2). This is a setting method that is differentiated from the TBTT Information field Type of the general AP being indicated as 0. In addition, in the Neighbor AP Information field corresponding to the auxiliary AP, the TBTT Information Length indicated in the TBTT Information Header field is set to 3. That is, the TBTT information Set field is indicated as having a size of 3-octet. At this time, the TBTT Information Set field includes an MLD Parameters subfield.

도 18 (c)는 보조 AP에 대응하는 MLD Parameters subfield format이 도시되어 있다. 보조 AP에 대응하는 MLD Parameters subfield는 링크 ID가 일반 AP의 링크 ID보다 큰 값으로 설정될 수 있다. 즉, AP MLD에 복수의 AP 들(Primary AP 및 일반 AP들)과 1개의 보조 AP가 존재한다면, 상기 보조 AP의 링크 ID는 다른 AP들의 링크 ID보다 크게 설정되도록 권장된다. Fig. 18 (c) illustrates the MLD Parameters subfield format corresponding to the auxiliary AP. The MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the auxiliary AP may be set to a value whose link ID is larger than that of the normal AP. That is, if there are multiple APs (primary AP and normal APs) and one auxiliary AP in the AP MLD, it is recommended that the link ID of the auxiliary AP be set to a value larger than that of the other APs.

보조 AP에 대응하는 MLD Parameters subfield에는 링크 ID of Primary 링크 subfield가 포함된다. 링크 ID of Primary 링크 subfield는, 상기 보조 AP와 쌍을 이루는 Primary AP의 링크(Primary 링크) ID를 지시하는 subfield이다. 보조 링크 Indication subfield는, 해당 MLD Parameters subfield와 대응하는 AP가 보조 AP인지 여부를 지시하는 subfield이며, 보조 AP와 대응하는 MLD Parameters subfield에 포함될 때 1로 지시된다. Separated Radio subfield는 해당 MLD Parameters subfield에 대응하는 보조 AP가, Primary AP와 독립적인 Radio를 갖는 구성인지 여부를 지시하는 subfield이다. 즉, Separated Radio subfield가 특정 값(예를 들어 1)으로 설정된 보조 AP는 Primary AP를 통해 송/수신이 수행될 때에도 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)에 대한 medium sync를 잃어버리지 않는 것이 가능하다.The MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the secondary AP includes a Link ID of Primary link subfield. The Link ID of Primary link subfield is a subfield indicating a link (primary link) ID of the Primary AP paired with the secondary AP. The Secondary Link Indication subfield is a subfield indicating whether the AP corresponding to the corresponding MLD Parameters subfield is a secondary AP, and is indicated as 1 when included in the MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the secondary AP. The Separated Radio subfield is a subfield indicating whether the secondary AP corresponding to the corresponding MLD Parameters subfield has a configuration having a radio independent from the Primary AP. That is, a secondary AP with the Separated Radio subfield set to a specific value (for example, 1) can avoid losing medium sync for the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS even when transmission/reception is performed through the Primary AP.

이 때, non-AP MLD들은, AP MLD가 전송한 RNR element를 수신했을 때, RNR element에 포함된 TBTT Information field Type이 0이 아닌 Neighbor AP Information field를 확인함으로써 상기 Neighbor AP Information field가 보조 AP에 대응하는 것임을 인지하는 것이 가능하다. 또는, non-AP MLD들은, MLD Parameters subfield에 포함된 특정 bit(도 18 (c)의 보조 링크 Indication)을 기초로 상기 MLD Parameters subfield와 대응하는 AP가 보조 AP인지 여부를 인지할 수 있다.At this time, non-AP MLDs can recognize that the Neighbor AP Information field corresponds to a secondary AP by checking the Neighbor AP Information field in which the TBTT Information field Type included in the RNR element is not 0 when receiving the RNR element transmitted by the AP MLD. Alternatively, non-AP MLDs can recognize whether the AP corresponding to the MLD Parameters subfield is a secondary AP based on a specific bit included in the MLD Parameters subfield (the secondary link Indication of FIG. 18 (c)).

다른 예로, AP MLD는 자신이 전송하는 Multi-링크 element에 포함된 Per-STA Profile subelement들 중, 보조 AP에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement를 다른 AP(제3의 AP(일반 AP) 및 Primary AP)에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement와 다른 방법으로 구성/설정함으로써, 상기 다른 방법으로 구성/설정된 Per-STA Profile subelement와 대응하는 AP가 보조 AP임을 지시할 수 있다. 상기 다른 방법으로 구성/설정된 Per-STA Profile subelement는, 일반 AP에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement에서 특정 값(예를 들어 0 혹은 1)으로 지시되는 subfield(bit)가 보조 AP에 대해서 다른 값(예를 들어 1 혹은 0)으로 설정되어 보조 AP가 일반 AP와 구분되는 것일 수 있다.As another example, the AP MLD can indicate that the AP corresponding to the Per-STA Profile subelement configured/configured in a different way from the Per-STA Profile subelements corresponding to other APs (third AP (normal AP) and primary AP) among the Per-STA Profile subelements included in the Multi-link element that it transmits is a secondary AP by configuring/configuring them differently. The Per-STA Profile subelement configured/configured in a different way may have a subfield (bit) indicated as a specific value (for example, 0 or 1) in the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the normal AP set to a different value (for example, 1 or 0) for the secondary AP, thereby distinguishing the secondary AP from the normal AP.

보조 AP가 운용중임을 인지한 non-AP MLD는, 보조 링크를 통해 AP MLD에게 Probe Request frame을 전송해서는 안 된다. 이 때, non-AP MLD가 보조 링크가 운용중임을 인지하는 방법은 AP MLD가 전송한 Management frame을 통해 지시된 정보에 기초한 것일 수 있다.A non-AP MLD that recognizes that a secondary AP is in operation must not transmit a Probe Request frame to the AP MLD through the secondary link. In this case, the method by which the non-AP MLD recognizes that the secondary link is in operation may be based on information indicated through the Management frame transmitted by the AP MLD.

한편, AP MLD는 Overlapping AP들 (Primary AP 및 보조 AP 들) 사이에서, Primary AP로 기능할 AP를 변경할 수 있다. 간단한 예로, 최초 Primary AP로 기능하던 AP는 보조 AP로 변경될 수 있고, 보조 AP로 기능하던 AP는 Primary AP로 변경될 수 있다. 이와 같이 Overlapping AP들 중 Primary AP로 기능하는 AP가 변경되는 이유는 다양할 수 있으며, 그 중 하나의 이유는 AP MLD가 Beacon frame을 전송하는 channel을 변경하고자 하는 것일 수 있다.Meanwhile, AP MLD can change the AP that functions as the Primary AP among the Overlapping APs (Primary AP and Auxiliary APs). For a simple example, the AP that initially functions as the Primary AP can be changed to the Auxiliary AP, and the AP that functions as the Auxiliary AP can be changed to the Primary AP. There can be various reasons for changing the AP that functions as the Primary AP among the Overlapping APs, and one of the reasons can be that AP MLD wants to change the channel that transmits the Beacon frame.

AP MLD는 Overlapping AP(링크, BSS)들 중, Primary AP(링크, BSS)로 기능할 AP(링크, BSS)를 변경하고자 할 때, 이를 non-AP MLD들에게 지시해야 한다. 이 때, AP MLD는 자신이 전송하는 Management frame(예를 들어 Beacon frame)을 통해, 새로운 Primary AP(Management frame을 전송하는 시점에는 보조 AP인 AP)의 정보 및/또는 Primary AP가 변경되는 시점과 관련한 정보를 지시할 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD가 Management frame을 통해 지시하는 정보는 Primary AP로 변경될 보조 AP가 운용되는 링크의 ID(즉, 보조 링크의 링크 ID)를 포함할 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD는 Primary AP가 변경되는 시점을 지시하기 위해, 상기 변경 시점까지 남아있는 TBTT의 개수를 지시할 수 있다. 즉, AP MLD가 Primary AP를 변경하고자 하는 시점까지 현재의 Primary AP의 TBTT가 5개 존재한다면, 상기 AP MLD는 Primary AP의 변경 시점과 관련한 field의 값을 상기 남아있는 TBTT의 개수에 기초하여 설정(예를 들어 5 혹은 4(5-1))로 설정할 수 있다. 즉, AP MLD는 Primary AP를 변경하고자 하는 시점까지 남아있는 TBTT가 없는 경우, 상기 Primary AP의 변경 시점과 관련한 field의 값을 1 혹은 0으로 설정하여 전송하며, 다음 Beacon frame은 새로운 Primary AP를 통해서 전송할 것이다. When the AP MLD wants to change an AP (link, BSS) that will function as a Primary AP (link, BSS) among the Overlapping APs (links, BSS), it must instruct the non-AP MLDs to do so. At this time, the AP MLD can instruct, through the Management frame (e.g., Beacon frame) that it transmits, information about a new Primary AP (an AP that is a secondary AP at the time of transmitting the Management frame) and/or information related to the time point at which the Primary AP is changed. At this time, the information that the AP MLD instructs through the Management frame can include the ID of the link on which the secondary AP to be changed to the Primary AP is operated (i.e., the link ID of the secondary link). At this time, the AP MLD can instruct the number of TBTTs remaining until the time point at which the Primary AP is changed in order to instruct the time point at which the Primary AP is changed. That is, if there are 5 TBTTs of the current Primary AP until the point in time when the AP MLD wants to change the Primary AP, the AP MLD can set the value of the field related to the point in time when the Primary AP is changed to a setting (for example, 5 or 4(5-1)) based on the number of remaining TBTTs. That is, if there are no TBTTs remaining until the point in time when the AP MLD wants to change the Primary AP, the AP MLD sets the value of the field related to the point in time when the Primary AP is changed to 1 or 0 and transmits it, and the next Beacon frame will be transmitted through the new Primary AP.

Primary AP를 변경하고자 하는 AP MLD는, 기존의 Primary AP(Primary AP 변경 후 보조 AP가 될 AP)를 통해 BSS Transition Management Request frame을 전송할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 BSS Transition Management Request frame은 상기 기존의 Primary AP를 통해서만 연결(setup)된 상태인 non-AP STA 및 non-AP MLD들에게 상기 Primary AP가 운용하는 BSS의 서비스가 종료될 것임을 지시하는 frame일 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD가 전송하는 BSS Transition Management Request frame은 링크 Removal Imminent subfield가 0으로 설정되고, Primary 링크 Change field가 1로 설정된 BSS Transition Management Request frame일 수 있다. Primary 링크 Change field는, Overlap된 operating channel을 갖는 Primary 링크(AP)와 보조 링크(AP)들 쌍(pair) 중에서, Primary 링크로 지정된 링크가 변경될 때(및/또는 변경될 예정일 때) 1로 설정되는 field이다. Primary 링크 Channel field가 1로 설정된 BSS Transition Management frame Request을 수신한 non-AP MLD는, 상기 BSS Transition Management Request frame이 Primary BSS가 서비스 종료되는 것으로 해석하지 않고, Primary 링크(AP)와 보조 링크(AP)가 변경될 것임이 지시된 것으로 해석할 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD는 Primary 링크와 보조 링크가 변경된 후 전송하는 RNR element의 보조 링크에 관한 Neighbor AP Information field와, Primary 링크에 관한 Neighbor AP Information field를 변경된 Primary 링크를 고려하여 업데이트해야 한다.An AP MLD that wishes to change its Primary AP can transmit a BSS Transition Management Request frame via the existing Primary AP (the AP that will become the secondary AP after the Primary AP is changed). At this time, the BSS Transition Management Request frame may be a frame that instructs non-AP STAs and non-AP MLDs that are connected (set up) only via the existing Primary AP that the service of the BSS operated by the Primary AP will be terminated. At this time, the BSS Transition Management Request frame transmitted by the AP MLD may be a BSS Transition Management Request frame in which the link Removal Imminent subfield is set to 0 and the Primary link Change field is set to 1. The Primary link Change field is a field that is set to 1 when a link designated as the Primary link among a pair of Primary links (APs) and secondary links (APs) having overlapping operating channels is changed (and/or is scheduled to be changed). A non-AP MLD that receives a BSS Transition Management frame Request with the Primary link Channel field set to 1 may interpret the BSS Transition Management Request frame not as an end of service for the Primary BSS, but as an indication that the Primary link (AP) and the Secondary link (AP) will be changed. In this case, the AP MLD must update the Neighbor AP Information field for the Secondary link and the Neighbor AP Information field for the Primary link of the RNR element transmitted after the Primary link and the Secondary link are changed, taking into consideration the changed Primary link.

다른 방법으로, AP MLD는 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 복수의 AP(링크)들 중, Primary AP(링크)로 기능하는 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 프라이머리 채널을 변경하는 Channel Switch를 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, AP MLD는 Primary AP가 운용하는 BSS의 프라이머리 채널을 변경하기 위해 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element를 전송할 수 있고, 상기 element에 포함된 New Channel Number field를 통해 새로운 프라이머리 채널이 지시된다. 이 때, 새로운 프라이머리 채널은 기존의 operating channel(BW)에 포함된 서브 채널 중 하나이다. 이와 같이 Operating channel의 변경 없이, Primary BSS가 프라이머리 채널로 사용하는 서브 채널을 변경하기 위해 Channel Switch Announcement element가 사용되는 경우, 상기 새로운 프라이머리 채널은 Primary BSS의 한 쌍인 보조 BSS가 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)로 사용하던 서브 채널로 지정되는 것이 가능하다. 새로운 Primary BSS의 프라이머리 채널(New Channel Number field를 통해 지시)이 기존에 보조 BSS가 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)로 사용하던 서브 채널인 경우, AP MLD는 상기 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)을 변경하는 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element를 함께 전송해야 한다. 즉, Primary BSS의 프라이머리 채널을 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)로 변경하고자 하는 AP MLD는, 상기 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)을 함께 변경하여 Primary BSS와 보조 BSS가 동일한 서브 채널을 프라이머리 채널로 사용하지 않도록 관리해야 할 수 있다. AP MLD로부터 Primary BSS의 프라이머리 채널 변경을 지시하는 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element와 보조 BSS의 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel) 변경을 지시하는 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element를 함께 수신한 non-AP MLD는 두 BSS의 프라이머리 채널이 서로 바뀔 것임을 인지할 수 있다. 이 때, 함께 수신되는 상기 두 Channel Switch Announcement element는 Channel Switch Count field를 통해 동일한 값이 지시된다. 이 때, AP MLD가 Primary BSS의 Operating channel은 변경하지 않고, 프라이머리 채널만을 변경하기 위해 전송하는 Channel Switch Announcement element의 Channel Switch Mode subfield는 일반적인 Channel Switch가 수행될 때(Operating channel이 변경될 때) 지시되는 값과 다른 값 (예를 들어 2)로 설정될 수 있다.Alternatively, the AP MLD may perform a Channel Switch to change the primary channel of a BSS operated by an AP functioning as a Primary AP (link) among multiple APs (links) having overlapping operating channels. At this time, the AP MLD may transmit an (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element to change the primary channel of the BSS operated by the Primary AP, and a new primary channel is indicated through a New Channel Number field included in the element. At this time, the new primary channel is one of the subchannels included in the existing operating channel (BW). In this way, when the Channel Switch Announcement element is used to change the subchannel used by the Primary BSS as the primary channel without changing the operating channel, it is possible for the new primary channel to be designated as a subchannel used by the secondary BSS, which is a pair of the Primary BSS, as the primary channel (secondary channel). If the primary channel of a new Primary BSS (indicated by the New Channel Number field) is a subchannel that the secondary BSS previously used as a primary channel (secondary channel), the AP MLD must transmit together the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for changing the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS. That is, the AP MLD that wants to change the primary channel of the Primary BSS to the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS may need to change the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS together to manage that the primary BSS and the secondary BSS do not use the same subchannel as a primary channel. A non-AP MLD that receives together the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for instructing the change of the primary channel of the Primary BSS and the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for instructing the change of the primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary BSS from the AP MLD can recognize that the primary channels of the two BSSs will be switched. At this time, the two Channel Switch Announcement elements received together indicate the same value through the Channel Switch Count field. At this time, the Channel Switch Mode subfield of the Channel Switch Announcement element transmitted by the AP MLD to change only the primary channel without changing the Operating channel of the Primary BSS may be set to a value (for example, 2) different from the value indicated when a general Channel Switch is performed (when the Operating channel is changed).

<중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 AP(링크, BSS) pair의 channel 변경><Channel change of AP (link, BSS) pair with overlapping operation channels>

중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 복수의 AP들(Primary AP 및 쌍이 되는 보조 AP들)의 operating channel을 변경하고자 하는 경우, AP MLD는 Primary AP에 대한 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element만을 전송하는 것이 가능하다. 즉, Primary AP(링크, BSS)에 대한 Channel Switch Announcement element는, 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 복수의 AP들(Primary AP 및 쌍이 되는 보조 AP들)에 공통적으로 적용되는 Channel Switch Announcement element일 수 있다. 일 예로, Channel Switch Announcement element를 통해 Primary BSS의 Operating channel이 제1 320 MHz channel에서 제2 320 MHz channel로 변경된다면, 상기 Primary BSS와 쌍이 되는 보조 BSS의 Operating channel도 제1 320 MHz channel에서 제2 320 MHz channel로 변경된다. 즉, 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 AP들(overlapping AP(링크, BSS) pair)은, 특정 AP(예를 들어 primary AP)에 대한 operating channel 변경이 지시될 때, 다른 AP(예를 들어 보조 AP)에 대한 operating channel 변경이 암시적으로 지시될 수 있다. 따라서, non-AP MLD는 AP MLD로부터 Primary AP의 operating channel 변경을 지시받았을 때, Primary AP와 한 쌍이 되는 보조 AP(들)의 operating channel도 Primary AP와 동일하게 변경되는 것으로 인지할 수 있다. 이 때, 변경된 operating channel로 이동된 보조 AP(들)의 새로운 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)은 Primary BSS의 Channel Switch 완료 후 전송되는 관리 프레임(AP MLD에 의해 전송된 frame)에 포함된 RNR element를 통해 지시될 수 있다.When it is desired to change the operating channel of multiple APs (primary AP and paired secondary APs) having overlapping operating channels, the AP MLD can transmit only the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element for the Primary AP. That is, the Channel Switch Announcement element for the Primary AP (link, BSS) may be a Channel Switch Announcement element that is commonly applied to multiple APs (primary AP and paired secondary APs) having overlapping operating channels. For example, if the Operating channel of the Primary BSS is changed from the first 320 MHz channel to the second 320 MHz channel through the Channel Switch Announcement element, the Operating channel of the secondary BSS that is paired with the Primary BSS also changes from the first 320 MHz channel to the second 320 MHz channel. That is, when an operating channel change is instructed for a specific AP (e.g., primary AP) in overlapping operating channels (overlapping AP(link, BSS) pair), an operating channel change can be implicitly instructed for another AP (e.g., secondary AP). Accordingly, when the non-AP MLD is instructed to change the operating channel of the Primary AP from the AP MLD, the non-AP MLD can recognize that the operating channels of the secondary AP(s) paired with the Primary AP are also changed to the same as that of the Primary AP. At this time, the new primary channel (secondary channel) of the secondary AP(s) that has moved to the changed operating channel can be instructed through the RNR element included in the management frame (frame transmitted by the AP MLD) transmitted after the completion of the Channel Switch of the Primary BSS.

도 19는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 주 BSS에 대한 채널 스위치(Channel Switch)가 수행될 때 보조 BSS의 채널 스위치가 함께 지시/수행되는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 19 illustrates a method in which a channel switch of an auxiliary BSS is instructed/performed together when a channel switch for a primary BSS is performed according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 19을 참조하면, Primary BSS와 보조 BSS는 최초 Center Frequency가 'X'인 Operating channel에서 동작한다. Referring to Figure 19, the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS operate on an Operating channel whose initial Center Frequency is 'X'.

AP MLD는 중첩된 동작 채널을 변경하기 위해 Primary AP가 전송하는 Beacon frame에 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element를 포함시켜 전송한다. AP MLD is transmitted by including the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element in the Beacon frame transmitted by the Primary AP to change the overlapping operating channel.

(Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element는 Primary BSS의 Channel Switch가 시작되는 시점 및 새로운 Operating channel에 대한 정보를 포함한다. (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element contains information about when the Primary BSS's Channel Switch starts and the new Operating channel.

Beacon#1에 포함된 (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element의 Channel Switch Count 값은 2이고, Beacon#2에 포함된 Channel Switch Count 값은 1이기 때문에, Primary AP는 Beacon#2을 전송한 후 Channel Switch를 시작된다. 이 때, 상기 Beacon#1과 Beacon#2에 보조 AP(BSS)에 대한 Channel Switch Announcement element가 직접적 포함되지는 않았지만, Primary AP(BSS)에 대해서 지시된 Channel Switch 정보와 동일한 정보가 보조 AP(BSS)에 암시적으로 포함된다. 이는 상기 보조 AP가 Channel Switch를 수행할 Primary AP와 쌍을 이루는 AP이기 때문이다.Since the Channel Switch Count value of the (Extended) Channel Switch Announcement element included in Beacon#1 is 2 and the Channel Switch Count value included in Beacon#2 is 1, the Primary AP starts Channel Switch after transmitting Beacon#2. At this time, although the Channel Switch Announcement element for the secondary AP (BSS) is not directly included in Beacon#1 and Beacon#2, the same information as the Channel Switch information indicated for the Primary AP (BSS) is implicitly included in the secondary AP (BSS). This is because the secondary AP is an AP that is paired with the Primary AP that will perform the Channel Switch.

따라서, Primary BSS의 Channel Switch가 시작될 때 보조 BSS의 Channel Switch도 함께 시작되며, Primary BSS의 변경된 center frequency는 보조 BSS의 변경된 center frequency와 동일하다. 즉, 두 BSS의 Operating channel은 Channel Switch가 완료된 이후에도 overlapping된 상태로 유지된다. Therefore, when the Channel Switch of the Primary BSS starts, the Channel Switch of the Secondary BSS also starts, and the changed center frequency of the Primary BSS is the same as the changed center frequency of the Secondary BSS. In other words, the Operating Channels of the two BSSs remain overlapping even after the Channel Switch is completed.

Primary AP는 새로운 operating channel에서 Beacon#3 frame을 전송하며, Beacon#3에는 보조 AP의 새로운 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel, 도 19의 A20)에 대한 정보를 지시하는 RNR element가 포함된다. 따라서, non-AP MLD는 AP MLD가 Primary BSS의 Channel Switch를 완료한 후 전송하는 Beacon frame을 수신함으로써, 보조 BSS의 새로운 프라이머리 채널(보조 channel)에 대한 정보를 확인할 수 있다.The Primary AP transmits a Beacon#3 frame on a new operating channel, and Beacon#3 includes an RNR element indicating information about a new primary channel (auxiliary channel, A20 in FIG. 19) of the auxiliary AP. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can check information about the new primary channel (auxiliary channel) of the auxiliary BSS by receiving the Beacon frame transmitted by the AP MLD after completing the Channel Switch of the Primary BSS.

<보조 AP/링크/BSS의 특징 및 제한><Features and limitations of auxiliary AP/link/BSS>

전술한 바와 같이, AP MLD는 특정 operating channel에 대한 접근성을 높이기 위해 operating channel이 overlap된 복수의 AP들을 운용할 수 있다. 상기 복수의 AP들 중 하나의 AP는 Primary AP로 기능하며, 상기 Primary AP를 제외한 나머지 AP(들)은 보조 AP로 기능한다. Primary AP는 매 Beacon interval마다 Beacon frame을 전송하고, non-AP STA 및 non-AP MLD들과의 (ML) setup 절차를 지원하는 등 일반 AP와 보다 유사한 기능을 지원한다. 반면, 보조 AP는 Beacon frame을 전송하지도 않고, 쌍을 이루는 Primary AP와 Association되지 않는 non-AP MLD와는 setup될 수 없는 등 많은 제약을 갖고 있는 AP이다. 이는, AP MLD가 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 복수의 AP들을 운용하는 이유가 상기 중첩된 동작 채널에 대한 접근성을 높이기 위한 목적인 것이며, 보조 AP들을 일반적인 AP로 운용하고자 목적한 것이 아니기 때문이다.As described above, the AP MLD can operate multiple APs with overlapping operating channels in order to improve accessibility to a specific operating channel. One AP among the multiple APs functions as a primary AP, and the remaining APs except for the primary AP function as secondary APs. The primary AP transmits a Beacon frame every Beacon interval, and supports (ML) setup procedures with non-AP STAs and non-AP MLDs, thereby supporting functions more similar to those of a general AP. On the other hand, the secondary AP is an AP that has many restrictions, such as not transmitting a Beacon frame and not being able to be setup with a non-AP MLD that is not associated with the paired primary AP. This is because the reason why the AP MLD operates multiple APs with overlapping operating channels is to improve accessibility to the overlapping operating channels, and not to operate the secondary APs as general APs.

이처럼, 보조 AP(링크, BSS)는 제한된 동작만을 수행하는 AP이고, Primary AP(링크, BSS)에 대한 종속성을 갖기 때문에, AP MLD는 보조 AP를 운용하는데 있어서, Primary AP를 통해 지시하는 정보 및 Primary AP에서 사용하는 파라미터들을 활용해야 한다.In this way, since the secondary AP (link, BSS) is an AP that performs only limited operations and has a dependency on the Primary AP (link, BSS), the AP MLD must utilize the information indicated through the Primary AP and the parameters used by the Primary AP in operating the secondary AP.

<보조 링크의 TSF timer><TSF timer of auxiliary link>

전술한 바와 같이 보조 AP는 Beacon frame을 전송하지 않는다. Wi-F의 Beacon frame은, Beacon frame을 전송하는 AP와 Association되어 있는 non-AP STA들이 인지해야 하는 각종 정보들을 지시하고, Association되어 있지 않는 non-AP STA들이 AP의 존재를 인식(Discovery)하게 할 뿐만 아니라 상기 AP와 인접해 있는 다른 AP들 (Neighbor AP)의 정보까지도 일부 인지할 수 있도록 하는 등 다양한 목적을 갖고 전송되는 frame이다. 뿐만 아니라, 11be에서는 Beacon frame을 통해 Multi-링크 element를 전송함으로써 Beacon frame을 전송한 AP가 AP MLD에 소속되어 있다는 정보 및 상기 AP MLD에 소속된 다른 AP(링크)들의 정보까지도 지시하는 등 non-AP MLD들이 획득해야 하는 다양한 정보들을 추가로 포함하도록 확장되었다.As mentioned above, the auxiliary AP does not transmit the Beacon frame. The Beacon frame of Wi-F is a frame transmitted for various purposes, such as indicating various information that non-AP STAs associated with the AP transmitting the Beacon frame should recognize, allowing non-AP STAs that are not associated to recognize (discover) the existence of the AP, and even allowing them to recognize some information about other APs (Neighbor APs) adjacent to the AP. In addition, in 11be, by transmitting a multi-link element through the Beacon frame, it is expanded to include additional various information that non-AP MLDs should obtain, such as indicating information that the AP that transmitted the Beacon frame belongs to the AP MLD and information about other APs (links) belonging to the AP MLD.

Beacon frame에 포함된 field 중 하나인 Timestamp field는, AP의 timing synchronization function(TSF) timer와 관련한 값을 지시하는 field로, non-AP STA는 AP의 TSF timer 값에 맞춰 자신의 TSF timer를 조정함으로써 AP 와 non-AP STA간의 timing sync를 맞출 수 있게 지원하는 field이다. BSS의 모든 timing 기반 동작은, AP의 TSF timer를 기준으로 맞춰지며, 즉, AP가 timing master로 기능한다. 따라서, 각 non-AP STA들은 AP가 전송한 Beacon frame에 포함된 Timestamp field를 이용해 AP와의 timing sync를 맞춰야 한다. 다만, 보조 AP의 경우, 자신의 BSS를 위한 Beacon frame을 전송하지 않고, 따라서 보조 AP의 BSS(보조 BSS)에 포함된 non-AP STA들은 보조 AP와 time sync를 맞출 수 없다는 문제를 갖게 된다. 이에 대한 해결 방법으로, Primary BSS(AP, 링크)와 보조 BSS(AP, 링크)들이 공통의 TSF timer를 사용하도록 고려하는 것이 가능하다. The Timestamp field, one of the fields included in the Beacon frame, is a field that indicates a value related to the timing synchronization function (TSF) timer of the AP. It is a field that supports the non-AP STA to adjust its own TSF timer according to the TSF timer value of the AP to synchronize timing between the AP and the non-AP STA. All timing-based operations of the BSS are synchronized based on the TSF timer of the AP, that is, the AP functions as a timing master. Therefore, each non-AP STA must synchronize timing with the AP using the Timestamp field included in the Beacon frame transmitted by the AP. However, in the case of the secondary AP, it does not transmit a Beacon frame for its own BSS, and therefore, there is a problem that the non-AP STAs included in the BSS of the secondary AP (secondary BSS) cannot synchronize time with the secondary AP. As a solution to this, it is possible to consider having the Primary BSS (AP, link) and the secondary BSS (AP, link) use a common TSF timer.

본 발명의 일 실시예를 따르면, Primary AP와 한 쌍인 보조 AP들은 공통의 TSF timer를 갖을 수 있다. 혹은, Primary AP와 보조 AP들의 TSF timer는 같을(same) 수 있다. 이 때, 공통적으로 사용되는 TSF timer의 값은 Primary AP가 전송하는 Beacon frame을 통해 non-AP STA(non-AP STA 및 non-AP MLD)들에게 지시된다. 따라서, non-AP MLD는 Primary AP가 전송한 Beacon frame을 수신함으로써, 보조 AP들과도 time sync를 유지할 수 있다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, the secondary APs that are paired with the primary AP may have a common TSF timer. Alternatively, the TSF timers of the primary AP and the secondary APs may be the same. In this case, the value of the commonly used TSF timer is indicated to non-AP STAs (non-AP STAs and non-AP MLDs) through the Beacon frame transmitted by the primary AP. Therefore, the non-AP MLD can maintain time synchronization with the secondary APs by receiving the Beacon frame transmitted by the primary AP.

<보조 링크의 mapping TID (Traffic ID)><Mapping TID (Traffic ID) of auxiliary link>

전술한 바와 같이 Wi-Fi 7에서는 MLD가 정의되었고, ML setup이 수행된 MLD들 사이에는 TID-to-링크 mapping 협의가 수행될 수 있다. 간단한 TID-to-링크 mapping에 대한 예로, AP MLD와 2개의 링크를 통해 setup된 non-AP MLD는, 제1 링크에 TID0 내지 TID3을 매핑하고, 제2 링크에 TID4 내지 TID7을 매핑하는 협의를 AP MLD와 수행할 수 있다. 이 경우, non-AP MLD와 AP MLD는 제1 링크를 통해서는 TID가 0 내지 3인 MPDU/MSDU만을 전송하고, 제2 링크를 통해서는 TID가 4 내지 7인 MPDU/MSDU를 전송한다. 이 때, AP MLD가 전송하는 방향(DL, Down 링크)과, non-AP MLD가 전송하는 방향(UL, Up 링크)에 대해 서로 다른 TID-to-링크 mapping이 적용되는 것이 가능하다. TID-to-링크 mapping이 수행되지 않은 AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 Default TID-to-링크 mapping 협의 상태를 갖으며, Default TID-to-링크 mapping 상태는 모든 TID가 모든 setup 링크에 mapping된 상태, 즉 모든 setup 링크를 통해 모든 종류의 TID가 제한 없이 전송될 수 있는 상태를 의미한다. 이 때, Default TID-to-링크 mapping mode는 DL, UL 방향에 모두 적용된다.As described above, MLD is defined in Wi-Fi 7, and TID-to-link mapping agreement can be performed between MLDs where ML setup is performed. As an example of simple TID-to-link mapping, a non-AP MLD setup with an AP MLD over two links can perform an agreement with the AP MLD to map TID0 to TID3 to the first link and TID4 to TID7 to the second link. In this case, the non-AP MLD and the AP MLD transmit only MPDU/MSDUs with TIDs 0 to 3 over the first link, and transmit MPDU/MSDUs with TIDs 4 to 7 over the second link. In this case, it is possible to apply different TID-to-link mappings to the direction in which the AP MLD transmits (DL, Down link) and the direction in which the non-AP MLD transmits (UL, Up link). AP MLD and non-AP MLD where TID-to-link mapping is not performed have a Default TID-to-link mapping agreement state. The Default TID-to-link mapping state means that all TIDs are mapped to all setup links, that is, all types of TIDs can be transmitted without restriction through all setup links. At this time, the Default TID-to-link mapping mode is applied to both DL and UL directions.

일반적으로, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD 사이에 이뤄지는 TID-to-링크 mapping 협의는, 모든 TID가 적어도 1개의 링크에 mapping되어야 한다는 제약을 제외하곤 두 MLD간의 협의를 통해 자유롭게 설정되는 것이 가능하다. 즉, 특정 링크에는 특정 TID만을 매핑해야 한다 거나, 혹은 특정 링크에는 특정 TID를 매핑해서는 안된다는 제약은 존재하지 않는다. 다만, 이는 모든 setup 링크가 일반적인 AP가 동작하는 링크인 것을 가정했을 때 타당한 것이고, setup 링크 중 보조 링크가 존재하는 경우에는 별도의 제약이 더 적용되는 것이 가능하다.In general, the TID-to-link mapping agreement between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD can be freely set through the agreement between the two MLDs, except for the constraint that all TIDs must be mapped to at least one link. In other words, there is no constraint that only certain TIDs must be mapped to certain links, or that certain TIDs must not be mapped to certain links. However, this is reasonable when it is assumed that all setup links are links on which general APs operate, and if there are auxiliary links among the setup links, additional constraints may be applied.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, 보조 링크에는, 한 쌍이 되는 Primary 링크에 mapping된 TID만 매핑 될 수 있다. 더 나아가, 보조 링크에는, 한 쌍이 되는 Primary 링크에 mapping된 TID가 동일하게 매핑 될 수 있다. 즉, 보조 링크에는, 한 쌍이 되는 Primary 링크에 mapping되지 않은 TID가 mapping될 수 없다. 즉, 보조 링크의 TID-to-링크 mapping 상태는, 한 쌍이 되는 Primary 링크의 TID-to-링크 mapping 상태와 동일하다. 이처럼, 보조 링크에 대한 TID-to-링크 mapping 제약이 별도로 존재하는 이유는, 보조 링크가 Primary 링크와 동시에 활성상태를 유지할 수 없는 링크이기 때문일 수 있다. According to one embodiment of the present invention, only TIDs mapped to a pair of Primary links can be mapped to a secondary link. Furthermore, TIDs mapped to a pair of Primary links can be identically mapped to a secondary link. That is, a TID that is not mapped to a pair of Primary links cannot be mapped to a secondary link. That is, a TID-to-link mapping state of a secondary link is identical to a TID-to-link mapping state of a pair of Primary links. The reason why a separate TID-to-link mapping constraint exists for a secondary link may be because a secondary link is a link that cannot be kept active at the same time as a primary link.

보다 자세히 설명하면, 보조 링크는 Primary 링크가 비활성 상태일 때에만 활성상태일 수 있으며, 따라서 보조 링크에서 전송을 수행하는 동안 Primary 링크는 비활성 상태로 유지된다. 만약 특정 TID가 Primary 링크에만 mapping되어있고 보조 링크에는 mapping되지 않았다면, 보조 링크에 mapping되지 않은 TID는 Primary 링크가 비활성 상태인 시간 구간동안 전송이 불가능한 TID가 된다. 이는, 활성 상태의 링크가 Primary 링크인지 혹은 보조 링크인지에 따라 각 MLD가 전송할 수 있는 TID가 제약된다는 것을 의미하며, 이는 traffic flow를 유지하기에 매우 부적절한 제한이라 하겠다. 따라서, 보조 링크에는 항상 Primary 링크에 mapping된 것과 동일한 TID가 mapping되도록 제한함으로써, Primary 링크가 활성상태인지 혹은 보조 링크가 활성상태인지에 관계없이 모든 TID가 적어도 1개의 setup 링크를 통해 전송될 수 있는 상태로 유지되어야 한다.To be more specific, the secondary link can be active only when the primary link is inactive, so the primary link remains inactive while transmission is performed on the secondary link. If a specific TID is mapped only to the primary link and not to the secondary link, the TID that is not mapped to the secondary link becomes a TID that cannot be transmitted during the time period when the primary link is inactive. This means that the TIDs that each MLD can transmit are restricted depending on whether the active link is the primary link or the secondary link, which is a very inappropriate restriction for maintaining traffic flow. Therefore, by restricting the secondary link to always have the same TID mapped to the primary link, it is possible to maintain a state where all TIDs can be transmitted through at least one setup link regardless of whether the primary link or the secondary link is active.

따라서, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 TID-to-링크 mapping을 수행할 때에, Primary 링크에 mapping하는 TID를 보조 링크에 항상 mapping하는 형태의 TID-to-링크 mapping request를 수행해야 한다. 이 때, 상기 mapping에 대한 제약은 양 방향(DL/UL)에 대해 모두에 대해 적용된다. Therefore, when AP MLD and non-AP MLD perform TID-to-link mapping, they must perform a TID-to-link mapping request in the form of always mapping the TID mapped to the primary link to the secondary link. At this time, the constraints on the mapping are applied to both directions (DL/UL).

다른 방법으로, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 TID-to-링크 mapping을 수행할 때에, 보조 링크에 대한 TID mapping 정보를 별도로 지시하지 않고, Primary 링크에 대해 지시된 TID mapping이 보조 링크에도 동일하게 적용되는 것을 고려할 수 있다. 즉, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 보조 링크에 대한 별도의 TID-to-링크 mapping 협의를 수행하지 않을 수 있다. 이 때, 협의되지 않은 보조 링크에 대한 TID mapping 상태는, 상기 보조 링크와 쌍을 이루는 Primary 링크에 대해 협의된 TID mapping 상태와 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. 즉, 보조 링크에 대한 TID mapping은 직접적으로 지시/협의되지 않으며, Primary 링크에 대한 TID mapping이 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. 이는 보조 링크의 TID-to-링크 mapping 협의가, 한 쌍을 이루는 Primary 링크에 대해 수행된 TID-to-링크 mapping 협의에 의해 암시적인 방법으로 수행/완료된 것이라 해석될 수 있다. Alternatively, when AP MLD and non-AP MLD perform TID-to-link mapping, it may be considered that the TID mapping indicated for the primary link is applied equally to the secondary link without separately indicating TID mapping information for the secondary link. That is, AP MLD and non-AP MLD may not perform separate TID-to-link mapping negotiation for the secondary link. In this case, the TID mapping state for the non-negotiated secondary link may be applied equally to the TID mapping state negotiated for the primary link that is paired with the secondary link. That is, the TID mapping for the secondary link is not directly indicated/negotiated, and the TID mapping for the primary link may be applied equally. This may be interpreted that the TID-to-link mapping negotiation for the secondary link is implicitly performed/completed by the TID-to-link mapping negotiation performed for the paired primary link.

<보조 AP의 Traffic Indication><Traffic Indication of Auxiliary AP>

전술한 바와 같이 다수의 링크를 통해 Association 된 두 MLD 간에는 TID-to-링크 mapping negotiation이 수행될 수 있다. 만약 AP MLD와 non-AP MLD간에 TID-to-링크 mapping negotiation이 수행되었다면, AP MLD는 non-AP MLD와 negotiation을 수행한 TID-to-링크 mapping을 고려하여 Traffic indication을 지시해야 할 수 있다. 마찬가지로, non-AP MLD도 AP MLD로부터 Traffic indication을 수신했을 때, TID-to-링크 mapping을 고려하여 MSDU 수신을 위한 동작을 수행해야 할 수 있다. 이와 같이 AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 TID-to-링크 mapping을 고려하여 Traffic indication 지시 및 MSDU 수신을 수행해야 하는 이유는 TID-to-링크 mapping과 관련한 트래픽의 전송 제한 때문이다. 앞서 TID-to-링크 mapping에 대해서 설명한 바와 같이, 상대 MLD와 TID-to-링크 mapping negotiation을 수행한 MLD는 상대 MLD에게 전송을 수행할 때에, 전송하고자 하는 트래픽의 TID가 mapping된 링크를 통해서만 전송을 수행해야 한다. 따라서, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD가 DL 방향에 대해서 non-default mode의 TID-to-링크 mapping을 수행하였다면, AP MLD는 Queuing 중이던 MSDU를 전송하기 위해 상기 MSDU의 TID가 DL 방향에 대해 mapping되어 있는 링크를 통해서만 MSDU를 non-AP MLD에게 전송해야 한다. 즉, non-AP MLD는 자신이 수신할 MSDU가 전송될 수 있는 링크를 통해서만 PS-Poll frame을 전송해야 하며, 만약 non-AP MLD가 AP MLD측에 Queuing 되어 있는 MSDU의 TID가 DL 방향에 대해서 mapping되지 않는 링크에서 PS-Poll frame을 전송한다면, AP MLD로부터 MSDU를 수신할 수 없다. 이 경우, non-AP MLD는 MSDU의 수신이 불가능한 링크를 Awake로 전환하여 PS 효율이 저하될 뿐만 아니라, MSDU의 전송 지연이 발생하는 등 PS mode의 운용/지원이 효과적으로 수행되기 어렵다.As described above, TID-to-link mapping negotiation can be performed between two MLDs associated through multiple links. If TID-to-link mapping negotiation is performed between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD, the AP MLD may need to indicate Traffic indication considering the TID-to-link mapping negotiated with the non-AP MLD. Similarly, the non-AP MLD may also need to perform an operation for MSDU reception considering the TID-to-link mapping when receiving a Traffic indication from the AP MLD. The reason why the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD need to perform Traffic indication indication and MSDU reception considering the TID-to-link mapping is because of the traffic transmission restriction related to the TID-to-link mapping. As described above for the TID-to-link mapping, an MLD that has performed TID-to-link mapping negotiation with a counterpart MLD must perform transmission only through the link to which the TID of the traffic to be transmitted is mapped when performing transmission to the counterpart MLD. Therefore, if the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD perform TID-to-link mapping of the non-default mode for the DL direction, the AP MLD should transmit the MSDU to the non-AP MLD only through the link on which the TID of the MSDU being queued is mapped for the DL direction in order to transmit the MSDU. In other words, the non-AP MLD should transmit the PS-Poll frame only through the link on which the MSDU it is to receive can be transmitted, and if the non-AP MLD transmits the PS-Poll frame on the link on which the TID of the MSDU queued on the AP MLD side is not mapped for the DL direction, the MSDU cannot be received from the AP MLD. In this case, the non-AP MLD switches the link on which MSDU reception is impossible to the Awake, which reduces the PS efficiency and also causes a delay in MSDU transmission, making it difficult to effectively perform the operation/support of the PS mode.

따라서, TID-to-링크 mapping에 의한 Queuing MSDU(BU) 전송 불가 문제를 방지하기 위해, AP MLD는 TIM element를 통해 각 non-AP MLD에게 전송할 Queuing MSDU가 있는지 여부를 지시하는 한편, 추가적으로 어떤 링크에서 해당 MSDU가 전송되어야 하는지 여부와 관련한 정보를 지시해야 한다. 이때, 적어도 하나의 링크에 대해서 DL(Down 링크, AP가 non-AP에게 전송하는 방향) 방향으로 모든 TID가 mapping된 TID-to-링크 mapping negotiation을 수행한 non-AP MLD에게는 Queuing MSDU가 있는지 여부를 제외한 추가 지시는 수행되지 않을 수 있다. 이는, default TID-to-링크 mapping 상태 혹은 DL 방향에 대해 모든 TID가 mapping된 링크가 있는 non-AP MLD는 Queuing MSDU를 수신하기 위해 모든 TID가 mapping된 링크를 통해 PS-Poll frame을 전송함으로써 Queuing MSDU를 TID에 의한 전송 불가 문제없이 수신할 수 있기 때문일 수 있다. Therefore, in order to prevent the problem of Queuing MSDU (BU) transmission impossibility due to TID-to-link mapping, the AP MLD must indicate to each non-AP MLD through the TIM element whether there is a Queuing MSDU to be transmitted, and additionally indicate information regarding whether the MSDU should be transmitted on a link. At this time, for a non-AP MLD that has performed TID-to-link mapping negotiation in which all TIDs are mapped in the DL (Down link, the direction in which the AP transmits to the non-AP) direction for at least one link, no additional indication other than the presence or absence of a Queuing MSDU may be performed. This may be because a non-AP MLD with a default TID-to-link mapping state or a link in which all TIDs are mapped in the DL direction can receive the Queuing MSDU without the problem of transmission impossibility due to the TID by transmitting a PS-Poll frame through the link to which all TIDs are mapped in order to receive the Queuing MSDU.

AP MLD가 non-AP MLD에게, 어떤 링크에서 해당 MSDU(BU, Queuing frame 등)가 전송되어야 하는지 여부와 관련한 정보를 지시하는 방법은, TIM element와 함께 TID 혹은 링크 ID를 지시하는 element를 전송하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, non-AP MLD에게 TID 혹은 링크 ID를 지시하기 위해 전송하는 element는 Multi-링크 TIM element(혹은 Multi-링크 Traffic Indication element)로 명명될 수 있다. Multi-링크 TIM element는 TIM element에 의해서 Queuing MSDU가 존재하는 것으로 지시되는 각 non-AP MLD들이 어떤 링크에서 MSDU를 수신할 수 있는지 여부와 관련한 정보를 지시하며, non-AP MLD에게 별도의 링크와 관련한 정보 지시가 필요하지 않은 경우(default TID-to-링크 mapping 상태이거나 혹은 DL 방향으로 모든 TID가 mapping된 링크가 있는 TID-to-링크 mapping negotiation을 수행한 경우) Multi-링크 TIM element에서 별도의 링크와 관련한 정보가 지시되지 않을 수 있다. Multi-링크 TIM element를 통해 별도의 링크 관련 정보를 지시받지 않은 non-AP MLD는 DL 방향에 대해서 모든 TID가 mapping된 링크에서 PS-Poll frame을 전송하여 BU(queuing MSDU들)를 수신해야 한다. default TID-to-링크 mapping을 사용하는 non-AP MLD의 경우, 모든 링크가 DL 방향에 대해 모든 TID가 mapping된 상태이기 때문에 별도의 PS-Poll frame 전송 링크 선택 제한이 존재하지 않는 것으로 이해될 수 있다.The method in which an AP MLD indicates to a non-AP MLD information related to whether a corresponding MSDU (BU, Queuing frame, etc.) should be transmitted in a link may be to transmit an element indicating a TID or a link ID together with a TIM element. In this case, the element transmitted to indicate a TID or a link ID to the non-AP MLD may be named a Multi-link TIM element (or Multi-link Traffic Indication element). The Multi-link TIM element indicates information related to whether each non-AP MLD, which is indicated by the TIM element to have a Queuing MSDU, can receive the MSDU in a link. If a separate link-related information indication is not required to the non-AP MLD (if it is in the default TID-to-link mapping state or if TID-to-link mapping negotiation is performed in which there is a link in which all TIDs are mapped in the DL direction), separate link-related information may not be indicated in the Multi-link TIM element. A non-AP MLD that is not instructed with separate link-related information through a multi-link TIM element must transmit a PS-Poll frame on a link to which all TIDs are mapped for the DL direction to receive BUs (queuing MSDUs). In the case of a non-AP MLD that uses the default TID-to-link mapping, it can be understood that there is no separate PS-Poll frame transmission link selection restriction because all links have all TIDs mapped for the DL direction.

상술한 바와 같이, 보조 링크의 경우에는 Primary 링크에 mapping된 것과 동일한 TID가 mapping된다. 따라서, TID-to-링크 mapping 상태에 따라 Primary 링크에서 전송될 수 있는 TID의 traffic(MSDU/MPDU)은, 보조 링크에서도 전송될 수 있는 traffic임을 의미한다. 또한, 보조 링크를 통해 setup되어 있는 non-AP MLD는 항상 Primary 링크를 통해서도 setup된 상태이며, 보조 링크를 통해서만 association되어 있는 non-AP STA는 존재하지 않는다. As described above, in the case of the secondary link, the same TID as that mapped to the primary link is mapped. Therefore, the traffic (MSDU/MPDU) of the TID that can be transmitted on the primary link according to the TID-to-link mapping status means that it is traffic that can also be transmitted on the secondary link. In addition, the non-AP MLD that is set up through the secondary link is always set up through the primary link as well, and there is no non-AP STA that is associated only through the secondary link.

AP MLD가 전송한 Multi-링크 Traffic Indication element를 통해, AP MLD 측에 queueing 된 MSDU가 Primary 링크를 통해 수신될 수 있음이 지시되면, 상기 MSDU가 보조 링크를 통해서도 수신될 수 있음이 자명하다. 또한, AP MLD가 보조 링크를 통해 전송할 수 있는 MSDU는 Primary 링크를 통해서도 전송될 수 있음이 자명하다. If the AP MLD indicates through the Multi-link Traffic Indication element that an MSDU queued on the AP MLD side can be received through the primary link, it is self-evident that the MSDU can also be received through the secondary link. In addition, it is self-evident that an MSDU that the AP MLD can transmit through the secondary link can also be transmitted through the primary link.

따라서, AP MLD는 Multi-링크 Traffic Indication element를 통해서 각 링크에서 전송되어야 할 BU(bufferable Unit, MSDU)가 queueing되어 있음을 지시할 때에, 보조 링크에 대한 정보는 지시하지 않을 수 있다. 대신, 보조 링크에 대한 Traffic indication은, Primary 링크에 대한 Traffic indication을 통해 암시적으로 지시되는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, AP MLD가 전송하는 Multi-링크 Traffic Indication element에 포함된 링크 ID bitmap(Per-링크 Traffic Indication Bitmap subfield)은, 보조 링크와 대응하는 bit를 포함하지 않는 것이 가능하다. Therefore, when AP MLD indicates that BUs (bufferable units, MSDUs) to be transmitted on each link are queued through the Multi-link Traffic Indication element, information on the secondary link may not be indicated. Instead, the Traffic indication for the secondary link can be implicitly indicated through the Traffic indication for the primary link. In this case, the link ID bitmap (Per-link Traffic Indication Bitmap subfield) included in the Multi-link Traffic Indication element transmitted by AP MLD may not include a bit corresponding to the secondary link.

다른 표현으로 정리하면, AP MLD가 전송하는 Multi-링크 Traffic Indication element에 포함된 Per-링크 Traffic Indication Bitmap의 각 bit는 일반 AP 및/또는 Primary AP의 링크 ID와 대응하고, 보조 AP의 링크 ID와는 대응하지 않을 수 있다. 즉, 보조 AP에 대한 Traffic Indication은 AP MLD에 의해서 지시되지 않는다.In other words, each bit of the Per-link Traffic Indication Bitmap included in the Multi-link Traffic Indication element transmitted by the AP MLD corresponds to the link ID of the general AP and/or the Primary AP, and may not correspond to the link ID of the secondary AP. That is, the Traffic Indication for the secondary AP is not indicated by the AP MLD.

AP MLD로부터 TIM(traffic indication map) element, Multi-링크 Traffic Indication element를 통해 특정 Primary 링크에서 수신해야 할 MSDU가 있음을 지시받은 non-AP MLD는, 상기 특정 Primary 링크 혹은 상기 특정 Primary 링크와 한 쌍인 보조 링크를 통해 PS-Poll frame을 전송함으로써, AP MLD로부터의 buffered BU 수신을 시도할 수 있다. A non-AP MLD, which has been instructed by the AP MLD through the TIM (traffic indication map) element, Multi-link Traffic Indication element, that there is an MSDU to be received on a specific primary link, can attempt to receive a buffered BU from the AP MLD by transmitting a PS-Poll frame through the specific primary link or a secondary link paired with the specific primary link.

<보조 BSS의 BSS Color 설정><BSS Color setting of auxiliary BSS>

보조 BSS는 Primary BSS의 BSS color와 동일한 BSS color를 사용해야 할 수 있다. 즉, AP MLD는 Primary AP를 통해 전송하는 PPDU와 보조 AP를 통해 전송하는 HE/EHT/UHR PPDU의 BSS Color field (HE PPDU의 HE-SIG-A에 포함, EHT/UHR PPDU의 U-SIG에 포함)를 동일한 값으로 설정한다. 또한, non-AP MLD 역시, Primary BSS에서 전송하는 PPDU와 보조 BSS에서 전송하는 PPDU의 BSS Color field를 동일한 값으로 설정해야 한다. The secondary BSS may need to use the same BSS color as that of the primary BSS. That is, the AP MLD sets the BSS Color field (included in HE-SIG-A of HE PPDU, in U-SIG of EHT/UHR PPDU) of the PPDU transmitted through the primary AP and the HE/EHT/UHR PPDU transmitted through the secondary AP to the same value. In addition, the non-AP MLD shall also set the BSS Color field of the PPDU transmitted through the primary BSS and the PPDU transmitted through the secondary BSS to the same value.

따라서, Primary AP가 BSS Color Channel Announcement element를 전송하여 Primary BSS의 BSS color를 새로운 값으로 설정하면, 보조 BSS의 BSS color로 새로운 값으로 변경된다.Therefore, when the Primary AP sets the BSS color of the Primary BSS to a new value by transmitting the BSS Color Channel Announcement element, the BSS color of the Secondary BSS is changed to the new value.

다만, Primary BSS와 보조 BSS는 서로 다른 BSSID를 갖도록 설정되어야 한다. 이 때, 두 BSS의 BSSID를 서로 다른 값으로 설정한다는 의미는, Primary BSS의 BSSID와 보조 BSS의 BSSID를 각각 무작위로 결정하는 것을 의미한다.However, the Primary BSS and the Auxiliary BSS must be set to have different BSSIDs. In this case, setting the BSSIDs of the two BSSs to different values means that the BSSID of the Primary BSS and the BSSID of the Auxiliary BSS are randomly determined.

<보조 BSS의 parameter update><Parameter update of auxiliary BSS>

전술한 바와 같이, 보조 AP는 Beacon frame(및 Probe response frame)을 전송할 수 없고, 따라서 보조 BSS의 parameter가 변경될 때 보조 BSS의 member STA들에게 이를 announce할 수 없다.As mentioned above, the secondary AP cannot transmit Beacon frames (and Probe response frames), and therefore cannot announce changes in the parameters of the secondary BSS to the member STAs of the secondary BSS.

대신, 보조 BSS의 parameter update는 보조 AP와 쌍을 이루는 Primary AP, 혹은 AP MLD에 소속된 다른 AP가 전송하는 관리 프레임들을 통해 수행되는 것이 가능하다. 보다 구체적으로, AP MLD는 보조 BSS의 parameter가 update될 때에, 자신이 전송하는 관리 프레임에 포함된 RNR element에서, 상기 보조 BSS에 대응하는 update 지시 필드(예를 들어 BSS Parameter Change Count subfield(보조 AP에 대응하는 MLD Parameters subfield에 포함))를 이용해 보조 BSS의 Parameter update가 진행됨을 지시할 수 있다. 이 경우, non-AP MLD는 수신된 RNR element를 통해 보조 BSS의 Parameter가 변경되었음을 인지할 수 있다. 이 후, non-AP MLD는 AP MLD가 전송한 Multi-링크 element에 포함된 보조 AP의 Per-STA Profile subelement를 통해, 보조 BSS의 parameter를 수신 및 업데이트 할 수 있다.Instead, parameter update of the secondary BSS can be performed via management frames transmitted by the Primary AP paired with the secondary AP, or by other APs belonging to the AP MLD. More specifically, when the parameters of the secondary BSS are updated, the AP MLD can indicate that the parameter update of the secondary BSS is in progress by using the update indication field corresponding to the secondary BSS (e.g., BSS Parameter Change Count subfield (included in the MLD Parameters subfield corresponding to the secondary AP)) included in the RNR element of the management frame transmitted by the AP MLD. In this case, the non-AP MLD can recognize that the parameters of the secondary BSS have been changed via the received RNR element. Thereafter, the non-AP MLD can receive and update the parameters of the secondary BSS via the Per-STA Profile subelement of the secondary AP included in the Multi-link element transmitted by the AP MLD.

또한, 보조 AP에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement에 포함된 일부 present bit은 항상 0으로 설정되어야 한다. 보조 AP에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement의 Beacon Interval Present subfield는 0으로 설정된다. 보조 AP에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement의 TSF Offset Present subfield는 0으로 설정된다. 보조 AP에 대응하는 Per-STA Profile subelement의 DTIM Info Present subfield는 0으로 설정된다. 이 때, 상기 3개의 subfield가 0으로 설정되는 이유는 보조 AP가 Beacon frame을 전송하지 않고, TSF를 Primary AP와 동일한 값으로 사용하기 때문이다. 즉, 상기 Present subfield들이 1로 지시되었을 때 지시되는 정보들은 보조 AP(BSS, 링크)에 대해 정의되지 않거나 지시될 필요가 없는 정보들이기 때문에 상기 3개의 Present subfield는 보조 AP에 대해 항상 0으로 설정된다.In addition, some present bits included in the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP must always be set to 0. The Beacon Interval Present subfield of the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP is set to 0. The TSF Offset Present subfield of the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP is set to 0. The DTIM Info Present subfield of the Per-STA Profile subelement corresponding to the secondary AP is set to 0. At this time, the reason why the above three subfields are set to 0 is because the secondary AP does not transmit a Beacon frame and uses the TSF with the same value as the Primary AP. That is, since the information indicated when the Present subfields are indicated as 1 is information that is not defined or does not need to be indicated for the secondary AP (BSS, link), the above three Present subfields are always set to 0 for the secondary AP.

보조 BSS의 operating parameter 들 중 특정 parameter들은 Primary BSS의 operating parameter에 종속될 수 있다. 일 예로, 보조 BSS의 Operating BW는 Primary BSS의 Operating BW가 변경될 때, primary BSS의 Operating BW와 동일하게 변경될 수 있다.Certain operating parameters of the secondary BSS may be dependent on the operating parameters of the primary BSS. For example, the operating BW of the secondary BSS may be changed to be the same as the operating BW of the primary BSS when the operating BW of the primary BSS is changed.

<변형된 보조 링크 운용 방법><How to operate the modified auxiliary link>

상술한 바와 같이, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 특정 Operating 채널에 대한 접근성을 향상시키기 위한 목적으로, 중첩된 동작 채널에서 동작하는 복수의 링크를 포함하는 ML setup 상태를 갖을 수 있다. As described above, AP MLD and non-AP MLD may have an ML setup state that includes multiple links operating on overlapping operating channels, for the purpose of improving accessibility to specific Operating channels.

다른 방법으로, 중첩된 동작 채널을 갖는 복수의 링크를 설정하는 대신, operating channel(bandwidth)가 연속적으로 위치하는 복수의 링크를 설정하는 방법이 활용될 수 있다. Alternatively, instead of setting up multiple links with overlapping operating channels, a method can be utilized to set up multiple links with operating channels (bandwidths) located sequentially.

보다 구체적으로 설명하면, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 특정 channel bandwidth 내에서 연속적인 operating channel을 갖는 복수의 링크를 통해 연결된 ML setup을 설정함으로써, 연속된 operating channel에 대한 채널 접근성을 강화하고자 할 수 있다. 일 예로, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 특정 160 MHz 채널에 포함된 두 개의 80 MHz 채널 각각을 Operating channel로 사용하는 두 개의 링크를 통해 ML setup을 수행함으로써 상기 특정 160 MHz 채널에 대한 접근성을 강화하고자 할 수 있다. 다른 예로, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 특정 320 MHz 채널에 포함된 두 개의 160 MHz 채널 각각을 Operating channel로 사용하는 두 개의 링크를 통해 ML setup을 수행함으로써 상기 특정 320 MHz 채널에 대한 접근성을 강화하고자 할 수 있다. 또 다른 예로, AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 특정 320 MHz 채널에 포함된 네 개의 80 MHz 채널 각각을 Operating channel로 사용하는 네 개의 링크를 통해 ML setup을 수행함으로써 상기 특정 320 MHz 채널에 대한 접근성을 강화하고자 할 수 있다. More specifically, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may attempt to enhance channel accessibility for a consecutive operating channel by establishing an ML setup connected through multiple links having consecutive operating channels within a specific channel bandwidth. As an example, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may attempt to enhance accessibility for a specific 160 MHz channel by performing the ML setup through two links that use each of two 80 MHz channels included in the specific 160 MHz channel as an Operating channel. As another example, the AP MLD and the non-AP MLD may attempt to enhance accessibility for a specific 320 MHz channel by performing the ML setup through two links that use each of two 160 MHz channels included in the specific 320 MHz channel as an Operating channel. As another example, an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD may wish to enhance accessibility to a particular 320 MHz channel by performing ML setup over four links, each using one of the four 80 MHz channels included in that particular 320 MHz channel as its Operating channel.

이 경우, AP MLD 및/또는 non-AP MLD는 연속적인 Operating channel에서 동작하는 제1 STA(AP STA 및/또는 non-AP STA)를 통해 전송을 수행할 때, 연속적인 Operating channel에서 동작하는 제2 STA의 전송과 동기화된 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 일 예로, AP MLD는 특정 160 MHz에 포함된 제1 80 MHz에서 동작하는 제1 AP를 통해 PPDU를 전송할 때, 상기 특정 160 MHz에 포함된 제2 80 MHz에서 동작하는 제2 AP와 동기화된 전송을 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, 제1 AP와 제2 AP가 각각 전송한 80 MHz PPDU는, 160 MHz PPDU의 제1 Segment와 제2 Segment와 같이 이해될 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 제1 Segment는, 상기 특정 160 MHz에 포함된 제1 80 MHz Segment에서 전송되는 PPDU를 의미하고, 상기 제2 Segment는, 상기 특정 160 MHz에 포함된 제2 80 MHz Segment에서 전송되는 PPDU를 의미한다. 이 때, AP MLD가 제1 AP의 전송과 제2 AP의 전송을 동기화한다는 의미는, 제1 AP를 통해 전송한 PPDU와 제2 AP를 통해 전송한 PPDU의 전송 시작시점 및 PPDU 길이가 동일하게 관리되는 것을 의미한다. 또한, 제1 AP와 제2 AP가 동기화된 PPDU를 전송하는 경우, 제1 AP와 제2 AP가 획득한 TXOP 역시 동기화되는 것이 가능하다. 즉, AP MLD가 제1 AP와 제2 AP를 통해 각각 80 MHz PPDU를 동기화하여 전송하는 경우, 전송된 두 80 MHz PPDU는 단일 160 MHz PPDU와 같은 형태를 갖는 것이 가능하다. 즉, AP MLD가 제1 AP와 제2 AP를 통해 동기화된 PPDU를 전송하는 경우, 제1 AP가 획득한 TXOP와 제2 AP가 획득한 TXOP의 시작 시점 및 길이는 동일하게 설정된다.In this case, the AP MLD and/or the non-AP MLD may perform an operation synchronized with the transmission of the second STA operating in the continuous Operating channel when performing transmission through the first STA (AP STA and/or non-AP STA) operating in the continuous Operating channel. For example, when the AP MLD transmits a PPDU through the first AP operating in the first 80 MHz included in the specific 160 MHz, the AP MLD may perform a transmission synchronized with the second AP operating in the second 80 MHz included in the specific 160 MHz. In this case, the 80 MHz PPDUs transmitted by the first AP and the second AP, respectively, may be understood as the first segment and the second segment of the 160 MHz PPDU. At this time, the first segment means a PPDU transmitted in the first 80 MHz segment included in the specific 160 MHz, and the second segment means a PPDU transmitted in the second 80 MHz segment included in the specific 160 MHz. At this time, the meaning that the AP MLD synchronizes the transmission of the first AP and the transmission of the second AP means that the transmission start time and the PPDU length of the PPDU transmitted through the first AP and the PPDU transmitted through the second AP are managed to be the same. In addition, when the first AP and the second AP transmit synchronized PPDUs, it is possible for the TXOPs acquired by the first AP and the second AP to also be synchronized. That is, when the AP MLD synchronizes and transmits 80 MHz PPDUs through the first AP and the second AP, respectively, it is possible for the two transmitted 80 MHz PPDUs to have the same form as a single 160 MHz PPDU. That is, when the AP MLD transmits synchronized PPDUs through the first AP and the second AP, the start time and length of the TXOP acquired by the first AP and the TXOP acquired by the second AP are set to be the same.

또한, 상술한 바와 같이, non-AP MLD도 연속적인 Operating channel에서 동작하는 제1 STA(AP STA 및/또는 non-AP STA)를 통해 전송을 수행할 때, 연속적인 Operating channel에서 동작하는 제2 STA의 전송과 동기화된 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, non-AP MLD가 수행하는 동기화된 전송에 대한 구체적인 설명은 상술한 AP MLD의 경우와 동일하므로 생략한다.In addition, as described above, when a non-AP MLD performs transmission through a first STA (AP STA and/or non-AP STA) operating on a continuous Operating channel, it can perform an operation synchronized with the transmission of a second STA operating on a continuous Operating channel. In this case, a specific description of the synchronized transmission performed by the non-AP MLD is omitted because it is the same as in the case of the AP MLD described above.

연속적인 Operating channel을 갖는 복수의 링크들 중 하나의 링크는 Primary 링크로 설정되고, 나머지 링크는(들은) 보조 링크로 설정되며, Primary 링크에서 동작하는 AP는 Beacon frame을 주기적으로 전송하는 반면, 보조 링크에서 동작하는 AP는 Beacon frame을 전송하지 않는 특징을 갖는다. 이 때, 연속적인 Operating channel에서 운용되는 Primary 링크 및 보조 링크에는 전술한 중첩된 동작 채널에서 운용되는 Primary 링크, 보조 링크와 동일/유사한 운용 방법이 적용될 수 있다. 연속적인 Operating channel에서 운용되는 Primary 링크 및 보조 링크에는 동일한 TID가 mapping되며, 보조 링크에서 운용되는 AP 및 STA들은 Primary 링크에서 운용되는 AP 및 STA의 TSF timer를 공통으로 사용한다.Among multiple links having continuous Operating channels, one link is set as a Primary link, and the remaining links(s) are set as Secondary links. An AP operating on the Primary link periodically transmits Beacon frames, while an AP operating on the Secondary link does not transmit Beacon frames. At this time, an operating method identical/similar to that of the Primary link and Secondary link operating on the aforementioned overlapping operating channels may be applied to the Primary link and Secondary link operating on the continuous Operating channel. The same TID is mapped to the Primary link and Secondary link operating on the continuous Operating channel, and the APs and STAs operating on the Secondary link commonly use the TSF timers of the APs and STAs operating on the Primary link.

도 20은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 연속적인 동작 채널을 갖는 주 AP와 보조 AP가 포함된 AP MLD의 구성 및 동작 채널의 설정 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 20 illustrates a configuration of an AP MLD including a primary AP and a secondary AP having continuous operation channels and a method for setting operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 20(a)를 참조하면, AP MLD에는 3개의 AP MLD가 소속되어 있다. 이 때, AP1은 Primary AP로 기능하고, AP2는 Primary AP와 쌍을 이루는 보조 AP로 기능한다. AP3는 일반 AP이다.Referring to Figure 20(a), three AP MLDs belong to the AP MLD. At this time, AP1 functions as the Primary AP, AP2 functions as the Auxiliary AP paired with the Primary AP, and AP3 is a general AP.

도 20(b)를 참조하면 Primary AP와 보조 AP는 연속된 Operating channel(특정 320 MHz 채널에 위치한 두개의 160 MHz 채널)에서 동작한다. Referring to Figure 20(b), the Primary AP and the Secondary AP operate on consecutive Operating channels (two 160 MHz channels located on a specific 320 MHz channel).

연속적인 Operating channel을 갖는 복수의 링크를 통해 연결된 AP MLD와 non-AP MLD는 아래와 같은 방법으로 통신을 수행할 수 있다.AP MLD and non-AP MLD connected through multiple links with continuous operating channels can communicate in the following manner.

1. 각 링크(Primary 링크 및 보조 링크(들))에서 운용되는 STA들(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)은 각 링크의 프라이머리 채널을 통해 백오프 절차를 수행한다. 보조 링크에서 운용되는 STA는 백오프 절차가 완료되었을 때, 백오프 카운터를 0으로 유지한다.1. STAs (AP STA and non-AP STA) operating on each link (primary link and secondary link(s)) perform a backoff procedure through the primary channel of each link. STAs operating on the secondary link maintain the backoff counter at 0 when the backoff procedure is completed.

2-1. Primary 링크에서 운용되는 STA(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)의 백오프 절차가 완료되면, 상기 STA가 포함된 MLD는 Primary 링크 및 이미 백오프 절차가 완료된(Primary 링크와 동시에 완료된 링크 포함) 보조 링크를 통해 전송을 개시한다. 이 때, 상기 MLD는 Primary 링크와 보조 링크에서 수행하는 전송을 동기화된 전송으로 수행한다.2-1. When the backoff procedure of the STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) operating on the primary link is completed, the MLD including the STA initiates transmission through the primary link and the secondary link for which the backoff procedure has already been completed (including links completed simultaneously with the primary link). At this time, the MLD performs the transmissions performed on the primary link and the secondary link as synchronized transmissions.

2-2. Primary 링크에서 운용되는 STA(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)의 백오프 절차가 중단되는 경우, 상기 STA가 포함된 MLD는 보조 링크에서 운용하는 STA의 백오프 절차가 완료되었을 때 보조 링크를 통해서 전송을 수행한다. 만약 Primary 링크에서 운용되는 STA의 백오프 절차가 중단된 시점에, 보조 링크에서 동작하는 STA의 백오프 절차가 이미 완료되어 백오프 카운터가 0으로 유지되던 중이었다면, MLD는 보조 링크에서 동작하는 STA의 백오프 카운터를 새로이 생성한 후 백오프 절차를 수행해야 한다. 이 때, 상기 보조 링크에서 동작하는 STA의 Retry counter 및 CW(Contention Window)는 변경되지 않는다. 이 때, 상기 백오프 절차가 중단되었다는 의미는 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS에 의해 점유된 상황과 같이, 백오프 카운터의 감소가 중단된 경우를 의미한다.2-2. When the backoff procedure of an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) operating on the primary link is interrupted, the MLD including the STA performs transmission through the secondary link when the backoff procedure of the STA operating on the secondary link is completed. If, at the time when the backoff procedure of the STA operating on the primary link is interrupted, the backoff procedure of the STA operating on the secondary link has already been completed and the backoff counter was maintained at 0, the MLD must newly generate a backoff counter of the STA operating on the secondary link and then perform the backoff procedure. At this time, the Retry counter and CW (Contention Window) of the STA operating on the secondary link are not changed. At this time, the interruption of the backoff procedure means a case where the decrease of the backoff counter is interrupted, such as a situation where the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS.

즉, Primary 링크의 백오프 절차가 완료되면, 상술한 2-1의 결과, MLD는 Primary 링크 및 이미 백오프 절차가 완료된 보조 링크들을 통해 동기화된 전송을 개시함으로써, 연속된 Operating channel들을 한꺼번에 점유할 수 있다. That is, when the backoff procedure of the primary link is completed, as a result of 2-1 described above, the MLD can occupy consecutive operating channels simultaneously by initiating synchronized transmission through the primary link and the secondary links for which the backoff procedure has already been completed.

만약 Primary 링크의 백오프 절차가 중단되면, 상술한 2-2와 같이, MLD는 보조 링크를 통해 전송을 개시할 수 있다. 보조 링크를 통해 전송을 개시하는 MLD는 Primary 링크에서 백오프 절차를 속행할 수 있을 것으로 예상되는 시점(예를 들어 Primary 링크에서 운용하는 STA의 NAV가 0이 될 것으로 예상되는 시점) 이전에 상기 보조 링크를 통해 획득한 TXOP을 종료한다. If the backoff procedure of the primary link is interrupted, the MLD can initiate transmission through the secondary link as described in 2-2 above. The MLD that initiates transmission through the secondary link terminates the TXOP acquired through the secondary link before the time at which the backoff procedure on the primary link is expected to be able to continue (for example, the time at which the NAV of the STA operating on the primary link is expected to become 0).

도 21는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 연속된 동작 채널을 갖는 두 링크에서 STA를 운용하는 MLD의 채널 접속 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 21 illustrates a channel access method of an MLD that operates an STA on two links having continuous operation channels according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 21을 참조하면, 각각 80 MHz Operating BW를 갖는 Primary 링크와 보조 링크가 특정 160 MHz channel 내에서 운용된다. Referring to Figure 21, the primary link and the secondary link, each having an 80 MHz Operating BW, are operated within a specific 160 MHz channel.

제1 TXOP이 MLD에 의해서 획득되는 절차는 아래와 같다.The procedure for obtaining the first TXOP by MLD is as follows.

MLD는 보조 링크의 A20(보조 링크에서 운용되는 BSS의 Primary 20 MHz channel)에서 채널 접속 절차(백오프 절차)를 먼저 완료하였지만 보조 링크에서 전송을 개시하지 않고, Primary 링크와 동기화된 전송을 수행하기 위해 보조 링크의 backoff counter를 0으로 유지하는 동작을 수행한다. MLD는 Primary 링크의 P20 (Primary 링크에서 운용되는 BSS의 Primary 20 MHz channel)에서 채널 접속 절차가 완료되면, Primary 링크 뿐만 아니라, 이미 백오프 카운터가 0인 보조 링크를 통해 함께 전송을 개시한다. 이때, MLD는 Primary 링크와 보조 링크의 STA들을 통해 동기화된 전송을 수행한다. 이 때, MLD가 두 링크를 통해 전송하는 두 80 MHz PPDU들은 BW field가 160 MHz 인 것으로 지시되어, 외부 단말로 하여금 1개의 160 MHz PPDU로 인지될 수 있다.MLD first completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) on A20 (Primary 20 MHz channel of BSS operated on the secondary link) of the secondary link, but does not initiate transmission on the secondary link, and performs an operation of maintaining the backoff counter of the secondary link to 0 in order to perform transmission synchronized with the primary link. When MLD completes the channel access procedure on P20 (Primary 20 MHz channel of BSS operated on the primary link) of the primary link, it initiates transmission not only through the primary link but also through the secondary link whose backoff counter is already 0. At this time, MLD performs synchronized transmission through STAs of the primary link and the secondary link. At this time, the two 80 MHz PPDUs transmitted by MLD through the two links are indicated as having a BW field of 160 MHz, so that external terminals can recognize them as one 160 MHz PPDU.

제2 TXOP이 MLD에 의해서 획득되는 절차는 아래와 같다. The procedure for obtaining the second TXOP by MLD is as follows.

MLD는 보조 링크의 A20(보조 링크에서 운용되는 BSS의 Primary 20 MHz channel)에서 채널 접속 절차(백오프 절차)를 완료했을 때, Primary 링크가 OBSS에 의해 점유되었음을 고려하여 보조 링크의 전송을 개시한다. 이 때, 보조 링크에서 개시된 TXOP(혹은 PPDU)은 Primary 링크를 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP이 종료될 것으로 예상되는 시점 이전에 종료된다.When MLD completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) on A20 of the secondary link (the primary 20 MHz channel of the BSS operating on the secondary link), it initiates transmission on the secondary link, considering that the primary link is occupied by the OBSS. At this time, the TXOP (or PPDU) initiated on the secondary link is terminated before the time when the TXOP of the OBSS occupying the primary link is expected to end.

제3 TXOP이 MLD에 의해서 획득되는 절차는 아래와 같다. The procedure for obtaining the third TXOP by MLD is as follows.

MLD는 Primary 링크의 P20에서 채널 접속 절차(백오프 절차)를 완료했을 때, Primary 링크에서 TXOP을 개시한다. MLD는 Primary 링크에서 전송을 개시한 후, 보조 링크에 대한 CCA 능력을 상실하며, 따라서 보조 링크의 Backoff counter는 3이하로 감소되지 않을 수 있다. 다만, 보조 링크에 대한 CCA를 수행할 수 있는 MLD는 보조 링크의 백오프 카운터를 지속적으로 감소시키는 것도 가능할 수 있다.When MLD completes the channel access procedure (backoff procedure) on P20 of the primary link, it initiates TXOP on the primary link. After MLD initiates transmission on the primary link, it loses the CCA capability for the secondary link, and therefore the backoff counter of the secondary link may not decrease below 3. However, MLD capable of performing CCA on the secondary link may also continuously decrease the backoff counter of the secondary link.

<단일 링크를 이용해 nonprimary(secondary) channel access를 수행하는 단말들의 MU PPDU 송/수신 방법><MU PPDU transmission/reception method of terminals performing nonprimary (secondary) channel access using a single link>

전술한 바와 같이, Wi-Fi STA의 채널 접근성을 향상을 위한 방법으로 넌 프라이머리 채널을 이용한 Channel access 방법이 고려될 수 있으며, MLD의 경우 MLD의 특성을 이용한 채널 접근성 강화 방법을(상술한 Overlapping BSS 등) 활용될 수 있다. 본 발명에서 제공하는 다양한 채널 접속 방법의 공통점은, 전송 장치가 1개 프라이머리 채널을 통해서만 채널 접속을 수행하는 것이 아니라, 프라이머리 채널이 타 장치에 의해 점유되었을 때 다른 channel(넌 프라이머리 채널 혹은 보조 링크의 프라이머리 채널 등)을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행한다는 것이다.As described above, a channel access method using a non-primary channel can be considered as a method for improving the channel accessibility of a Wi-Fi STA, and in the case of MLD, a method for enhancing channel accessibility using the characteristics of MLD (such as the above-described Overlapping BSS) can be utilized. The common feature of the various channel access methods provided in the present invention is that a transmitting device does not perform channel access only through one primary channel, but performs channel access using another channel (such as a non-primary channel or a primary channel of an auxiliary link) when the primary channel is occupied by another device.

이와 같이, 전송 장치가 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 channel을 통해 전송을 개시할 수 있기 때문에, 수신 장치 역시 자신이 관찰한 프라이머리 채널의 상태가 BUSY인 경우 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널 혹은 보조 링크의 프라이머리 채널 등)에서 PPDU 수신을 대기해야 한다.In this way, since a transmitting device can initiate transmission on a channel other than the primary channel, a receiving device must also wait for PPDU reception on a subchannel other than the primary channel (such as a non-primary channel or the primary channel of an auxiliary link) when the state of the primary channel it observes is BUSY.

넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 STA(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)가 전송하는 PPDU는 프라이머리 채널을 점유하여 전송되지 않지만, 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 STA가 전송하는 PPDU는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 점유하여 전송될 수 있다. 이는, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 STA가 판단한 프라이머리 채널의 상태는 항상 BUSY이고, 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 STA는 넌 프라이머리 채널의 상태에 상관없이 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하기 때문이다. A PPDU transmitted by an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) that has performed channel access through a non-primary channel is not transmitted by occupying the primary channel, but a PPDU transmitted by an STA that has performed channel access through the primary channel can be transmitted by occupying the non-primary channel. This is because the state of the primary channel determined by an STA that has performed channel access through a non-primary channel is always BUSY, and an STA that has performed channel access through the primary channel performs channel access through the primary channel regardless of the state of the non-primary channel.

따라서, 전송 장치가 판단한 프라이머리 채널의 상태가 IDLE인 경우, 전송 장치는 프라이머리 채널과 넌 프라이머리 채널을 모두 점유하는 PPDU를 전송할 수 있고, 프라이머리 채널이 BUSY라고 판단한 수신 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 상기 PPDU를 수신하게 될 수 있다. 즉, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 PPDU를 수신하는 장치는 전송 장치가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU 및 전송 장치가 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU 모두를 수신하게 될 수 있고, 수신된 PPDU의 RU Allocation subfield에 의해 지시된 자신의 RU가 어떤 index의 RU(혹은 MRU(Multiple-RU))인지 여부를 해석하는데 어려움을 겪을 수 있다. 즉, 전송 장치와 수신 장치는 프라이머리 채널의 상태(IDLE or BUSY) 대해서 서로 다른 판단을 갖을 수 있고, 이에 따라 전송 장치가 채널 접속을 수행한 channel과 수신 장치가 PPDU의 수신을 시작하는 channel은 서로 달라질 수 있다. 종래 Wi-Fi STA가 RU Allocation 정보를 지시 및 습득하는 절차는 도 22의 일 실시예를 통해 간략히 설명된다. 이하 RU는 26, 52, 106, 242, 484, 996, 996 x N (N은 2보다 큰 자연수)-tone size RU와 같은 기존 RU 뿐만 아니라, MRU (예를 들어 52+26, 106+26, 484+242, 996+484 -tone size RU 등)를 총칭하는 의미로 해석될 수 있다.Accordingly, if the state of the primary channel determined by the transmitting device is IDLE, the transmitting device can transmit a PPDU occupying both the primary channel and the non-primary channel, and the receiving device, which determines that the primary channel is BUSY, can receive the PPDU via the non-primary channel. That is, the device receiving the PPDU via the non-primary channel can receive both the PPDU transmitted by the transmitting device after performing channel access via the primary channel and the PPDU transmitted by the transmitting device after performing channel access via the non-primary channel, and can have difficulty in interpreting which index of its RU (or MRU (Multiple-RU)) is indicated by the RU Allocation subfield of the received PPDU. That is, the transmitting device and the receiving device can have different judgments regarding the state (IDLE or BUSY) of the primary channel, and accordingly, the channel through which the transmitting device performed channel access and the channel through which the receiving device starts receiving the PPDU can be different from each other. The procedure by which a conventional Wi-Fi STA instructs and acquires RU Allocation information is briefly described through an embodiment of FIG. 22. Hereinafter, RU may be interpreted to collectively mean not only conventional RUs such as 26, 52, 106, 242, 484, 996, 996 x N (N is a natural number greater than 2)-tone size RUs, but also MRUs (e.g., 52+26, 106+26, 484+242, 996+484-tone size RUs, etc.).

즉, 전송 장치는 프라이머리 채널 및 넌 프라이머리 채널을 유휴 상태라고 판단할 수 있지만, 수신 장치는 프라이머리 채널은 비지 상태, 넌 프라이머리 채널은 유휴 상태로 판단할 수 있다. 이 경우, 전송 장치는 프라이머리 채널 및 넌 프라이머리 채널을 모두 점유하는 PPDU를 전송할 수 있다. 하지만, 수신 장치는 프라이머리 채널은 비지 상태이기 때문에 프라이머리 채널에서는 PPDU를 수신할 수 없고, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해서 PPDU를 수신할 수 있다. 수신 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해서 PPDU를 수신하였기 때문에 PPDU에 포함된 필드(예를 들면, RU allocation subfield 등)를 넌 프라이머리 채널 기준으로 해석할 수 있다. 하지만, 전송 장치는 프라이머리 채널을 기준으로 필드들을 생성하여 PPDU에 포함시킬 수 있다. 따라서, 이 경우, 수신 장치가 수신된 PPDU에 포함된 필드를 넌 프라이머리 채널에 기초하여 해석하는 경우, PPDU에 포함된 필드들을 전송 장치와는 다르게 해석할 수 있다. 따라서, 이 경우, 수신 장치가 PPDU에 포함된 필드들을 프라이머리 채널에 기초하여 해석하도록 할 필요가 있다.That is, the transmitting device can determine the primary channel and the non-primary channel as idle, but the receiving device can determine the primary channel as busy and the non-primary channel as idle. In this case, the transmitting device can transmit a PPDU that occupies both the primary channel and the non-primary channel. However, the receiving device cannot receive the PPDU on the primary channel because the primary channel is busy, and can receive the PPDU through the non-primary channel. Since the receiving device received the PPDU through the non-primary channel, it can interpret the fields included in the PPDU (e.g., RU allocation subfield, etc.) based on the non-primary channel. However, the transmitting device can generate the fields based on the primary channel and include them in the PPDU. Therefore, in this case, if the receiving device interprets the fields included in the received PPDU based on the non-primary channel, it can interpret the fields included in the PPDU differently from the transmitting device. Therefore, in this case, it is necessary to enable the receiving device to interpret the fields included in the PPDU based on the primary channel.

이를 위해, 수신 장치는 전송 장치가 프라이머리 채널 및 넌 프라이머리 채널 모두를 이용하여 PPDU를 전송한 경우, 수신 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 PPDU를 수신하였다고 하더라도 PPDU에 포함된 필드들을 프라이머리 채널에 기초하여 해석할 수 있다.To this end, if the transmitting device transmits the PPDU using both the primary channel and the non-primary channel, the receiving device can interpret the fields included in the PPDU based on the primary channel even if the receiving device receives the PPDU on the non-primary channel.

본 발명의 또 다른 실시 예로 넌 프라이머리 채널이 PPDU에 포함된 필드들을 프라이머리 채널 기준으로 해석하기 위해서 이를 지시하는 지시 정보가 PPDU에 포함되어 전송될 수 있다.In another embodiment of the present invention, instruction information indicating that a non-primary channel should interpret fields included in a PPDU based on a primary channel may be included and transmitted in the PPDU.

도 22는 PPDU의 프리앰블을 통해 지시되는 자원 유닛 할당 서브 필드 및 자원 유닛 할당 서브 필드를 이용해 각 STA에게 자원 유닛 할당이 수행되는 방법 및 컨텐츠 채널의 지시 방법 일 실시예를 도시한다. FIG. 22 illustrates an embodiment of a method for performing resource unit allocation to each STA using a resource unit allocation subfield and a resource unit allocation subfield indicated through a preamble of a PPDU and a method for indicating a content channel.

도 22 (a)는 160 MHz 대역에 포함된 484-tone RU 2개와 996-tone RU 1개를 STA A, B, C, D에게 할당하는 상황을 표현한다. STA A와 STA B는 가장 낮은 주파수 영역에 위치하는 RU#1(484-tone size RU)를 할당 받고, STA C는 RU#2(484-tone size RU), STA D는 RU#3(996-tone size RU)를 할당 받는다.Fig. 22 (a) represents a situation in which two 484-tone RUs and one 996-tone RU in the 160 MHz band are allocated to STAs A, B, C, and D. STA A and STA B are allocated RU#1 (484-tone size RU) located in the lowest frequency region, STA C is allocated RU#2 (484-tone size RU), and STA D is allocated RU#3 (996-tone size RU).

도 22 (a)와 같이 RU를 할당하는 PPDU를 전송하는 전송 장치는, DL PPDU에 포함된 Signaling field (예를 들어 HE/EHT/UHR SIG field)를 통해, RU 구성 및 각 RU를 할당 받는 STA의 정보를 지시한다. 이 때, 각 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 전송되는 Signaling field는 서로 같거나 다른 Content channel을 포함할 수 있다. As shown in Fig. 22 (a), a transmitting device transmitting a PPDU that allocates RUs indicates the RU configuration and information of an STA to which each RU is allocated through a Signaling field (e.g., HE/EHT/UHR SIG field) included in a DL PPDU. At this time, the Signaling fields transmitted through each 20 MHz subchannel may include the same or different Content channels.

도 22 (b)는 Content channel의 구성을 도시한다. 각 Content channel은 RU Allocation subfield 및 User field를 포함한다. 이 때, Content channel#1에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield들은 홀수 번째 20 MHz 서브 채널(도 22 (a) 참조)이 각각 대응하고, Content channel#2에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield들은 짝수 번째 20 MHz 서브 채널(도 22(a) 참조)이 각각 대응한다. Fig. 22 (b) illustrates the configuration of Content channels. Each Content channel includes an RU Allocation subfield and a User field. At this time, the RU Allocation subfields included in Content channel#1 correspond to the odd-numbered 20 MHz subchannels (see Fig. 22 (a)), and the RU Allocation subfields included in Content channel#2 correspond to the even-numbered 20 MHz subchannels (see Fig. 22 (a)).

Content channel에 포함된 각각의 RU Allocation subfield는 각각 대응하는 20 MHz 서브 채널에 대한 RU 정보를 지시한다. 보다 구체적으로 설명하면, Content channel#1에 포함된 첫 번째와 두 번째 RU Allocation subfield는 각각 20 MHz #1과 20 MHz #3 서브 채널에 대응하는 RU의 정보를 지시하고, Content channel#2에 포함된 첫 번째와 두 번째 RU Allocation subfield는 각각 20 MHz #2와 20 MHz #4에 대응하는 RU의 정보를 지시한다.Each RU Allocation subfield included in a content channel indicates RU information for each corresponding 20 MHz subchannel. More specifically, the first and second RU Allocation subfields included in content channel#1 indicate RU information corresponding to 20 MHz #1 and 20 MHz #3 subchannels, respectively, and the first and second RU Allocation subfields included in content channel#2 indicate RU information corresponding to 20 MHz #2 and 20 MHz #4, respectively.

도 22 (a)를 참조하면, 20 MHz #1 서브 채널은 RU#1에 대응하고, 따라서 Content channel#1에 포함된 첫 번째 RU Allocation subfield는 RU#1에 대한 정보를 지시한다. 이 때, RU Allocation subfield는 대응하는 RU를 할당받을 User의 숫자 정보를 함께 지시하며, RU Allocation subfield 들 다음에 지시되는 User field들 중 지정된 숫자의 User field는 해당 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시되는 RU가 할당된 것으로 해석된다. Referring to Fig. 22 (a), the 20 MHz #1 subchannel corresponds to RU#1, and therefore, the first RU Allocation subfield included in Content channel#1 indicates information about RU#1. At this time, the RU Allocation subfield also indicates the number information of the User to be allocated the corresponding RU, and among the User fields indicated after the RU Allocation subfields, a User field of a designated number is interpreted as having been allocated the RU indicated through the corresponding RU Allocation subfield.

도 22 (b)의 예에서, Content channel#1에 포함된 첫 번째 RU Allocation subfield는 User 1명을 지시하였고, 따라서 Content channel#1에 포함된 첫 번째 User field에 대응하는 STA A에게 RU#1이 할당된다. Content channel#1에 포함된 두 번째 RU Allocation subfield가 20 MHz#3에 대응하는 RU#2를 지시하고 User 1명을 지시하므로, Content channel#1에 포함된 두 번째 User field에 대응하는 STA C에게는 RU#2가 할당된다.In the example of Fig. 22 (b), the first RU Allocation subfield included in Content channel#1 indicates 1 User, and therefore RU#1 is allocated to STA A corresponding to the first User field included in Content channel#1. Since the second RU Allocation subfield included in Content channel#1 indicates RU#2 corresponding to 20 MHz#3 and indicates 1 User, RU#2 is allocated to STA C corresponding to the second User field included in Content channel#1.

Content channel#1과 #2는 20 MHz 대역마다 교차하여 나타나며, 구체적인 지시 위치는 도 22의 (c)를 통해 확인할 수 있다. 따라서, 자신에게 할당된 RU의 위치를 확인하고자 하는 STA는, 특정 40 MHz 대역(예를 들어 Primary 40 MHz, Secondary 40 MHz 혹은 Secondary 80/160 MHz 대역에 포함된 특정 40 MHz 대역)을 통해 수신되는 두 종류의 Content channel을 수신하고, 자신에게 대응하는 User field가 Content channel에 포함되어 있는지 여부를 확인한 후, 자신의 User field가 대응하는 RU Allocation subfield에 의해 지시되는 RU의 정보를 확인함으로써 자신에게 할당된 RU 정보를 획득할 수 있다. 다만, 서로 다른 80 MHz Segment에 위치한 Content channel들은, 같은 index를 갖는다 하더라도 서로 다른 content를 포함하는 것이 가능하다. 예를 들어 20 MHz#1에서 지시되는 Content channel#1과, 20 MHz #5에서 지시되는 Content channel#1은 서로 다른 content를 갖는 것이 가능하다.Content channels#1 and #2 appear alternately every 20 MHz band, and the specific indicated positions can be confirmed through (c) of Fig. 22. Therefore, an STA that wishes to confirm the position of the RU allocated to it receives two types of Content channels received through a specific 40 MHz band (e.g., a specific 40 MHz band included in the Primary 40 MHz, Secondary 40 MHz, or Secondary 80/160 MHz band), confirms whether its corresponding User field is included in the Content channel, and then confirms the information of the RU indicated by the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field, thereby obtaining the RU information allocated to it. However, Content channels located in different 80 MHz Segments may include different contents even if they have the same index. For example, Content channel#1 indicated at 20 MHz#1 and Content channel#1 indicated at 20 MHz#5 may have different contents.

도 23은 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 프리앰블을 수신한 STA의 할당 RU 해석 모호성 문제를 도시한다.Figure 23 illustrates the ambiguity problem of allocation RU interpretation of an STA that receives a preamble on a non-primary channel.

도 23의 Case 1과 Case 2는, 각각 Primary 20 MHz channel에서 채널 접속을 수행한 AP에 의해 전송된 DL MU PPDU와 Secondary 20 MHz channel에서 채널 접속을 수행한 AP에 의해 전송된 DL MU PPDU의 경우를 도시한다.Case 1 and Case 2 of Figure 23 illustrate the cases of a DL MU PPDU transmitted by an AP performing channel access on a primary 20 MHz channel and a DL MU PPDU transmitted by an AP performing channel access on a secondary 20 MHz channel, respectively.

Case 1은 AP가 프라이머리 채널(Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널)이 IDLE 인 것으로 판단하였고, STA는 프라이머리 채널이 Busy인 것으로 판단했을 때 발생하는 상황이며, Case 2는 AP와 STA 모두 프라이머리 채널이 Busy인 것으로 판단했을 때 발생하는 상황이다.Case 1 occurs when the AP determines that the primary channel (primary 20 MHz subchannel) is IDLE and the STA determines that the primary channel is Busy. Case 2 occurs when both the AP and STA determine that the primary channel is Busy.

Case 1과 Case 2의 경우 모두, STA는 S20을 통해 PPDU의 수신을 대기하다가 preamble을 수신하였고, preamble에 포함된 Content channel을 수신함으로써 자신에게 할당된 RU가 가장 낮은 주파수 대역에 위치한 242-tone size RU임을 확인하게 된다. In both Case 1 and Case 2, the STA waits for the reception of PPDU through S20, receives the preamble, and by receiving the Content channel included in the preamble, confirms that the RU allocated to it is a 242-tone size RU located in the lowest frequency band.

다만, Case1과 Case2의 경우 가장 낮은 주파수 대역에 위치한 242-tone size RU의 위치는 상이하며, 따라서 STA는 자신에게 할당된 RU가 Case 1에 해당하는 RU인지 혹은 Case 2에 해당하는 RU인지 확인할 수 없는 문제를 갖는다.However, in the case of Case 1 and Case 2, the location of the 242-tone size RU located in the lowest frequency band is different, and therefore, the STA has a problem in that it cannot determine whether the RU allocated to it is the RU corresponding to Case 1 or the RU corresponding to Case 2.

이와 같은 수신 장치의 할당 RU 해석 모호성 해결을 위한 방법으로 아래의 두 가지 방법이 이용될 수 있다.The following two methods can be used to resolve the ambiguity in the interpretation of allocation RUs of such receiving devices.

1) 첫 번째로, 수신 장치는 수신된 PPDU의 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시된 RU를 확인할 때에, 수신된 PPDU를 전송한 장치가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송한 것인지 혹은 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송한 것인지를 고려하여 서로 다른 방법으로 RU Allocation subfield를 해석한다. 이 때, 서로 다른 방법으로 RU Allocation subfield를 해석하는 방법은, RU Allocation subfield가 지시하는 RU의 위치를 해석할 때 기준이 되는 Frequency가 서로 다른 것을 의미한다. 즉, UHR-SIG(혹은 EHT-SIG, HE-SIG) field를 통해 지시되는 특정 순서의 RU Allocation subfield가 대응하는 서브 채널은, 해당 SIG field를 포함하는 PPDU를 전송하는 장치가 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행했는지 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행했는지 여부에 따라 서로 다를 수 있다. 1) First, when a receiving device checks the RU indicated by the RU Allocation subfield of a received PPDU, the receiving device interprets the RU Allocation subfield in different ways by considering whether the device that transmitted the received PPDU transmitted it after performing channel access through the primary channel or after performing channel access through the non-primary channel. At this time, the different ways of interpreting the RU Allocation subfield mean that the frequencies used as a reference when interpreting the positions of the RUs indicated by the RU Allocation subfield are different. That is, the subchannel to which a specific order of RU Allocation subfields indicated by the UHR-SIG (or EHT-SIG, HE-SIG) field corresponds may be different depending on whether the device transmitting the PPDU including the corresponding SIG field performed channel access on the primary channel or on the non-primary channel.

2) 두 번째로, 전송 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU의 Signaling field들을(예를 들어 Bandwidth, RU Allocation subfield, Puncturing information 등), 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU에 프라이머리 채널을 포함한 대역이 Puncturing된 형태인 것으로 지시하는 설정을 적용할 수 있다. 즉, 전송 장치는 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU와 같은 방법으로 넌 프라이머리 채널 PPDU의 Signaling field들을 설정하되, 프라이머리 채널을 포함한 대역(예를 들어 Primary 80 MHz segment)이 Puncturing된 것으로 지시할 수 있다. 이 경우, 수신 장치는 수신된 PPDU를 전송한 장치가 어떤 channel을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행했는지 여부와 관계없이, 수신된 PPDU가 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 장치에 의해 전송된 것처럼 해석함으로써 자신에게 할당된 RU 정보를 획득할 수 있다.2) Second, the transmitting device can apply a setting to the signaling fields (e.g., Bandwidth, RU Allocation subfield, Puncturing information, etc.) of the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access on the non-primary channel, indicating that the band including the primary channel is punctured in the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the primary channel. That is, the transmitting device can set the signaling fields of the non-primary channel PPDU in the same manner as the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the primary channel, but can indicate that the band including the primary channel (e.g., Primary 80 MHz segment) is punctured. In this case, the receiving device can obtain the RU information allocated to it by interpreting the received PPDU as if it were transmitted by the device performing channel access on the primary channel, regardless of which channel the device transmitting the received PPDU used to perform channel access.

위의 첫 번째 방법에서 설명한 바와 같이 수신 장치는 수신된 PPDU가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 완료한 전송 장치가 전송한 것인지 혹은 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 완료한 전송 장치가 전송한 것인지를 판단하고, 서로 다른 방법으로 RU Allocation subfield를 해석해야 한다. 이 때, RU Allocation subfield는, MU PPDU의 Preamble에 위치한 Signaling field (예를 들어 HE-SIG, EHT-SIG, UHR-SIG field 등에 포함된)에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield 및/또는 트리거 프레임에 포함된 User field에 위치한 RU Allocation subfield를 의미한다. As described in the first method above, the receiving device must determine whether the received PPDU is transmitted by the transmitting device that completed channel access through the primary channel or by the transmitting device that completed channel access through the non-primary channel, and interpret the RU Allocation subfield in different ways. In this case, the RU Allocation subfield means the RU Allocation subfield included in the Signaling field (e.g., included in the HE-SIG, EHT-SIG, UHR-SIG fields, etc.) located in the Preamble of the MU PPDU and/or the RU Allocation subfield located in the User field included in the trigger frame.

전송 장치가 어떤 channel에서 채널 접속을 수행한 후 PPDU를 전송했는지를 확인하는 수신 장치의 방법은, 전송 장치가 지시하는 직접적인 정보 혹은 간접적인 정보를 활용하는 것일 수 있다.The method by which a receiving device determines on which channel a transmitting device has transmitted a PPDU after performing a channel connection may utilize direct information or indirect information indicated by the transmitting device.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 제1 PPDU를 전송하는 STA(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)는, 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 제2 PPDU의 특정 field와 다른 방법으로 상기 제1 PPDU의 상기 특정 field를 설정할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 특정 subfield는 U-SIG (Universal SIG field)에 포함된 field일 수 있다. 일 예로, 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 PPDU를 전송하는 STA는 U-SIG의 특정 field를 0으로 설정하고, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 PPDU를 전송하는 STA는 PPDU의 상기 특정 field를 0이 아닌 값으로 설정하는 것이 가능하다. 이 경우, PPDU를 수신한 장치는, PPDU를 전송한 장치가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고 PPDU를 전송했는지 혹은 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하고 PPDU를 전송했는지 여부를 상기 특정 field에 기초하여 판단할 수 있다. According to one embodiment of the present invention, an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) that transmits a first PPDU after performing channel access through a non-primary channel may set a specific field of the first PPDU in a different manner from a specific field of a second PPDU transmitted after performing channel access through the primary channel. At this time, the specific subfield may be a field included in a U-SIG (Universal SIG field). For example, an STA that transmits a PPDU after performing channel access through the primary channel may set a specific field of the U-SIG to 0, and an STA that transmits a PPDU after performing channel access through a non-primary channel may set the specific field of the PPDU to a non-zero value. In this case, a device that has received a PPDU may determine, based on the specific field, whether the device that transmitted the PPDU performed channel access through the primary channel and transmitted the PPDU or performed channel access through the non-primary channel and transmitted the PPDU.

본 발명의 다른 일 실시예에 따르면, 전송 장치가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했는지 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했는지 여부를 지시하지 않더라도, 수신 장치가 자체적으로 전송 장치의 채널 접속 방법을 판단하는 것이 가능할 수 있다. 일 예로, Operating BW가 160 MHz인 BSS의 STA(AP STA 및 non-AP STA)로부터 Secondary 80 MHz segment를 점유하는 80 MHz PPDU를 수신한 수신 장치는, 상기 STA가 Secondary 80 MHz segment에 위치한 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 상기 80 MHz PPDU를 전송했음을 인지할 수 있다. 즉, 수신 장치는 수신된 PPDU의 BW 정보에 기초하여 전송 장치가 채널 접속을 수행한 채널의 정보를 획득하는 것이 가능하다.According to another embodiment of the present invention, even if the transmitting device does not indicate whether the channel access was performed through a primary channel or a non-primary channel, it may be possible for the receiving device to determine a channel access method of the transmitting device on its own. For example, a receiving device that receives an 80 MHz PPDU occupying a secondary 80 MHz segment from an STA (AP STA and non-AP STA) of a BSS having an operating BW of 160 MHz can recognize that the STA transmitted the 80 MHz PPDU after performing channel access through a non-primary channel located in the secondary 80 MHz segment. That is, the receiving device can obtain information on the channel on which the transmitting device performed channel access based on BW information of the received PPDU.

PPDU의 수신 장치는 수신된 PPDU가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 Channel Access를 수행한 장치로부터 수신되었는지 혹은 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 Channel Access를 수행한 장치로부터 수신되었는지 여부에 기초하여, 아래와 같은 방법으로 수신된 PPDU에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield를 해석한다. A receiving device of a PPDU interprets the RU Allocation subfield included in the received PPDU in the following manner based on whether the received PPDU was received from a device performing Channel Access over a primary channel or from a device performing Channel Access over a non-primary channel.

첫째, 수신된 PPDU가 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 장치에 의해 전송되었다고 판단될 때, 수신 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 수신된 RU Allocation subfield는 프라이머리 채널에서 수신된 RU Allocation subfield와 동일한 방법으로 해석한다. First, when it is determined that a received PPDU was transmitted by a device that performed channel access on the primary channel, the receiving device interprets the RU Allocation subfield received on a non-primary channel in the same way as the RU Allocation subfield received on the primary channel.

둘째, 수신된 PPDU가 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 장치에 의해 전송되었다고 판단될 때, 수신 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 수신된 RU Allocation subfield가 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널을 프라이머리 채널로 사용하는 장치에 의해 전송된 것과 같이 해석한다. 즉, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 수신된 RU Allocation subfield를 해석하는 수신 장치는, 상기 수신 장치가 프라이머리 채널이고 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널이 포함된 80 MHz segment가 Primary 80 MHz segment인 것으로 고려하여 수신된 RU Allocation subfield를 해석해야 한다. 이 과정에서, 수신 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 수신된 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시된 RU의 위치를 해석할 때, 자신의 프라이머리 채널과 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널이 갖는 Frequency offset만큼 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시된 RU의 위치가 변경된 것으로 해석함으로써 자신에게 할당된 RU의 위치를 확인할 수 있다. Second, when it is determined that the received PPDU was transmitted by a device performing channel access on a non-primary channel, the receiving device interprets the RU Allocation subfield received on the non-primary channel as if it was transmitted by a device using the non-primary channel as a primary channel. That is, the receiving device interpreting the RU Allocation subfield received on the non-primary channel must interpret the received RU Allocation subfield considering that the receiving device is a primary channel and that an 80 MHz segment including the non-primary channel is a primary 80 MHz segment. In this process, when the receiving device interprets the position of the RU indicated through the RU Allocation subfield received on the non-primary channel, the receiving device can confirm the position of the RU allocated to it by interpreting that the position of the RU indicated through the RU Allocation subfield has been changed by a frequency offset between its primary channel and the non-primary channel.

위에서 설명한 두 번째 방법이 이용되는 경우, 전송 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 PPDU를 전송할 때에, 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 PPDU를 전송하는 것과 동일한 방법으로 PPDU의 signaling field들을 설정한다. 다만, 전송 장치는 프라이머리 채널이 Busy로 판단되는 시간 구간에 Secondary 채널 접속을 수행하므로, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 전송하는 PPDU는 항상 프라이머리 채널을 점유하지 않고 전송된다. 즉, 전송 장치는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행한 후 PPDU를 전송할 때, 프라이머리 채널을 Puncturing한 형태(프라이머리 채널을 점유하지 않는 형태)로 PPDU를 전송해야 한다.When the second method described above is used, when transmitting a PPDU after performing channel access over a non-primary channel, the transmitting device sets the signaling fields of the PPDU in the same manner as when transmitting a PPDU after performing channel access over the primary channel. However, since the transmitting device performs secondary channel access during a time period in which the primary channel is determined to be busy, the PPDU transmitted after performing channel access over the non-primary channel is always transmitted without occupying the primary channel. That is, when transmitting a PPDU after performing channel access on a non-primary channel, the transmitting device must transmit the PPDU in a form of puncturing the primary channel (in a form that does not occupy the primary channel).

일 예로, 프라이머리 채널이 Busy로 판단되어 Secondary 80 MHz segment 대역에 위치한 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 전송 장치는, Secondary 80 MHz Segment 대역을 통해 PPDU를 전송할 때 PPDU의 BW field를 160 MHz로 설정하고, Primary 20 MHz channel이 위치한 서브 채널에 Preamble Puncturing이 적용된 것으로 지시해야 한다. 이 때, Primary 20 MHz channel에 위치한 서브 채널에 Preamble Puncturing을 적용하는 방법은, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 Puncturing하거나, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널을 포함한 대역(예를 들어 Primary 40 MHz 대역 혹은 Primary 80 MHz Segment 등)을 모두 puncturing하는 것일 수 있다. For example, a transmitting device that performs channel access through a non-primary channel located in a secondary 80 MHz segment band because the primary channel is determined to be busy must set the BW field of the PPDU to 160 MHz when transmitting a PPDU through the secondary 80 MHz segment band and indicate that Preamble Puncturing is applied to the subchannel where the primary 20 MHz channel is located. At this time, a method of applying Preamble Puncturing to the subchannel located in the primary 20 MHz channel may be to puncture the primary 20 MHz subchannel or to puncture the entire band including the primary 20 MHz subchannel (e.g., the primary 40 MHz band or the primary 80 MHz segment, etc.).

즉, Primary 20 MHz 서브 채널에 Preamble Puncturing이 적용되어서는 안 된다는 종래 Wi-Fi의 제약은, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 channel access를 수행한 후 전송되는 PPDU에 대해서는 적용되지 않을 수 있다.That is, the limitation of conventional Wi-Fi that Preamble Puncturing should not be applied to the Primary 20 MHz subchannel may not be applied to PPDUs transmitted after performing channel access on a non-primary channel.

이 경우, 수신 장치는 PPDU에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield를 기초로 전송 장치가 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했는지 혹은 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했는지 여부를 판단하는 것이 가능하다. 보다 구체적으로는, 수신 장치는 수신된 PPDU의 RU Allocation subfield가 프라이머리 채널에 위치한 RU를 Puncturing 한 것으로 지시되었을 때, 상기 PPDU를 전송한 장치가 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했음을 인지할 수 있다. 이 때, RU를 Puncturing 한 것으로 지시하는 RU Allocation subfield는 'Punctured 242-tone RU'로 해석되는 RU Allocation subfield를 의미한다. 이 때, Punctured 242-tone RU로 지시되는 20 MHz 서브 채널은 PPDU에 Puncturing이 적용되어 점유되지 않는 서브 채널이다. In this case, the receiving device can determine whether the transmitting device performed channel access through the primary channel or the non-primary channel based on the RU Allocation subfield included in the PPDU. More specifically, the receiving device can recognize that the device transmitting the PPDU performed channel access through the non-primary channel when the RU Allocation subfield of the received PPDU indicates that the RU located on the primary channel has been punctured. At this time, the RU Allocation subfield indicating that the RU has been punctured means the RU Allocation subfield interpreted as 'Punctured 242-tone RU'. At this time, the 20 MHz subchannel indicated as the Punctured 242-tone RU is a subchannel that is not occupied because puncturing is applied to the PPDU.

다만, 수신 장치는 PPDU에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 자신에게 할당된 RU의 정보를 획득할 때 PPDU를 전송한 장치가 채널 접속에 활용한 channel이 프라이머리 채널인지 넌 프라이머리 채널인지 여부와 관계없이 동일한 방법으로 RU Allocation subfield를 해석할 수 있다. However, when a receiving device obtains information about RUs allocated to it through the RU Allocation subfield included in the PPDU, the receiving device can interpret the RU Allocation subfield in the same way regardless of whether the channel used by the device transmitting the PPDU for channel access is a primary channel or a non-primary channel.

도 24는 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 액세스를 수행한 AP가 PPDU의 BW 및 RU 할당정보를 지시하는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 24 illustrates a method for an AP performing channel access through a non-primary channel to indicate BW and RU allocation information of a PPDU according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 24를 참조하면, AP는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 Secondary 80 MHz Segment를 점유하는 80 MHz PPDU를 전송한다. 이 때, AP는 PPDU의 U-SIG를 통해 PPDU의 BW가 160 MHz 인 것으로 지시한다. 이 때, 지시하는 PPDU BW는 실제 PPDU가 점유하는 주파수 대역 및 프라이머리 채널을 포함하는 BW로 결정될 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 24, the AP performs channel access through a non-primary channel and then transmits an 80 MHz PPDU occupying a secondary 80 MHz segment. At this time, the AP indicates through the U-SIG of the PPDU that the BW of the PPDU is 160 MHz. At this time, the indicated PPDU BW can be determined as a BW that includes the frequency band actually occupied by the PPDU and the primary channel.

또한, AP는 자신이 실제로 전송하는 PPDU가, Primary 80 MHz segment 대역을 점유하지 않기 때문에, PPDU에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield들 중 Primary 80 MHz segment 대역에 대응하는 RU Allocation subfield들을 통해서는 RU를 할당하지 않는다. 이 때, AP는 Primary 80 MHz segment에 대응하는 RU Allocation subfield를 통해, 해당 서브 채널이 Puncturing 된 것으로 지시한다.In addition, since the PPDU that the AP actually transmits does not occupy the Primary 80 MHz segment band, the AP does not allocate RUs through the RU Allocation subfields corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment band among the RU Allocation subfields included in the PPDU. At this time, the AP indicates that the corresponding subchannel is punctured through the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment.

AP로부터 PPDU를 수신하는 STA는 수신하는 PPDU가 160 MHz BW의 PPDU인 것으로 인지하며, 자신에게 할당된 RU를 확인하기 위해 RU Allocation subfield들을 확인한다. STA는 자신의 User field가 대응하는 RU Allocation subfield가 대응하는 서브 채널이 Secondary 80 MHz Segment에 포함된 20MHz #5 서브 채널임을 확인하게 된다. 따라서, STA는 자신에게 할당된 RU가 20MHz #5에 위치하는 RU임을 인지할 수 있다. 이 때, STA는 수신된 RU Allocation subfield들 중, Primary 80 MHz segment에 대응하는 RU Allocation subfield들을 수신함으로써 자신에게 할당된 RU는 Primary 80 MHz segment에 존재하지 않음을 확인할 수 있다. 즉, Primary 80 MHz segment에 대응하는 서브 채널이 puncturing되었음을 지시하는 RU Allocation subfield가 content channel에 포함되어 있기 때문에, STA는 자신의 User field와 대응하는 RU Allocation subfield가 대응하는 대역이 20 MHz #5임을 명확하게 인지할 수 있다.An STA receiving a PPDU from an AP recognizes that the received PPDU is a PPDU of 160 MHz BW, and checks the RU Allocation subfields to confirm the RU allocated to it. The STA confirms that the subchannel corresponding to the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field is the 20MHz #5 subchannel included in the Secondary 80 MHz Segment. Therefore, the STA can recognize that the RU allocated to it is the RU located at 20MHz #5. At this time, the STA can confirm that the RU allocated to it does not exist in the Primary 80 MHz segment by receiving the RU Allocation subfields corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment among the received RU Allocation subfields. That is, since the content channel includes an RU Allocation subfield indicating that the subchannel corresponding to the Primary 80 MHz segment has been punctured, the STA can clearly recognize that the band corresponding to the RU Allocation subfield corresponding to its User field is 20 MHz #5.

<단일 링크를 이용해 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 단말들의 트리거 프레임 전송 및 트리거 프레임에의 응답 방법><Method for transmitting trigger frames and responding to trigger frames by terminals performing non-primary channel access procedures using a single link>

트리거 프레임은 전송 장치가 지시/요청한 방식으로 수신 장치에 의한 응답이 수행되는 Wi-Fi의 Control frame이다. 일 예로, AP는 STA에게 Basic 트리거 프레임을 전송함으로써 STA가 TB PPDU를 응답하도록 지시할 수 있다. A trigger frame is a Wi-Fi Control frame that causes a response from a receiving device in the manner instructed/requested by the transmitting device. For example, an AP can instruct a STA to respond with a TB PPDU by transmitting a Basic trigger frame to the STA.

베이직 트리거 프레임에는 Common Info field와 User Info field가 포함되며, Common Info field와 User Info field의 간략한 설명은 다음과 같다. Common Info field는 TB PPDU의 길이, 추가 트리거 프레임이 전송되는지 여부, TB PPDU를 응답할 때 Carrier sensing 결과를 고려해야 하는지 여부, TB PPDU의 BW field에 기록해야 할 UL BW 정보 등, TB PPDU를 응답할 복수의 STA들에게 공통적으로 지시되는 정보가 포함되는 field이다. User Info field에는 각 STA가 TB PPDU를 응답해야 하는 RU의 정보, FEC Coding 방법, TB PPDU에 적용할 MCS 정보, DCM(dual carrier modulation), 목표 Rx 파워 정보 등이 지시되며, 각 STA는 자신에게 대응하는 User Info field를 통해 획득된 정보를 기초로 TB PPDU를 응답한다.The basic trigger frame includes a Common Info field and a User Info field, and a brief description of the Common Info field and the User Info field is as follows. The Common Info field is a field that includes information that is commonly indicated to multiple STAs that will respond to the TB PPDU, such as the length of the TB PPDU, whether an additional trigger frame is transmitted, whether the Carrier sensing result should be considered when responding to the TB PPDU, and UL BW information that should be recorded in the BW field of the TB PPDU. The User Info field indicates information about the RU to which each STA must respond to the TB PPDU, the FEC Coding method, MCS information to be applied to the TB PPDU, DCM (dual carrier modulation), target Rx power information, etc., and each STA responds to the TB PPDU based on the information obtained through the User Info field corresponding to itself.

또한, Protection을 위해 활용될 수 있는 MU-RTS 트리거 프레임 또한 트리거 프레임의 일종이며, DL MU PPDU를 전송하고자 하는 AP는, 1개 혹은 1개 이상의 STA들에게 CTS frame 응답을 요청하는 MU-RTS frame을 전송함으로써 복수의 STA들과의 Protection을 한꺼번에 수행할 수 있다. MU-RTS 트리거 프레임에 대한 상세한 설명은 다음과 같다. In addition, the MU-RTS trigger frame that can be utilized for protection is also a type of trigger frame, and an AP that wants to transmit a DL MU PPDU can perform protection with multiple STAs at once by transmitting an MU-RTS frame requesting a CTS frame response from one or more STAs. A detailed description of the MU-RTS trigger frame is as follows.

MU-RTS는 트리거 프레임의 일종으로, MU-RTS 트리거 프레임을 수신하고, MU-RTS frame에 포함된 User field로부터 자신의 AID12 (Association ID의 LSB 12bits)가 지시된 STA들은 동시에 CTS frame을 응답해야 한다. AP가 MU-RTS frame을 이용해 TXOP protection을 수행하면, 다수의 STA가 CTS frame을 응답하기 때문에, DL MU PPDU(Down 링크 multi user PPDU)의 목적 장치인 다수의 STA들 각각의 인접 장치들로부터 TXOP를 보호받을 수 있다는 장점이 있다. 또한, MU-RTS frame은 UL MU PPDU를 보호하기 위한 목적으로도 사용될 수 있다. 보다 자세히, 트리거 프레임을 통해 다수의 STA들에게 TB(트리거 based) PPDU를 요청하기 이전에, AP는 MU-RTS frame을 전송하여 TB PPDU를 응답할 상기 다수의 STA들이 CTS frame을 응답하도록 할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 다수의 STA들이 응답한 CTS frame은, 각 STA의 Neighbor STA들이 TB PPDU 및 TB PPDU 이후 전송될 Ack 프레임(Ack, Block Ack 등)을 보호하는 NAV를 설정할 수 있도록 유도하는 역할을 하고, 이를 통해 트리거 프레임 및 TB PPDU를 인지(해석, 디코딩)할 수 없는 Legacy STA들도 트리거 프레임을 통해 시작되는 패킷 교환 시퀀스 구간(혹은 TXOP)동안 채널 접속을 수행하지 않을 수 있다.MU-RTS is a type of trigger frame. When receiving an MU-RTS trigger frame, STAs whose AID12 (LSB 12 bits of Association ID) is indicated by the User field included in the MU-RTS frame must simultaneously respond with a CTS frame. When the AP performs TXOP protection using the MU-RTS frame, since multiple STAs respond with the CTS frame, there is an advantage in that the TXOP can be protected from the adjacent devices of each of the multiple STAs, which are the destination devices of the DL MU PPDU (Down link multi user PPDU). In addition, the MU-RTS frame can also be used for the purpose of protecting the UL MU PPDU. In more detail, before requesting a TB (trigger based) PPDU from multiple STAs through the trigger frame, the AP can transmit an MU-RTS frame to cause the multiple STAs, which are to respond with the TB PPDU, to respond with the CTS frame. At this time, the CTS frame to which the above multiple STAs responded serves to induce the neighbor STAs of each STA to set NAVs that protect the TB PPDU and the Ack frame (Ack, Block Ack, etc.) to be transmitted after the TB PPDU, and through this, even the legacy STAs that cannot recognize (interpret, decode) the trigger frame and TB PPDU may not perform channel access during the packet exchange sequence section (or TXOP) that starts through the trigger frame.

도 25는 MU-RTS frame과 CTS frame을 이용한 전송/TXOP 보호방법 일 실시예를 도시한다.Figure 25 illustrates an embodiment of a transmission/TXOP protection method using MU-RTS frame and CTS frame.

도 25를 참조하면, AP는 MU PPDU를 전송하기에 앞서, MU PPDU의 목적 장치인 STA1과 STA2이게 MU-RTS frame을 전송하고, STA1과 STA2는 MU-RTS frame을 수신하고 SIFS 후 각각 CTS frame을 응답한다. Referring to FIG. 25, before transmitting an MU PPDU, the AP transmits an MU-RTS frame to STA1 and STA2, which are the destination devices of the MU PPDU, and STA1 and STA2 receive the MU-RTS frame and respond with a CTS frame each after SIFS.

STA1의 Neighbor STA인 STA1_Neighbor는 STA1이 전송한 CTS frame을 수신한 후, CTS frame의 Duration field에서 지시된 정보를 토대로 NAV를 설정한다. STA2의 Neighbor STA인 STA2_Neighbor는 STA2이 전송한 CTS frame을 수신한 후, CTS frame의 Duration field에서 지시된 정보를 토대로 NAV를 설정한다. STA1_Neighbor와 STA2_Neighbor는, CTS frame을 수신한 후 설정한 NAV (counter)가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되는 동안 Virtual CS(Virtual Carrier Sense)가 busy인 것으로 고려하여, 백오프 카운터를 줄이지 않는 등의 동작을 수행한다. 결과적으로, CTS frame을 수신한 Neighbor 단말들이 NAV가 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되는 구간동안 전송을 시도하지 않기 때문에, AP가 MU PPDU를 전송하고 STA1과 STA2가 Ack frame을 응답하는 동안 Neighbor 단말들에 의해 방해받지 않을 수 있다. STA1_Neighbor, a neighbor STA of STA1, sets its NAV based on the information indicated in the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by STA1. STA2_Neighbor, a neighbor STA of STA2, sets its NAV based on the information indicated in the Duration field of the CTS frame after receiving the CTS frame transmitted by STA2. STA1_Neighbor and STA2_Neighbor perform operations such as not decreasing the backoff counter, considering that the Virtual CS (Virtual Carrier Sense) is busy while the NAV (counter) set after receiving the CTS frame is maintained as a non-zero value. As a result, since the neighbor terminals that received the CTS frame do not attempt transmission during the period while the NAV is maintained as a non-zero value, the AP may not be interrupted by the neighbor terminals while transmitting the MU PPDU and STA1 and STA2 respond with an Ack frame.

상술한 트리거 프레임은 11ax에서 정의된 frame type으로, Frame 제어 필드의 Type(B3 B2) 및 Subtype(B7 B6 B5 B4) subfield가 각각 01과 0010으로 설정된 frame type이다. 즉, 트리거 프레임은 Frame 제어 필드의 Type subfield가 01인 Control Type의 프레임이며, Subtype 값 0010이 트리거 프레임 type임을 지시하기 위해 활용된다. 11ax에서는, AP가 한 번에 다수의 STA에 대해 응답 프레임을 요청할 수 있도록 트리거 프레임을 정의하였고, 상술한 MU-RTS frame (트리거 프레임의 일종)은 AP가 다수의 STA(non-AP STA)에게 CTS frame을 요청하기 위해 활용된다. MU-RTS를 제외한 다른 트리거 Type은 Basic Tigger frame (UL MU PPDU 요청), Beamforming Report Poll Tigger frame (Beamforming Report 요청), MU-BAR Tigger frame (BlockAck 요청), Buffer Status Report Poll Tigger frame (Buffer Status Report 요청), GCR MU-BAR Tigger frame, Bandwidth Query Report Poll Tigger frame, NDP Feedback Report Poll Tigger frame 등이 있다. The trigger frame described above is a frame type defined in 11ax, and is a frame type in which the Type (B3 B2) and Subtype (B7 B6 B5 B4) subfields of the Frame Control field are set to 01 and 0010, respectively. That is, the trigger frame is a frame of the Control Type in which the Type subfield of the Frame Control field is 01, and the Subtype value 0010 is used to indicate that it is a trigger frame type. In 11ax, a trigger frame is defined so that an AP can request response frames from multiple STAs at a time, and the MU-RTS frame described above (a type of trigger frame) is used so that an AP can request CTS frames from multiple STAs (non-AP STAs). Trigger Types other than MU-RTS include Basic Tigger frame (UL MU PPDU request), Beamforming Report Poll Tigger frame (Beamforming Report request), MU-BAR Tigger frame (BlockAck request), Buffer Status Report Poll Tigger frame (Buffer Status Report request), GCR MU-BAR Tigger frame, Bandwidth Query Report Poll Tigger frame, and NDP Feedback Report Poll Tigger frame.

도 26은 트리거 프레임의 포맷을 도시한다.Figure 26 illustrates the format of a trigger frame.

트리거 프레임은 Frame 제어 필드를 포함한 MAC Header와, Common Info field, User Info List field, Padding field, FCS field로 구성된다. Frame 제어 필드는 Type 및 Subtype subfield를 포함하며, 트리거 프레임은 상기 두 subfield가 각각 01과 0010으로 설정된다. Common Info field는 트리거 프레임의 Type을 지시하기 위한 트리거 Type subfield, 응답되는 UL 전송의 길이를 지시하기 위한 UL Length subfield등이 포함되며, 자세한 내용은 도 27의 일 실시예를 통해 자세히 설명된다.A trigger frame consists of a MAC Header including a Frame Control field, a Common Info field, a User Info List field, a Padding field, and an FCS field. The Frame Control field includes Type and Subtype subfields, and in the trigger frame, the two subfields are set to 01 and 0010, respectively. The Common Info field includes a Trigger Type subfield for indicating the Type of the trigger frame, a UL Length subfield for indicating the length of a UL transmission to be responded to, and the details are described in detail through an embodiment of FIG. 27.

User Info List field는 트리거 프레임의 목적 장치를 지시하기 위한 정보 포함된 User Info field들을 0개 혹은 1개 이상 포함한다. 이 때, 상기 User Info field는, 목적 장치를 지시하는 정보 외에도, 트리거 프레임의 Type에 따라, 목적 장치가 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 응답 프레임을 전송할 때 활용해야 하는 parameter(UL DCM, UL MCS 등) 정보들을 포함한다. User Info field의 자세한 내용은 도 28의 일 실시예를 통해 자세히 설명된다.The User Info List field includes 0 or 1 or more User Info fields including information for indicating a target device of a trigger frame. At this time, the User Info field includes, in addition to the information for indicating the target device, parameter information (UL DCM, UL MCS, etc.) that the target device must utilize when transmitting a response frame after receiving the trigger frame, depending on the Type of the trigger frame. The details of the User Info field are described in detail through an embodiment of FIG. 28.

Padding field는 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후, 트리거 프레임의 목적 장치들이 응답 프레임(예를 들어 UL TB PPDU, CTS frame 등)을 준비할 시간을 확보하기 위한 목적으로 추가되었으며, 트리거 프레임을 전송하는 AP는 목적 장치들의 성능을 고려하여 Padding field의 길이를 조절할 수 있다. 또한, 11be(Wi-Fi 7, EHT)에서는 트리거 프레임이 포함된 PPDU의 end time을 다른 PPDU와 align하기 위해서 추가/조절될 수도 있지만 본 발명이 제공하고자 하는 내용과 관련이 없기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.The padding field is added to ensure that destination devices of the trigger frame have time to prepare a response frame (e.g., UL TB PPDU, CTS frame, etc.) after receiving the trigger frame, and the AP transmitting the trigger frame can adjust the length of the padding field considering the performance of the destination devices. In addition, in 11be (Wi-Fi 7, EHT), the end time of a PPDU including a trigger frame may be added/adjusted to align it with another PPDU, but since it is not related to the content that the present invention intends to provide, a detailed description is omitted.

FCS(Frame Check Sequence) field는 32-bit의 CRC(Cyclic redundancy code)를 포함하며, MAC Header와 Frame Body field를 포함하여 계산된 값이다. 트리거 프레임의 FCS field 기능과 설정 방법은 종래 MAC frame에 포함된 FCS field의 기능 및 설정 방법과 동일하기 때문에 별도의 설명은 생략한다.The FCS (Frame Check Sequence) field contains a 32-bit CRC (Cyclic redundancy code), and is a calculated value including the MAC Header and Frame Body fields. The function and setting method of the FCS field of the trigger frame are the same as the function and setting method of the FCS field included in the conventional MAC frame, so a separate explanation is omitted.

도 27은 트리거 프레임의 공통 정보 필드의 포맷의 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 27 illustrates an example of the format of the common information field of a trigger frame.

트리거 Type subfield(4-bit)는 트리거 프레임의 종류(type, variant)를 지시하기 위해 활용되며, 트리거 Type subfield가 0으로 지시되면 Basic, 1은 BFRP (Beamforming Report Poll), 2는 MU-BAR, 3은 MU-RTS, 4는 BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll), 5는 GCR MU-BAR, 6은 BQRP (Bandwidth Query Report Poll, 7은 NFRP (NDP Feedback Report Poll)을 지시한다. The trigger Type subfield (4 bits) is used to indicate the type (type, variant) of the trigger frame. If the trigger Type subfield is set to 0, it indicates Basic, 1 indicates BFRP (Beamforming Report Poll), 2 indicates MU-BAR, 3 indicates MU-RTS, 4 indicates BSRP (Buffer Status Report Poll), 5 indicates GCR MU-BAR, 6 indicates BQRP (Bandwidth Query Report Poll), and 7 indicates NFRP (NDP Feedback Report Poll).

UL Length subfield는 트리거 프레임을 통해 응답되는 TB PPDU의 L-SIG LENGTH field에 설정되어야 하는 값을 지시한다. The UL Length subfield indicates the value that should be set in the L-SIG LENGTH field of the TB PPDU responded to via the trigger frame.

More TF subfield는 해당 트리거 프레임 이후에 전송될 트리거 프레임이 더 있는지 여부를 지시하기 위해 활용된다. The More TF subfield is used to indicate whether there are more trigger frames to be transmitted after the corresponding trigger frame.

CS Required subfield는 트리거 프레임의 목적 장치가, 응답 프레임을 전송할 때에 CS를 수행해야 하는지 여부(Physical & Virtual CS, ED & NAV)를 지시하며, CS Required subfield가 1로 지시된 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 응답 프레임을 전송하는 STA는 CS를 수행해야 한다. The CS Required subfield indicates whether the destination device of the trigger frame must perform CS (Physical & Virtual CS, ED & NAV) when transmitting a response frame. An STA that transmits a response frame after receiving a trigger frame with the CS Required subfield set to 1 must perform CS.

UL BW subfield는 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 TB PPDU를 응답하는 STA들이, Preamble(예를 들어 HE-SIG-A 혹은 U-SIG)에 지시해야 하는 BW 값을 지시한다. The UL BW subfield indicates the BW value that STAs responding with a TB PPDU after receiving a trigger frame must indicate in the Preamble (e.g. HE-SIG-A or U-SIG).

GI And HE/EHT-LTF Type/트리거ed TXOP Sharing Mode subfield는 응답 될 TB PPDU의 GI(Guard interval)와 HE(EHT)-LTF 값을 지시하거나, MU-RTS 트리거 프레임이 MU-RTS TXS(TXOP Sharing) 트리거 프레임을 이용한 TXOP sharing에 활용될 때, Sharing mode를 지시하는 subfield이다. The GI And HE/EHT-LTF Type/Triggered TXOP Sharing Mode subfield indicates the GI (Guard interval) and HE (EHT)-LTF values of the TB PPDU to be responded to, or the Sharing mode when the MU-RTS trigger frame is utilized for TXOP sharing using the MU-RTS TXS (TXOP Sharing) trigger frame.

MU-MIMO HE(EHT)-LTF Mode subfield는 응답 될 TB PPDU에 적용되어야 하는 HE(EHT)-LTF mode와 관련한 정보를 지시한다. The MU-MIMO HE(EHT)-LTF Mode subfield indicates information regarding the HE(EHT)-LTF mode that should be applied to the TB PPDU to be responded to.

Number Of HE/EHT-LTF Symbols subfield는 Doppler subfield가 0으로 지시되는 경우, TB PPDU에 적용되어야 하는 HE(EHT)-LTF의 symbol 개수를 지시하고, Doppler subfield가 1로 지시되는 경우, HE(EHT)-LTF의 symbol 개수 & midamble의 periodicity와 관련한 정보를 지시한다. The Number Of HE/EHT-LTF Symbols subfield indicates the number of HE(EHT)-LTF symbols that should be applied to the TB PPDU when the Doppler subfield is indicated as 0, and indicates the number of HE(EHT)-LTF symbols and information related to the periodicity of midamble when the Doppler subfield is indicated as 1.

LDPC Extra Symbol Segment subfield는 응답되는 TB PPDU에 LDPC extra symbol segment가 나타나야 하는지 여부를 지시하며, LDPC Extra Symbol Segment subfield가 1로 지시될 경우, LDPC extra symbol segment가 TB PPDU에 나타나야 한다.The LDPC Extra Symbol Segment subfield indicates whether an LDPC extra symbol segment should appear in the responding TB PPDU. If the LDPC Extra Symbol Segment subfield is set to 1, an LDPC extra symbol segment must appear in the TB PPDU.

AP Tx Power subfield는 트리거 프레임을 전송할 때 사용한 AP의 transmit power와 관련한 값이 지시된다. STA는 AP Tx Power subfield에서 지시된 값을 토대로 응답 프레임을 응답할 때 Power Control을 수행할 수 있다.The AP Tx Power subfield indicates a value related to the transmit power of the AP used when transmitting the trigger frame. The STA can perform Power Control when responding with a response frame based on the value indicated in the AP Tx Power subfield.

Pre-FEC Padding Factor와 PE Disambiguity subfield는 Pre-FEC Padding Factor가 1인지 혹은 2, 3, 4인지 여부와, PE(Packet Extension)의 길이를 명확히 하기 위한 정보를 지시한다.The Pre-FEC Padding Factor and PE Disambiguity subfields indicate whether the Pre-FEC Padding Factor is 1, 2, 3, or 4, and information to clarify the length of the PE (Packet Extension).

UL Spatial Reuse subfield는 4개의 Spatial Reuse subfield로 구성되며, 응답될 HE TB PPDU의 Spatial Reuse field(HE-SIG-A)들에 설정될 값을 지시한다.The UL Spatial Reuse subfield consists of four Spatial Reuse subfields and indicates the values to be set in the Spatial Reuse fields (HE-SIG-A) of the HE TB PPDU to be responded to.

Doppler subfield는 응답될 TB PPDU에 midamble이 포함되는지 여부를 지시한다. 다만 EHT TB PPDU를 응답시키는 트리거 프레임은 Doppler subfield가 reserved일 수 있다. 이 때, subfield가 reserved라는 의미는 트리거 프레임을 수신한 후 EHT TB PPDU를 응답하는 STA가 상기 subfield의 존재 및 설정 값을 고려하지 않고 동작함을 의미할 수 있다.The Doppler subfield indicates whether the TB PPDU to be responded to includes a midamble. However, the trigger frame that responds with an EHT TB PPDU may have the Doppler subfield reserved. In this case, the subfield being reserved may mean that an STA that responds with an EHT TB PPDU after receiving a trigger frame operates without considering the existence and setting value of the subfield.

HE/EHT P160 subfield는 응답되는 TB PPDU가 P160 MHz에 해당하는 channel에 HE TB PPDU로 응답되는지 EHT TB PPDU로 응답되는지 여부를 지시한다. The HE/EHT P160 subfield indicates whether the responded TB PPDU is responded as a HE TB PPDU or an EHT TB PPDU on the channel corresponding to P160 MHz.

Special User Info Field Present subfield는 User Info field 중에서, AID12 subfield가 2007로 지시된 User Info field가 나타나는지 여부를 지시한다. The Special User Info Field Present subfield indicates whether the User Info field with the AID12 subfield set to 2007 appears among the User Info fields.

트리거 Dependent Common Info subfield는 트리거 Type field로 지시된 트리거 프레임의 종류가 Basic 트리거 프레임 혹은 NFRP 트리거 프레임인 경우에만 나타나는 field이다. The Trigger Dependent Common Info subfield is a field that appears only when the type of trigger frame indicated by the Trigger Type field is a Basic trigger frame or an NFRP trigger frame.

도 28은 트리거 프레임의 사용자 정보 필드의 포맷의 일 예를 도시한다.Figure 28 illustrates an example of the format of the user information field of a trigger frame.

도 28을 참조하면, AID12 subfield는 해당 User Info field가 어떤 STA에 대한 것인지와 관련한 정보를 지시한다. 즉, 특정 User Info field의 AID12 subfield에 자신의 AID와 동일한 값이 지시된 STA는, 해당 트리거 프레임이 자신을 목적장치로 포함한다는 것을 인지할 수 있다. 이 때, AID12 subfield는 Associated 된 STA 1개를 지시할 때 1 내지 2006(HE 트리거인 경우 1 내지 2007)으로 설정될 수 있다. Referring to FIG. 28, the AID12 subfield indicates information related to which STA the User Info field is for. That is, an STA for which a value identical to its own AID is indicated in the AID12 subfield of a specific User Info field can recognize that the trigger frame includes itself as a target device. At this time, the AID12 subfield can be set to 1 to 2006 (1 to 2007 in case of an HE trigger) when indicating one associated STA.

이 때, AID12 subfield는 1개 이상의 RA-RU(Random Access RU)를 associated STA들에게 할당하고자 할 때에 0으로 설정될 수 있다. 즉, AP와 Association 되어 있는 STA들은, 수신된 트리거 프레임에서 자신의 AID가 지시된 AID12의 User Info field가 없고, AID12가 0으로 지시된 User Info field가 존재하는 경우 RA-RU를 이용한 TB PPDU 전송을 시도할 수 있다.At this time, the AID12 subfield can be set to 0 when one or more RA-RU (Random Access RU) is to be allocated to associated STAs. That is, STAs associated with an AP can attempt TB PPDU transmission using RA-RU if there is no User Info field of AID12 in which its AID is indicated in the received trigger frame and there is a User Info field in which AID12 is indicated as 0.

이 때, AID12 subfield는 1개 이상의 RA-RU를 unassociated STA들에게 할당하고자 할 때 2045 혹은 2044로 설정될 수 있다. 즉, AP와 Association 되어있지 않은 STA들은, 수신된 트리거 프레임에서 AID12가 2045 및 2044로 지시된 User Info field가 존재하는 경우 RA-RU를 이용해 TB PPDU 전송을 시도할 수 있다. 이 때, RA-RU를 통해 TB PPDU를 응답하는 STA는 AID12가 2045로 지시되면 HE TB PPDU를 응답해야 하고, AID12가 2044로 지시되면 EHT TB PPDU를 응답해야 할 수 있다.At this time, the AID12 subfield can be set to 2045 or 2044 when one or more RA-RUs are to be allocated to unassociated STAs. That is, STAs that are not associated with an AP can attempt to transmit a TB PPDU using RA-RU if a User Info field in which AID12 is indicated as 2045 and 2044 exists in the received trigger frame. At this time, an STA responding to a TB PPDU through RA-RU must respond with a HE TB PPDU if AID12 is indicated as 2045, and must respond with an EHT TB PPDU if AID12 is indicated as 2044.

이 때, AID12 subfield는 4095 혹은 4094 등의 기설정된 값으로 설정될 수 있고, AID12 subfield가 기 설정된 값으로 지시된 경우, 해당 AID12 subfield부터 padding field가 시작되었음을 의미한다. 즉, STA는 트리거 프레임의 AID12 subfield가 padding field의 시작을 의미하는 값(기설정된)으로 지시된 경우, Padding field가 시작되었음을 인지하고 MAC frame의 나머지 부분에 대해 parsing을 시도하지 않을 수 있다. At this time, the AID12 subfield can be set to a preset value such as 4095 or 4094, and if the AID12 subfield is indicated as a preset value, it means that the padding field starts from the corresponding AID12 subfield. That is, if the AID12 subfield of the trigger frame is indicated as a value (preset) indicating the start of the padding field, the STA can recognize that the padding field has started and may not attempt to parse the remaining part of the MAC frame.

이 때, AID12 subfield가 2046으로 지시된 User Info field는 할당되지 않은 RU에 대한 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 보다 자세히는, 특정 User Info field의 AID12 subfield가 2046으로 지시된 경우, 상기 특정 User Info field에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield가 지시하는 RU는, 할당되지 않은 RU(unallocated RU)일 수 있다.At this time, the User Info field in which the AID12 subfield is indicated as 2046 may include information about an unallocated RU. More specifically, if the AID12 subfield of a specific User Info field is indicated as 2046, the RU indicated by the RU Allocation subfield included in the specific User Info field may be an unallocated RU.

MU-RTS 트리거 프레임을 제외한 다른 트리거 프레임의 RU Allocation subfield는 해당 User Info field의 목적 장치(AID12 subfield를 통해 지시된 STA)에게 할당된 RU(Resource Unit)/MRU(Multiple Resource Unit)의 크기와 위치 정보를 지시한다. 하지만, MU-RTS 트리거 프레임의 RU Allocation subfield는 해당 User Info field의 목적 장치가 CTS frame을 응답해야 하는 channel을 지시하기 위해 활용된다. 보다 자세히는, MU-RTS frame의 RU Allocation subfield(User Info field의)는 목적 STA가 CTS frame을 응답할 때 Primary 20 MHz channel에만 CTS를 응답해야 하는지 혹은 Primary 40 MHz / Primary 80 MHz / Primary 160 MHz / 80 + 80 MHz / (Primary) 320 MHz(EHT/UHR AP가 전송한 경우) channel에 응답해야 하는지 여부를 지시한다. 보다 구체적으로, AP는 특정 STA가 Primary 20 MHz를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하기 위해 상기 특정 STA의 User Info field에 있는 RU Allocation subfield의 B7-B1를 통해 61 내지 64 중 1개의 값을 지시하고, Primary 40 MHz를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하기 위해 상기 RU Allocation subfield의 B7-B1를 통해 65 혹은 66을 지시하고, Primary 80 MHz를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하기 위해 상기 RU Allocation subfield의 B7-B1를 통해 67, Primary 160 MHz를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하기 위해 68을 각각 지시할 수 있다. Primary 320 MHz channel을 통해 CTS frame을 응답하라는 지시는 상기 B7-B1을 통해 69를 지시함으로써 수행된다. 이 때, Primary 20/40/80/160 MHz를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하는 User Info field의 PS160 subfield는 0으로 설정되고, (Primary) 320 MHz를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하는 User Info field의 PS160 subfield는 1로 설정된다.Except for the MU-RTS trigger frame, the RU Allocation subfield of other trigger frames indicates the size and location information of the RU (Resource Unit)/MRU (Multiple Resource Unit) allocated to the destination device (STA indicated via the AID12 subfield) of the corresponding User Info field. However, the RU Allocation subfield of the MU-RTS trigger frame is utilized to indicate the channel on which the destination device of the corresponding User Info field should respond to the CTS frame. More specifically, the RU Allocation subfield of the MU-RTS frame (in the User Info field) indicates whether the destination STA should respond to the CTS frame only on the Primary 20 MHz channel or on the Primary 40 MHz / Primary 80 MHz / Primary 160 MHz / 80 + 80 MHz / (Primary) 320 MHz (in case of transmission by EHT/UHR AP) channel. More specifically, the AP may indicate one of values 61 to 64 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield in the User Info field of a specific STA to indicate that the specific STA will respond to the CTS frame through Primary 20 MHz, may indicate 65 or 66 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield to indicate that the specific STA will respond to the CTS frame through Primary 40 MHz, may indicate 67 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield to indicate that the CTS frame will be responded to through Primary 80 MHz, and may indicate 68 through B7-B1 of the RU Allocation subfield to indicate that the CTS frame will be responded to through Primary 160 MHz. The indication to respond to the CTS frame through Primary 320 MHz channel is performed by indicating 69 through B7-B1. At this time, the PS160 subfield of the User Info field, which instructs to respond to the CTS frame through Primary 20/40/80/160 MHz, is set to 0, and the PS160 subfield of the User Info field, which instructs to respond to the CTS frame through (Primary) 320 MHz, is set to 1.

UL FEC Coding Type subfield는 응답 될 TB PPDU의 code type을 지시하고, UL FEC Coding Type subfield가 0인 경우 BCC (binary convolution coding)를, 1인 경우 LDPC (low density parity check)를 지시한다.The UL FEC Coding Type subfield indicates the code type of the TB PPDU to be responded to. If the UL FEC Coding Type subfield is 0, it indicates BCC (binary convolution coding), and if it is 1, it indicates LDPC (low density parity check).

UL EHT-MCS subfield는 응답되는 TB PPDU 적용되어야 하는 EHT-MCS를 지시한다.The UL EHT-MCS subfield indicates the EHT-MCS to which the responding TB PPDU should be applied.

SS Allocation/RA-RU Information subfield는 AID12 subfield가 RA-RU가 할당되었음을 알리는 값이 아닌 경우, 즉 0 혹은 2044 혹은 2045로 지시된 경우 RA-RU Information subfield로 활용되고, AID12 subfield가 0 혹은 2044 혹은 2045가 아닌 값으로 지시된 경우 SS Allocation subfield로 활용될 수 있다. SS Allocation subfield로 활용되는 경우, SS Allocation subfield에 해당하는 6-bit은 Starting Spatial Stream subfield 4-bit, Number Of Spatial Streams subfield 2-bit으로 활용될 수 있다. The SS Allocation/RA-RU Information subfield can be used as the RA-RU Information subfield when the AID12 subfield is not a value indicating that RA-RU is allocated, that is, when it is indicated as 0, 2044, or 2045, and can be used as the SS Allocation subfield when the AID12 subfield is indicated as a value other than 0, 2044, or 2045. When used as the SS Allocation subfield, the 6 bits corresponding to the SS Allocation subfield can be used as the Starting Spatial Stream subfield 4 bits and the Number Of Spatial Streams subfield 2 bits.

UL Target Receive Power subfield는 응답 될 TB PPDU가 AP의 안테나 측에서 수신될 예측 signal power값을 지시한다. 따라서, STA는 TB PPDU를 응답할 때, AP가 예측하는 파워로 자신의 TB PPDU가 수신될 수 있도록 TB PPDU의 전송 파워를 UL Target Receive Power subfield의 값에 따라 조절해야 할 수 있다. The UL Target Receive Power subfield indicates the predicted signal power value at which the TB PPDU to be responded to will be received at the antenna side of the AP. Therefore, when the STA responds with a TB PPDU, it may need to adjust the transmission power of the TB PPDU according to the value of the UL Target Receive Power subfield so that its TB PPDU can be received with the power predicted by the AP.

PS160 subfield는 RU Allocation subfield와 함께 활용되며, 해당 User Info field를 통해 할당되는 RU/MRU(Multiple-RU)의 위치 및 크기와 관련한 정보를 지시한다.The PS160 subfield is used together with the RU Allocation subfield, and indicates information related to the location and size of the RU/MRU (Multiple-RU) allocated through the User Info field.

다만 UL EHT-MCS, UL FEC Coding Type, UL DCM, SS Allocation/RA-RU Information, UL Target Receive Power field 들은 MU-RTS 트리거 프레임에서 사용되지 않는다. 즉, Reserved subfield이다.However, UL EHT-MCS, UL FEC Coding Type, UL DCM, SS Allocation/RA-RU Information, and UL Target Receive Power fields are not used in the MU-RTS trigger frame. That is, they are reserved subfields.

상술한 바와 같이, AP는 MU-RTS frame을 전송하며, User Info field를 통해 CTS frame을 응답할 STA를 지시함과 동시에, 각 STA가 CTS frame을 응답해야 하는 대역을, Primary 20 MHz channel을 포함한 대역으로 지시한다. As described above, the AP transmits an MU-RTS frame, and indicates the STAs that should respond to the CTS frame through the User Info field, while also indicating the bands on which each STA should respond to the CTS frame, including the Primary 20 MHz channel.

다만, 본 발명에서 제공된 넌 프라이머리 채널 access 방법이 활용되면, AP는 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후, Primary 20 MHz channel을 제외한 채널들을 통해 MU-RTS frame을 전송하게 될 수 있다. 이 경우, MU-RTS frame을 수신한 후 CTS frame을 응답하는 STA 역시 Primary 20 MHz channel을 점유하지 않는 형태로 CTS frame을 응답해야 한다.However, if the non-primary channel access method provided in the present invention is utilized, the AP may perform channel access through the non-primary channel and then transmit an MU-RTS frame through channels other than the Primary 20 MHz channel. In this case, an STA that responds with a CTS frame after receiving the MU-RTS frame must also respond with the CTS frame in a form that does not occupy the Primary 20 MHz channel.

따라서, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 channel access를 수행한 후 MU-RTS frame을 전송하는 AP는, User Info field를 통해 CTS frame이 응답되어야Therefore, an AP that transmits an MU-RTS frame after performing channel access on a non-primary channel must respond with a CTS frame through the User Info field.

이는, 종래 Wi-Fi STA가 Primary 20 MHz channel을 점유한 상태로만 전송을 수행하던 것과는 상이한 동작이며, 따라서 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 AP로부터 MU-RTS frame을 수신한 STA는 프라이머리 채널을 점유하지 않는 형태의 CTS frame을 응답해야 한다.This is a different operation from the conventional Wi-Fi STA, which performed transmission only while occupying the Primary 20 MHz channel, and therefore, an STA that received an MU-RTS frame from an AP that performed channel access through a non-primary channel must respond with a CTS frame that does not occupy the primary channel.

하지만, 앞서 설명한 바와 같이 MU-RTS frame을 전송하며 STA에게 CTS frame을 응답할 channel을 지시하는 AP는, Primary 20/40/80/160/320 MHz와 같이 Primary 20 MHz channel을 점유하는 채널 형태만을 지시할 수 있다는 한계를 갖고 있다. 따라서 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 MU-RTS frame을 전송하는 AP가 넌 프라이머리 채널만을 점유하는 CTS frame의 응답을 지시할 수 있도록 허용하기 위해서는, 기존의 MU-RTS 트리거 프레임보다 더 많은 정보가 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하는 AP/STA간에 활용되어야 할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 더 많은 정보는, AP가 채널 접속에 활용한 채널의 정보 및/또는 STA가 CTS frame을 응답할 채널을 지시하는 보다 다양한 지시 방법을 의미할 수 있다.However, as explained above, an AP transmitting an MU-RTS frame and instructing an STA on a channel to respond to the CTS frame has a limitation in that it can only instruct a channel type occupying the Primary 20 MHz channel, such as Primary 20/40/80/160/320 MHz. Therefore, in order to allow an AP transmitting an MU-RTS frame after performing channel access through a non-primary channel to instruct a response to a CTS frame occupying only the non-primary channel, more information than the existing MU-RTS trigger frame may need to be utilized between the AP/STA performing the non-primary channel operation. In this case, the more information may mean information on the channel used by the AP for channel access and/or more diverse instruction methods for instructing a channel on which the STA will respond to the CTS frame.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, 트리거 프레임을 전송하는 AP는 자신이 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했는지, 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했는지를 지시할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로, 트리거 프레임에는, Primary 20 MHz channel에서 채널 접속을 수행한 AP가 전송할 때와, 넌 프라이머리 채널(Primary 20 MHz channel을 제외한 다른 20 MHz 서브 채널)에서 채널 접속을 수행한 AP가 전송할 때 서로 다른 값으로 지시되는 subfield가 포함될 수 있다. According to one embodiment of the present invention, an AP transmitting a trigger frame may indicate whether it has performed channel access through a primary channel or a non-primary channel. More specifically, the trigger frame may include a subfield that is indicated with a different value when transmitted by an AP that has performed channel access through a primary 20 MHz channel and when transmitted by an AP that has performed channel access through a non-primary channel (a 20 MHz subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz channel).

AP는 트리거 프레임의 Common Info field에 포함된 특정 subfield를 특정 값으로 설정함으로써, 트리거 프레임을 수신하는 STA들에게 자신이 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 해당 트리거 프레임을 전송했음을 지시할 수 있다. AP는 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행했을 때, 상기 특정 subfield를 다른 값으로 설정하여, 자신이 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하지 않았음을 지시할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 특정 subfield가 1 bit 크기를 갖는다면, 상기 특정 subfield는 0으로 지시되어 AP가 프라이머리 채널에서 channel access를 수행했음을 지시하고, 1로 설정되어 AP가 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 channel에서 channel access를 수행했음을 지시할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 특정 subfield가 2 bit 크기를 갖는다면, 상기 특정 subfield는 0으로 지시되어 AP가 프라이머리 채널에서 channel access를 수행했음을 지시하고, 1로 설정되어 AP가 제1 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 channel access를 수행했음을 지시하고, 2로 설정되어 AP가 제2 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 channel access를 수행했음을 지시하고, 3으로 설정되어 AP가 제3 넌 프라이머리 채널을 통해 channel access를 수행했음을 지시할 수 있다. 이 때, 제1, 제2, 제3 넌 프라이머리 채널은 서로 다른 80 MHz segment에 위치한 서브 채널들 일 수 있다.By setting a specific subfield included in the Common Info field of the trigger frame to a specific value, the AP can indicate to STAs receiving the trigger frame that it has transmitted the trigger frame after performing channel access through the primary channel. When the AP has performed channel access through the non-primary channel, the AP can indicate that it has not performed channel access through the primary channel by setting the specific subfield to a different value. In this case, if the specific subfield has a size of 1 bit, the specific subfield can be indicated as 0 to indicate that the AP has performed channel access on the primary channel, and can be set to 1 to indicate that the AP has performed channel access on a channel other than the primary channel. At this time, if the specific subfield has a size of 2 bits, the specific subfield may be indicated as 0 to indicate that the AP performed channel access on the primary channel, set to 1 to indicate that the AP performed channel access through the first non-primary channel, set to 2 to indicate that the AP performed channel access through the second non-primary channel, and set to 3 to indicate that the AP performed channel access through the third non-primary channel. At this time, the first, second, and third non-primary channels may be subchannels located in different 80 MHz segments.

AP가 트리거 프레임의 Common Info field를 통해 자신이 Channel access를 수행한 채널과 관련한 정보를 지시하면, STA는 자신의 User Info field에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield를 해석할 때, AP가 channel access를 수행한 채널의 정보에 기초하여 RU Allocation subfield를 해석해야 한다. 다시 말해서, MU-RTS frame을 수신한 STA는 자신이 CTS frame을 응답할 주파수 대역을 확인하기 위해, AP가 Common Info field를 통해 지시한 채널 접속에 활용한 채널 정보 및 자신의 User Info field의 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시된 정보를 함께 활용해야 한다. STA가 Common Info field에서 지시된 정보와 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시된 정보를 활용하는 방법을 간략하게 설명하면, RU Allocation subfield를 통해 CTS frame을 응답해야 하는 대역폭을 획득하고, Common Info field에서 지시된 정보를 기초로 CTS frame이 응답되어야 하는 서브 채널의 위치를 확인하는 것일 수 있다. When the AP indicates information related to the channel on which it performed Channel Access through the Common Info field of the trigger frame, the STA must interpret the RU Allocation subfield included in its User Info field based on the information on the channel on which the AP performed Channel Access when interpreting the RU Allocation subfield included in its User Info field. In other words, the STA that has received the MU-RTS frame must utilize both the channel information used for channel access indicated by the AP through the Common Info field and the information indicated through the RU Allocation subfield of its User Info field to confirm the frequency band to which it will respond with the CTS frame. Briefly explaining how the STA utilizes the information indicated in the Common Info field and the information indicated through the RU Allocation subfield, it may obtain a bandwidth on which it should respond with the CTS frame through the RU Allocation subfield, and confirm the location of the subchannel on which the CTS frame should be responded based on the information indicated in the Common Info field.

일 예로, STA는 자신의 User Info field에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield가 Primary 80 MHz 의미하는 값으로 지시되었을 때, AP가 Channel Access를 수행한 channel이 Primary 20 MHz channel이라고 지시되면 Primary 80 MHz channel을 통해 CTS frame을 응답하고, AP가 Channel Access 수행한 channel이 넌 프라이머리 채널이라고 지시되면 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널이 포함된 80 MHz segment에 위치한 80 MHz channel에서 CTS frame을 응답한다.For example, when the RU Allocation subfield included in the User Info field of an STA is indicated as a value meaning Primary 80 MHz, if the channel on which the AP performed Channel Access is indicated as a Primary 20 MHz channel, the STA responds with a CTS frame through the Primary 80 MHz channel, and if the channel on which the AP performed Channel Access is indicated as a non-primary channel, the STA responds with a CTS frame on an 80 MHz channel located in the 80 MHz segment that includes the non-primary channel.

다른 방법으로, AP는 각 STA의 User Info field를 통해, 각 STA가 CTS frame을 응답할 주파수 대역 및 위치 정보를 모두 지시할 수 있다. 즉, AP는 User Info field에 포함된 RU Allocation subfield를 61 내지 69가 아닌 다른 값으로 설정함으로써, Primary 20 MHz channel을 포함하지 않는 RU를 지시하는 것이 가능하다. 일 예로, AP는 RU Allocation subfield를 71 내지 74로 설정하여, Secondary 80 MHz segment에 위치한 4개의 20 MHz 서브 채널 중 1개에서 CTS frame을 응답할 것을 지시하는 것이 가능하고, RU Allocation subfield를 75 및 76으로 설정하여 Secondary 80 MHz segment에 위치한 2개의 40 MHz channel 중 하나를 지시하거나, 77로 설정하여 Secondary 80 MHz channel을 지시하는 것이 가능하다. 즉, MU-RTS 트리거 프레임의 User Info field에 포함되는 RU Allocation subfield는, Primary 20 MHz channel을 제외한 주파수 영역을 지시하는 기능을 갖을 수 있다. Alternatively, the AP can indicate both the frequency band and location information to which each STA will respond to the CTS frame, through the User Info field of each STA. That is, the AP can indicate an RU that does not include the Primary 20 MHz channel by setting the RU Allocation subfield included in the User Info field to a value other than 61 to 69. For example, the AP can indicate that the CTS frame will be responded to on one of the four 20 MHz subchannels located in the Secondary 80 MHz segment by setting the RU Allocation subfield to 71 to 74, can indicate one of the two 40 MHz channels located in the Secondary 80 MHz segment by setting the RU Allocation subfield to 75 and 76, or can indicate the Secondary 80 MHz channel by setting it to 77. That is, the RU Allocation subfield included in the User Info field of the MU-RTS trigger frame can have the function of indicating a frequency range excluding the Primary 20 MHz channel.

혹은, RU Allocation subfield는 종래의 설정 방법을 그대로 사용하되, User Info field에서 지시되는 다른 subfield와 RU Allocation subfield가 결합되어 해석하도록 함으로써, AP는 STA에게 Primary 20 MHz channel을 포함하지 않는 다른 대역에서 CTS frame을 응답하도록 지시할 수 있다. 일 예로, AP는 20 MHz에 해당하는 값을 RU Allocation subfield를 통해 지시(예를 들어 61 내지 64)하고, 상기 특정 subfield를 통해 제1 80 MHz segment를 지시함으로써, 제1 80 MHz segment 위치한 특정 20 MHz 서브 채널을 통해 CTS frame을 응답하도록 지시할 수 있다. 즉, STA는 지시된 segment 정보 및 지시된 CTS frame 응답 BW 정보를 결합하여 자신이 CTS frame을 응답해야 하는 서브 채널들을 결정할 수 있다.Alternatively, the RU Allocation subfield may be configured using the conventional setting method, but may be interpreted in combination with other subfields indicated in the User Info field, so that the AP can instruct the STA to respond to the CTS frame in a band other than the Primary 20 MHz channel. For example, the AP may indicate a value corresponding to 20 MHz (e.g., 61 to 64) through the RU Allocation subfield and indicate a first 80 MHz segment through the specific subfield, so as to instruct the STA to respond to the CTS frame through a specific 20 MHz subchannel located in the first 80 MHz segment. That is, the STA may determine the subchannels on which it should respond to the CTS frame by combining the indicated segment information and the indicated CTS frame response BW information.

<넌 프라이머리 채널 접속(Non-Primary Channel Access(NPCA))의 효율 적인 운용방법><Efficient Operation Method of Non-Primary Channel Access (NPCA)>

본 발명에서 설명한 두 가지 채널 접속 방법인 1) 보조 링크를 이용한 채널 접속 방법 및 2) 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 서브 채널을 이용한 채널 접속 방법은 동일한 목적을 달성하기 위해 사용될 수 있는 서로 다른 채널 접속 방법이다. 이 두 가지 채널 접속 방법은 채널 접속을 수행하는 STA이 채널 접속 절차(예를 들면, EDCA)를 수행하는 채널을 변경할 것인지, 활성 상태의 링크를 변경함으로써 채널 접속 절차가 수행되는 채널이 변경되는 것인지 여부에서 차이점이 존재한다.The two channel access methods described in the present invention, 1) a channel access method using an auxiliary link and 2) a channel access method using a sub-channel other than a primary channel, are different channel access methods that can be used to achieve the same purpose. The difference between these two channel access methods exists in whether an STA performing a channel access changes the channel on which the channel access procedure is performed (e.g., EDCA) or whether the channel on which the channel access procedure is performed is changed by changing an active link.

즉, 두 가지 채널 접속 방법은 모두 본질적으로는 동일하게 주 채널이 점유 상태인 경우 프라이머리 채널을 제외한 다른 서브 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널)로 채널 스위칭을 하여 채널 접속을 수행함으로써 동일한 효과를 갖는 채널 접속 방법이다. 따라서, 두 채널 접속 방법을 효율적으로 활용하는 방법 또한 역시 동일하다. 이하, 본 발명에서 제안하는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속의 효율적인 운용 방법은 단일 STA이 채널 접속을 수행하는 채널을 프라이머리 채널에서 프라이머리 채널로 변경하는 것이 아닌 프라이머리 채널에서 다른 서브 채널(예를 들면, 넌 프라이머리 채널 또는 서브 채널)로 변경하는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 방법 및 Overlapping BSS를 이용한 채널 접속 방법(전술한 프라이머리 링크와 보조 링크를 이용한 방법)모두 공히 적용될 수 있다. 다만, 설명의 편의를 위해서 후술하는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속의 효율적인 운용방법은 단일 STA(AP 및/또는 non-AP STA)이 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널로의 채널 스위칭을 통해 다른 서브 채널을 이용하여 채널 접속을 수행하는 방법을 위주로 설명하도록 한다. 즉, 후술하는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 방법을 수행하는 조건은, 프라이머리 링크를 비활성(Inactive) 상태로 전환하고 보조 링크를 활성(Active) 상태로 전환하는 조건으로 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. 즉, 후술하는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하는 STA의 동작/판단 방법은, Overlapping BSS를 이용하는 MLD의 동작/판단 방법에 동일하게 적용될 수 있다.That is, both channel access methods are essentially the same in that they perform channel access by performing channel switching to a sub-channel (non-primary channel) other than the primary channel when the primary channel is occupied, thereby having the same effect. Therefore, the methods for efficiently utilizing the two channel access methods are also the same. Hereinafter, the efficient operation method of non-primary channel access proposed in the present invention can be applied to both the non-primary channel access method in which a single STA changes the channel on which it performs channel access from the primary channel to another sub-channel (e.g., non-primary channel or sub-channel) instead of changing the channel from the primary channel to the primary channel, and the channel access method using overlapping BSS (the method using the primary link and auxiliary link described above). However, for the convenience of explanation, the efficient operation method of non-primary channel access described below will be mainly explained in terms of the method in which a single STA (AP and/or non-AP STA) performs channel access by using another sub-channel by channel switching to a sub-channel other than the primary channel. That is, the conditions for performing the non-primary channel access method described below can be applied identically to the conditions for switching the primary link to the inactive state and switching the secondary link to the active state. That is, the operation/judgment method of the STA performing the non-primary channel access described below can be applied identically to the operation/judgment method of the MLD using the overlapping BSS.

넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하는 STA은 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS에 의해서 점유된 경우에도 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브 채널을 통해 서브채널을 통해 채널 접근 절차를 수행함으로써 채널 접근 능력을 향상시킬 수 있다. 다만, 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널에서 채널 접근 절차를 수행할 때에는, 해당 서브채널에서 먼저 진행되고 있을지도 모를 다른 STA의 전송을 보호하기 위한 절차를 수행(예를 들어 Mediumsync time을 적용)해야 하고, 채널 접근 절차를 완료한 후 획득한 TXOP을 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP과 동일하거나 더 이른 시점에 종료해야 한다는 제한을 받는다.An STA performing non-primary channel access can improve its channel access capability by performing a channel access procedure through a subchannel other than the primary channel even when the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS. However, when performing a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary channel, a procedure for protecting transmissions of other STAs that may be in progress on the subchannel first must be performed (for example, applying Mediumsync time), and after completing the channel access procedure, the acquired TXOP must be terminated at a time that is the same as or earlier than the TXOP of the OBSS that occupied its primary channel.

즉, STA은 프라이머리 채널이 다른 OBSS의 AP 또는 non-AP STA에 의해서 점유되어 비지 상태인 경우, 동일 대역폭 내의 다른 서브 채널(부 채널 또는 넌 프라이머리 채널)로 채널을 스위칭하고, 해당 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행함으로써 채널 접근 능력을 향상시킬 수 있다. 또한, 프라이머리 채널의 점유 상태로 인하여 대역폭의 다른 서브 채널들이 사용되지 못하는 점도 해결할 수 있기 때문에 채널을 효율적으로 사용할 수 있다. 이 경우, 스위칭된 서브 채널에서의 다른 STA들의 동작을 보호하기 위해서 STA은 스위칭된 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차를 프라이머리 채널에서 설정된 TXOP 내에서 수행해야 한다. 따라서, 채널 접속 절차가 TXOP 내에 수행될 수 없는 경우, STA은 스위칭된 서브 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 없다. 따라서, STA은 스위칭된 서브 채널에서 채널 접속 절차의 수행 가능 여부를 판단하기 위해 채널 스위칭 전에 프라이머리 채널에서 다른 OBSS의 AP 또는 non-AP STA으로부터 전송된 프레임에 기초하여 설정된 TXOP의 남은 길이를 판단할 수 있다. 또한, STA은 프레임을 수신한 뒤 TXOP의 남은 듀레이션을 판단하기 전에 수신된 프레임이 자신과 연관된(associated) AP로부터 전송된 프레임인지 또는 자신과 연관되지 않은(unassociated) AP로부터 전송된 프레임인지 여부를 판단할 수 있다. 이때, STA은 수신된 프레임에 포함된 TXOP 필드 또는 듀레이션 필드의 값에 기초하여 프라이머리 채널에 설정된 TXOP의 남은 듀레이션을 판단할 수 있다.That is, when the primary channel is occupied by an AP or a non-AP STA of another OBSS and is in a busy state, the STA can improve the channel access capability by switching the channel to another sub-channel (sub-channel or non-primary channel) within the same bandwidth and performing a channel access procedure on the channel. In addition, since the problem that other sub-channels of the bandwidth are not used due to the occupied state of the primary channel can be resolved, the channel can be used efficiently. In this case, in order to protect the operations of other STAs in the switched sub-channel, the STA must perform the channel access procedure in the switched channel within the TXOP set in the primary channel. Accordingly, if the channel access procedure cannot be performed within the TXOP, the STA cannot perform the channel access procedure in the switched sub-channel. Therefore, the STA can determine the remaining length of the set TXOP based on a frame transmitted from an AP or a non-AP STA of another OBSS in the primary channel before channel switching in order to determine whether the channel access procedure can be performed in the switched sub-channel. In addition, before determining the remaining duration of TXOP after receiving a frame, the STA may determine whether the received frame is a frame transmitted from an AP associated with it or an AP not associated with it. At this time, the STA may determine the remaining duration of TXOP set for the primary channel based on the value of the TXOP field or duration field included in the received frame.

따라서, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하는 STA는 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행할 때보다는 많은 추가 동작(예를 들어 Mediumsync time을 적용하고, 동작 주파수를 프라이머리 채널에서 다른 서브채널로 변경하는 등)을 수행해야 하는 반면, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 통해 획득할 수 있는 TXOP 길이는 더욱 제한될 수 있다. 즉, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하기 위해 소모하는 비용을 고려했을 때, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 통해 얻을 수 있는 TXOP의 길이가 너무 짧은 상황이 발생할 수 있고, 이 경우 STA에게는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하지 않는 것이 보다 유리한 동작일 수도 있다. 따라서, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있는 Capability의 STA라 할지라도, 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS에 점유되었을 때 항상 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하지는 않을 수도 있다.Therefore, an STA performing non-primary channel access needs to perform more additional operations (e.g., applying Mediumsync time, changing the operating frequency from the primary channel to another subchannel, etc.) than when performing channel access on the primary channel, whereas the TXOP length that can be obtained through the non-primary channel access may be further limited. That is, considering the cost consumed to perform non-primary channel access, a situation may occur where the length of the TXOP that can be obtained through the non-primary channel access is too short, and in this case, it may be more advantageous for the STA not to perform the non-primary channel access. Accordingly, even an STA with the Capability to perform non-primary channel access may not always perform the non-primary channel access when the primary channel is occupied by the OBSS.

앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 STA은 OBSS AP에 의해서 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널이 점유되었다고 판단한 경우, 대역폭의 다른 서브 채널(넌 프라이머리 채널)로 채널 스위칭을 할 수 있다. 이때, STA은 자신이 수신한 프레임(또는, PPDU)이 OBSS AP에 의해서 전송된 프레임인지 여부(즉, inter-BSS 프레임 또는 intra-BSS 프레임인지 여부)를 판단할 수 있다. 예를 들면, 수신된 프레임의 BSS 컬러 정보, 또는 MAC 주소 등을 통해서 수신된 프레임이 OBSS AP로부터 전송된 프레임인지 여부를 판단할 수 있다.As described above, if the STA determines that the primary channel of the bandwidth is occupied by the OBSS AP, the STA can perform channel switching to another subchannel (non-primary channel) of the bandwidth. At this time, the STA can determine whether the frame (or PPDU) it received is a frame transmitted by the OBSS AP (i.e., whether it is an inter-BSS frame or an intra-BSS frame). For example, it can determine whether the received frame is a frame transmitted from the OBSS AP through BSS color information of the received frame, or the MAC address, etc.

수신된 프레임이 OBSS AP로부터 전송된 프레임인 경우, 프라이머리 채널은 OBSS AP에 의해서 점유되어 비지 상태이기 때문에 STA은 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 없다. 따라서, STA은 앞에서 설명한 대역폭 내의 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위칭하여 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다.If the received frame is a frame transmitted from an OBSS AP, the primary channel is occupied by the OBSS AP and is in a busy state, so the STA cannot perform a channel access procedure on the primary channel. Therefore, the STA can perform a channel access procedure by switching the channel to a non-primary channel within the bandwidth described above.

이때, STA는 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP 길이에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로는, STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP 길이가 특정 값(Threshold)보다 긴 경우(혹은 같거나 긴 경우)에만 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 고려하는 OBSS TXOP의 길이는, 자신이 OBSS TXOP을 인지한 시점부터 상기 OBSS TXOP 종료 시점까지의 길이를 의미할 수 있다. 즉, OBSS TXOP의 총 길이가 아닌, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할지 여부를 판단하는 시점에 남아 있는 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간 길이를 기초로 STA의 판단이 수행된다. 이 때, STA가 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간 길이를 획득하는 방법은, OBSS STA들이 전송한 frame을 기초로 설정한 NAV(network allocation vector)를 이용하거나, OBSS PPDU의 preamble에 포함된 TXOP field에 의해 지시된 시간에 기초하는 것일 수 있다.At this time, the STA can determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access based on the TXOP length of the OBSS that occupies the primary channel. More specifically, the STA can perform a non-primary channel access only when the TXOP length of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel is longer than (or equal to or longer than) a specific value (threshold). At this time, the length of the OBSS TXOP that the STA considers may mean the length from the time when it recognizes the OBSS TXOP to the time when the OBSS TXOP ends. That is, the STA's determination is made based on the remaining time length of the OBSS TXOP remaining at the time of determining whether to perform a non-primary channel access, not the total length of the OBSS TXOP. At this time, the method by which the STA obtains the remaining time length of the OBSS TXOP may be based on the NAV (network allocation vector) set based on the frame transmitted by the OBSS STAs, or on the time indicated by the TXOP field included in the preamble of the OBSS PPDU.

이때, STA는 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 PPDU 길이에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 보다 구체적으로는, STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 PPDU 길이가 특정 값(Threshold)보다 긴 경우(혹은 같거나 긴 경우)에만 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 고려하는 OBSS PPDU의 길이는, OBSS PPDU의 총 길이 혹은 자신이 OBSS PPDU를 인지한 시점부터 상기 OBSS PPDU 종료 시점까지 남아 있는 시간 길이를 의미할 수 있다. 즉, STA는 자신이 확인한 OBSS PPDU의 총 길이가 특정 값(Threshold)보다 긴 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하거나, 자신이 OBSS PPDU를 인지한 시점부터 남아있는 OBSS PPDU의 길이가 특정 값(Threshold)보다 긴 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하는 결정을 할 수 있다. 이 때, STA는 OBSS PPDU에 의해 생성된 RXVECTOR parameter으로부터 OBSS PPDU의 총 길이 혹은 OBSS PPDU의 종료 시점까지의 남아있는 시간 길이 정보를 획득할 수 있다. RXVECTOR parameter로부터 OBSS PPDU의 길이 관련 정보가 획득되는 구체적인 과정은 후술하는 본 발명의 실시예들을 통해 설명되기 때문에 자세한 설명은 생략한다.At this time, the STA can determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access based on the PPDU length of the OBSS that occupies the primary channel. More specifically, the STA can perform a non-primary channel access only when the PPDU length of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel is longer than (or equal to or longer than) a specific value (Threshold). At this time, the length of the OBSS PPDU that the STA considers may mean the total length of the OBSS PPDU or the length of time remaining from the time when the STA recognizes the OBSS PPDU to the time when the OBSS PPDU ends. That is, the STA can decide to perform a non-primary channel access when the total length of the OBSS PPDU that the STA has confirmed is longer than a specific value (Threshold), or to perform a non-primary channel access when the length of the remaining OBSS PPDU from the time when the STA recognizes the OBSS PPDU is longer than a specific value (Threshold). At this time, the STA can obtain information on the total length of the OBSS PPDU or the remaining time length until the end point of the OBSS PPDU from the RXVECTOR parameter generated by the OBSS PPDU. The specific process of obtaining information related to the length of the OBSS PPDU from the RXVECTOR parameter is described through the embodiments of the present invention described later, so a detailed description is omitted.

다시 말해, STA은 다른 STA(AP 또는 non-AP STA)으로부터 PPDU가 수신되면, 수신된 PPDU에 포함된 정보(예를 들면, BSS color, BSSID 또는 MAC address)에 기초하여 수신된 PPDU가 자신이 속한 BSS로부터 전송된 PPDU(intra-BSS PPDU) 또는 자신이 속하지 않은 BSS(OBSS)로부터 전송된 PPDU(inter-BSS PPDU)인지 인식할 수 있다. 만약, 수신된 PPDU가 inter-BSS PPDU인 경우, STA은 자신이 동작하는 대역의 프라이머리 채널이 점유되었다는 것을 CCA 동작을 통해서 확인할 수 있고, 이 경우, 프라이머리 채널에서 프레임의 교환(또는 채널 접속 절차)을 수행할 수 없다. 따라서, STA은 자신이 동작하는 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 채널(예를 들면, 넌 프라이머리 채널 등)로 채널을 스위칭하여 프레임의 교환 또는 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다. 이 경우, STA이 다른 채널로의 채널 스위칭을 하기 위해서는 수신된 PPDU에 의해서 설정된 TXOP(다른 OBSS에 의해서 설정된 TXOP)이 채널 스위칭 및 프레임 교환(또는 채널 접속)을 위해서 충분히 남아 있어야 한다. 이를 판단하기 위해서 STA은 수신된 PPDU와 관련된 특정 값과 최소 듀레이션 임계 값을 비교할 수 있다. 만약, 특정 값이 최소 듀레이션 임계 값보다 큰 경우(또는, 크거나 같은 경우), STA은 다른 채널로 채널을 스위칭하여 프레임 교환 또는 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다.In other words, when a PPDU is received from another STA (AP or non-AP STA), the STA can recognize whether the received PPDU is a PPDU transmitted from a BSS to which the STA belongs (intra-BSS PPDU) or a PPDU transmitted from a BSS to which the STA does not belong (inter-BSS PPDU) based on information included in the received PPDU (e.g., BSS color, BSSID, or MAC address). If the received PPDU is an inter-BSS PPDU, the STA can confirm that the primary channel of the bandwidth in which it operates is occupied through a CCA operation, and in this case, the STA cannot perform frame exchange (or channel access procedure) on the primary channel. Therefore, the STA can perform frame exchange or channel access by switching the channel to a channel other than the primary channel of the bandwidth in which it operates (e.g., a non-primary channel, etc.). In this case, in order for the STA to perform channel switching to another channel, the TXOP set by the received PPDU (TXOP set by another OBSS) must remain sufficiently for channel switching and frame exchange (or channel access). To determine this, the STA can compare a specific value related to the received PPDU with a minimum duration threshold. If the specific value is greater than (or greater than or equal to) the minimum duration threshold, the STA can perform a frame exchange or channel access procedure by switching the channel to another channel.

이때, 수신된 PPDU와 관련된 특정 값은 수신된 PPDU의 길이, 또는 남아있는 TXOP의 듀레이션 중 하나일 수 있다. 수신된 PPDU의 길이는 OBSS로부터 전송된 PPDU의 총 길이 또는 STA이 PPDU를 인지한 시점부터 남아있는 PPDU의 길이일 수 있으며, 남아있는 PPDU의 길이는 PPDU에 포함된 길이 필드 및 레이트 필드에 기초하여 획득될 수 있다. 남아 있는 TXOP의 듀레이션은 OBSS로부터 전송된 PPDU를 인식한 시점부터 남아있는 TXOP의 길이를 의미할 수 있으며, PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드의 값에 남아있는 PPDU의 길이를 더함으로써 획득될 수 있다.At this time, the specific value related to the received PPDU may be either the length of the received PPDU or the duration of the remaining TXOP. The length of the received PPDU may be the total length of the PPDU transmitted from the OBSS or the length of the remaining PPDU from the time the STA recognizes the PPDU, and the length of the remaining PPDU may be obtained based on the length field and the rate field included in the PPDU. The duration of the remaining TXOP may mean the length of the remaining TXOP from the time the STA recognizes the PPDU transmitted from the OBSS, and may be obtained by adding the length of the remaining PPDU to the value of the TXOP field included in the PPDU.

또는, STA은 수신된 PPDU에 의해서 PHY 계층에서 생성되어 MAC 계층으로 전송되는 RXVECTOR parameter에 의해서 PPDU의 총 길이 또는 남아있는 PPDU의 길이를 인식할 수 있다. 이하, 후술하는 실시 예는 특정 값을 남아 있는 TXOP 듀레이션에 기초하여 설명하지만, 남아 있는 TXOP 듀레이션 뿐만 아니라 PPDU의 총 길이 또는 남아 있는 PPDU의 길이에 기초하여 수행될 수도 있다.Alternatively, the STA can recognize the total length of the PPDU or the length of the remaining PPDU by the RXVECTOR parameter generated at the PHY layer by the received PPDU and transmitted to the MAC layer. The following embodiments describe a specific value based on the remaining TXOP duration, but may be performed based on not only the remaining TXOP duration but also the total length of the PPDU or the length of the remaining PPDU.

특정 값은 AP가 전송하는 Management frame (예를 들어 Beacon frame 및/또는 Probe Response frame 및 또는 Association Response frame 및/또는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속의 활용 여부를 지시하는 Management frame(일종의 Operating Mode Notification frame))을 통해 AP로부터 지시되는 값일 수 있다. 혹은, 상기 특정 값은 기설정된 값(예를 들어 1 ms 혹은 2 ms 등)일 수 있다.The specific value may be a value indicated by the AP via a Management frame transmitted by the AP (e.g., a Beacon frame and/or a Probe Response frame and/or an Association Response frame and/or a Management frame (a type of Operating Mode Notification frame) indicating whether to utilize a non-primary channel connection). Alternatively, the specific value may be a preset value (e.g., 1 ms or 2 ms, etc.).

이 때, STA가 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP 길이를 확인하는 방법은, 수신된 PPDU의 Preamble(예를 들어 HE-SIG-A 혹은 U-SIG)에 포함된 TXOP field 혹은 MAC Header의 Duration/ID field를 통해 지시된 값을 이용하는 것일 수 있다.At this time, the method for the STA to check the TXOP length of the OBSS that occupies the primary channel may be to use the value indicated through the TXOP field included in the Preamble (e.g. HE-SIG-A or U-SIG) of the received PPDU or the Duration/ID field of the MAC Header.

이 경우, STA은 수신된 프레임에 포함된 듀레이션 필드 또는 TXOP 필드에 기초하여 프레임의 수신 이후 남아있는 TXOP의 듀레이션을 인식할 수 있다. 즉, STA은 프레임에 포함된 듀레이션 필드 또는 TXOP 필드에 의해서 지시되는 값에 기초하여 수신된 프레임의 종료 시점부터 OBSS에 의해서 설정된 TXOP이 종료되는 시점까지의 남아있는 듀레이션을 인식할 수 있다. 따라서, STA은 남아있는 듀레이션에 기초하여 설정된 TXOP 내에 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널 스위칭을 하여 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있는지 여부를 판단할 수 있으며, 남아있는 듀레이션 내에 채널 스위칭 및 채널 접속 절차(또는, 프레임 교환)가 수행될 수 있다고 판단되면 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널 스위칭을 하여 채널 접속 절차(또는, 프레임 교환)를 수행할 수 있다. 이때, STA은 남아있는 듀레이션 내에 채널 스위칭 및 채널 접속 절차가 수행될 수 있는지 여부를 판단하기 위해서 남아 있는 듀레이션(또는, PPDU의 총 길이 또는 남아있는 PPDU의 길이 등)과 임계 값을 비교하여 남아 있는 듀레이션이 임계 값보다 큰 경우(또는 같거나 큰 경우), 채널 스위칭 및 채널 접속 절차의 수행히 가능하다고 판단될 수 있다. 예를 들면, 프레임(예를 들면, 수신된 PPDU)의 듀레이션에 TXOP 필드 또는 듀레이션 필드에 의해서 지시된 값을 더한 값이 임계 값보다 큰 경우 STA은 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차가 가능하다고 판단할 수 있다. 이때, 프레임의 길이(또는 PPDU의 듀레이션)는 프레임에 포함된 길이 필드 및 레이트 필드에 기초하여 획득될 수 있다. 이때, 임계 값은 STA이 채널 스위칭 및 채널 접속을 수행하기 위한 최소한의 듀레이션을 의미할 수 있다.In this case, the STA can recognize the duration of the remaining TXOP after reception of the frame based on the duration field or TXOP field included in the received frame. That is, the STA can recognize the remaining duration from the end time of the received frame to the end time of the TXOP set by the OBSS based on the value indicated by the duration field or TXOP field included in the frame. Accordingly, the STA can determine whether it can perform a channel access procedure by channel switching to a non-primary channel within the set TXOP based on the remaining duration, and if it is determined that channel switching and the channel access procedure (or frame exchange) can be performed within the remaining duration, the STA can perform the channel access procedure (or frame exchange) by channel switching to the non-primary channel. At this time, the STA compares the remaining duration (or, the total length of the PPDU, the length of the remaining PPDU, etc.) with a threshold value to determine whether the channel switching and channel access procedures can be performed within the remaining duration. If the remaining duration is greater than (or equal to or greater than) the threshold value, it can be determined that the channel switching and channel access procedures can be performed. For example, if the value obtained by adding the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field to the duration of the frame (e.g., the received PPDU) is greater than the threshold value, the STA can determine that the channel access procedure on the non-primary channel is possible. At this time, the length of the frame (or the duration of the PPDU) can be obtained based on the length field and the rate field included in the frame. At this time, the threshold value can mean the minimum duration for the STA to perform channel switching and channel access.

다른 방법으로, STA가 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속을 수행할지 여부를 결정하는 방법은, 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP길이에 기초하지 않고 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속을 통해 획득할 수 있을 것이라 판단되는 TXOP의 길이에 기초하여 수행되는 것이 가능하다. 즉, STA는 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속을 통해 획득할 수 있는 TXOP의 길이가 특정 값(Threshold)보다 긴 경우(혹은 같거나 긴 경우)에만 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속을 수행하는 판단을 할 수 있다. 이 경우, STA는 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널에서 채널 접근 절차를 수행하는 도중, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 통해 획득할 수 있는 TXOP의 길이가 특정 값보다 짧아지면 (프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP의 종료시점에 기초하여 계산됨) 다시 프라이머리 채널로 전환하여 채널 접근 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 즉, STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP 종료 시점으로부터 특정 시간 이전까지 non-프라이머리 채널의 채널 접근 절차를 완료하지 못할 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 포기하고 프라이머리 채널을 이용한 채널 접근 절차로 다시 전환할 수 있다.Alternatively, the method for determining whether an STA performs channel access on a non-primary channel may be performed based on the length of a TXOP that it determines it can obtain through channel access on the non-primary channel, rather than based on the TXOP length of the OBSS occupying the primary channel. That is, the STA may determine to perform channel access on the non-primary channel only when the length of a TXOP that it can obtain through channel access on the non-primary channel is longer than (or equal to or longer than) a specific value (threshold). In this case, while performing a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary channel, if the length of a TXOP that it can obtain through non-primary channel access becomes shorter than the specific value (calculated based on the end time of the TXOP of the OBSS occupying the primary channel), the STA may switch back to the primary channel and perform the channel access procedure. That is, if an STA fails to complete the channel access procedure of a non-primary channel within a certain time period from the end time of the TXOP of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel, the STA may give up access to the non-primary channel and switch back to the channel access procedure using the primary channel.

상술한 OBSS TXOP의 길이에 기초한 방법과 자신이 획득할 수 있는 TXOP의 길이에 기초한 방법은, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 통해 획득할 수 있는 TXOP이 충분한지 여부(충분히 효율적인지 여부)를 판단하는 서로 다른 방법이다. 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 시도할지 여부를 결정하는 STA는 두 방법 중 하나 혹은 두 방법 모두를 함께 사용하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할지 여부를 최종적으로 결정하는 것이 가능하다.The method based on the length of the OBSS TXOP described above and the method based on the length of the TXOP that can be obtained are different methods for determining whether the TXOP that can be obtained through the non-primary channel access is sufficient (whether it is sufficiently efficient). An STA that determines whether to attempt the non-primary channel access can use one of the two methods or both methods together to make a final decision on whether to perform the non-primary channel access.

추가적으로, STA는 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차를 수행할지 여부를 결정하는 과정에서, 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환하기 위한 스위칭 딜레이 또는 전환 딜레이(switching delay 또는 transition delay)를 함께 고려하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환할 지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 보다 자세히 설명하면, STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP이 임계 값보다 긴 시간 유지되는 것으로 지시된다 하더라도, 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 변경하는데 소요되는 시간을 고려했을 때, 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 동작할 수 있는 시간이 임계 값보다 짧은 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 변경하지 않을 수 있다. 즉, STA는 남아있는 'OBSS TXOP의 시간 길이 - Transition delay'가 임계 값보다 긴지 (혹은 길거나 같은지) 여부를 기초로 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로의 전환 여부를 결정할 수 있다.Additionally, when determining whether to perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel, the STA may consider a switching delay or transition delay for switching to the non-primary channel operation to determine whether to switch to the non-primary channel operation. In more detail, even if the STA is instructed that the TXOP of the OBSS occupying its primary channel is maintained for a time longer than a threshold value, if the STA considers the time required to switch to the non-primary channel operation mode and the time that the STA can operate on the non-primary channel is shorter than the threshold value, the STA may not switch to the non-primary channel operation mode. That is, the STA may determine whether to switch to the non-primary channel operation mode based on whether the remaining 'time length of OBSS TXOP - Transition delay' is longer than (or equal to) the threshold value.

예를 들면, 앞에서 설명한 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차 가능 여부를 판단하기 위해서 STA은 스위칭 딜레이 또는 전환 딜레이를 추가적으로 고려할 수 있다. 즉, STA은 수신된 프레임(또는 PPDU)에 포함된 듀레이션 필드 또는 TXOP 필드에 의해서 지시된 값에 기초하여 획득된 값(예를 들면, TXOP 필드 또는 듀레이션 필드 값에 의해서 지시된 값에 PPDU의 듀레이션을 더한 값 등)과 임계 값을 비교하는 과정에서 임계 값은 채널 스위칭 및 채널 접속 절차를 수행하기 위한 최소 값에 스위칭 딜레이 또는 전환 딜레이를 더한 값으로 설정될 수 있다.For example, in order to determine whether a channel access procedure is possible in the non-primary channel described above, the STA may additionally consider a switching delay or a transition delay. That is, the STA compares a value obtained based on a value indicated by a duration field or a TXOP field included in a received frame (or PPDU) (e.g., a value obtained by adding the duration of the PPDU to the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field value) with a threshold value, and the threshold value may be set to a value obtained by adding the switching delay or a transition delay to a minimum value for performing channel switching and channel access procedures.

도 29는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 프라이머리 채널이 점유 상태인 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 29 illustrates an example of channel access in a non-primary channel when the primary channel is occupied according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 29를 참조하면 STA은 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS에 의해서 설정된 TXOP에 의해서 비지 상태인 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널(부 채널)로 채널을 스위칭하여 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 도 29는 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있는 STA의 관점에서 확인한 채널 상태 및 채널 접근 절차를 도시하고 있다.Referring to FIG. 29, an STA can perform a channel access procedure by switching the channel to a non-primary channel (secondary channel) when the primary channel is in a busy state due to a TXOP set by an OBSS. FIG. 29 illustrates a channel state and a channel access procedure confirmed from the perspective of an STA capable of performing non-primary channel access.

STA는 프라이머리 채널 (P20)에서 백오프 절차를 완료하기 전, OBSS STA가 OBSS TXOP1을 개시하기 위해 교환하는 RTS/CTS 프레임을 수신한다. STA는 수신된 프레임에 포함된 정보를 기초로, OBSS TXOP1의 남아 있는 시간 길이가 임계 값보다 긴 것을 확인할 수 있다. OBSS TXOP1의 길이가 충분히 길기 때문에 STA는 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 채널(도 29의 S20_1)을 통해 채널 접근 절차를 수행하고, TXOP을 획득한 후 frame exchange를 수행한다. Before the STA completes the backoff procedure on the primary channel (P20), the STA receives an RTS/CTS frame that the OBSS STA exchanges to initiate OBSS TXOP1. Based on the information included in the received frame, the STA can determine that the remaining time length of the OBSS TXOP1 is longer than a threshold value. Since the length of the OBSS TXOP1 is sufficiently long, the STA performs a channel access procedure through a channel other than the primary channel (S20_1 of FIG. 29), acquires the TXOP, and then performs a frame exchange.

OBSS TXOP1이 종료되기 전 자신의 TXOP을 종료한 STA는 다시 프라이머리 채널(도 29의 P20)을 통해 채널 접근 절차를 수행하고, 백오프 절차가 완료되기 전 OBSS TXOP2가 시작된다. STA는 자신이 확인한 OBSS TXOP2의 길이가 임계 값보다 짧음을 확인하였고, 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 채널에서 채널 접근 절차를 수행하는 대신 프라이머리 채널에서 OBSS TXOP2가 종료될 것을 기다린다. 이후, OBSS TXOP2가 종료되면 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접근 절차를 계속한다.An STA that terminates its TXOP before OBSS TXOP1 terminates performs a channel access procedure through the primary channel (P20 of FIG. 29) again, and OBSS TXOP2 starts before the backoff procedure is completed. The STA confirms that the length of the OBSS TXOP2 it has confirmed is shorter than the threshold value, and instead of performing a channel access procedure on a channel other than the primary channel, it waits for OBSS TXOP2 to terminate on the primary channel. Thereafter, when OBSS TXOP2 terminates, the channel access procedure continues on the primary channel.

상술한 바와 같이, 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 통해 획득할 수 있는 TXOP의 길이에 따라 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행하는 것이 효율적인지 혹은 효율적이지 않은 지 판단하는 것이 가능하며, STA는 판단 결과에 따라 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 수행 여부를 결정할 수 있다.As described above, it is possible to determine whether performing a non-primary channel connection is efficient or inefficient based on the length of a TXOP that can be obtained through the non-primary channel connection, and the STA can decide whether to perform the non-primary channel connection based on the determination result.

넌 프라이머리 채널 접속으로 인해 발생할 수 있는 다른 종류의 비 효율성은, AP와 non-AP STA가 확인한 프라이머리 채널 상태가 서로 다를 때 발생한다. 앞서 설명한 바와 같이, AP와 non-AP STA의 인접 STA는 서로 다를 수 있고, AP의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 신호가 특정 non-AP STA에게는 수신되지 않는 경우가 존재한다. 또한, 특정 non-AP STA의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 신호가 AP 측에서는 수신되지 않는 신호인 경우도 발생할 수 있다. Another type of inefficiency that can occur due to non-primary channel access occurs when the primary channel statuses recognized by the AP and the non-AP STA are different from each other. As explained above, the neighboring STAs of the AP and the non-AP STA may be different from each other, and there may be cases where the signal of the OBSS occupying the primary channel of the AP is not received by a specific non-AP STA. In addition, there may also be cases where the signal of the OBSS occupying the primary channel of a specific non-AP STA is not received by the AP.

이와 같이 AP와 확인한 프라이머리 채널의 상황과 non-AP STA가 확인한 프라이머리 채널의 상황이 서로 다른 경우, AP와 non-AP STA가 채널 접속을 수행하는 채널이 서로 다를 수 있다. 일 예로, AP는 프라이머리 채널이 IDLE인 것으로 판단하고 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 액세스를 완료한 후 PPDU를 전송하였지만, non-AP STA는 OBSS에 의해 프라이머리 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 판단하고 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널에서 채널 접근 절차를 수행중이거나 AP로부터의 PPDU 수신을 대기할 수 있다. 마찬가지로, non-AP STA는 프라이머리 채널이 IDLE인 것으로 판단하고 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 액세스를 완료한 후 PPDU를 전송하였지만, AP는 OBSS에 의해 프라이머리 채널이 BUSY인 것으로 판단하고 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널에서 채널 접근 절차를 수행중이거나 UL PPDU의 수신을 대기할 수 있다. 이와 같이, AP와 non-AP STA가 프라이머리 채널에 대해 서로 다른 view를 갖는 경우, 송수신 장치 간의 채널 불일치 문제로 인해 PPDU 전송이 실패하게 된다.In this way, when the status of the primary channel confirmed by the AP and the status of the primary channel confirmed by the non-AP STA are different from each other, the channels through which the AP and the non-AP STA perform channel access may be different from each other. For example, the AP determines that the primary channel is IDLE and transmits a PPDU after completing channel access on the primary channel, but the non-AP STA determines that the primary channel is BUSY due to the OBSS and may be performing a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary channel or waiting to receive a PPDU from the AP. Similarly, the non-AP STA determines that the primary channel is IDLE and transmits a PPDU after completing channel access on the primary channel, but the AP determines that the primary channel is BUSY due to the OBSS and may be performing a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary channel or waiting to receive a UL PPDU. In this way, when the AP and non-AP STA have different views of the primary channel, PPDU transmission fails due to channel mismatch issues between the transmitting and receiving devices.

이는, 프라이머리 채널을 통해서만 동작하던 종래 Wi-Fi STA들이 겪지 않던 문제가 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 절차의 도입으로 인해 새로이 발생한 것이고, 따라서 이와 같은 문제가 발생하는 상황을 줄여야만 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속으로 인해 얻을 수 있는 이득을 극대화하고 손해를 절감할 수 있다. 다만, 서로 다른 위치에서 동작하는 STA들의 채널 환경이 서로 다른 것은 무선 전송 신호의 도달 거리가 제한된다는 특성으로 인해 발생하는 자연스러운 현상이며, 따라서 특정 채널에 대한 두 STA의 판단이 서로 다를 수 있다는 현상은 해결할 수 없는 현상이다.This is because the introduction of the non-primary channel access procedure has caused a problem that was not previously experienced by Wi-Fi STAs that operated only through the primary channel, and therefore, the situations in which such problems occur must be reduced in order to maximize the benefits and reduce losses that can be obtained from non-primary channel access. However, the fact that the channel environments of STAs operating at different locations are different is a natural phenomenon that occurs due to the limited reach of wireless transmission signals, and therefore, the phenomenon in which two STAs may have different judgments about a specific channel is an unresolvable phenomenon.

단, 두 STA 간에 사전에 교환한 정보에 기초하여, 특정 STA로 하여금 다른 STA가 자신과 같은 view를 갖는 시점을 특정하도록 도움을 줄 수 있다. 간단한 예로, 특정 STA가 STA1이 전송한 신호가 자신에게 수신됨을 다른 STA에게 미리 지시하였다면, 상기 다른 STA는 자신이 STA1의 신호가 자신에게 수신되는 동안, 상기 STA1의 신호가 상기 특정 STA 측에도 수신될 것임을 예상할 수 있다. 즉, 상기 특정 STA가 제공한 정보에 기초하여, 상기 다른 STA는 특정 시점에 상기 특정 STA와 자신이 동일한 view를 갖고 있다고 확인하는 것이 가능하다.However, based on information previously exchanged between two STAs, it is possible to help a specific STA determine a point in time when another STA has the same view as itself. For a simple example, if a specific STA has instructed another STA in advance that a signal transmitted by STA1 has been received by itself, the other STA can anticipate that the signal of STA1 will also be received by the specific STA while the signal of STA1 is being received by itself. That is, based on information provided by the specific STA, the other STA can determine that it and the specific STA have the same view at a specific point in time.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, AP는 인접 BSS(Overlapping)와 관련한 정보를 non-AP STA에게 지시하고, non-AP STA는 AP로 지시된 정보에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행(채널 접근 절차 수행 및/또는 수신 대기(예를 들어 CCA 및 PD(Preamble/Packet detection)을 수행하는 등)를 위해 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널로 이동)할지 여부를 결정하는 것이 가능하다. 즉, AP는 연관된 non-AP STA들에게 인접 OBSS의 정보를 관리 프레임에 포함시켜 전송할 수 있다. 예를 들면, AP는 관리 프레임에 OBSS AP들의 리스트 정보를 관리 프레임에 포함시켜 전송할 수 있으며, non-AP STA은 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작을 수행함에 있어 수신된 프레임(또는 PPDU)에 포함된 AP와 관련된 정보에 기초하여 프레임을 전송한 AP가 관리 프레임의 리스트 정보에 포함되어 있는 경우, 앞에서 설명한 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 즉, non-AP STA은 OBSS AP로부터 PPDU가 전송된 경우, PPDU에 포함된 AP와 관련된 정보(BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소)와 관리 프레임에 포함된 리스트 정보를 비교할 수 있다. Non-AP STA은 AP와 관련된 정보가 리스트 정보에 포함되어 있는 경우, 앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, an AP may instruct a non-AP STA about information related to an adjacent BSS (Overlapping), and the non-AP STA may determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access (move to a subchannel other than the primary channel for performing a channel access procedure and/or waiting for reception (e.g., performing CCA and PD (Preamble/Packet detection)) based on the information instructed to the AP. That is, the AP may transmit information on an adjacent OBSS to associated non-AP STAs by including it in a management frame. For example, the AP may transmit a management frame including list information on OBSS APs, and when the non-AP STA performs a non-primary channel access operation, if an AP that has transmitted the frame is included in the list information of the management frame based on information related to an AP included in a received frame (or PPDU), the non-AP STA may perform the non-primary channel access procedure described above. That is, when a PPDU is transmitted from an OBSS AP, a non-AP STA can compare the AP-related information (BSS color information or MAC address) included in the PPDU with the list information included in the management frame. When the list information includes information related to the AP, a non-AP STA can perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel as described above.

구체적으로, AP는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유할 수 있는 OBSS(즉, AP의 프라이머리 채널 상태를 비지로 변경시키는 OBSS)와 관련한 정보(일종의 리스트)를 non-AP STA들에게 공지할 수 있다. 이 때, AP가 non-AP STA들에게 공지하는 OBSS와 관련한 정보는, OBSS들의 BSS 컬러 정보 및/또는 상기 OBSS를 운용하는 Neighbor AP의 MAC 주소일 수 있다. 이 때, AP가 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속과 관련하여 지시하는 Neighbor AP의 개수는, AP가 비콘 프레임의 RNR element(Reduced Neighbor Report)를 통해 지시하는 AP의 개수보다 작을 수 있다. 이는, AP가 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속과 관련하여 지시하는 Neighbor AP는 AP의 프라이머리 채널을 점유할 수 있는 BSS를 운용하는 AP로 제한되기 때문이다.Specifically, the AP can notify non-AP STAs of information (a type of list) related to OBSSs (i.e., OBSSs that change the primary channel status of the AP to busy) that can occupy its primary channel. At this time, the information related to the OBSS that the AP notifies to the non-AP STAs may be BSS color information of the OBSSs and/or MAC addresses of Neighbor APs operating the OBSS. At this time, the number of Neighbor APs that the AP indicates in relation to non-primary channel access may be smaller than the number of APs that the AP indicates through the RNR element (Reduced Neighbor Report) of the beacon frame. This is because the Neighbor APs that the AP indicates in relation to non-primary channel access are limited to APs that operate a BSS that can occupy the primary channel of the AP.

AP로부터 OBSS와 관련한 정보를 수신한 non-AP STA는, 자신의 프라이머리 채널이 BUSY로 전환되었을 때 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS가, AP가 지시한 OBSS 목록에 포함된 OBSS인지 여부를 확인함으로써 non-프라이머리 채널 동작(프라이머리 채널이 아닌 서브채널을 이용한 채널 접근 절차 수행 및/또는 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 서브채널에서의 수신 대기)으로 전환할 것인지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. A non-AP STA that has received information related to OBSS from an AP can determine whether to switch to non-primary channel operation (performing a channel access procedure using a subchannel other than the primary channel and/or waiting to receive on a subchannel other than the primary channel) by checking whether the OBSS occupying its primary channel is included in the OBSS list indicated by the AP when its primary channel is switched to BUSY.

구체적으로, non-AP STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS에 의해 점유되었을 때, OBSS의 color가 AP가 지시한 OBSS color list에 포함된 것 인 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하기로 결정할 수 있다. 즉, non-AP STA은 자신의 프라이머리 채널의 상태를 BUSY로 변경시킨 OBSS가, AP의 프라이머리 채널 상태도 BUSY로 변경시키는 OBSS라는 것을 알 수 있으며, 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환하는 시점에 AP 역시 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환할 것임이 예상되기 때문이다.Specifically, a non-AP STA may decide to perform non-primary channel operation when its primary channel is occupied by an OBSS and the color of the OBSS is included in the OBSS color list indicated by the AP. That is, the non-AP STA can know that the OBSS that changed the state of its primary channel to BUSY is the OBSS that also changed the primary channel state of the AP to BUSY, and it is expected that the AP will also switch to non-primary channel operation when the non-AP STA switches to non-primary channel operation.

즉, AP가 관리 프레임을 통해서 전송한 OBSS에 대한 사전 정보는 non-AP STA로 하여금 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS가 AP로 하여금 non-프라이머리 채널 동작을 시작하도록 하는 것인지 여부를 판단하기 위해서 사용될 수 있다. 만약, 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS가, AP가 전송한 리스트 정보에 포함되지 않는 OBSS이라면, non-AP STA는 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환하지 않아야 한다. 이 때, AP 역시도, 자신이 전송한 OBSS의 리스트 정보에 포함되지 않은 OBSS에 의해 프라이머리 채널이 점유될 경우, 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환하지 않아야 한다.That is, the prior information about the OBSS transmitted by the AP through the management frame can be used by the non-AP STA to determine whether the OBSS occupying its primary channel causes the AP to start the non-primary channel operation. If the OBSS occupying its primary channel is an OBSS not included in the list information transmitted by the AP, the non-AP STA must not switch to the non-primary channel operation. In this case, the AP also must not switch to the non-primary channel operation if the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS not included in the list information of the OBSS transmitted by the AP.

AP가 OBSS에 대한 정보를 획득/지시하고, 지시된 정보에 기초하여 각 non-AP STA의 non-프라이머리 채널 동작 수행 여부가 결정되는 과정은 아래와 같이 정리될 수 있다.The process by which an AP acquires/instructs information about an OBSS and determines whether or not to perform non-primary channel operation of each non-AP STA based on the instructed information can be summarized as follows.

1) AP는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유하면서 전송되는 PPDU가 수신되었을 때, 해당 PPDU를 전송한 OBSS의 정보를 기록한다. 이때, AP가 기록하는 OBSS의 정보는 OBSS의 BSS color 정보 또는 OBSS를 운용하는 AP의 MAC 주소일 수 있다. i) BSS color 정보의 경우, AP는 수신된 PPDU(예를 들면, HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU)의 BSS 컬러 필드(SIG 필드에 포함된(예를 들면, HE-SIG-A 또는 U-SIG 등))를 통해서 획득될 수 있다. ii)MAC 정보는 수신된 PPDU(예를 들면, HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU)에 포함된 MAC 프레임의 TA 또는 RA 필드(MAC 헤더에 포함)를 통해서 획득될 수 있다.1) When a PPDU transmitted while occupying its primary channel is received, the AP records information of the OBSS that transmitted the PPDU. At this time, the OBSS information recorded by the AP may be BSS color information of the OBSS or the MAC address of the AP operating the OBSS. i) For BSS color information, the AP can obtain it through the BSS color field (included in the SIG field (e.g., HE-SIG-A or U-SIG, etc.)) of the received PPDU (e.g., HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU). ii) MAC information can be obtained through the TA or RA field (included in the MAC header) of the MAC frame included in the received PPDU (e.g., HE PPDU, EHT PPDU, UHR PPDU).

2) AP는 자신의 프라이머리 채널의 상태를 비지로 전환시키는 OBSS의 정보인 리스트 정보를 자신이 전송하는 프레임을 통해서 공지할 수 있다. 이때, i) OBSS 정보는 OBSS 각각의 BSS 컬러 정보 및/또는 OBSS를 운용하는 AP의 MAC 주소일 수 있다. ii) AP는 자신이 전송하는 비콘 프레임 및/또는 통지 프레임(Notification frame(예를 들면, Operating Mode Notification frame)을 통해서 BSS 정보를 지시할 수 있다. 이때, Notification frame은 AP가 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속을 수행할 예정인지 여부를 지시하는 프레임일 수 있다.2) The AP can announce the list information, which is information of the OBSS that switches the state of its primary channel to busy, through the frame that it transmits. At this time, i) the OBSS information may be BSS color information of each OBSS and/or the MAC address of the AP operating the OBSS. ii) The AP can indicate BSS information through the beacon frame and/or notification frame (e.g., Operating Mode Notification frame) that it transmits. At this time, the Notification frame may be a frame that indicates whether the AP is going to perform non-primary channel access.

3) non-AP STA은 AP로부터 관리 프레임을 통해서 전송된 OBSS들의 리스트 정보(예를 들면, 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소)에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작을 수행할 수 있다. 예를 들면, i) non-AP STA은 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 BSS 컬러 또는 OBSS AP의 MAC 주소가 AP로부터 획득한 리스트 정보에 포함된 BSS 컬러 또는 MAC 주소와 일치하는 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작을 수행할 수 있다. ii) 하지만, non-AP STA은 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 BSS 컬러 또는 OBSS AP의 MAC 주소가 AP로부터 획득한 리스트 정보에 포함된 BSS 컬러 또는 MAC 주소와 일치하지 않는 경우 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작을 수행하지 않을 수 있다.3) A non-AP STA may perform a non-primary channel access operation based on list information (e.g., color information or MAC address) of OBSSs transmitted from an AP through a management frame. For example, i) a non-AP STA may perform a non-primary channel access operation if the BSS color of an OBSS that occupies its primary channel or the MAC address of an OBSS AP matches the BSS color or MAC address included in the list information acquired from the AP. ii) However, a non-AP STA may not perform the non-primary channel access operation if the BSS color of an OBSS that occupies its primary channel or the MAC address of an OBSS AP does not match the BSS color or MAC address included in the list information acquired from the AP.

4) AP는 프라이머리 채널을 비지 상태로 전환시키는 OBSS(즉, 프라이머리 채널을 점유하게 되는 OBSS)의 정보를 timeout을 적용하여 관리한다. 즉, 일정 시간(timeout) 이내에 특정 OBSS의 PPDU가 수신되지 않는 경우, AP는 특정 OBSS와 관련된 정보를 OBSS의 리스트 정보에서 삭제한다. 즉, AP가 새롭게 전송하는 OBSS의 리스트 정보에는 특정 OBSS의 정보가 포함되지 않는다. Non-AP STA은 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작을 수행할지 여부를 결정할 때 AP로부터 가장 최근에 전송된 OBSS의 리스트 정보에 기초할 수 있다.4) The AP manages the information of the OBSS that switches the primary channel to the busy state (i.e., the OBSS that occupies the primary channel) by applying a timeout. That is, if the PPDU of a specific OBSS is not received within a certain time (timeout), the AP deletes the information related to the specific OBSS from the list information of the OBSS. That is, the list information of the OBSS newly transmitted by the AP does not include the information of the specific OBSS. A non-AP STA may determine whether to perform a non-primary channel access operation based on the list information of the OBSS most recently transmitted from the AP.

상술한 바와 같이 AP가 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하도록 만드는 OBSS들의 정보를 non-AP STA들에게 공지하면, 상기 공지된 OBSS가 아닌 다른 OBSS에 의해 프라이머리 채널이 점유된 non-AP STA가 오동작(AP가 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하는 상황에서 non-AP STA만 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하는 것)하는 것이 방지될 수 있다.As described above, if information about OBSSs that cause an AP to perform non-primary channel operation is notified to non-AP STAs, non-AP STAs whose primary channel is occupied by an OBSS other than the notified OBSS can be prevented from malfunctioning (non-AP STAs performing non-primary channel operation alone in a situation where the AP performs primary channel operation).

도 30은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP로부터 전송된 OBSS와 관련된 정보에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 STA들의 동작의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 30 illustrates an example of operation of STAs in a non-primary channel based on information related to OBSS transmitted from an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 30을 참조하면, non-AP STA은 AP로부터 전송된 관리 프레임에 포함된 OBSS의 리스트 정보에 포함된 OBSS로부터 전송된 프레임에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작을 수행할 수 있다.Referring to FIG. 30, a non-AP STA can perform a non-primary channel access operation based on a frame transmitted from an OBSS included in the list information of the OBSS included in a management frame transmitted from the AP.

구체적으로, 도 30에 도시된 바와 같이 AP는 자신이 프라이머리 채널을 점유하는 OBSS의 정보(도 30의 Neighbor BSS list)를 공지한다. 이때, AP는 OBSS의 정보인 Neighbor BSS list를 관리 프레임에 포함시켜 전송할 수 있다. 공지된 BSS list의 BSS color는 x와 y이다. Specifically, as illustrated in Fig. 30, the AP announces information (Neighbor BSS list of Fig. 30) of the OBSS that it occupies the primary channel. At this time, the AP can transmit the Neighbor BSS list, which is information of the OBSS, by including it in a management frame. The BSS colors of the announced BSS list are x and y.

BSS color가 x인 OBSS의 TXOP이 시작되면, AP와 STA1, STA2가 확인한 프라이머리 채널이 모두 BUSY로 전환된다. 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 BSS color가 x인 것을 확인한 STA1과 STA2는, AP가 공지했던 BSS color에 x가 포함되어 있음을 확인하고 OBSS TBOP1 동안 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행한다. When the TXOP of the OBSS whose BSS color is x starts, the primary channels confirmed by the AP, STA1, and STA2 are all switched to BUSY. STA1 and STA2, which confirmed that the BSS color of the OBSS that occupied their primary channel is x, confirm that the BSS color announced by the AP includes x and perform non-primary channel operation during the OBSS TBOP1.

이후 BSS color가 a인 OBSS로 인해 STA2의 프라이머리 채널이 점유되었지만, STA2는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 BSS color가 AP가 공지한 BSS color에 포함되어 있지 않기 때문에 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하지 않는다. 즉, STA2는 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS TXOP2에 의해 점유되었지만, 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 BSS가 AP가 사전에 공지한 OBSS list에 포함되지 않았기 때문에 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환하지 않는다.Afterwards, although the primary channel of STA2 is occupied by an OBSS whose BSS color is a, STA2 does not perform non-primary channel operation because the BSS color of the OBSS that occupied its primary channel is not included in the BSS colors announced by the AP. In other words, STA2 does not switch to non-primary channel operation because the BSS that occupied its primary channel is not included in the OBSS list announced in advance by the AP, even though its primary channel is occupied by OBSS TXOP2.

OBSS TXOP3가 시작되면서, AP와 STA2의 프라이머리 채널이 BUSY 상태로 전환되며, STA2는 AP로부터 사전에 획득된 정보를 기초로, AP 역시 프라이머리 채널이 BUSY로 전환되었을 것을 인지할 수 있다. 따라서, STA2는 AP와의 송/수신을 수행하기 위해 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환한다. 이 때, STA1은 BSS Color가 y인 OBSS의 신호가 도달하지 않는 위치에서 동작하고 있기 때문에, 프라이머리 채널이 IDLE이라고 판단하고 프라이머리 채널 동작을 계속한다.As OBSS TXOP3 starts, the primary channels of AP and STA2 are switched to the BUSY state, and STA2 can recognize that the AP has also switched its primary channel to BUSY based on the information previously acquired from the AP. Therefore, STA2 switches to the non-primary channel operation to perform transmission/reception with the AP. At this time, since STA1 is operating in a location where the signal of the OBSS with BSS Color y does not reach, it determines that the primary channel is IDLE and continues the primary channel operation.

상술한 바와 같이, AP가 사전에 공지한 OBSS 정보를 기초로, non-AP STA는 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 전환할 것인지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 서두에 언급한 것과 같이, 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드와 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 전환하는 상술한 조건들은 프라이머리 링크와 보조 링크를 Active 상태로 전환하는 조건으로 동일하게 적용될 수 있다. 즉, 프라이머리 링크의 AP가 공지한 OBSS 정보를 기초로, non-AP STA MLD는 프라이머리 링크의 active 상태를 유지할지 보조 링크를 active 상태로 전환(프라이머리 링크는 Inactive로 전환)할지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 동일한 규칙이 서로 다른 두 가지 방법의 non프라이머리 채널 접근 방법에 공히 적용될 수 있음은 쉽게 이해되는 부분이기 때문에 Overlapping BSS를 이용한 non프라이머리 채널 접근 방법에 대한 반복적인 설명은 생략한다.As described above, based on the OBSS information previously announced by the AP, the non-AP STA can determine whether to switch to the non-primary channel operation mode. As mentioned in the introduction, the above-described conditions for switching between the primary channel operation mode and the non-primary channel operation mode can be equally applied as conditions for switching the primary link and the secondary link to the Active state. That is, based on the OBSS information announced by the AP of the primary link, the non-AP STA MLD can determine whether to maintain the primary link in the Active state or switch the secondary link to the Active state (switch the primary link to Inactive). Since it is easy to understand that the same rule can be applied to two different non-primary channel access methods, a repeated explanation of the non-primary channel access method using the Overlapping BSS is omitted.

본 발명의 다른 일 실시예에 따르면, non-AP STA는 자신과 인접한 OBSS의 정보를 AP에게 지시할 수 있다. AP는 non-AP STA들로부터 지시된 OBSS 정보를 기초로, non프라이머리 채널에서 전송하는 PPDU의 목적 장치에 각 non-AP STA를 포함시킬지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 즉, non-AP STA은 자신과 인접한 OBSS의 BSS 컬러 정보 및/또는 OBSS AP의 MAC 주소를 AP에게 전송할 수 있으며, AP는 non-AP STA들로부터 전송되는 OBSS 정보에 기초하여 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 전송할 PPDU의 목적 장치에 각 non-AP STA을 포함시킬 지 여부를 결정할 수 있다. 예를 들면, non-AP STA 1은 인접한 OBSS가 없기 때문에 none 정보를 AP에게 전송하고 non-AP STA 2는 인접한 OBSS가 존재하여 OBSS의 BSS 컬러 정보 및/또는 OBSS AP의 MAC 주소를 AP 에게 전송할 수 있다. 이 경우, non-AP STA 1은 인접한 OBSS가 존재하지 않기 때문에 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 하지만, non-AP STA 2는 인접한 OBSS가 존재하기 때문에 프라이머리 채널을 OBSS가 점유하는 경우 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 없다. 따라서, AP는 non-AP STA 2가 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있도록 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 전송하는 PPDU의 목적 장치에 non-AP STA 2를 추가할 수 있다. According to another embodiment of the present invention, a non-AP STA can indicate information about its adjacent OBSS to the AP. The AP can determine whether to include each non-AP STA in the destination device of a PPDU to be transmitted on a non-primary channel based on the OBSS information indicated from the non-AP STAs. That is, the non-AP STA can transmit BSS color information of its adjacent OBSS and/or the MAC address of the OBSS AP to the AP, and the AP can determine whether to include each non-AP STA in the destination device of a PPDU to be transmitted on a non-primary channel based on the OBSS information transmitted from the non-AP STAs. For example, since non-AP STA 1 has no adjacent OBSS, it can transmit none information to the AP, and since non-AP STA 2 has an adjacent OBSS, it can transmit BSS color information of the OBSS and/or the MAC address of the OBSS AP to the AP. In this case, non-AP STA 1 can perform a channel access procedure on the primary channel because there is no adjacent OBSS. However, non-AP STA 2 cannot perform a channel access procedure on the primary channel if the primary channel is occupied by an OBSS because there is an adjacent OBSS. Therefore, the AP can add non-AP STA 2 to the destination device of the PPDU transmitted on the non-primary channel so that non-AP STA 2 can perform a channel access procedure on the non-primary channel.

일 예로, non-AP STA1으로부터 지시된 OBSS의 정보에 BSS color x가 포함되고, non-AP STA2으로부터 지시된 OBSS의 정보에 BSS color x가 포함되지 않았다면, AP는 BSS color가 x인 OBSS의 TXOP으로 인해 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행할 때, non-AP STA1을 목적장치로 하는 PPDU를 전송하고 non-AP STA2를 목적정치로 하는 PPDU를 전송하지 않을 수 있다. 이는, BSS color가 x인 OBSS에 의해 AP의 프라이머리 채널이 점유 되었을 때, AP는 non-AP STA1의 프라이머리 채널 역시 동일한 OBSS에 의해 점유되었을 것으로 판단하고(즉 non-AP STA1이 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 전환했을 것이라 판단), non-AP STA2의 프라이머리 채널은 점유되지 않았을 것으로 판단(즉 non-AP STA2는 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 유지할 것으로 판단)할 수 있기 때문에 할 수 있는 AP의 효율적인 스케줄링 방법이다. 이 때, PPDU가 특정 non-AP STA를 목적 장치로 한다는 의미는, PPDU에 포함된 RA 필드의 MAC 주소가 상기 특정 non-AP STA의 MAC 주소를 지시하는 것이거나, PPDU에 포함된 트리거 프레임의 사용자 필드에 의해 상기 특정 non-AP STA가 지시되는 것을 의미한다.For example, if the information of the OBSS indicated from the non-AP STA1 includes BSS color x and the information of the OBSS indicated from the non-AP STA2 does not include BSS color x, when the AP performs the non-primary channel operation due to the TXOP of the OBSS whose BSS color is x, the AP may transmit a PPDU destined for the non-AP STA1 and not transmit a PPDU destined for the non-AP STA2. This is an efficient scheduling method of the AP because, when the primary channel of the AP is occupied by the OBSS whose BSS color is x, the AP may determine that the primary channel of the non-AP STA1 is also likely to be occupied by the same OBSS (i.e., the non-AP STA1 may have switched to the non-primary channel operation mode) and that the primary channel of the non-AP STA2 may not be occupied (i.e., the non-AP STA2 may maintain the primary channel operation mode). At this time, what is meant by the PPDU targeting a specific non-AP STA is that the MAC address of the RA field included in the PPDU indicates the MAC address of the specific non-AP STA, or that the specific non-AP STA is indicated by the user field of the trigger frame included in the PPDU.

이와 같이, non-AP STA들로부터 지시된 OBSS 정보를 활용하면, AP는 자신이 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 전환할 때, 함께 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 전환되었을 non-AP STA를 구분할 수 있다.In this way, by utilizing the OBSS information indicated from non-AP STAs, the AP can distinguish non-AP STAs that have also transitioned to non-primary channel operation mode when it transitions to non-primary channel operation mode.

다만, non-AP STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 busy로 전환시키는 OBSS들 모두에 대한 정보를 AP에게 지시하지 않고, AP가 공지한 OBSS list에 포함된 OBSS들 중, 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유하는 OBSS를 특정하는 방식으로 OBSS에 대한 정보를 지시하는 것이 가능하다. 보다 쉬운 이해를 위해 간단한 예를 들어 설명하자면, AP로부터 공지된 OBSS의 정보(AP의 프라이머리 채널을 점유하는 OBSS List)가 BSS 1, BSS 2, BSS 3을 포함하는 것이고, non-AP STA의 프라이머리 채널을 점유하는 OBSS가 BSS 2, BSS 4, BSS 5인 경우, non-AP STA는 자신의 OBSS 정보를 지시할 때 BSS 2에 대한 정보만을 AP에게 지시할 수 있다. 이는, BSS 4, BSS 5는 AP의 OBSS가 아닌 BSS이고, AP에게 BSS 4, BSS 5에 대한 정보(예를 들어 BSS color)를 지시한다 하더라도 AP가 해당 정보를 스케줄링 과정에 활용하는 것이 불가능 하기 때문이다. 따라서, BSS 4, BSS 5에 대한 불필요한 정보는 오버헤드 절감을 위해 생략될 수 있다.However, a non-AP STA can indicate OBSS information by specifying an OBSS that occupies its primary channel among the OBSS list announced by the AP, rather than indicating to the AP information about all OBSSs that have switched its primary channel to busy. To explain with a simple example for easier understanding, if the OBSS information announced from the AP (the OBSS list that occupies the AP's primary channel) includes BSS 1, BSS 2, and BSS 3, and the OBSSs that occupy the non-AP STA's primary channel are BSS 2, BSS 4, and BSS 5, the non-AP STA can indicate only information about BSS 2 to the AP when indicating its OBSS information. This is because BSS 4 and BSS 5 are BSSs that are not OBSSs of AP, and even if information about BSS 4 and BSS 5 (e.g. BSS color) is instructed to AP, AP cannot utilize the information in scheduling process. Therefore, unnecessary information about BSS 4 and BSS 5 can be omitted to reduce overhead.

한편, 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP은 OBSS TXOP이 시작될 때 교환된 PPDU 및 frame등에 의해 식별된 예상 종료시점보다 빨리 종료될 수 있다. 예를 들어, 특정 STA는 수신된 OBSS PPDU의 TXOP field에서 지시된 정보를 기초로, OBSS TXOP이 앞으로 5ms 동안 더 지속될 것으로 판단하고 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 개시할 수 있다. 상기 특정 STA는 OBSS TXOP의 예상 종료시점 이전에 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 완료하고 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 다시 전환하지만, OBSS TXOP이 당초 확인했던 5ms보다 짧은 시간만 유지된 후 종료(Truncation)되는 상황이 발생할 수 있다. 이 경우, 프라이머리 채널 동작으로 전환한 상기 특정 STA는, 최초 프라이머리 채널을 점유했던 OBSS의 TXOP은 이미 종료되었고 다른 OBSS의 TXOP이 진행되고 있는 상황을 마주하게 된다. 이 경우, 상기 특정 STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널이 Busy한 시간 구간동안 프라이머리 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널을 이용해 동작을 수행하는 과정에서, 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접근 기회를 상실한 결과를 얻게 된다. 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작이 프라이머리 채널 동작에 비해 복잡도가 높고 가용 BW가 좁다는 것을 고려했을 때, 상기 특정 STA는 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하는 과정에서 오히려 손실을 입게 된 결과를 얻을 수 있다.Meanwhile, the TXOP of an OBSS that has occupied the primary channel may be terminated earlier than the expected end time identified by the PPDU and frames exchanged when the OBSS TXOP starts. For example, a specific STA may determine that the OBSS TXOP will continue for another 5 ms based on information indicated in the TXOP field of the received OBSS PPDU and initiate a non-primary channel operation. The specific STA may complete the non-primary channel operation before the expected end time of the OBSS TXOP and switch back to the primary channel operation, but a situation may occur in which the OBSS TXOP is truncated after lasting for a shorter time than the initially confirmed 5 ms. In this case, the specific STA that has switched to the primary channel operation encounters a situation in which the TXOP of the OBSS that initially occupied the primary channel has already been terminated and the TXOP of another OBSS is in progress. In this case, the specific STA loses the channel access opportunity on the primary channel while performing an operation using a subchannel other than the primary channel during a busy time period of its primary channel. Considering that the non-primary channel operation is more complex and the available BW is narrower than the primary channel operation, the specific STA may suffer a loss while performing the non-primary channel operation.

이와 같은 손실은, 프라이머리 채널에 대한 종속성을 극복하기 위해 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하는 STA가 지불해야 하는 기회 비용인 것으로 일견 이해될 수 있다. Such losses can be understood at first glance as an opportunity cost that STAs must pay to perform non-primary channel operations in order to overcome their dependency on the primary channel.

하지만, 상기 특정 STA가 AP STA이고, 전송 기회를 잃어버린 시점이 TBTT(Target Beacon Transmission Time)와 인접한 시간 구간이라면, AP가 상실한 프라이머리 채널에서의 전송 기회는 적절한 시점에 Beacon frame을 전송할 기회가 상실된 것과 같은 의미를 갖으며, 따라서 AP가 운용하는 BSS의 관리에 어려움을 주는 사고 일 수 있다. 일 예로, BSS의 member STA들 중 Power save 동작을 수행하는 STA들은, AP로부터 Beacon frame이 수신될 것으로 예상되는 시점에 Awake로 전환했지만, AP가 Beacon frame을 전송하는 시점이 TBTT와 멀어진 까닭에 더욱 오랜 시간동안 Awake 상태를 유지하며 TIM frame 수신을 대기하는 에너지 낭비 문제를 겪게 된다.However, if the specific STA is an AP STA and the time point at which the transmission opportunity is lost is a time interval adjacent to the Target Beacon Transmission Time (TBTT), the transmission opportunity on the primary channel that the AP lost has the same meaning as the loss of the opportunity to transmit a Beacon frame at an appropriate time, and therefore, may be an incident that makes it difficult to manage the BSS operated by the AP. For example, among the member STAs of the BSS, STAs performing the Power Save operation transition to Awake at the time point when a Beacon frame is expected to be received from the AP, but because the time point at which the AP transmits the Beacon frame is far from the TBTT, they experience an energy waste problem of maintaining the Awake state for a longer period of time and waiting for TIM frame reception.

따라서, STA(AP 및/또는 non-AP STA)는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP 구간 내에 자신이 속한(자신이 운영중이거나 member STA인) BSS의 다음 TBTT가 예정되어 있는 경우, 상기 OBSS TXOP 구간 동안 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작을 수행하지 않는 결정을 해야 할 수 있다. 이는, OBSS의 TXOP이 종료된 후, 즉 프라이머리 채널이 IDLE로 전환된 후, 최대 한 빨리 Beacon frame을 송/수신하기 위해 도입되는 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드의 활용 제한일 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 활용할지 여부에 결정할 때 고려하는 TBTT는, DTIM Beacon frame과 대응하는 TBTT일 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 활용할지 여부를 결정할 때 고려하는 TBTT는 모든 TBTT일 수 있다.Accordingly, an STA (AP and/or non-AP STA) may need to decide not to perform a non-primary channel operation during the TXOP period of an OBSS that occupies its primary channel, if the next TBTT of the BSS to which it belongs (is operating or is a member STA) is scheduled within the TXOP period of the OBSS that occupies its primary channel. This may be a limitation on the utilization of the non-primary channel operation mode that is introduced to transmit/receive a Beacon frame as quickly as possible after the TXOP of the OBSS is terminated, i.e., after the primary channel is switched to IDLE. At this time, the TBTT considered when the STA determines whether to utilize the non-primary channel operation mode may be a TBTT corresponding to the DTIM Beacon frame. At this time, the TBTT considered when the STA determines whether to utilize the non-primary channel operation mode may be all TBTTs.

이와 유사한 제한은, OBSS의 TXOP 구간 내에 자신이 속한 BSS의 TWT(Target Wake Time) SP(Service Period)의 시작 시점이 위치하거나, R-TWT(Restricted TWT) SP가 존재할 때에도 유사하게 적용될 수 있다. 즉, STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유하는 OBSS의 TXOP 구간이 TWT 및/또는 R-TWT SP의 시작 시점을 포함하는 경우, 상기 OBSS의 TXOP 구간 동안에는 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작(프라이머리 채널이 아닌 서브채널에서 채널 액세스(예를 들어 백오프 절차)를 수행하거나 상대 STA가 전송한 PPDU의 수신을 대기(예를 들어 Preamble/Packet detection)하는 것)을 수행하면 안 된다. 이 때, R-TWT는 지정된 TID의 MSDU 전송 만이 허용된 TWT를 의미한다.Similar restrictions can be similarly applied when the start time of the TWT (Target Wake Time) SP (Service Period) of the BSS to which the STA belongs is located within the TXOP interval of the OBSS, or when a Restricted TWT (R-TWT) SP exists. That is, if the TXOP interval of the OBSS that STA occupies its primary channel includes the start time of the TWT and/or R-TWT SP, the STA must not perform non-primary channel operations (performing channel access on a subchannel other than the primary channel (e.g., backoff procedure) or waiting for reception of a PPDU transmitted by a peer STA (e.g., Preamble/Packet detection)) during the TXOP interval of the OBSS. In this case, R-TWT means a TWT that only allows MSDU transmission of a specified TID.

도 31은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 BSS의 TBTT를 고려한 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 동작 수행 여부를 결정하기 위한 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 31 illustrates an example of a method for determining whether to perform an operation on a non-primary channel considering the TBTT of a BSS according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 31은 채널 접근 절차를 수행하던 AP가 프라이머리 채널을 점유한 OBSS TXOP을 확인한 후 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 전환할지 여부를 결정하는 과정을 도시한다.Figure 31 illustrates the process by which an AP performing a channel access procedure determines whether to switch to a non-primary channel operation mode after confirming an OBSS TXOP occupying the primary channel.

도 31을 참조하면, AP는 P20 채널을 통해 백오프 절차를 수행하는 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 운용하는 중, P20 채널을 점유하는 OBSS TXOP의 시작을 인지하게 된다. 수신된 OBSS의 RTS 및/또는 CTS frame을 통해, STA는 OBSS의 TXOP이 지속될 것으로 예상되는 시간을 인지할 수 있고, OBSS의 TXOP이 자신이 속해있는(운용중인) BSS의 다음 TBTT 시점을 포함하는 것을 확인할 수 있다. STA는 자신의 프라이머리 채널을 점유하는 OBSS TXOP이 TBTT를 포함하기 때문에, OBSS TXOP으로 인해 프라이머리 채널이 점유된 시간 구간동안 넌 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드로 전환하지 않고, 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 유지한다. OBSS TXOP이 종료되면 AP는 프라이머리 채널을 통해 채널 접근 절차를 수행한 후 비콘 프레임을 전송한다. 이 때, BSS의 모든 STA들은 AP와 동일하게, OBSS TXOP이 TBTT를 포함하기 때문에 OBSS TXOP이 진행되는 시간 동안에도 프라이머리 채널 동작 모드를 유지했고, OBSS TXOP이 종료된 후 AP에 의해 전송된 비콘 프레임을 수신한다.Referring to FIG. 31, the AP, while operating in the primary channel operation mode performing a backoff procedure through the P20 channel, recognizes the start of an OBSS TXOP occupying the P20 channel. Through the received RTS and/or CTS frame of the OBSS, the STA can recognize the time that the TXOP of the OBSS is expected to last, and can confirm that the TXOP of the OBSS includes the next TBTT time point of the BSS to which it belongs (is operating). Since the OBSS TXOP occupying its primary channel includes the TBTT, the STA does not switch to the non-primary channel operation mode during the time period when the primary channel is occupied by the OBSS TXOP, but maintains the primary channel operation mode. When the OBSS TXOP ends, the AP performs a channel access procedure through the primary channel and then transmits a beacon frame. At this time, all STAs of the BSS maintain the primary channel operation mode even during the time that the OBSS TXOP is in progress because the OBSS TXOP includes the TBTT, just like the AP, and receive the beacon frame transmitted by the AP after the OBSS TXOP ends.

프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널이 OBSS에 의해 점유된 시간 구간 동안 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널 아닌 다른 서브채널(넌 프라이머리 채널)을 이용해 채널 접속을 수행하고 프레임 교환을 수행하는 일련의 절차들은 NPCA(Non-Primary Channel Access) 혹은 SCA(Secondary Channel Access)로 명명될 수 있다.A series of procedures for performing channel access and frame exchange using a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel (non-primary channel) during the time period when the primary 20 MHz subchannel is occupied by the OBSS may be named Non-Primary Channel Access (NPCA) or Secondary Channel Access (SCA).

상술한 바와 같이, NPCA를 위한 서브채널은 AP에 의해 지시되며, 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널이 포함된 P80 segment가 아닌 다른 segment에 위치한 서브채널 중 하나로 지시될 수 있다. 이 때, AP는 BSS의 Operating BW에 포함되어 있지만 BSS가 사용하지 않는 서브채널(즉, Disabled 서브채널)은 NPCA용 서브채널로 지시하지 않는다.As described above, the subchannel for NPCA is indicated by the AP, and may be indicated as one of the subchannels located in a segment other than the P80 segment containing the primary 20 MHz subchannel. In this case, the AP does not indicate a subchannel that is included in the Operating BW of the BSS but is not used by the BSS (i.e., a Disabled subchannel) as a subchannel for NPCA.

<NPCA와 관련한 프레임 교환 시퀀스 관리 방법><Method for managing frame exchange sequence related to NPCA>

동일한 BSS의 STA들이라 할지라도 BSS의 Coverage 내에서 각각 서로 다른 위치에 존재하며, 이에 따라 각 STA들은 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널에 대해 서로 다른 view(예를 들어 서로 다른 CCA 결과)를 갖을 수 있다. 상술한 도 30의 일 실시예를 통해 설명한 것과 같이, AP가 자신에게 영향을 주는 인접 BSS 및/또는 인접 BSS를 운용하는 AP에 대한 정보를 non-AP STA들에게 알림으로써 AP와 non-AP STA들이 서로 다른 동작을 수행하는 것이 일부 방지될 수 있다. 하지만, NPCA를 지원하는 AP가 운용하는 BSS라 할지라도, NPCA를 지원하지 않는 member STA가 존재할 수 있고, AP가 NPCA 동작을 위해 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 동안 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 IDLE로 확인하고 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 non-AP STA가 여전히 존재할 수 있다.Even if STAs of the same BSS exist in different locations within the coverage of the BSS, each STA may have different views (e.g., different CCA results) of the primary 20 MHz subchannel. As described through the embodiment of FIG. 30 described above, the AP may partially prevent the AP and non-AP STAs from performing different operations by notifying the non-AP STAs of information about the adjacent BSS affecting it and/or the AP operating the adjacent BSS. However, even in a BSS operated by an AP supporting NPCA, there may be member STAs that do not support NPCA, and there may still be non-AP STAs that identify the primary 20 MHz subchannel as IDLE and perform the channel access procedure on the primary 20 MHz subchannel while the AP performs a channel access procedure on a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel for the NPCA operation.

즉, AP가 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 도중, 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 통해 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 non-AP STA가 전송한 PPDU를 확인하게 되는 상황이 발생할 수 있다. 간단한 예로, AP가 Secondary 80 MHz 대역에 위치한 서브채널을 통해 채널 접속 절차를 수행하는 도중, 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 통해 채널 접속을 완료한 non-AP STA가 Secondary 80 MHz 대역을 포함한 대역에 PPDU를 전송하는 상황이 발생할 수 있다. 이 경우, AP는 Secondary 80 MHz 대역에 위치한 서브채널에서 상기 non-AP STA가 전송한 PPDU를 수신하게 되며, 수신된 PPDU가 응답 프레임의 응답을 요청하는 것인 경우 응답 프레임의 전송 여부를 결정해야 한다. That is, while the AP is performing channel access through a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel, a situation may occur in which the AP confirms a PPDU transmitted by a non-AP STA that has completed the channel access procedure through the primary 20 MHz subchannel. As a simple example, while the AP is performing a channel access procedure through a subchannel located in the secondary 80 MHz band, a situation may occur in which a non-AP STA that has completed the channel access procedure through the primary 20 MHz subchannel transmits a PPDU to a band including the secondary 80 MHz band. In this case, the AP receives the PPDU transmitted by the non-AP STA on the subchannel located in the secondary 80 MHz band, and if the received PPDU requests a response to the response frame, the AP must determine whether or not to transmit the response frame.

또한, 프라이머리 20 MHz 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 후 AP에게 PPDU를 전송한 non-AP STA는, AP로부터 응답 프레임이 응답되는지 여부에 따라 후속 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 조정해야 하며, AP가 프라이머리 20 MHz 채널이 아닌 다른 서브채널을 통해 PPDU를 수신했을 가능성이 있다는 것을 고려한 동작을 수행해야 한다.Additionally, a non-AP STA that has transmitted a PPDU to an AP after completing a channel access procedure on the primary 20 MHz channel must adjust its subsequent frame exchange sequence depending on whether a response frame is received from the AP, and must take into account the possibility that the AP may have received the PPDU over a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz channel.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널이 아닌 서브채널을 통해 응답 프레임을 요청하는 프레임을 수신한 AP는, 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 제외한 주파수 대역을 통해 응답 프레임을 전송할 수 있다. AP가 응답 프레임을 전송하는 방법은 후술하는 본 발명의 실시예들을 통해 보다 자세히 설명된다. 이 때, 상기 프레임은 PPDU로 적절히 대체되어 해석될 수 있다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, an AP that receives a frame requesting a response frame through a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz subchannel can transmit the response frame through a frequency band excluding the primary 20 MHz subchannel. The method by which the AP transmits the response frame is described in more detail through the embodiments of the present invention described below. In this case, the frame can be appropriately replaced with a PPDU and interpreted.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 AP에게 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는, AP가 전송한 응답 프레임이 점유한 주파수 대역을 기초로 자신이 전송하는 프레임의 전송 주파수 대역을 결정할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 전송 주파수 대역의 결정은, 주파수 대역의 넓이(BW) 및/또는 위치(프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 포함하는 대역 혹은 포함하지 않는 대역)에 대한 결정을 포함한다. Non-AP STA가 AP로부터 수신된 응답 프레임이 점유한 주파수 대역을 기초로 동작하는 방법은 후술하는 본 발명의 실시예들을 통해 보다 자세히 설명된다. 이 때, 상기 프레임은 PPDU로 적절히 대체되어 해석될 수 있다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, a non-AP STA that performs channel access through a primary 20 MHz subchannel and then transmits a frame to an AP can determine a transmission frequency band of the frame it transmits based on a frequency band occupied by a response frame transmitted by the AP. At this time, the determination of the transmission frequency band includes a determination of a width (BW) and/or a location (a band including or not including the primary 20 MHz subchannel) of the frequency band. A method by which a non-AP STA operates based on a frequency band occupied by a response frame received from an AP is described in more detail through embodiments of the present invention described below. At this time, the frame can be appropriately replaced with a PPDU and interpreted.

<AP의 응답 프레임 전송 규칙><AP response frame transmission rules>

NPCA를 위해 프라이머리 20 MHz 채널(이하 P20)이 아닌 다른 서브채널(Auxiliary channel(상술한 본 발명의 S20과 동일), 이하 A20으로 표기)을 통해 채널 접속을 시도하던 AP가 응답 프레임을 요청하는 프레임을 수신한 경우, AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송할지 여부를 아래와 (1) 및 (2)와 같은 과정을 통해 결정할 수 있다. 이 때, AP측에 수신된 프레임이라는 의미는 프레임의 목적 장치가 AP로 설정된 프레임을 의미한다. 이 때, A20을 통해 프레임을 수신했다는 의미는, A20을 통해서 해당 프레임이 포함된 PPDU를 검출(detection)한 것을 의미한다.When an AP attempting channel access through a subchannel other than the primary 20 MHz channel (hereinafter P20) for NPCA (Auxiliary channel (same as S20 of the present invention described above), hereinafter denoted as A20) receives a frame requesting a response frame, the AP can decide whether to transmit a response frame for the received frame through the following processes (1) and (2). At this time, the frame received on the AP side means a frame in which the destination device of the frame is set to the AP. At this time, the fact that the frame was received through A20 means that the PPDU including the corresponding frame was detected through A20.

(1) 수신된 프레임이 NPCA를 통해 전송된 프레임인 경우 AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송한다.(1) If the received frame is a frame transmitted via NPCA, the AP transmits a response frame to the received frame.

NPCA를 통해 전송된 프레임은, A20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 non-AP STA에 의해 전송된 프레임을 의미한다. NPCA를 통해 전송된 프레임은, 해당 프레임이 포함된 PPDU가 점유한 주파수 영역의 정보를 기초로 구분되는 것이 가능하다. 일 예로, 프레임이 P20을 점유하지 않는 PPDU를 통해 전송된 경우, AP는 해당 프레임이 NPCA를 통해 전송된 것으로 판단할 수 있다. 다른 예로, 프레임이 A20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 영역만을 점유한 PPDU를 통해 전송된 경우, AP는 해당 프레임이 NPCA를 통해 전송된 것으로 판단할 수 있다.A frame transmitted via NPCA refers to a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that performed channel access via A20. A frame transmitted via NPCA can be distinguished based on information about a frequency range occupied by a PPDU including the frame. For example, if a frame is transmitted via a PPDU that does not occupy P20, the AP can determine that the frame is transmitted via NPCA. As another example, if a frame is transmitted via a PPDU that occupies only a frequency range accessible via A20, the AP can determine that the frame is transmitted via NPCA.

(2) 수신된 프레임이 NPCA를 통해 전송된 프레임이 아닌 경우 AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임 전송 여부를 판단한다. (2) If the received frame is not a frame transmitted via NPCA, the AP determines whether to transmit a response frame to the received frame.

i) 수신된 프레임이 NPCA를 지원하지 않는 non-AP STA에 의해서 전송된 것인 경우, 즉 수신된 프레임의 TA 필드를 통해 확인된 non-AP STA가 NPCA를 지원하지 않는 non-AP STA인 경우, AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않는다. i) If the received frame is transmitted by a non-AP STA that does not support NPCA, i.e., if the non-AP STA identified through the TA field of the received frame is a non-AP STA that does not support NPCA, the AP does not transmit a response frame for the received frame.

ii) 수신된 프레임이 NPCA를 지원하는 non-AP STA에 의해서 전송된 것인 경우, 즉 수신된 프레임의 TA 필드를 통해 확인된 non-AP STA가 NPCA를 지원하는 non-AP STA인 경우 AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송할 수 있다. 이 때, AP는 ① 수신된 프레임이 RTS 프레임이고, ② non-HT 혹은 non-HT duplicated PPDU에 포함되어 수신되었으며, ③ bandwidth signaling TA를 갖는 경우, PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT가 Dynamic일 때 CTS 프레임을 응답한다. 이때, CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드는 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션/ID 필드를 기초로 설정되거나 혹은 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간을 기초로 설정될 수 있다. 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 전이라면, CTS 프레임은 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 기초로 설정(예를 들어 RTS 프레임의 Duration field 값 - CTS time(CTS 프레임을 전송하는데 필요한 시간) - SIFS)된다. 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 이후라면, CTS 프레임은 OBSS TXOP이 종료되기 이전의 시점 혹은 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점을 지시하는 값으로 설정된다. 이 경우 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는 AP로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드에 의해서 지시된 시점 이전에 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 종료해야 한다. C. 혹은, AP는 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점보다 늦은 시점인 경우 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않을 수 있다. 이 경우 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 이어갈 수 없다.ii) If the received frame is transmitted by a non-AP STA supporting NPCA, that is, if the non-AP STA identified through the TA field of the received frame is a non-AP STA supporting NPCA, the AP can transmit a response frame for the received frame. At this time, the AP responds with a CTS frame if ① the received frame is an RTS frame, ② it is received as included in a non-HT or non-HT duplicated PPDU, and ③ it has bandwidth signaling TA and the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the PPDU is Dynamic. At this time, the duration field of the CTS frame can be set based on the duration/ID field of the received RTS frame or based on the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP. If the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is before the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS frame is set based on the Duration field of the RTS frame (e.g., the value of the Duration field of the RTS frame - CTS time (time required to transmit the CTS frame) - SIFS). If the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is after the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS frame is set to a time before the end of the OBSS TXOP or a value indicating the end time of the OBSS TXOP. In this case, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame must end the frame exchange sequence before the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP. C. Alternatively, the AP may not transmit a response frame if the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is later than the end time of the OBSS TXOP. In this case, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame cannot continue the frame exchange sequence.

이때, CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드는 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션/ID 필드를 기초로 설정되거나 혹은 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간을 기초로 설정될 수 있다. A. 수신된 RTS 프레임의 Duration field가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 전이라면, CTS 프레임은 RTS 프레임의 Duration field를 기초로 설정(예를 들어 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드 값 - CTS time(CTS 프레임을 전송하는데 필요한 시간) - SIFS)된다. 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 이후라면, CTS 프레임은 OBSS TXOP이 종료되기 이전의 시점 혹은 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점을 지시하는 값으로 설정된다. 이 경우 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는 AP로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드에 의해서 지시된 시점 이전에 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 종료해야 한다. C. 혹은, AP는 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점보다 늦은 시점인 경우 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않을 수 있다. 이 경우 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 이어갈 수 없다.At this time, the Duration field of the CTS frame can be set based on the Duration/ID field of the received RTS frame or based on the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP. A. If the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is before the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS frame is set based on the Duration field of the RTS frame (e.g., the Duration field value of the RTS frame - CTS time (time required to transmit the CTS frame) - SIFS). If the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is after the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS frame is set to a time before the end of the OBSS TXOP or a value indicating the end time of the OBSS TXOP. In this case, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame must terminate the frame exchange sequence before the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP. C. Alternatively, the AP may not transmit a response frame if the time indicated by the Duration field of the received RTS frame is later than the end time of the OBSS TXOP. In this case, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame cannot continue the frame exchange sequence.

이 때, AP는 수신된 프레임이 RTS 프레임이고, non-HT 혹은 non-HT duplicated PPDU에 포함되어 수신되었고, bandwidth signaling TA를 갖는 경우, PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT가 Static일 때 CTS 프레임이 아닌 CTS-to-self 프레임을 응답한다. CTS-to-self 프레임은 수신된 RTS 프레임에 대한 응답으로 고려되지 않을 수도 있다. 다만 CTS-to-self 프레임은 RTS 프레임의 수신 종료 후 SIFS(Short Inter 프레임 space) 이후 전송(즉, CTS 프레임을 응답할 때와 같은 timing에 전송)된다는 특징을 갖는다. 전송된 CTS-to-self 프레임이 점유한 대역에 대해서 AP의 TXOP이 획득된다. AP가 획득한 TXOP은 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA의 TXOP이 AP에게 granted 된 개념으로 해석될 수 있다. CTS-to-self 프레임의 듀레이션 필드는 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션/ID 필드를 기초로 설정되거나 혹은 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간을 기초로 설정될 수 있다. 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 전이라면, CTS-to-self 프레임은 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 기초로 설정(예를 들어 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드 값 - CTStime(CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송하는데 필요한 시간)- SIFS)된다. 수신된 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 이후라면, CTS-to-self 프레임은 OBSS TXOP이 종료되기 이전 시점 혹은 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점을 지시하는 값으로 설정된다.At this time, if the received frame is an RTS frame, is received included in a non-HT or non-HT duplicated PPDU, and has bandwidth signaling TA, the AP responds with a CTS-to-self frame instead of a CTS frame when the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the PPDU is Static. The CTS-to-self frame may not be considered as a response to the received RTS frame. However, the CTS-to-self frame has the characteristic that it is transmitted after SIFS (Short Inter Frame space) after the end of reception of the RTS frame (i.e., transmitted at the same timing as when the CTS frame is responded to). The TXOP of the AP is acquired for the bandwidth occupied by the transmitted CTS-to-self frame. The TXOP acquired by the AP can be interpreted as the concept that the TXOP of the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame has been granted to the AP. The duration field of the CTS-to-self frame can be set based on the duration/ID field of the received RTS frame or the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP. If the time indicated by the duration field of the received RTS frame is before the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS-to-self frame is set based on the duration field of the RTS frame (e.g., the value of the duration field of the RTS frame - CTStime (time required to transmit the CTS-to-self frame) - SIFS). If the time indicated by the duration field of the received RTS frame is after the end time of the OBSS TXOP, the CTS-to-self frame is set to a time before the end of the OBSS TXOP or a value indicating the end time of the OBSS TXOP.

또는, AP는 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA가 A20에서 응답된 CTS 프레임에 대한 수신을 지원하는지 여부를 기초로 CTS 프레임의 응답 여부를 결정하는 것도 가능하다. 이를 위해, Non-AP STA는 자신이 P20을 통해 RTS 프레임을 전송한 후 A20을 통해 응답되는 CTS 프레임을 수신할 수 있는지 여부와 관련된 Capability 정보를 AP에게 지시한다. AP는 Non-AP STA가 NPCA를 지원하는지 여부와 함께, A20에서 응답되는 CTS 프레임의 처리를 지원하는지 여부를 함께 고려하여, 해당 non-AP STA에게서 수신된 RTS 프레임(P20을 통해 전송된)에 대한 CTS 프레임 응답을 수행할 지 여부를 결정한다. 즉, P20을 통해 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA가 A20에서 응답된 CTS 프레임에 대한 응답을 지원하는 경우, AP는 A20을 통해 CTS 프레임을 응답한다. 반면, P20을 통해 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA가 A20에서 응답된 CTS 프레임에 대한 응답을 지원하지 않는 다면, AP는 CTS 프레임 응답을 수행하지 않는다.Alternatively, the AP can also determine whether to respond to the CTS frame based on whether the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame supports reception of the CTS frame responded to on A20. To this end, the non-AP STA instructs the AP with Capability information related to whether it can receive the CTS frame responded to on A20 after transmitting the RTS frame on P20. The AP considers whether the non-AP STA supports NPCA and whether it supports processing of the CTS frame responded to on A20 to determine whether to perform a CTS frame response to the RTS frame received from the non-AP STA (transmitted on P20). That is, if the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame on P20 supports response to the CTS frame responded to on A20, the AP responds with a CTS frame on A20. On the other hand, if a non-AP STA that transmitted an RTS frame through P20 does not support responding to a CTS frame responded to in A20, the AP does not perform a CTS frame response.

A20을 통해 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송하기로 결정한 AP는, 응답 프레임을 전송할 주파수 영역을 결정한다. 이 때, 응답 프레임을 전송할 주파수 영역을 결정한다는 의미는, 응답 프레임을 포함한 PPDU의 대역폭 및 전송 주파수(채널)를 결정한다는 의미를 포함한다.An AP that decides to transmit a response frame for a frame received via A20 determines a frequency range in which to transmit the response frame. At this time, determining a frequency range in which to transmit the response frame means determining the bandwidth and transmission frequency (channel) of the PPDU including the response frame.

AP는 A20을 통해 수신된 프레임이 포함된 PPDU가 점유한 주파수 대역 중, OBSS TXOP이 점유하지 않는 주파수 대역을 통해 응답 프레임 (PPDU)를 전송할 수 있다. 즉, AP는 확인된 OBSS의 TXOP이 점유하고 있는 대역에서는 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않는다.The AP can transmit a response frame (PPDU) over a frequency band that is not occupied by the OBSS TXOP among the frequency bands occupied by the PPDU containing the frame received via A20. That is, the AP does not transmit a response frame over the band occupied by the TXOP of the identified OBSS.

또한, AP는 A20을 통해 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송할 때, A20을 통해 접근할 수 있도록 허용된 주파수 대역을 통해 응답 프레임 (PPDU)를 전송할 수 있다. 간단한 예로, A20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 영역이 Secondary 80 MHz인 경우 (A20이 Secondary 80 MHz에 포함된 서브채널인 경우), AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 Secondary 80 MHz 대역 내에서 응답한다. 다른 예로, A20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 영역이 Secondary 160 MHz인 경우(A20이 Secondary 160 MHz에 포함된 서브채널인 경우), AP는 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 Secondary 160 MHz 대역 내에서 응답한다. 물론, 상술한 조건을 만족하는 주파수 영역이라 할지라도 CCA 결과가 BUSY인 서브채널에는 AP의 응답 프레임 전송이 수행되지 않는다. In addition, when the AP transmits a response frame for a frame received via A20, the AP can transmit the response frame (PPDU) via a frequency band that is allowed to be accessed via A20. For a simple example, if the frequency range accessible via A20 is Secondary 80 MHz (if A20 is a subchannel included in Secondary 80 MHz), the AP responds with a response frame for the received frame within the Secondary 80 MHz band. For another example, if the frequency range accessible via A20 is Secondary 160 MHz (if A20 is a subchannel included in Secondary 160 MHz), the AP responds with a response frame for the received frame within the Secondary 160 MHz band. Of course, even if it is a frequency range that satisfies the above-described condition, the AP does not transmit a response frame in a subchannel for which the CCA result is BUSY.

이 때, A20을 통한 접근이 허용된 주파수 대역은 P20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 대역(Operating BW) 중 일부로 한정된다. A20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 대역의 특징은, P20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 대역 중 P20을 포함한 기 설정된 대역폭이 제외된 나머지 주파수 대역이 A20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 대역이라는 점이다.At this time, the frequency bands that are allowed to be accessed through A20 are limited to some of the frequency bands (Operating BW) that are accessible through P20. The characteristic of the frequency bands that are accessible through A20 is that the remaining frequency bands, excluding the preset bandwidth including P20, are frequency bands that are accessible through A20.

한편, AP 동작의 복잡도를 낮추기 위한 목적으로, AP가 A20을 통해 수신한 프레임에 대해서 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않도록 허용되는 것이 가능하다. 즉, AP는 A20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행하는 도중 프레임이 수신되었을 때, 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않는 결정을 하는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, AP가 수신된 프레임에 대한 응답 프레임을 전송하지 않기로 결정할 수 있는 조건은, 수신된 프레임이 NPCA를 통해 전송된 프레임이 아닌 것일 때, 즉 P20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 non-AP STA가 전송한 프레임일 때로 한정되는 것이 가능하다.Meanwhile, for the purpose of reducing the complexity of AP operation, it is possible to allow the AP not to transmit a response frame for a frame received via A20. That is, when a frame is received while performing channel access via A20, the AP can decide not to transmit a response frame for the received frame. At this time, the condition under which the AP can decide not to transmit a response frame for the received frame can be limited to when the received frame is not a frame transmitted via NPCA, i.e., a frame transmitted by a non-AP STA that performed channel access via P20.

<Non-AP STA의 초기 프레임 및 후속 프레임 전송 방법><Non-AP STA Initial Frame and Subsequent Frame Transmission Method>

NPCA를 지원하는 non-AP STA는 UL PPDU를 전송하기 위한 TXOP을 개시할 때, AP가 A20에서 동작하고 있을 가능성이 있다는 것을 염두에 둔 동작을 수행해야 한다. 이를 위해, non-AP STA는 자신이 P20을 통해 채널 접속을 완료한 후 초기 Control 프레임(예를 들어 RTS 프레임)을 전송할 때, 상기 초기 Control 프레임이 A20을 포함한 대역을 점유하여 전송된다면 AP의 응답 프레임(예를 들어 CTS 프레임)이 A20을 통해 응답되는지 여부를 확인해야 할 수 있다. 다만, AP가 지시한 OBSS AP list에 포함된 AP들이 모두 확인되는 non-AP STA는, 자신이 AP와 다른 동작 상태 (즉 P20 동작 혹은 A20 동작 상태)를 갖지 않을 것을 확신할 수 있으므로, 후술하는 본 발명의 일 실시예들을 통해 제공되는 non-AP STA 동작의 규칙이 적용되지 않을 수 있다. A non-AP STA supporting NPCA must perform operations considering that the AP may be operating in A20 when initiating a TXOP for transmitting a UL PPDU. To this end, the non-AP STA may need to check whether a response frame (e.g., a CTS frame) from the AP is responded to through A20 when transmitting an initial Control frame (e.g., an RTS frame) after completing channel access through P20 and the initial Control frame is transmitted by occupying a band including A20. However, a non-AP STA for which all APs included in the OBSS AP list indicated by the AP are confirmed can be certain that it does not have an operation state different from that of the AP (i.e., a P20 operation state or an A20 operation state), and therefore, the rules for non-AP STA operations provided through embodiments of the present invention described below may not be applied.

또한, non-AP STA는 자신이 P20을 통해 채널 접속을 완료한 후 non-HT duplicated PPDU를 통해 초기 Control 프레임을 전송할 때, 상기 초기 Control 프레임이 A20을 점유하여 전송된다면, 상기 초기 Control 프레임의 TA field를 bandwidth signaling TA로 설정하고, DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT(TXVECTOR parameter)를 Dynamic으로 설정해야 한다. 다만, A20을 통해 응답되는 AP의 응답 프레임을 수신할 의도가 없거나, P20을 점유하지 않는 형태의 TXOP 획득을 원치 않는 non-AP STA는 DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT를 Static으로 설정할 수 있다.In addition, when a non-AP STA transmits an initial Control frame through a non-HT duplicated PPDU after completing channel access through P20, if the initial Control frame is transmitted by occupying A20, the TA field of the initial Control frame must be set to bandwidth signaling TA and DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT (TXVECTOR parameter) must be set to Dynamic. However, a non-AP STA that does not intend to receive a response frame of an AP responding through A20 or does not want to acquire a TXOP in a form that does not occupy P20 can set DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT to Static.

만약, AP로부터 전송된 응답 프레임이 P20은 점유하지 않고 A20을 점유한 형태로 응답되었다면, non-AP STA는 AP가 A20을 통해 동작하는 중(도 30의 Non-P channel operation 상태)임을 인지할 수 있다. 이 경우, non-AP STA는 AP의 응답 프레임이 P20을 통해 수신되지 않았다 하더라도, AP가 응답 프레임을 전송한 주파수 대역을 활용하여 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 이어 나갈 수 있다. If the response frame transmitted from the AP is responded in a form that occupies A20 but not P20, the non-AP STA can recognize that the AP is operating through A20 (Non-P channel operation state of FIG. 30). In this case, even if the response frame of the AP is not received through P20, the non-AP STA can continue the frame exchange sequence by utilizing the frequency band through which the AP transmitted the response frame.

P20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 초기 Control 프레임을 전송한 Non-AP STA가, A20을 통해 응답된 AP의 응답 프레임을 기초로 자신이 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 수행할 때 활용할 수 있는 주파수 대역을 확인하는 방법은 아래의 A) 및 B)의 방법 중 적어도 하나가 활용될 수 있다. 예시를 위해, 초기 Control 프레임은 RTS 프레임, 응답 프레임은 CTS 프레임으로 고려하여 기술한다. 다만, 다른 프레임/응답 프레임에 대해서도 유사/동일한 방법이 활용될 수 있다.After performing channel access via P20, a Non-AP STA that transmits an initial Control frame can use at least one of the following methods to determine a frequency band that it can utilize when performing a frame exchange sequence based on the response frame of the AP that responded via A20: (A) and (B). For the sake of example, the initial Control frame is described as an RTS frame, and the response frame is described as a CTS frame. However, a similar/identical method may be utilized for other frames/response frames.

A) AP가 전송한 CTS 프레임에 의해 생성된 RXVECTOR parameter 및 A20의 위치 정보에 기초한 방법A) Method based on the RXVECTOR parameter generated by the CTS frame transmitted by the AP and the location information of A20

Non-AP STA는 AP가 전송한 CTS 프레임의 RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT와 A20의 위치 정보를 기초로 자신이 전송할 PPDU의 주파수 대역을 결정할 수 있다. 구체적인 방법은, A20을 포함하는 채널들 중 RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT에 의해 지시된 BW의 채널과 같거나 더 작은 BW의 채널을 PPDU의 전송 대역으로 결정하는 것이다. 예를 들어, 수신된 CTS 프레임의 RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT가 80 MHz이라면, non-AP STA는 다음 PPDU를 A20 혹은 A20을 포함하는 40 MHz Channel 혹은 A20을 포함하는 80 MHz Channel을 통해 전송할 수 있다. A20을 통해 수신된 프레임에 의해 생성되는 RXVECTOR parameter는 P20을 통해 수신되는 프레임에 의해 생성되는 RXVECTOR parameter와 별개로 생성되는 것일 수 있다. 즉, P20을 점유하지 않고 A20을 점유하는 형태로 수신된 프레임에 대해서는 종래 Wi-Fi의 RXVECTOR parameter와 상이한 RXVECTOR parameter들이 정의/활용될 수 있으며, 해당 프레임의 BW와 관련하여 생성된 새로운 RXVECTOR parameter가 전술한 본 발명의 목적을 위해 활용되는 것도 가능하다.A non-AP STA can determine the frequency band of a PPDU to be transmitted based on the RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the CTS frame transmitted by the AP and the location information of A20. A specific method is to determine a channel with a BW equal to or smaller than a channel with a BW indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT among the channels including A20 as the transmission band of the PPDU. For example, if the RXVECTOR parameter CH_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the received CTS frame is 80 MHz, the non-AP STA can transmit the next PPDU through A20 or a 40 MHz Channel including A20 or an 80 MHz Channel including A20. The RXVECTOR parameter generated by a frame received through A20 may be generated separately from the RXVECTOR parameter generated by a frame received through P20. That is, for a frame received in a form that does not occupy P20 but occupies A20, RXVECTOR parameters different from the RXVECTOR parameters of conventional Wi-Fi can be defined/utilized, and it is also possible for a new RXVECTOR parameter generated in relation to the BW of the corresponding frame to be utilized for the purpose of the present invention described above.

B) 응답 프레임이 수신될 때 확인된 CCA 결과에 기초한 방법B) Method based on the CCA result confirmed when the response frame is received

Non-AP STA는 자신이 RTS 프레임을 전송한 후, SIFS 이후에 AP의 CTS 프레임이 수신될 것으로 예측할 수 있고, 따라서 AP가 전송한 CTS 프레임이 수신될 것으로 예측되는 시간에 변경된 CCA 결과를 이용해 CTS 프레임이 점유한 주파수 대역을 추정할 수 있다. 이 경우, non-AP STA는 자신이 전송하는 다음 PPDU를 AP가 응답한 CTS 프레임이 점유한 대역 전부 혹은 일부를 활용해 전송할 수 있다. 간단한 예로, AP에게 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는, AP로부터 CTS 프레임이 수신될 것으로 예측되는 시점에 A20을 포함한 80 MHz 대역의 CCA 결과가 BUSY로 변경되었다는 사실을 기초로, AP가 A20을 포함한 80 MHz 채널을 통해 CTS 프레임을 전송했다고 추정할 수 있다. 이 경우 non-AP STA는 A20 혹은 A20을 포함한 40 MHz 채널 혹은 A20을 포함한 80 MHz 채널을 통해 자신의 다음 PPDU를 전송할 수 있다.A non-AP STA can expect that a CTS frame of the AP will be received after SIFS after transmitting its RTS frame, and thus can estimate the frequency band occupied by the CTS frame using the changed CCA result at the time when the CTS frame transmitted by the AP is expected to be received. In this case, the non-AP STA can transmit its next PPDU using all or part of the band occupied by the CTS frame to which the AP responded. As a simple example, a non-AP STA that has transmitted an RTS frame to the AP can estimate that the AP transmitted the CTS frame through the 80 MHz channel including A20 based on the fact that the CCA result of the 80 MHz band including A20 changed to BUSY at the time when the CTS frame is expected to be received from the AP. In this case, the non-AP STA can transmit its next PPDU through A20, the 40 MHz channel including A20, or the 80 MHz channel including A20.

또한, AP가 A20에서 동작하는 중이라는 것(도 30의 넌 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작)을 인지한 non-AP STA는, AP가 예정된 시점에 P20으로 전환할 수 있도록 자신의 프레임 교환 시퀀스 길이를 조정할 수 있다. 다시 말해서, non-AP STA는 자신의 TXOP이, AP의 P20을 점유한 OBSS의 TXOP보다 이른 시점에 종료되도록 자신의 TXOP 길이를 조정해야 하며, 이를 통해 AP는 OBSS의 TXOP이 종료되기 이전에 P20 동작 상태로 전환(도 30의 프라이머리 채널 접속 동작)한다.Additionally, a non-AP STA that recognizes that the AP is operating in A20 (non-primary channel access operation in FIG. 30) can adjust its frame exchange sequence length so that the AP can switch to P20 at a scheduled time. In other words, the non-AP STA must adjust its TXOP length so that its TXOP ends earlier than the TXOP of the OBSS that occupies the P20 of the AP, thereby allowing the AP to switch to the P20 operation state (primary channel access operation in FIG. 30) before the TXOP of the OBSS ends.

하지만, P20을 통해 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 non-AP STA는 AP의 P20을 점유한 OBSS의 전송을 확인할 수 없는 상태이며 따라서 OBSS의 TXOP이 언제 종료될지 확인하는 것이 불가능하다. 이를 고려하여, AP는 non-AP STA에게 전송하는 응답 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 이용해 non-AP STA가 TXOP을 운용할 수 있는 시간과 관련한 정보를 지시할 수 있고, non-AP STA는 상기 지시된 정보에 기초하여 자신의 TXOP 길이(프레임 교환 시퀀스)를 조정할 수 있다.However, a non-AP STA that has completed the channel access procedure through P20 cannot confirm the transmission of the OBSS that has occupied the AP's P20, and therefore cannot confirm when the OBSS's TXOP will end. Considering this, the AP can use the duration field of the response frame transmitted to the non-AP STA to instruct information related to the time during which the non-AP STA can operate the TXOP, and the non-AP STA can adjust its TXOP length (frame exchange sequence) based on the instructed information.

구체적으로, non-AP STA로부터 RTS 프레임을 수신한 AP는 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 non-AP STA가 TXOP을 운용할 수 있는 최대 시점을 지시하기 위해 설정한다. Non-AP STA는 AP로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점을 기초로 자신의 TXOP 길이를 조정한다. 이 때, TXOP 길이 조정 방법은 TXOP이 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시한 시점과 동일한 시점에 종료되도록 하는 것이거나, CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시한 시점보다 먼저 종료되도록 조정하는 것일 수 있다. 즉, P20을 통해 RTS 프레임을 전송한 후 A20을 통해 응답된 CTS 프레임을 수신한 non-AP STA는, 자신이 전송한 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점이 아니라, AP로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드가 지시하는 시점을 기초로 자신의 TXOP 길이를 조정해야 한다. 이 때, 상기 AP로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드는 RTS 프레임의 듀레이션 필드에 기초하여 설정되지 않고, AP가 확인한 OBSS TXOP 종료 시점을 기초로 설정된 것일 수 있다.Specifically, an AP that receives an RTS frame from a non-AP STA sets the duration field of the CTS frame to indicate the maximum time point at which the non-AP STA can operate TXOP. The non-AP STA adjusts its TXOP length based on the time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP. At this time, the TXOP length adjustment method may be such that the TXOP is terminated at the same time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame, or may be adjusted such that the TXOP is terminated earlier than the time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame. That is, a non-AP STA that transmits an RTS frame over P20 and then receives a CTS frame responded to over A20 must adjust its TXOP length based on the time point indicated by the duration field of the CTS frame responded to by the AP, not the time point indicated by the duration field of the RTS frame that it transmitted. At this time, the duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP may not be set based on the duration field of the RTS frame, but may be set based on the OBSS TXOP end time confirmed by the AP.

P20을 통해 채널 접속을 수행한 후 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는, A20을 통해 수신된 AP의 응답 프레임이 CTS 프레임인지 혹은 CTS-to-self 프레임인지 여부를 확인해야 할 수 있다. Non-AP STA는 AP가 전송한 프레임이 CTS-to-self 프레임인지 혹은 CTS 프레임인지 여부를 확인하기 위해 수신된 프레임의 RA field를 확인할 수 있다. AP로부터 수신된 응답 프레임의 RA field가 자신이 전송한 RTS 프레임의 TA field와 동일하게 설정된 것을 확인한 non-AP STA는 수신된 프레임이 CTS 프레임임을 확인할 수 있고, 수신된 응답 프레임의 RA field가 AP의 MAC address를 기초로 설정된 것을 확인한 non-AP STA는 수신된 프레임이 CTS-to-self 프레임임을 확인할 수 있다.After performing channel access through P20, a non-AP STA that transmits an RTS frame may need to check whether the response frame of the AP received through A20 is a CTS frame or a CTS-to-self frame. The non-AP STA may check the RA field of the received frame to check whether the frame transmitted by the AP is a CTS-to-self frame or a CTS frame. A non-AP STA that confirms that the RA field of the response frame received from the AP is set to be identical to the TA field of the RTS frame transmitted by the non-AP STA can confirm that the received frame is a CTS frame, and a non-AP STA that confirms that the RA field of the received response frame is set based on the MAC address of the AP can confirm that the received frame is a CTS-to-self frame.

만약 non-AP STA가 확인한 AP의 응답 프레임이 CTS-to-self 프레임이라면, non-AP STA는 CTS-to-self 프레임 수신 후 자신의 UL PPDU를 전송하는 것이 아니라, A20에서 수신될 AP의 다음 PPDU 수신을 대기해야 한다. 즉, AP가 전송한 응답 프레임이 CTS-to-self 프레임임이 확인되면, RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는 A20을 이용한 동작(도 30의 Non-P channel operation)으로 전환해야 한다. 이 때, non-AP STA는 CTS-to-self 프레임의 Duration field가 지시한 시점까지 A20을 이용한 동작 상태를 유지한 후 P20 동작 상태로 전환(도 30의 P-channel operation)하거나, AP로부터 명시적인 지시가 수신되었을 때 P20 동작 상태로 전환한다. If the response frame of the AP confirmed by the non-AP STA is a CTS-to-self frame, the non-AP STA should not transmit its own UL PPDU after receiving the CTS-to-self frame, but should wait for reception of the next PPDU of the AP to be received in A20. That is, if it is confirmed that the response frame transmitted by the AP is a CTS-to-self frame, the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame should switch to the operation using A20 (Non-P channel operation of FIG. 30). At this time, the non-AP STA maintains the operation state using A20 until the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS-to-self frame and then switches to the P20 operation state (P-channel operation of FIG. 30), or switches to the P20 operation state when an explicit instruction is received from the AP.

즉, AP는 A20 동작 상태를 유지하는 non-AP STA들이 P20 동작 상태로 전환하도록 유도하기 위해 P20 동작 상태로의 전환을 지시하는 명시적 지시를 수행할 수 있다. 이 때, AP가 상기 명시적 지시를 수행하는 방법은 CF-END 프레임을 전송하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, AP가 상기 명시적 지시를 수행하는 방법은 Duration field가 0으로 설정된 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송하는 것일 수 있다. 이 때, AP가 상기 명시적 지시를 수행하는 방법은 More Data field가 0으로 설정된 프레임을 전송하는 것일 수 있다. 이때, AP가 상기 명시적 지시를 수행하는 방법은 Preamble의 특정 subfield가 특정 값으로 설정된 UHR PPDU를 전송하는 것일 수 있다. 이 경우, 상기 명시적 지시를 A20 동작 도중 확인한 non-AP STA들은 P20 동작 모드로 전환을 시작해야 한다.That is, the AP can perform an explicit instruction to induce non-AP STAs maintaining the A20 operation state to switch to the P20 operation state. At this time, the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a CF-END frame. At this time, the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a CTS-to-self frame with the Duration field set to 0. At this time, the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a frame with the More Data field set to 0. At this time, the way for the AP to perform the explicit instruction may be to transmit a UHR PPDU with a specific subfield of the Preamble set to a specific value. In this case, the non-AP STAs that have confirmed the explicit instruction during the A20 operation must start switching to the P20 operation mode.

도 32는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP의 RTS 프레임의 수신에 따른 채널 접속 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 32 illustrates an example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 32는 AP 측에서 관찰된 medium 상태를 도시한다. AP는 P20을 통해 채널 접속 절차를 수행하던 중, OBSS의 STA들이 전송한 RTS/CTS 프레임을 확인한다. OBSS의 TXOP 개시를 확인한 AP는 Secondary 80 MHz 대역에 위치한 A20으로 이동하여 채널 접속 절차를 속행한다. 이 때, A20에서 속행되는 채널 접속 절차는, P20에서 수행하던 채널 접속 절차와 상이한 Contention window 크기, Backoff Counter를 사용해서 수행될 수 있다.Figure 32 illustrates the medium state observed on the AP side. The AP checks the RTS/CTS frame transmitted by the STAs of the OBSS while performing the channel access procedure through P20. After checking the TXOP initiation of the OBSS, the AP moves to A20 located in the secondary 80 MHz band and continues the channel access procedure. At this time, the channel access procedure performed in A20 can be performed using a different contention window size and backoff counter from the channel access procedure performed in P20.

AP는 A20에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하던 도중, 자신에게 전송된 RTS 프레임을 수신한다. AP는 수신된 RTS 프레임이, NPCA동작을 지원하지 않는 STA가 전송한 것임을 확인하고 CTS 프레임 응답을 수행하지 않는다. 이 때, AP는 RTS 프레임을 전송한 STA가 NPCA 동작을 지원하는지 여부를 확인하기 위해 해당 STA가 전송했던 Capability 정보(UHR Capabilities element를 통해 지시될 수 있음)를 이용할 수 있다. 만약 RTS 프레임이 The AP receives the RTS frame transmitted to it while performing the channel access procedure in A20. The AP confirms that the received RTS frame was transmitted by an STA that does not support the NPCA operation and does not perform a CTS frame response. At this time, the AP can use the Capability information (which can be indicated through the UHR Capabilities element) transmitted by the STA to confirm whether the STA that transmitted the RTS frame supports the NPCA operation. If the RTS frame

도 32의 실시예에서는, AP가 수신된 RTS 프레임에 의해 MediumSyncDelay timer를 0으로 설정(즉 reset)하는 결정을 한다. 다만, 도시되지 않은 다른 실시예에서는, P20에서 채널 접속을 수행한 STA가 전송한 RTS 프레임은 MediumSyncDelay timer를 reset하는데 활용되는 것이 제한될 수 있다. 즉, A20에서 MediumSyncDelay를 적용하던 STA들은, P20을 통해 전송된 RTS 프레임을 수신했을 때 자신의 MediumSyncDelay를 reset할 수 없도록 제한될 수 있다. 이 제한은 도 32를 통해 설명되는 실시예에 국한되지 않고 일반적으로 적용되는 제한인 것이 가능하다. 이 때, A20에서 MediumSyncDelay를 적용하던 STA들은, 수신된 RTS 프레임이 P20을 통해 전송된 것인지 여부와 관계없이, RTS 프레임을 MediumSyncDelay timer를 reset하는데에 활용하지 않을 수 있다. In the embodiment of FIG. 32, the AP makes a decision to set (i.e., reset) the MediumSyncDelay timer to 0 by the received RTS frame. However, in another embodiment not shown, the RTS frame transmitted by the STA that performed the channel access at P20 may be restricted from being utilized to reset the MediumSyncDelay timer. That is, the STAs that applied MediumSyncDelay at A20 may be restricted from resetting their MediumSyncDelay when they receive the RTS frame transmitted through P20. This restriction is not limited to the embodiment described through FIG. 32 and may be a generally applicable restriction. In this case, the STAs that applied MediumSyncDelay at A20 may not utilize the RTS frame to reset the MediumSyncDelay timer, regardless of whether the received RTS frame was transmitted through P20.

다시 도 32의 실시예로 돌아가서, AP는 수신된 RTS 프레임에 대한 CTS 프레임 응답을 수행하지 않고, A20에서 채널 접속 절차를 속행한다. 이후 A20에서 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 AP는 A20을 포함하는 대역에 대한 TXOP을 획득한다.Returning to the embodiment of Fig. 32, the AP does not perform a CTS frame response to the received RTS frame and continues the channel access procedure at A20. After completing the channel access procedure at A20, the AP obtains a TXOP for the band including A20.

도 33은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP의 RTS 프레임의 수신에 따른 채널 접속 방법의 또 다른 일 예를 나타낸다. 도 33의 실시예에 대한 설명은 이전 실시예를 통해 설명된 내용이 생략될 수 있다.Fig. 33 illustrates another example of a channel access method according to reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention. The description of the embodiment of Fig. 33 may omit the contents described through the previous embodiment.

AP는 A20에서 RTS 프레임을 수신한 후, RTS 프레임을 전송한 STA가 NPCA를 지원하는 STA이고, RTS 프레임에 의해 생성된 RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT가 Dynamic인 것을 확인한다. AP는 RTS 프레임에 대해 CTS 프레임 응답을 수행하기로 결정하고, A20 및 A20을 통해 액세스 할 수 있는 서브채널들(도 33에서 Secondary 80 MHz 대역의 서브채널 들)을 통해 CTS 프레임을 응답한다. 이 때, Secondary 40 MHz 대역은 OBSS TXOP이 점유하지 않았고, CCA 결과 IDLE로 확인되는 서브채널이지만 A20을 통한 접근이 허용되지 않아 CTS 프레임의 응답이 수행되지 않는다.After receiving the RTS frame from A20, the AP verifies that the STA that transmitted the RTS frame is an STA that supports NPCA and that the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT generated by the RTS frame is Dynamic. The AP decides to perform a CTS frame response to the RTS frame and responds with a CTS frame through A20 and the subchannels accessible through A20 (subchannels of the Secondary 80 MHz band in FIG. 33). At this time, the Secondary 40 MHz band is not occupied by the OBSS TXOP and is a subchannel confirmed as IDLE as a result of the CCA, but access through A20 is not permitted, so the CTS frame response is not performed.

RTS 프레임을 전송했던 non-AP STA는, AP가 A20을 통해 CTS 프레임을 응답했음을 인지하고, CTS 프레임이 응답된 서브채널을 이용해 AP와의 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 수행한다. 다만, non-AP STA는 자신이 RTS 프레임의 Duration field를 이용해 지시한 시점이 아니라, AP로부터 응답된 CTS 프레임의 Duration field가 지시하는 시점을 기초로 자신의 TXOP 길이를 조정한다. A non-AP STA that transmitted an RTS frame recognizes that the AP responded with a CTS frame through A20, and performs a frame exchange sequence with the AP using the subchannel to which the CTS frame was responded. However, the non-AP STA adjusts its TXOP length based on the time indicated by the Duration field of the CTS frame responded from the AP, not the time indicated by the Duration field of the RTS frame.

이를 통해 P20을 통해 채널 접속 절차를 수행한 non-AP STA와 A20에서 동작하던 AP의 프레임 교환 시퀀스가 수행(TXOP을 획득)된다.Through this, the frame exchange sequence between the non-AP STA that performed the channel access procedure through P20 and the AP operating in A20 is performed (TXOP is acquired).

도 34는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 AP의 RTS 프레임의 수신에 기초한 CTS-to-self 프레임의 전송 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다. 도 34의 실시예에 대한 설명은 이전 실시예를 통해 설명된 내용이 생략될 수 있다.Fig. 34 illustrates an example of a method for transmitting a CTS-to-self frame based on reception of an RTS frame of an AP according to an embodiment of the present invention. The description of the embodiment of Fig. 34 may omit the contents described through the previous embodiment.

P는 A20에서 수신된 RTS 프레임의 RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT가 Static으로 설정된 것을 확인하고, RTS 프레임 종료 SIFS 후에 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송한다. 즉, RTS 프레임에 대한 응답으로 CTS 프레임을 전송할 때와 동일한 시점에 CTS 프레임이 아닌 CTS-to-self 프레임의 전송을 개시한다.P verifies that the RXVECTOR parameter DYN_BANDWIDTH_IN_NON_HT of the RTS frame received from A20 is set to Static, and transmits a CTS-to-self frame SIFS after the end of the RTS frame. That is, it initiates transmission of a CTS-to-self frame, not a CTS frame, at the same time as transmitting a CTS frame in response to an RTS frame.

AP는 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송할 주파수 대역을 결정할 때에, A20을 통해 접근할 수 있는 주파수 대역 중, IDLE로 확인된 서브채널에 대해서만 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송하는 결정을 한다. 이 때, CTS-to-self 프레임의 Duration field는, AP의 P20을 점유한 OBSS TXOP의 종료 시점 혹은 종료 시점 이전을 지시하는 값으로 설정된다.When the AP determines the frequency band to transmit the CTS-to-self frame, it decides to transmit the CTS-to-self frame only for the subchannels identified as IDLE among the frequency bands accessible through A20. At this time, the Duration field of the CTS-to-self frame is set to a value indicating the end time or before the end time of the OBSS TXOP that occupies the AP's P20.

AP에게 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA는, AP가 A20을 통해 CTS 프레임 혹은 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송하는지 여부를 확인한다. 도 34의 예에서, AP가 A20을 통해 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송했기 때문에 non-AP STA는 AP가 이후 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 control 할 것을 인지할 수 있고, 따라서 UL PPDU를 전송하는 대신 AP가 CTS-to-self 프레임 이후에 전송하는 프레임의 수신을 대기한다.A non-AP STA that has transmitted an RTS frame to the AP checks whether the AP transmits a CTS frame or a CTS-to-self frame via A20. In the example of Fig. 34, since the AP transmitted a CTS-to-self frame via A20, the non-AP STA can recognize that the AP will control the subsequent frame exchange sequence, and therefore waits for reception of the frame that the AP transmits after the CTS-to-self frame instead of transmitting a UL PPDU.

<AP의 동작 복잡도를 낮추기 위한 A20 채널 접속 절차><A20 channel connection procedure to reduce AP operation complexity>

상술한 본 발명의 일 실시예들에서 설명된 것처럼, A20에서 RTS 프레임을 수신한 AP는 RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA가 NPCA를 지원하는 non-AP STA인지 여부를 확인함으로써 CTS 프레임을 응답할지 여부 결정하거나, RTS 프레임의 RXVECTOR를 기초로 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송하는 등의 결정을 내릴 수 있다. As described in the embodiments of the present invention described above, an AP that receives an RTS frame in A20 can determine whether to respond with a CTS frame by checking whether the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame is a non-AP STA that supports NPCA, or can make a decision such as transmitting a CTS-to-self frame based on the RXVECTOR of the RTS frame.

다만, AP는 상술한 결정 절차들을 수신된 RTS 프레임 및 자신이 전송하는 다음 프레임(CTS/CTS-to-self 프레임)의 inter 프레임 space (즉 SIFS)이내에 완료해야 하며, 따라서 AP의 동작 난이도가 다소 높아지는 결과로 이어질 수 있다.However, the AP must complete the above-described decision procedures within the inter-frame space (i.e., SIFS) between the received RTS frame and the next frame it transmits (CTS/CTS-to-self frame), which may result in somewhat increased operational difficulty for the AP.

AP의 동작 복잡도를 낮추기 위한 방법으로, A20을 통해 수신된 RTS 프레임에 대해서는 AP가 일관된 응답방식을 채택하도록 허용하는 방법이 있을 수 있다. 즉, RTS 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA가 NPCA를 지원하는지 여부, RTS 프레임의 RXVECTOR parameter와 관계없이, AP는 항상 수신된 RTS 프레임(혹은 다른 Control 프레임, 예를 들어 TXOP Sharing (Request) 프레임)에 대해서 동일한 응답 프레임(CTS-to-self 프레임)을 전송하도록 허용될 수 있다.As a way to reduce the operational complexity of the AP, there may be a way to allow the AP to adopt a consistent response behavior for RTS frames received over A20. That is, the AP may be allowed to always transmit the same response frame (CTS-to-self frame) for a received RTS frame (or other Control frames, e.g., TXOP Sharing (Request) frame), regardless of whether the non-AP STA that transmitted the RTS frame supports NPCA or the RXVECTOR parameter of the RTS frame.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, A20에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하던 AP는, 자신에게 전송된 초기 control 프레임(예를 들어 RTS 프레임 혹은 다른 initial control 프레임)에 대한 응답으로 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송할 수 있다. 따라서, A20을 통해 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 non-AP STA로부터 전송된 초기 Control 프레임은 AP의 CTS-to-self 프레임 전송을 유발하는 기능을 하며, non-AP STA의 TXOP의 획득은 이뤄지지 않거나 획득과 동시에 AP에게 양도된 것과 같이 고려될 수 있다. 즉, A20에서 채널 접속 절차를 완료한 non-AP STA는 AP에게 TXOP을 부여하기 위한 초기 Control 프레임을 전송한다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, an AP performing a channel access procedure in A20 can transmit a CTS-to-self frame in response to an initial control frame (e.g., an RTS frame or another initial control frame) transmitted to itself. Accordingly, an initial Control frame transmitted from a non-AP STA that has completed a channel access procedure through A20 has a function of inducing transmission of a CTS-to-self frame by the AP, and acquisition of a TXOP by the non-AP STA may be considered as not occurring or as being transferred to the AP at the same time as acquisition. That is, a non-AP STA that has completed a channel access procedure in A20 transmits an initial Control frame to grant a TXOP to the AP.

결과적으로, A20에서 획득되는 TXOP은 항상 AP에 의해서 관리되며, 각 TXOP은 AP가 자체적으로 획득(백오프 완료 후 채널 접속)한 것이거나, non-AP STA가 전송한 초기 Control 프레임에 의해서 획득(공유)된 것일 수 있다.As a result, TXOPs acquired from A20 are always managed by the AP, and each TXOP can be acquired by the AP itself (after completing backoff and accessing the channel) or acquired (shared) by the initial Control frame transmitted by a non-AP STA.

이와 같은 과정을 통해, AP는 초기 Control 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA의 종류, 초기 Control 프레임이 점유하는 주파수 대역 등의 조건에 제한되지 않고, 수신된 초기 Control 프레임이 점유한 주파수 영역 중 A20 및 A20을 통한 접근이 허용된 주파수 영역을 통해 CTS-to-self 프레임을 전송한 후 프레임 교환 시퀀스를 개시(TXOP을 운용)할 수 있다.Through this process, the AP can initiate a frame exchange sequence (operate TXOP) after transmitting a CTS-to-self frame through A20 and a frequency band to which access via A20 is permitted among the frequency bands occupied by the received initial Control frame, without being restricted by conditions such as the type of non-AP STA that transmitted the initial Control frame and the frequency band occupied by the initial Control frame.

<A20에서 동작하는 AP의 동작 제한><Operational restrictions of AP operating in A20>

A20에서 동작하는 AP(프라이머리 20 MHz 채널이 아닌 다른 20 MHz 서브채널)을 통해 채널 접속 및 CCA(PD, ED)를 수행)는 AP는 P20에서 동작할 때에 적용 받지 않던 제한을 적용 받을 수 있다. 상기 제한은, A20에서 동작 중 일 때 확인되는 unassociated STA의 동작과 관련된 것이다.APs operating in A20 (performing channel access and CCA (PD, ED) over 20 MHz subchannels other than the primary 20 MHz channel) may be subject to restrictions that are not applicable when operating in P20. These restrictions are related to the behavior of unassociated STAs that are identified when operating in A20.

A20에서 동작하는 AP는 A20에서 전송된 Probe Request 프레임을 수신할 수 있다. 이 경우, AP는 Probe Request 프레임이 wildcard SSID를 포함하는 것이라 할지라도 Probe Response 프레임을 응답하지 않아야 한다. 이는, Probe Request 프레임을 전송한 non-AP STA가 scanning하고자 의도한 AP는 A20에 해당하는 서브채널을 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널로 사용하는 AP이고, A20을 통해 Probe Request 프레임을 수신한 AP는 Scanning 대상이 아니기 때문이다. 또한, AP가 Probe Request 프레임을 응답한다 할지라도, Probe Request 프레임을 수신한 non-AP STA가 Association Request 프레임을 전송할 때, AP는 P20 동작으로 전환된 상태일 수 있으며, non-AP STA의 Association 시도는 실패할 가능성이 크다.An AP operating in A20 can receive a Probe Request frame transmitted from A20. In this case, the AP must not respond with a Probe Response frame even if the Probe Request frame includes a wildcard SSID. This is because the AP that the non-AP STA that transmitted the Probe Request frame intends to scan is an AP that uses the subchannel corresponding to A20 as its primary 20 MHz subchannel, and the AP that received the Probe Request frame through A20 is not a scanning target. In addition, even if the AP responds to the Probe Request frame, when the non-AP STA that received the Probe Request frame transmits an Association Request frame, the AP may be in a state of switching to P20 operation, and the Association attempt of the non-AP STA is likely to fail.

이와 유사한 이유로, A20에서 동작하는 AP에게는, A20을 통해 전송하는 Trigger 프레임을 통해 Unassociated STA를 위한 RA-RU를 할당해서는 안 된다는 제한이 적용될 수 있다. 이 때, Unassociated STA를 위한 RA-RU는 AID가 2045로 설정된 User Info field를 통해 할당되는 RA-RU를 의미한다. For similar reasons, an AP operating in A20 may be restricted from allocating RA-RUs for Unassociated STAs via Trigger frames transmitted over A20. In this case, RA-RUs for Unassociated STAs mean RA-RUs allocated via the User Info field with AID set to 2045.

이는, Trigger 프레임을 통해 Unassociated RA-RU를 할당하는 이유가, Trigger 프레임을 전송하는 AP와 Association 하고자 하는 Unassociated STA의 동작을 돕기 위한 것이고, A20을 통해 Trigger 프레임을 전송하는 AP가 Unassociated STA와의 Association 절차를 수행하는 것이 부적절하다고 고려되기 때문이다. 다시 말해서, A20을 통해 Trigger 프레임을 전송하는 AP는 unassociated STA와의 Association이 완료되기 전에 P20 동작으로 전환될 가능성이 높고, 따라서 unassociated STA를 위한 RA-RU를 할당할 이유가 없다. 이에, A20을 통해 Trigger 프레임을 전송하는 AP에게는 Unassociated STA를 위한 RA-RU를 할당해선 안 된다는 제한이 적용된다.This is because the reason for allocating Unassociated RA-RU through Trigger frame is to assist the operation of Unassociated STA that wants to associate with AP that transmits Trigger frame, and it is considered inappropriate for AP that transmits Trigger frame through A20 to perform Association procedure with Unassociated STA. In other words, AP that transmits Trigger frame through A20 is likely to switch to P20 operation before Association with unassociated STA is completed, and therefore there is no reason to allocate RA-RU for unassociated STA. Therefore, a restriction is applied to AP that transmits Trigger frame through A20 that RA-RU for Unassociated STA should not be allocated.

<OBSS PPDU 길이 및 잔여 TXOP을 고려한 NPCA 동작><NPCA operation considering OBSS PPDU length and remaining TXOP>

앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 NPCA 동작을 수행하는 STA는 자신의 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 점유하는 OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이에 기초하여 NPCA 동작을 수행하는 방법을 결정할 수 있다. 즉, STA는 OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이가 AP가 지시한 임계 값을 초과(같거나 큰, 혹은 더 큰)하는 길이일 때에 A20 서브채널을 이용한 동작으로 전환하고, OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이가 AP가 지시한 임계 값보다 짧은 경우에는 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널을 이용한 동작 상태를 유지하는 결정을 할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이는, STA가 OBSS PPDU의 L-SIG 필드로부터 확인된 PPDU 길이 정보(길이 및 레이트 필드를 기초로 계산된 값)과 OBSS PPDU의 TXOP 필드로부터 지시된 TXOP 듀레이션의 합일 수 있다. 이때, STA는 자신이 PPDU의 길이 정보를 확인하기 위해 이미 소요된 시간(예를 들어, RL-SIG(4 us), U-SIG(혹은 HE-SIG-A) (8 us) EHT/UHR-SIG(혹은 HE-SIG-B) 등)을 함께 고려하여, 자신이 A20 동작으로 전환 여부를 결정/판단하는 시점에 남아있는 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간과 NPCA를 위한 임계 값을 비교해야 한다. 즉, STA는 "[L-SIG field를 통해 지시된 OBSS PPDU의 길이(L-SIG 필드를 이용해 계산된 OBSS PPDU의 길이는 L-SIG 필드 이후부터 남아있는 OBSS PPDU 길이이며, 실제 OBSS PPDU 길이는 L-SIG 필드의 길이 필드 및 레이트 필드를 이용해 계산된 값보다 20 us 더 길다.)] + [OBSS PPDU의 TXOP 필드를 통해 지시된 TXOP 듀레이션] - [자신이 NPCA 동작을 위한 임계값을 이용한 비교를 수행하는 시점까지 이미 경과한 시간(L-SIG 필드 종료시점 이후부터)] "이 NPCA 동작을 위한 임계 값보다 클 때에 A20 동작으로의 전환을 결정할 수 있다. 이때, 상기 [자신이 NPCA동작을 위한 임계 값을 이용한 비교를 수행하는 시점까지 이미 경과한 시간(L-SIG field 종료시점 이후부터)]은, OBSS PPDU의 L-SIG 필드가 종료된 시점으로부터, STA의 MAC이 RXVECTOR parameter를 수신한 시점(즉, PHY가 PHY-RXEND.indication을 발행한 시점)까지의 시간 간격과 동일한 것일 수 있다.As described above, an STA performing an NPCA operation can determine a method of performing the NPCA operation based on the remaining TXOP length of an OBSS occupying its primary 20 MHz subchannel. That is, the STA can decide to switch to an operation using the A20 subchannel when the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS exceeds (is equal to or greater than, or is greater than) a threshold value indicated by the AP, and to maintain an operation state using the primary 20 MHz subchannel when the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is shorter than the threshold value indicated by the AP. In this case, the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS can be the sum of PPDU length information (a value calculated based on the length and rate fields) confirmed by the STA from the L-SIG field of the OBSS PPDU and the TXOP duration indicated by the TXOP field of the OBSS PPDU. At this time, the STA must compare the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP and the threshold value for NPCA at the time when it decides/judges whether to switch to A20 operation, taking into account the time already spent to check the length information of the PPDU (e.g., RL-SIG (4 us), U-SIG (or HE-SIG-A) (8 us), EHT/UHR-SIG (or HE-SIG-B), etc.). That is, the STA can decide to switch to A20 operation when "[the length of the OBSS PPDU indicated by the L-SIG field (the length of the OBSS PPDU calculated using the L-SIG field is the remaining OBSS PPDU length after the L-SIG field, and the actual OBSS PPDU length is 20 us longer than the value calculated using the length field and the rate field of the L-SIG field.)] + [TXOP duration indicated by the TXOP field of the OBSS PPDU] - [the time that has already elapsed until the point at which it performs comparison using the threshold for NPCA operation (since the end of the L-SIG field)]" is greater than the threshold for NPCA operation. At this time, the above [time that has already elapsed until the point in time when it performs comparison using the threshold value for NPCA operation (from the end of the L-SIG field)] may be the same as the time interval from the point in time when the L-SIG field of the OBSS PPDU ends to the point in time when the STA's MAC receives the RXVECTOR parameter (i.e., the point in time when the PHY issues the PHY-RXEND.indication).

즉, non-AP STA은 앞에서 설명한 바와 같이 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행하기 위해서는 최소 듀레이션 임계 값과 OBSS AP로부터 전송된 PPDU의 TXOP 필드(또는 듀레이션 필드)에 의해서 지시된 값에 PPDU의 듀레이션을 더한 값을 비교할 수 있다. 이때, PPDU의 듀레이션은 PPDU의 길이 필드 및 레이트 필드에 의해서 획득될 수 있으며, 최소 듀레이션 임계 값은 non-AP STA이 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위칭하여 채널 접속 절차를 수행하기 위한 최소한의 듀레이션을 의미할 수 있다.That is, as described above, a non-AP STA can compare a value obtained by adding the duration of the PPDU to a value indicated by the TXOP field (or duration field) of the PPDU transmitted from the OBSS AP and the minimum duration threshold value in order to perform a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel. At this time, the duration of the PPDU can be obtained by the length field and the rate field of the PPDU, and the minimum duration threshold value can mean a minimum duration for a non-AP STA to perform a channel access procedure by switching channels from a primary channel to a non-primary channel.

구체적으로, non-AP STA은 자신과 연관된 AP로부터 관리 프레임을 통해서 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속 절차의 수행이 가능한 OBSS들의 리스트 정보(예를 들면, OBSS의 BSS 컬러 정보 및/또는 OBSS AP의 MAC 주소 정보 등)을 수신할 수 있다(이 동작은 선택적으로 수행될 수 있다). Non-AP STA은 OBSS AP로부터 PPDU를 수신하면, 수신된 PPDU가 자신과 연관된 AP로부터 전송된 PPDU(intra-BSS PPDU) 또는 OBSS AP로부터 전송된 PPDU(inter-BSS PPDU)인지 여부를 판단한다. OBSS AP로부터 전송된 PPDU인 경우, 프라이머리 채널이 OBSS AP에 의해서 점유되어 비지 상태일 수 있다. 따라서, non-AP STA은 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 없기 때문에 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 채널 스위칭을 통해서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할지 여부가 판단할 수 있다. 먼저, non-AP STA이 연관된 AP로부터 OBSS의 리스트 정보를 수신한 경우, 리스트 정보와 수신된 PPDU에 포함된 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소를 비교할 수 있다. 리스트 정보에 PPDU를 전송한 AP의 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소가 포함된 경우, non-AP STA은 NPCA 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 하지만, 리스트 정보에 PPDU를 전송한 AP의 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소가 포함되지 않은 경우, non-AP STA은 NPCA 절차를 수행할 수 없다. 이 과정은 non-AP STA이 AP로부터 OBSS들의 리스트 정보를 수신한 경우 선택적으로 수행될 수 있으며, 필수적으로 수행되는 동작은 아니다. 따라서, non-AP STA은 OBSS 정보를 확인하는 동작을 수행하지 않을 수 있다. Non-AP STA은 NPCA 동작의 수행을 위해 충분한 TXOP이 남아 있는지 확인하기 위해서 PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드(또는 듀레이션 필드)의 값에 PPDU의 듀레이션을 더한 값과 최소 듀레이션 임계 값을 비교할 수 있다. PPDU의 듀레이션은 PPDU의 길이 필드 및 레이트 필드에 의해서 획득될 수 있다. TXOP 필드(또는 듀레이션 필드)의 값에 PPDU의 듀레이션을 더한 값이 최소 듀레이션 임계 값보다 더 큰 경우(또는 같거나 더 큰 경우), non-AP STA은 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위칭하고, 스위칭한 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다. 하지만, TXOP 필드(또는 듀레이션 필드)의 값에 PPDU의 듀레이션을 더한 값이 최소 듀레이션 임계 값보다 더 작거나 동일한 경우(또는 더 작은 경우), non-AP STA은 NPCA 동작을 수행하지 않을 수 있다.Specifically, a non-AP STA can receive list information of OBSSs capable of performing a channel access procedure on a non-primary channel (e.g., BSS color information of an OBSS and/or MAC address information of an OBSS AP, etc.) through a management frame from an AP associated with the non-AP STA (this operation can be performed selectively). When the non-AP STA receives a PPDU from an OBSS AP, the non-AP STA determines whether the received PPDU is a PPDU transmitted from an AP associated with the non-AP STA (intra-BSS PPDU) or a PPDU transmitted from an OBSS AP (inter-BSS PPDU). If the PPDU is transmitted from an OBSS AP, the primary channel may be occupied by the OBSS AP and may be in a busy state. Therefore, since the non-AP STA cannot perform a channel access procedure on the primary channel, the non-AP STA can determine whether to perform a channel access procedure by channel switching to a non-primary channel. First, if a non-AP STA receives list information of OBSSs from an associated AP, the non-AP STA can compare the list information with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the received PPDU. If the list information includes the BSS color information or the MAC address of the AP that transmitted the PPDU, the non-AP STA can perform the NPCA procedure. However, if the list information does not include the BSS color information or the MAC address of the AP that transmitted the PPDU, the non-AP STA cannot perform the NPCA procedure. This process can be optionally performed when the non-AP STA receives list information of OBSSs from the AP, and is not an essential operation. Therefore, the non-AP STA may not perform the operation of checking the OBSS information. The non-AP STA can compare the value of the TXOP field (or duration field) included in the PPDU plus the duration of the PPDU with the minimum duration threshold value to check whether sufficient TXOPs remain for performing the NPCA operation. The duration of the PPDU can be obtained by the length field and the rate field of the PPDU. If the value of the TXOP field (or Duration field) plus the duration of the PPDU is greater than (or equal to or greater than) the minimum duration threshold, the non-AP STA may switch channels from the primary channel to the non-primary channel and perform a channel access procedure on the switched non-primary channel. However, if the value of the TXOP field (or Duration field) plus the duration of the PPDU is less than or equal to (or less than) the minimum duration threshold, the non-AP STA may not perform the NPCA operation.

자신이 PPDU의 길이를 인지한 시점으로부터 남아있는 잔여 PPDU 길이를 Early NAV 설정에 활용해야 할 수 있다. 즉, Early NAV 설정/업데이트 값은 OBSS PPDU의 길이를 인지한 시점으로부터 남아있는 OBSS PPDU의 길이 및 OBSS PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드를 통해 지시된 OBSS PPDU이후 남아있는 OBSS TXOP 길이일 수 있다.The remaining remaining PPDU length from the time when the length of the PPDU was recognized may be utilized for Early NAV setting. That is, the Early NAV setting/update value may be the length of the remaining OBSS PPDU from the time when the length of the OBSS PPDU was recognized and the remaining OBSS TXOP length after the OBSS PPDU indicated by the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU.

이와 같이, OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이가 충분한지 여부를 기초로 NPCA 동작을 수행하는 방법은, OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이가 짧을 때, A20 동작으로 전환한 후 P20 동작으로 복귀하는 과정에서 발생할 수 있는 비효율성 문제를 방지(완화)하기 위한 목적을 갖고 있다 하겠다.In this way, the method of performing NPCA operation based on whether the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is sufficient is intended to prevent (mitigate) inefficiency problems that may occur during the process of switching to A20 operation and then returning to P20 operation when the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is short.

전술한 실시예들에서, STA가 OBSS의 잔여 TXOP 길이를 확인하는 방법이, OBSS PPDU의 Preamble에 포함된 TXOP 필드의 정보(PPDU가 HE/EHT/UHR PPDU인 경우)를 활용하는 것이거나, OBSS PPDU에 포함된 MAC 프레임의 듀레이션 필드(MAC Header에 포함)의 정보를 활용하는 것이라고 설명한 바 있다. 다만, 상술한 필드들을 통해 지시되는 정보는 해당 OBSS PPDU가 종료된 시점으로부터 남아있는 TXOP의 길이를 지시하는 것이며, 따라서 해당 필드들을 통해 지시된 정보에 기초하여 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간을 확인할 수 있는 시점은, 해당 필드를 포함한 OBSS PPDU가 종료되는 시점으로 지연된다. 예를 들어, 5 ms 길이를 갖는 OBSS TXOP이 개시되며 전송된 OBSS PPDU가 3 ms의 길이를 갖는 경우, OBSS PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드는 2 ms에 해당하는 시간을 지시한다. 이는, OBSS PPDU가 종료된 후 남아있는 잔여 OBSS TXOP이 2 ms에 해당하는 시간길이를 갖기 때문이다. 따라서, OBSS PPDU를 수신한 후 OBSS PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드를 확인한 STA는, TXOP 필드에서 확인된 정보인 2 ms가 적용되는 시점을 확인하기 위해 OBSS PPDU의 종료시점까지 대기하는 동작을 수행해야 하며, OBSS PPDU의 종료가 확인되었을 때, 자신이 유지하는 Basic NAV 값을 2 ms에 해당하는 값으로 설정한 후 A20 동작 상태로 전환을 결정할 수 있다. 이 경우, STA는 OBSS TXOP에 의해 자신의 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널이 점유된 전체 시간(상술한 예에서 5 ms) 중 일부(상술한 예에서 2 ms)에 대해서만 A20 동작을 수행할 수 있으며, 결과적으로 NPCA 동작을 통해 얻는 기대이익이 제한되는 문제를 갖게 된다. 이 때, 해당 문제는 TXOP 필드를 포함하는 OBSS PPDU 자체의 길이가 길수록 더 심각해진다. 극단적인 예로, 5 ms 길이를 갖는 OBSS TXOP이, 5 ms 길이를 갖는 OBSS PPDU와 함께 시작된다면, OBSS PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드는 0에 해당하는 값을 지시할 것이며, STA는 A20을 통한 동작 상태로 전환하지 못하고 OBSS TXOP이 종료될 때까지 P20 동작 상태를 유지하게 된다.In the above-described embodiments, it has been explained that the method for the STA to check the remaining TXOP length of the OBSS is to utilize information of the TXOP field included in the Preamble of the OBSS PPDU (if the PPDU is a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU) or to utilize information of the Duration field of the MAC frame included in the OBSS PPDU (included in the MAC Header). However, the information indicated through the above-described fields indicates the length of the remaining TXOP from the time point at which the corresponding OBSS PPDU ends, and therefore, the time point at which the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP can be checked based on the information indicated through the fields is delayed to the time point at which the OBSS PPDU including the corresponding field ends. For example, if an OBSS TXOP having a length of 5 ms is initiated and the transmitted OBSS PPDU has a length of 3 ms, the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU indicates a time corresponding to 2 ms. This is because the remaining OBSS TXOP after the OBSS PPDU is terminated has a time length corresponding to 2 ms. Therefore, an STA that receives an OBSS PPDU and checks the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU must wait until the end of the OBSS PPDU to check the time point at which the information confirmed in the TXOP field, 2 ms, is applied, and when the end of the OBSS PPDU is confirmed, the STA can decide to switch to the A20 operation state after setting the Basic NAV value it maintains to a value corresponding to 2 ms. In this case, the STA can perform the A20 operation for only a part (2 ms in the example described above) of the total time (5 ms in the example described above) during which its primary 20 MHz subchannel is occupied by the OBSS TXOP, resulting in a problem that the expected benefit obtained through the NPCA operation is limited. In this case, the problem becomes more serious as the length of the OBSS PPDU itself including the TXOP field is longer. As an extreme example, if an OBSS TXOP with a length of 5 ms starts with an OBSS PPDU with a length of 5 ms, the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU will indicate a value equal to 0, and the STA will not be able to transition to an operating state via A20 and will remain in the P20 operating state until the OBSS TXOP terminates.

전술한 바와 같이, OBSS PPDU 자체의 길이가 길 때 발생하는 NPCA 동작 비효율성 문제는, 종래 Wi-Fi MAC이 사용하던 NAV 설정 방식에서 기인한다. 종래 Wi-Fi 표준은, MAC 프레임의 Header에 듀레이션 필드를 포함시킨 후, 프레임을 전송하는 장치로 하여금 해당 프레임이 포함된 PPDU가 종료된 후 남아있는 잔여 TXOP의 길이를 지시하도록 정의하였다. (참고로, Wi-Fi에서 정의한 듀레이션 필드 설정 방식은 single protection(응답 프레임을 보호하기 위한 설정 방식)과 multiple protection(TXOP을 보호하기 위한 설정 방식)이 있지만, 본 발명에서 다루고자 하는 것은 multiple protection 방식이므로 Multiple protection 방식이 적용된 듀레이션 필드를 가정하여 설명한다.) As mentioned above, the problem of NPCA operation inefficiency that occurs when the length of the OBSS PPDU itself is long is caused by the NAV setting method used by the conventional Wi-Fi MAC. The conventional Wi-Fi standard defined that after including a duration field in the header of the MAC frame, a device transmitting the frame is to indicate the length of the remaining TXOP remaining after the PPDU including the corresponding frame ends. (For reference, the duration field setting method defined in Wi-Fi includes single protection (a setting method for protecting a response frame) and multiple protection (a setting method for protecting TXOP), but since what the present invention is intended to deal with is the multiple protection method, the explanation will assume a duration field to which the multiple protection method is applied.)

TXOP holder인 STA는 자신이 전송하는 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 통해 해당 프레임을 포함한 PPDU가 종료된 후 남아있는 자신의 잔여 TXOP 길이를 지시하며, 프레임을 수신한 STA들 중 프레임의 목적 장치가 아닌 STA들은 해당 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시된 값을 이용해 자신의 NAV를 설정한다. 이러한 방식으로 설정된 각 STA의 NAV는, TXOP holder인 STA의 TXOP이 종료될 때까지 0이 아닌 값으로 유지되며, 이를 통해 TXOP holder인 STA의 TXOP이 진행중인 동안 다른 STA들의 채널 접근이 차단(즉, 다른 STA들의 Virtual CS 결과가 BUSY로 유지)되는 효과가 발생한다. 이는, Wi-Fi MAC에서 도입한 TXOP 및 이를 보호하기 위한 MAC protection 메커니즘이다. An STA that is a TXOP holder indicates its remaining TXOP length after the PPDU including the corresponding frame is terminated through the duration field of the frame it transmits, and STAs that have received the frame, other than the destination device of the frame, set their NAVs using the values indicated through the duration field of the corresponding frame. The NAV of each STA set in this way is maintained as a non-zero value until the TXOP of the STA that is the TXOP holder is terminated, and this has the effect of blocking channel access of other STAs (i.e., the Virtual CS results of other STAs are maintained as BUSY) while the TXOP of the STA that is the TXOP holder is in progress. This is the TXOP introduced in Wi-Fi MAC and the MAC protection mechanism to protect it.

MAC protection 메커니즘의 작용 방식을 조금 더 살펴보면 MAC 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시되는 값이 해당 프레임을 포함한 PPDU가 종료된 이후의 잔여 TXOP 길이를 지시하도록 설정된 이유를 찾을 수 있는데, 자세한 내용은 다음과 같다. TXOP holder가 전송하는 프레임들은 PPDU에 포함되어 전송되며, PPDU를 수신하는 STA들은 PPDU의 수신이 완료될 때까지 해당 PPDU에 포함된 프레임을 디코딩할 수 없다. 즉, PPDU를 수신하는 STA들은 PPDU의 수신이 완료되고, 해당 PPDU에 포함된 프레임을 디코딩한 후에 비로소 자신이 PPDU에 포함된 프레임의 목적장치인지 여부를 확인하는 것이 가능하다. 디코딩 된 프레임의 목적장치가 자신이 아니라는 것을 확인한 STA는 해당 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시된 정보에 기초하여 NAV를 설정하는데, 듀레이션 필드의 정보를 획득하는 시점은 이미 PPDU의 수신이 완료(TXOP holder의 PPDU 전송이 종료)된 시점인 것이다. Wi-Fi 표준은 STA들이 NAV를 설정할 수 있는 정보(프레임의 듀레이션 필드 정보를 획득하는 시점)를 획득하게 되는 시점(해당 프레임을 포함한 PPDU의 수신이 완료된 후)이 PPDU의 전송이 완료된 후 라는 것을 고려하여, TXOP holder로 하여금 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시하는 값을 해당 프레임을 포함하는 PPDU의 종료 이후 남아 있는 잔여 TXOP 길이로 설정하도록 정의하였다. 이를 통해, 프레임을 수신한 STA들은 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시된 값을 별도의 추가 계산(자신이 수신했던 PPDU의 길이를 고려하지 않고) 없이 NAV 설정(업데이트)에 활용할 수 있게 된다. If we look a little more closely at how the MAC protection mechanism works, we can find the reason why the value indicated by the Duration field of the MAC frame is set to indicate the remaining TXOP length after the PPDU including the frame is terminated. The details are as follows. The frames transmitted by the TXOP holder are transmitted included in the PPDU, and STAs receiving the PPDU cannot decode the frames included in the PPDU until the reception of the PPDU is complete. In other words, STAs receiving the PPDU can confirm whether they are the destination of the frame included in the PPDU only after the reception of the PPDU is complete and the frame included in the PPDU is decoded. An STA that confirms that it is not the destination of the decoded frame sets the NAV based on the information indicated by the Duration field of the frame, but the time at which the information in the Duration field is acquired is when the reception of the PPDU is already complete (the PPDU transmission of the TXOP holder is terminated). The Wi-Fi standard considers that the point in time when STAs can obtain information (the point in time when they obtain the duration field information of the frame) that can set the NAV is after the transmission of the PPDU is completed (after the reception of the PPDU including the corresponding frame is completed). Therefore, it defines that the TXOP holder is to set the value indicated through the duration field of the frame to the remaining TXOP length after the end of the PPDU including the corresponding frame. Through this, STAs that have received the frame can use the value indicated through the duration field to set (update) the NAV without any additional calculation (without considering the length of the PPDU that they have received).

한편, 11ax 표준에서는, STA들이 PPDU의 수신을 완료한 후 에서야 PPDU에 포함된 프레임의 목적장치 정보를 확인할 수 있다는 문제를 해결하기 위한 PHY Preamble 강화를 도입하였다. STA들이 PPDU의 수신을 완료한 후 프레임의 목적장치 정보를 확인할 수 있는 경우, STA들은 자신이 목적장치가 아닌 프레임을 계속해서 디코딩해야 하는 등 비효율적인 동작을 수행하게 된다. 따라서, STA들이 프레임의 디코딩을 진행하기 이전에 자신이 프레임의 목적 장치가 아니라는 것을 확인할 수 있다면 PPDU의 수신 및 프레임 디코딩에 소요되는 에너지는 절약할 수 있게 된다. 이에, 11ax 표준은, HE PPDU의 PHY Preamble에 BSS Color, TXOP 필드등을 추가하고, DL PPDU의 목적장치 정보를 확인할 수 있는 User Info 필드(HE SIG 필드에 포함)가 지시되도록 구성함으로써, HE PPDU의 PHY Preamble을 확인한 STA로하여금 해당 PPDU가 자신에게 전송되는 프레임을 포함하는 것인지 여부를 판단할 수 있도록 지원하였다. HE PPDU의 PHY Preamble에 포함된 TXOP 필드는, HE PPDU에 포함된 프레임을 디코딩하지 않은 STA들이 NAV를 설정할 수 있도록 지원하기 위해 포함되었으며, STA의 MAC은 HE PPDU의 종료와 관련한 PHY-RXEND.indication(STA의 PHY가 PPDU의 종료 시점에 MAC으로 지시하는 primitive)이 수신되면, 해당 PPDU의 TXOP 필드를 통해 지시된 값에 기초하여 NAV를 설정하게 된다. 이 때, PPDU의 PHY preamble에 포함된 TXOP 필드의 정보는 STA의 PHY가 MAC으로 지시하는 RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION로 지시된다. 즉, STA의 MAC은 PHY가 지시한 RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION 정보에 기초하여, PHY로부터 PHY-RXEND.indication primitive가 수신되었을 때 NAV를 업데이트 한다. 이 때, STA가(STA의 MAC이) NAV를 업데이트 하는 시점이, PHY-RXEND.indication primitive가 STA의 PHY로부터 수신되었을 때로 정의된 이유는, OBSS가 전송한 HE PPDU가 확인되었을 때, 해당 PPDU가 완료되기 이전에 Spatial Reuse(공간 재사용) 동작을 수행할 수 있도록 지원하기 위함과, 기존에 듀레이션 필드를 통해 NAV를 업데이트 하던 방식과 유사한 방식으로 동작할 수 있도록 허용하기 위함이다. 이 경우, TXOP holder인 STA는 자신이 전송하는 프레임의 듀레이션 필드와, 해당 프레임을 포함한 HE PPDU의 TXOP 필드(PHY preamble(보다 정확히는 HE-SIG-A 필드에 포함)를 같은/유사한 시간 값을 갖도록 설정할 수 있고, 이를 통해 TXOP holder인 STA의 동작 복잡도가 낮아지는 효과가 발생한다. 또한, HE PPDU를 수신한 STA들 중, PPDU에 포함된 프레임의 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시된 정보에 기초하여 NAV를 설정하는 STA와, PHY preamble에 포함된 TXOP 필드를 통해 지시된 정보에 기초하여 NAV를 설정하는 STA의 동작이, NAV를 업데이트하는 시점(PPDU의 수신이 완료된 후) 및 업데이트 하게 되는 NAV 값 측면에서 일치하도록 관리된다는 장점이 있다. HE PPDU의 PHY preamble에 포함되기 시작한 TXOP 필드는, STA가 PPDU에 포함된 프레임을 디코딩하지 않고도 NAV를 설정할 수 있도록 지원한다는 장점을 크게 인정받았고, EHT 이후 세대의 PPDU에 포함될 U-SIG(Universal-SIG)에 고정적으로 포함되도록 정의되었다. 따라서 EHT PPDU(7 세대 표준인 EHT의 PPDU), UHR PPDU(8 세대 표준인 UHR의 PPDU) 뿐만 아니라 이후의 후속 세대 표준의 PPDU들에서도 지속적으로 TXOP 필드가 포함될 가능성이 크다.Meanwhile, the 11ax standard introduced PHY Preamble enhancement to solve the problem that STAs can check the destination device information of the frame included in the PPDU only after completing the reception of the PPDU. If STAs can check the destination device information of the frame after completing the reception of the PPDU, the STAs would have to continuously decode frames for which they are not the destination device, which would be inefficient. Therefore, if STAs can confirm that they are not the destination device of the frame before decoding the frame, the energy required for PPDU reception and frame decoding can be saved. Accordingly, the 11ax standard added the BSS Color and TXOP fields to the PHY Preamble of the HE PPDU, and configured the User Info field (included in the HE SIG field) that can check the destination device information of the DL PPDU to enable an STA that has checked the PHY Preamble of the HE PPDU to determine whether the corresponding PPDU includes a frame transmitted to it. The TXOP field included in the PHY Preamble of the HE PPDU is included to support STAs that have not decoded the frame included in the HE PPDU to set the NAV. When the STA MAC receives the PHY-RXEND.indication (a primitive that the STA's PHY indicates to the MAC at the end of the PPDU) related to the end of the HE PPDU, the STA sets the NAV based on the value indicated by the TXOP field of the corresponding PPDU. At this time, the information of the TXOP field included in the PHY preamble of the PPDU is indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION that the STA's PHY indicates to the MAC. That is, the STA's MAC updates the NAV based on the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION information indicated by the PHY when the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive is received from the PHY. At this time, the reason why the point in time when STA (STA's MAC) updates NAV is defined as when the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive is received from STA's PHY is to support performing Spatial Reuse operation before the completion of the HE PPDU transmitted by OBSS when it is confirmed, and to allow operation in a similar manner to the existing method of updating NAV through the duration field. In this case, the STA, which is the TXOP holder, can set the duration field of the frame it transmits and the TXOP field of the HE PPDU including the frame (more precisely, included in the PHY preamble (HE-SIG-A field)) to have the same/similar time values, which has the effect of reducing the operational complexity of the STA, which is the TXOP holder. In addition, among the STAs that have received the HE PPDU, the operations of the STA that sets the NAV based on the information indicated through the duration field of the frame included in the PPDU and the STA that sets the NAV based on the information indicated through the TXOP field included in the PHY preamble are managed to be consistent in terms of the timing of updating the NAV (after the reception of the PPDU is completed) and the NAV value to be updated. The TXOP field, which began to be included in the PHY preamble of the HE PPDU, has been greatly recognized for its advantage of supporting the STA to set the NAV without decoding the frame included in the PPDU, and is included in the PPDU of the generation after EHT. It is defined to be fixedly included in U-SIG (Universal-SIG). Therefore, it is highly likely that the TXOP field will be continuously included in PPDUs of not only EHT PPDU (PPDU of EHT, the 7th generation standard) and UHR PPDU (PPDU of UHR, the 8th generation standard), but also in PPDUs of subsequent generation standards.

전술한 Wi-Fi의 MAC protection 메커니즘을 염두에 두고 앞서 언급한 OBSS PPDU의 길이가 길 때 발생하는 NPCA 동작 비효율성 문제를 간략히 다시 정리하면 다음과 같다. OBSS PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드(PHY Preamble) 및 듀레이션 필드(PPDU에 포함된 MAC 프레임의)를 통해 지시되는 값은 OBSS PPDU가 종료된 시점으로부터 남아 있는 잔여 TXOP의 길이 정보이며, OBSS PPDU 자체의 길이가 길 때 해당 PPDU의 TXOP 필드 및 듀레이션 필드를 통해 지시되는 시간은 OBSS TXOP의 실제 유지 시간과 상이할 수 있다. NPCA 동작을 수행하는 STA들은, OBSS TXOP이 종료되는 시점(즉 OBSS에 의해 설정된 NAV가 만료되는 시점) 이전까지만 A20에서 동작을 수행한 후 P20 동작으로 복귀하기 때문에, NAV를 설정한 후, 즉 OBSS PPDU의 수신을 완료(PPDU에 포함된 프레임을 decoding하거나 PHY-RXEND.indication primitive를 PHY로부터 수신한 후)하고 NAV를 설정한 후 A20 동작으로 전환할 수 있다. 이 때, OBSS PPDU가 긴 길이를 갖는다면, NPCA 동작을 수행하는 STA가 NAV를 설정하는 시점이 늦어지고, 결과적으로 OBSS TXOP의 길이에 비해 A20 동작을 수행할 수 있는 시간이 짧아지게 된다.With the aforementioned Wi-Fi MAC protection mechanism in mind, the NPCA operation inefficiency problem that occurs when the length of the aforementioned OBSS PPDU is long can be briefly summarized as follows. The values indicated through the TXOP field (PHY Preamble) and Duration field (of the MAC frame included in the PPDU) included in the OBSS PPDU are information on the length of the remaining TXOP remaining from the point in time when the OBSS PPDU ends, and when the length of the OBSS PPDU itself is long, the time indicated through the TXOP field and Duration field of the corresponding PPDU may differ from the actual duration of the OBSS TXOP. Since STAs performing the NPCA operation perform the operation in A20 only until the time when the OBSS TXOP ends (i.e., the time when the NAV set by the OBSS expires) and then return to the P20 operation, they can switch to the A20 operation after setting the NAV, that is, after completing the reception of the OBSS PPDU (after decoding the frame included in the PPDU or receiving the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive from the PHY) and setting the NAV. At this time, if the OBSS PPDU has a long length, the time when the STA performing the NPCA operation sets the NAV is delayed, and as a result, the time available for performing the A20 operation becomes shorter compared to the length of the OBSS TXOP.

따라서, NPCA 동작의 기대 이익을 높이기 위해서는, NPCA 동작을 수행하는 STA가, 자신이 확인한 OBSS PPDU의 길이와 관계없이 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 길이에 대한 정보를 최대한 빨리 획득할 수 있도록 지원하는 것이 중요하다. 이 때, STA가 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 길이에 대한 정보를 획득하는 것은, OBSS의 TXOP에 대응하는 NAV를 설정하는 것을 의미한다.Therefore, in order to increase the expected benefit of the NPCA operation, it is important to support the STA performing the NPCA operation to obtain information about the remaining length of the OBSS TXOP as quickly as possible, regardless of the length of the OBSS PPDU it has confirmed. In this case, the STA obtaining information about the remaining length of the OBSS TXOP means setting the NAV corresponding to the TXOP of the OBSS.

도 35는 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 OBSS PPDU의 수신에 기초하여 STA이 획득하는 정보 및 NAV 설정 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 35 illustrates an example of information acquired by a STA and a method for setting NAV based on reception of an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 35는 길이가 긴 OBSS PPDU와 함께 개시된 OBSS TXOP이 STA의 PHY에 수신되었을 때, STA의 MAC이 획득하게 되는 정보 및 NAV를 설정하는 방법을 도시한다.FIG. 35 illustrates information that the MAC of a STA acquires and how to set the NAV when an OBSS TXOP initiated with a long OBSS PPDU is received at the PHY of the STA.

도 35를 참조하면, STA의 PHY는 Long OBSS PPDU를 검출한 후, PPDU의 Preamble에서 획득된 정보를 기초로 PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive를 발행한다. 해당 primitive는 RXVECTOR를 포함하는 구성을 갖으며, RXVECTOR parameter 중 TXOP_DURATION은 HE-SIG-A 혹은 U-SIG에 포함된 TXOP 필드의 값에 기초하여 설정된 값을 지시한다. STA의 MAC은 RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION를 PHY로부터 수신한 후, PPDU의 예상 종료 시점까지 대기한 후 basic NAV를 설정한다. 도 35의 예에서, OBSS TXOP의 총 길이는 NPCA Threshold보다 길지만, Long OBSS PPDU가 종료된 후의 잔여시간(y us)은 NPCA Threshold보다 작은 값이다. STA MAC은 RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION을 통해 확인한 잔여시간(잔여 TXOP)이 NPCA Threshold보다 작기(시간 적으로 짧기) 때문에 A20 동작으로 전환하지 않는 결정하게 된다. 결과적으로, NPCA Threshold보다 긴 OBSS TXOP이 진행됨에도 불구하고, STA가 NPCA 동작을 수행함으로써 얻는 기대이득이 상실된다.Referring to FIG. 35, the PHY of the STA detects a Long OBSS PPDU and then issues a PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive based on information acquired from the Preamble of the PPDU. The primitive has a configuration including an RXVECTOR, and among the RXVECTOR parameters, TXOP_DURATION indicates a value set based on the value of the TXOP field included in HE-SIG-A or U-SIG. After the MAC of the STA receives the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION from the PHY, it waits until the expected end time of the PPDU and then sets the basic NAV. In the example of FIG. 35, the total length of the OBSS TXOP is longer than the NPCA Threshold, but the remaining time (y us) after the Long OBSS PPDU ends is a value smaller than the NPCA Threshold. The STA MAC decides not to switch to the A20 operation because the remaining time (remaining TXOP) checked through the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION is less than the NPCA Threshold (short in time). As a result, the expected gain obtained by the STA by performing the NPCA operation is lost even though the OBSS TXOP is longer than the NPCA Threshold.

<NPCA 동작을 위한 Early NAV 설정 방법><How to set Early NAV for NPCA operation>

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, OBSS PPDU를 수신하는 STA는, OBSS PPDU가 종료되기 이전에 NAV를 설정하는 것이 가능하다. 이 경우, STA가 OBSS PPDU를 수신한다는 의미는, OBSS PPDU에 포함된 프레임을 디코딩하는 것을 의미하는 것이 아니라, OBSS PPDU의 PHY preamble로부터 정보를 획득하는 것을 의미할 수 있다. 6 세대 표준인 11ax 이후 세대의 STA들은, 수신된 PPDU에 포함된 BSS color 정보에 기초하여(RXVECTOR Parameter BSS_COLOR), OBSS PPDU로 분류되는 PPDU가 수신되면 PHY-RXSTART.indication에 이어 PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)가 바로 발행되며 해당 PPDU에 대한 processing이 중단된다. 즉, STA가 OBSS PPDU를 수신한다는 의미는 상술한 일련의 절차를 수행하는 것을 의미한다. According to one embodiment of the present invention, an STA receiving an OBSS PPDU can set a NAV before the OBSS PPDU ends. In this case, the meaning of the STA receiving the OBSS PPDU does not mean decoding a frame included in the OBSS PPDU, but may mean acquiring information from the PHY preamble of the OBSS PPDU. In the case of STAs of the generation after 11ax, which is the 6th generation standard, when a PPDU classified as an OBSS PPDU is received based on BSS color information included in the received PPDU (RXVECTOR Parameter BSS_COLOR), PHY-RXEND.indication (Filtered) is immediately issued following PHY-RXSTART.indication and processing for the corresponding PPDU is stopped. That is, the meaning of the STA receiving the OBSS PPDU means performing the series of procedures described above.

OBSS PPDU가 수신되었을 때, HE/EHT STA가 Basic NAV를 업데이트 하는 방법을 간략히 설명하면 다음과 같다. OBSS PPDU로 구분된 PPDU(즉, PPDU의 RXVECTOR Parameter BSS_COLOR가 STA가 포함된 BSS의 COLOR와 다른 경우)가 STA 측에 수신되면, STA의 PHY는 RXVECTOR를 포함한 PHY-RXSTART.indication을 발행한 후, PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)을 연속적으로 발행한다. 이 경우, STA의 MAC은 PHY로부터 PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)가 수신되었음을 확인하고, 해당 PPDU의 예상 종료시점(expected end)에 Basic NAV를 설정(업데이트)한다. 이 때, STA는 해당 PPDU의 RXVECTOR Parameter TXOP_DURATION을 통해 지시된 시간 길이를 이용하여, Basic NAV를 업데이트한다.Here is a brief description of how HE/EHT STA updates Basic NAV when OBSS PPDU is received. When a PPDU classified as OBSS PPDU (i.e., when RXVECTOR Parameter BSS_COLOR of the PPDU is different from the COLOR of the BSS that the STA is included in) is received at the STA side, the PHY of the STA issues PHY-RXSTART.indication including RXVECTOR and then sequentially issues PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered). In this case, the MAC of the STA confirms that PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) has been received from the PHY, and sets (updates) Basic NAV at the expected end of the corresponding PPDU. At this time, the STA updates Basic NAV using the time length indicated by the RXVECTOR Parameter TXOP_DURATION of the corresponding PPDU.

이처럼, STA는 OBSS PPDU가 수신되면, OBSS PPDU를 끝까지 프로세싱(프레임을 디코딩하는 등)하지는 않지만, OBSS PPDU가 종료되는 예상시점까지 대기한 후, 예상 종료시점에 비로소 Basic NAV를 업데이트하는 방식으로 MAC protection을 수행한다. 다만, 상술한 바와 같이, NPCA 동작을 수행하는 STA는 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 길이를 최대한 빠른 시점에 평가한 후 A20 동작으로의 전환 여부를 결정해야 할 필요성이 있기에, 전술한 종래 OBSS PPDU에 의한 Basic NAV 업데이트 방법을 그대로 사용하는 것은 부적절하다. In this way, when an OBSS PPDU is received, the STA does not process the OBSS PPDU to the end (such as decoding the frame), but waits until the expected time when the OBSS PPDU ends and then performs MAC protection by updating the Basic NAV only at the expected end time. However, as described above, since the STA performing the NPCA operation needs to evaluate the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP as soon as possible and then decide whether to switch to the A20 operation, it is inappropriate to use the conventional Basic NAV update method by OBSS PPDU as it is.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, OBSS PPDU를 수신한 STA의 MAC은(즉, STA는), OBSS PPDU에 대한 PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)가 PHY로부터 수신될 때(수신된 시점에) Basic NAV를 업데이트할 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 업데이트하는 Basic NAV의 값은 (PPDU의 예상 종료시점까지의 남은 시간(remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU) + TXOP_DURATION (PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter)에 의해 지시된 duration)일 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 'PPDU의 예상 종료시점까지의 남은 시간'은 PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)가 PHY로부터 수신된 시점부터, PPDU의 예상 종료 시점까지의 시간 구간을 의미한다. According to one embodiment of the present invention, the MAC of an STA that has received an OBSS PPDU (i.e., the STA) can update Basic NAV when PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) for the OBSS PPDU is received from the PHY (at the time of reception). At this time, the value of the Basic NAV that the STA updates can be (remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU + duration indicated by TXOP_DURATION (RXVECTOR parameter of PPDU)). At this time, the 'remaining time until the expected end of PPDU' means a time interval from the time when PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) is received from the PHY to the expected end of the PPDU.

본 발명의 일 실시예에 따르면, STA가 OBSS PPDU의 예상 종료시점 이전에 basic NAV를 업데이트/설정하는 것이 가능하며, 이는 종래 Wi-Fi STA가 OBSS PPDU가 종료되는 시점(혹은 종료될 것으로 예상되는 시점)에 NAV를 업데이트/설정하는 것에 비해 basic NAV의 업데이트/설정이 빠른 시점에 이뤄진다는 것을 의미한다. 간략한 표현을 위해, 본 명세서에서는, 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라 보다 빠른 시점에 설정된 Basic NAV를 Early NAV로 부르기로 한다.According to one embodiment of the present invention, it is possible for an STA to update/set a basic NAV before the expected end time of an OBSS PPDU, which means that the basic NAV is updated/set at an earlier time compared to a conventional Wi-Fi STA that updates/sets the NAV at the time when an OBSS PPDU ends (or is expected to end). For simplicity, in this specification, a Basic NAV set at an earlier time according to one embodiment of the present invention will be referred to as an Early NAV.

OBSS PPDU를 수신한 후, OBSS PPDU가 종료되기 이전에 Basic NAV(Early NAV)를 업데이트하는 STA의 동작을 간략히 정리하면 아래와 같다. STA는 아래 나열된 조건이 모두 만족될 때에 자신의 Early NAV를 "PPDU의 예상 종료시점까지의 남은 시간(remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU) + TXOP_DURATION (PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter)에 의해 지시된 duration"으로 업데이트 한다.The operation of an STA that updates its Basic NAV (Early NAV) after receiving an OBSS PPDU and before the end of the OBSS PPDU is briefly summarized as follows. The STA updates its Early NAV to "remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU + duration indicated by TXOP_DURATION (RXVECTOR parameter of PPDU)" when all of the conditions listed below are satisfied.

- OBSS PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION이 UNSPECIFIED가 아님- RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION of OBSS PPDU is not UNSPECIFIED

- OBSS PPDU에 포함된 프레임(듀레이션 필드를 포함하는 프레임)을 수신하지 않음- Not receiving frames included in OBSS PPDU (frames containing duration field)

- "PPDU의 예상 종료시점까지의 남은 시간(remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU) + TXOP_DURATION (PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter)에 의해 지시된 duration" 가 STA의 현재 basic NAV(current basic NAV)보다 큼- "The remaining time duration until the expected end of PPDU + the duration indicated by TXOP_DURATION (RXVECTOR parameter of PPDU)" is greater than the current basic NAV of the STA.

한편, 추가 조건으로, STA가 OBSS PPDU가 종료되기 이전에 basic NAV(Early NAV)를 업데이트/설정하는 동작은, STA가 NPCA 동작을 수행할 때로 제한될 수 있다. 이 때, STA가 NPCA 동작을 수행한다는 의미는, STA가 포함된 BSS의 NPCA 동작 mode가 활성화되었고, STA의 NPCA 동작 mode 역시 활성화된 것을 의미할 수 있다. 즉, AP 및 STA 모두 NPCA의 enable을 의미하는 indication을 수행한 상태를 의미한다. Meanwhile, as an additional condition, the operation of STA updating/setting basic NAV (Early NAV) before OBSS PPDU ends may be limited to when STA performs NPCA operation. In this case, the meaning of STA performing NPCA operation may mean that the NPCA operation mode of BSS including STA is activated and the NPCA operation mode of STA is also activated. In other words, it means that both AP and STA have performed indication meaning NPCA enable.

Early NAV 업데이트/설정을 위해 만족되어야 하는 또 다른 추가조건은, OBSS PPDU의 RXVECTOR parameter BSS_COLOR를 통해 지시된 값이, AP가 사전에 지시한 OBSS color List에 포함된 값 중 하나이어야 한다는 것일 수 있다. 즉, STA는, AP가 사전에 지시한 OBSS color List에 의해 식별되는 OBSS의 PPDU가 수신되었을 때에만 Early NAV 설정을 수행하는 것이 가능할 수 있다. 이는, AP가 사전에 지시한 OBSS color List에 의해 식별되지 않는 OBSS의 PPDU는, A20 동작으로의 전환을 유발하는 OBSS PPDU가 아니기 때문일 수 있다. 즉, STA는 자신이 수신한 OBSS PPDU가, AP가 사전에 지시한 NPCA 동작 대상 OBSS의 PPDU임이 확인될 때에만 Early NAV 업데이트/설정을 수행한 후 NPCA 동작(A20 동작으로의 전환)을 수행할 수 있다.Another additional condition to be satisfied for Early NAV update/setting may be that the value indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter BSS_COLOR of the OBSS PPDU must be one of the values included in the OBSS color List indicated in advance by the AP. That is, the STA may be able to perform Early NAV setting only when a PPDU of an OBSS identified by the OBSS color List indicated in advance by the AP is received. This may be because a PPDU of an OBSS not identified by the OBSS color List indicated in advance by the AP is not an OBSS PPDU that causes a transition to A20 operation. That is, the STA can perform Early NAV update/setting and then perform NPCA operation (transition to A20 operation) only when it is confirmed that the OBSS PPDU received by the STA is a PPDU of an OBSS that is a target of NPCA operation indicated in advance by the AP.

전술한 방법에 따라, OBSS PPDU가 종료되기 이전에 Early NAV를 업데이트/설정한 STA는, Early NAV(Basic NAV)의 값이 AP가 지시한 NPCA Threshold(A20 동작으로의 전환이 허용되는 최소 Basic NAV 시간 길이)보다 큰지(혹은 크거나 같은지) 여부를 기초로 A20 동작으로의 전환 여부를 결정하는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, Early NAV의 값이 Threshold보다 크다는 것의 의미는, Early NAV의 만료까지 걸리는 시간이, Threshold로 지시된 시간 길이보다 길다는 것을 의미한다. 이 때, 상기 Threshold를 이용해 A20 동작으로의 전환여부를 결정하는 구체적인 방법은 전술한 실시예들(잔여 OBSS TXOP의 길이와 Threshold를 비교하여 A20 동작으로의 전환여부를 결정하는 실시예들)을 통해 자세히 설명되었기 때문에 생략하도록 한다. According to the above-described method, an STA that has updated/set an Early NAV before the OBSS PPDU ends can determine whether to transition to the A20 operation based on whether the value of the Early NAV (Basic NAV) is greater than (or greater than or equal to) the NPCA Threshold (the minimum Basic NAV time length that allows transition to the A20 operation) indicated by the AP. At this time, the value of the Early NAV being greater than the Threshold means that the time taken until the expiration of the Early NAV is longer than the time length indicated by the Threshold. At this time, a specific method of determining whether to transition to the A20 operation using the Threshold is omitted because it has been described in detail through the above-described embodiments (embodiments that compare the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP with the Threshold to determine whether to transition to the A20 operation).

A20 동작을 수행하던 STA들은, AP로부터 지시된 정보에 기초하여, 자신이 P20 동작을 수행할 때 활용하는 Basic NAV(Early NAV)를 업데이트/설정하는 것이 가능하다. 구체적으로, STA들은, A20에서 자신의 AP가 전송한 프레임을 수신한 후, P20 동작을 수행할 때 활용하는 Basic NAV(상술한 예에서, OBSS PPDU를 수신한 후 설정한 Basic(Early) NAV)를 업데이트/설정할 수 있다. 이는, 전술한 본 발명의 예에서, AP가 자신이 확인한 OBSS TXOP의 잔여 시간을 지시하고, 이를 기초로 non-AP STA들이 A20 동작을 수행하는 것과 관련한 동작이다. 이 때, non-AP STA들은, AP가 지시한 정보를 기초로 자신의 Basic NAV를 설정/업데이트 함으로써, AP가 A20 동작 상태를 유지하는 시간 구간에 맞춰 자신의 A20 동작 상태 유지 구간을 조정할 수 있다. 다만, non-AP STA들은 자신이 유지하고 있던 Basic NAV의 값이, AP로부터 지시된 정보를 기초로 업데이트 할 Basic NAV의 값보다 큰 경우, 자신이 유지하고 있던 Basic NAV 값을 업데이트/설정/수정하지 않아야 할 수 있다. 즉, non-AP STA는, AP로부터 지시된 정보가, 자신의 Basic NAV의 값을 증가시키는 것일 때에만 자신의 Basic NAV를 업데이트해야 할 수 있다.STAs performing the A20 operation can update/set the Basic NAV (Early NAV) they utilize when performing the P20 operation based on the information instructed from the AP. Specifically, the STAs can update/set the Basic NAV (Basic (Early) NAV set after receiving the OBSS PPDU in the above-described example) they utilize when performing the P20 operation after receiving the frame transmitted by their AP in A20. This is an operation related to the AP instructing the remaining time of the OBSS TXOP it has confirmed and the non-AP STAs performing the A20 operation based on this in the above-described example of the present invention. At this time, the non-AP STAs can adjust their A20 operation state maintenance interval to match the time interval during which the AP maintains the A20 operation state by setting/updating their Basic NAV based on the information instructed by the AP. However, non-AP STAs may not update/set/modify their own Basic NAV values if the value of their own Basic NAV is greater than the value of Basic NAV to be updated based on the information indicated from the AP. In other words, non-AP STAs may need to update their own Basic NAV only when the information indicated from the AP increases the value of their own Basic NAV.

UHR STA의 PHY는, MAC으로 하여금 OBSS PPDU의 예상 종료 시점을 계산하도록 돕기 위한 정보를 RXVECTOR parameter에 포함하여 지시하거나, OBSS PPDU의 계산된 예상 종료 시점을 RXVECTOR parameter로 지시하는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, 상기 지시되는 정보는, PPDU의 L-SIG 필드를 통해 획득되는 정보(예를 들어, Length 필드 혹은 Rate 필드의 정보) 혹은 L-SIG 필드에 포함된 정보를 기초로 계산된 PPDU의 길이(예를 들어 종래 Wi-Fi 표준의 RXVECTOR parameter L_LENGTH 혹은 새로운 PPDU 길이 관련 RXVECTOR parameter) 정보 인 것이 가능하다. 또한, 상기 지시되는 정보는 PHY-RXSTART.indication의 RXVECTOR parameter와 함께 지시되는 것이거나, PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)가 지시될 때 함께 지시되는 RXVECTOR parameter일 수 있다. 이 때, PHY가 L-SIG 필드에 포함된 정보를 기초로 PPDU의 예상 종료시점을 계산하는 방법은 'PPDU의 L-SIG에 포함된 Length 필드가 지시하는 길이 - (RL-SIG(4 us)) - (U-SIG(8 us) 혹은 HE-SIG-A (8 us or 16 us)) - (EHT/UHR-SIG 길이(variable us) 혹은 HE-SIG-B 길이)) 일 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 수식에 포함된 인자들 중 일부는 계산 과정에서 생략되는 것이 가능하다. UHR STA의 MAC은 PHY로부터 지시된 정보에 기초하여 OBSS PPDU의 예상 종료시점을 인지할 수 있고, 함께 지시된 TXOP_DURATION 값과 해당 정보를 함께 이용하여 Early NAV를 설정하는 것이 가능하다. 즉, STA는 OBSS PPDU의 L-SIG 필드로부터 확인된 PPDU 길이 정보(Length 및 Rate 필드를 기초로 계산된 값)과, 자신이 PPDU의 길이 정보를 확인하기 위해 이미 소요된 시간(예를 들어, RL-SIG(4 us), U-SIG(혹은 HE-SIG-A) (8 us) EHT/UHR-SIG(혹은 HE-SIG-B) 등)을 함께 고려하여, 자신이 PPDU의 길이를 인지한 시점으로부터 남아있는 잔여 PPDU 길이를 Early NAV 설정에 활용해야 할 수 있다. 즉, Early NAV 설정/업데이트 값은 OBSS PPDU의 길이를 인지한 시점으로부터 남아있는 OBSS PPDU의 길이 및 OBSS PPDU에 포함된 TXOP 필드를 통해 지시된 OBSS PPDU이후 남아있는 OBSS TXOP 길이일 수 있다.The PHY of the UHR STA can include information in the RXVECTOR parameter to help the MAC calculate the expected end time of the OBSS PPDU, or can indicate the calculated expected end time of the OBSS PPDU with the RXVECTOR parameter. At this time, the indicated information can be information obtained through the L-SIG field of the PPDU (e.g., information of the Length field or the Rate field) or information on the length of the PPDU calculated based on the information included in the L-SIG field (e.g., the RXVECTOR parameter L_LENGTH of the conventional Wi-Fi standard or a new PPDU length-related RXVECTOR parameter). In addition, the indicated information can be indicated together with the RXVECTOR parameter of PHY-RXSTART.indication, or can be the RXVECTOR parameter indicated together when PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) is indicated. At this time, the method for PHY to calculate the expected end time of the PPDU based on the information included in the L-SIG field may be 'the length indicated by the Length field included in the L-SIG of the PPDU - (RL-SIG (4 us)) - (U-SIG (8 us) or HE-SIG-A (8 us or 16 us)) - (EHT/UHR-SIG length (variable us) or HE-SIG-B length)). At this time, some of the factors included in the above formula may be omitted during the calculation process. The MAC of the UHR STA can recognize the expected end time of the OBSS PPDU based on the information indicated from the PHY, and can set Early NAV by using the information together with the indicated TXOP_DURATION value. That is, the STA may need to utilize the remaining PPDU length from the time at which it recognized the length of the PPDU for Early NAV setting, considering the PPDU length information (a value calculated based on the Length and Rate fields) determined from the L-SIG field of the OBSS PPDU and the time already taken by the STA to determine the length information of the PPDU (e.g., RL-SIG (4 us), U-SIG (or HE-SIG-A) (8 us), EHT/UHR-SIG (or HE-SIG-B) etc.). That is, the Early NAV setting/update value may be the remaining OBSS PPDU length from the time at which it recognized the length of the OBSS PPDU and the OBSS TXOP length remaining after the OBSS PPDU indicated by the TXOP field included in the OBSS PPDU.

또한, HE/EHT/UHR PPDU를 전송하는 UHR STA는, NPCA 동작을 수행하는 다른 STA들의 정확한 Early NAV 설정을 돕기 위한 목적으로, 자신이 전송하는 PPDU의 Preamble에 포함된 TXOP 필드를, 자신이 획득한 TXOP의 종료 시점을 지시하는 값으로 설정해야 할 수 있다. 즉, UHR STA는 TXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION을 자신의 TXOP의 종료시점을 지시하는 값으로 설정해야 할 수 있다. 또한, UHR STA는 TXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION을 UNSPECIFIED로 설정하는 것이 제한될 수 있다.In addition, a UHR STA transmitting a HE/EHT/UHR PPDU may set the TXOP field included in the Preamble of the PPDU it transmits to a value indicating the end time of its TXOP, for the purpose of helping other STAs performing NPCA operation to set accurate Early NAV. That is, the UHR STA may set the TXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION to a value indicating the end time of its TXOP. In addition, the UHR STA may be restricted from setting the TXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION to UNSPECIFIED.

도 36은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 STA이 OBSS PPDU를 수신한 경우 NAV 설정 방법 및 서브 채널을 이용하는 방법의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 36 illustrates an example of a method for setting up NAV and a method for using a subchannel when an STA receives an OBSS PPDU according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 36은 본 발명의 일 실시예에 따라, STA가 OBSS PPDU가 종료되기 이전에 Early NAV를 설정한 후, A20 서브채널을 이용한 동작으로 전환하는 동작을 도시한다.FIG. 36 illustrates an operation in which an STA sets an Early NAV before an OBSS PPDU ends and then switches to an operation using an A20 subchannel according to one embodiment of the present invention.

도 36을 참조하면, STA의 PHY는 Long OBSS PPDU를 검출한 후, PPDU의 Preamble에서 획득된 정보를 기초로 PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive를 발행한다. 이 때, STA의 PHY는 OBSS PPDU의 Preamble에 포함된 BSS Color가, STA가 포함된 BSS의 Color와 일치하지 않음을 확인하고, PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive에 이어 PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) primitive를 발행한다. STA의 MAC은 PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive에 포함된 RXVECTOR parameter BSS_COLOR가 자신이 소속된 BSS의 BSS color와 일치하지 않음을 확인함으로써, OBSS PPDU를 PHY가 검출/수신했음을 확인할 수 있다. STA의 MAC은 PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered)가 PHY로부터 수신되면, Early NAV(Basic NAV)를 업데이트/설정한다. STA는 RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION으로 지시된 시간과 RXVECTOR parameter REMAINING_PPDU_DURATION으로 지시된 시간을 합한 값으로 Early NAV를 설정한다. RXVECTOR parameter REMAINING_PPDU_DURATION는 PHY가 검출/수신 중인 PPDU의 예상 종료 시점까지의 예상 시간(혹은 예상 시간을 계산하는데 필요한 기초 정보)이며, 상기 두 개의 Primitive 중 하나에 포함되어 PHY로부터 MAC으로 지시/전달될 수 있다. 도 36의 예에서, STA의 MAC은 설정된 Early NAV의 값과 NPCA Threshold를 비교한 후, A20 subchannel을 이용한 동작으로의 전환을 결정한다. Referring to FIG. 36, the PHY of the STA detects a Long OBSS PPDU and then issues a PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive based on information acquired from the Preamble of the PPDU. At this time, the PHY of the STA verifies that the BSS Color included in the Preamble of the OBSS PPDU does not match the Color of the BSS that the STA is included in, and issues a PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) primitive following the PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive. The MAC of the STA can confirm that the PHY has detected/received the OBSS PPDU by verifying that the RXVECTOR parameter BSS_COLOR included in the PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive does not match the BSS color of the BSS to which it belongs. When the MAC of the STA receives PHY-RXEND.indication(Filtered) from the PHY, it updates/sets the Early NAV (Basic NAV). The STA sets Early NAV to the sum of the time indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter TXOP_DURATION and the time indicated by the RXVECTOR parameter REMAINING_PPDU_DURATION. The RXVECTOR parameter REMAINING_PPDU_DURATION is the expected time (or basic information required to calculate the expected time) until the expected end time of the PPDU that the PHY is detecting/receiving, and can be included in one of the two primitives above and indicated/transmitted from the PHY to the MAC. In the example of Fig. 36, the MAC of the STA compares the value of the set Early NAV with the NPCA Threshold and then decides to switch to the operation using the A20 subchannel.

<NPCA 동작을 위한 primitive><primitive for NPCA operation>

NPCA 동작을 수행하는 STA는 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널(P20)을 이용한 동작 상태에서 A20 (NPCA primary channel) 서브채널을 이용한 동작 상태로 전환하고, A20 서브채널을 이용한 동작 상태를 종료한 후 P20을 이용한 동작 상태로 되돌아오는 등의 동작을 수행한다. P20 동작에서 A20 동작으로 전환하는 결정 및 A20 동작에서 P20 동작으로 전환하는 결정은 모두 STA의 MAC의 판단에 따라 수행되며, STA의 MAC이 전환을 결정했을 때, 이를 STA의 PHY에게 지시함으로써 동작 채널의 변경이 진행되어야 한다. An STA performing an NPCA operation switches from an operation state using a primary 20 MHz subchannel (P20) to an operation state using an A20 (NPCA primary channel) subchannel, terminates the operation state using the A20 subchannel, and returns to the operation state using the P20. The decision to switch from the P20 operation to the A20 operation and the decision to switch from the A20 operation to the P20 operation are both performed according to the judgment of the STA's MAC, and when the STA's MAC decides to switch, the change of the operation channel must be performed by instructing the STA's PHY to do so.

A20 채널을 이용한 동작 상태로의 전환을 결정한 STA의 MAC은, PHY로 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive를 발행할 수 있다. 이 때, MAC에서 PHY로 발행되는 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request는 A20 동작에 사용할 채널의 정보(operating channel 및 A20 동작 기본 채널 정보)를 지시하는 parameter들(예를 들어 NPCA_PRIMARY_CHANNEL, NPCA_CHANNEL_WIDTH, NPCA_CENTER_FREQUENCY)을 포함할 수 있다. 즉, STA의 MAC이 발생하는 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR)는 A20 동작을 수행할 때 사용하는 기본 채널(A20 subchannnel, NPCA primary channel)을 식별할 수 있는 정보 및 A20 동작을 수행할 때 사용하는 동작 채널 (Operating channel)을 식별할 수 있는 정보를 포함할 수 있다. 이 때, 상기 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive는 종래 Wi-Fi에서 사용하던 PHY-CONFIG.request primitive와 동일한 primitive일 수도 있다. 즉, NPCA 동작과 관련하여 동작 채널을 변경(P20에서 A20 혹은 A20에서 P20으로 변경)하는 STA의 MAC은 PHY-CONFIG.request primitive를 발행하여 PHY의 동작 채널 변경을 개시할 수 있다. The MAC of the STA that has decided to switch to the operating state using the A20 channel can issue a PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive to the PHY. At this time, the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request issued from the MAC to the PHY can include parameters (e.g., NPCA_PRIMARY_CHANNEL, NPCA_CHANNEL_WIDTH, NPCA_CENTER_FREQUENCY) that indicate information on the channel to be used for the A20 operation (operating channel and A20 operation primary channel information). That is, the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) issued by the MAC of the STA can include information that can identify the primary channel (A20 subchannel, NPCA primary channel) used when performing the A20 operation and information that can identify the operating channel (Operating channel) used when performing the A20 operation. At this time, the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive may be the same primitive as the PHY-CONFIG.request primitive used in conventional Wi-Fi. That is, the MAC of the STA that changes the operating channel (from P20 to A20 or from A20 to P20) in relation to the NPCA operation can initiate the change of the operating channel of the PHY by issuing the PHY-CONFIG.request primitive.

PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive를 수신한 STA의 PHY는 기본 동작 채널을 P20(프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널)에서 A20 서브채널로 전환하는 일련의 절차를 개시한다. PHY가 상기 절차를 수행하는 방법은 장치의 구현 방식에 따라 다를 수 있으므로 상세한 설명은 생략한다. 다만, PHY가 수행하는 switching 절차는 STA가 AP에게 지시한 NPCA switching delay 이내에 완료되어야 한다. Upon receiving the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive, the PHY of the STA initiates a series of procedures to switch the basic operating channel from P20 (primary 20 MHz subchannel) to A20 subchannel. The method by which the PHY performs the above procedures may vary depending on the implementation of the device, and therefore a detailed description thereof is omitted. However, the switching procedure performed by the PHY must be completed within the NPCA switching delay that the STA instructed to the AP.

STA MAC으로부터 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive를 수신한 STA PHY는, 해당 primitive의 PHYCONFIG_VECTOR parameter의 정보를 기초로 A20 서브채널로의 전환을 수행하고, 전환 동작이 완료되었을 때 PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive를 발행한다. PHY로부터 PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive가 수신되면, STA MAC은 STA PHY의 동작 채널이 A20 subchannel을 기초로 한 동작으로 전환되었음을 인지할 수 있다.Upon receiving the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive from the STA MAC, the STA PHY performs a switch to the A20 subchannel based on the information in the PHYCONFIG_VECTOR parameter of the primitive, and issues a PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive when the switch operation is completed. Upon receiving the PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive from the PHY, the STA MAC can recognize that the operating channel of the STA PHY has been switched to an operation based on the A20 subchannel.

A20채널을 이용한 동작 상태로의 전환을 결정한 STA의 MAC은, PHY로 PHY-CCARESET.request primitive를 발행할 수 있다. 이 경우, STA의 PHY는, A20 동작 상태로 전환한 후, PHY-CCA.indication(BUSY)가 발생하기 전까지 A20의 channel 상태를 IDLE로 평가하는 것이 가능하다. 이 때, STA MAC이 PHY-CCARESET.request primitive를 발행하는 시점은, 자신이 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive를 발행할 때 (직전 혹은 직후) 혹은 PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive가 PHY로부터 수신된 후 일 수 있다. 이 때, STA MAC은, AP로부터 A20에서의 EDCA를 이용한 채널 접근이 허용된 것으로 지시된 경우(untriggered UL 전송이 허용된 경우)에 한해 PHY-CCARESET.request primitive를 발행한다.The MAC of the STA that has decided to transition to the operation state using the A20 channel can issue a PHY-CCARESET.request primitive to the PHY. In this case, the PHY of the STA can evaluate the channel state of A20 as IDLE until PHY-CCA.indication(BUSY) occurs after transitioning to the A20 operation state. At this time, the time point at which the STA MAC issues the PHY-CCARESET.request primitive can be (immediately before or immediately after) when it issues the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive or after the PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive is received from the PHY. At this time, the STA MAC issues the PHY-CCARESET.request primitive only when the AP indicates that channel access using EDCA on A20 is allowed (when untriggered UL transmission is allowed).

또한, STA의 MAC은, A20 동작을 종료하고 P20 동작으로 전환하는 결정을 수행하며, 해당 결정은 P20에서 설정된 Basic(Early) NAV가 만료되기 이전에 수행된다. 구체적인 수행 시점은, P20에서 설정된 Basic(Early) NAV 값에 해당하는 시간이, 자신의 NPCA Switching back delay(A20 동작에서 P20 동작으로 전환하는데 소요되는 delay)보다 길거나 같을 때에 수행되는 것일 수 있다. 즉, STA는 P20에서 설정된 Basic(Early) NAV가 만료되기 이전에 P20으로의 전환이 완료되도록 P20 전환을 수행해야 한다. In addition, the MAC of the STA performs a decision to terminate the A20 operation and switch to the P20 operation, and the decision is performed before the Basic (Early) NAV set in the P20 expires. A specific timing for performing the decision may be when the time corresponding to the Basic (Early) NAV value set in the P20 is longer than or equal to its NPCA Switching back delay (delay required to switch from the A20 operation to the P20 operation). In other words, the STA must perform the P20 transition so that the transition to the P20 is completed before the Basic (Early) NAV set in the P20 expires.

혹은, STA의 MAC은, AP로부터 명시적인 지시가 수신되었을 때, A20 동작을 종료하고 P20 동작으로 전환하는 결정을 수행해야 할 수 있다. 즉, AP로부터 P20 동작으로의 전환을 지시받은 non-AP STA는, 자신의 Basic NAV 값에 관계없이 P20 동작으로의 전환을 결정해야 할 수 있다. Alternatively, the MAC of the STA may have to make a decision to terminate A20 operation and transition to P20 operation when an explicit instruction is received from the AP. That is, a non-AP STA that has been instructed by the AP to transition to P20 operation may have to decide to transition to P20 operation regardless of its Basic NAV value.

A20 채널을 이용한 동작 상태를 종료하고 P20 채널을 이용한 동작 상태로 전환(switch back)을 결정한 STA의 MAC은, PHY로 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive를 발행할 수 있다. 이 때, MAC에서 PHY로 발행되는 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request는 operating channel 및 primary channel을 지시하는 parameter들을 포함할 수 있다. NPCASWITCHBACK.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive는 상술한 NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive와 동일한 구성을 갖을 수 있다. 즉, STA는 P20에서 A20으로의 전환을 결정했을 때와, A20에서 P20으로의 전환을 결정했을 때 동일한 primitive를 발행하는 것도 가능하다. The MAC of the STA that decides to end the operation state using the A20 channel and switch back to the operation state using the P20 channel can issue the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive to the PHY. At this time, the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request issued from the MAC to the PHY can include parameters indicating the operating channel and the primary channel. The NPCASWITCHBACK.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive can have the same configuration as the NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive described above. That is, the STA can issue the same primitive when it decides to switch from P20 to A20 and when it decides to switch from A20 to P20.

혹은, STA의 MAC이 PHY에게 P20 동작으로의 전환을 지시 위해 발생하는 primary는 PHYCONFIG_VECTOR parameter를 포함하지 않는 구성을 갖는 것이 가능하다. 이는, P20 동작이 STA의 기본 동작이며, 따라서 P20 동작을 위한 각종 parameter들이 STA의 PHY에 이미 인지되어 있는 상태(저장된 상태)이기 때문이다. 따라서, STA의 MAC은 P20 동작으로의 전환을 결정했을 때 별도의 parameter를 포함하지 않는 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive를 발행할 수 있고, 이를 수신한 PHY는 이미 인지하고 있는 각종 파라미터를 활용해 P20 동작으로 전환할 수 있다.Alternatively, it is possible for the STA's MAC to have a configuration that does not include the primary PHYCONFIG_VECTOR parameter to instruct the PHY to switch to P20 operation. This is because the P20 operation is the basic operation of the STA, and therefore, various parameters for the P20 operation are already recognized (stored) in the STA's PHY. Accordingly, when the STA's MAC decides to switch to P20 operation, it can issue a PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive that does not include a separate parameter, and the PHY that receives it can switch to P20 operation by utilizing various parameters that it already recognizes.

PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive를 수신한 STA의 PHY는 기본 동작 채널을 A20에서 P20으로 전환하는 일련의 절차를 개시한다. PHY가 상기 절차를 수행하는 방법은 장치의 구현 방식에 따라 다를 수 있으므로 상세한 설명은 생략한다. 다만, PHY가 수행하는 switching 절차는 STA가 AP에게 지시한 NPCA switching back delay 이내에 완료되어야 한다. The PHY of the STA that receives the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive initiates a series of procedures to switch the default operating channel from A20 to P20. The method by which the PHY performs the above procedures may vary depending on the implementation of the device, so a detailed description is omitted. However, the switching procedure performed by the PHY must be completed within the NPCA switching back delay that the STA instructed to the AP.

P20 서브채널로의 전환을 완료한 STA의 PHY는, 전환 동작이 완료되었을 때 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive를 발행한다. PHY로부터 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive가 수신되면, STA MAC은 STA PHY의 동작 채널이 P20 subchannel을 기초로 한 동작으로 전환(복구)되었음을 인지할 수 있다.The PHY of an STA that has completed switching to the P20 subchannel issues a PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive when the switching operation is complete. When the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive is received from the PHY, the STA MAC can recognize that the operating channel of the STA PHY has been switched (restored) to operation based on the P20 subchannel.

PHY로부터 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive를 수신함으로써 P20채널을 이용한 동작 상태로의 전환이 완료되었음을 확인한 STA의 MAC은, 자신의 Basic NAV가 만료(0에 도달)하였을 때 PHY-CCARESET.request primitive를 발행한다.The STA's MAC, which confirms that the transition to an operational state using the P20 channel is complete by receiving a PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive from the PHY, issues a PHY-CCARESET.request primitive when its Basic NAV expires (reaches 0).

도 37은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 STA의 넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 채널 접속을 위한 primitive 교환 절차의 일 예를 나타낸다.FIG. 37 illustrates an example of a primitive exchange procedure for channel access in a non-primary channel of an STA according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 37을 참조하면, STA의 PHY는 OBSS의 Preamble을 검출한 후 PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive를 발행한다. 도 37의 예는 PHY가 검출한 PPDU가 HE/EHT/UHR PPDU format의 OBSS PPDU인 것을 가정하여, PHY-RXEND.indication primitive가 함께 발생되는 것으로 도시되었다. PHY로부터 PHY-RXSTART.indication 및 PHY-RXEND.indication primitive들을 수신한 MAC은, 지시된 RXVECTOR parameter에 기초하여 Basic NAV(Early NAV)를 설정하고 A20 동작으로의 전환을 결정한다. A20 동작으로의 전환을 결정한 MAC은 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive를 발행한다. 이 때, PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive는 A20 동작을 위한 채널 정보(A20 subchannel의 위치 및 A20 동작을 수행할 때 사용할 operating channel 정보 등)를 포함하는 구성을 갖는다. MAC으로부터 PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive를 수신한 PHY는 P20동작에서 A20 동작으로의 전환을 수행하고, A20 동작으로의 전환이 완료되었을 때 PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive를 발행한다. PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive를 수신한 MAC은, PHY가 A20 동작을 위한 전환을 완료했음을 인지할 수 있다. 이 때, MAC은 PHY-CCARESET.request primitive를 발행하여 A20 subchannel에서의 EDCA 수행을 시도할 수 있다. STA의 MAC은 Basic NAV가 만료되기 이전에 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive를 발행하고, 이를 수신한 PHY는 A20 동작에서 P20 동작으로의 전환(복귀)를 시작한다. PHY가 수행하는 P20 동작으로의 전환(복귀)는 MAC이 관리하는 Basic NAV의 만료 이전에 완료된다. 이를 위해 MAC이 PHY-NPCASWTICHBACK.request primitive를 발행하는 시점이 관리된다. P20 동작으로의 전환을 완료한 PHY는 PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive를 발행하고, 이를 수신한 MAC은 PHY가 P20 동작을 위한 전환(복귀)를 완료했음을 인지한다. MAC은 자신이 관리하던 Basic NAV가 만료될 때 PHY-CCARESET.request primitive를 발행함으로써 프라이머리 20 MHz 서브채널에서의 CCA 절차 (EDCA 동작을 위함) 개시한다.Referring to FIG. 37, the PHY of the STA detects the Preamble of the OBSS and then issues the PHY-RXSTART.indication primitive. The example of FIG. 37 assumes that the PPDU detected by the PHY is an OBSS PPDU in HE/EHT/UHR PPDU format, and thus the PHY-RXEND.indication primitive is generated together. The MAC that receives the PHY-RXSTART.indication and PHY-RXEND.indication primitives from the PHY sets the Basic NAV (Early NAV) based on the indicated RXVECTOR parameter and decides to switch to the A20 operation. The MAC that decides to switch to the A20 operation issues the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive. At this time, the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request(PHYCONFIG_VECTOR) primitive has a configuration including channel information for A20 operation (such as the location of the A20 subchannel and operating channel information to be used when performing the A20 operation). The PHY that receives the PHY-NPCASWITCH.request primitive from the MAC performs a transition from the P20 operation to the A20 operation, and issues a PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive when the transition to the A20 operation is completed. The MAC that receives the PHY-NPCASWITCH.confirm primitive can recognize that the PHY has completed the transition for the A20 operation. At this time, the MAC can attempt to perform EDCA on the A20 subchannel by issuing a PHY-CCARESET.request primitive. The MAC of the STA issues the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive before the Basic NAV expires, and the PHY receiving it initiates the transition (return) from the A20 operation to the P20 operation. The transition (return) to the P20 operation performed by the PHY is completed before the expiration of the Basic NAV managed by the MAC. For this, the timing when the MAC issues the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.request primitive is managed. The PHY that has completed the transition to the P20 operation issues the PHY-NPCASWITCHBACK.confirm primitive, and the MAC receiving it recognizes that the PHY has completed the transition (return) to the P20 operation. The MAC initiates the CCA procedure (for the EDCA operation) on the primary 20 MHz subchannel by issuing the PHY-CCARESET.request primitive when the Basic NAV it was managing expires.

도 38은 본 발명의 일 실시 예에 따른 단말에 의해서 수행되는 채널 접속 절차의 일 예를 나타내는 순서도이다.FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing an example of a channel access procedure performed by a terminal according to an embodiment of the present invention.

도 38은 STA은 프라이머리 채널에서 OBSS AP로부터 전송된 PPDU가 수신되면, 특정 조건을 만족하는지 여부에 기초하여 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위칭하고, 스위칭된 넌 프라이머리 채널에서 채널 접속 절차를 수행할 수 있다.FIG. 38 shows that when an STA receives a PPDU transmitted from an OBSS AP on a primary channel, it can switch the channel from the primary channel to a non-primary channel based on whether a specific condition is satisfied, and perform a channel access procedure on the switched non-primary channel.

구체적으로, 무선 통신 단말(non-AP STA)과 연관(association)되어 있지 않은 OBSS(Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP(Access Point)로부터 상기 무선 통신 단말이 동작하는 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)에서 PPDU(Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit)을 수신할 수 있다(S38010). 수신된 PPDU의 프리앰블은 OBSS AP에 의해서 설정된 전송 기회(transmission opportunity: TXOP) 구간(duration)과 관련된 TXOP 필드 및 듀레이션 필드(Duration field)를 포함할 수 있다.Specifically, a Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit (PPDU) can be received from an Overlapping Basic Service Set (OBSS) Access Point (AP) that is not associated with a wireless communication terminal (non-AP STA) on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates (S38010). A preamble of the received PPDU can include a transmission opportunity (TXOP) field and a duration field related to a duration period set by the OBSS AP.

이후, non-AP STA은 특정 조건이 만족되면 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널(non-primary channel)로 채널을 스위칭하여 채널 접속을 수행할 수 있다(S38020). 특정 조건은 상기 TXOP 필드 또는 상기 듀레이션 필드에 의해서 지시된 값에 기초하여 획득된 특정 값이 최소 듀레이션 임계 값(minimum duration threshold value)보다 큰지 여부이다.Thereafter, the non-AP STA may perform channel access by switching the channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to the non-primary channel if a specific condition is satisfied (S38020). The specific condition is whether a specific value obtained based on the value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field is greater than the minimum duration threshold value.

이때, 주 채널의 상태는 OBSS AP에 의해서 전송된 PPDU에 의해 OBSS AP에 점유되어 비지(Busy) 상태이며, 최소 듀레이션 임계 값은 상기 무선 통신 단말이 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위칭하여 상기 채널 접속을 수행하기 위한 최소 값이다.At this time, the state of the primary channel is busy because it is occupied by the OBSS AP by the PPDU transmitted by the OBSS AP, and the minimum duration threshold is the minimum value for the wireless communication terminal to perform the channel access by switching the channel to the non-primary channel.

무선 통신 단말은 연관된 AP로부터 관리 프레임(management frame)을 수신할 수 있으며, 관리 프레임은 상기 주 채널을 점유할 수 있는 AP들의 리스트 정보를 포함한다. 이때, 리스트 정보는 상기 AP들 각각의 BSS color 정보 및/또는 MAC 주소를 포함할 수 있다.A wireless communication terminal can receive a management frame from an associated AP, and the management frame includes list information of APs that can occupy the primary channel. At this time, the list information can include BSS color information and/or MAC address of each of the APs.

넌 프라이머리 채널에서의 상기 채널 접속은 상기 AP들 중 하나의 AP에 의해서 상기 주 채널이 점유된 경우 수행될 수 있다.The above channel access on the non-primary channel can be performed when the primary channel is occupied by one of the APs.

무선 통신 단말은 OBSS AP의 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소와 상기 리스트 정보에 포함된 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소를 비교할 수 있다.A wireless communication terminal can compare the BSS color information or MAC address of the OBSS AP with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the above list information.

특정 값은 상기 TXOP 필드 또는 듀레이션 필드에 의해서 지시된 값에 프라이머리 채널에서 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 채널을 스위칭하기 위한 스위칭 딜레이를 더한 값에 기초하여 획득될 수 있다.A specific value can be obtained based on a value indicated by the TXOP field or the duration field plus a switching delay for switching a channel from a primary channel to the non-primary channel.

전술한 본 발명의 설명은 예시를 위한 것이며, 본 발명이 속하는 기술분야의 통상의 지식을 가진 자는 본 발명의 기술적 사상이나 필수적인 특징을 변경하지 않고서 다른 구체적인 형태로 쉽게 변형이 가능하다는 것을 이해할 수 있을 것이다. 그러므로 이상에서 기술한 실시예들은 모든 면에서 예시적인 것이며 한정적이 아닌 것으로 이해해야만 한다. 예를 들어, 단일형으로 설명되어 있는 각 구성 요소는 분산되어 실시될 수도 있으며, 마찬가지로 분산된 것으로 설명되어 있는 구성 요소들도 결합된 형태로 실시될 수 있다.The above description of the present invention is for illustrative purposes, and those skilled in the art will understand that the present invention can be easily modified into other specific forms without changing the technical idea or essential characteristics of the present invention. Therefore, it should be understood that the embodiments described above are exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. For example, each component described as a single component may be implemented in a distributed manner, and likewise, components described as distributed may be implemented in a combined form.

본 발명의 범위는 상기 상세한 설명보다는 후술하는 특허청구범위에 의하여 나타내어지며, 특허청구범위의 의미 및 범위 그리고 그 균등 개념으로부터 도출되는 모든 변경 또는 변형된 형태가 본 발명의 범위에 포함되는 것으로 해석되어야 한다.The scope of the present invention is indicated by the claims described below rather than the detailed description above, and all changes or modifications derived from the meaning and scope of the claims and their equivalent concepts should be interpreted as being included in the scope of the present invention.

Claims (18)

무선 통신 단말로써,As a wireless communication terminal, 송수신부; 및Transmitter and receiver; and 프로세서를 포함하고,Contains a processor, 상기 프로세서는,The above processor, 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관(association)되어 있지 않은 OBSS(Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP(Access Point)로부터 상기 무선 통신 단말이 동작하는 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)에서 inter-BSS PPDU(Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit)의 프리앰블을 수신하고,Receive a preamble of an inter-BSS PPDU (Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit) on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates from an OBSS (Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP (Access Point) that is not associated with the wireless communication terminal, 상기 inter-BSS PPDU의 프리앰블은 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 설정된 전송 기회(transmission opportunity: TXOP) 구간(duration)과 관련된 TXOP 필드를 포함하고,The preamble of the above inter-BSS PPDU includes a TXOP field related to the transmission opportunity (TXOP) duration set by the OBSS AP, 특정 조건을 만족하는 경우, 상기 대역폭의 상기 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널(non-primary channel)로 채널을 스위칭하되,When a specific condition is satisfied, the channel is switched from the primary channel of the above bandwidth to a non-primary channel. 상기 특정 조건은 상기 TXOP 필드 또는 상기 듀레이션 필드에 기초하여 계산된 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 길이가 최소 듀레이션 임계 값(minimum duration threshold value)보다 큰지 여부인 무선 통신 단말.The above specific condition is a wireless communication terminal wherein the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP calculated based on the TXOP field or the duration field is greater than a minimum duration threshold value. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 프라이머리 채널의 상태는 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 비지(Busy)인 무선 통신 단말.A wireless communication terminal whose primary channel status is Busy by the OBSS AP. 제1 항에 있어서, In the first paragraph, 상기 최소 듀레이션 임계 값은 상기 무선 통신 단말이 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위치하기 위한 최소 값인 무선 통신 단말.The wireless communication terminal is a wireless communication terminal whose minimum duration threshold is the minimum value for switching a channel to the non-primary channel. 제1 항에 있어서, 상기 프로세서는,In the first paragraph, the processor, 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관되어 있는 AP로부터 관리 프레임(management frame)을 수신하되,Receive a management frame from an AP associated with the above wireless communication terminal, 상기 관리 프레임은 인접 AP들의 리스트 정보를 포함하는 무선 통신 단말.The above management frame is a wireless communication terminal including list information of neighboring APs. 제4 항에 있어서,In the fourth paragraph, 상기 리스트 정보는 상기 AP들 각각의 BSS color 정보 및/또는 MAC 주소를 포함하는 무선 통신 단말.The above list information is a wireless communication terminal including BSS color information and/or MAC address of each of the APs. 제4 항에 있어서,In the fourth paragraph, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 채널 스위치는 상기 AP들 중 하나의 AP에 의해서 상기 프라이머리 채널이 점유된 경우 수행되는 무선 통신 단말.A wireless communication terminal in which a channel switch to the above non-primary channel is performed when the primary channel is occupied by one of the above APs. 제4 항에 있어서, 상기 프로세서는,In the fourth paragraph, the processor, 상기 inter-BSS PPDU의 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소와 상기 리스트 정보에 포함된 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소를 비교하는 무선 통신 단말.A wireless communication terminal that compares the BSS color information or MAC address of the inter-BSS PPDU with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the list information. 제1 항에 있어서,In the first paragraph, 상기 특정 조건은 상기 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 상기 길이에 상기 무선 통신 단말의 채널 스위치 딜레이가 추가적으로 고려되어 만족하는지 여부가 결정되는 무선 통신 단말.A wireless communication terminal, wherein the above specific condition is determined by additionally considering the channel switch delay of the wireless communication terminal in addition to the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP. 제1 항에 있어서, 상기 프로세서는,In the first paragraph, the processor, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 상기 채널 스위치를 수행하기 위해 MAC layer에서 PHY layer로 프리미티브(primitive)를 전달하는 무선 통신 단말.A wireless communication terminal that transmits a primitive from the MAC layer to the PHY layer to perform the channel switch to the above non-primary channel. 무선 통신 단말에 의해서 수행되는 방법에 있어서, 상기 방법은,In a method performed by a wireless communication terminal, the method comprises: 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관(association)되어 있지 않은 OBSS(Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP(Access Point)로부터 상기 무선 통신 단말이 동작하는 대역폭의 프라이머리 채널(Primary channel)에서 inter-BSS PPDU(Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit)의 프리앰블을 수신하는 단계,A step of receiving a preamble of an inter-BSS PPDU (Physical Layer Protocol Data Unit) on a primary channel of a bandwidth in which the wireless communication terminal operates from an OBSS (Overlapping Basic Service Set) AP (Access Point) that is not associated with the wireless communication terminal; 상기 inter-BSS PPDU의 프리앰블은 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 설정된 전송 기회(transmission opportunity: TXOP) 구간(duration)과 관련된 TXOP 필드를 포함하고; 및The preamble of the inter-BSS PPDU includes a transmission opportunity (TXOP) field related to the duration set by the OBSS AP; and 특정 조건을 만족하는 경우, 상기 대역폭의 상기 프라이머리 채널에서 넌 프라이머리 채널(non-primary channel)로 채널을 스위칭하는 단계를 포함하되,Including a step of switching a channel from the primary channel of the bandwidth to a non-primary channel when a specific condition is satisfied, 상기 특정 조건은 상기 TXOP 필드 또는 상기 듀레이션 필드에 기초하여 계산된 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 길이가 최소 듀레이션 임계 값(minimum duration threshold value)보다 큰지 여부인 방법.The above specific condition is whether the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP calculated based on the TXOP field or the duration field is greater than a minimum duration threshold value. 제10 항에 있어서, In Article 10, 상기 프라이머리 채널의 상태는 상기 OBSS AP에 의해서 비지(Busy)인 방법.The state of the above primary channel is Busy by the above OBSS AP. 제10 항에 있어서, In Article 10, 상기 최소 듀레이션 임계 값은 상기 무선 통신 단말이 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로 채널을 스위치하기 위한 최소 값인 방법.The above minimum duration threshold is a method in which the wireless communication terminal switches a channel to the non-primary channel. 제10 항에 있어서, 상기 방법은,In the 10th paragraph, the method, 상기 무선 통신 단말과 연관되어 있는 AP로부터 관리 프레임(management frame)을 수신하는 단계를 더 포함하되,Further comprising a step of receiving a management frame from an AP associated with the above wireless communication terminal, 상기 관리 프레임은 인접 AP들의 리스트 정보를 포함하는 방법.A method in which the above management frame includes list information of neighboring APs. 제13 항에 있어서,In Article 13, 상기 리스트 정보는 상기 AP들 각각의 BSS color 정보 및/또는 MAC 주소를 포함하는 방법.A method wherein the above list information includes BSS color information and/or MAC address of each of the APs. 제13 항에 있어서,In Article 13, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 채널 스위치는 상기 AP들 중 하나의 AP에 의해서 상기 프라이머리 채널이 점유된 경우 수행되는 방법.A method in which a channel switch to the above non-primary channel is performed when the primary channel is occupied by one of the above APs. 제13 항에 있어서, 상기 방법은,In the 13th paragraph, the method, 상기 inter-BSS PPDU의 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소와 상기 리스트 정보에 포함된 BSS 컬러 정보 또는 MAC 주소를 비교하는 단계를 더 포함하는 방법.A method further comprising the step of comparing the BSS color information or MAC address of the inter-BSS PPDU with the BSS color information or MAC address included in the list information. 제10 항에 있어서,In Article 10, 상기 특정 조건은 상기 잔여 OBSS TXOP의 상기 길이에 상기 무선 통신 단말의 채널 스위치 딜레이가 추가적으로 고려되어 만족하는지 여부가 결정되는 방법.A method for determining whether the above specific condition is satisfied by additionally considering the channel switch delay of the wireless communication terminal in addition to the length of the remaining OBSS TXOP. 제10 항에 있어서, 상기 방법은,In the 10th paragraph, the method, 상기 넌 프라이머리 채널로의 상기 채널 스위치를 수행하기 위해 MAC layer에서 PHY layer로 프리미티브(primitive)를 전달하는 단계를 더 포함하는 방법.A method further comprising the step of transmitting a primitive from the MAC layer to the PHY layer to perform the channel switch to the non-primary channel.
PCT/KR2024/020369 2023-12-15 2024-12-16 Method for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal using same Pending WO2025127741A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (6)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
KR20230183400 2023-12-15
KR10-2023-0183400 2023-12-15
KR20240033209 2024-03-08
KR10-2024-0033209 2024-03-08
KR20240172681 2024-11-27
KR10-2024-0172681 2024-11-27

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025127741A1 true WO2025127741A1 (en) 2025-06-19

Family

ID=96058082

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/KR2024/020369 Pending WO2025127741A1 (en) 2023-12-15 2024-12-16 Method for transmitting and receiving data in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal using same

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025127741A1 (en)

Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20210410163A1 (en) * 2020-06-24 2021-12-30 Sony Corporation Coordinated stations in obss with shared txop in the frequency domain
US20230040899A1 (en) * 2019-03-04 2023-02-09 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. Method and apparatus for enhanced preamble punctured ppdu in a wireless network
US20230164700A1 (en) * 2020-02-27 2023-05-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Measurement for space reuse in multi-ap system
KR20230107815A (en) * 2020-11-25 2023-07-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Limited TWT in OBSS environment

Patent Citations (4)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
US20230040899A1 (en) * 2019-03-04 2023-02-09 Mediatek Singapore Pte. Ltd. Method and apparatus for enhanced preamble punctured ppdu in a wireless network
US20230164700A1 (en) * 2020-02-27 2023-05-25 Lg Electronics Inc. Measurement for space reuse in multi-ap system
US20210410163A1 (en) * 2020-06-24 2021-12-30 Sony Corporation Coordinated stations in obss with shared txop in the frequency domain
KR20230107815A (en) * 2020-11-25 2023-07-18 엘지전자 주식회사 Limited TWT in OBSS environment

Non-Patent Citations (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Title
WILUS INC, SHAWN SANGHYUN, KIM, KWAK JIN SAM, KO GREG GEONJUNG: "Follow-up on a non-AP STA initiated TXOP sharing", IEEE, 1 November 2023 (2023-11-01), XP093323953 *

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
WO2022075821A1 (en) Method and wireless communication terminal for transmitting/receiving frame in wireless communication system
WO2022164293A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multi-link, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022270896A1 (en) Wireless communication method using shared txop, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022250453A1 (en) Wireless communication apparatus using shared txop and operation method for wireless communication apparatus
WO2022050802A1 (en) Method and wireless communication terminal for transmitting/receiving data in wireless communication system
WO2022035291A1 (en) Method and wireless communication terminal for transmitting/receiving data in wireless communication system
WO2022173251A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multi-link, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2021187844A1 (en) Wireless communication terminal and method for transmitting or receiving data in wireless communication system
WO2020050528A1 (en) Method and device for applying optimized phase rotation in wlan environment including wireless devices having mutually different maximum transmittable rf bandwidths
WO2023055029A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multi-links, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022260486A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multi-link, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2017022898A1 (en) Method for transmitting data in wireless communication system and apparatus therefor
WO2016089059A1 (en) Data transmission method in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2016159513A1 (en) Method and apparatus for transmitting data in wireless communication system
WO2016186469A1 (en) Method for managing nav in wireless lan system and device for same
WO2016021838A1 (en) Method for transmitting frame in wireless communication system and device therefor
WO2016024750A1 (en) Method and device for downlink multi-user transmission in wireless communication system
WO2022149858A1 (en) Method for transmitting/receiving data in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal
WO2022114907A1 (en) Method for transmitting and receiving data through multi-link in wireless communication system, and wireless communication terminal
WO2022245140A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multi-link, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022055323A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multi-link, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022025629A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multiple links, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022169277A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multilink, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2022265479A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multilink, and wireless communication terminal using same
WO2023163574A1 (en) Wireless communication method using multilink, and wireless communication terminal using same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24904306

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1